DEPARTMENT OF
=5=
LIBRARY OF o
mm
ESIA
'sMfci
^nduiiiiai e^nivw6ity,
<
CHAMPAIQN, Books are Not
to
be Taken
ILLINOIS.
From
the Library
Room.
The person charging
this material is re-
sponsible for its return on or before the Latest Date stamped below. mutilation, and underlining of books are reasons for disciplinary action and may result in dismissal from the University.
Theft,
University of Illinois Librai§lAS$lv
APR BtC
4
-
9
12
m ^
NOV 4 9
SEC
wo 4
1980
L161â&#x20AC;&#x201D; 0-1096
t
Digitized by the Internet Archive in
University of
2016 with funding from
Illinois
Urbana-Champaign Alternates
) t
https://archive.org/details/platoagainstathe00plat_0
PLATO CONTRA ATHEOS.
PLATO AGAINST THE ATHEISTS; OR,
THE
TENTH HOOK OP THE DIALOGUE ON LAWS, ACCOMPANIED WITH
CRITICAL NOTES, AND FOLLOWED BY
EXTENDED DISSERTATIONS ON SOME OF
THE MAIN POINTS OF THE PLATONIC PHILOSOPHY AND THEOLOGY, ESPECIALLY AS COMPARED WITH THE HOLY SCRIPTURES.
BY TAYLER LEWIS,
LL.D.,
PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE IN THE UNIVERSITY IN THE CITY OF NEW-YORK.
rnrv-'n As
the Lord
livetli,
and as thy soul
liveth.
Hebrew Oath.
NEW YORK: HARPER
& BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS,
FRANKLIN SQUARE.
1870
.
Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1845, by
Harper afi
&
Brothers,
the Clerkâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Office of the Southern District of
New-Yor&.
TO
lfB
ELIPHALET NOTT,
UEV.
THE VENERABLE
-VTVci
\
*
*'
s
D.D„
PRESIDENT OF UNION COLLEGE .
f,ȣRED
THIS IN
l
alma mater,
WORK
most respectfully
XnscrtfieT),
REMEMBRANCE OF THOSE LESSONS, BOTH OF THEORET ICAL AND PRACTICAL WISDOM, WHICH HAVE AIDED IN FORMING THE MINDS AND CHARACTERS OF SO LARGE ^A PORTION OF
THE EDUCATED MEN OF OUR LA^
t*
nox rx isSs ^33 o'ri^x - r t t v: •
I
•*
•
:
Psalm x iv., 'lirr
0X
3
xbo
’
3
1.
x ynxrrnxi o’nssrrnx xVi Jeremiah
*Ei> avrCp
,
xxiii.,
24
yap £ti/uev, Kal KivovpeOa, nai kofiev. Acts xvii., 28. ,
HiGTEVGac yap del rov TrpoGepxopevov S
rfi
Qe<p f ot>
JJ2TI, Kal Tolg EK£nraii?Lv avTov pcGdanodoTTjg ytv*
rat. •
Hebrews ,
XI.,
6
K\
INTRODUCTION. It
is
Laws
among
generally agreed
those
who
of Plato to be a genuine production, that
a treatise written in his old age.
garded as containing
his
If so,
may
it
most matured and
The was
hold it
be re-
best-set-
on many of the great subjects discussed in his other dialogues. Some have thought that they discovered many contradictions between this work and the Republic. One has even gone so far as to say that they are opposed in every page. In this opinion, however, we cannot concur although it must be admitted tled opinions
;
that they differ in respect to style, and, notwithstand-
ing the near relationship which would seem to be
by
in-
very dissimilar in design. In the one, the State is the main subject of discussion in the other it is a secondary part, subordinate to what dicated
their titles, are
;
more
the writer evidently regards as a higher and
philosophical investigation into the nature of right or
The
practice of contrasting these
two
works has arisen from a wrong view of the true
title
righteousness.
of the one generally styled the Republic. appropriate designation
is
into the
Nature of Right
idently
made
tells
nepÂŁ
A maiov,
or,
The imaginary
.
subservient to
most
Its
An Inquiry State
is
ev-
as he expressly
this, or,
us in the second book, intended only as a model
of the
human
soul, so
magnified that
therein, in large letters,
enough
for the
we might
read
what would not be distinct when examined in the
mental vision
Vide lib. This comparison of the soul to a comii., 369, A. monwealth has been a favourite, not only with Plato, smaller characters of the individual
A
2
spirit.
INTRODUCTION.
VI
but with the most philosophical minds in
all
We
ages.
on a much smaller scale in the eleventh book of â&#x20AC;˘The Laws, where the Nightly Conference, or the most find
it
solemn legislative and judicial body
comIn the Re-
in the state,
pared to the head in thQ human system. public
it is
the great idea, to
the fancied State
is
is
which the construction of Sometimes,
altogether secondary.
must be admitted, the author seems so taken up with this imaginary commonwealth, that he unconsciously, perhaps, brings it into the primary place, and thus distorts his plan. It is this occasional forgetfulness of his main design that has introduced into however,
Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
it
Republic those incongruities which,
in all ages,
have been so much complained of. Sometimes the consistency of the under or fictitious part is overlooked, or, in other words, the State is utterly forgotten, while we are carried
away
some of
to
the most abstruse of
metaphysical discussions, such as
may
all
be found in the
and seventh books. Again, his attention seems be so occupied with the outward drapery that he loses sight of his main theme, and, pleased with the sixth
to
efforts
own
of his
fancy, dwells at great length on
merely externa] to the higher and In the third, fourth, and last three books, inner sense. the harmony of primary and secondary is well preserved. In the sixth and seventh he seems to lose sight
what, in
of the
reality,
is
commonwealth almost wholly, while
in
some
parts of the second he appears to have nothing else
before him.
The
fifth
may
be regarded as a sort of
hybrid production, arising from a confusion of both views.
Some
of
its
arrangements are altogether too
unnatural to allow the supposition that they were ever
intended for a real State cult to discover
;
and yet
it
is
very
diffi-
what bearing they can have upon
the
INTRODUCTION.
Vli
higher philosophy to which the whole scheme was
The
tended to be subservient.
least
that Plato here lost himself, and
we
can say
inis,
produced something
which was neither allegory nor reality, neither philosophy nor legislation. It is on the subject of the domestic relations, which are supposed to be assailed in this
book, that there
fifth
between the Republic Plato seems, even in his own day, to
exists the greatest contrariety
and The Laws. have been so reproached with
this
apparent blot
in his
was led to take special pains to do it away in this work of his old age and hence the great desire he shows in The Laws to set in their highphilosophy, that he
;
est light the sanctity of the family, or parental
We
relations.
ial
length in the
first
to
this
at
fil-
some
of the dissertations appended to the
In other respects, the discrepancies between the
text.
Republic and
The Laws have been
Differing,
ted.
have adverted
and
minor
details,
however, as they
greatly exaggera-
may in some
of their
no one can attentively study both with-
out discovering evidences that they are productions of the
same mind, and
that, in the
higher philosophy on which
main elements of that and morals
all legislation
depend, they are substantially the same.
The
Treatise on
Laws
is
undoubtedly intended
really practicable , if not a really existing State.
for a
In
discussing, however, the primary principles of legislation, the
author takes a very wide range, occupying
more time in what he styles the preambles, or recommendatory reasonings about the laws, than in the laws themselves. Hence there are but few points in far
the Platonic philosophy and ethics, as exhibited in the
what have some representative same questions started respecting
other dialogues, but here.
We
find the
INTRODUCTION.
via the nature
and origin of virtue
—whether
it is
or capable of being taught as a science or not er
it is
one or
many
—
that
is,
;
didafcrrj,
wheth-
whether the virtues are ah
so essentially connected that one cannot exist without
the others.
We
find the
end and origin of law
same views
in
—the importance
regard to the
in all things oi
looking to the idea, the ev ev 7rohXoig, or one in many.
same reverence for antiquity and ancient myths, the same disposition to regard religion as the There
is
the
beginning and foundation of every system of
civil pol-
and the same method of representing the ideas of a God, of his goodness, his providence, of a present and future retribution, as lying at the foundation of all morals and all religion. Even in the departments of psychology and ontology we find many things in The Laws which remind us of the author of the Phaedon, the Parmenides, and the These tetus. The favourite doctrines and methods of reasoning contained in the Gorgias are exhibited everywhere and perhaps there is no other part of Plato’s works more in the style and spirit of the Timseus than this very tenth book of The Laws, which we have selected as the ground of our comments in the present work. It was on this account chosen as forming, in our ity,
;
judgment, one of the best central positions from whence to
make excursions over a
philosophy.
We may
large part of the Platonic
perhaps be charged with hav-
ing sometimes used the text as a mere thread on which
hang our own discussions but even should it be admitted that there is some truth in this, still might it to
;
be maintained that those discussions are
all
closely
connected with the Platonic philosophy and theology,
and that from
this field
we
never depart, unless, per-
haps, to dwell on kindred subjects suggested
by the
INTRODUCTION.
Holy make
Our
Scriptures.
IX
object has not been merely to
a classical text-book, but to recommend Plato to
by every means through which
the student or reader
drawn
attention could be lieving that in
no other
to
our favourite author
way
we
could
;
be-
render a better
service to the cause of true philosophy and religion.
Some may say that, in made to talk too much that
we
our great
partiality, Plato
a Christian.
like
It
may
is
be
have found senses higher and more Scriptural
than are contained in the letter of the passages to
which reference extent, the
is
case,
made
yet even
if this is, to
some
only shows the suggestive nature
it
of his philosophy
;
how
;
it
is
capable of carrying the
earnest reader to more spiritual views than the author
and how he
himself, perhaps, ever entertained, in this respect,
cient or
from
modern
We
afar,
think
will be found
it
which we have indulged are thus
naturally suggested
brought from
other profane writers of an-
all
times.
that the views in
differs,
that they are not hunted for, or
;
but are such
not always con-
as, if
tained in the precise letter of our text, do most easily
present themselves in connexion with
one
who
elation.
it,
especially to
reads Plato by the light of the Christian Rev-
On
this subject,
of what
may
be called the
Platonic Spiritual Sense or capability of accommoda,
tion to higher views, the reader
LX., where
is
referred to Disserta-
some length. In pursuance of this favourite plan of recommending Plato and the Platonic philosophy, the method followed in the present work was adopted. The text and critical notes form by much the smallest part, and even these accompanying annotations frequently exhibit as much of a philosophical and theological as of
tion
a
critical
it is
treated of at
character.
The longer
dissertations an
INTRODUCTION. nexed, and which, for the readerâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s convenience,
we
have divided into numbered sections, with general and running
titles,
dation of
are devoted almost entirely to the eluci-
some of the main
points of the Platonic phi-
losophy, in their connexion with other systems of antiquity, to
for
a comparison, whenever there was occasion
with the sentiments of Aristotle,
it,
drawn from
illustrations
the Grecian poets, together with a con-
tinual reference to the
Holy
Scriptures,
by way of
resemblance, contrast, agreement, or condemnation.
For these purposes, there have been introduced, from all the other Platonic dialogues, very frequent and extended quotations of the most striking passages
almost
;
h ing such
as,
besides having a natural connexion with
would promote our main design, by producing in the reader a desire to have a deeper knowledge of Plato than is generally possessed by the greater part of our philosophical and theological writhe subject discussed,
To
ters.
these quotations, in almost every case,
translations
have been given, sometimes
sometimes paraphrastic. are,
when
were
The exceptions to
this
and
course
the nature and substance of the quotation
sufficiently indicated
duction.
literal,
full
The main
by the manner of
its
intro-
references are to the Timaeus,
the Republic, the Phaedon, Gorgias, Theaetetus, Par-
menides, Philebus, Protagoras, Symposion, Politicus, Cratylus, Sophista, and the other books of
The Laws,
with occasional citations from most of the minor dialogues having any claims to be regarded as genuine.
The work has been ation
the result of a careful examin-
which we have Plato mainly by himself, and by
of the Platonic writings
sought to interpret
;
in
the aid, on the one hand, of his jealous rival, Aristotle,
and on the other, of
his
enthusiastic admirer
INTRODUCTION.
Of modern
Cicero.
critical
whether English or German,
XI
and philosophical
we make
helps,
display,
little
we have made but little or no use of them. In regard to the text, we have followed that of Bekker and Ast, who hardly differ at all, either in because, in
fact,
Wherever
words or punctuation.
there has been a
departure from them, the reasons are assigned, mainly in the shorter notes.
The
power have been very this
critical
limited,
means within our
and
we
therefore, in
department, ask indulgence for any errors which
may have been committed. For
the philosophical opin-
advanced no such plea is interposed. By their own merit, and their accordance with the true interions
pretation of the Platonic system, they stand or
One design of
the
work
is
fall.
to serve as a text-book
for senior classes in college, not so
much by way
of
furnishing an exercise in the study of the Greek lan-
connex-
guage, as for the higher object of exhibiting,
in
ion with the Platonic, the other systems of
Greek
phi-
losophy, and their bearing upon the Christian theology.
On the same grounds, it is
supposed that it
may be
found
and
useful to students in our theological seminaries,
form no unprofitable addition to the libraries of
gymen, besides commending itself generally tention of our scholars and literary men.
We for a
believe that in this age there
deeper knowledge of Plato.
is
cler-
to the at-
a peculiar call
Some
acquaintance
with his doctrine of ideas seems needed as a corrective to the tendency, so widely prevalent, to resolve
knowledge
into
an experimental induction of
only in physical, but also in science. style,* *
is
If the
Good,
to
ethical
and
facts,
all
not
political
adopt our authorâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
own
something more than pleasure or happiness
See The Cratylus.
440, B.
;
also Dissertation
XX., p
163.
— INTRODUCTION.
Xll
either present or anticipated
—
if the
True
higher than past, present, or future facts tiful
something
is
—
the Beau-
if
something more than a generalization from
is
pleasing individual
—
sensations
if
the Just and the
Right involve inquiries far above those endless logomachies,
and questions of casuistry, which form the main
modern
features of
ethics
—
if
the State
a reality
is
transcending a present aggregation of flowing and perishing individuals tinct
wills
—
if
Law
is
a spiritual
power
dis-
from the muscular force of a majority of present
—
if
God
something more than gravitation, or
is
the eternal development of a physical fate,
only another plicable
name
phenomena
if
there
is
a real foundation for
the moral and religious, as distinct from, and not
braced
in,
is
an eternal succession of inex-
for
—
which
the natural or, in other words, ,
and retribution are terms of
far
if
em-
penalty
more solemn import
than the modern jargon about physical consequences then surely
high time that there should be some
is it
disturbance of
opposing views
placid
this ;
taking for granted of the
then surely should Plato be stud-
no other purpose, as a matter of curiosity, to see if there may not possibly be some other philosophy than this noisy Baconianism, about which there is
ied, if for
more noisy, because more empty, transcendentalism, which some would present as its only antidote. In place of all this, we want the clear, simple, common sense philosophy of Plato, commending itself, when rightly understood, to
kept up such an everlasting din, or that
all
still
the aoival evvoiat or universal ideas of the race, in ,
distinction from that miscalled
common
sense which
only the manufactured public opinion of the a philosophy most religious
most practical
—most
—most
childlike in
moment
speculative, its
is
and yet
primeval simpli-
INTRODUCTION. city,
We
and yet most profound.
dence on
this
xia
speak with confi-
The young man who
point.
thusiastic student of Plato
can never be a
an en-
is
sciolist in
regard to education, a quack in literature, a dema-
gogue
an
in politics, or
infidel in religion.
Our main object, then, is to recommend
this
noble phi-
losopher to the present generation of educated young
The
men, especially to our theologians.
by no means professes
present
whole, but merely to present some of points, to allure other
though alluded to discussed under the design,
minds among us
The main
ough examination. in
its
more
almost every dissertation,
own
because
title,
work should be acceptable
treating
it
itself in
attractive thor-
doctrine of ideas,
present
by
its
to a
is
al-
not
we had formed
permitted to accomplish
if
work
forth his system as a
to set
it,
and
if
the
to the public, of
ah*examination of another of the
most interesting of the Platonic dialogues. We conclude with the remark that, in a moral and practical, as well as in a speculative point of view, the
particular subject of the dialogue selected has
claim to attention.
He who
thinks most deeply, and
has the most intimate acquaintance with ture, as exhibited in his
apt to resolve
all
own
when
league with a subtle pantheism,
stituting its
star-dust,
human
heart, will be the
unbelief into Atheism.
will this be the case at a time in
some
is
na-
most
Especially
physical science,
everywhere sub-
jargon of laws, and elements, and nebular
and
vital forces,
and magnetic
fluids, for the
recognition of a personal God, and an ever wakeful,
ever energizing special providence. mit, life.
is
Theism,
we
ad-
everywhere the avowed creed, but it wants It is too much of a mere philosophy. There B
INTRODUCTION.
XIV
are times
home
when
the bare thought tnat
power and a
to the soul with a
which gives a new terest to
every other moral is felt
truth.
that
is,
comes
flash of light
and a more vivid
illumination,
sions the conviction
God
all
It is
in-
on such occa-
unbelief
is
Atheism,
acknowledgment of a mere natural power clothed with no moral attributes, and giving rise to no moral sanctions. We want vividness given to the or an
God
great idea of
as a judge, a moral governor, a
special superintendent of the world
and
all its
move-
ments, the head of a moral system, to which the ma-
chinery of natural laws serves but as the temporary scaffolding,
to
be continued, changed, replaced, or
removed, when the great ends
finally
was designed
for
which alone
have been accomplished. Just as such an idea of God is strong and clear, so will be a conviction of sin, so will be a sense of the need of expiation, so will be a belief in a personal Redeemer, it
and so
shall
will follow in
its
train
an assurance of
all
the
and deep, that no boastful pretension of that science which makes the natural the foundation of the moral, and no solemn
verities of the Christian faith, so strong
stumbling-blocks in the letter of the Bible will for a
moment
any disquietude. There is a want of such a faith, as is shown bv the feverish anxiety in respect to the discoveries of science, and the results of This the agitations of the social and political world. timid unbelief, when called by its true name, is Atheyield
it
The next
ism.
great battle-ground of infidelity will
not be the Scriptures. will
be
summoned
What
to defend the
the great truth involving
gious truth is the
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
faith there
all
who
remain
very being of a God,
every other moral and
the primal truth, that
rewarder of
may
reli-
HE IS, and that he
diligently seek
him
.
«
CONTENTS. Introduction
.......... .......
Png
v
Statement of the Argument
Greek Text and Critical Notes
.
.
EXCURSUS
.
1
.
to 84
I.
Platonic View of the Parental and Filial Relations, and the Ancient Doctrine generally on this Subject
The
.
.
.87
II.
The Words
—The Preamble, the Ad-
npooifuov and Uapa/j,v6tov visory or Argumentative Part of the .
Law
.
.
.
.95
III.
Subjective Sense of the
Word
97
’A ?i7j6ev(j
IV.
The Orphic Poetry Plato’s
Regard
99
for Antiquity
y. and the Ancient Mythology.
— His
Use of the Word QeoI
102
....
VI.
Philosophy and Character of Anaxagoras
105
VII.
The Divine
Justice the
Ground of Human
Law
.
.
.110
VIII.
Universality of the Belief in a
God
Ill
IX. Antiquity of Atheism
114
X. Principle of Authority
116 XI.
Degrees of Atheism.
—Peculiarity of Plato’s Style
.
.
.117
XII.
Ancient Doctrine of the Four Elements
119
XIII. Atheistical Doctrine of $v(ng, Tvxv, and
T exvrj
.
.
.130
CONTENTS.
XVi
Atheistical Doctrine that ture, but by Art
Law
XIV. Mfi and Religion were not by Na.
.
135
XV The Figure Aposiopesis
139
.
XVI.
Argument
for the
Existence of a God from Motion
.
.
141
.
144
.
146
XVII. Soul Older than Body
XVIII.
Remarkable Comparison of the Dangerous Flood
XIX. Invocation of the Divine Aid in the Argument. amples of this from other Dialogues
.
— Striking Ex148
XX. of the Ancient Schools, Do all Things flow 1 &c. with a Sketch of some of the principal Materializing or Atheistical Philosophers who belonged to the Ionic, and to the Physical School of Elea 152
The Great Question ;
....
XXI. Mathematical Use of the
Word A oyog
164
XXII.
-166
Paradox of Circular Motion XXIII.
The words QOLo ig,
Teveatg, UaOog, and $6opd
.
.
.
.167
XXIV.
— ..........
Philosophy of the Verb Ytyvopac
TO
BE.
Platonic use of
E Ifii
and
170
XXV. Ancient Divisions of Motion.
— Distinction
—According
to Plato.
—According
between Teveaig and ’A/iXolucig. ^-The Atomic Theory more favourable to Theism than the
to Aristotle.
184
Doctrine of Occult Qualities
XXVI.
A vroKLvijGig,
— —
or Self-motion of Soul. Energy or Action be Whether on this View longs to the Essence of the Deity. God must have created Worlds from Eternity. Aristotle’s His own DocMisrepresentations of Plato on this Point. trine.
the
—
Aristotle’s
first
Immoveable
— — Essence. — Moral
Reasons
of Moving Causes
190
XXVII.
The Words A oyog,
EMo$-,
and
’Idea
.
.
.
.
.
.195
—
— CONTENTS.
XVII
XXVIII. Distinction between
Page
v
A oyog and O voua XXIX.
196
Distance between Self-motion and Motion by Impulse. —Impassable Chasm between' Spirit and Matter. Ideas of The Word IIoAChange, Cause, and Spirit inseparable. Principle of Euphonic Attraction loarfj 201
Infinite
—
—
.
.
XXX. Argument of Ancient Atheists that Apparent Evidences of Design were only Evidences of subsequent Accommodation. Things (they said) older than Knowledge of Things, and
—
therefore older than Soul
204
XXXI. Platonic Doctrine of the Evil Principle. cessity
— Of ’Av&yKq,
or Ne-
207
XXXII. Platonic Analogy between the Motion of that of a Sphere, or of the Heavens
N ovg
and
and 219
XXXIII.
—
The Motions of the Evil Soul Irregular and Disorderly. The nearer an Approach to the Pure Reason, the more of Fixedness and Uniformity. Heaven a State of Eternal Rest. Atheistic Objection from the unvarying Regularity of the Heavens, from whence was inferred the Absence of Will and
—
Reason
224
XXXIV. Platonic Doctrine of the Animation of the Heavenly Bodies. Ancient Belief that each Nation had its own peculiar Guardian Daemon or Genius 229
—
XXXV. Three Hypotheses
in respect to the
Animation of the Heav-
enly Bodies
233
XXXVI. v
a or Vehiculum Mundi. O able Passage from Euripides
Ff)g
xw
->
—Examination of a Remark 235
XXXVII.
— Doctrine
Second Grand Division of the Argument. Mistake of Cudworth Special Providence.
—
....
of a
237
XXXVIII. The Greek Words
for Blessedness,
Happiness, Fortune, &c.
.
239
XXXIX. Atheistic Argument against Providence drawn from the ProsPlato’s Language compared with perity of the Wicked. that of the Scriptures 243
—
.
B
2
— CONTENTS.
XV111
XL.
Pug9
Singular Word AnodLOTro/LiTreoftcu, and the Use made of it by Plato
The
’
Remarkable 245
XLI. 'Defect of Plato’s Theology in regard to the Doctrine of Atonement and the Necessity of Expiation 249 l
XLII.
#
Highest Proof of the Divine Goodness, the a tion of the Moral Sense
priori
Convic-
253
XLIII.
Sublime Mode in which the Bible represents the Divine Providence and Omniscience as contrasted with all mere Philosophizing on these Attributes. Analysis of the Greek Word ’A vSpeia, as denoting one of the Cardinal Virtues of Soul. 255 Piety of Epicureanism
—
XLIV.
— ....
true Dignity of Man his Religious Nature. the Greeek Words Sefiaf, E vaebtLa, &c.
The
Analysis of
259
XLV.
Men Compared
to
Sheep of the Divine Pasture.
Plato on this Subject in
Harmony with
— Language of
that of the Scriptures 261
XLVI. Forms of Greek Verbs
Peculiarity of certain Negative
.
.
262
XLVII.
—
Great Things cannot Exist without Small. Application of the Maxim to the Doctrine of a Special* Providence, to Education, and to Politics 264
XLVIII.
....
Gentleness of Plato’s Mode of Argument, and Adaptation to the Minds of the Young
its
peculiar
267
XLIX.
The Machinery of Physical Events controlled by Invisible Spir268 itual Agencies. The Doctrine of Plato and of the Bible.
—
.
L.
Nihilo — Greek Ideas Respect — Language of the Fathers. — Plato defended against the Charge of teaching the Eternity of the World and of Matter. — Platonic Sense the Maxim. — Comparison of Hebrews, with the Language of Plato. —
The Ancient Maxim De
in
Nihil.
to Creation.
of
Difficulties
xi., 3,
of Reason when the Doctrine of Cieation from Revelation
is
examined apart 272
CONTENTS.
XIX
LI.
Page
Doctrine that the Parts are made for the Whole as set forth by Plato, and as viewed by Modern Rationalists and Semi-
—
Infidels. The Converse Doctrine, that the Whole is also for the Parts, examined with Reference to the Mutual Harmony 286 of both
LII.
Atheistic Objection
drawn from the Extent of the Universe
.
292
LIII.
—
Explanation of a Difficult Passage. Remarks on those Views that resolve Morality into an Obedience to Physical Laws, and regard all Punishment as Consequential instead of Penal 294
LIV.
The Word ’Av^eOpog able
Passage
in the
as distinguished from
A luvioc.
—Remark-
Timaeus
300
LV.
The Greek Words
for Eternity,
A I6v
and A lovloq
.
.
.
302
LVI. Plato’s Doctrine of the Freedom of the Will, viewea in Connexion with the Law of Cause and Effect in Nature 307 .
.
LVII. Explanation of a Difficult Passage
312
LVIII.
The Greek Word
Similar in all
"kidrjg
and the Hebrew
Views of a Future Ages
and
—iSvp jy 3
1
316
LIX. and Similar Fears of Hell
State,
318
LX. "kytog — Exceeding Spirituality of some of Plato’s —Many of his Thoughts capable of being accommodated to p Spiritual Sense higher than the Author himself had ever intended to convey. — Difference Re-
The Word
.
Views.
fairly
in this
spect between his Writings and those of phers, Ancient and Modern
all
other Philoso-
322
LXI. Mythical Sense of the
Word
Quvarog
331
LXII. Omnipresence of the Divine Justice. —Remarkable Resemblance of Plato’s Language to some Passages from the Bible 333 LXIII. Doctrine of a Final Judgment.—Use of the
Word Iwreketa
334
XX
CONTENTS.
Platonic
.....
LXIV. Use of the Word Tvnog
Pag*
338
LXV. Explanation of a Difficult Passage, in which Plato seems to assert that our Evils in the Present State exceed our Good 339
LXVI. M.axv ’AOavarog, or Battle of the Universe, between the PowSin, therefore, no Light Matter, beers of Good and Evil. cause it is Treason against the Cause of Good, for which 342 God is contending with the Evil Soul
—
Plato’s Doctrine of the
....
LXVII. A atiioveg, or Genii
347
LXYIII. Beauty and Accuracy of the Ancient and Platonic Division of Deep Moral Significance of the the Four Cardinal Virtues. Four Greek Words, knokaaia ’A Kpareia, ’Ey/cpdma, and 35 'Zutypoavvri, as indicating the Four Moral Degrees
—
’
,
.
.
LXIX. Peculiar Use of the Indicative Mode in certain Cases. parison of Passages from the New Testament
— Com-
.
.
.
355
LXX. Use of the Word YUeovE^ia.
—
....
Aristotle’s Distinction
Arithmetical and Geometrical Equality
between 356
LXXI. Impiety and Folly of attempting to bribe Heaven
.
.
.
357
LXXII.
—
Different Species of Atheists. Morality of Atheists not founded on Principle. First Species styled A inaiog by Plato, and invested by him with too Good a Character. Second Species, the Magician or Juggler. The Atheist often in Secret the Victim of Superstition. Hobbes. The Ironical Species of Atheist, a Character peculiar to the Ancient World. Elymas the Sorcerer. Apollonius of Tyanea 359
—
—
—
—
—
— ....
—
LXXIII.
The Nightly Conference, or Areopagus The Athenian Areopagus
of Plato’s State.
— 363
LXXIV.
Common Law
against
all
Private Religions.
Plato’s Doctrine in respect to ship and Religion of the State
Changes
—Examination
in the Public
of
Wor364
LXXV. Belief in Apparitions, Ghosts, Spectres, Dreams, &c., the in
all
Ages
same 369
;
STATEMENT OF THE ARGUMENT. As a dramatic work, The Laws is far inferior to the Republic. The speakers are three namely, Clinias, a Cretan, Megillus, a Lacedaemonian, and a stranger, who passes by no other name than the Athenian. The latter is the Socrates of the dialogue. The first :
two are
either
mere
listeners, or only brought in as suggestive helps
After nine books occu-
in the various transitions of the discourse.
pied with varied and extended schemes of legislation, and wffiere
laws are mingled with reasonings and introductory preambles, which need not here be specified, the author comes, in the tenth book, to
which it would be a state indeed, and not a mere herding together of men and women in a political congregation, having no other bond of union than the temporary consent of individual wills. Previously, however, to the enactment of laws for the punishment of sacrilege and other offences
treat of offences against the public worship is
and
supposed, of course, the State must possess,
religion,
if it
against religion, the chief speaker proposes that there should be laid
down, by way of foundation, a preamble or hortatory statement, which preamble, although con-
containing the reasons of the laws
;
expanded into an argument which occupies nearly the whole book, the few last pages only being taken up with the laws and the penalties annexed. cisely expressed at first (page 3), is subsequently
The argument
is
divided into three parts
;
1.
Against those
who
Against those who, while they admitted the existence of a God, denied a providence and, 3. Against those who, while they admitted both a God and a providence, maindenied the Divine existence
;
2.
;
tained that the Deity sin severely. as, that
it
appeals at
The
was
first
easily propitiated, or
would not punish
part is introduced by a declaration of Clini-
must be easy to prove the existence of the Deity. He once to the most obvious phenomena of nature, the sun,
the earth, and stars, &c., as conclusive evidence, especially
if taken connexion with the universal sentiments of mankind. This gives occasion to the chief speaker to suggest that the subject is involved
in
had imagined from the perverseness
in greater difficulties than the other, in his simplicity, difficulties,
of those
however, not
intrinsic, but arising
who imposed upon themselves
by the words chance nature ,
,
art , &c., referring to the old Atheists of the Ionic or Materializing
school (page 4 to page 15).
After a short digression, in which
it
is
STATEMENT OF THE ARGUMENT.
XXII
debated whether
it is
best at once to apply the law to such
without argument (15 to
work of
19),
men,
the Athenian devotes himself to the
and commences a most subtle disquisition
refutation,
specting the nature of soul as implying self-motion involved in
very essence.
Hence he proves
reits
that matter cannot possess this
power, and, therefore, soul being more ancient than body, the properties of soul
must
also be older than the properties of body.
From
and not the mother of Art, will, and design and thought must have been before hard and soft and heavy and light and all the adaptations of the natural world. The Atheists had held that religion, and the belief in the existence of Gods, being the production of human law, which was a production of art, and this
it
is inferred that nature is the child,
as the Atheists said, and that, therefore, law and ,
,
,
,
,
,
,
art itself being the offspring of Nature, therefore religion
ideas of the just and right
all
were conventional among men, and had
This argument
no other foundation.
and
is
refuted by the Athenian
by showing the superior antiquity of soul, and, therefore, of these ideas as essential parts of its constitution (25).
In proving the self-
energy of soul, he goes into a very minute examination of the different kinds of motion, summing them all up, however, under two general heads
thing else
namely, motion by impulse and that which moves someby commencing motion in itself. This latter he identifies ,
;
with psyche, or soul by a species of logical necessity, or an argument drawn from the force of terms and the innate ideas involved ,
in them.
The next
step
is to
determine whether
it is
one or more
which are engaged in the affairs of the universe the result of which inquiry is, that there are two, the one good and the other bad the one constant, uniform, and ever exhibiting the highest reason in all its motions, which he compares to those of a sphere, the other irregular, disorderly, without reason, and full of madness After this, there are stated three methods by which soul may (36). guide the motions of the heavenly bodies namely, by an indwellsouls
;
;
;
ing
spirit,
or
by a soul with an aethereal body, or entirely destitute
of body, and external to the object of
its
guidance
(42).
This brings the Athenian to the second grand division of the subAfject, namely, the arguments of those who deny a Providence. by seeing the appaopinion led to this are men that ter premising
shows that it is any right views of the Divine Nature. For if possessed of every virtue, indolence and indif-
rent impunity and prosperity of the wicked (45), he utterly derogatory to
we
admit that God
is
ference can form no part of his character. there
is in
him any want of power.
Neither can
Therefore
we
it
be
tliat
cannot suppose
STATEMENT OF THE ARGUMENT.
XX11I
Next
that he will neglect anything, either great or small.
is
shown
the importance of small things as parts of a whole absolutely essential to its totality, and that, without small things, the great could ,
Hence the
not exist.
doctrine of a minute special providence, un-
wisdom to human artshown to be by the sovereignty of God (but not by any inhe-
less the Deity is to be regarded as inferior in ists (56).
The method of this
such arrangements
in
special providence is
rent necessity of things), that every agent finds its fitting place
namely, virtue rises and wickedness descends, until the one reaches
The Most Holy
Place, and the other sinks
retributions of
Hades
(61).
down
Godâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s government, no one can escape, and, unless t
will be impossible to
or miserable
most painful
to the
This Eternal Justice, or fixed law of kept in view,
it is
form any right opinion respecting a blessed
life (64).
argument respects those who and who confide in the general mercy of God as capable of being easily moved by prayers and sacrifices. He contrasts their views of the Deity with such as are entertained of the lowest class of human guardians, as though God could be bribed by the wages of iniquity, when dogs could not be prevailed upon by similar motives to admit the wolf into the flock. Arguments against those views which would regard sin as a small matter, and God as easily appeased, are drawn from the [idxrj dddvarog the battle of the universe, or everlasting conflict between good and evil, in which
The
view
third grand division of the
sin as a trifle,
,
God and
good influences are contending
all
for the victory,
and
where, of consequence, the least taking part with the enemy, or the least neutrality is treason against the cause of
good throughout the
universe (69, 74).
There are then enumerated six classes of offenders to in
namely, two each of the three divisions of Atheists or semi- Atheists, differing their degrees of guilt, and therefore requiring different gradations ;
The book closes with a specification of the various and a law against private chapels and private religious rites in the course of which a very striking description is given of that class of Atheists who, while they had no religious belief themof punishment. penalties, ;
selves,
made
mankind N.B.
it
their business to excite the superstitious fears of
for their
own
unnatural pleasure or
profit.
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;All references to any of the dialogues of Plato, except the
text of the present work, are
made according
to the pages
and
let-
ters of the alphabet, as given in the standard edition of Stephanus, *
and as they
may
be found in the margin of the Leipsic.
i'LlNO^
PLATO CONTRA ATHEOS. DE LEGIBUS LIBER META tl
rag
tie
(pepeiv pL7]ds ayecv 1.
Hepi
navrdg.
the preceding book fully
irept
fliaiojv
vdfJLCfjiov
2
av %pri idat prjdevl rcov rov (
—ayuv.
(ix.),
namely,
employed
wrongs committed
vdpeig, or
wil-
degree of violence, of which ahcia treated of ,
one species, and sacrilege another.
A collective phrase. “To take and carry away by 7 E pepov yap uMjlovg. A yeiv V
Compare Thucydides,
kciI (bepeiv is
ite-
In reference to the whole subject discussed in
and with some
2. <bepecv
roiovde
elprjoOo)
aXhorpLUv pijdsva prjdev
tgjv
•
prjd’
-
at the close of the ninth book, is
violence.”
1
navrdg ev
altitag , irepl
X.
i.,
y
:
a phrase derived from the earliest times, and
is
always
Hence, because personal
in reference to acts of violence.
courage was anciently regarded as the chief part of human virtue,
some have supposed and from
(ftepeiv ,
its
that from ayeiv, in this sense,
came
comparative and superlative, (peprepog
,
ayadog,
(piprarog,
Such a view encounters etymological difficulties in Besides, it can only be maintained on the termination of ayaOdg. the false theory that the savage life was the original state of men, and that moral terms partake of the ideas most prevalent in such a or (pepiGTog
.
condition.
We
general, he
is
much
prefer the derivation of Plato, although, in
entitled to but little deference as a philologist.
cording to him, to ayadov rable,”
from ayapai ayaopai “ ,
to
wonder
See the Cratylus,
great delight.”
better felt by comparing
Ac-
to aycurrov, “ the wonderful, the admi-
is
p.
“to admire with
at,” also
The
412.
force of this will be
what the philosopher says
in
the sixth book
of the Republic, of the wondrous idea of the ayadov or The Good as ,
surpassing
all
human comprehension.
No
be at a loss as to what led him to this etymology, whatever think of
its philological
that, in
reading the Cratylus,
parts the writer
is
correctness.
sincere, or
it
is
how
it,
will
we may
must be remarked, however, difficult to determine in what It
far
he
may
be indulging in the
severest satire against certain false systems of philosophy.
A
,
one, on reading
,
2
CONTRA ATHEOS.
Xag, eav prj TTeCorf rov nenrrjpevov. en yap di) rov roiov « tov navra i]prr\peva rd re elprjpeva Hand yeyove nod 'eon ,
nal ear at. peyiora de ,4r
olai re nal vbpeig
rCov XoarCdv at rcvv veojv anoXa*
drj
elg
peyiora
orav
de,
elg iepd ytyvcjv.
rat,
nal diatyepovnvg av peydXa, orav eig dr\pooia nal
dyia
rj
nard
peprj noivd tyvXerCdv
nenoivivvrjnonvv
rj
aXXuv
rivcov
elg iepd de idea nal racjjovg
*
10
devrepcog
6
elprjpevcvv
yoveag
elg de
.
7
orav v6ptfy
,
orav atypovnorcbv r ivi
9
ng
8
6
rpira
,
x^P^
,
T(*)V
epTcpooOev
reraprov de yevog vdpecog
rig.
rcbv
,
roiovrcdv
devrepa nal
apxovnvv
dyxi
XP1 T ai
rj (f>epxi rj
rdjv eneivcov prj ireioag avrovg. rrepn rov de, rd no,
Xinnov av
enaorov rtiv TtoXir&v vbpioOev,
eirj
naXovpevov.
doreov
olg d?)
elg
dinrjv
em-
noivov vopov enaoroig.
iepoovXCa pev yap eiprjrai £vXXrjddrjv (dialog re nal XaOpa eav yiyvr\rai, ri xprj rraoxsiv. oaa de Xoycp nal ooa epyep ,
uepi tieovg vdpi^ei
ng
Xeycjv
rj
Trparrojv ,
u to napapvdiov
vnoOepevcp 12 prjreov a del naox^iv. eoro)
rode
•
deovg
’E av prj neioy, “unless he get the consent.”
3. 4.
dij
"Y Speig, “violent wrongs committed wilfully and with malice
prepense,
whether by act or speech.” The writer now proceeds to which offences of this kind might
specify five different grades into
be divided
:
1st,
things private
;
against sacred things public
3d, against parents
;
;
2d, against sacred
4th, against magistrates
;
5th,
against private political rights of individual citizens.
A evrepog has
5.
respect to diaQepovrug above, referring not, like
devrepa, to numerical rank, but to the grade of enormity.
See Note
App.
6.
Eif de yoveag.
7.
Xoplg tuv epnpooOev elpypevuv, namely, those mentioned
I.,
in the
ninth book. 8.
"Orav u$povtlotC)v
Tig,
“
when any one who
is
reckless of the
authority or respect due to magistrates.” 9.
The case of tlvI
determined here grammatically by the
is
verb, xp^rcu, although in sense 10.
law,”
it is
the
common
0 Xg drj doreov, “ for all which cases or “a law in common containing
T
there
12
i)
nparrov,
See Note
II.,
“by speech
App.
them
iast all.
must be a common
provisions applicable to
each respectively.” 11. Tieyov
object of
or action.”
e
,
CONTRA ATHEOS.
3
rjyovpevog elvai nard vopovg ovdelg ncbnore ovre epyov
aoedeg elpyacaro encbv ovre Xbyov af)r\nev avopov. ev
13
6rj
aXXa
naox^v, rj rovro onep elrcov ov% to devrepov ovrag ov (ppovri^eiv dvGpcottcjv
ri rd)v rpicov
ijyovpevog,
rj
,
,
,
rpirov eimapapvGrjrovg elvai 'Gvoiaig re nal evxalg na-
rj
,
,
oayopevovg.
KA. Tl ovv A0.
T
’
£2
veiv rjptiv
KA.
drj
dplppev av
rj
nal Xeyoipev rrpog avrovg
yaOe enanovocopev avrebv ,
1
*
a
Trpcbrov
;
rep naraeppo-
npoanal^ovrag avrovg Xeyeiv pavrevopai.
TLola
drj
;
A0. Tavra rdpf
civ
T
epeox^Xovvreg ehroiev.
’A Gr\-
£2 i-ev
vale nal Aanedaipovie nal K.vdj oie, dXrjGrj Xeyere. rjpcbv
yap
ol
pev ronapdnav Geovg ovdapcog vopi^ovoiv
prjdev rjpojv (ppovri^eiv
*
vpeig Xeyere
drj,
a^iovpev
.
•
ol de
evxalg napayeaGai, oiovg
ol de,
naQdnep vpeig
rj^icbnare nepl
vopojv, rrplv aneiXelv rjpiv onXrjpdjg, rjpdg nporepov eni-
X^ipelv
nal didaoneiv
7relOeiv
on
yovreg inavd, nal rivijjv dbopcov
(bg elol deol,
QeXriovg
j
15
renprjpia Xe-
rrapd ro dinaiov
rj
iraparpeireoGai nrjXovpevoi.
vno
vvv pev yap rav-
ra dnovovreg re nal roiavG erepa rcbv Xeyopevcov apioruv ’
elvai 7TOi7]rcbv re nal prjropcov nal pavreejv nal lepecov , nal 13.
akla
he has done
ev. it
Supply as follows: “but
—ev
drj
tl
t&v rpibv ndex^v
when he has done
—being
in
thus,
one or the other
of these three states.” 14.
rb eara^poveiv ypbv, “in their contempt for us.”
npocrTrai-
fyvrag is best rendered adverbially, “ sportively .” 15.
bg
elol &eoi.
This example furnishes an excellent
illustration
of the general difference between the particles bg and on.
Both and are frequently regarded and rendered as though they were nearly, if not quite, synonymous. The difference, however, in this and similar cases, is obvious. "On would simply refer to the fact ; bg, to the manner or reason of it. As, follow nearly the
same
class of verbs,
example, didaoneiv on, “ to teach us that Gods didaoneiv bg, “to teach us how
for
for
what necessary
reasons, there are
Gods.”
the fact , is,
And
ing sentence nal on (SeXrlovg rj, n. t. h., are better than,” &c., or “ that they are too good.” :
that
there are
“ in what manner, and
so in the follow-
“ and also the fact that they
)
;
4
CONTRa atheos.
aXXcov TroXXatetg pvpicjv,
ovte
enl to
rzopeQa ol TiXelorot, dpdoavreg
napa di
a^iovpev SeXrto)
7roA/L<h
dAA’ ovv
av
2
\
tt
irecpdopeda.
aXXd
pi) aypicov, irpdg
r/pdg, el pi)
rrepl fteCdv (hg eloiv ,
pog afr/Oeiav.
teal
rd%a
ireiQoipeO
a A A’ emxeLpelre, eln perpiov Xeyopev,
lacjg vplv.
irelv
twv dfXcov Xeyovrag
p eXtlg) ye
ddttea rps-
e^ateelodai
npdjrov xpr/oOac
ttelOoi
1
dpav rd
vopoOerCov (^aoteovrcjjv eivai
dr/
r/pspcov,
6’
pi)
’
el-
d rtpoteaXovpeda.
KA. Xeyeiv
,
Ovreovv
%eve, doteel padiov eivai dXr/devovrag 3
d>
,
d eoi
d)£ elol
;
A0. ITw^
KA.
rd rcov
teal
re
pev
IT pedrov
yi) teal r/Xiog,
aorpa re rd gypnavra,
djpcdv diateeteoopr/peva teaXddg oyrcog, eveavroeg
dieiXr/ppeva
teal pr/ol
f
*
ore ndvreg 'E XXr/veg re
teal
tea
Pdpdapoi vopi^ovoiv eivai deovg.
A0. Qodbvpai drj 7Tore
c(j)olv
.
ye,
f
elnoip av
d)
rovg poxOr/povg, ( ov yap
patedpie,
&oye aldovpai)
pr/Te^g yptiv tearaeppovrj-
vpelg pev yap ovte lore avrebv
irepi ri/v rr/g diacpOo-
4
pdg alriav a/IA’ r/yeloOe dtepareia povov i/dovedv re
teal
,
1
.
ovk
km
to
[ir/
dp$v
adLKa.
tcl
This
away from
“ Instead of being turned
may be
freely rendered thus
the commission of sin, the
of us are wholly occupied in attempts to avert
its
:
most
consequences .”
In
most concisely, yet most forcibly expressed, the essential difference between two things that are often mistaken the one for the other, namely, between true religion consisting in right views of the Divine Nature, or that true “ fear of the Lord which is to depart from evil ” (Tpeneadai km to pr/ 6pq,v Ta adma), and superstition which is wholly occupied, not in the avoidance of sin, but in vain attempts to cure the evils and terrors which it brings upon the soul, this there is
,
,
(dpaoavTeq
6’
kZaneZodai ireip&peOa).
This superstition, or
false reli-
gion, as Plato elsewhere shows, is nearly allied to Atheism.
Note 2.
LXXX.
The
TcoTihti peTiTiu.
and peTiTLo ye “ ,
antithesis here is
between
noMu
(3e?LTitj
better, indeed, in respect to truth, if not far better.”
3.
dTir/devovrag.
4.
diacpdopag.
ing, diatyopuq.
See
and LXXXI., App.
See Note
We have It is
III.,
App.
adopted this instead of the
common
read-
supported by the authority of Cornarius and
Stephanus, although Ficinus seems to have read diaQopag, and
is in
—
:,
CONTRA ATHEOS, imOvpitbv
sm
rov dosbr]
f3tov
5
oppaoOat 5 rag
av -
'ijjvxag
ru)V.
KA. To
6s Tt npog rovrotg alrtov av
,
gj
gsvs,
sir]
;
A0. 'Zxsdov 6 navraTraoLV vpslg s%G) ^tivrsg ovk av stdsirjrs, dXXa vpag d,v XavOavot. KA. T i 6i) tovto (ppd^stg ravvv A0. ’Ajitadta rig 6 paXa x a ^ 87T^ 6otcovoa slvat psytorrj ;
(ppovrjotg.
KA. lUbg
E lolv
A0. vplv
Xsyetg rjptv 9
ovk, slot
usv, sv
I
nspt
6t
;
sv ypappaot Xoyot Kstpsvot
apsrijv noXtrstag
not psrpotg
7
psv TraXatorarot
fistiv, ol
ovpavov, row rs dXXcjv
ysyovsv
,
ttpotovrsg
•
,
9
far better
a rolg anovovotv
accordance with
all
si
the
(bg
repdg aXXrjXovg
psv slg aXXo rt
reaXebg
class of persons characterized by the Psalmist ,
In the
soul.
“
:
The foot
no God;" nS’ S# ,
and abominable in
,
pi)
morum cor same way are the
same
corrupt are they
r]
words of the context
ruptio
there is
ol
•
irpcbr r\ cpvotg
rj
atque depravalio— rottenness of
hath said in his heart
reap*
6s rijg apx^]g ov ttoXv
bbsoyovtav bts^spxovrat, ysvopsvot rs (bptXrjoav.
ol
,
sytb pavOavco
nai dvsv psrpcov, Xsyovrsg
ol 6s,
,
wg
their deeds.
Psalm
xiv.,
l
1
.
:)p;9 7
v
vr;(
corrupti , perditis moribus sunt. 5.
They are
altogether become futhy.
oppaoOai, “ to rush impetuously or violently.”
scriptive of the headlong course of those to
6 ’ApaOla .
A more
tlq.
whom
Admirably de
it is
here appiieo
perfect description of this disease of
Athe
ism (SiafOopag) could not be given. It sets forth the malady with it cause, and is equally applicable to ancient and to modern times “ an invincible ignorance fancying itself the highest vnsdom .” ’A paOia ,
here has no reference to speculative or scientific knowledge, but used in the usual Platonic sense for “ ignorance of one’s self.” ol
liyovreg
.
9.
See remarks on ug and on, page 3, 15. 6g TTpolovreg dr, “ Advancing, or going on from the discussion of
the origin
was
See Note IV., App.
pev hv perpoig.
7.
8
is
.
.
.
{rrjg upxrjg)
.
of the
first
nature
( 17)g
ttpurrjg
(jivaeog),
which
the subject of the most ancient (or Orphic) writings (rtiv nahae-
otutuv), they treated next of the theogony, that births
and generations of the Gods, with
intercourse,” as set forth by
Homer and
A 2
is,
the individual
their actions
Hesiod.
and mutual
E
6
CONTRA ATHEOS.
naXCog e^oi ov padiov kiunpav naXatolg ovoiv. 10 elg pevroi ,
yovicov re dspanelag nal
npag11 ovn av
vd)v ehrotpi, ovte (hg <b(j)£?upa Elpryrai
12
ra usv ovv
,
yaipETM, nal
ovre
Tcov veo)v rjplv nal ooeptiv
ronapanav
tig
tt
1
*
alriaOrjrcov
13 *
ra 6e
nantiv alna.
otttj
TUV TOLOVTCOV E^Epya^OVrai
dpdcog
pt pedetoO(x) nal
(ptXov XsyEoOo) ravrxj
'dsoloc
oirrj
,
rCov ap^alcov
di)
j
eyo)ye ttote enai-
yap nal gov orav rEnprjpca XiycdpEV (bg eIoI $£ 01 ravra avia 77poG(j)£povT£g, 7}Xiov te nal GEXrjvrjv nal aorpa nal yrjv, (bg ftEovg nal $ da ovra vtto rejv oocbcbv tovtcjv dvaTTETTEiouevol av XlzyoLEV (bg yrjv te nal Xcdovg ovra avrd nal ov6 ev rcbv av0p(O7TELG)v upayparcov (ppovr l^elv dvvdpEva X 615 yoLGt 6 e ravra ev rroog sig ro mOavov TTEpilTETTEppEva t66e OVV
Ol
XoyOL. EpLOV
,
,
,
,
,
,
10.
tv aXaiotg
ovoiv
See Note V., App.
.
11. yovecdv 'd-epaTvetac nal ripac;.
He
alludes here to the poetical
fables respecting the treatment of Saturn by his son Jupiter.
to Plato,
was the most
he often alludes
to
it,
offensive part of the Grecian mythology, and
as a sort of standing example, whenever he
See the Republic,
attacks the poets in other portions of his works. ii.,
377,
P
ra 6s
:
Tt interfered
rov
6rj
This,
K povov
epya nal
tvuOtj vtvu
tov vliog,
k. t.
X
with his high views respecting those duties which grow
out of the domestic relations, especially the duty of
filial
obedience.
furnishes his constant example, whenever he would con-
Hence it demn the demoralizing and
irreligious
tendency of some of the an-
cient poetry. 12.
ovte
tie
TOTvapaTvav opdfig eiprjTcu.
These and
similar portions
of the mythology he would altogether expunge, as being utterly in-
capable of any improved allegorical meaning, however gently he
See Note V., App. what we have said respecting these
might deal with the system as a whole. 13. nal ovv t]
deoLCL fthov “ ,
May
ancient and venerable matters be thus said as
may
be agreeable to
Heaven,” as it may be paraphrased. We see, from this expression, with what a gentle, pious, and cautious hand he touches the ancient mythology how he seems to implore forgiveness for venturing to cast away anything that might have claims to reverence for its antiquity, and which, under all its deformity, might yet, perhaps, contain the ;
corrupted and disguised remains of some primitive or anciently-revealed truth.
See Note VI., App.
14.
veov
15
TTEfn-FTTEptiEva
GO(j)tiv.
—
tc
spLTVETT s iv
Tliis
is
a term of cookery, and
—
d
CONTRA ATHEOS.
KA. Xahenov ye Xoyov w
^eve, elpr\ntbg
,
ye elg
<Jjv
ptovov
A0.
<5tj
rvyx&veu
de ore ndunoXXot rvyxdvovatv, eri
•
Xahencorepov dv
7
elrj.
Xeyupev
;
XPI $pdv
;
rjpdg
;
irorepov
anoXoyr]od)pLEOa olov KarrjyopfjoavTog rtvog tv aosdecuv avOpGJTzoig fjpojv (jxevyovot, signifies to crust
non
over —
1
,
Compare Seneca, De
crustare.
cst ista sincera felicitas
vopodeatag Xeyovaiv
rrepl rrjg
—crusta
Provid.,
6,
Also Aristophanes, Plutus,
est.
159:
A laxvvopevoi yap apyvpiov alrelv love, ’Ovopari nepnriTTOVGi
rrjv poxdrjplav.
“ With a name they crust over their depravity .”
The metaphor here
suggests the thought of vile doctrines, like pernicious and unhealthydishes, crusted over with some specious disguise to allure the eye and tempt the appetite. Socrates was ever fond of drawing com parisons from the body to the soul, from the health of the one to the
moral soundness of the other, and from the sciences and arts that pertain to the one, to that higher philosophy
the wants and relations of the other.
which
The use
is
concerned with
of this word here
corresponds well with his ordinary similes, and especially those
made use holds the
of in the Gorgias, in which false philosophy {go^lgtlkj])
same
relation to the soul that the unhealthy confectionary
art (oipoTToiucy) bears to the body.
Leip.
:
See the Gorgias, pages
28, 29,
art y Kopporucy npoq yvpvaGTtnyv, tovto go^lgtlkt] npoq vopo-
derucyv, kul otl y biponouKy npog larpLKyv tovto
pyTopmy
•
irpog diKaio-
cvvyv. 1.
(pevyovGL.
This
is
Ast, qui nos aversantur.
of law, signifies
to be
rendered by some aver sari non tolerare. So ,
It also,
as a term of the Athenian courts
defendant in a suit or prosecution as diuuov sig,
nifies the plaintiff, pursuer, or prosecutor
;
both terms being derived
from the ancient custom of the pursuit of the homicide by the avenger of blood, and from thence transferred to other legal contests both
of a
civil
renders
and criminal kind.
Ficinus, in accordance with this idea,
in judicium pertractos.
To warrant this, however,
the read-
ing should be tyevyovreg or tyevyovTag, with a change in the construc-
The first version seems so far fetched, that we would prefer combining the two ideas by translating tyevyovot, “whe tion of the Greek.
put us on our defence .”
with the whole context.
This agrees well with cnroXoyyotopeda, and
The speaker
Bhip of being compelled to
assume the
is
complaining of the hard-
attitude of apologist or de-
,
,
CONTRA ATHEOS.
s
3
&>g
deiva epya^dfxeda vopoderovyreg
XacpELV eaoavTEg teal
,
ovtcov $ecov
dog
rovg vopovg rpEntipEda ndXiv,
ettl
r/
urj
2 to npooiptov rjplv panpOTEpov yiyvr]Tat rcov vopa>v;
ov yap fipaxvg o Xoyog kuraOElg av ytyvotro ETiiOvpOVOtV aOEdELV, T&
Xoyotg
,
xpaipsv
ravra
LEV dlTodElljaipEV, 6
ra
rd
6s, Elg cj)66ov t ps-
6s, dvoftEpaLVELV nocrjoavrEg,
vopodsTolpsv
rj6r]
XiyEiv
•
oaa
irpETtsi^
psra
.
TzoXXdtag psv coays 5
’AA/l’, d) tjsvs,
toZoiv
eI
,
pETptCOg TOlg
f.
cbv E(j)patjov 6eIv TTEpi *
KA. T’G)
;
bXiy cp %po-
£t>
rovr’ a^TO siprjfcapsv, d)g ovdsv ev rep rrapovre 6sl
TtpoTipav ppaxvXoytav
pdXXov
ff
prjteog.
to Xsyopsvov, ETcstycov didwEL. ysXolov TTpo tg)v I3eXtlgto)v
rjpdg,
dr} teal
(jyavXov to
Ta Ppa^vTSpa alpovpsvovg
(patVEoOat.
6 ov epuepov apejaysneog mOavoTrjTa Tiva Tovg
6iacj)EpEi
Xoyovg
yap
ovdslg
’
rjpCbv exslv, cog
9
foot t slot
dyadot,
teal
Tip de-
d'uirjv
fendant in such a cause, and of being required to give reasons for the belief in the existence of the Deity, especially before profane and
ungodly men.
See Note
2.
Trpooipiov.
3.
rd pev drzobei^aipev
by arguments their fears
&c.
— rd
—rd
,
App.
II.,
k. t.
7i.,
“ Should in some things demonstrate
6e, elg epobov rpeipaipev,
be, five x eP 0iveiv i k. t, A.,
dislike , or appealing to
Ac.
their prejudices ,”
more generally
should in others excite
and in others making them
Or
it
may
be para-
If we should address ourselves to their reason, their fears, or their tastes namely, their moral sentiments, of
phrased
still
:
which they cannot wholly divest themselves, or
their
wholesome
prejudices. 4. It is
oaa
In most editions there
npetret.
is
a
comma
after npenei.
clear, however, that these words are connected with vopoOerol-
pev which follows, and that the
comma
should be after
5.
haye ev oliyu, “ for so short a time as
6.
apocryenug.
A
force of each part.
;
7vug
there is one such
analyze, so as to show the be rendered “ in some one way or other, at
difficult particle to It
may
(indefiniteness), whatever that
way
at least, if
no more,
way may
ye always,
or in composition, implies that the writer chooses to ing of a word, although intimating that he could say
ed him.
Troiijoavreg.
been together.”
some way, expressing the certainty that there
least;” apug, in
such a way
we have
be
;
is
ye, that
whether alone limit the mean-
more
if it pleas*
7
CONTRA ATHEOS.
y
reg dta^ epovrcog avOpcorrov. c%edbv yap tovto
andvTG)v tgjv vopo)v tcdXXcoTov te
dv
elrj.
vd
7Tore
teal
fjp.lv
vrrep
apiorov irpoolptov
prjdev ovv dvox^pdvavTeg prjde eTTeixOcvreg, rjvrt-
exopev dvvaptv elg
ttelOco tgjv
tolovtgjv Xoycjv,
urjdev arcoOepevot dte^eXOG)pev elg to dvvarbv hcav&g. ,
AO. E vxfj v pot, doted napatcaXelv* 6 Xeyopevog vtto gov vvv Xoyog ETtEidfj npodvpG)g ovvTEiveig peXXetv de ovketl eyx^pd Xeyetv. (f)epe dfj, 7rcbg dv Tig pfj 'dvpcp Xeyoc nepl $eCdV dog eioev dvdyurj yap dfj x^XenGog rjoepetv teal ptoelv *
,
;
,
etceivovg ol tovtgov fjplv alrioi tgov Xoytov yeyevrjvTai teal
ytyvovrat vvv dv rteidopevot 9 rolg pvdoig, ovg ,
oxeSov yap tovto.
YiVxv v TrapaKaheiv, “ to invite the wish,” that
wishes
—
,
thus
:
ylyvovrac.
that
nus
it is
felt
?
is,
to
second one’s
to invite one to do what he already desires to do.
yiyvovTai vvv ov
9.
is,
See Note VII., App
7.
8.
vegjv nal-
etc
rrstdojuevoi.
Nvv ovv
impossible to
In the
TceiOopevoi
make any
:
common
text this stands
the great objection to which
suitable sense out of
it.
Fici-
made a paraphrase rather than was made by Stephanus, partim (as
the difficulty, and therefore
The
a translation.
he says)
correction
veteris exemplar is ope ,
partim conjectura mea.
In fact, the
which we have given, although not altogether free from objections. It is followed by editors generally in their notes and translations, although the other reading is retained in their text. The words ov neidopevoi exigenlia loci absolutely requires the reading of Stephanus,
may
therefore be regarded, not as a
ing, but as the conclusion of the
commencement of
the follow-
preceding sentence, which runs on,
without coming to a close, until distance below.
indignant feeling
it terminates in ovk hoi iSteol, some The whole passage being the language of justlyagainst those who would ruthlessly destroy all the
religious reminiscences of youth, and
renthetical.
all
the hallowed associations
on this account, rather involved and paThe thoughts and emotions outrun the expressions,
of domestic instruction,
is,
much to be supplied to bring out the meaning in all its fulwe attempt in the following free paraphrastic transla“ For we must feel indignant, and dislike those who have ever tion been and are now the causes of such discussions who believe not the myths, which, when yet children, they heard of nurses and
leaving ness.
This
:
;
mothers
in
soothing strains of sportive or serious song, as they
lis-
tened to the prayers and gazed upon those attending spectacles (of
; -
CONTRA ATHEOS.
10
yaXa^t rpecpopevot, rpocpcov re
do)v art ev pcjv
olov ev empdalg pera re rtaididg nal pera onovdrp
,
Xeyopevovg re
y
rjfcovov nai prjre-
teat
,
teat oipetg
opa re
pera
'dvotebv,
ev ev^atg avrovg ateovovreg
optivreg enopevag avrotg ag Tjdtora o ye veog ,
rrparropevag bhjovrGJV ev onovdjj r rq peyiGTTj rcbv avrebv yovecjv vnep avrtbv re teat eteetv g)v eo teat ateovet
,
,
rcovdateorcov cbg ,
yopevcov
teat
on paXtora
iteeretatg
ovot tieolg evffiug npoodtaXe-
avareXXovrog re
*
rjXtov teal oeXrj-
nai irpog dvopdg iovrcov, repotevXtoetg apa
vrjg
teat rrpootev-
vrjpetg ateovovreg re teal optivreg 'EXXrjvcov re teal j3apda-
pG)v
10
ndvrcov ev ovpcpopatg iravrotatg e^opevcov
repaytatg oi>x ,
&g
ovruv, aXX
ovte
’
o)g
on paXtora
teal
ovdaprj vno'iptav evdidovrcov djg ovte elol
rcov
dfj
rravruv boot tearaeppovrjoavreg ovde
Xoyov wc ,
(patev
av boot nai optKpov vov
avayted^ovotv rjpag Xeyetv
a,
teal
ei;
ev evovrcjv,
'Seat,
rov -
evog Iteavov
teeterrjvrat ,
vvv
Xeyopev nebg rovrovg av rtg ,
ev rrpaeot Xoyotg dvvatro vovdercov apa dtdaoteetv nepl 'detiv TTpojrov d>g eiot
pavrjvat ,
n rovg pev
y
;
roXprjreov de. ov yap apa ye del
vtto
Xaipapytag
rjdovrjg, rjptiv,
rovg
d’
which the young soul hears and sees so joyfully solemn earnestness for themselves and their families, and by their vows and supplications conversing with the Gods as the most real of existences who too, at the risings and settings of the sun and moon, have often seen and heard the prostrations and adorations both of Greeks and Barbarians, in
religious worship)
—
their parents sacrificing with
—
every diversified situation of prosperity and adversity appealing to the Gods, not as unreal fancies, but as existing in the highest sense,
and without any suspicion to the contrary.” It is a strain of eloquence fervid and indignant, yet not unkind or harsh, against those
who, trampling under foot the most sacred associations, demand proof for that which never should have been doubted, and which seldom again finds a secure resting-place in that soul in which false reasoning, the result of licentious passions, has taken the place of
wholesome
religious authority.
10. '’EiXXrjvidv re nai j3ap6dpuv. 11.
Ov yap apa ye
See Note VIII., App.
Sec pavf/vai rove ,
pev
.
.
.
rjpuv, rove de,
&c. Ste-
phanus, Cornarius, Ast, and most of the commentators, would here any manuscripts.
reieet qpfiv, although without the authority of
We
;
CONTRA ATHEOS. vito
rov 'dviiovoQai Tolg roiovroig
tide
ng
XeyupEV
npdcjg,
odeaavreg rov ftvpov, T
VOL T(OV TOLOVTG)V,
TToXXd d)V
TTOLTjGEL
TlOegOcU
yiyvEoOai
tg)v
TTdl,
£2
OVV
TTEpl Toi)g tiEOvg opOtdg
TOV ds
VOVTCLL d£ GEL T£g. Tods
13
TT^ELOVg
£OLfl dV TO prjdEVd do^dv TTEpl 'decdv <dg ,
vvv ovdkv ,
$v 7
r]
tcaXtig
OV OV povog ovds
•
7]
y rj
ov to, ,
prj.
Trpdj-
T7]V
(f)d-
ol Gol (j)iXoi
JLJ-
*
VOGOV e%ov~
gvt&v TToXXolg (j)pdXddoVTd EH VEOV TGVT7JV TT\V
all
ovtc eIg'l ,
means “
dLdTsXsodL Trpog yrjpdg
retain
It
it,
as essential to the
l4:
frantic through the ravenings of licentiousness,
tender charity in the loss of
yptiv.
pEL-
sense
full
must not be that some of us
(yp&v)
and others
The passage would
(of us) through indignation at such persons.” all its
>
$ E(OV EG^ETE
TTEpl
kX&TTOVg TGVTTjV
TT(x)TTOTE
intended to be conveyed.
lose
XP° V0( TdVdVTLd
gol TTdpdyEyovog
tolvvv
would, however, by
,
ETTL
fCpLTljg TTEpl TG)V pLEytG-
diavor^EVTa
TO TOLOvds
*
become
de, o
Kal TTpCOTOV TGVT7JV d6%dV
TTpd)TOL
TTpolCdV ds GE 6
*
EV TL pLEya GOl p7]VVG)V OVfC dV TTOTE
TTEpl CLVTLdV
VEL7]V XpEvdpg,
EL
TOTE
Elg
piyiGTOv
.
VEOg
tcdi
•
dcaXeyope-
cog evl
VVV do^d^ELg pLETdddXoVTd
TTEpipELVOV
.
ltg) d?j TTpopprjGLg tol -
,
tt)v diavoiav dLELpOdppsvoLg
advpog rolg ovto) 12
11
binds together. the
It
two classes here described, by representing the fault of either extreme as arising out of that deep-seated depravity which is the common inheritance of the race. It may be thus paraphrased “ All :
ultraism, into
whether
which
of us are so apt to run, must be avoided
all
be the ultraism of sensuality, or of harsh and denuncia-
it
tory religious zeal.” firm believer in the
No man can be truly charitable who is common depravity of the race. Every
appearance of charity
not a
other
only a spurious liberality or a hollow indif-
is
ference. 12. Kal
heyopev
ttpaog.
Nothing can be more
in
accordance with
the very spirit of charity than this most gentle and exquisitely ten-
der address feeling, as
:
“ But
though
‘My child, you many a change
let
us say unto them, meekly quenching
we were now
are young, and time, as
it
rolls on, will
some of the tender expostulations of the Bible
my
law.
Hear
,
0
13. yiyvovTat de
angry
:
produce
Compare with
once formed,” &c.
in opinions
all
conversing with one of this class,
“
My
it
son, forget not
ye children the instruction of a father .” ,
del.
See Note IX., App.
14. diarehecrai Trpog yrjpag.
The sentiment
is
that speculative athe-
CONTRA ATHEOS.
12
vavra ev
&£ovg fielvat tisovg elvat
,
/cal
dtavorjOEt.
ra dvo pevTot
iraBij
rrepi
rcoXXolat psv ov, peivat de ovv not to tov g ,
psv cppovTt^etv de ovdev tov avOporttvov ,
rd pera tovto
dvpaot
ry
ravrorj
,
/cat
,
og (ppovTt^ovot pev, EvnapapvOrjTot ds to
ev%alg.
elot
cacpeg liv yevopevov col nepl
dfj
avTOV /card dvvaptv doypa, dv kpol
TretOrj ,
n ep/pevelg avao-
ovTog eite dXXog £%££, rcwdavopevog napd re tov dXXov, /cal dfj /cal pdXtOTa /cal 15 napa tov vopoOeTov.
icottov Eire
ev ds
dfj
tovto
Tip
aoedfjoat. TtEipaTEOv
XP° V(P FV ^oXpfja^g nepl fteovg prjdev yap to Tovg vopovg oot tlOevtl vvv,
avOtg dtdao/CEtv nepl avTov tovtov og ex £i
/cal elg
KA. K aXXtoO’ fjplv, o £eve, pexpt ye tov vvv A0. HavT&TcaoL pev ovv 2 o M eytXXe te /cal
1
,
6’ fjpdg
XeXrjOapev
avTovg
elg
-
EtprjTat.
K?i£tvta
•
fiavpaoTov Xoyov epnenro-
KOTEg.
KA. Tov rtolov dfj Xeyetg A0. Tov rrapd noXXotg do%a%op£vov anavTOv Xoyov. KA. <J>pa£’ ETt oacpEOTEpov. ;
ism does not often continue lative ly,
theism
may
take
elvat oocpOTaTOV
in old age, but that,
its place,
although a specu-
the other accompaniments, name-
unbelief in a special Providence, or an indifferent trust in the
Divine placability,
may continue
to the latest period.
We
think that
remark of Plato would be abundantly confirmed by an actual observation of life. It is seldom that we find an old man a specuIt is, lative Atheist, whatever he may have been in his youth. however, much more common to meet with those whose insensithis
bility in
respect to the reality of the Divine anger against sin
is in
which they have experienced the special care and sparing mercy of Heaven. direct proportion to the years in
15. /cal
61}
worthy of
nai paktara
notice.
K at
vious assertion, and
is
ical.
drj
The combination
commonly used a
is
and in the highest degree.”
The second
with pak/cra, and the third with vopoOerov. 1.
pexpi ye tov vvv “ so far at least.”
2.
navTaTccKn pev ovv.
“learning from from the lawgiver
fortiori ,
others, and, therefore, If from others {a- fortiori), also,
of particles here
generally denotes an application of a pre-
,
See Note XI., App.
kcll
is to
be taken
See Note X., App.
CONTRA ATHEOS. A0.
13
3
A eyovot
nov rev eg
cjg
ndvra earl rd 7jpdypara yiyrd pev, (pvoet, rd
vopeva, nal yevopeva nal yevrjoopeva, ,
re%vy, rd de did rvxd v
fie,
KA. Ovnovv naXcdg A0. E Inog ye rot nov
-
;
oocpovg avdpag opQtig
Xeyetv.
avrolg oneipcjpeda rovg enelOev f ri nore nal Tvy%avovoL diavoovpevoi.
enopevoi ye
urjv>
,
KA. Udvrcjg. A0. "E ouce, pact rd pev peytora avrcdv teal naXXcora anepyd&oOai (pvoev nal rvxd v rd de aptnpdrepa, rexvrjv rjv dfj napd (pvaecjg Xapdavovaav rr\v rtiv ueyaXcov teal npd)ro)v yeveenv epycov nXarretv nal renratveoOai ndvra c
,
•
i
j
,
rd opinporepa, a
KA. IIw^ T
A0. 5
depa
,
drj
Xeyeig
rexvtnd navreg npooayopevopev
;
eri oaepearepov epoj .
£2d’
nvp
vdo)p nal yrjv nal
real
ndvra elvac teal rvxd nal rd perd ravra av ocapara
(pvoet
rovreov.
6
.
Text'd de ovdev
*
yrjg re nal rjXlov
,
nal oeXrjvrjg aorpejv re nepi did rovrtov yeyovevai nav,
,
reX&g ovrcov aipvxMV. Tvxd de (pepopeva rjj rr]g dvvdpecjg enaqra enaorcov, rj £vpnenreonev appdrrovra olneicog ncog ,
3.
“
’Eikoc ye rot nov.
may be
It
E Uog nov its
ye,
is
“
This
likely, at least,
the usual Socratic or Platonic irony.
is
that these wise people talk correctly.”
likely, plausible, probable, at least, if not certain .”
a combination of particles deserving special notice.
usual limiting sense as given above
;
rot, like $7,
strengthens the limitation, while nov seems
in
Te
rot
Te has
confirms and
the usual
manner
to
diminish the positiveness of the expression by way of appeal to the party addressed. “ Surely (rot) may we say, may we not (nov), that these wise 4.
quod ex
illo
that Ast
may
men
talk plausibly at least (ye), to use
rovg eKeldev.
Haud
consequitur.
wrong.
is
no stronger term.”
dubie (says Ast) scribendnm est, to eKeldev,
We
The
have but
old
little doubt, on the other hand, and established reading, rove, eKeldev,
be rendered “ those from, or of that school,” namely, their
lowers, those
who expand and
explain the doctrine
the next answer. 5.
nvp
6.
(j>v<jei
Kcii .
vdcjp Kal yrjv. .
.
rexvy.
See Note XII., App.
See Note XIII., App.
more
fully,
fol-
as in
,
CONTRA ATHEOS.
14
paXaKa repog OKXrjpd^ real 7ravra birooa rq rdrv evavriorv Kpaoei Kara rvx'ijv £% avdyn7]g ovvenepaodr], ravrq nai Kara ravra ovra> yeyevdeppa \pvxpoig,
npog vypd
%r]pa
rj
,
teal
vrjKEvai rov re ovpavov oXov nai iravra breboa
vov
oa av
teal
•
nar ovpa ’
(pvrd %vpiT avra, dptiv iraotiv
teat
rojv yevopevcov , ov did vovv, (paoiv
,
rov -
Etc
ovde did rtva
tieov
7
ovde did vrjv ds
aXXd, o Xeyopev,
rex'V'rjVi
vorepov
Etc
•
T ^Xm
rovrcov vorepav yevopev'qv avrrjv
fivT]-
,
vorepa yeyevvrjKevai iraididg nvag
rr\v he '&V7]rdjv,
Oeiag ov oepodpa perexovoag eavrdrv, oV
rbxvai
slot ovvepiQoi
rdv
oi
yevva
ypacpiterj
fj
dvvapiv
yvpvaoriKij.
aZ
•
rag
KA.
II tig
de
E/coivcooav
teal yeorpyiKij
drj
rd
teaXa, (pvoei
dtteata
to ttoXv. ovrar ds
•
pev dXXa
d)
o,
,
teal
teal
•
ap(pto6rjrovv-
nvi napa
drj
teal iroirjrddv , (paoteovrcov
cpvoEi .
•
Tadr'
vioig avOpd)-
Eivai rd dueaio-
rl rig dv vitea (dia^opEVog. oOev aoibEial re av-
0pd)TTOig epniiTrovoi veoig, d)g ovtc ovrcov $ed)V oiovg o
pog npoorarrei diavoeioOai delv eXteovrG)v
rd
orav, rors tevpia Eteaora Eivai, yiy -
are avra dvdpcbv oocpcbv
re
d/L/l’
teal
•
peraridepevovg del ravra
rotg vopoig , a/M/ ov
teat
cp'iXoi
Txoig, idt(x)rd)v
rarov
eivai, vopep ds erepa
5
dv psraOcovrai
EorLv,
teat
aXip
rjg ovtc
*
rovrovg aXXovg aXXoig,
teal
ovd Eivai ronapanav (pvoei
vbpEva rEXvy
teal
noXiriKrjv opiKpov ri pbpog eh
Etcaoroi eavroioi ovvcrpoXbyrjoav vopoOsrovpevoi
teal
<3’
ryj (pvoEi
;
rag diareXeiv aXXrjXoig
a
oreovdalov apa yevvdj-
paKapie, Etvai irpdrrov (paoiv ovroi rexvrj,
0)
,
,
drj
boat ravraig
,
ov (pvoEi dXXd, not vopoig otttj
teal
ov (pvoei rexv^j de
,
dXrj-
,
drra £vyyEvrj
'deoeig.
Xeyeig
A0. Oeovg
/ecu
(pvoei, rex^Xl
vopodeoiav irdoav
Oelg Eivai
povoiK?),
teal
em
Eldar)1’
olov av larpiKrj
•
teal drj teal rrjv
vat (paoi tcoivcovovv rrjv
(5’
,
dXXd
ravrag onboai
rExvcbv, eivai
rrjv avrdrv
cpvoei teal rvxxi
s
repog
*
voftodeolav naoav.
8.
kTiKovTov.
The
-
oraoeig re did ravra,
rov Kara (pvoiv opdov
7.
vo
(3iov,
og
eon ry
See Note NIV., App.
article rtiv
would seem
to
be required here
be-
CONTRA ATHEOS.
15
dXrjdEta
uparovvrd £rjv r&v aX/io)v, nal
eTEpoiOi
Kara
KA. 0 iov
vopcov
disXrjXvOag,
gj
%eve
Xoyov
,
avOpdoncov veo)v drjpoGta ttoXegl te
A0
'AXrjOrj piivTOL Xsystg,
.
SovXevovra
pbrj
.
o)
60772; Xibbrjv
,
teal idioig olnoig.
K Xsivla.
tl ovv oIel XPV~
vac dpav rov vopoOsrrjv ovtg) tovtg)v tt&Xcu napEGnsvaG
-
,
p,ev G)v
piovov dixsiXslv
rj
;
av0pd)7TOLg
Govrai TTEpi
(bg, el per/
,
ordvra ev
(frrjGovoLV
9
do^d^ovrsg roiovrovg olovg
,
naXCbv
,
6
cfirjGlv
vopiog
/cat
;
nal nspl andvrcov rtiv psyLGTGJv
teal ducaitev,
6 avrog Xoyog oaa re
gvpinaGi rolg
t'q t:6Xei
stvai tisovg acil diavorjOrj-
7rpd$*
,
dpsrrjv telvel nal nantav ,
ravra ovtg) nparrsiv, dtavoovpsvovg burjirsp dv 6 vopo<5’ av ptfj rrapEx^rai savrov 0sT7]g v(p7]y'rjGrjrac ypd(j)cov
deZ
•
nva
rolg vopoig evttelO?7 rov psv dslv rsOvavcu, rov 6s ,
nXrjyalg nai bsGpolg rov 6e , dripiicug, dXXovg 6s 'nsviaig ,
noXa^EGOcu
real
(bvyalg
ttelOg)
*
no authority of manuscripts
fore eA/cwrcjv, although there is It
seems
6e rolg dvQpbbnoig, 10
to refer to (pacKovruv above.
“
Hence
mode
ion),
of life which
which consists, and to be
others,
is
right by nature (that
in reality, in so living as to
is,
it,
young)
in their opin-
have power over
subjection to none by virtue of law.”
in
for
factions or quarrels
arise by reason of these things, while they violently drag (the to that
apa
In this
metaphorical expression, ehwvruv, Plato seems to have had an eye to
some of those
violent contests
which Homer so vividly describes
as taking place over a dead body, in which both sides are pulling
with
all
their might, the
one to carry
off,
the other to rescue
;
as in
the battle over the body of Patroclus, in the sixteenth book of the Iliad. It is
He
rises,
however,
infinitely
above
Homer
not the dead body of the slain hero which
is
in his subject.
here the object of
young man that the atheistic crew are seeking to drag down to their own kingdom of darkness or, to accommodate the language of the Grecian poet to a sense far beyond his highest conceptions, we may say, with a slight change contention, but the living soul of the
;
of the verse,
Iliad, xxii., 161
’A/UA 9.
10.
7repi
:
X VXVC pdpvavrai dSavaroio.
See Note NV., App. tteiOcj
de rolg uvftpi'oTcoig.
about ten lines back
;
Connect
this
and then, by leaving out
with all
rj
piovov dnei7^eh\
that
is
explanatory
16
CONTRA ATHEOS.
riQevru avrolg rovg vopovg, prjdeplav ex^iv TOi C hoyoig irpooamovra eig dvvapiv ?fpepovv ;
KA.
Mrjdapcbg,
nal opinpd
oj
%eve
dAA’ einsp rvyxdvei ye ovoa
•
ra roiavra del
rig rrepl
ttslOg)
,
prjdaprj napveiv
rov ye d^iov nal opinpov vopoOerrjv, dAAa naoav to Ae,
yopevov,
ievra
(jrcjvrjv
veodai Aoyo),
11
nal boa vvv
nal vopep avrep fiorjOrjoai nal rexv^l
d?)
ovx
(pvoecog
enucovpov yiy-
rep rcaXaicp vopep
,
d)£ eiol deot,
y ov opOov ov ov re Xeyeiv poi
eorov
'
,
(ftvoei
eon yevvr\para nard
vov ye
rjrrov, ehrep
ov nal
dirjXOeg
dr)
rj
Ao-
,
morevet
(paivy nal eycb ooi
ravvv.
A0.
T
£2 7
jpoQvporare KXeivla, ri d
%vvanoXovQelv A byoig eig nenrrjrai duoXvyia
them
attaching
ov ^aAerrd re
A eyopeva,
TrXrjOr)
prjnrj
may be
exhibited thus
eon
re av
12
“ Or ought he
:
only, that unless they shall say, &c.
to his
it
;
;
Dr parenthetical, the contrast
to threaten
9
;
but not, by
arguments, exercise persuasion towards
the same time that he lays
down
men
at
the laws, so that (by such persua-
may
render them as mild, or as well-disposed towards the laws as possible.” As here may be rendered “ and,” sive arguments) he
sometimes a disjunctive Or may be better brought out, and the con-
which, in a similar connexion particle
:
the disjunctive force of 6e
nexion with the
first
by rendering
ed,
in English, is
“ Shall he threaten, &c., and shall he not persuade!”
it
part of the sentence at the
“ instead of,” thus
instead of using persuasion!” &c.
well as aTZELlelv, will depend on
olei
11. Tzuaav (povTjv levra, “ letting
nothing which
may
:
“
same time
preserv-
Ought he only to threaten
In this construction, exeiv, as xpyvat, about twelve lines back.
out
all
his voice,” that
is,
omitting
A proverbial
tend to produce conviction.
ex-
seems somewhich the Greek poets of nautical metaphor, what to resemble a were very fond, and of which we have a striking example, Eurip., Medea, 280 pression, for
which see Erasmus, Adag.,
p.
788.
It
:
’Ex^poc yap k^lacn izdvra “
For
under 12.
my
enemies
full sail, firjKrj
let
out
all
6rj
k&Xov.
their rope,” that
is,
“ are attacking
me
and straining every nerve.”
re av.
There
sudden change from the
is
a harshness here in consequence of the
participle to the indicative
mode
KEicrTjrai.
•
CONTRA
KA. T l
6s, co t-eve
;
ATIIEOS.
nspl psOrjg
13
17
psv nal povoncfjg ovrco 14
imnpd Xeyovrag rjpdg avrovg irsptspLStvdpLSv nepl tisoov 6s nal pfjv real vopoOs feat rcbv rotovrov ovx VTcopLSVoiyisv ,
-
;
old ys sort irov r q psrd (ppovrjosog ptsyLorr} porjOstd, 6 lotl rd nspl vopovg npooraypara sv ypdppdoc rsOsvra cog 6co,
aovra ovt
1
xpovou sXeyxov
slg iravra
si
xa ^ £1T d
tear
7
rtdvrcog fjpspsl
,
dpxdg dnovstv sort
1
15
coots
a y so ’
(jyobrjTsov ,
Tdi Kdi TCO 6vOpddsl TroXXdfCLg STTdVLOVTL si pd/cpd, cocbsXipd 6s,
*
OfCOTTSLV
*
OVTS
6id Tdvrd Xoyov ov6dpr] sx £ ^ ov6e
ooiov spotys slvdt cpdivsTdi to
ov
prj
(3or)0slv
rovroig rdig
Xoyotg ndvTd dv6pd tedTd 6vvdptv.
MEr. vkpiOTd,
co
A0. Kdl udXd
ye,
j
This, however, indeed, this 13.
is
co
MsytXXs
ttoltjtsov re d)g Xsyei.
must be rendered as though
were KEKTypeva,
it
This refers to discussions
in the first and third which had been continued at great length. linger around a subject to wait one’s own lei-
—
vnopevG), “ to endure, to wait with patience.”
vovpev supply TZEpipevEiv, thus
not endure to wait]”
patiently]”
if,
treatise,
14. Trepipevo, “ to
sure.”
we
*
not the true reading.
peOyg.
7TF.pl
books of this
K Xsiviag.
gsvs, 6onsl Xsystv
There
is
ov% vnopEvovpev
:
After vnope-
TZEpipevEiv,
we
taken adverbially, “ shall
or,
“ shall
not wait
evidently a case of paronomasia, or play upon
words here. “ Are altogether silent .” Compare God Theuth in th.e Phaedrus, 275, commended, as better than that of
this
with the myth
respecting the
D.,
where
struction
books, and doubts
ypepel.
15.
is
are suggested, whether, after service to
mankind
:
tKeivyg EarrjKEv uev ug 6e nai
7]
all,
the art of writing has been of real
ug dhyOtig bpocov (ypaQy) faypatyia gCivra,
edv
oral in-
6’
dvepy
tl,
aepvcjg
navv
•
Kai yap ra
ciyp. ravrov
ypa<py. edv tl spy (3ovX6pevog paOelv , Iv tl cypaiveL
pbvov rau-
ovk entararaL XeyeLV olg del ye nai py T:\yppi\ovpEvog de Kai ovk tv bitcy TioLdopyQeig rov naTpog dei Seltol fioydov. avrog yap
rbv
del. Kai
•
ovt upvvaoOaL ovte [loyOyaaL dwaToq avT(p.
In the Gorgias, 525, B.,
’
this
term ypepel
this, to
is applied, in a
somewhat
different
the victorious party or argument that holds
quietness after the rest ,
have been
silenced
:
manner from its
gronnd in
dW ev roaovToig "koyoig
rtiv dTJiov kTieyxopevav ovTog ypepel 6 Tibyog. 1.
ETzavLovTi.
Like a gerund, “ Scepius animo agitando .”
B 2
18
CONTRA
Kal yap
ATIIEOS.
KareonappevoL fjoav
el pfj
roiovrot XoyoL ev
ol
enog elnelv avOpunoig, ovdev dv
rolig TiaoLV (bg
euapvvovvrcdv Xoycvv
(hg slot
deot
ovv diatyOeipopevoLg rolg peylorotg vuo rlva nal paXXov npoafjKet
KA. 0 VK 5
A0.
j3orj0elv
e det tCjv
vvv 6s dvaynr}. vopoig
•
fj
natctiv dvOpcbncov
vopoOerrjv
;
ZGTIV.
AXkd
Xeye pot tt&Xlv
dfj
KA eivla,
Kal ov. kolvgj-
vov yap del oe zivai r<bv Xoyuv. Kivdvvevei 2 yap 6 Xeyo)v ravra nvp Kal vdup Kal yfjv ical aepa npcbra fjyeloQai ,
i
,
7ravTG)v zivai
t(x)v
Kal rfjv (pvocv ovopa^eiv ravra avrd
,
pvxfjv de zk rovrcjv vorepov. zolkz de ov Kivdvveveiv
dvr cog or\paiveLV ravra
KA.
II
aw
,
aXka
fjplv rep Xoycp.
pev ovv.
y
A0. Ap’ ovv
,
A cog
7rpog
olov
irrjyfjv
nva
avorjrov
doi-rjg
dvzvprjKapzv dvOpcbncov ottoool reebnore rcbv nzpl cpvoecog ecbfjxpavro £rjrrjparcov
yap
dfj
okottzl irdvra
;
,
opuepov ye ro deaepepov,
eipTjpaprrjpevcog
3
e^era^cov. ov
Xoycov anrope -
el (pavelev
vol aoedcov, aXXoig re e^apxovreg,
dAA’
Xoyov
prjde ev rolg koyoig,
xp&pevoi. doKel rotvvv poc ravra ov-
rcog exeev.
KA. E v A0. 2.
Xeyetg
’'FiOLKe
1
dAA
5
orrrj , rreLpco
cppa^eLV.
roivvv arjOeorepcov anreov 4 zivai Xoycov.
The primary sense
Kivdvvevei.
of this
word
“ to be in dan- « “ to seem.” The
is
the secondary and quite as frequent sense is connexion between them is not obvious. In its secondary meaning it is not synonymous with doKei, and the primary may be preserved with tolerable distinctness in many of those places in which it is ren-
ger
dered “ to seem.”
As, for example, in this passage,
—“ ventures
to
regard,” or “ is in danger of regarding.” It implies that the sentiment is a bold one, and one which, probably, he would not adopt, if he could trace all the consequences of this dogma, viz., “ that fire,
and water, and
earth,
firmation of this view,
:
opiKpov ye to diadepov,
yap “ for
In conair, were the first of all things.” compare what follows a few lines below ov
and
it
el
<j>avelev
would make no small difference
This sense of Ki.vdvvevo e^dpxovreQ
is
4.
dr)6earepa)v.
anropevoi daeOoVf
they should appear,”
quite a favourite with Plato.
— auspicantes —qui
3.
if
Tioycov
aliis
See Note XVI., App.
auctores sunt.
&c
CONTRA ATHEOS.
KA. Ovn EKTog eI
6kv7]teov
(b
,
19
%eve. pavdavo)
yap
vopoOsctag
(bg
patvstv, sav rcbv tolovtcjv dnrcbpEda Xoycov.
oh'jorj
5
7 rolg vvv Kara vopov ds egtl prjdapr) STEporg GvpcfroJvrjGat
XsyopsvoLg dsolg
•davpacts, teat ravrrj
A syotp?
A0.
exovglv
(bg opOtig
i)
dv, (bg sotnev ,
rjdrj
vat ysyovog oi tt)v rtbv aosdcbv 6
vorspov TTpoTspov.
o ds
cb
cx^ddv ova slorOoTa Xo(pOopag alrtov
teal
'ijrvx'rjv
sl-
dnEpyaodpsvot Ao-
oOsv rjpaprrjtcaGt
,
irspl
dstbv
ovotag.
TTjg bvTG)g
KA.
a eicteov,
rovro ov uptirov aXXa vorspov anE(f>r)vavTO
dr:dvro)v,
*
,
.
yov Ttvd rovds. o TTpcbrov ysvEGEorg
yot
ravrrj
Ovtcg) pavdavo).
A0. 'kvx'rjv, cb sratps, rjyvorjnsvat ntvdvvEvovot psv oXtyov i-vpnavTEg olov te ov rvyxdvst /cat dvvaptv fjv sxet *
r(bv te aXXorv avrrjg irspi, nat dr) real ysvEGsarg, (bg sv nptb9 roig egtl Gorparcov EpnpooOev irdvrorv yEvopsvrj nat psra ,
apxm rtavTog apa ovtc eg avdyurjg rd ysyovoTa T(bv GtbpaTt
doXrjg te avTtbv nat p£Tanocpr)GEG)g aTTdcrjg
paXXov
si
.
ds egtl
,
5.
dr)
9
sir)
*
nat
dr)
ovptyMvrjoat.
kizqidEiv, kneidy,
ol rrjv
all
Similar terms in similar con-
the dialogues, such as gwclSelv,
&c.
rtiv dosbivv Tpvxyv uTVEpyaadpEvot hoyoi, “
pression, UTTEpyaGapEvot o de vorspov
irpaif-
was very fond of metaphorical expressions
Plato
the soul of the impious
7.
;
nat Ta psyaXa nat irpcbTa spy a nat
nexions are found throughout
6.
G(bpaTog
paXanebv nat ftapEorv nat noveporv npoTE-
derived from the science of music.
ovvudy,
rj
EntpsXEta nat vovg nat texvt) nat vo-
teal
G/tXrjpcbv nat
pa dv
sir)
’A vaynr).
A0. A 6%a pog
oviorg,
ovG7]g TavTrjg rcpEGdvTEpag
7ipog7]k6vtg)v,
KA.
TavTa
TrpOTEpa dv
GvyyEvrj
what
rrjv rrjg
it
is.”
which render
Equivalent to this other ex-
avrCrv Tpvxvc uGE&stav.
( arr Efo'jvavro ) 7rporspov.
They
are guilty of the
which logicians style hysteron proteron that is, putting the effect for the cause, and the cause for the effect which they did, in making rexvrj posterior to dvotg and rvx rj. See Note XVII., App. 8. 9. Guudrtov epTrpooOEv.
fault
,
;
%
;
,
20
CONTRA ATHEOS. ^v ytyvoLTo, ovra ev
eig , 7 sx vrJ^
nal *
real
•
ra de
opQtig eirovopa^ovaiv avrb'
cj)vcng (jjv ovtc
rspa
Trpcoroig
apxopeva av
etc
0
cf)vasi
tovto) vg-
Texvrjg eh] nal vov,
KA. ITwf A0. Ov/c opOtig (f>voiv povXovraL Xeyeiv yevsoiv rfjv rrepl rd npdjra. el 6s (fravrjoerai 'ipvx'rj nptirov, ov ttv p ovde drjp, 'ipvx'rj
<
ev npuroig yeyevrjpevrj
5’
oxedov
,
11
opdorara
Xeyoir’ av elvai dLacpepovTCog, ore (pvoei 12 ravr eoO ovTCog ’
exovra, av
reg
'ijjvx'fjv
emdei^
’
irpeodvrepav ovoav o bbpa-
rog , aXXcog de ovdap&g. *
KA.
’A XrjOeoTara Xeyeig.
A0. Ovtcovv rd perd ravra ueOa
f
en'
avro
6rj
tovto otsXXo)*
;
KA. T t
prjv
;
A0. QvXaTTCjpev
drj
navTanaoLV dnaTr]Xbv Xbyov
,
prj
10. avro tovto, “ which they incorrectly call this very thing,” namely, “ this first thing, which we call iftvxTr, they call $vgls” vg-
Tepa nal, &c., “Nature and
by
11.
its
works would be posterior
to and ruled
and reason, or mind.”
art
ox^bbv, here, does not qualify opdorara but \eyoiTo , ,
almost be said with the highest degree of correctness.”
—“
it
It, in fact,
renders the whole declaration stronger instead of weakening
seems to be often used as a sort of apology and thus, instead of diminishing or impairing mon rendering ( almost ) would imply, it has
might
it.
It
for a bold expression, its force,
as the com-
directly the contrary
effect. 12. pvGEi.
“
It
might then be said with the highest degree of cor-
rectness, that these things are thus by nature that soul
how
to
is
,
if
any one should show
older than body, but otherwise not.”
Plato seems some-
have changed the sense of the word upon the
evidently here
ever that
may
makes
the
same with
it
may
this be said to
in a contest with those
it
If
any
certainly should be
whose whole strength
consists in the dexterous use of such words as tvxv, ,
He
,
be the order of nature.
as a mere play upon words,
deemed pardonable nature &c.
atheist.
the truth of things what-
be, and, therefore, if soul is o.der than body, then in
the highest sense
should regard
tyvGig
<f>voi(;,
chance
CONTRA ATHEOS. itt]
npeadvrag rjpag ovrag veonpenrjg
a(j)vycbv
naTaysXaOTOvg
baXkdpevoi™ Kadanep ovra
ei
1
*
icar^
on
,
eon
£%££, teal (j)avevTog
TtpeobvTEpoig ovot
,
Kivdvvov yeyovivai
13. fail
6
aoeptiXel, OKS'ipao-
vplv
real
,
rj
irtig
pev ravr y, ttaXelv vpag tots aal ovv-
dtabtba^Etv epnEipia el be abarog
vvv
em-
irplorov epe xprjvat ixeipaQi]-
epavrov KaraXcnovra vpag ev
Ocu el diabarog
real
dd^cjpev, pet^ova
vetbrarog 6’ eyob rvy^avoov vptbv aai ttoXXcov ,
vac
teal
/
irorapov rjpag edec rpelg ovrag biabaivEiv ps-
o(j)6<5pa ,
epiretpog pevpdro)v elnov 15
*
cov uapa7T£LO q y /cal di-
cpuip&v anorvxeZv. uicon sire ovv ,
rtiv
/cat
Trotrjo'd
21
•
peXXw eon
Xoyog
fjv (bg
vplv ev epoi rov ,
av eddfcovv Xeyeiv. nai
perplcjg
ccfrodpoTEpog, nai
oxedov loug
“Lest, aiming at things too great,
emSaXXopevoi.
Srj
we
should
even of the small.”
14.
Kadanep
The common reading
el.
is el
Kadanep.
We
have
ventured to make the change from the exigency of the place, and on the authority of Stephanus ly-flowing river.”
;
“ as
if
we
three had to cross a violent-
— See Note XVIII., App.
15. neipadijvai.
Whenever a verb
is
used only
voice to the entire exclusion of the active, or
predominant form
— or
when
when
in the
middle
the middle
is
the
the active has a causal signification,
thus giving rise to what in the middle
is seemingly an independent such cases, the passive aorists and passive perfect do not denote the receiving of an action, or, in other words, are not the
sense
—
in all
passive of the active, even when it is in use, but are strictly middle Thus, neipdu “ to tempt another ;” neipdopai “ to tempt
tenses.
,
,
one’s self, or to attempt, to try ;” neipadrjvai not to be tempted but “ to attempt, or try ;” same as the middle. So, also, 7rAa£b, “ to ;” cause to wander nhdfypai, “to wander;” nXayxdrjvai, not “ to be ,
made
to
,
wander,” but to wander same as the middle. Such cases Nothing seems to us to be gained by ;
are very frequent in Greek.
them deponent, a term which would seem to belong peculiarly where there is no middle form, except as it is supplied by the passive. In Greek no good reason can be assigned why such calling
to the Latin
verbs should be regarded as essentially different from others of the middle voice. This peculiarity does certainly exist in cases where there
is
an actual middle beyond
all
shown in the use both same sense.
doubt, as
of the middle and passive aorists with the
3
22
CONTRA ATHEOS.
a6arog l vplv
ocp&v p(bpq
(bg 737
•
pi] 6i)
onorodivlav iXiyyov* rs
napacpepopevog re nai epcjrdjv arjOecg ovrag
epiroirjorj,
airoKpLoeuv elr' dox'rjpoovvrjv airperxeidv re evreay] ,
arjdr],
avepurav pot xp^l vai 17 oielv ovro)al ravvv epe TTpGjrov epavrov cuiovovTGdv vpibv ev docpaXel, ical pera done!
6rj
*
ravra dirouptvaodai TrdXtv epe teal rov Xoyov duavra ovto) diegeXOelv, axpcnep dv 'ipvxijs ^cept dianepavij-cu, nal •
deify
71
porepov ov V
KA. A pior\
(b
'ijwxijv
O(bparog.
fyve, frorcelg rjplv elprjicevat
•
ixolet
re
(bg
Xeyetg.
A0. "Aye fy* dedv elnore uapanXrjreov tovto ovtg) yevopevov 1
.
(jxedov
ujug
a6arog.
*
enl ye anodeii-tv
See page 20
,
11
.
Here
rjplv,
vvv eo~G)
(bg elol rijv
av-
also, Gxebov, instead
of impairing, increases the force of the expression, and may be regarded as an apology for not using a stronger term. “ might
We
almost say aSarog” &c. 2
.
oxoTobcvlav ITuyyov re vplv spnoLr/Gri.
These are favourite terms
with Plato to express that state of intellectual dizziness with which the soul approaches the contemplation of those great truths, which
may
he regarded as the apxal or foundations of
all
Compare
others.
the language used in the beginning of the seventh book of the Republic,
as applied to those
who
are supposed suddenly to emerge from the
dark cave of error and phenomena into the upper world of
Compare, also, the Gorgias, 527, A.
truth.
That
this
language was
common
;
light
and
Theaetetus, 155, D.
with Socrates himself, and that
Plato in this, as well as in almost everything else, truly represents his peculiarities, not only of reasoning, but of style,
from the manner
may
be inferred
which Aristophanes joins together these two terms in evident allusion to Socrates, whose philosophy and favourite modes of speech he omits no opportunity to ridicule, not only in the Clouds, but also in many places of his other comedies. Vide the in
Acharnenses, 1218. ITuyyuo Kapa Xldtp 7rEn?i7jyphogy Kal GKOTodiviib. 3.
'KctpatyepopEvog.
stream
4.
still
sustained, although, in a critical point of view,
awkwardly dropped in tporuv. See Note XVIII., App. See Note XIX., App.
rather both.
is
In this word the metaphor of the rushing
T^oyog is to
it
is
be supplied for
c
CONTRA ATHEOS. rwr, onovd'Q iraorf napaKeuXrjoOuv
23
6 exoperoi de
.
nvog
tig
aGcfraXovg netGparog, Emdacvoopev elg rov vvv Xoyov.
poi eX eyxopbvcp
,
8
(paXeorara dnonpivEoda
rav
dpa
rtg,
(pr\
icaZ
nepl rd rocavra epojrrjOEGL roialode da-
1
EorrjKE
Kara
(paLverai.
pev navra
ds,
d) Z-eve ,
ono -
KiveZrai de ovdev
9 ,
;
rj
rd pev avrtiv tuveZrat rd de pevEL Ta pev ntveZrai nov 10 (prjGU), rd ds psvei. Mwv Tm to re eortira egttjue /ecu to Kivovpeva otw 11 edpa nov av ye ev tuveZrat IIw^ ydp ov Ka£ to rovrcp
7T
av rovvavrtov
;
?]
,
,
;
,
;
j
5. 6.
See Note XIX., App. kxopevoL 6e &g tivoq do^akovg neerparog.
some sure
There
cable.”
is still
“ Holding fast as by
preserved here the metaphor of
the dangerous flood, and there can be no doubt, that by this sure cable is
meant
just prayed. 7.
that Divine strength and guidance See Notes XVIII. and XIX., App.
This word
ElEyxopeva).
“convicted of error.” in
an argument.”
It
is
which he had
generally rendered “ refuted,” or
here, however,
It
for
means simply “engaged
thus frequently used in the Gorgias and
is
elsewhere. 8.
dnoKpLVEGdcLL, “ to take the part of respondent” as well as that
of interrogator. 9.
egttjke
10. nov.
Kara
ds
— See Note XX., App.
See Note XX., App.
psv navra.
This
.
particle, of so frequent
use
in the Platonic dia-
logues, in its primary sense implies doubt or hesitation, fore, generally said to
tion, in a
manner
employed,
take
away from
directly the opposite of
when nothing
of this kind
and
is,
there-
the positiveness of a declaraIt is,
drj.
is really
however, often
intended, but only an
appearance of it, in those familiarities of the colloquial
style, to
which
a term of courtesy, by
this particle is so
admirably adapted.
which the speaker,
to avoid being thought dogmatic or positive, ap-
It is
peals to the other party for his assent, without, however, intending
any doubt of the proposition advanced. <f)rjco) ,
it
KivELTcu,
If connected here with
should be rendered, “I will say, shall it
comes nearly
to the
same
thing, “
I
not?’
some
Or
if
with
things move, do
they not 1”
Perhaps a better exGreek to illustrate the essential difference between the present and the perfect. From its very nature .he idea of rest is finished and complete, and is therefore denoted 11.
EGTcjra egtijke
.
..
.
ample could not be found
KLvovpEva kiveItcu. in
)
24
CONTRA ATHEOS.
rovro
dpcbrj,
ra de ev ,
Td
TcXetoot.
Xap6avovra dvvaptv Aeyeig,
peocp
Ocu , KaOdnep izeptcpopa
r\
pa rov peytorov
yovoa
7]
polg re
teal
de ye d)g ev ravrpj
nepupo-
rfj
rov optKporarov kvkXov apa
roiavTTj KtvrjOig.
ava Xoyov
13
irepid-
eavrrjv diavepei opiK-
pei^ooiv, eXarrcov re ovoa Kai nXelcov Kara
/cal
Xoyov. did
(brjoopev, ev evl Kivelo-
rtiv eoravai Xeyopev cov kvkXoov orpecperai
N at. MavOavopev
;
eorurcjv 1 * ev
tt)v rtiv
drj
r&v fiavpaortiv 14
airavrcov
yeyovev,
irrjyri
dpa peyaXoig Kai optKpolg KVKXocg (dpadvriqrdg re nai raxp opoXoyovpeva 15 n opevovoa, advvarov (bg av rig eXntoeie yiyveoOai naOog. ’A XrjOeorara Xeyetg. ra de ye Ktvovpeva ev rroXXolg
vovra
1
(palvp\
pot Xeyeiv , boa (popa Kivelrat peradat-
elg erepov del rorrov
evog KeKrrjpeva
•
Kai rore pev ,
nvog Kevrpov rore ,
KvXivdeloOai. npoorvyxdvovra by the
2
Such verbs, however, as
present.
express positive
rest
,
is
ore fiaoiv
de nXecova,
rw nepu
eKaorore eKaoroig rolg ,
Motion, on the other hand,
latter tense.
continued or incomplete action, and
much
d’
eonv
necessarily
is
therefore expressed hy the
tt avo,
navopai
Arjyv,
,
do not so
as a ceasing of previous action, which,
being a continuous idea, admits of a present form. “ You mean, then, we will reply (to out 12. Td tt]v rtiv karurov.
imaginary interlocutor) that those which receive the faculty or prop erty
(
dvvaptv of things at rest in the centre (another
mode
of say
mg, the properly of being at rest, &c.) move in one, just like theAnother, and revolutions of those wheels that are said to stand.” perhaps a better
way would
be to take piatp with hapSdvovra, in
stead of kardruv, after this order, ra kv peotp ’kapbdvovra
kardrov dvvaptv.
Ficinus renders
13.
See Note XXI., App.
14.
See Note XXII., App. opu^oyovpeva, to be taken
15.
Advvarov
.
.
.
nddog,
“a
—
rrjv
rfiv
quee in medio stare possunt
adverbially
for
opoTioyovphtjq.
state of things (nuOoq) which, as
one would
expect, could not possibly take place.” 1.
kv itoXXolc, the opposite of kv hi.
tion.”
Or
“
On many
rolling on a plane, instead of revolving
such as Sextus Empiricus styles romayv perdSaatv. Pyrrh. Hypot., iii., 8 and 64. 2.
7t
poorvyxdvovra.
“As
centres of
mo-
on a fixed point, Sext, Emp.,
they meet continually *Vith individual
.
CONTRA ATHEOS.
25
3
korCxu pev diaofti&Tai, Tolg
TUCK nal (pepopevoig
s^ovra
(hg
dXXrjXocg e£ evavrtag
anav -
yiyvopeva peoa re nal pera^v
elg ev
ovyupivercu. Xeyo) yap ovv ravra ovrcog
tolovtcvv
t£)v
d’
ov Xeyscg
nal ovynpivopEva pev av$;d-
real prjv
.
1
verac
,
dianpivopeva 6s (pdtvei
kndoTCJV E^tg diapev^
anoXXvTai. ylyvETaf drjXov d>g
pr)
•
dr)
tote OTav
9
pevovGijg de avTrjg di dpcpOTepa ,
navT(ov yevEGig
onoTav ap%r) Xadovoa
tjvlk
,
av
tl
n a-
5
av^rjv, elg ttjv dev-
$ TEpav eXOrj peTadaoiv, nal and TavTrjg ;
naOeoTTjnvla
7]
,
elg ttjv nXrjoiov,
nal pEXpt Tpitiv eXOovoa aloOrjfUv oxzi r olg aioOavopEVotg. ,
pETadaXXov pev ovv ovtoj nal peTamvovpevov ytyvETac nav. eotl 6e ovTug ov, s onoTav pevrj peTabaXbv de elg •
dXXrjv egiv, diecpOapTai navTeXtig. dp ovv nivrjGEig naoag ’
elprjnapEV (bg ev e16egi Xadelv uet’ aptOpov, nXrjv ye,
cb (pt-
j
Xol dvolv ,
KA.
;
II oiaiv drj
A0. X^edov, rlv
t]
Gne'iptg
KA. Aeye A0.
; 9
cb
yaOe eneivatv ,
,
evena naoa
cov
rjpZv eg-
Tavvv, GacpeOTEpov
vxTjg fjv evena
nov
;
KA. Jlavv uev ovv A0. "E (7T6) TOtVVV 7] UEV ETEpa dwapEVrf EavT7)v de adwaTOvoa alel pea Tig d’ .
j
j
•
Am
niVElv niV7]Gl
eavTrjv r’ aZet
9
erepa dvvapevr] naTa te GvynpiGEtg ev re dianptGEGcv
,
av^acg te nal Tcb evavTicp, nal yeveoeot nal cpOopatg a X Xr\ ,
ata Ttg av tg5v nao&v ntvrjGEtiv .
KA.
’Kcrrct)
yap ovv.
opposing objects, by those that stand they are divided, while with others that meet
them (being borne from opposite directions) they and intervening parts come together into
unite, so that the centres
one.”
6.
See Note XXIII., App. See Note XXIV., App.
7.
dieQOaprac.
3, 4, 5.
“
It is
utterly destroyed,” that
before was, no longer is”
the words 8. 9.
“ the thing which
is,
See Notes XXIII. and XXIV., App., on
tyOioLg, avt-rjOLQ, (fiQopa , eipi,
See Note XXV., App.
O
and yiyvopai
.
.
26
CONTRA ATHEOS.
A0. Ovkovv
pev erepov dec mvovoav
rrjv
10
9
Xopevrjv v(p erepov 'drjoopev evarrjv av ,
mvovoav
erepa
teal
,
evapporrovoav
,
,
teal
peradaX-
rrjv re eavrrjv
pev
Trace
rrocrjpaoc,
rraoc de iraOrjpaoc , tcaXovpevrjv de ovrcog rcov ovrcov
rcov peradoXrjv teal mvrjocv, ravrrjv de
n av.
o%eddv
detcarrjv
epovpev.
KA. UavraTraoi pev A0. Tcov vaepev
11
dena pdXcora
dr)
rjplv mvrjoecov
opOorara rraccdv eppcopeveordrrjv
Trpatcrcicrjv
deaepepovreog
M vpccp
KA.
ovv.
13
12
reva rrpoKpcre elvac nat
;
avdyterj
irov
avrrjv
(jravac dcacjrepecv rrjv
dvvapevrjv mvelv rag de aXXag 7rdoag, vorepag. ,
A0. Ev
Xeyecg. dp’ ovv rjplv rcov
rcov peraOereov 14 ev
fj
teal
KA. Hoc a cpxig A0. To rrjg detearrjg KA. Urj;
dvo
vvv ova
dpQcdg prjdev-
;
;
prjQev oftedov ova dpOcdg elprjrac
A0. Upcdrov 15 yeveoec re eon
teal pcdpyp
teard
Xoyov
to de pera rovro e%opev rovrov devrepov apre prjQev aro,
rrcog
evarov.
KA.
Xeyecg
nc5$*
;
T
A0, £2de. orav erepov aXXo rjplv peraddXyj nal rovro aXXo erepov dec rcov rocovrcov apa eorac rrore rc irpcdrov peradaXXov teal rrcdg, orav vn’ aXXov mvrjrac rovr eoTat ,
,
’
;
,
See Note XXV., App. This is the common reading. dent, however, that dv should be supplied. 10.
11. riva TTpoKpivaifiEV.
12.
It is evi-
See Note XXVI., App.
13. pvpiG).
Hyperbolical measure of excess.
“
By
ten thousand
times.” 14. /LcsTaderiov.
ticulars
V
“ Must
we change
the order in one or
two
par-
}
The meaning
what was last or tenth in the order of the previous investigation, becomes first in the order of nature and in the degree of importance and that which we be fore wrongly called the ninth, becomes now the second. See Notes XXV. and XXVI., App. 15.
npcorov.
of this
is,
that
;
;
27
CONTRA ATHEOS. irore rtiv aXXoiovvTO)v rrpCdTov
;
advvarov yap, dAA’ orav
apa avro avrd tuvrjcrav erepov dXXoitior], to d erepov aX’
Xo nat ovtg)
dfj
,
pvpioig ytyvrjrai rd /avrjOevra ,
x^ ia
ear at
ucbv apx'f] rcg avrtiv
rrjg
mvrjoeojg dndorjg aXXr],
I
7tXt)v
Ti]g avTrjg avTrjv mvr\odG7\g peTadoXrj
i]
K aXXiOTa
KA. A0.
,7
E tl
elnsg
;
Gvyx^p'ijrea te TOVTOig.
•
Tode ehrcjpev, nai dnofcptvcjpeOa irdXiv
dr) real
rd rravTa opov yevopeva nanXeloTOt t&v tolovtgjv toXpd)Gi Xeyeiv tlv’ apa
rjplv avToloiv. el GTairj ncjg
Oanep
oi
,
ev avTOtg avay/crj
KA. T rjv 7tots
,
7rpd)Trjv Ktvrjoiv
avT7]v
dr] rrov
yevsoOai tcov eiprjpsvG)v
mvovaav in’ aXXov yap ov .
$
prj~
spnpoaOev psTanso'y prjdepidg ye ev avTOtg ovorjg ,
epirpoaOev psTanTuaecog.
A0.
’A pxv v apa 1 Kivrjosojv naotiv
tgjgl yevopevrjv teal ev tuvovpevoig
Gav ,
teal Trpd)T7]v
ovGav
ev ts eg-
tt)v avTrjv
mvov~
tyrjGopev dvaynaiatg elvai TTpeGdvTaTrjv ical KpaTiGTTjv
peTaboXfjV naGtiv
tt)v de dXXoiovpevrjv veff ETepov , klvov-
•
GaiPds eTspa devTepav. ,
KA. A0.
’A Xr}OeGTaTa Xeyetg. 2 Ottote d 7} TOivvv evTavda EGpev tov Xoyov , Tode
'
dnorcpivtipeOa.
KA. To A0.
5
evvdpG),
rj
7Tolov
E av
(frrjGopev
rj
;
ldo)pev
Trvpoeidei,
nexupiopevcp
ev tgj tolovtg)
KA. Mtiv apa pe
3 TavTTjv yevopevrjv ev tgj yrjivcp ,
7tov
tt
aOog elvai
epo)Tag el
£?/ v
4
teal
rj
^vppiyel tl ttotg ,
;
avro npoGepovpev OTav
avTO avTO mvf\ 1.
all
apxvv apa
motions, the
ving
among
klvt/ceov. first
“ Seeing, then, that
among
it is
the principle of
things that stand, and being self-mo-
things that move,
we
will say that
it is
*he oldest and
strongest,” &c. 2.
hravda Xoyov.
“In
such expressions as 7tov we
yr/c
this part of our
argument.”
—
anoplag
7r oi
—ek
yijc
rod’
—
Compare
Iv* el
—
naKov
opyrjg 3. TttVTIJV. 4.
Supply
KLVTJOLV.
Cyv npooEpovfjiEV orav avro avro tavrj
;
“ Shall
we
call
it life
(of
—
v
;
CONTRA ATHEOS.
N at,
A0.
tfjv.
KA. Hug yap
ov
;
A0. T L de onorav 'i/jvxrjv ev tloiv ravrov TOVTCp $q opoAoyrjreov
optipev, ptiv
;
aXko f
t
;
KA. 0 vtc aXXo. A0. "E%e dr\ 5 irpog ktog
ap
*
’
oi>/£
av eOeXoig nepl enao-
tov rpia voelv
KA. Hug AO.
Xeyetg
;
*'Ev pev, rrjv
ev de, ovopa.
ovolav
cal dr) Kal
7
t
6
ev de rrjg ovoiag rov Xoyov
*
•
,
epcorrjoetg eivai nepl
to ov anav
dvo.
KA. IIw^ dvo
;
A0. Tore pev 8 rjpojv enaorov rovvopa nporecvopevov avro rov Aoyov airairelv tots de rov Xoyov Tcporeivope•
,
apa ye to rotovde av fiovXopeda
vov, epcorav av rovvopa.
vvv Xeyeiv
KA. To to Live)
;
7toIov
when
;
a thing itself moves
£««, to live ,
itself'?”
and
to
up are unquestionably of the same radical Effervescence or fermentation from the action of heat, taking idea. place in matter otherwise apparently motionless, would be the pheboil , to bubble , to bubble
,
nomenon which of all others would most readily suggest to the mind the idea of self-motion and would thus be taken as a
primitive
,
symbol of life. v
5.
E^£
drj ttpoc
A Log. “ Hold
there by Jove.”
Let us secure
of the subject.
Compare Gorgias, 490, A. dum does not seem to us
this phrase, age
it,
An
important posi-
and then advance to another view
tion is gained.
,
The usual
rendering ot
to give its peculiar sig-
nificance. 6.
ev pev
,
ttjv
ovolav,
k.
t. X.
“
One
thing the essence, one the
Xoyog or reason of the essence, and one the name.”
See Note
XXVII., App. This phrase generally denotes an application of a “And accordingly, respecting every such essence, there must be always two questions.” 7.
Kal dq Kall
preceding proposition.
8.
ed,
tote pev
we demand
Tibyog or
tote
de.
“
At one time, the name being present
the loyoq, reason or definition
reason being given,
we
;
ask the name.”
at
•
another time, the
29
CONTRA ATHEOS. V
A0.
E otl
9 dix a dtaipovpevov ev aXkotg re nai
7tov
apedpep, Tovrcp drj rep nar dptdpov ovopa pev, apnov yo^ de, aptOpog dtatpovpevog elg loa dvo peprj. ’
•
,
h
Ad
N al.
KA.
A0. To tolovtov (ppa^G). pdrv ovv ov ravrov enarepodg 10 av re tov Xoyov epo)T(x)pevot, Tovvopa Trpooayopevopev, anodtdcbpev, av re Tovvopa, tov Xoyov apTiov dvopaTij *
nai
TavTov ov
A0. 9.
'ipvxv
may be
This
diaipovpevov.
Ylxcl
.
Tovvopa, Ttg tovtov A oyog
11
ttt dr)
c
it
;
KA. HavTairaoL pev ovv T
poo ay opevovT eg,
dtxa dtatpovpevov dpiOpov
\oy<p,
exopev
;
“
taken impersonally.
divided into two,” or generally, “ there
or there
is
may be this
It is
divis-
ion into two, both in other things and also in respect to number.”
tovtu
“
drj.
To
“ namely, that
apnov
this thing, that
this division”
is,
which has respect
—r&
number, the
to
but the ’koyog (notion, reason, or definition)
;
And
two equal parts.”
visible into
in the eighth
/car’
NAME
apidpov,
( ovopa )
a number
is
is
di-
this is the koyog or notion given
book of Euclid’s Elements of Geometry,
in these very
words. 10. pfiv ovv ov
ravrov knaripwg
may be thus freely rendered
sage
stantially predicate the
we
name
give the
asked
if,
name,
—
predicating of the
Do we not
“
which
we give name
After
The two that
whose notion
apnov.
2d.
To
even!
there seems no
all,
may
questions is
What
this the
,
part
:
The
:
,
1st. 1
answer
is
,
name
and of the
What is the name To this the answer
the notion of that whose
name
is
apnov
of is
or
apiOpog elg lea Svo peprj bLaipovpevog—
,
and Ast.
the notion), and being
confusion in the sentence.
little
a number divided &c.
is
pas-
&c., being substantially the
,
be thus stated
a number divided or divisible &c.
ovopan although
it is
the notion (to which the
as subject, apnov
notion as subject, a number divided
same.”
The whole
in both respects sub-
being asked in respect to the notion,
(of the thing of
in respect to the
belongs)
same,
ttpoeayopevopev.
:
We
have placed a
differing in this respect
comma
after
from the editions of Bekkei
following seems to us to be the order of the lattei
Tzpoaayapevovreg ovopan, apnov , kuc
dixa biaipovpevov dpiOpov ravrov ov ,
( kv
See Note XXVIII., App. 11. See Note XXVIII., App.
C
2
(
npoeayopevovreg )
Aoy<p,
dp^orepoig TTpoeayopevopevov).
;
30
CONTRA
dXXov nX'qv tov vvv avrrjv klveIv fdvrjoiv
KA. To eavrd A0.
§r\pi ye.
OovpEv 13
prjOevra , rrjv dvvapEvrjv avT7)V
dr)
;
klvelv
av rjvnep Tovvopa o
ATIIEOS.
^g Xoyov
navTEg
dfj
eI 6’
12
npoGayopEvopev
;
egti tovto ovrcog exov, apa etc no -
inavdjg dEdslxOai
prj
e%piv tt)v avrr\v ovgl-
'ipvx'rjv
'ijwx'rjv
ravrov ov nal t rjv
npcjrrjv yEVEOiv nal nivrjGtv rtiv te ovtcov nal yEyovorcov
EOopsvG)v
real
ye
6rj
teal
,
dv£(j)dvri
anaav KA. Ovn
navrcov av t&v evavTiuv TOVTOig
;
Ensi-
peTaboXrjg re nal /avrjoEG)g dndorjg alrla
;
dXXd
•
ltcavd)rara didEtnTai
'ipvx^J
tov nav-
tcjv npEobvrdrrjj yEvopEvrj te apx'Zj mvrjGECog. r
A0. vrjGig,
Ap’ ovv ovx
di
f]
9
ETEpov
14,
ev dXXco ytyvopEvrj nt -
avrd 6e ev avrd) prjdEnoTE napEXOvoa mveloOcu prj(3 ovXolto av Tig apiQ -
6 ev, dEvrepa te nal onoccov dpiOptiv PEIV aVT7]V noXXoGTTJV
TOGOVTO)V GGOpaTOg OVGa OVTCVg ,
peTaboXf)
d'lpvxov
KA.
’0 pOojg.
A0.
’Opdcbg
Ta
15 ,
elprjnoTeg
apa nal nvp'uog aXrjOEGTaTa te nal TEXEUTa-
av elpEv 1
'ipvx'rjv
12.
See Note XXVIII., App.
13.
apa
sensum non
salis
p&v npoTEpav yEyovivai
Itl 'jtoOov/j.ev prj Uavtiq dedelxOat.
num
habet, est enim:
demonstratum esse
,
SfC.
G(o~
JloOovpev praegnantem
quid adhuc desideramus {existiwantes)
—Ast.
We see no necessity for this
explanation of Ast, but would prefer directly connecting 'Kodovpev
with dedetxdai struction.
,
without resorting to any
“Do w e T
ellipsis or
yet feel the want of
its
praegnant con-
being sufficiently
shown,” &c.
here occurs in the usual manner, and with the
usual force which
it
has after verbs containing in themselves the
sense of a negative either expressed or implied, such as those of /orand in such cases it is not to be bidding preventing, want &c. ,
,
rendered by
itself,
;
but regarded as strengthening the quasi denial of
the governing word.
Uodov/zev
may
although a verb of want or desire, 14. See Note XXIX., App. 15. 1.
7ToTikoarrjv.
el/iev.
For remarks on
The common reading
be ranked
in this class,
and,
al-
invariably takes an accusative.
this
word, see Note XXIX., App.
is r/pev,
but as the optative
is clear-
CONTRA ATHEOS. l
iarog rjplv
31
ctipa be, devrepov re nal varepov '^vx'dg dp*
•
XOVG7]g y apxopevov nara
(jjvaiv.
KA. ’AXrjOeorara pev ovv. A0. M epvrjpeOd ye prjv opoXoyrjGavreg 6ev
ipvxi tyavecrj npeadvrepa ocbparoq ovoa
(bg el
,
ev rolg epnpoo -
3
~°v oebparog eaoiro irpeodvrepa
ipvX^q
KA. Haw pev ovv A0. Tponoc dr) real
real
,
rd
.
.
nal povXrjaeLg nal Xoyiopol nal
i]0r]
2
bo%ai aXrjOelg, empeXeiat re nal pvrjpac, reporepa prjnovg GG)pdro)v nal nXarovg nal fiadovg nal pcbprjg av, e’inep nal
KA.
elrj
yeyovora
ouparog.
'ipvx'rj
’A v ay nip
A0. yAp’ ovv to per a rovro opoXoyetv dvaynalov re ayadebv airiav eivai
'ipvx'tjv
tCjv
,
nal rcov naXbbv nal nancov
nal alcxp&v, dinaioyv re nal adinuv, nal redvrayv tgjv evavtig)v
;
elnep rcbv navroiv ye avrrjv
# rjoopev
airiav
;
KA. Udjg yap
ov
A0.
bioinovoav nal evoinovoav* ev airaoc rolg
•kvx'tiv dr)
;
navrrj ncvovpevoig ptiv ov nal rov ovpavov dvdynrj dcoc nelv <\>avai
KA. T l ly required, elrjpev,
plural.
the
;
prjv
;
we have rj
in
K vpicog
this is
with Ast substituted
a stronger
word than
thority^as an established truth
now
elpev,
which
form being often dropped
—or as
bpQtig.
is
used
in the dual It
means “ by
something which
for
and au-
we may
assert with confidence.’’
2.
See Note XXX., App.
3.
tu)v re
dyaQ&v airiav
cause of the good, and
eivai ipvxyv Kai rtiv nahuv.
fair,
and right.”
It is not,
“ Soul
is
the
however, simply
the efficient cause regarded objectively, but the very subjective their existence, without which they could have no being, whether there was a universe of matter or not. Where soul is not, there can be no harmony, no beauty, no right, no good. And so,
ground of
not only makes
also,
it
own
hell.
4.
ing.”
Without
diouiovcav
it
its
own
there
— evoinovoav
paradise, but
its
own
earth,
is
no discord, no deformity, no
,
“pervading
and
its
evil.
— inhabiting — indwell-
— CONTRA ATHEOS.
32
7
5
A0. Miav.rj nXecovg Avolv
Kptvovpcu.
t£ evepyendog
KA.
,
6
ye
ilev
vtrep o (f) 0)lv arro -
eXarrov prjdev rtOtipev,
irov
rrjg
/cat
X<p66pa dpdcXg etprjKag.
$ aXarrav
real yrjv teal
eari, fiovXeoQai ,
do%a£eiv
opOtig,
dappovGav, <ra/£
£yfi)
•
ravavria Svvapevrjg ei-epya^eodcu.
A0. Efev. ay££ pev
9
HXetovg
;
,
ovpavov
rat$* avrrjg klvtjoegiv, alg
ovopara
'ipvxr)
e'lpevGpevcjg •
x
•
oaat tovtcjv %vyyevelg
rj
I3ovXeveg0cu,
,
al P ovaav
picovoav
The general sense
r'd
empeXeloOcu
otconeToOcu,
(j^odovpevrjv
5. 7ivle/ovf.
navra
/car'
dfj
Xvnovpevrjv
GrepyovGav
,
•
7rd-
/cat
•
7rpG)rovpyol lavrjGEig, rag
of the passage
is
best preserved by
rendering this word, not many, but more than one. 6.
See Note XXNI., App., on the Platonic doctrine of the
<5vo/v.
evil principle. 7.
ipvxv Travra.
aye/,
antithesis of matter, for
‘fvxv is here used collectively as the
souls, including the spirits of
all
men and
angels (or daipoveg), as well as the Divine soul, which he regards as
The
the principium or fountain of the whole genus.
doctrine, that
even the human soul was older than body, was taught by Plato, yet not in the sense in which
it is
commonly understood.
It
has,
how-
no necessary connexion with his present argument against the
ever,
atheists. 8.
x aL P 0V(jav The sudden change here from the infinitive to the seems made on purpose for variety. Xalpovoav, however, ‘
participle if
any should choose so
to regard
it,
ovopara, egti (to) ipvxyv
may be The
accusative before these infinitives. '
x a LP 0VGav
taken with ipvxyv as the
order would be thus
XvTrovpevyv
,
k.
t.
X.
:
alg
povXeadai
GKOTTELodai, K. T. X. 9.
connect with klvjigeoiv alg above. working motions,” viz., those of soul
Tcuccug,
“first
c Kon tied a/, &c.
A evrepovpyovg
av,
IIpiorovpyol KivrjGEig ,
—such
as povXecdat
“second working motions,”
cor-
responding to order second of motion described some ways back “ second causes,” or “ motions of matter produced by impulse” (ef
dXXov
Fig
dXXo peraSoXy).
made page
27, line 16,
The author has
and also 30,
in
view the
classification
we
believe to be
This
line 15.
the true sense of the passage, but a glance at the position of the participles
and
infinitives
although
may
not have been intended,
true.
it
It will
above suggests another is
be seen that these participles
division, which,
yet most important and
all
express feelings of the
,
CONTRA ATHEOS. devrepovpyovg av
rrapaXapdavovaat
ayovoi iravra elg av^rjatv nai ovyupiocv
rovrotg eiropevag
teal
•
pvrrjrag Kovcporrjrag
'ipvx'rj
ovoa
avorrjpov
•
,
6/o0d
^epporrjrag,
yXvKv
,
/cat
Tuttpov
•
,
exec
teal *
j
8a-
Xevnov nal
•
/cat Tract iv olg
alel 'deov,
10
deog
avota 6e
•
ravra av ravavrta rovrotg arrepya^erat.
ravra ovrcog ex eiV
rtOcbpev
'ipvi-eig
i
evdatpova iratdaytvyel iravra
/cat 7
dtanpioLv
teal
XP Mpevrj, vovv pev irpooXapbavovoa
%vyyevopevrj
7TG)g
/sat
,
coopdrojv,
KLvr\ceiq
aicXrjpbv Kal paXattov
•
,
peXav
tyQioiv,
33
\
V ETl btora^opev
el
erepejg
;
KA. 0 vdapeog. A0. ndrepoi/
1
moral nature, while the part of the soul,
tial
may,
infinitives
Now the
of the intellect.
yevog eynpareg ovpavol)
oi’V dz) 'ipvx'ijg
denote the motions or exercises
passions or feelings being the most essen-
and that which excites the
intellect to action,
in respect to the latter, be styled npuTovpyol
( first
working ),
just as the exercises of soul generally are npurovpyol, or first work -
ing
when compared with ,
the secondary motions of matter. IT apaX“ taking along with themselves (as co-operatives or
auxiliaries)
the devrepovpyovg KtvrjGELg copdrov,” namely, second
,
apSavovacu
causes or the laws of nature. ,
10
.
nal
7r
dav
olg.
7
0 ig,
although neuter, refers to the above re-
cited devrepovpyovg Kivijoeig of matter.
K al>
if
judged according to
the English idiom, would be redundant as a connective.
however, retain is to
place as an intensive particle.
its
be rendered as
omnibus
si
may,
It
Ka/' tcugiv olg
—
So Cornarius regards it quibus Or it may be taken in
olg Kal tzclglv.
anima, quee Dea est utitur &c. ,
,
the order of the words, only regarding Kal as intensive instead of is not additional, but only a collective term mentioned before “ And all which,” or “ even all (those second working motions) which the soul using itself being Divine, and taking along with it that Divine thing vovg rightly and happily guides all things but when conversant with folly, it ever
connective, so that rraGcv
—
for all the things
— —
;
doeth the contrary,” &c.
Qeog here, according to a
common
Pla-
tonic usage, is equivalent to tielog. 11.
rrorepov ovv dq Tpvxrjg yevog
mentioned), do
one wise and qualities'!”
we
full
,
“which of the two
souls (lately
say, has the control of the heavens, &c.
—the
of virtue, or the one that hath neither of these
CONTRA ATHEOS.
34
cal yrjg nai irdarjg rrjg
i
vcpov
apsrrjg nXrjpEg
teal
,
nepiodov yeyovsvcu (pdpEV ?j
;
IIg5$*
to 0po*
to prjdETEpd Kenrrjpsvov
QovXegOe ovv npog ravra (1j6e GTTOfcpivGjpedG
KA.
;
;
;
;
A0. E l pkv, gj ftavpaoLe, (pcbpEv, rj £vpndoa ovpavov odog dpa nal (popd nal tgjv ev dvreb ovtgjv anavruv, vov fuvrjo el nal
T£pL<popa
l
7
Kdi Xoytopolg opotdv (pvotv
*
%vyy£V(bg epxsrai, djjXov
(bg rrjv
apLorrjv
nai
'ipvx'fjv
(pdriov
ETUpE^ELGdaL TOV HOGpOV TTdVTOg Kdt dyELV dVTOV TT\V TOL,
dVT7]V ddbv EKELV7JV.
KA,
’OpOtbg.
A0. E l 6e pdviitcbg te Kdt drdicrGjg spiral, ttjv icainjv. KA. Kdt rdvra opOibg. A0. T evd ovv 6rj vov KLvrjGig (pvotv e^el tovto rjdrj xa ~ ;
XeTTOV,
dco
6rj
GJ
(piXot^ EpGJTrjpa
eItTELV EpcjjpOVGJg.
Kdt kps rrjg dironpiGEGjg vplv dtimtov tgvvv npoG -
XapddvELv
13 .
KA. Ev A0.
dUOKpiVOpEVOV
XsyELg.
Mt) tolvvv e% EVdvriag olov Elg rjXiov
14
dnobXEirov-
TEg vvtcra ev pEG7]p6pta knayopEVot 7TOLr]O(bpE0a rrjv airo,
,
KpLGLV
,
Gjg
VOVV
yvGJoopEVOL inavcbg
novTdg
^Vl^TOLg OppdGLV O'lpOpEVOL TE Kdt
TCOTE •
npog ds shidva rov kpGJTGjpsvov
{3Xe-
&<7(j)dX,£OTepov opdv.
KA. Ucbg hkysig A0. T Hi npooEOME ;
12.
N ov
13.
7rpocrhapSaveLv
klvt](J£l
vovg
/uvrjGEL
Kal nspL^opa
.
15 ,
tgjv ds/ca ehelvgjv kl-
See Note XXXII., App.
here has nearly the sense of !;vXXap6aveiv, “to
take part with, to assist you in the answer.” 14. e% kvavriag olov elg fyliov.
Compare with
in the sixth
book of the Republic, intended to
the ayaOov
also, the
;
this the similitudes
illustrate the idea of
comparison of the dark cave
in the
beginning
of the seventh book, and the representation of the demeanour of those who, after coming out of directly at the sun, without
its
obscurity, are supposed to look
making use of such helps as are
furnish-
ed by the reflections of mirrors and of water. 7 “ Let us take as an image (since 15. H* TcpooeoiKE klvtjgel vovg.
:
CONTRA ATHEOS. elnova Xabatpev
vfjoecov tt)v
rrjv duoKpiocv
kolvxi
zjv
•
35
ovvavapvr]oQetg vplv iyu),
Tcoi'rjoopai.
KA. KdXXiOTa av Xeyoig. A0. Me livrjfieOa tolvvv* Toys r oaovrov /
tcov dnavTOJv
tu pev tuveladat rd ,
tie
j
rtiv tots etc, oti
ueveiv eQepev
.
2
KA. NaL A0. Ttiv 6’ av tuvovpsvmf Td pev ev Oat Ta 6 ev ttXelogl epepopeva.
evl tottg) tuvelo
y
,
KA. *E art TavTa.
T ovtolv
A0.
1 toZv Ktvrjoeotv tt)v ev evl (pepopevrjv
6rj
del rrepL ye ti peoov avaytcr) tuveloOai tgjv evTopvcjv ov -
oav
pipirjpd Ti KVK,X(i)V, slva'i TE aVTT]V T%j
7ravTG)g (bg
dvvaTdv
KA.
Xeyeig
A0. To
VOX) TtEpi66(xX
oitcELOTaTrjv te teat opotav. ;
TavTa drjnov teal cooavTug teal ev tgj avKept Ta avTa teal npog Ta avTa tcal eva Xoyov teal
to), teal
/card
y
,
ptav
Tat-iv
TOV
tavEloOai XeyovTeg vovv ttjv te ev evl
apcj)(i)
,
(pspopsvrjv KivrjGiv, ocpaipag
we cannot
,
evTopvov aTTEinaopeva 8
(popalg,
look upon vovg directly with our mortal vision) that one
of the ten motions to which
These motions are
mind
or reason bears a resemblance.”
called seven in the similar place of the Timaeus,
page 34, A. The ancient writers, when treating of physics, all varied in the enumeration, and sometimes the same writer varies from himself,
as Plato does in this, and in the passage of the Timaeus re-
ferred to.
tovtolv
1.
The
toZv KLvrjoeoiv.
drj
Attic connects masculine ad-
jectives and pronouns in the dual, with feminine nouns
however, which rolv ev
made
hi
is
not universal.
(pspophotv
:
also,
The common
—a
rule,
reading here has
below, ovo&v instead of ovaav.
We have
the corrections on the authority of Eusebius, Ficinus, Ste
phanus, and the Cod. Voss., besides being alsolutely required by the exigentia 2.
loci.
to belongs to vovv Kiveiodatj several lines below.
3. an eiKacTfieva is neuter, because it refers both to vovv and Kivrjmv. The order of this rather complicated sentence would be as follows 'kiyovTEQ (to) vovv rrjv te ev hi (pepophyv Kivrjatv (d/Kporepa) arret,
Kaopeva teal
h
(popatg
hropvov
tgj avrfi, teal
ccpatpac, kiveIgQcli
n epi, &c.
.
.
.
ovtc
Kara ravra
teal (orravreo^
dv tcote (pavetpev &c. ,
That
a
CONTRA ATHEOS.
36
gvk av nore (pavelpev
tyavkot, drjpcovpyol
Aoym naXCdv
el
KOVCJV.
KA.
’O pdorara Xeyeig.
A0. Ovkovv av fj y£4 prjdsTTors^cooavrcjg, prjde fcard r avrd prjdi av ravrcp prjds rtepl ravrd prjds ttpog ravrd (pepopevrj, it]6 ev Kocrpcp, prjd’ ev ra^ei, prjde ev nvi Aoyo) ,
,
,
’
f.
avotag av dnao7]g
Kcvrjcug,
KA.
E??7
all
is
5 xaXeirbv ovdev etc diapprjdrjv
dr)
eiretdri 'ipvx'rj
which
gvyyavrjg.
yap av dXrideorara.
A0. Nvv
in
elr]
pev eonv
rj
here styled motion in
nepcayovoa one, is not to
It is
it.
term, the opposite of motion in
accompanied by change of
rfjv de
6
it
would not
rather to be taken as a general
many
place.
,
be regarded as the same,
respects, with the motion of a sphere, otherwise
be said to be likened to
elrtelv , cog,
rjplv rcavra
,
Kivyaiq ev no^oiq, or motion
This, then, would be that higher
species of motion, which, without change in the cause, produces
motion to
it
remaining wholly in one, and is theremotion of a sphere, »which of all others presents
in other things, itself
fore likened to the
the best similitude.
It is
the tenth of the above-mentioned
enumeration, or the avroKivyaiq of soul. 4.
ovkovv av
5.
diapfiydyv.
7]
See Note XXXIII., App.
ye.
The way
great question, whether
is
it is
now prepared
for
answering clearly the
the good or the evil soul which governs
the universe. 6.
T7jv
de ovpavov
common
the
7r epi<f)opav.
reading ryv
de.
Ast here would substitute ryv ye for a change the pev preceding with all that follows, made dependant
By such
would be left alone, and tyareov, upon dq. In which case it must be taken as the proposition which the speaker thinks can now be so clearly affirmed all from en etdy to rcavra inclusive, being brought in by way of parenthesis as a preamble to the sentiment. The order in that case would be thus
—
:
vv v
In
enetdy 'ipvxy pev eartv y neptdyovaa yptv ndvra, x a ^en ov ovdev eirelv dq tyareov ryv ye ovpavov nept(f)opdv, &c\, “but now, since drj,
it is
soul that directs
all
culty in asserting, that
things for us, there
we must
is
no longer any
diffi-
say, that soul, &c., either the best
soul or the contrary, conducts the revolutions, at
least,
of the
This proposition, however, besides being a mere unmeaning repetition of the first clause, had been clearly asserted be-
heavens.”
fore.
We
would, therefore, prefer the
common
reading (ryv
de),
by
CONTRA ATHEOS.
37
ovoavov neptcjyopdv e% dvdytcrjg neptayeLv cbareov empeXovpevrjv nai tcoapovoav fyroi tt\v apLorrjv
rtav
—
T
KA.
which <
pareov
and
£2
aXXd
give,
etc
ye tCjv vvv
referred directly to
is
ertetdr]
ovd oatov
elprjpevcov,
this part of the sentence, with its principal or ,
rfjv evav-
'ipvx'rjv, rj
’
governing word
by the connective force of pev
leaving uq without any dependant clause expressed
de,
so that
;
the whole sentence might be regarded as unfinished or designedly
more
abrupt, for the purpose of introducing with
answer This is no uncommon device in the Platonic writings, by which the most important truths are evolved from the person with whom Socrates
of Clinias, in which the proposition designed
or the chief speaker
is
effect the
brought out.
conversing; thus furnishing a fine
is
illustra-
which Socrates so gloried as his The whole passage, in accordance with this view,
tion of that maieutical process in
peculiar method.
may
be thus presented
:
vvv
eneidr/
dr/,
pvxv pev egtiv
i
nepidyovaa
r/
r/plv 7r dvra, tt/v de
ovpavov nept(j)opdv Qclteov kg dvdyKijg ijjvxyv
TTjv doL(jT7]v
kvavTiav eTTLpeXovpevTjv nal Koopovcrav nepidyeiv ,
rj
Xaherrov ovdev
ttjv
en
dcapprjdrjv eirzelv , d)g
now, since soul (as had been shown) and since,
also,
we
is
—KA. that
T
£2
“But
&c.
give,
which guides
tjtul
things,
all
are compelled (from this premise) to say that
therefore soul, either the best soul or the contrary, carefully and orderly conducts the revolution of the heavens, there
any
the apodosis to wf, which had
no longer
is
— he would have been suspended — “that
difficulty in affirming clearly that”
said, as the
it is
soul which doeth this,” and that
we
the best
are shut up to this conclusion
;
but at this point Clinias takes the proposition out of his mouth, and impatiently announces
it
in his
of so long a preamble) (a/lAa), but
impious
to affirm
guides &c. ,
otherwise
:
w
give,
( there
from what has been said ) (
than that the soul which hath
is finally
often, like yap, refers to
no need
would be
all
virtue
for
something supposed
to pass rapidly
through the mind of the speaker, although not expressed case, in the negative
is it
what seemed to him expressed by the word dAAd,
This impatience of Clinias,
the inevitable conclusion,
which
own words
—as
in this
words we have supplied before dXkd, or some-
The great objection to Ast’s substitution of ye makes the whole proposition merely a repetition of
thing equivalent. for de
is,
that
it
what had been clearly affirmed before, and does not prepare the way answer of Clinias.
naturally for the abrupt
D
CONTRA ATHEOS.
88 .
aXXo)g "Xe^eiv
n aoav
rj
dperijv e%ovoav
piav
'ipvx'tjv
nAe>
rj
ovg neptayetv ojvra.
A0. K aXXtora, ch KA eivta, vmpiovoag de npoovnanovoov ert.
KA. To
uolov
A0. "HA lov
rolg Aoyoig
/cal
oeX'fjvrjvf
nal rd
dXXa dorpa
,
prjv
,
elnep
;
;
A0. Uepl evog 8 rjplv
rode
;
ipvXV neptayet navra dp' ov nal ev eKaorov
KA. T t
•
noirjocbpeOa
drj
A oy ovg,
ol nal enl
navra
dorpa dpporrovreg (pavovvrai.
KA. T ivog; f
HAA>v nag avOpunog otipa 9 pev opa, tyvxrp* de ovdeig ovde yap aXXov odoparog ovdevog ovre %£)V10 rog ovre anodvrjofcovrog rcbv £g)G)v dAAd eXnlg 7roAAf/ ronapanav to yevog rjplv rovro avaioOrjrov ndoaig ralg
A0.
•
•
rov cojparog 7.
"H 7uov nal
8.
IIep4
aloOrjoeoi, nepinetyvnevai,
'
vorjrov
d’ elvat.
See Note XXXIV., App.
cE’krjvrjv.
hog.
1
Supply d GTpov, which, in Greek,
is
often used for
the sun and planets, as well as the fixed stars. 9. "H/l lov 7r dg dvOpuTcog cdpa pev opp, &c. Compare the wellknown passage Xen., Memorabilia, iv., c. 3, 14. 10. hlnlg. This word in Greek has a much larger signification than hope in English. It means here, and in many other places,
expectation , or, rather,
verb 11.
ropai.
dvalodrjrov
simply, “
is
—
ground of expectation or ,
TrspiTceQvKEvai.
So, also, the
belief.
This should be rendered not
not by nature an object of perception,” but rather, that
“it is so in consequence of being above the nature of the sense,”
Such is the force of nepl. Ast would amend as usual, and read TzepnretyvKhcu votjtov povov. vti 6%, &c., placing a comma after aioOrjGEOL rejecting elvat and connecting TTEpuz£(j)VKEvaL with votjtov, There is, however, no need of this. UcptnetyvKhai bears more naturally upon dvatGdijTov aiGdrjGEGt,, or, y Eivat, which Ast wholly rerather, upon aiGdrjGEov understood. See Note XXIV., jects, is far better adapted to the word votjtov. App., on the difference between hpl and the other substantive verbs, such as ylyvopai and (j)vco when used with philosophical correctness. Such an expression as TrepLTrecpvKevai votjtov would be at war with being of a higher order of essence.
,
,
,
-
CONTRA ATHEOS. v<p
pcovcp
nal
dr]
diavorjfian
18
39 avrov n£pi to
hadcoptEV
tolovSe.
KA. 170^ A0. "HA cov
;
elnep
ay el
'ipvx'rj,
rptcdv avrrjv ev
Xeyovreq
dpav, cxedov ova dnoTEV^optEOa.
KA. T lvg)v A0. '£lg fj evovoa 13 evroq ;
ocoptaTL,
fjplv
rep nEpupspEL rovrep (paivoptEvep
navTrj SiafcopiL^EL to tolovtov naOdnep fjpag ,
ndvTT] nepKpepei,
'ipvx'fj
*
nap
rj
’
noOev e^coOev Gcopa avTT]
rj
Xoyog egtl tlvoov
,
ovoa
,
ExovGa 6e dvvdptEtg aXkag Tivag vnEpba’khovoag davfiaTi
,
nopicapevr] nvpog
n\
1)6eI fica GcofjiaTL otipia
(
nodrjyEL.
KA.
Tivog aepog •
fj
,
cog
TpLTOV avr?) ,
'ipi/if]
ocoptaTog
1*
Nat'
A0. Tovro pLEV avdyurp tovtcov ev y£ tl dp&oav 'ipvx.fjv navTa StayEiv avTov 6fj aptEcvov 15 TavTrpv ttjv ipvxfl v sIte .
ev appcaoiv
some of the
,
^ovGa
1
fjpriv
tjXlov ayEi (pedg Tolg anaotv, elt
best-established Platonic distinctions, although
perhaps be used by the author in a careless manner.
it
’
might
Uepi gives
word the sense of superiority, in the same way as in n epleifu and irepiyiyvopcu. The whole may be thus freely rendered “ We have great reason for believing that this whole genus, being imperceptible to all the senses of the body, is above (the nature of) the senses, or is by nature above the senses, and is peculiarly an obthis
:
ject of intelligence
( votjtov
dvai).
Let us, therefore, apprehend by
mind alone,” &c. 12.
tion
For a most philosophical and acute discriminabetween vovg and bidvoia, vorjpa and dLavorjpa, vorjeng and dia diavorjpcLTi.
They seem
see the Republic, close of the sixth book.
vorjcig ,
used here
for the
sake of amplification, and with
little
to be
apparent
dif-
ference of meaning between vorjpa and dtavorjpa. 13. dig
rj
kvovaa.
14. nodrjyec.
As
See Note XXXV., App. the second
ing, so this purely spiritual
was represented
as impelling or push-
un embodied influence
is
more properly
described as guiding monstrans viam. ,
15. if,
avrov dp upstvov.
with Stephanus, 1.
Iv
we
appamv ex ov(ja
“
The
better part of it,” namely, this soul ;
read to apetvov, sed queers. '
See Note XXXVI., App.
;
40
CONTRA ATHEOS.
3
egudev, eld
dvSpa
7
.
’
onojg* eld on?], deov rjyelodcu ’
XP £ ^ V navra
;
/
KA. N aC, rov ye nov
enl to eo^a-ov acpiypevov
fir]
dvotag.
A0. "A orpo)v Se
Sr]
nipt ndvroyv nal oeXrjvrjg evtavrCov ,
re nal prjvtiv, nal naocov dpdbv nepi
epovpev
rov avrov tovtov dg
f]
rlva aXkov Xoyov
,
eneiSr] 'ipvx'd
,
jttev rj
'ipvxal
navTGJv tovtgiv alrtat ecjxzvrjoav dyadal Se ndoo.v dperrjv, ,
'deovg
avrag elvac
ovra, noopovoi 2.
oncog,
(jjrjoopev
elre ev
navra ovpavov
quomodo
;
bnrj ,
terpret the term by our
,
own
10.
o&paoLV evovoat
elre onrj re teal oncog
qua parte,
See Remarks, page 33,
delov.
;
iS-eov
We
here
must
is
;
,
%cba eld’*
equivalent to
not, at all events, in-
theology, which attaches to Deity and
Divinity the highest sense of an uncreated intelligence.
In the
Greek usage, as we have seen, the word includes all above man, and Plato even applies it to the daipoveg. Whatever excellences (and they are 3. KA. N ai, rov ye nov prj. certainly of a very high kind) this treatise on laws may possess, it is
undoubtedly, as a dialogue, inferior to
of dramatic
although, perhaps,
it
trast their simplicity
was one
of the others in point
much men
of straw
part of the author’s design to con-
and unreasoning
acuteness of the chief speaker.
faith
with the philosophical
They seem, however,
sent too readily, and sometimes before their
many
Clinias and Megillus are too
skill.
we can
to us, to as-
well suppose from
characters, as here delineated, that they fairly understand
some of the
propositions presented.
While involved in these conall managed by one
tinuous abstract discussions, with the argument person,
we would
contests, of
gladly find relief in one of those vigorous logical
which
we have
so fine a specimen in the Gorgias, as
exhibited in the long-protracted struggle of the unprincipled yet bold Callicles against the
command.
most powerful reasoning that Socrates could
In respect to dramatic excellence, the Gorgias, Phsedon,
and Protagoras are unrivalled by any similar productions of ancient modern times. The common reading is eld bong, 4. eld bong ravra opoloyeZ. which seems to have been introduced from the two preceding examples of that word. We have not hesitated to follow Boeck in “We will say that reading eld\ Ast would substitute ecO bang. they are Gods, whether being in bodies, and being animated, they
or
’
'
1
—
—
)
CONTRA ATHEOS.
41
bong ravra dpoXoyel, vnopevsi pi) fte&v elvcll nXrjprj navra KA. 0 vk, ear tv ovrcog, co give, napacbpovcdv 5 ovdetg. A0. Tgj pev TOivvv pr) vopi^ovn dsovg ev rep npooOev ;
%povcp, 6
MeytXXe re aal KXetvta einovreg opovg 7 anaX-
co
,
XarrcopeOa
.
order the whole Heaven, or in whatever
and then
’), or, in ( eld
things adhere (to the opinion) that
The
Divine powers'?”
from the
way and manner it may be who admits these
the second place, can any one all
things are not
last clause is a
and therefore well introduced by
first,
used when the conclusion
inferential particle,
expressed that any one should think
prise
is
It is
on this account generally, as
Aristophanes, Acharn., 311
ravra epepaveog
sometimes
in
ijdrj
elra,
it
is
an
could be otherwise.
in the present case, ;
brought in
as, for
exam-
roApag Aeyeiv
drj
;
sir’
kyu gov dpEiaopai
the very beginning of the sentence rovrov
which
:
rzpbg rjpdg
sir, el diKata,
of Gods or
so plain, that sur-
is
abruptly and interrogatively without any connective ple,
full
consequence or inference
;
:
y
elttelv
avr kxpyv. Acharn., 561.
It is
easy to see
how much more force and
vividness
is
given to the
way, than by the tame reading which Ast proposes. “ What else can we do, but to say It may be thus paraphrased that they are Gods and then, if this is admitted, who will have any passage
in this
:
;
difficulty
with the necessary conclusion (a fortiori
everywhere!”
'Ynopevec
lish phrase, “will
may be
any one stick
that they are
well rendered by the vulgar Eng-
to it!” that
is,
obstinately persevere
This declaration, that “ all things are full of Gods,” was a saying of Thales, and is thus referred to by Aristotle, De Anima, lib. i., 8 Kal kv rep ofap de nvtg 'ijjvxqv pepixOat tyaoCv, oOev in the denial!
:
loog Kal Qa’Afjg rtdvra
rzAripr] '&ecjv
elvai
cpridrj.
Compare,
De Mundo, ascribed by some to Aristotle, and published among his works, ch. vi. KaOoAov de, onsp kv treatise
:
dppan
vr/rrjg,
kv
yyspcjv
— rovro
5.
de rjvioxog, kv ttoAel de
NOMOS,
also, the
generally vrjl
Kvdep -
kv orparoTredep d2
i9ebg kv Koapep.
7r apatypovtiv.
“ Beside one’s self,”
deranged.
This does not refer to time absolutely, XP° VCJ but to the state of the argument. 6.
kv rep rpoedev
7.
EiTzovreg opovg.
‘
“Imposing terms,”
D
2
viz.,
those that follow.
CONTRA ATHEOS.
42
KA. T ivag V
A0.
H
;
diddonsLV rjpdg
dog ov/c opOCog
*pvXV v ydveoiv anavTCOv elvat tovtoov igWEnopeva elnopev yeiv
rov
rj
,
Xeyopev, Tidepevoi
ToXka orcooa dvvapevov peXnov Xe-
TTpdoTrjv , /cal prj
rjpdov, rjp.lv ttelOeoOcu , /cat
deovg rjyovpevov
%xjv
ovv elte hcavoog
ettlXoltcov filov. opdopev
Elg
rolg ovx
rjdrj
bjyovpevocg tieovg slprj/capev dog elol deol, elte emdeCog.
KA.
f/
H /clota ye
gsvs, ndvrcov 8 emdeCog.
do
,
A0. Tovroig pev roivvv
rjplv
to Xoycov* riXog ex^tgo
rov 6e rjyovpEVOv pkv dsovg elveu
rovg dvOpcojTLveov irpayparcov (pdopEv , otl
drj,
to
rrpdg
i;
pev
vp<pVTOv
ayel Tipav
avOpboTTGOV /cal adi/cGov tvxcll
connect with
7T(1vtg)v,
9.
to Xoyov reTiog exero.
prj (jopovrl^Eiv
13
/cal
and to t&v
£2
vopt^Etv Eivai
Se av-
apiore
tj'kigtu, ye.
‘dr/ptov, for
A
12
ti-T/pia,
10.
See Note XXXVII., App.
11.
7r apapvOrjTeov.
“We
/ca/cdov
6e
pev
very strong negative.
Equivalent to
rd
•
,
oi
c
;
T
Idea /cal drjpoota dXrjOeia
Compare to loycov with rd tuv hanovuv, for oi 497
11
•
$£ovg, ovyyevEid rig tocog oe deia
rjyyj
8.
,
,
tt apapvOrjreov.
10
Xoyoi reTiog exeroaav.
didnovoi, Soph., Philoct.,
Plat., Republic, viii., 563, c.
must give him
also a
word of exhorta-
tion.” 12.
T
upiGTe
£2
—
istence of Gods,” that
extent
is
feeling
(
(
$ eovg. “That you believe in the ex“ as far as the fact of your belief to that
oti pev riyy
concerned,
Gvyyeveid
is,
we may
Tig),
&eia ), leads you,” &c.
say, that a certain kindred or innate
imparted by or derived from the Divinity
the human
—a Divine
may mean what
Or, cvyyeveia deia
losopher elsewhere styles the Divine part affinity or
jof
kinsmanship
in
— as we style conscience
the immediate representative of the Divine nature in the soul.
the phi-
man, or the Divine
human
and vopi^eiv, “ a supposed to be suffi-
gvptyvTov should be connected with Tipav
natural honouring,” &c., which, however,
is
ciently rendered by acknowledging their existence, like Epicurus
and his followers, who pretended greatly to magnify and honour the Gods, when they assigned them a life of perfect repose, extra mundum, Semoti ah rebus nostris longeque sejuncti. 13. lic
Tvxai.
and private
471, A.
“
The
life.”
fortunes of wicked and unjust men, both in pub-
Compare the speech
of Polus in the Gorgias,
CONTRA ATHEOS. EvdaipovEg, dogcug
ovtt
1
*
43
dXX
de Evdaipovi^d\iEvai ocpodpa
ovu EppiEXtig ayovoi oe rtpog aoebsiav ev te [lovoaig
ovic
,
dpdcog vpvovpsvai
reXog
7rpog
15
afia nai
ev iravroioig Xoyotg.
nai
i)
dvooiovg avOpcjirovg optiv kXQovrag 1
locvg
yrj-
pacovg, naidag naidcov naraXcnovrag ev ripiaig ralg psyla-
Taig raparry ravvv ev anaoi rovroig idG)v* ,
aloOopLEVog ,
dt
iroXXtiv doE6rjjJidTG)v nai dsiv&v yEVOfxsvcjv not, 14
.
1
anor]g
navrairaGiv avrog avrdTtrr\g TrpoorvxGov
teal
r\
rj
avrd
di
For the common reading dogai, we read, with almost all the doijaig, which is not only necessary to the sense, but
commentators,
required as the antithesis of alyOela.
v
’EppeXug, “ considerately or,
derly, methodically, with a proportionate regard to all the circum-
stances of the case.” 15
.
This was one of the charges made against the
vpvovpsvai.
poets in the third book of the Republic noLoi nanug Tieyovoi rzepi
evdalpoveg de reoXko'i
charge
we
is
call the
chi,
iii.,
made by
ug apa nai noir/ral nai XoyouvOpdrov rd peyicra, on eiaiv ddinoi pev :
Repub., 392, A.
The same
the prophet against the Israelites.
“And now
*
dlnaioi 61 aOXioi.
proud happy, yea, those who do iniquity are exalted .”
15
.
On
Mala-
the words evdalpoveg evdaipovi&pevai, see Note
XXXVIII., App. 1
.
2.
7rpog
rehog dvooiovg.
See Note XXXIX., App.
rapdrry ravvv ev dnaoi rovroig iddv.
places a
comma
In this state,
it
The common reading
and connects idiov with what follows. has given a good deal of trouble to some of the comafter rovroig,
The difficulty, however, may be removed, as we think, by the reading adopted, although the location of the word would be rather unusual. Tapdrry Idcov is equivalent to mentators, especially to Ast.
rapdrry %cjv,
idelv,
“you
“happening
freely rendered
:
are troubled at the sight.”
“ Or
Xoronryg npoorv-
The whole may be thus when beholding men growing old, who con-
to be
an eyewitness.”
—
tinue unholy even to the end of life, leaving children and children’s children in the highest honours, you are troubled at the sight
when hearing by
;
or,
the ear, or happening to be an eyewitness of the
impious and dreadful deeds which have occurred
in
the lives of cer-
you yet behold them, by reason of these very crimes, advancing from a low condition to the highest power, then it is evident that you blame,” &c. Some editions omit opdg altogether as tain persons,
redundant; but by the disposition only admissible, but necessary.
we have made
of
Ldcov, it is #
not
3
CONTRA ATHEOS.
44
5
ravra dpdg
etc
dcptnopsvovg
•
ofUKp&v
Tvpavvldag re nal ra psytOTA
slg
tots 6ia navTa toiclvtcl 6rjXog
el
uipcfrsoOaL j
7
usv
tieovg, cog
ah Zovg
ovk av* sOsXcov
•
ovTag tgjv toiovtcov did %vyykvstav ,
dyopsvog 6s vito Tivog akoyiag apa, nal
ov dvvapsvog dvoxepaZvetv tieovg, slg tovto vvv to nddog 9
sXrjXvdag, coot slvat psv donelv avTOvg tcov 6s avOpconi,
vcov naTacppovslv nal apsXsZv npaypaTCOv. tva ovv prj ent 6
psZ^ov sXO'O ooi iraOog rrpbg aosbsiav to vvv rrapov 66ypa,
aXX sav 9
olov dnodionopnrjoaoOaL* Xoyoig avTO npoo-
Ticog
ibv yevcbpeOa dvvaTOt 3.
A
drjhog It
say
peptybpevog.
dfj’hog el
did Zvyyiveiav
when
as to verbs,
9
tov
s^rjg
peculiar Graecism, equivalent to drjlov eotl oe
would be good Greek, and perhaps
fie/MpEodcu.
4.
TreipcbpeOa, ovvd'ipavTeg
,
ovk.
dv eOeXov.
dv
is
still
more
Attic, to
joined to participles as well
the participle can be resolved into a subordinate
“When
you would not be willing, if you followed that See Remarks on £vyyevsia ( 12 ), page 42. 5. dvoxepaivELv. A most significant term, although not easily transferred to the English. It means, literally, to disrelish that is (in this connexion), “to get rid of the innate moral sense or taste spoken of above, under the term ^vyyEveiaV Or it may refer to the wholesome prejudices mentioned in note on 8 3. 6 'izdQog. Some would reject this word as having crept in as a clause.
natural feeling.”
,
,
.
repetition of the nddog above.
It
may, however, be taken as
in ap-
position with to vvv napov doy/ua. 7.
dlK
kdv.
This place
may be
freed
from
its difficulties
if
we
read olov te regard y understood as subjunctive to kav, and refer ysvdpeda to Iva, instead of kdv , as is generally done. Ordo, Iva ovv ,
py kldy oaodai
possible)
8
.
this 9.
.
.
.
.
.
.
akXJ ( kav nog olov 7r
eipdpEOa,
we may
&c
be able, &c.
dTvodtoTro/iTTjGadai.
On
yevdpeQa dvvarol dnodcono/inr]-
y) Iva
r’
“ That .
.
it
let
may
not increase, but that
(if
us try.”
the peculiar force and significance of
remarkable word, see Note XL., App. owd^avreg. “ Having connected our next argument with that
which we so thoroughly (did) concluded (diETrEpavdpeda) against the man, who did not hold that there were Gods.” c5 is to be referred to die7rEpavd/j.£da, although in the dative by the attraction of ovv in ovvdtyfLVTEg.
Connect 7TELpdpsOa with Tpoaxpr/oaodai.
deavour to use as an additional argument.”
“ Let us en-
45
CONTRA ATHEOS.
rov ronapanav ovx rjyovpevov tieovg e% dp diSTTEpavdpeda, rovrcp ravvv npoaxp^ciodai. av d’, w
\dyov, \r]g
irpog
Gi
K Xelvlcl
re
MeycXXe, vnep rov veov naOdirep ev rolg
teal
epirpoadev dnoftpevopevot, ScaSex^aOe
Siadcdd)
ejanep vvv
rolg Xoyoig, eyd) acpcpv
ep,'7TiiTT'Q
av Se
*
n
SvanoXov
Srj
Set-dpevog
10 rov norap^ov.
Xey eig nal av ovro) ravra Spa notrjaopev re rjpelg elg to Svvarov d Xeyeig. MEr. ’A/l/l’ ovSev ratf av lacog 11 elr\ x^^tcov evdell-aa-
KA.
’OpOtig
*
•
Oai rovro ye (bg erupeXelg apinptiv elal deot ovx V TT0V V tgjv peyedei Sia<pep6vrG)v. tjicovov yap ttov real Tcaprjv rolg ,
There
10. 6ia6i6C) rov norapov.
flood mentioned, 21 (14) dcadaLveiv.
In that place
:
KaOdnep it
was
is el
yet an allusion to the strong tt
orapov r/pdg tdec rpelg ovrag
and profound the depths of which
figurative of the dark
argument respecting self-motion ( avTOKivr/Gig ), had to be so carefully sounded by the Athenian before the others could venture to follow’ him. Here there is an allusion to a like difficult argument soon to follow, respecting a special Providence.
A lafhSti is Attic future for diadidaGu. 11. akV ovdev ratf uv Iggh;. The common reading gives this to the Athenian. The words r/novov and napr/v below, show beyond doubt, that
it
accommodate some ancient Athenian,
There
belongs to Megillus.
various readings, but they have
rolg vvv
dr/
the argument by which
all
error,
which gave
keyopevoig, “just it
are,
it
is true,
several
evidently arisen from a desire to
was shown
now
that
it
this
passage to the
spoken,” referring to
was
the best soul
(ijjvxv
which moved and guided the heavens and the earth. What said reminds us of the speech of Clinias, 4 (3). Here, as well
dpcGTr/) is
as in that place, surprise
is
expressed that
it
should be thought ne-
cessary to resort to laboured and recondite arguments to prove so plain a thing as the doctrine of a special Providence.
Clinias says, “ and we, as far as
us.”
“ But
And it
Do
this,” tell
then Megillus, the simple-minded Spartan, breaks
in,
could not be any very
possible, will
difficult affair to
the position just proved, namely, that
moved, &c., they, say, leap at
“
do what you
is
it
was
show,” &c.
From
the best soul that
in their simplicity, directly infer, or, as
we might
once to the truth of a special Providence, although the
Athenian or Socrates, having
in
view more stubborn disputants,
wishes to enter more minutely into the argument.
—
46
•
CONTRA ATHEOS.
vvv
drj
Xeyopevotg,
(bg
dyadot ye ovreg rcdaav aper^v i rjv
navrcov empeXetav olKetorarrjv avrcbv ovoav
tC)V
nett-
rrjvrat.
KA. Kcu ocpodpa ye 12 eirrjuovov. A0. To pera tovto tolvvv notv^j
ovve^erd^G)pev,
13
rtva
Xeyovreg aperijv avrtbv, opoXoyovpev avrovg ayaOovg vat.
ra
(f)epe ,
6’
to aocppovelv vovv re ,
evavrta tcantag ,
el-
nertTijoOai, fyapev dperrjg,
;
KA. Qapev. A0.
T t de
;
dperr]g pev avdpetav elvat y detXtav de, natdac
;
KA. II aw pev ovv. A0. K at ra pev aloxpd rovrcdv ra de, naXd Qrjoopev KA. A vdytcrj. A0. Ka£ tgjv pev TTpoorjrcetv rjplv, ehrep onooa cj)Xavpa ,
,
,
9
14r
,
fieolg de
pev
ovre peya ovre opinpov rdjv rotovrcdv perov epov -
.
12
.
nal a (podpa ye.
Megillus
:
Ast thinks that
this also is the
language of
Megilli sunt verba, egregie in Spartanum convenientia.
cannot see
why
We
they do not agree as well with the character of
been the same speaker,
Clinias.
Besides, had
lieve that
he would have used
it
httjkovov
we can
hardly be-
so soon after tjkovov.
The
answer of the Athenian, seems to imply that both the others had uttered their assent to what had been said. Te, when connected with such words as atyoSpa, pdTucrra, axcbov, &c., seems not so much to qualify the sense as the force or vehemence of the expression by which we mean, that it makes a sort of apology for the term, implying that a stronger one might perhaps have been used, but that the speaker means to keep within bounds. Thus, Clinias says c(j>66pa ye, “ earnestly to say no more, In this or to use no stronger expression, did I give heed to it.” w*ay, although a limiting particle, it does, in an indirect manner, increase the force of the term to which it is attached. word
kolv\7 in the following ,
;
:
13. ovvef-eT&gupev.
which neither
The common
reading here
The change
is
cwe^era^ovrov,
it,
nor any of the vari-
made on
the authority of the
suits the vulgar text preceding
ous readings proposed.
is
best commentators, and the Latin versification of Ficinus
commu
niter inves tig emus. 14. Kai tcov
pev
irpootiKeiv rjplv.
Twv and
ijplv
are neither of
them
CONTRA
KA. Ka£ ravQ
TC
A0.
6s,
apsXeiav re
rrjv 'ipvxrjg ^rjc/opev
KA.
K at ntig
A0.
’A/l/l’
nag av.
ovrcog bfioXoyoi
’
/cal
apyiav
nojg ’ksyeig
rj
;
47
ATIIEOS.
ape -
/cal rpv(f)7]v elg
;
15 ;
Tovvavriov.
KA. Nat. governed by npocrjueiv, but by psrbv below, which of the person and a genitive of the thing.
erned by npoarjKeiv but he ,
TEivai
;
and thus taken
neuter plural
clearly wrong,
is
psrbv
for the infinitive, there is
more than the
the Philebus, 22, E.
devrepecuv
ovd’
:
av
rfiv
There should be a comma
to be connected with
with the
orbaa dfkavpa, but thus
ellipsis supplied,
:
is
The
the ellipsis supplied, would be as follows kelv pETElvai
we
as gov-
used
is
no anomaly
for ps-
in the
tuv bizbaa
(J>?iavpa
will say, that to us (if to
Latin.
Compare
j/dovrj lletov aTir/Q&g
after eItzep,
which
—Ecnsp
orbaa
order of the whole, with Kal rjplv.plv kpovpEv
:
av
not
is
to be taken elliptically, or
shrEp ( nvlg eIglv olg petegtl).
be referred to t&v pbv.
(p?iavpa is to
a dative
tCjv
In this use of the participle for the infinitive,
ottogu.
the Greek resembles the English
tcote T^eyoLTo.
may have
Ast regards
(rivsg eIgIv olg petegtl).
ttpoGrj-
“
And
pertains to have a share Gods there is not the least use of sinsp, compare Aristotle’s Politi
any beings)
it
in those things that are bad, but to the
For
participation,” &c. ca,
ii.,
EiTcsp
6
:
— npog tov
blv yap tovto,
tt
this
xpr/Gipov bs ovcr/g ^pacvTi/Tog Trpbgovbsv rtiv eyKVKTiicjv, aKX
apd
no^Epov.
tt/v
a?i/1’ ELTcsp
avTov
—
fi'X.d'KTETai
dro
ETZEif
KA. Kat nug
vavTiov.
;
Nicomach.,
v., 9,
9
ov
:
^ov^tjglv, cjgte ovk aduiElrat, bid y
povov.
Tafijbov
aTCK ovk dno 15.
Aristot., Ethic.
n ugxco
Aristophanes, Nubes, 227
:
Tovg fisovg VTTEpcppovEtg,
Tijg yfjg
“And how
;
Elrsp.
should
we I”
A0.
’A XX slg tov-
’A/Md, like yap frequently refers to something understood, ,
supposed to pass rapidly through the mind of the speaker. It also always implies a negative, if not expressed. This use of these little particles
gives singular beauty as well as force to the Greek
They thus carry along with them variety and fulness of meaning, at the same time without encumbering or weakening the
language.
sentence with too
us from
many
words.
By
silent implication
losing sight of previous propositions.
carries along with
it,
they keep
Thus, bXkd here
or keeps in mind, the whole of the precedi-ng
sentence, being pregnant with a denial of the question.
“ No,
we
cannot assign dpe^Eiav apyiav &c., to the virtue of soul, but (aTM) ,
to the contrary.”
,
48
CONTRA ATHEOS.
T avavrta apa tovtolc; eig rovvavrlov KA. T ovvavTiov. A0. T i ovv 6rj Tpv(ptiv teal apehrjg dpyog te 1
A0.
.
2
(
;
7]T7]g
yiyvoir dv 6 rotovrog rcaoiv ’
1. Tavavna apa must be assigned
2
TpvQtiv
.
tovtolc, that
is,
elg tovvclvtlov
that
.
.
word tyOpoc or
argument, not very
intelligible,
made
plgtjtoc, for
tolovtoc
most
which he deduces an It may, however,
from pLael below.
human
stands, and regarded as an application, to
af-
and by taking away the interrogation which is found in The order would be thus tolovtoc (&eoc) nacnv fjplv
,
editions.
:
yiyvoLT’ dv Tpvtytiv nal dpeTiijc apyoc te , ov 6
“ Such a Deity would be to us
Ac.
elvaL ,
one
in short,
whom
(ov), or just
The only real is somewhat
Ac.
like,” it
is for
better by inserting
of the previous sentiment, by supposing &eoc understood after
fairs,
as
Ast, as usual,
fjp.Lv.
this could be
apyia Ac.
Tpv<prj
dpETyv ipvxvc-
is, etc
naoiv
.
after ylyvoif dv the
it
ixoi^
rjplv.
“ the opposites of
;
apelrjc apyoc te
teal
emendation here, and thinks
be read as
ov 6
KoOoVpOLGL paXiOTCL ELUeXoV E(paOKEV Aval)
KT](j)rjGL
olov,
The
harsh.
words before
passage
relative
corresponding to tolovtoc.
ever, in the order of the
Ac.
;
such a one as the poet said was
difficulty in the
stands,
would be
tcoltjttjc E(f>aGKEV elkeTlov
all Tpvtytiv, dpEhrjc,
From
is in ov,
we
which,
should expect
how-
its position,
its correlative, it
may
be re-
garded as affected, through a species of attraction, .by the words im-
Had it followed tolovtoc, it would probably which case the sentence would have presented no difficulty. The form of words in Greek is frequently affected by distance or contiguity, so as to be different from what would be reSee remarks on the w ord quired by strict grammatical depend ance. view The taken in respect to dv is 7toXXogttjv, Note XXIX., App. confirmed by similar examples which occur a few lines below ov mediately preceding.
have been
olov, in
?
:
pTjTsov tyeLv rjdoc tolovtov 6 ys, instead of tolovtov olov ys.
page 49 ( 5 ), in the words d red to
is
Hesiod
ttoogtjkel ,
Ac.
The
poet here refer
:
76J Se
gdy,
6rj
So, also,
&EOL VEpEGCOGL KCU
K7](j)fjVEGGL
CLVEpEC, OC
KEV CLEpyOC
Kodovpoic elkeIoc bpyrjv.
Works and Days, 278 It
may
be that
we have
dv, instead
the language of the verse quoted
;
terferes with the strict grammatical
of olov, to accommodate
it
a circumstance which often
dependence of a sentence
.
to in-
j
CONTRA ATHEOS. KA. ’0 pOorard ye elntiv. 3 A0. 0 vkovv tov. ye tieov* ov o ye roi avTog pLoel
•
49
prjreov e%etv rjOog tolovtov
n tolovtov (pOeyyeoOat, neipG)-
rep re
pevcp ovfi emTpenTeov.
KA. Ov pev T
A0. £h
6rj
yap av
ntig
6rj.
npoorjneL pev rcpaTTecv nai empefelodaL dca-
tovtov ye vovg tgjv pev peyaXuv em-
(pepovTCjg Ttvog , 6 6e
t&v opwptiv
peXelTaL,
;
5
tov tolovtov Xoyov
6e apeXel tcaTa Tiva eixaivovvTeg ,
ovfc
,
av navTanaoL nXrjppeXolpev
;
Guo-
'S. bpOoTard ye elrrdv. Ast would subjoin these words to e(paonev, and make them a part of what was said by the Athenian. They undoubtedly refer to e^aanev, yet it is perfectly agreeable to the Greek
idiom to regard them as the answer of Clinias. deal of vivacity in such an elliptical reply. tcev,
asserted that one said so and so, the reply
it is
most correctly
and
that only
:
T
£2 l 6rj
as,
;
may
g
e.
be,
.,
and
,
the
r<p TreLpopivtp
irpoorjueL.
most important truth. God hates that The Divine character is the Divine Law. It must never be called in ,
unlike himself.
is
allowance is to be made such a thought.” 5.
it
A
fieon.
which
ground and sanction of question
a great
is
too.
ovkovv tov ye
4.
There
equivalent to tyaa-
Our own language admits of
opdorard ye elndv.
when
It is
T2 l
tolovtov QdiyyeoOat ova entTpenTeov. to
is
him whd would even attempt
the relative of tolovtov
“
No
to utter
some distance
be-
had immediately followed it in the construction of the senThe same tence, it would perhaps have been more properly oil drj. reasons apply here that were given in respect to ov a few lines above. The order of the sentence would be as follows koto, tlvu low.
If
it
:
’koyov ova dv nhyppehoTpev enaLvovvTeg tov tolovtov Kei,
&c.
“
By what reason
(or
<p (olcp) <5y
why) should we not
praising such a being as the one to
whom
Tzpoor}-
act absurdly in
belongs to act and to
it
exercise care in a special manner, and yet the mind of this being
should care only for the great, while
it
neglects the small.”
occurs a number of times in a sentence, there it
is
into anything like tolerable English, without too
cution.
The
first 6e
word
much
circumlo-
between the two main the second, between two subordinate
;
In such cases the subordinate 6e
while in order to avoid the ,
6e
indicates an opposition
members of the sentence clauses.
When
a difficulty in putting
awkward
tion but.
E
is
best rendered by our
repetition of the conj mic-
CONTRA ATHEOS.
50 ntipev de ojde
dp ov Kara dvo ’
•
eldrj
to tolovtov nparrsL 9
5
6 7Tpdrro)v sere ffedg, sir av6po)nog
KA.
II olg) df]
A0.
A eyopev
; •
d de aueXel .
rw
oXcp
teal Tpvcpfj, el
dta-
dtaepepov ovdev olopevog elvat
fj
apeXovpevuv rtiv opuipCdv, (j)epec,
;
7
fj
padvpta
rj
eonv dXXcog
rratg
ytyvopevr] dpeXeta
;
ov yap 770V orav ye advvarov y tg)v drrdvTCxtv empeXelo $ai, rore dpeXeta eorac rcov opcupCdv fj peydXcdv prj hnpe8
Xovpevcp, d)v dv dvvapec ffeog pfj
fj
(pavXog rig
&v
eXXcTrfjg nal
dvvarog empeXeloOai yiyvrjrac.
6.
to tolovtov TtpuTTEL namely, neglects small things.
7.
o de dpeXEt.
,
Stephanus here would read
Else, he says,
ode.
must be regarded as redundant, or otherwise the sentence would According to this view of Stephanus, the following would be the order ode ape^el, fj dca^epov ovdev olopevog de
remain suspended.
:
to
elvcu
&c.,
62, o,
fj
if it
teal
Tpv(jty el diatyepeL.
“
He
neglects,
makes no difference, &c., or through sloth and does make a difference.” We think, however, there
either thinking that
effeminacy,
ftadvpia
it
no need of this supposition, or of regarding the de as redundant. There is a pev implied (if it is not rather lost by a corrupt reading) is
In that case, de has
after or before dta^epeL. sition or contrast,
and should be rendered
ternative intended, and also the antithesis
ordinate
member
pressed thus
“
:
—
el
We
(
pev )
usual force of oppo-
made by the
The
al-
de in the sub-
—
dpe2el would be clearly exnpaTTov npaTTec), the doer doeth makes no difference to the whole,
diatyepei, 6 de
say, then (o
thus, either supposing that
when
its
while, as above.
it
small things are neglected, or else (he doeth thus) through
indolence and effeminacy,
if,
in fact,
it
does
make
a difference, while
yet he neglects them.” 8. prj
empe2,ovpdv(p
d)v dv.
This
is
appended by
tion or epexegesis of the preceding oTav ye dbvvaTov,
n ov oTav
would be thus
:
tov epuepdv
peyakov (to)
dedg
fj
ij
ov yap
(ftavkog Ttg
which may care of
all
dv
&c.
of explana-
The
order
ye advvaTOv, &c., tote dpe2,eia egtol
prj E'KLpe2.ovpEvo
ycyvrjTaL ekkiitfig
be freely rendered thus things, then
way
:
“
(tovtov) ov dv dvvapei
teal prj
When
no one, whether
it
dvvaTog kmpEXEZoOai, it is
impossible to take
be a God or any inferior
being, can be justly charged with neglect of those things, be they
great or small, in respect to which, he
power
for a special
Providence.”
is
wanting
in the requisite
Or, in other words, there can be
CONTRA ATHEOS.
KA. A0. oav oi rovg
IT tig
yap av
Nw
6rj
-dsovg
11
51
;
6v’ ovrsg
9
rptolv rjplv ovoiv anoKpcvdodoj -
psv apcporspot
10
opoXoyovvrsg slvai
6s drspog, 6 6s , apsXslv rtiv opiKptiv.
tisovg dpcporspot (pars yiyvtioKstv Kai
*
rrapairr]-
irptirov
psv,
opav Kal anovsiv
iravra XaOslv 6s avrovg ov6sv 6vvarov slvai rtiv onoocjv
12
,
elalv ai aioOrjosig re Kal sTUorr\pai,
ravra
rj
;
KA.
ntig
ravrq Xsysrs sx^iv
;
Ovrcog.
Tt
A0.
13
6ac
^v^rolg rs
6vvao0ai iravra ottogcov av 6vvapig son
;
adavdroig
teal
;
KA. Ilwf yap ov Gvyx^p^ovrai nal ravra ovrcog sxsiv A0. Keu pijv dyaOovg rs Kal dplorovg tipohoyrjKapsv ;
14:
avrovg slvat nsvre ovrsg.
KA.
2(f)66pa ys. T
A0.
Ap’ ovv ov paOvp'ia psv Kal rpvcpq a6vvarov av -
no neglect where there is no power. In such a case, prj empeTieiaOai is not the same with apehelv. See Note XLVI., App., On the Peculiarities of certain Negative Forms of Verbs, deoc; f) tyavTiog rig dv is
equivalent to rig elrs
may
yaTiav
fi-edg
“whether small or great.” as in the Republic, ttolov
;
Evpo.0r)g
stance). 9.
Gods
fj
What
dv’ ovtec.
10. oi
sirs (j>av?iog dv.
So, also, opiKpdv
fj
pe-
be viewed as equivalent to dre apiKptiv dre psyahov,
vi.,
Or,
486, B.
dvopaOrjg.
it :
may
be regarded as understood,
ov pyv ovds rode TTapaTisiibEig.
circumstance! Whether docile The two supposed objectors.
or dull.”
Who admit, both of them, that the one says that they are easily propitiated, and
dsovg psv uptyorspoc.
exist, while the
to
“ Surely you will not omit this (circum-
“
the other, that they are regardless of small things.” 11.
TTapaiTijTovg.
12.
Tdv onooov
See Note XLI., App. eiaiv ai aiaOrjceu; rs Kai ETnoTrjpaL.
“ All such
things as are capable of being perceived by the sense and by the un-
derstanding.” 13.
tl
dal\
from
A ai has
the
same analogy
to
6rj
that vai has to
vrj.
It
only in a prolongation and sharpening of the voice to “ But real* express surprise or wonder, which is its usual office.
differs
6r]
ly!” 14.
dyaOovg te Kai dptarovg.
See Note XLII., App.
,
:
52
CONTRA ATHEOS.
rovg opoXoyeiv Tcparrecv otlovv ronapanav, bvrag ye otovg opoX&yovpev decXcag yap 15 e/cyovog ev ye 7]plv dpyca pa•
;
Ov/iia de , apycag /cat rpvcprjg.
KA. A^rjOearara ’
Xeyetg.
A0. ’A py 'ta pev drj /cat paOvpca ovdetg dpeXel fietiv. ov yap pereonv avrcp rcov detXiag. KA. ’O pOorara Xeyetg. A0. Ovkovv to Xotnov, elrcep apeXovct t&v optrcptiv /cat oXtycov rtiv nept to nav rj ytyvdxj/covTeg d)g Toirapa nav ovdevog tg)V tocovtgjv empeXetodat del, dpcpev dv rov1
,
to
Xotnov nXfjv to ytyvcbo/cetv TOvvavTtov
Tt to
rj
*
;
KA. Ovdev. A0. TLorepov ovv yorra, 2
d)
,
ayvoovvTag
voiav apeXovvTag
7/
aptOTe
/cat
re, fmt
(3eXTtOTe 'dtipev ce Ae,
deov empeXetodat,
ytyvdo/covTag otl
del,
XoTaTOi tg)v avOpuncov XeyovTat notetv vai /3eXTLG) npaTTetv rjdovtiv
gjv drj
Xvircov, ov notetv
ij
6
15.
3
Connect
tag yap.
etdores*
,
dt’
aAAa
dm
npaTTOvai
ay-
icaOanep oi (pav£?-
rjTTag
;
this
with what
is
said page 46, 10
pev avdpeiav elvai, deikiav be, Katdag. See Note XLIII., App. “ For the rest of our argument.” tuv Tcepl to nav. to Xoitcov.
aperfjg 1.
“
Which have Gods are
the
a relation to the whole.” “ Shall
dtipev ce leyovTa.
2.
we
down as saying that when they ought to exercise
put you
ignorant, and that even
a care, they through ignorance neglect
they ought, yet better,
&c.
;
still,
it
men
as the meanest of
;
or, that
knowing that
are said to do,
of pleasures and griefs, do not do what they ought 1”
A
Tieiadai.
who know
so they (the Gods), through the overpowering influence
mode
of expression very
common
A eov
etz ipe-
with the nominative
neuter participle of del and of the compounds of the substantive verbs. It
is
more it
nearly equivalent to the genitive absolute, being, however,
which mere accessory cir-
closely connected with the reasoning of the sentence in
stands, instead of denoting, like the latter, a
cumstance of time or
place.
“
It
being necessary,” or “
when they
ought,” &c. 3.
peTiTiu 7rpa,TT£Lv.
would here read npaTTEiv
,
Stephanus, -on the authority of Eusebius,
\3e7iTLov
however,
is
npaTTecv, melius esse alia facere.
more
strictly in
/3e7iTiG)
accordance with the purest
CONTRA ATHEOS.
KA. Utig yap av A0. Ov/covv 6rj rays dvOpcbmva
53
;
ipvxov perexEL (pvo£G)g apa
navjcjv
rr
paypar a*
rrjg
re kp-
5
teal
,
'dEOGedecrarov avro eotl
dvOpomog.
%G)G)v
KA. E owe yovv. f,
6 A0. Qegjv ys pr\v nr^para (frapEV uvai iravra onooa 7 $vr]Ta £oja, uvnEp /cat rov ovpavov oXov KA. II tig yap ov A0. "H 6rj Totvvv oputpa fj pEyaXa rig tyarG) ravra elvai 8 rolg dEolg. ovdETEpug yap rolg HE/crripEVotg rjpag dpsXElv ;
av
EL 7] TTpoorpiov ,
yap
7rtipEV
dfj /cat
KA. To A0. To 9
empEXEGTaroig ye ovoi
7
rolov
7TEpt
pV/COTE
(
dpiarotg. o/co-
to6e eti rrpog rovroig.
;
te aloOrjGEGjg nal dvvapEug, dp ovtc kvav’
dXXrjXoLV irpog paordbvrjv
tlCi)g
/cal
/cal
%aAe7rdT?yTa egtov
7re-
;
Compare the examples,
Greek idiom.
^a/leTrd or
x^sir urepa opav dwarog KCiravorj;
also such phrases as padta paOelv uaha ideiv, Aoyof ,
and others, which are generally expressed in Latin by the supine, difficile visu, mirabile dictu, &c. In such cases, of an infinitive dependent on an adjective, the Greek
cat
,
T/diorr/
niveiv at-ia ftavpaocu, ,
usage of the active, instead of the passive, corresponds to the Eng-
As we
lish idiom.
stead of better
say, hard to learn , cruel to behold, better to do, in-
to be done,
although some might regard this last ex-
ample as hardly admissible. 4, 5.
dv6pd)mva Tzpaypara
deoGeSeoTarov.
See Note XLIV.,
App. 6.
7.
See Note XLV., App.
fietiv KTr/para.
ovpavov olov.
mated universe,
This
is
like Paul’s
here evidently put for the whole ani-
naoa
tj
GpuKpa
creation, the whole creature world."
or small.” 8.
See page
ovderepug.
ktlgiq,
Rom.,
peyaXa, “be they great
7}
“ In neither respect,” that
we
participle, in
such connexions as
are small or great.
“
is,
E2
The
&c.
not (that
power) reciprocally an opposite nature
ovgi.
has the force of a con-
this, often
Have they
whether you take the
empeleardTotg ye
ditional clause, “ if they are most provident," dp’ ova evavTiog.
22, “ the whole
50, (8.)
ground that
9.
viii.,
is,
have not sense and
in respect to
ease and
diffi-
,
.
54
CONTRA ATHEOS.
KA.
Xeyeig
XIoj^*
;
A0. 'Opav pev nov Kal aKoveiv ra opiKpd 10 ftaXeirurepov fj ra peyaXa <pepeiv 6 av Kal Kparelv Kal emfieXelodaL rcbv opuipCdv Kal oXiyov rravrl paov f) rdbv evavricov. KA. Kal noXv ye. A0. ’I arpti. dr) itpoorer ay[levov 11 oXov tl 'depaneveiv ’
•
,
eulty
1
”
o,lo6rjGig
to Trepl alodrjoEog is equivalent to to
or
tt}q alaOjjoecjc,
and both taken together constitute a nominative
;
rj
for the
dual verb egtov
ra
10.
We may say in Greek, x a ^ £ ^ torepov egtl ra opLKpu
opav or
Gfiinpa. ra,
,
apiKpa ken
on the words
(3),
11. ’larpti 6 tj
x^EnuTEpa
See Remarks, page
opav.
52,
np&TTEiv.
(3e?itig)
npoGTEraypEvov
comma
Ast would place a
.
and render according to the following order
larpc5
:
“
dvvapEvcp dEpaTTEVEiv tl TTpoGTETayphov &c. ,
To
6rj
after
drj,
fiovlopEvu Kal
who is
a physician
and able to heal something committed to his care,” &c. In view avT& below is made redundant. This interposition of the
willing this
pronoun,
it is
sentence
;
true, is not
yet
still it
unusual
seems to us
in a
long and complicated Greek
in this place
to regard TcpoGTETaypivov as the nominative
more natural and easy (some would
call
accusative) neuter impersonal absolute, like diov, page 52 true, this Sel,
or of the impersonal
it
compounds of the substantive
napov and the kindred vnapxov , yet ,
extended beyond these
ally prevails in respect to
6okovv, TzpoGrjKov ally
;
as,
and
,
Thucyd.,
i
termined by them.”
,
limits.
7r apaaxov,
(2).
now and
verb, such as
not unfrequent-
occasion-
sometimes with
dotjav,
then with passive participles gener-
125, dsdoy^Evov ds avTolg
“
when
,
it
was
de-
So, also, with slpppivov and ov joined with ad-
See Kuhner, 312.
—
quum
turpe
sit
If the rule
may
in this
,
dvvaTov ov, &c.
we
The same usage
tvxov
jectives; as, aiGxpov ov “it being base,” or, ov,
It is
usage generally takes place with the neuter participle of
e£ov, TrpoGov ,
ly find
the
it
admit of being extended to npoGTETaypivov, which
is
ubrjTiov
case
somewhat akin
and Elpppivov, the sentence may be thus renderand according to the following order and punctuation Tarp<5 6rj
to do^av dEboypEvov
ed,
:
3ov?io[iEV(p K aXtig
to
Kal dwapivip 'xpoGTETayp.Evov, oXov
nuv
avTti T(bt plv [lEyaXav ETTLjiE^ovpEvip, tCjv popiuv
GfUKptiv apElovvTL
competent,
it
tl tiEpaTTEVEiv, e^el tcote
is
;
“When,
to a physician
who
is
dfi
Kal
both willing and
appointed to heal any whole, will his work, as a
whole, be in a condition creditable to him, attending, or only to the great portions
if
he attends
while he neglects the small?”
Take
CONTRA
ATIIEOS.
(SovXofXSVG) KGL fiwapLEVG), TG)V [LEV p£ydX(i)V ETUfieXoVUEVCt),
TG)V
pL 0pLG)V
dVTU) TO 7TGV
6 e Kdt GflLKpdjv G\lEXoVVTi
£%eI 7T0TE fCaXojg
;
KA. 0 vda/itig. A0. Ov p,r\v ovde tcovofiotg ,
12 ,
nvdepvrjrdig ovde OTpdrrjyolg ovtf ol,
,
twv
ov c5’ av tlgI noXLTUiolg, ovd’ g)iXcp
T ^ v oXlyoiv nai
ovdevc,
ovde ydp dvev oputip&v
1
opu/cptiv,
rovg pteyaXovg
*
itoXXg
(f>aotv oi
tolovtgjv
peydXa.
rj
XiOoXoyoi
XiOovg ev kelgOgl.
KA. Hug yap dv
;
A0. M?) roLvvv tov ye gjgl,
roocp dupideGTepa
tc
pud TEXvrj Gpjh'pa nai p,eydXa dnepya^ovrat
ovTa
15
nore
'Svtjtgjv
tg npoorjtcovTa avrolg epya,
dripLLOvpy&v (pavXorepov, oi
docpnep dv dpeivovg
14:
fteov ai;id)OG)p,£v
ai TeXeojTEpa •
tov 6e 'deov
te GocpdjraTOV, ftovXopievov t* empLeXelodaL
teal
dvva-
bmpe^ovpevcp as a conditional clause, like empeTieGTaTOig ye ovoi on ,
which we remarked a short distance back. In this way deparzeveiv is governed by npooTeTaypevov. and avrip comes in easily in the order of the sense. 12.
hTtpekovpevid
13.
dvev 7
14.
.
(j/u/eptiv.
A ZiuGcopev.
.
upehovvTi. See Note XLVI., App. See Note XLVII., App. .
Some would
account of the particle
here prefer the reading uZi&pev on
which,
pfi],
is
it
with the 1st aorist subjunctive active. rians there are, however, so
may
many
well be doubted whether the
ged on account of
it.
contended, cannot be joined
To
this rule of the
common
15.
See many of these cases, Matthiae, Gr. Gram.,
Had
This it
con-
is to
prjre to'lvw
be connected with drjpuovpyCiv it would have reand would probably have read
immediately followed,
quired only the connective re in :
make them
rule.
tov 6e deov ovtcl.
(pavlorepov above.
thus
it
reading should be chan-
728, and the emendations by which he proposes to
form to this
gramma-
cases in direct opposition, that
prjre,
tov ye d-eov d^ioiGupev tzote
<f>av?ioTepov elvat, prjTe -deov ovtcl (a ^LGiGopev),
-d-VTjTCjv
&c.
to think that the Deity, of all others, is inferior to
nor that, being a
God most wise, with
6r)fuovpyC)v
“ Let us not deign
mortal workmen,
the will and the power, &c\, he
should take no charge of those small things, the care of which
is
sc
—
<
CONTRA ATHEOS.
56 pev paov
.jiEvov, gjv
rjv
empsXrjdrjvat opiKptiv ovrcSv , prjda-
empeXelcdat, aaOdnep apybv
arj
*
peyaXw
padvpovvra tg)V 6e ,
KA.
1
—
rj
detXov riva did irovovi
Mrjdapcog dogav rotavrrjv irepi detiv,
dexrifieOa
ovdaprj
•
G)
ano
%eve,
*
yap ovre ooiov ovr aXrjOeg dtavorjpa 9
dtavooiped av. ’
A0. A onovpev 6e pot vvv 6 at
rep (j)iXatTt(p rfjg
The
7]6rj
paXtora perp'uog 2 dieiXex-
dpeXetag nept
tietiv.
by the parenthetical There is an opposition, or, rather, contrast between this clause and what follows, and this contrast is denoted by de, which, in consequence of its position and easy,” &c.
6s in this case is occasioned
or explanatory clause, ol tu npocyKovTa, &c.
relation to a subordinate part,
rendered.
It is
appears harsh and
difficult
to be
a rule in English composition, that there should be
no grammatical dependence between a parenthesis and the other
members of a
period
or that
;
it
should be so introduced, that
it
may
be taken out without altering the grammatical relation of the other parts.
The
propriety of such a rule
may be doubted. At all events, much more freedom in the
the Greek writers allowed themselves construction of their periods
what grammarians haps, on the whole,
;
and hence the frequent occurrence of
and suspended sentences. Perwould be better thus to regard the passage be-
style anakoloutha it
,
fore us as suspended, for the sake of the stronger impression.
After
speaking parenthetically of the exact care exercised by human
artists,
the writer breaks out in the following unfinished contrast:
“But
most wise, possessed of power and will, &c-., should neglect small things like some idle and cowardly being, while he concerns himself about the great” The impatient and characterisNo, tic interruption of Clinias then comes in with admirable effect we can hold no such opiniem we can entertain no such false and unholy sentiment. In this way far more power is given to the sentence than could be imparted by the most perfect regularity. “While he does concern himself about the 1. Ttbv <5£ ysfalov. greater.” See the remarks on the best mode of rendering^ in certhat God, being
—
;
tain cases,
page 49, 5 and 50,
2. psrplog.
rye apsldag
the
—
Gods
7.
r<5 (j>i?icuTup in manner and degree.” The one who loves to impute neglect to
“ Properly, both
irepL ftstiv.
“
—who querulously arraigns the Divine Providence.”
i>ihaLTL(p
ds&v nspl ryg aps^slag.
Ordo
•
.
CONTRA ATHEOS.
57
N at.
KA. A0.
Tg5 ye pid&oOai 3 rolg Xbyoig opoXoyelv avrov pi)
Xeyecv
KA.
’OpOtig.
4
A0. ’Encpddjv ye
prjv rcpoodelodai pot done l pvOcov
en
TLVU)V.
KA.
II 0 L 6)v,
d)
’y aOe
A0. Ueldojpev rov
;
veavi'av rolg Xoyoig, dig rep rov
tt av-
rog empeXovpevcp rrpog rrjv ocjTTjpiav nal dperrjv rov oXov
ndvr earl ovvreraypeva
5
>
f
d)v nai
,
enaorov to npoorjfcov nao^ei Kal dpxovreg TTpooreraypevoi del ndOrjg
7
rtj
bpOtiq.
ev
d)v
teal
to gov,
to countenance,
eiolv
o^erAte, popiov elg
d)
whom
Stephanus,
seem
d’
pepiopov rov eoxarov reXog
See Note XLVIII., App. whom Ast follows, and
ye pidgeadat.
3. 4.
Ficinus
-
rovroig
noiel.
endorotg ent to opL/cporarov
rcpa^ecog, elg
real
direipyaopevoi
6
to pepog elg dvvaptv
would connect
opOibq
Eusebius and with the pre-
ceding leyeiv making the whole, from rw ye to en tivuv, the lan,
guage of the Athenian. hie haberet
Alioque Xeyeiv, sine hoc adverbio quern
STEPH.
?
Xeyeiv
itself,
however,
in the
“ speaking improperly,” or of “ saying nothing to the purpose,”
common
in
Greek, that
we much
opd&q to Clinias, making speaker, page 49 ed.
There
(3),
it
much
that
is
word Pia&oOai, and intimates
argument had been perfectly be added.
As much
so
remark-
It is principally
that, in his view, the
irresistible, so that
as to say
we have
characteristic of the
simple-hearted Clinias in this interrupting assent. directed to the
is
which gives
very similar to the reply of the same
bpOoTara ye elndv, on which
great vivacity, and
is
prefer the vulgar text,
usum
sense of
nothing more need
—you are most correct
in declaring
you have forced him your argument is, indeed, most triumphant. And then this brings on very naturally the subsequent reply of the chief speaker “ And yet there seems to me to be need in addition of something of a more persuasive kind.” tlv&v errudfiv. 5. owreraypeva. Not simply “appointed by” (although this sense is included), but “ so arranged as to co-operate (gw) with the unithat
;
:
versal guardian.”
See Note XLIX., App. This word must have here the sense of consh
6.
upxovreq.
7.
uTetpyaGpevoi.
58
CONTRA ATHEOS.
to nav gvvTELvei /3Xenov*
aei, na'tnsp
navoptnpov
ov. os
fie
X sXrjOs nspi rovro avro cog yevsotg svsna snstvov yiyvs10 tcu naoa oncjg fj rj rep rov navTbg 3io) vnapxovoa svfiat11 pux)v ovoid ovx evsna oov y tyvopsvrj, ov fie svsna snsivov. nag yap iarpog nai nag svrsxvog firjptovpyog navrog pev svsna navra spya^erai, npog to noivrj £vvrelvov 12 [3eX9
[
,
,
tlotov
•
pspog prjv svsna oXov nai ovx o^ ov pepovg svsna
dnspya^srai. ov
apiorov
,
yevsoscog
.
snsi
3
to nspi os
fit’
eavTTjv
1
tuted, appointed, or organized,
what unusual.
fie
fid
rj
ttjv
del ^vx?) ovvTSTaypsv'rf 5 oco-
fie
paTL tots psv aXXcp, tots
psTadoXag
on?]'
navTL ^vpbaivst nai ooi naTa fivvaptv 14
rip
Trjg noivrjg
dyavanrslg dyvoebv
fie
dXXcp, psTabdXXsi navTotag
erspav
'ipvx'fjv,
aXXo
ovfisv
sp -
although such an application
Efc pepiapov rov £ox arov
“ to the
,
is somemost minute di-
TeAof must be taken abverbially, as equivalent to teIeoq. must be referred to rovroig and Gwreraypeva. “ Looking tends.” The participle, being a 8. t-wreivei pTLeirov.
vision.” *£lv
favourite part of speech with the Greeks,
is
often thus used in con-
in this manner becoming equivalent to two verbs in English, as though it were (3X£n ei nai reivei. 9. Yeveaig. See Note L., App. 10. 11, 12, 13. See Note LI., App. 14. Kara dvvapiv, &c. “According to the power of the common
nexion with a verb
generation,” that
;
is,
possible for both these ends to be good of the individual and the good
as far as
it is
jointly accomplished, viz., the
of the universe at the 15.
We
GvvTeraypsvrj.
same
time.
The common
reading here
is
Emreraypevip
have, however, followed Eusebius and Stephanus,
to several old
manuscripts as authority.
who
'Lwreraypevr)
refers
makes a
much better sense, and is much better adapted to the context. It may be rendered here, “ soul appointed to act in co-operation with body.” 1.
6i’
kavrrjv.
“By
its
own
internal action.”
bi’
erepciv \pvxyv
“
Through the influence of another soul.” This is one of those cases in which bid with the accusative would be said to signify the instrumental cause, a sense which it generally has with the genitive.
Even
here, however,
we may
perceive a difference.
another, and may, perhaps, be
It
denotes a
upon more appropriately rendered by reason
spiritual instrumentality, either of soul
upon
itself,
or of one soul
CONTRA ATHEOS.
59
yov T<X TCETTEVT^j XeLTTET at TrXfjV fjLETaTiOsvaL TO
vov 3y'yvopEVov
7]0og Eig /3eXtlco tottov
x
,
e ^P 0V
fjLEV CL[IEL-
^ £ eig tov
XEipova, nard to npEirov avTcbv EizaoTcp, Iva Trjg rrpoo 77 -
potpag Xayx^v'Q.
K,ovor\g
KA.
U?j Xb/Eig T
A0.
navTG)v
dv Exot Xoyov 2 paoTtvvT] ETUfiEAEiag $£olg tcov tclvttj pioi doted) (ppa^ELV. el pitv yap Trpog to
B.L7T£p
,
oXov aEi olov
;
/3 Xettg)v
irXaTToc Tig pETaox^pctTi^ov Ta TravTa
rcvpbg v6(i)p kpipvxovf teat prj %vpixoXXa e% Evog
ek,
ek noXXcbv ev, Trp(OT7]g
fj
dsvTEpag
uETEiXrjfpOTa, nXrjOEOiv dnEtg
KooprjOECjg
vvv
•
,
,
6’
,5
dv
ital TpiTrjg
rj
eitj
7
)
yEVEOEog
t rjg \L£TaTiQ£\i£V7]gs
eotl OavpaoTT) paoTGjvT7 r<5 tov navTog
ETUpEXovpEVG).
KA. of,
av XiyEig
than by means
nearly to the
of,
same
;
although the two expressions sometimes
thing,
means reason and motive
The
adaptation of the soul to
Nothing, then,
its
in
regard to
come spirit-
The sentiment is this is its own work.
ual agencies, having often the like relation.
“
,
:
appropriate state
the chess-player but to transfer the pieces
is left to
M eraridhaL —calculum quasi
thus adapted to their proper stations.”
“to take back or change a piece.” We render ireTTEVTfj chess-player by way of accommodation to a well-known game, in retractare ,
,
,
order to give more force to the simile,
'ipvxv
properly vis animee than the substance of soul ,
2.
7
Ht7rep dv ex 01
E
3, 4.
l
,
&c
See Note
yev yap npoc to olov.
this difficult passage,
Note
-
LIII.,
M.ETaTideyEvrjQ KocryrjGEog.
some
of
distance, see
new arrangement
“ Displaced arrangement,” that
is,
every act of providential intera displacing of the whole order of the chess-board at each
requiring a
mean
for
Supply pETaTXyyCLTi(5[iaTa.
6.
;
For an extended explanation
App.
UTZELpa.
ference
means more
App.
and of what follows
5.
move. where
LII.,
here
itself.
at
See the comparison of the n ettevtt/c a short distance back, also the verb [leraTidevaL M ETanxyparigo would
we have
here, to transform immediately
.
,
without intermediate means
(media) or successive generations of cause and effect.
on the other hand, although active
in
M eraSd/ilsi,
form, has an intransitive or
middle meaning, signifying a change from internal causes things themselves, whether innate or implanted.
in the
60
CONTRA ATHEOS. r
A0
eneLdr) Kareldev rjpojv o fiaoulevg epxpvxovg
tt&£.
ovoag rag npa^Etg anaaag nal uoXX^v pev dperrjv ev av ,
ralg ovoav 'noXXrpv 6e naniav ,
y
vov dXX ovk al(bviov vopov ovreg deoi,
(
,
dvdtXeOpov 1 6e ov yevope-
yevemg yap ovk av n ore
Xopevov tovtolv tiarepov) Kal to pev rrEcpvKog,
telv
•
ooov ayaOov
fjv
ol Kara,
%u)cov
ano-
b)(peXelv ayaftov del
to 6e KaKov (3Xan-
'ipvx'^g, dievorjOr),
ravra rcavra gvvidcbv EprjxavrjoaTO* nov neipevov
EKaOTOV TG)V p£pb)Vj VLKAdOaV dpETTJV ev tg) Tiavrl TTapexoi paXior peprjxdvrjrcu
9
Tonovg
*
,
7.
av6?i eOpov
£fi7]x av V (ja To-
.
.
KUKtaV
yiyvopevov
ttolov tl
rov iroiov nvog
Kal rivag
y
10
d<prjKE
ralg
See Notes LIV. and LV., App. This word savours somewhat of
aiuviov.
.
7]TTG)pEV7)V 6e
peraXap6dvov olKL^eoOai
rrjg 6e ysveoEGjg
8.
,
av Kal paora nal apiora.
’
rovro to,
repog ixav
6rj
del Tioiav edpav del TiOTE
KaOanep
'ipvxrjv teal otipa,
,
Excogitavit.
Plato’s peculiar doctrine of the necessary existence of evil, arising
out of that depravity which stitution of things.
It
was connected with
seems
with this disorder, and employing devising plans to counteract
all
the resources of his
its influence.
on the doctrine of the good and
what
matter, in the con-
to represent the Deity as struggling
wisdom
in
See Note XXXI., App.,
Uov nupevov. “In what manner the best and easiest manner to
evil principle.
situation lying,” ubi queeque pars sita
each part might be so disposed as
in
est,
or “in
give the victory to virtue, and the least advantage to wickedness or evil.” 9.
A
peprixavriTai.
change
perfect tense, to intimate that
mode of
is
here
it is
made from
the aorist to the
a finished, settled, or established
proceeding, employed at the present time as well as in the
first origin
of things.
The
aorist eprixavTjGaTo
had reference
to single
and individual parts and acts pepTjxdvTjrac has regard to the whole, “ He conIt is best rendered here as a present irpog Tzav tovto. ;
:
what kind of a situa certain quality must receive and
trives this in reference to the whole, namely,
which becomes of a See Note LVI., App.
tion everything
inhabit.” 10.
T7jg
yeveeeug rov
ttolov
nvog.
This expression
is
equivalent
words edpav, oLKL&cdaL and tottovq above, we may yet discover the metaphor of the stones and the buildto tov ytyvecdcu ttolov tl.
er,
made use
dangerous
In the
of page 55 (13).
flood,
it
,
Like the comparison of the dark and
lingers long in the writer’s mind, and affects, un-
CONTRA ATHEOS.
61
povXrjOEOLV enaoTCJV rjpcjv Tag air tag.
wv
nal bnolog rig
ical
TOiovrog ytyvErat dnag rjpcjv
KA. To yovv
slnog
a,v ettlOv -
rrjv 'ifwxrjv, ravrrj cr%e<5dv
ufi,
j
yap
oirr]
cjg
ek&otote
to ttoXv.
.
A0. METabdXXEi psv roivvv navO’ ooa psTOfta eotc Xrjg,
ev kavrolg KEtcrrjfiEva
11
i/jv-
rfjv rrjg pETaboXrjg alriav
*
ps-
Hard rfjv T7\g Eipappsvrjg 12 ra^iv 13 nal vopov. cpiKpOTEpa psv tcjv rjdcov pErabdXXovra kXaTto, Kara to TTjg %cj pag ettltte6ov pETanopEVETac, ttXelo 6e nal admoTEpa pETanEOOVTa, Etg paOog Ta te naTO XEyopEva
TabaXXovTa 6 e
(jjspETai
r/
tcjv tottov ooa At6rjv
l4c
,
te nal Ta tovtcjv E^ppEva tcjv bvo-
paTCJv Enovopa^ovTEg o<po6pa (pobovvTac nal bvEiponoXov ol
15
£cjVTEg diaXvOEVTsg te tcjv
xpvXV nanlag
rj
apETrjg
oopaTOv
pEt^ov 6e
•
onoTav pETaXaby, did
ttjv avT7\g
psv
j3ovXr(OLV te nal opiXiav yEvopsvrjv lo^vpav, ottotov apETTj
Tcpooplgaoa 1 ytyvrjTat diaejjEpovTog t oiavTT],
'dELa
dtacjjEpovTa
2
brj
nal pETibaXE totcov ayiov oXov pETanopiodEi,
oa
Tiva tottov ETEpov OTav 6e TavavTia,
Eig apEivcj
,
TavavTta pEdidpvoaoa tov avTTjg
consciously perhaps, his language, even where there
ed reference to
ettI
(3iov.
was no
design-
This method of carrying along metaphors con-
it.
tained, yet half concealed, in single
words and phrases,
is
a peculiar
beauty of Greek composition, by no means confined to their poetry, although this abounds with the richest examples of
it.
See the close of Note LVI., App. 12. Kara rd^tv elpappevrjg. See Note LIV., App. 13. cfiuiporepa pev rtiv yOtiv. For an extended explanation of this difficult passage, and of what follows, see Note LYII., App. 11. ev kavrolg.
See Note LVIII., App., on the Greek compared with the Hebrew and rT3-
14. "Aidrjv enovopd^ovreg.
*Ai8r)g, 15.
(j)o6ovvrat
1.
apery deta 7rpoopi^aaa.
y'lyvrjcQe 'deiag 2.
the
is
Compare
this with 2 Peter,
i.,
4
:
Iva
kolvuvol tyvoeug.
diatyepovra.
struction cially
See Note LIX., App., on the which have existed in all ages.
nal bveiponoXovoi.
similar fears of Hell
Connect
this with ronov, although
rather harsh and unusual.
On
word ayiov see Note LX., App., on ,
F
such a con-
this passage,
and espe-
the spirituality of some,
3
CONTRA
62
ATIIEOS.
kvTij tol 6Lkt] egti tietiv ot ’'OAvynov ex°vglv s
nai nai veavione, aueXeloQai doncbv into $£G)V
gj
nanfxo
*
li8v
ytyvopevov npog rag nantovg 'ipv%dg apeiva) 6e
rd^*
apeivovg nopevopevov sv re
,
i
,
7t&c>x£Lv ts nai notslv
pECL rovg npooepspslg
ovre
el
a npoorjnov
5
ravrrjg rrjg dtnrjg ovre ov prjnore aXXog arvxrjg 6 yevopevog inev^rjrac nepiyeveodai .
nacrtiv dtnCav diatyepovrcog eraijav re oi rai-avreg,
'ftecov. fjv
of the Platonic views in regard the capability
,
which
ing accommodated 3.
7rpo^
.
n dot davarotgf dpav eon rolg npoocpenai sv
to the
many parts
to
,
,
a higher system of truth.
line,
v
This
is
an un-
evidently intended as a quotation.
What
kvrr} tol diKrj earl detiv ol
doubted hexameter
future blessedness of the soul and
of the Platonic writings possess of be-
OAiyz7tov cxovgl.
immediately follows, although the language of the writer, and designed only for prose,
7
£2
The
same
yet capable of being reduced to the
is
measure by a slight transposition, and by pronouncing tietiv syllable, as must frequently be done in the Greek poetry, nai nai veavioKE, Sokcjv
Platonic writings furnish
in
one
vtco -&eC)v apeTiEioOaL.
many examples
of a similar kind,
and sometimes with no change at all, may be reduced to a pleasing rhythm. They were, in all probability, not
which by
slight changes,
designed, but flowed spontaneously from the well-tuned ear and har-
monized
of this poetical philosopher.
spirit
Nothing could more
perfectly describe the exquisite softness and polish of his
own Greek,
than what he says of Theaetetus, in the dialogue of that name, page 144, B. 4.
:
olov eXaiov fisvpa aipoc^yri fisovTog.
h TcdGL tiavaroLg.
See Note LXI., App., on the mystical senses
of this word. 5.
npoGcpepcGL rovg npootyspeig.
6.
urvxyg.
“ Like to like.”
Ficinus here evidently read evrvxyg without
he renders the passage thus
:
confidatquc se adeo felieem fore ut judicium hoc exuperet.
It is
common
ri,
Quare nec tu neque ullus alius
Decorum
for optet
effugiat atque
capable, however, of a very good sense according to
“Neither do you expect, nor if any other is is, exposed to the Divine jusin tice), let him ever boast he shall escape (or survive) the justice of Heaven.” TlepLyeveodaL superesse. The same lemarks apply to It is equivalent to ovre dXXog el here, as to ehrep, page 46 (14). arvx^g yevopevog elnep egtl roiovrog, knev^yraL, &c. the
reading.
like unfortunate condition (that
—
,
,
—
,
:
CONTRA ATHEOS.
63
e^evXa6elodai rortapdirav. ov yap dpeXrjOrjGrf
Xp£& v
ovx ovtcj
irore vtt’ avrrjg.
yrjg (3a0og , ovd’ viprjkog
rr/Gy
op,ucpog cov
dvoq /card to
rljg
yevopsvog, elg rov ovpavov avan -
riGEig ds avrtdv rrjv TrpoGrjtcovGav npcopiav, eit’ ev *
'
Odds* uevojv, site
/cal
ev "Albov dianopEvOsig eite ,
i
Elg aypiG)TEpov eti dia/copiGdEig
9
totcov. o
real
tovtgjv
avrog ds Xoyog
aV
Ell], TG)V, OVg GV KaTldojV E/C GpipsyaXovg ysyovorag dvoGiovpyrjGavrag, f\ ri toiov-
GOl fiat TTEpl EKEIVG)V
uptiv
,
rov npd^avrag, Kara,
aOXitov svdaipovag ysyovevai
(brjdTjg
ev /caronTpoig, 10 avrtiv raig npd&Giv,
w$*
ov yap
7.
,
dpeTiijdfjGri ttote
the Divine Justice or
Law
rjyrjGG)
aa -
’Avryg refers here to AUcrj, or
vn' avTjjg.
See Note LXII., App., on
personified.
the
Divine Omniscience and the remarkable resemblance between this passage ,
and
certain declarations of the Scriptures.
Hades after having passed same way, ekei is often used for the other world. There is a power in these brief adverbs, when thus employed, that no descriptive terms could equal. They are several times used in this manner in the Gorgias, especially in the passage where Socrates is pointing Callicles to that final and Divine tribunal, where he will stand so much more in need of a de-
“In
hOade.
8.
through ( bia
—
world
this
tt opevdelg)
or in
this world.”
In the
fence and of an advocate, than in the Athenian courts
yrrov
i'kiyyiaoeiq ovdev
HERE
hyd
rj
’EN0AAE,
ov ’EKEI
— No
M GV Kat
x aa
less than 1
human bar), will you be speechless and With how much effect are they employed by Euripides, when Medea, in making her last address to her children, says so concisely, yet with such fulness of meaning ’EKEI rd S’ EN0AAE. E vdaipovolrov Uaryp a^eOier’
would dizzy
(
that is, before a
THERE.
Gorgias, 527, A.
•
•
:
Would Your 9.
its
that ye might be blessed, but
father’s
dianofucdeig.
The
primitive local sense
ness.
Here both
THERE
;
all
HERE
hand hath ruined.
Medea 1069. comes directly from
intensive sense of bid :
through, thorough, significant of complete-
offices unite
:
“ carried through
all
intervening states
to the remotest bounds .”
10.
6g ev KaronTpoir, &c.
mirrors, you think
by the Gods.”
“ In the events of their lives, as in
you have seen
This
(reflected) the neglect of all things
fine simile is
exceedingly descriptive of these
CONTRA ATHEOS.
64
OeGjpcucevai rr\v ndvrcov apeXetav tiecov
GwreXetav,
rr\v
11
orcrj
vd)Gnetv de avrrjv , tcelg
ova
elddog avrcov
Tcy -
rcore rep rravrl tjvpddXXercu.
navrcov dvdpeiorare, ndog ov delv do-
d)
rig pi] ytyvd)GHG)v ovd'
r\v
5
•
dv rvnov 12
nore ovde
idol
,
Xoyov ijvpdaXXeoOat, nepl j3cov dvvarog dv yevoiro eig evdaipovtav 13 re nal dvGdatpova rvx^v. ravra el pev gs m'l-
who
look only upon the surfaces of things, superficial
imnd’kaioi.
James, of those “ who behold their natural faces kGOTTTpG),
men dvdpeg ,
suggests the similar comparison, by the Apostle
It
James
i.,
in a glass
hv
Not “their deeds,” but seeming or supercrimes.” IIpaijig sometimes
Upa^eciv avr&v.
23.
rather, “ the events of their lives,” namely, “ their
prosperity in the midst of
ficial
differing
from the derivatives of
of a similar form terminating in cles, 151
their
all
has almost the sense of nddog, and
may mean
ig.
a condition or state, thus
and even from most verbals
tzoleio,
As
in the Trachiniae of
tt\v
avrov cnconfiv
:
Tor’ dv rig daidoiTO,
IIPAaIN, naKolaiv Tlpu^ig is also a technical term,
tragedy.
It is
olg
kyw f3apvvopai.
used
in reference to the stage or
so applied by Aristotle, in his Art of Poetry, to that
event which constitutes the leading action of the drama.
may life
Sopho-
be some such allusion here to
of such as are here referred
human
to, in
life,
There
and especially the
the light of a drama, a tragic
which has not yet been wound up, or come to its catastrophe, and the issue of which has not yet been seen. T rjv navrov dpeXeiav
Trpc^cg,
The genitive, having a much more extensive significance in Greek than the corresponding possessive case in English, and embracing many more relations, frequently gives rise to constructions which appear to us very harsh. Thus here, ti-Efiv bears to dpekuav
tiEtiv.
the relation of agent, while ndvruv has to
would, perhaps, be better to regard
dew
Ovk
the doctrine
12
.
13.
words
eidcog avrejv ttjv
awTeheiav.
dpekeiav,
as an ellipsis for the
usual expression of the cause or agent, vtco tuv 11.
the relation of ob-
it
them both by
Instead, however, of governing
ject.
it
more
dew.
See Note LXIII., App., on
of a final judgment.
tvtzov.
On
evdaipoviav
the use of this word, see Note LXIV., App. .
.
.
dvedatpova.
in this passage,
and a few
The lines
location and context of these
above (e£ adXiov evdaipoveg
remarks made Note between happiness in the usual
yeyovevai), furnish an admirable illustration of the
XXXVIII., App., on the
difference
,
:
CONTRA ATHEOS.
K Xeivlag
Oei
ode
rog l4= ^vXXapdavoi Xeyovrcov
v\\L(bv
el
•
tt
rjfxtiv rjde
ri keyeig, naXfbg
o,
r\
yepovoia nepl ,
dv ooi
6 tieog av-
emderjg Xoyov rivog eri dv
d’
pog rov rpirov eiranove
on
ottojgovv e^eig .
^vfinaoa
real
oloOa
ftetiv (bg ovtc
65
yap deoi re
p,ev
15 ,
el
vovv nal avOpoyruv
eloi nal
1 empieXovrai, eycoye ov rcavranaoi (pavXug dv
eirjg ,
(pairjv rjpZv
worldly sense of the term, and blessedness. The passage may be “ Without giving heed to this type of life, that is, with-
paraphrased
:
out keeping in
mind
word rvnov) of
the
this general notion (see
Note LXIV., App., on
their contribution (ovvr&eiav) to the
good of the
whole, you will be able to form no right judgment respecting blessedness or
its
adopted
in
we
Or, if
opposite.”
take the other view of Gwreksba,
Note LXIII., App., and regard
it
as including the idea of
consummation final reckoning &c., we then have a sentiment almost the same with the famous declaration of Solon to Croesus, end,
,
,
related
by Herodotus,
lib.
32,
i.,
and which sometimes appears
the tragic poets as an ancient saying
;
in
as in the beginning of the
Trachiniae of Sophocles
A oyog fiev tig
egt
’
’APXAIOS
avOptinov (pavelg
ovk dv aitiv * EK/idOoig fiportiv, npiv dv
....
d-dvoi rig
There cannot be a doubt but that this is to be taken here in its purest and highest sense, as referring to the One “ The the One True God of Socrates and Plato. Ineffable Supreme Deity himself, the very being whose existence and Providence we have been proving may he assist you.” Had he referred in any way to the local Divinity of Athens or Pallas, he would have used 14.
'O dsog avrog.
—
—
the feminine avr 15. Tzpog
rov rpirov enuKove.
“
Keep
listening (as the present im-
perative here most impressively signifies) while
we
selves to the third head of our argument.”
evidently spoken
not
to the
This
is
address our-
two companions who, with the speaker, formed the
yepovoia mentioned above, but to the imaginary young disputant so frequently referred
to.
It
has been shown,
that he exercises a special Providence
are almost equivalent to faith,
Heb.,
xi., 6.
It
1.
1st, that
GOD
IS
;
2d,
which two propositions
what the apostle assigns as the objects of to be shown that he is not
now remains
easily propitiated, or turned
and
;
away from
the right, by the offerings
Tne speaker F 2
evidently looks back witb
sacrifices of the wicked.
ov ravrdnaoi QavTiog.
,
66
CONTRA ATHEOS. 3
anodedelxOai,
rd 6e napaLrrjrovg av rovg Beovg elvcu rol-
*
glv adiKOVGi de^opevovg ttclvtl
2
ovre tlvI ovy^coprjrsov
dCopa,
9
r av Kara dvvapuv rponcp eXey/creov.
KA. KaXXtoF A0. $eps
npog
6rj
ylyvoiVT av 4 9
elneg
•
TroiCbpiv re chg Xeyeig.
tietiv avrtiv,
fjplv, el
riva rponov TrapaLTrjrol
yiyvoiv-o av
;
teal
riveg
f(
ttoIol ti-
a good deal of satisfaction, to what he regards as his master-piece
argument
in this
word 2.
:
the subtle disquisition about self-motion.
tzclvtI rpoTru.
On
the
Note XLI., App.
TrapaiTrjTovg see
He seems
most important
to regard this as the
more
position of the three, as being, in fact,
vital to the soul’s highest
any speculative belief in the Divine existence, or in a Providence without it. Hence, he says, “ there must be no yielding here, and no pains must be spared in the refutation of this pernicious error,” namely, that the wicked can easily propitiate the
interests than
Deity by 3.
gifts.
Ay never wholly
$epe by.
or apa.
It
loses
its
force as an inferential par-
however, much less strength as an
It has,
ticle.
imports in such a connexion as
illative
than ovv
a going on of the
this,
argument, a transition to another head, with an implication that
something previous had been proved ner.
It implies, therefore,
when
in a solid
and satisfactory man-
thus employed
in
argument, a con-
sciousness of strength, and an anticipation of victory. Hence, when joined with aye, <j>epe, 7 eye, or with imperatives generally, it has been l
most appropriately styled 6y 4.
ylyvoivr’ av.
The use
“Would
hortativa.
they become propitiated or placable!”
of yiyvoivTo instead of elev implies that they are to be re-
There is in the Protagoras, 340, c., a which the true sense wholly depends on the distinction between these two substantive verbs. It is there yevbodat, ayaOov, and shown that the two propositions
garded as previously angry. still more striking example,
ttov elvcu
in
ayadov, instead of being the same, as Protagoras rashly sup*
posed, are, in fact, so widely distinguished, that one
For a bad man
other false. only
difficult ,
made good,
but impossible.
or
who
cult, but delightful.
NE20AI
is so
to
become good
Ov yap tovto
TO BE
good,
is
6 IIcrraKog b?ieye
2 ipuovtbyg,
uTiXu, to
is
own
For one who has become,
by nature,
ecd'hov, cboTrep 6
in his
true and the
strength is
or
who has
not only not
to
'EMMENAI.
not,
been diffi-
TF.-
i
-
:
CONTRA ATHEOS„ veg* ovreg
67
dp^ovrag pev avaynalov nov yiyveoOai rovg
;
6 ye diOLfirjGovrag rov drcavra evreXeyfag ovpavov. 1
KA.
5.
OvTcog.
rives
“Who
noZoi rives.
fj
being, or of
what kind being'!”
these two questions rives refers to the offices the to hold to
manner
in
tained in
suggested 6.
In
Gods are supposed
men, and noZoi rives to the nature of those offices, or the which they are discharged. The answer to rives is conThe answer to rcoZoi rives is the word apxovras below. in
the specification of the several kinds of rulers set forth.
“
diOLKrjGovras.
Who
The
are going to administer.”
future
used, not in reference to the actual state of things, but sub“ on our scheme are jectively, to the state of the argument.
here
is
Who
going, &c., or tering.”
whom we
are going
to
represent as actually adminis-
So, also, the mathematician employs eo rat and eaovrai in is no sequence which the mind conceives of the
the statement of his demonstration, although there or futurity, except in the relations of truths,
which
mode
in
themselves are older than time or space.
in
Subjectively, to the demonstrator, they
may
appear, and be stated
as consequences yet future. 7.
“ Actually as opposed to potentially .”
evrehextis-
Correspond-
,
Hence the noun
ing to ev evepyeia , as opposed to ev Svvagei.
ev -
much used by Aristotle, as contrasted with vvagishave differed much about the etymology of this word. The derivation, however, from evrelys, perfect complete and fyw, seems satisfactory, both as respects form and meaning. That which relexeia, so
<5
Philologists
,
exists only ev Svvdpe KivrjGLs) is its lish,
and
inchoate
and imperfect
to signify not
activity ,
much more than
energy ( avro
actually , in
Eng-
truly as matter of fact, ,
therefore not a good representative of evrehex&s, although
is difficult to find
any other substitute
evSeTiex^ia, continuance , duration , is
:
The word
completion and perfection.
has come is
is
,
for
it.
There
is
it
another word,
which some confound with this, as 22 i., Quintum genus adhibet,
done by Cicero, Tusc. Disp.,
ipsum animum evrelex^tav (evdel exetav) apThe etymology of ev Tov arcavra ovpavov i*s here put for the Selexeia is very uncertain. whole universe the Heavens and all things they contain. It is vacans nomine pellat,
quasi
;
et sic
quamdam
continuatam motionem.
—
very
much
xxviii., the
24:
like the
He
Hebrew
expression
looketh under the whole
Heaven of Heavens, that
is, all
Sd nnrb Heaven
space —
,
or
as
— CD'S#
the universe.
68
CONTRA ATHEOS.
AO.
apa rtot npoaepepelg tg>v apxbvrcov }} rivtg dvvarbv rjplv arteuia^ovoi rvyxaveiv psi^oatv norepov rjvcoxoi nveg av elev tolqvtol ^evycov
’AA/l’
rovrotg^ cjv
eXarrovag
;
8
apiXk copevcov,
•
7
/
nXoicdv Kvdepvrjrat
Oelev Grparonedcov dpxovot tlglv .
;
raxa
elrj
<
5
de Kav aitemaa
dv
’
teal
vogojv no -
9
Xepov evXadovpevoig larpolg eoucevat nepl Gcopara, (opyotg nepl (pvrdjv yeveoiv elojOvtag bo6(j)v
X0
i
npoodexopevoig
•
tzal
rj
x a ^ £7T dg
copag
ye -
rj
did
htel-
noipvicov eniGTaraig.
yap Gvytcex^prjtcapev 11 rjplv avrolg elvai pev rov ovpa vov noXXtiv peorov ayaOtiv, elvai de teal rtiv evavricov
drj
n Xeiovoov 12 8.
gjv is
de rcbv
prj ,
13
pax?}
adavarog egtiv
dfp (j)apev,
genitive by reason of rvyxaveiv
—quos assequi possimus,
-
,
rj
or,
quorum compotes esse possimus. 9. vogov 7Tolepov. The language employed above respecting contending chariots and commanders of camps, suggested the representation of the physician in the same style, as carrying on a war with diseases. In all this, however, he has in mind the allusion which soon follows to what he styles pdxv dOuvaroq the grand and ,
universal conflict between the powers of good and evil, on which
we have
dwelt at length, Note LXVI., App.
careful circumspect , ,
cautious .”
Hence
E vlabeopae.
De if
in this last sense, as Prof.
Sera Numinis
Vindicta,
,
10.
did
TirjSu,
<f)66(ov.
A apdavo,
An
is to
handle carefully,
rect.
to
92),
it is
al-
seldom,
of the
w ord, r
touch with caution.
adverbial phrase similar to did It
God;
Notes to Plutarch,
The primary conception
alaxvvrjg, &c., with fear or timidly. (j>66ov.
in his
has well observed (page
ever, found in classic usage.
from ev and
Hacket,
be
fearful especial-
to be timid,
ly to be occupied with religious dread, to be devout towards
though
“ To
(fuliag,
di'
sometimes has the form
did
The common reading is did <f>66ov, which is certainly incorCompare the phrase <5t’ dnexOsiag, ASsch., Prom. Vine., 121.
11. kneidy
ydp GvyKcxopyKapev.
This admission could only have
referred to the fact of the mixture of good and evil in the world, and
which may be regarded as expressed in what is said page 32, line 3. Plato has in no other part of this book, except in the present passage, told us which he thought had the preponderance. For an extended examination of this 12. 7tIelovwv de t&v prj. passage and the doctrine contained, see Note LXV App. On this remarkable expression, see Note 13. pdxv adavarog. ,
LXVI., App.
—
,
CONTRA ATHEOS. roiavTT] nal cpvXanrjg
a
,
^avpaarrig
x4=
69
rjplv ftsoL re a\ia nal 6aipovsg^ rjpslg
nal 6atpovo)v ovvrjg
(jd)£ei
•
(pQeipec 6s rjpdg
•
6s
n
(psg l6ot,
pa
•
a6inla nal v&ptq psrd deppo2
tistiv sp'ipvxotg
olnovoat 6vvapsoi. /3pa -
nal rdyds av rtg tgjv rotovrcov svotnovv r\\uv ipv%al
6rj
rtvsg
sm
yr]q oinovoat , nal
nsnrrjpsvat , drjXovorf ^pidjdstg,
5
cra-
a6tnov A rj*
npog rag r&v (pvX a<
See Note LXYI., App.
14.
15. 'deol nal dalpoveg 1.
6’
6s dtnatoavvif nal OGXppoavvr] psra (ppovrj-
osevq, sv ralg rtiv
%v
fvppaxoi 6e av nrrjpara dstiv
deofievrj
3
g ufri
.
.
.
dLKcuoGvvri.
icrypara deuv. See Note LX VII., App. See Note LXVIII., App., on the ancient
division of the four cardinal virtues.
“Animated, spiritual, or moral powers and from physical agencies, or what he elsewhere styles second working motions, or second causes. Ay, as an inferential particle, relates 3. xfjvxal dy nveg km yrjg. back to what precedes sir eidy yap, &c. What followed came in by way of parenthetical ejaculation, suggested by the previous meta2.
efj.ipvx°tg
dwapecL.
faculties,” in distinction
phorical allusions and mention of nohe/xog calling up to
mind the
great conflict of the universe, as presenting a bold and striking contrast with the petty conceptions of the
He now
men whose
doctrine he
is
returns to them, and resumes the
more natural “ There are order of the argument, which had been interrupted. then, (it seems), certain souls dwelling upon the earth,” &c., namely, such as would measure the Gods by themselves, and attribute to them all those imperfections and weaknesses which pertain to such earthly guardians and rulers as we have mentioned by way of comdisproving.
parison. 4.
The
:
dypiudeig.
word.
mony with such
as
drj?i ovotl
seems
to
is clear, evidently,
There should, we
The usual
two words, dylov on. require that it be taken and
generally given as
is
construction, however,
written as one 5.
This
dyTiovon.
&c.
think, be a
comma
after this
rendering, ferocious, would not here be in har-
we have below — netdovGc dun date It might much better be translated referring not so much to the wildness and
expressions as
Tioyuv, nal kv evKTaiaig knudalg. brutal, or, rather, brutish
,
fierceness of their dispositions, as to the stupidity and beastly gross-
ness of their conceptions.
men who have no
meant by these terms to indicate any more than the beasts, of theii
It is
right notions,
70
CONTRA ATHEOS.
K(*)v 'iftvx&g
apa kvvgjv
,
?)
ra^ rCbv vopicov,
rj
npdg rag rcov
iravranaocv anporaroov deonorow npoGntirrovaat ttelQov,
true relations to
state it
;
God and
the universe.
Aristotle, in his Ethic.
seems to use the term in this sense, to denote a as much below what is properly human as the Divine is above
Nicomach.,
vii., 1 ,
although he applies the epithet to a class of
E^ig
av
eItj
6it}\ov6ti Trj 'ftypiufiELa uvtlOe[aevt).
^
correspond well to the Hebrew lxxiii.,
22
Psalm
xcii.,
7,
wore
:
ti-ela
rj
to
as used Psalm xlix., 11
,
;
.
;
strikingly in
is
men
would seem here
xii., 1 The sentiment, xxx., 2 harmony with the whole train of
Proverbs,
xcii., 7.
;
3
It
thought in which Plato here indulges respecting the views such
men
The brutish man (-^ 3
entertain of the Divine justice.
knoweth not and the gross ,
man
l
(
7
'
D3
,
fr°
m
,
To make
'ftypiudEig
&r}pi66rjg)
carnosus pin guis fuit)
understandeth not this that when the wicked flourish be destroyed forever.
,
,
it is
may
that they
agree with Tpvxuc would be
exceedingly harsh, not only in respect to the construction, but also as regard the sense.
apa
icwtiv.
when
apa,
There
it,
and then
Hogeveen is
The
but
an example
by
styles
little, if it
rj,
which follows twice,
supplying of another
rj,
or, rather,
justifies, as
an
it,
i.,
65
:
EvxcoXfjc ETUfiEfityErai, eW’ EKaropbrjcin
such cases, apa
any, significant of
does not wholly lose
as he supposes, does
be-
eIte,
will be in all respects parallel to the Iliad,
it
"Ejt’ ap'
ever,
a peculiar force and elegance in this particle
thus employed.
in similar cases, the
fore
is
it
its
This,
conjecturalis.
its real force.
Even
power of concluding.
denote the reason
why
Apollo
in
howsuch
Neither,
was
angry.
That he had reason for anger was taken for granted from the fact. Since he was angry, therefore the prophet was to tell the cause, So, in this wT.ether it was on account of a vow or a hecatomb. passage, we may render “ Being evidently brutish, and approaching :
(or falling upon) their keepers, be they dogs or shepherds, or rulers
of the highest grade, they would persuade them by flatteries, n &c.
That is, since they are brutish ( therefore apa), it matters not to them whether they be dogs or shepherds, &c. because they are of this gross and animal nature, they make no distinction between the highest and the lowest class of guardians, but'Stupidly imagine that :
they
all
may
is felt in
be influenced
alike.
Thus
the inferential force of apa
giving vividness and a great addition of meaning to the
sentence, while yet
it is
free from the
encumbrance and clogging
ef-
CONTRA ATIIEOS. cl
6
73
reiaig Xoycov, xal ev evxTaiaig tigIv enipdaig (chg at
(jyrjpat
xaxtiv) e^eivai TrXeovexTovoi oepioiv
(j)aocv al tu>v
ev dvOpdonoig rraoxeiv prjdev
^aAenw.
(f)apev d’ elvai ttov
8
to vvv ovopa^opevov apdpTrjpa
nXeove^iav
rrjv
oaprdvoig GivpaGi voarjpa xaXovpevov xai eviavT&>v Xoipov
7
ev pev
ev de c5 paig erCov
,
ev de uoXeoi xal uoXiTeiaig , tovto
,
av to prjpa peTea^paTLopevov adixiav. ,
KA. HavT&TtaoL pev ovv. A0. Tovto v dr} tov Xoyov avayxalov Xeyeiv tov Xeyov Ta <bg eioi ovyyvcopoveg del fieol Tolg tcjv dvOpojmx)v add xoig xal adixovGiv, av avToig tuv adixrjpaTCOV Tig anove,
pxj,
xaOdnep xvgI Xvxoi tgjv dprcaopaTCdv opixpd dnove -
poiev , ol de rjpepovpevoi Tolg dcopoig Gvyx^polev Ta ,
,
ipvia diapnd^eiv. dp’ ovx ovTog 6 Xoyog 6 7TapacT7]Tovg elvai deovg
KA. OvTog pev A0. Tig iv ovv
7ro-
t&v cpaGxovTGdv
;
ovv. to)V
d?j
popped evTGiv arreixa^cov
tt
opoiovt,
(bvXaxag elvai fteovg ovx av xaTayeXaGTog yiyvoiTO av -
ogtigovv
Opd)TCG)v
;
rroTepov xvdepvrjTaig , Xoidq ye olvov
9 xvigg\7 re napaTpenoaevoig avTOig, dvaTpenovGi de vavg
t€ xal vavTag
;
argumentative statement.
feet of a formal
alia, &c.,
when employed with
This use of upa, yap,
reference to what
is
supposed to
exist in the mind, rather than in the expression, is one of the striking beauties in the
Greek language.
have the sense of ferocious, sition,
it
or, like
If -&r)pid6eig here
most must
a wild beast in respect to dispo-
should be taken in connexion with npog rag pvxag, and in \
would imply, that having been ferocious towards their keepers, they afterward seek reconciliation by flatteries, &c. Ast connects ftripiddeig with npog ipvxag, although he gives it the com-
that case
paratively
weak
sense, agrestes.
agrestes ad custodum animos.
A?iimos igitur quosdam,
fyc,,
patet
Whatever view, however, we may
7.
its relation to upa will remain the same. See Note LXIX., App. rz'keovei'iav. See Note LXX., App.
8.
av avroig, &c.
9.
TzapaTpenopevoig.
take of tiripiddeLg, 6. tt eiOovoi.
See Note LXXI., App. “ Turned aside from the path of right ”
The
72
CONTRA ATHEOS.
KA.
Mrjdaptig.
A0. 'AAA’ ovtl
fxfjv
fjvLoxoiGL
10
ye ev dpLXXxi owreray
vno dcopedg erepoiOL
pevoig, neioOelocv
rrjv vinrjv £evyeoi
npodovvac KA. A ecvrjv yap elnova A eyoig av A eyo)v rov Xoyov .
TOVTOV.
A0. Ov opyoig
c
•
9
ovde orpar^yolg ye ovd larpolg, ovde ye -
p,r\v
,
ovde vopevoi prjv, ovde tlol aval K,en7\k7\pevoig vno
?iVKG)V.
KA. E vcfrrjpei. 11 ndjg yap dv A0. ’AAA’ ov navr(x)v (pvXancov ;
ra pbeyiora
i]pZv oi
KA. HoXv ye metaphor a right
in the
fteot
elol peyiorot, real nepi
;
.
word suggests the conception of a deviation from evidently intended to furnish a case of parano-
It is
line.
navreg
masia with avaTpenovcn. 10.
TivioxotGi
above. is
It is
All these datives are to be referred to 6/iocovg
.
who
not the reinsman here
supposed to be prayed unto
;
and
offers the prayer, but
who
yet, although in this respect
we cannot help thinking that Plato had in mind some of those prayers which Homer occasionally puts into the mouth of his heroes, for aid not only in the accomplishment of wickthe cases are not similar,
ed purposes, but also
in
very
trivial
circumstances.
As,
when they
pray for assistance in the games, in the horse-race, and especially
when
the goddess Pallas, in aid of her favourite knight Diomed, as-
sumes the
reins and overturns the chariot of
Admetus.
Iliad, xxiii.,
390. 11. ful
in
E v(j>7/pec.
A
how you speak
strong and earnest word of caution.
—speak words of good omen.”
It
“Be
care-
was employed
the sacrifices to caution the people against the utterance of any
inauspicious words during the religious rites.
and impressive example of
its
There
use in the Republic,
is
a very fine
lib. vi.,
509, B.,
where, at the suggestion of Glaucon, that 'H dovij, or Pleasure, might be The Good, Socrates cries out, EvtyTjpei,, “ utter words of good
omen, or be cautious
in
your language
be blasphemy in the very conception.
intimating that there might
The same
feeling is excited
here by the bare thought, that the course of the argument had required him, however necessarily, to connect the mention of the
Deity with such comparisons as had been used
CONTRA ATHEOS.
T ovg
73
ndXXiord re repaypar a vXdrrovrag <5ia^vXatczj npog dperrjv tcvvtiv x ei povg avrovg <pepovrdg re 12 Kdl dv 0pd) 7T(x)v ueacov elvai (prjoopev, oi to dittatov ova av
A0.
dr)
(j)
,
,
j
13 evena dcbpcov napa ddi/corv dvdptiv avootcog
rrore 7rpodolev
dedopevcjv
;
KA. Ovdaptig Meow.
12.
“
ovre dvettrog b Xoyog tw v re
•
Men
biute animals.”
14
.
Gods and the
holding a middle rank between
Ast’s rendering, mcdiocribus
,
is
reepi red-
a very poor one,
would denote those who held a middle rank among men themselves, or ordinary men. M eoog, however, may perhaps have because
here the
it
same sense with
we
pirpioc, just , equitable , although
do not
any example of such usage. This meaning of pirpiog undoubtedly came from that old system of ethics founded on the say-
recollect
ing prjdev dyavj and which Aristotle afterward ol his doctrine
dvoolug dedoftevov.
13.
oj the wicked is tCjv re
14.
connect this
num
Compare Proverbs,
7xepl
(to
following,
if
27
xxi.,
:
Ast would read
ovrov.
irdoav
ovrov ) with the preceding sentence.
Neque
:
the sacrifice
There
common
connecting rov (as in the
we may regard
t£>v
ye and ,
In accordance
tolerabilis est haec oratio liomi -
in quovis impietatis genere versantium. in
the foundation
an abomination.
with which view he renders
however,
made
of Ethical Means.
is
no
difficulty,
reading) with doebov
the repetition as arising from the length
of the intervening clause, and also as intended to add force and vehemence to the whole sentence. “ Of all those who are con-
versant with every species of impiety, this holds to this opinion would, of
all
who
much more
with the preceding,
we
The word
in the
implies that
By
same
men
connecting rov re or rov ,
is
ye,
so characteristic of Clinias, and
so forcibly expressed by the words ovdapoq, &c.,
standing by themselves.
ed
,
should also destroy the fine effect of the pas-
sionate burst of indignation which is
Avrexopevog “ holding
obstinately to this doctrine than to Atheism, or
even the denial of a Providence.
which
’
braces himself against something for the
purpose of giving tenacity to his grasp. cling
so tenaciously
,
be esteemed the worst and most impious.” firmly to,” like one
man who
wicked men most justly seem to
light as at
K ivdvvevei, page 18
in this
(2).
passage,
may be
when
regard-
See remarks on the word
in
that place.
So, also, here the primary sense appears through the
secondary.
‘‘
He
ing thought, or he
is in
danger of being judged, he runs a risk of be-
is liable to
the imputation,” Ac.
G
.
a
74
-
CONTRA ATHEOS.
oav aoebetav
ntvbvvevet
oi tgjv
Trojg o
ravrrjg rr\g bofrjg av-
rexopevog navrcov av rcov aoedcbv nefcpioOat butaiorara Hantorog re elvat nai aoebeorarog.
AO. Td pev
6?)
nporeOevra rpta deot re ,
empeXelg, nai Trapa to btaatov
(hg
rot (fxppev itcavcog anobebetxOat
15
,
KA. U(bg yap ov
cog slot,
nai
<hg
rravranaotv anapatrrj -
nov.
nai ovpxprjcpot ye rovrotg rolg Xoyotg
;
eopev.
K at
AO.
1
ye ncog ocpobporepov bid (ptXovet
natt&v avOpcbncov. rovrov ye prjv
ftlav r£)v
K Xetvia,
urjv etprjrat
i
Tce^tXoveiurjrai, prj
rcore
even,
,
d)
rovvreg efovoiav elvat ocptotv a (bovXovrat irpdrretv noi,
a
dfj
cpihe
Xoyotg 7]yd)vrat npaoi
Ha-
2
nai ooa nai ola nepi deovg btavoovvrat. irpoQv-
ravra vecorepug elnetv rjplv yeyovev. el be n nai (3paxv npovpyov TrercoirjKapev elg ro neiOeiv nrj rovg dvbpag eavrovg pev piorjoat, rd d’ evavria irug rjdrj orep%at, naXCog rjplv eiprjpevov av elrj ro rtpooipiov aoedetag nept,
pia
[Lev brj did
,
vopo)v.
KA.
’A/l/l a
eXntg
el
•
be
prjj
ro ye rov Xoyov yevog ovh
alrtaoerat rov vopoder7]v. 15 •
(j)C>pEv
hcavtig dnodE^elxOai nov.
mathematician’s onsp
eSel deigai,
This
is
something
quod erat demonstrandum.
like the It is
the
formal conclusion of the long argument or preamble to the law
which
is
now
to follow against those impious
the lawgiver so
much
cQodporepov.
1.
men, who have given
trouble.
This
is
said in reference to the apparently harsh
which have been used in this third branch of the discussion against those who abused the doctrine of the Divine placability, and especially to the strong language a few lines above. The other epithets
parts of the argument, instead of needing apology in this respect,
were marked by a peculiar mildness towards
his
supposed perverse
opponents.
a
2.
drj
teal
oca
teal ola.
“ Whatever things, and however enor-
mous, and however bad.” 'Oca often, when the context requires it, is to be taken in a bad sense, implying not simply the number or quantity, but the enormity of the things referred to.
So, also, ola
not only imports quality, but sometimes a bad quality, of whatevci kind that ,
is
however wicked.
—
—
CONTRA ATHEOS. AO. Merd to
irpooipiov rocvvv
75
Xoyoqf olog av two vo -
poov epprjvevg, opOtiq yiyvoiTo fjpZv, npoayopevcjv e%Lorao-
Oai iraoi rolg aoebeoi rponcdv tCov avrojv eig rovg eva edeZg. roZg de pi) rceidopevoig. doedeiag ode eoro) nepi vopog
*
’E av
rig aoeby Xoyoig sir ’ epyoig 6 TraparvyxdvGJv apvveTG), ,
paZvcov 7rpdg ap^ovrag levoi
(.
,
•
rtiv de dpxbvTO)v oi npCi)TQi ttvOo -
4,
to nepi tovtgjv anodedeiypevov npiveiv
TTpog
orj-
f
ditiaa-
KaTa Tovg vopovg eav de Tig anovoaaa ap^rj pi] dpa TavTa avTrj doede'iaq viroduwg yiyvecr5 6o) Tip edeXovTi TipoopeZv vnep tcov vopcjv, eav de Tig cxpXq,
Trjpiov elaayaydvTCOv
.
,
6 TipaTG) to dmaoTrjpiov ev enaoTip tcov naO’ ev aGedovvTCjv
pev ovv virapx^ro) navi, decpo)T7]piG)v de 7
Tiprjpa. deapog 3.
pera to npootpiov
sisting of three parts
:
The whole law
’koyog.
is
regarded as con-
the preamble or argument, the declaration or
The
exhortation, and the penalty.
whole of the book, the second
is
first
has occupied nearly the
despatched
in
a single sentence,
and then all that remains is to specify briefly the several punishments for the several grades of impiety. Ordo etoayayovTov npog to dmacTripiov dnode4. Tcpog to nepi.
—
The
deiypevov Kpiveiv nepi tovtov.
tribunal here referred to
may
be
found described in the ninth book of the Laws, 855, D. “ To avenge the law.” It sometimes has this 5. Tipopelv vnep.
same sense with
the dative
:
Tipupelv tivi , “ to avenge any one.”
In the middle voice, “to take revenge, or to avenge one’s self.”
The noun npopia,
as well as Ttotg generally has reference to vin,
from preventive or remedial punishment.
dictive, in distinction 6.
ev enaaTip.
tion, in the
Ast would read here ev
common
reading,
is
e/caorov.
ciently so to justify the correction proposed. originally,
The
construc-
somewhat unusual, but not Tiprjpa
suffi-
would mean,
an estimate a fine ; but it is applied to any species of punmay be rendered here, generally, pocnam or pcenas. ,
ishment, and
Ordo
TipuTG) to dmaGTrjpiov Tiprjpa ev eKaoTcp
equivalent to saying
tuv
/cad’
ev acjedovvTav ,
in each individual case of each, or according to
each particular offence.
This
common
Stephanus and and thus connect the whole of this, down to tyrjprjv tivu, as an appendage to the preceding short sentence. Without this, it is said, the sense must re* main suspended. It may be a question, however, whether this con 7.
deopoTrjpiov
Ast would put a
de.
comma
is
the
reading.
after navi, read ye for de,
76
CONTRA ATHEOS.
OVTGJV EV
noXet TpitiV, kvog
ayopav ourrjpLag
Tcepl
fJLSV,
ttotvov
9
rocg nXsiOTOig
evekcl rotg rtoXXolg rcov dcopdrojv,
,
kv'og 6e , c
TXf
nepl rov rco v vvtcroop ovXXeyop,evG)v %vXXoyov, oco-
ppoviorrjpiov
9
ETrovopa^opEvov kvog 6s av Kara pkorjv tt)v ,
av
%o)pav, omjTTEp
on paAtora
sprjpog te teat oyg
rog q Tonog rtpcoptag e^^v kncovvptav ,
alone
sideration
is
sufficient to justify
11
cjirjprjv
aypccjjra-
rtva. nspl
the change, although so
Such cases of suspension do occur in the Platonic writings, in places where all efforts at correction fail and in the present case some might suppose even the irregularity to be more tolerable than the attaching so long an appendix to so short a clause, and by so feeble a connective. We would suggest, moreover, whether it would not be better to connect this with 7r ept aoebetav ds dvrov below. There is, it is true, something awkward in making the enumeration of offenders an apparent inference from the number of prisons, yet still there is something of a natural connexion between the two ideas, so that the one might easily suggest the other, al slight.
;
though 8. is,
in
an inverted order.
Common
“
koivov rots 'kAelotols.
to the ordinary class of offenders.
This
is
precisely the phrase of the English
—in corporis
keeping of the body9.
to the people at large,” that 'ZcoTr/ptag
The
GutypovioTripLov.
h>Ena rcov ooparov.
common law—-for the
safe
custodiam.
police prison , or,
more
properly, the house
of correction, the place where lawless people are sobered. “ In the very spot in which.” 10. oTzrf'KEp. (!>? on paAtora ayptd-
These particles, thus combined, form the strongest superlapower of the Greek language. The three are seldom found in this manner in one expression. It may be styled a double rarog.
tive in the
super-superlative. 11. ETzovvyiav Qrjpyv.
common fame &e.
The
first
(Kara
tion, discipline, or
or
tyrjpriv),
prison
may be regarded as having the Or it may be rendered, “ having in by common report, the appellation,”
^ypijv here
force of an adjective—famosam.
was
for safe
reformation
custody
;
the second for correc-
the third, the prison of vengeance
;
(npwpiac), of strictly penal restraint, intended for examples, and not for the
good of the offender.
Plato seems to have in mind the de-
partments in Hades, which he specifies in the Gorgias, and to represent
human laws
same grades with their adeAQoi, oi hv Atdov NOMOI,
as proceeding by the
brethren of the other world
:
oi
yperepot
This prison would be analowhich the avia-rot, or incurable are
as he styles them in the Crito, 54, C.
gous to that division
in Hell to
,
77
CONTRA. ATHEOS. aoedeiav 6e ovtuv pev, dvo
alriaig psv rpioiv, alonep
,
dpapravovrcov
dianpioecog a$ia yevrj rcbv irepl
real
ovtc torjg oi>d’ opo'iag dittrjg
,
real dirjXOo-
yevopsvcov,
eg kndarr\g rr]£ roiavrrig alrtag
d’
av yiyvoivro a dv
12 ,
deopeva. olg yap
vopi^ovoi deovg elvai ronapanav fjdog cpvoei
prj
Sl-
rd dela
,
rrpocr-
yevrjrai duiaiov piGovvreg re y'lyvovrai rovg nanovg nal ,
,
to dvo^epaiveiv 13
npoatevrat nparreiv tov^* ts ,
pevyovot
<
<56^
/eat TOt>£
,
dinacovg tgjv avOpcbnoiv
prj
duiaiovg crepyovoiv
$£65^ eprjpa
r?/
ovre rag roiavrag npa^eig
rrjv aditdav ,
1
*
•
av
olg 6 ’
elvai irdvra, anpdreiai
15
7rpd^ tt/
re rjdovcov
consigned as everlasting admonitions, and spectacles of the Divine
vengeance
drexvug napaSetypara dvyprypevovg
:
AE2M12THPK2I, dsapara
teal
vovderrjpara.
ticet
tv
A ISov
tv
ru
Gorgias, 525, C.
An
elliptical mode of expression, which who are conversant with impiety, being so from three causes which we have described, and there being two classes from each such cause, there would be, of those who of-
12. nepl dasSetav St ovreov.
may be
thus rendered
“ Those
:
fend against Divine things, six kinds worthy of discrimination, and requiring neither an equal nor a similar sentence.” 13. r<5
that
is,
“
Svgxepaivstv.
By having
a disrelish for wrong doing,”
a dislike arising from habit, prejudice, or an early bias of
the mind remaining in spite of their Atheism.
Nothing could convey a more vivid idea of the
14. $efiv epypa.
horrors of Atheism than this expression.
word
Iprjpa
crowds
serted lonely solitary , waste, forsaken ,
,
Every meaning of the
once into the serious mind
at
desolation in proportion to
its
— a wilderness
boundless extent.
;
a universe de-
full
of horror and
Probably the best
when it happens to invade the mind, and more any speculative argument, would be to yield up the soul for a season to the deep gloom of so insupportable a thought. Of course we mean not the hardened and scoffing Atheist, but one to whom the most transient shade of skepticism on this point is a antidote to Atheism,
effective than
To
source of pain.
quote again the line of Empedocles,
we may
well say, in reference to such a one, detkog
The
d’ c5
oKOTosccra tiefiv nipi dofa peprjlev.
expression $e£)v eprjpa seems used here by Plato as an an-
tithesis to that of Thales, referred to 15.
iKpuretat
i
.
See remarks on
typoGvvy cacohaGLa, &c.,
page
this
41, tietiv elvai nTiypy navra.
word
Note LXVIII., App.
G
2
in
connexion with au*
.
CONTRA ATHEOS.
78
Xvtx£)v irpoGnsGcoGi, pvrjfiat ts la^vpal teal paOrjastg
teal
psv
napcoGL, to
o^slai
vnap^OL
teoivov
naOog
*
vopi^siv tisovg apepolv 1 dv sv
pi)
6 s to)v akXcov av 0 pd) 7TG)v Xd) 6 xj,
Tyj
1
spya^oiT av. 6 psv yap 5 Aoycp* ts av nspl tisovg napprjoiag sir] psGTog teal nspl tiv%* otag ts teal opteovg , teal cbg tcov a/iXcjv teaTaysXcbv tci
to psv eXaTTG), to 6 s
tcXslg) teatea
dv sTspovg TOiovTOvg anspya^oLTO, 6 s 6 r) 6 o%d£(i)v 2 psv teaOansp aTspog vog 60 H 0 V 6 s ,
svs 6pag
teal
Ksva^ovTat noXXol psvoc
3 .
XsvteoTsg
4 ,
teal
i
OTpaTrjyoL,
sl 6 r]
&v to psv
'davcLTOiv
1.
sv(j)vi)g
s%
ndoav
1
teal
Tvyxdveov
sipG)viteov
6
dpapTavov to 6s
ujLLcpolv.
withstanding
,
6
&v pavTstg ts
teaTaa-
payyavsiav
testeevr)-
tt)v
teal
Tvpavvot
teal
TsXsTalg 6 s I 6 iaig smbsbov-
9
ysvoiT dv
•
6 s snueaXovps-
GoepiGTcbv ts snueaXovpsvGiv prjxavae .
6 i) noXXd usv ,
nX rjprjg,
nspl
,
yiyvovTai 6 s s£ avTtov sgtlv ots
6rjprjy 6poi
6 vo
teal
dltcrjg pi)
tovtcjv
rd 6 s vopcjv a^ta tisosug
•
to ovx evog ov 6 s 6volv a^ta vovOsx'rjGscog
dpa
teal
6 sGpcbv
This word relates back to the preceding sentence, notit
had been apparently
fully closed
and takes
classes, as far as they hold the atheistic sentiment in
in both
common
al-
though with different practical results. 2.
6
See Note LXXII., App., on the
pev yap loyu.
cies of Atheists, according to the Platonic division.
See Note LXXII., App.
EV(j)vr/g.
3.
KEKivripivoL.
gaged
different spe-
A o£d&v ....
in
“
Who
are most strenuously and violently en-
every species of juggling or legerdemain.”
Not simply “ those who attempt private mysteries,” mysteria privata molientes as some render it, but, rather, “those who, by means of such mysteries, plot to deceive other men.” We would, therefore, regard TsXEraig as the dative of the 4.
ettlSeSovTievkote^.
,
instrument. 5.
p7ix avai cotyLGT&v.
The
abstract
is
an expression equivalent to ol ralg “ those who use sophistical arts.”
It is
used here for the concrete.
pr)x ava
go^lgtcjv xpdpEvoi,
See Note LXXII., App. That is, either one or two deaths would be too small a punishment for him. No one will think this sentence too severe, who has carefully studied those specimens of 6.
to psv EipidviKov
7.
ovx &OQ
ovd e dvolv tiavaToiv.
CONTRA ATHE08. hopEVov. coodVTug 6 e*
(
erepa yevva
to dsovg vopi&iv a^eXelv 6v
/cal
nai to TTdpdLTTjTOvg
,
tclvtxi 6l£Ott]ic6tg)v, Toi)g
TiOepevog
Ti)g
vdjpep,
dXXd
dvo. tovtcov
’
6t)
p£V vn avotag avev ndurjg dpyrjg ’
,
^ yeyevrjpevovg, eig
te
7'J
to ococppoviOTrjpiov 6
diK.ao-
tlOeoOco prjdev eXclttov etlov ttevte.
d's tgj XP° VCP p^Elg tcov ttoXltc)v dVTolg dXXog 9 ovyyiyvEodo), TrXfjv oi tov vvKTEpivov %vXXoyov kolvgj-
ev tovtg)
VOVVTEg
XovvTEg
VOvPeTT[GEI TE
E7TL
,
10 .
this
'IpVX^ 0(0T7]ptd Opi-
XP° V0 S a vToZg e^eXO^
otclv (T 6
piv 60 KXI ri S
KCLL T%f TTjg
OG)(j)pOV£CV
dVTGJV
abominable character to which
,
we have
tCov dEoptiv, kciv
p£Td
T(x)V OGXj)pO -
referred,
Note LXXII.,
was no
special Provi-
olfCELTG)
App. tJGavTuc
8.
The
tie.
doctrines, that there
Gods were easily to two species of
gave
dence, and that the
propitiated,
each respectively,
offenders, distinguished by
rise
also,
characters analogous to those above presented, and. requiring each
mode and
a different
which was
to
gradation of punishment
;
the mildest form of
be imprisonment in the GoQpovLGTrjpLov, or house of
correction, for a term not less than five years.
Such a law, among
us at the present day, would be thought greatly to infringe on men’s religious liberties
—on
the precious right to be an Atheist or blas-
phemer. wfcrepivov guXXoyov.
9.
10.
n
ki
See Note LXXIII., App. “ Con-
vovOerriGec re Kal ry ryg 'ipvxyg Gurypta ofuhovvreg.
versing with them for admonition, and for the salvation of the soul.” It is interesting to meet thus in a heathen writer with that very
we have been accustomed to asmost sacred ideas of Christianity. We may, perhaps, have
expression with which from infancy sociate the
given
it
too
much of a Scriptural
aspect in our rendering of Gorypia
—the term, as thus presented by Plato, being undoubtedly with a somewhat lower sense—yet in
still,
immense ions,
all
qualifications,
what an
difference does such language, employed in such connex-
make between him and
either of ancient or
all
other philosophers and legislators
modern times.
The phrase Gurypca Tpvxyc seems
have been intended by way of antithesis GtdTrjpLCLQ cuparog, some distance back, page 76 (8). also to
aucfipoviGTTjpiov safe
,
to be taken
was not
to the expression
In this view, the
only intended, in corporis custodio.m lor
keeping of the body but also for the well-beings health
tion of the soul.
,
,
m
the
salva-
:
CONTRA ATHEOS.
80 vg)v
•
eav 6s
firj ,
& avQig
depstXxi
rrjv rotavr7]v dlfcrjv , tiavd-
11 £rjfuovoQu). ogol d’ av '&7]pLd)6sig ysvcjvrat npog rep &£oi)g ill) vopi^stv rj apEXslg rj 7TapatT7]rovg elvai nara-
rep
,
i
(ppovovvreg 6s tgov avQp g)tto)v 'ipvxayuytiGt, tQ)v (juvrcjv rovg 6s rsdvscdrag
nal tieovg vmGxvovpsvoi Ttsidsiv
,
<j>
10
psv noXXovg
aanovreg 'ipyx^yo^yslv^
<bg
dvotatg re
teat
evxalg
nal ETTcpdalg yorjrEvovrEg, I6td)rag te nal oXag olniag rtoXstg xpr)p,aTG) v
x^P LV smxstpfocn
tovtg)v 6s og av ocpXcov sivat 66
tear
anpag
’
11
teal
stjaipslv,
rtparG) to 6uiaorrjpiov
avrep Kara vopov, 6s6sGdat psv sv rep rCbv pEGoysiodv 6egfjiG)rr]pL(p
vopopvXdnenv avrovg
raicrrjv 6s vjto ro)v oitcETCov
pi^Eva sXEvdspov pr)6snoTE
irpoGLEvai 6s avrtp
*
Xapdavstv, airodavovra 6s
ng
Xelv ara<pov. sav 6s
it
EXsvOspog GwOdirr ^ 6tnag
clge6el-
,
this
word, page 69
is
The man-
had to the character de-
which corresponds Guile and jugglery,
{typiddeig in the sense of ferocious.
which are the leading ing,
(5).
used here seems to confirm the view that was
is
scribed, page 78, as dolov nal kvtdpag n^prjg,
poorly to
rcbv
snbaX-
In this place reference
there taken.
napa
e£g) tgjv dptcjv
See remarks on
11. ti-ypLudeig.
ner in which
Tpocprjv
y
traits, are
not in keeping with such a
mean-
although perfectly consistent with such beastly views of the
may be entertained by an Atheist, or a Simon Magus, or such a one as is described Note LXXII., App. This term, in its primary sense, is applied to 10. 'tpvxayuycjffc. Divine nature as
Mercury as conductor of the souls of the dead to Hades. In a secondary sense, it is employed of those who pretended to raise ghosts by magic
arts
cvocabant.
:
qui imprccando
A
or sophistry.
third It
is
meaning
et
cantando animas ex inferis in terrain
is to cajole or allure the
Socrates himself, in the
Comedy
A ipvrj
of the Birds, 1551
Tig £gt’ ahovrog, ov
ipvxayoyel
Plato uses the •
11. /car’ anpag.
'Zcokpa.TTjg.
word here in both the two latter Compare the Iliad, N., 772.
Sometimes 200
it
senses.
:
Ntfv &7ieto Tzaoa v
soul by flatteries
thus applied by the buffoon Aristophanes to
\7uog
is
tear’ atcpiyg
ciiTzeivrj.
written as one word, KaraKpag as in Soph-., Antig.* ,
CONTRA ATHEOS.
81
ag tg) eQeXovtl Xayx&veiv vn e^erG). naldag 6e dv raXiTix)
vol
13
12
t%i
ttoXel
Inavovg
,
na -
fxev
ETnpeXovps-
oi tcgv opcpavCbv
nal tovtg)v, d)g ovtgjv opepavtiv, etupeXeloOg)v prjdbv
XElpov tg)v aXXo)v, and o<pfo] rrjv dtnrjv.
notvov
Tijg rjpEpag ?]g
14r
(5’
dv 6 naTrjp
XpSG)v, og EXaTTG) te slg dEovg avTcbv rovg
nai Xdyep ttXtjppeXeIv dv noiol nal
di)
,
Oat tjttov Sea ro ,
p,fj
ai)TG)v
knl rovroig naoc vopov nElodai
et-elvai
noXXovg
epyrn
nal dvorjrovg ylyvecr-
$ eottoXelv napa vopov.
egtg)
f
yap vopog obs rolg ^vpnaGi HEtpEvog dnXtig I spa prjds sig ev idtatg olniatg EicrrjoOG). 'dvEtv 6’ orav ettl vovv I'q T tvt, npbg ra drjpoGta ltg) dvoGiv real rolg lEpsvGi te nal •
•
Eyx^p^TG) ra
LEpEtatg Xr\g
ftypara, olg.ayvEta tovtgov etu\le -
GWEv^aodG) 6e avrog te nal og dv
•
eOeX^j ust’ i
avTOv
GWEvx^odai. TavTa 6e ytyvopsva tgjv tolgjv6e x^9 iV lepa
15
egtg).
nal tiEovg ov padtov IdpvEoOat, UEydXrjg ds diavolag j
Tivog dpO&g dpav to toiovtov (pspovTGjg
•
bOog te yvvai^t te
drj
dta-
ndoatg nal Tolg aodEvovoi ndvTTj nal nivdvvEv-
ovgi nal anopovoiv , onrj Tig dv anopyj, nal TOvvavTiov ,
OTav Evnoptag Tivog Xa6G)VTat naOiEpovv te to napov asl ,
7r aldag
12.
This to others must have been
be dv (lev naraXiny.
intended as the most solemn and impressive part of the law,
more
much
so than the casting of the unburied body beyond the boundaries
The
of the state.
children of the Atheist
were
to
become orphans
immediately after his sentence to solitary imprisonment, that after his civil death.
no longer existing in as in
him
The domestic
lay, his relations to
law, he was
is,
were to be regarded as the case of the man who had sundered, as far
to he utterly
God.
relations
In the language of the Jewish
cut off from his 'people.
These were to be the fifteen have the general charge of all matters relating to orphans, wills, wards, and wardship. They are mentioned book eleventh of the Laws, 924, C. They were to be 13. oi
oldest
tuv
optyavtiv empe’kov[Levoi.
Nomophulakes, who were
to
divided into five classes of three each, to serve successively, each class for one year. 14. kolvov ’em tovtolq ttclgl vopov.
15. 'lepa nal
-d-eovg
See Note LXXIV., App. See Note LXXIV., App.,
ov padiov IdpveoOai.
on private innovations in
religion.
1
CONTRA ATHEOS.
82 /cal 4dvGtag
datpoGi
evx^odac
/cal
/cal Ttatoi decoy,
ev ovetpoig
cj)66ovg /cal
,
IdpvGeig imax^eladac deoZg
ev re (fodapaatv eyprjyoporag did
cog d’
avrcog
bxfjeig
3
povevovrag, e/caGratGi re avrebv /cal
lepd , redoag pev
,
77 dvrcov
vov vopov
ravra
prj /cal
dvGtatg re
avovreg
,
/cal
iroieZv /card
kclI
daipoai
teal
Iva
,
ev
/cal ficopovg
IXecog olopevot
avroZg re ey/cXrjpara irpog deebv iroicbvrai ,
deoeg
aoebovvrcov
evx^Zg, elg drretpov rrjv adi/dav av%-
iroXtg airoXavtf rcbv daebcov
1.
rov vvv Xeyope-
XaOpa rovg deovg
rolg emrperrovGiv ovglv avrebv fieXriooc ?}
ev re icada -
rig ervxs rcbv roiov-
/cal onr]
tcXercrovreg irpa^eGtvf lepd re
Idtatg oi/datg idpvopevoi, iroieZv
iccopag,
tie
irpbg rovrotg de eve/ca rcbv
*
iroXXag airopvrj-
rrotovpevovg ficopovg
a/crj
ohdag ixdoag
polg tdpvopevovg epiriir’kavai, rcov. cov eve/ca XP'U
/cal
2
/cal
nvd
rponov
/cal
,
iraGa ovrcog
rbv
ducatcog.
See Note LXVII., on
natal detov.
Daemons or Genii. eypr/yoporag. When awake
•
the doc-
trine of the 2.
,
opposed to ev
vigilantes as ,
This presents a case of anakolouthon and }
datives yvvai^i and aodevovoi above.
is
A id
oveipoig.
to be referred to the
cpoSovg here, as
Ast ob-
serves, is to be taken as equivalent to ne^oSrjyevovg, perterritos. 3.
last
The
endcTaioi.
feminine
is
used in reference to
mentioned, although the word belongs equally to
oipeig,
the
cpdcrpaoiv
and
oveipoig. 4.
ev re uadapotg.
5.
tclenrovreg
Sub
dio , in the open air.
npatjeaiv.
In this expression the verbal
noun
npd^eaiv has the force of the verb, and the participle Kkenrovreg
is
it
had been laOpa npdr-
We
have here the ancient
used like a qualifying adverb, as though rovreg. 6.
Kal
ndoa
ovrcog
rj
nokig dno\avy.
universal doctrine of The State as an organic whole or body with a ,
national conscience, in distinction from the very modern notion of a
mere mass or aggregate of individual wills. As an organic whole it was morally responsible for every part. Crime unpunished not only ,
infected the moral health, but brought also justly imputed guilt upon
the entire corporate organization.
No
reader of the Old Testament
can doubt that this doctrine was taught there severity. vii.,
25,
We need only refer in proof
in all its
to the case of
and other striking examples of those
apparent
Achan, Josh,
who troubled
,
ox wrought
:,
,
CONTRA ATHEOS. uev
dr)
vopoOerrjv o deog ov pep'i/jerat. kelgOo yap 6 vopog
&eov ev
ovrog, pi) KEKTTjodac (pavevra
aia,
83
erepa
/ce/crrjpevov
Idiatg obcla/g lepd
opyta^ovra
/cal
eav pev aducov prjdev rov peyaXov
yaapevog avr)p
i]
/cal
/cal
eloayyeXXsTG) rolg vopo$v\a%iv ol de
elg
ra drjpoGia
,
dicoepepeiv lepd
^rjpcovvrov, eog av direvexO'Q
olg oloriGivovv de,
,
,
eh
9
og ov tcadapog
rcaidiov
ducaorrjpiov
drjpo-
avoaiov
elp~
.
rd
tt
poor arr ovr ov
Idia, pi) nelOovreg de
eav de rig
aoebrjoag
pi)
avdpov daedrjpa avoGtov yevryrai (pavepog
elre ev Idcotg idpvoapevog
6o* to
rov de
rd
yvvrj /ce/CTryral rig 6 pev aloOopevog
/cal
itaidlov aAA’
Trkrjv
•
r\
prj,
ev drjpooloLg ftvaag lepd $e-
ov
*&vov,
davaro typtovG-
Kptvavreg vopocpvXa/ceg, elg to
ovrog elaayayovreg,
ri)v r r\g aoebetag dhcrjv
Tovroig emreXovvTOV.
The same sentiment may
folly in Israel.
Greek
poets.
Compare,
especially, Hesiod,
often be found io the
Works and Days, 223
UoUclki Kal ^vpieana n o?.tg kclkov avdpog anijvpa, bong akirpaivei Kal drdoOaXa prixavdarai. Tolmv
d’
ovpavoQe v p£y* eTrrjXaoe
Xtpov opov Kal TiOipov
*
ovde yvvaiKeg tlktovglv
irrjpa
Kpovlov
,
aTzotydivvOovoi de Tiaoi. *
pivvQovcu de ohoi,
Zrjvbg (ppadpoavvycnv ’O XvpnLov
*
ye crparov evpvv dmoXeaev
uXXore
6’
avrt
bye rec^og >
fj
tljv
r)
viag ev novrep Kpovidr/g anoTtvvrai avr&v.
,
r)
.^AA
EXTENDED NOTES AND
DISSERTATIONS, SUGGESTED BY PASSAGES
IN THE TEXT, ON SOME OP THE PRINCIPAL POINTS OF THE
PLATONIC PHILOSOPHY AND THEOLOGY, ESPECIALLY AS COMPARED WITH THE HOLY SCRIPTURES
;
TOGETHER WITH SOME EXPLANATIONS OP DIFFICULT PASSAGES AT GREATER LENGTH THAN WOULD BE CONVENIENT IN MARGINAL OBSERVATIONS.
vwnaa vwvyv
\
.
EXTENDED NOTES AND
DISSERTATIONS. r.
The Platonic View of the Parental and
Filial Relations ,
and
the Ancient D.octrine generally on this Subject.
Page
2,
Line
â&#x20AC;&#x2122;E^
8.
6e yoveag.
A
the end and scope of the Republic, or, as
properly styled,
Righteousness
The Dialogue on
(rtepl
misconception of it
should be more
the Nature of Right or
dutaiov ), has subjected the
He
Plato to great reproach.
name
of
has been charged with main-
book of that dialogue, sentiments which, would result in the utter overthrow of all the
taining, in the fifth if
carried out,
domestic relations.
A
defence, had
we space
for
it
here,
might be derived from the peculiar parabolical or allegorical nature of that work, and from the evident absence of any
design that
it
Whether, however,
isting polity.
right
should serve as the model of any actual ex-
view of the Republic or
not,
this
be regarded as a
and whatever
we may
may
there be
think of the justice of the charge to which he
thought to have exposed himself, there can be no doubt that in this treatise (nepl vopwv), in
which he means
to ap-
pear in the character of a serious legislator for a really practicable if not existing state, ,
he takes special pains
own
to
day, he
remove the reproach to which, even in his had been subjected on account of the passages referred
to
This long dialogue on legislation was the work of his old age, and in
it
he
strives to set in the highest light the
sanctity of the domestic,
and especially the
filial
and pa-
o
88
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE For the strongest proof of
rental relations.
among many
refer,
ninth book, 881
other passages, to
and especially
A.,
,
and beautiful passage,
lib. xi.,
what
to that
this, is
we might
said in the
most striking
931 A., in which he speaks ,
of the veneration of children towards their parents as a religious. rather
than a merely moral or political duty, and
not only this, but also as involving acts partaking of the nature of religious
We
worship.
would recommend
to the
student the close study of the whole argument, not only for its
exceeding moral beauty, but also as a most triumphant
some modern re. would have destroyed the family state. Tovscjv 6s dfisXelv, ovrs $£ g ovrs avOpconog vovv e%G)v ^vpibovXog
refutation of the charge that Plato, like
formers,
7TOTG tc.
ysvoir dv ov6sig ’
r. X.
ovdev'i.
(j)povr]aai
light the sanctity of the relation,
but would deduce from the grossness of stituting the
would have
some
and of the duties resulting,
parts of religious worship, filial
He
household images of the Gods.
by the venerable
their place occupied
pa, or image of the Eternal Father. fXTjTTjp
living
rj
tovtcov narspeg
[irjrspsg
rj
UarTjp ovv orcp
sv oIklcl uslvrai
Xlol CLTTSCpTjKOTsg yijpa, prjbslg 6iavo7]drjTG) aVTCO, TOLOVTOV S(j)SGTLOV
Kvpcov sgsgOcu, sdv
or
by sub-
veneration for the idola-
of the aged sire or grandsire, as the household ayaX-
form
7tsvxi
tietiv,
a method of indirectly reforming
it
holy feeling of
adoration
trous
6s xprj rrepi
In this passage he not only sets in the highest
b Keurriiievog
6ij
l6pV\LCL
SV
fcstfirj-
n otg ayaXpa pLCbXXoV
olu'iCb
Kara rponov ye
real
opOcbg
avro depa-
“ If any one hath a father, or mother,
.
grandparents worn
out with age, and laid up as sacred
relics in his house, let
him never suppose,
as long as he
possesses this altar of the domestic hearth, that any other
dyaXpa provided
or sacred
image
he knows how
is
to
more worthy
worship
931, D., ’0 vkovv biavorjOtifiev
d>g
it
of his adoration,
aright.”
ov6sv TTpog
repov ayaXfjia dv KTrjGaifJLsda rrarpog
real
And
again,
'Sscov
rrpondropog
na-
FILIAL RELATION. peifievcov yrjpa na) prjrepcov rrjv avrrjv
ov(;
89 dvvaiuv ex ov(7(^ v
ogov ayaXX't] rig npalg yeyrjQev o $ eog.
then, believe that
we can have no
cious in the sight of
worn
or mother
Heaven than
religions
“Let
—
us,
image more pre-
a father, or grandfather,
out with age, and that in proportion as
honour or delight in them with a religious joy
may
we
ayaX-
(so
be rendered here as in Pindar same proportion does God himself rejoice.” If this is idolatry, it is certainly far more innocent than that which is practised by the professedly What a beautiful and affectChristian Church of Rome.
Xq, whence ayaXfia,
Olymp
.,
,
,
139), in the
i.,
ing picture
is
here presented
The aged and
!
infirm parent
not only revered in the secret sanctuary of the heart, but actually regarded,
if
not as the very household deity of the
secluded domestic temple, yet, in representation or
rendered
had
in
eltccov ,
to the Invisible
mind something of 703
the Antigone,
T t yap
is
God.
truth, as the best visible
whom homage was
to
Sophocles seems
have
same
this
beautiful conception in
narpog '&aXXovrog, svtcXeiag tskvolq
not the
j
uel^ov
;
same high meaning
in Plato, although in other respects the
—;
r
to
dyaXpa here
language
as
is striking-
more strongly resembles Proverbs, xvii., 6 where the Hebrew word mxsn mXDn> lZPJS has r VV t t
ly similar.
nnx
to
be
:
’'ATAAMA There
through
It
•
:
:
•
•
#
Greek ayaXpa, being like it, too, sense, as in Psalm lxxviii., 61, where
a striking affinity to the
used in a religious it
is
applied to the ark of the covenant.
As
a consequence of this religious relation, Plato attaches
great importance to the blessing and curse of a parent, and in this
he
is in
accordance with one of the most ancient
and universal doctrines that have ever prevailed among mankind. After reciting the examples of Theseus, CEdipus, and Amyntor, he thus proceeds
H
:
2
apalog yap yovevg knyovoig
90
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF
TIIE
“For the free rendering) comes loaded a way that is true of no other
ovdeig erepog aXkoig dLnaiorara, 931, C.
dig
curse of a parent (to give a
with calamity
Wherefore, as he says in another passage,
relations.”
nag
drj
to children in
vovv
(frodelrai teal
npa yoveuv
noXAoig nai noXXdmg emreXelg yevopevag
,
ei>xdg, eldcbg
931 A.
“
,
Every
one that hath reason both fears and honours the prayers of
knowing
parents,
well that often,
and
to
many, have they
fulfilled.” How deeply this sentiment was impressed upon the minds of the Grecian poets, and how important an
been
element
it
forms of their most tragic representations,
we
may
learn from the dismal effects and long train of calam-
itous
consequences which they set forth as following the
The
imprecations of CEdipus upon his unnatural sons.
sad story of Hippolytus, who, although innocent,
is
repre-
sented by Euripides as perishing under a father’s imprecation, exhibits the
same
doctrine, although in a
ed and distorted form.
The dying
most pervert-
cry which the poet puts
mouth of the wretched young man, d) narpog epov dvarrjvog dpa shows how awful was the calamity which the ancient world
into the
,
universally regarded as involved in a parent’s curse.
The
converse doctrine, namely, the importance of the parental blessing, is certainly one of the most clearly taught truths
of the Old Testament.
language and
How consonant
spirit of Scripture,
it is,
both with the
no one need be
told
who
recollects the value attached to the blessing of the Patriach
Isaac, and the declarations of the dying Jacob to the twelve
heads of
Israel, besides
many
other passages which are
founded upon the same idea.
was a prominent principle in all the ancient systems of law and religion that the relation of parent and child It
gave rise
to religious rather ,
Hence
Aristotle says, eotc d’
voig tig
avOpunoig npog fieovg
than merely rj
*
civil obligations.
pev npog yovelg (\uXia tekrov yap elvat nal Tpacprjvai
,
FILIAL RELATION. cm.ot,
teal
yevofievotg rov
Heaven.
come down and
affected even
speak of
Bible
makes
On
this
direct
it
would be the
fruitful
permitted to pass
if
source of every viola-
The
both of the laws of Heaven and Earth.
seems
to
to
God, and hence, in
with this view, Plato regards the
dered the
filial
and
have been regarded as a continuation
which bound us
of that
mony
tie
account the
Jewish law punished the crime with
too, the
with impunity,
parental
Hence
commandduties we owe to God,
such unrelenting severity, as though,
tion,
feeling has
this relation the subject of the first
ment immediately following the and hence,
this
modern languages.
piety or impiety.
filial
committed
offences
Something of
directly against
we
.
,
was regarded among
violation
,
to the class of duties styled
from those that were only diicaia and
'6(ua, in distinction
their
Ethic Nicomach
tt cudsvOrjvcu.
They belonged
12, 5.
viii.,
91
strictest har-
man who had
sun-
having utterly annihilated the duties and
latter as
On
obligations of the former.
seen in a passage on which
this account, as
we have
we have
already commented,
page 8 1 the children of the Atheist were ,
to
be regarded as
orphans, and placed under the care of the state.
The importance of this relation in a political point of view, may be inferred from the fifth commandment itself. The promise annexed has generally been referred to individuals. litical
ly.
It
appears to us, however, to have more of a po-
aspect,
and
to
be addressed
to the nation collective-
The language certainly seems to favour this idea may be long in the land which the Lord thy :
â&#x20AC;&#x153; that thy days
God
intimating that the long continuance of
giveth thee
their national polity in the land of
more than on anything
else,
Canaan would depend,
on the preservation of
amental conservative article
;
this fund-
on the reverence with which
this duty should be regarded, as forming the connecting
link
between the
civil
as being the source
and the more purely
and guarantee of every
religious,
and
inferior domestic
;
92
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF TIIE
and
For undoubted examples of the
political obligation.
same and
similar language, used in the national instead of
the individual sense, see Deuteronomy,
iv.,
2G,
40
v.,
;
30
vi., 2.
In accordance with this universal sentiment of antiquity, Plato, in the passage at the beginning of these remarks,
and
in
other places in the Laws, enumerates duties to
owed
parents as immediately succeeding those which are to
God, and ranks their violation as next in enormity
Compare
public and private sacrilege.
the
Laws, 717,
and especially a most remarkable pas-
B.,
sage in the ninth book, 881, A. rovrcov ere 7Tpoyovcov
pevog
bang
Ilarpc^ yap
:
roXprjoet a\pao0ai
alicta tlvc, prjre tgjv avo)
deioag
tCjv vtto yrjg npopiCdv Xeyopevuv,
rj
prjrpbg
u ore
'deebv prjviv, prjre
dXXd
tearaeppovtiv rcbv del
,
$ avarog pev ovv ovk eonv
TLVog anoTponrjg eoxdrrjg.
‘‘If
oi
de ev
any one
f/
A idov
i)
/3ca%o-
7raXatcov nai vno irdvrov elprjpevov rrapavopel rovrep
eax^TOV,
to
the fourth book of
tovtolol Xeyopevoi ttovol
shall dare to treat with violence
,
&c.
father or
mother, or any one of his or their progenitors, having before his eyes neither the fear of the
powers above, nor of the
vengeance of the world beneath,
but, despising the ancient
and universal
mankind, shall break through
traditions of
law, for such a one there
remedy.
Death, then,
remedy, but something of Hell which difficulty
not this greatest or most extreme
still
beyond
this,
even those pains
are said to await these enormous offenders.”
The whole passage with
is
all
need of some most extreme
is
is full
of dreadful meaning,
be transferred
word which comes up
We
to the English.
to the
which can have no
Greek dnorponf. apby which we may some enormous wickedness, It is
plied to the most solemn religious act avert the
wrath of Heaven
for
and hence the terms anorponaiog drcorpomaGpog inauspicious that which is to he averted hy sacrifice an expiation ,
,
,
,
or turning aivay of the Divine wrath
,
and, in a secondary
:
FILIAL RELATION. sense, whatever
most odious or an utter abomination.
is
all lists of great
93
one of the worst abodes
in Tartarus is ever assigned to of-
fenders of this description, and thus Paul classes those
among
are guilty of violence towards their parents holy
and 'profane
pyrpaAcpaig.
The
1
In
crimes, as presented to us by the poets,
:
who
the un-
dvoaioig nai fiebrjXoig TrarpaXtiaig nal
Timothy,
i.,
9.
holiness of the family relation
is
intimated, in the
ancient mythology, by the worship of Vesta; and the perpetual cherishing of the domestic affections, as affording
warmth by which all social must be preserved, is represented
the vivifying and fructifying
and
political institutions
Well did Cicero
in the Eternal Fire. est
say, in aris et focis
This intimate connexion
Respublica.
Greek and Latin poets
in
is set forth
by the
almost every form of expression.
Virgil presents the holy alliance in one line
Deum
Sacra
sanctique patres. Georg.,
And
this
seems but
a reiteration of the precept, Leviticus,
Speak unto
duties are there given.
and say unto them Ye ,
,
473.
and of the order in which the religious and family
xix., 2,
Israel
ii.,
congregation of
all the
shall be holy
God am holy. Fear ye every man mother I am the Lord your God.
your
,
for I the Lord
his father
and
his
.
The
obligation of
filial
obedience, as the fountain of
moral and political virtues,
is
fragment of Euripides from Stobaeus *'E yco
o
pev
all
thus beautifully set forth in a
MEIT2TON
:
ap^opai Xeyeiv
narpl TteWeoOai XP £ ^ V naldag, vopi&LV r’ avro rovF dvai diicrjv.
etc
rovde upCorov
•
Eurip. Alopa. So, also, in a poet, in
which
still
more
striking fragment of the
same
duties to parents are ranked next after those
due the Gods, and before mere
political obligations:
94 PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FILIAL RELATION. holv aperal ag XPV
rpslg
0EOY2
clokeIv
teuvov,
go
T0NEI2,
re rtpav, rovg re dpsipavrag
N0M0T2
re Kotvovg
k&XXlotov
e^eig ore(j)avov evtcXeiag aei.
f
E XXadog
teal
-
•
ravra dptiv
Eurip. Antiope.
W
e have dwelt the longer on this, because
that Plato’s
Laws and
views here, and in many other places in the
which might otherwise be drawn from the
book of the Republic
even with to
all
and because,
;
even below
In the theories of some,
So
civil duties.
far
and
is
it
is
placed
from being thought
to pos-
it is
denied that
for political legislation.
perfect obligations ,
It is
it
it
forms a sub-
ranked among im-
never with us, except in some few
cases of pauperism, enforced by
many
present day,
at the
the declarations of the Bible, the relation
sess any religious character,
even
fifth
be becoming divested of that sanctity which
anciently possessed.
ject
think
other dialogues, furnish a complete refutation of
the charge,
seems
we
inferior subjects are
made
Why, when
law.
so
matters of legislation, this
fundamental and all-conservative relation should have so little
space assigned
difficult to say.
to
The
it
in our jurisprudence,
effects,
it
would be
however, which will inevita-
bly result, in loosening the whole political structure, can be far
more easily and with more certainty predicted.
relation
ous reformers, who, under the
name
of a cold and heart-
hardening universal benevolence, or love
would
The
and the duties resulting are also attacked by spuri-
utterly break
up
all
the family
to
being in general,
ties,
and destroy
the associations connected with that holy word,
These men sometimes, in their ignorance, make hand quotations from
Plato,
and
him from their profane’ grasp.
all
Our Home.
stale
we would wish
to
second-
rescue
PREAMBLE, OR ADVISORY PART OF THE LAW.
95
II.
The Words Trpootptov and the
Page
The Preamble
irapapvOcov.
Advisory or Argumentative Part of the 2,
Line
dec Ttaoxti'V-
“
To
16.
The
tt
Law
,
.
apapvOiov vnodepevcp prjreov a
lawgiver (vopoOerq, understood ) must
declare what each one must suffer, after having put under,
by way of hypothesis or foundation, an exhortation or pre-
Another reading has
amble.”
They
by Ficinus.
same
the
ttpooiptov,
both, however, II poolfuov
significance.
preface or preamble
is
followed
would possess nearly
would
tt apapvOiov,
which
44
literally
mean
deemed
Such an
by way of preamble, nearly the
exhortation or argument,
last
book may be considered, as only the
this tenth
few pages are devoted
and the penal
This
essentially and peculiarly neces-
sary in those institutions that related to religion.
whole of
a
an exhortatory ex-
ordium,” containing the ground or reason of the law. the philosopher
44
statute
to the preceptive declaration,
founded upon
it.
In a more limited
sense, however, the TrapapvQiov here intended is contained in
what immediately
In like manner, Cicero, in
follows.
evident imitation of Plato, introduces in his treatise
De
Legibus a similar Tcpooipcov in which he makes religious ,
belief
and reverence the only true foundation of law and
may
be found in that noble
Sit igitur
hoc a principio per-
of every form of civil polity.
passage,
lib. ii.,
sec.
vii.
:
suasion civibus, dominos esse
It
omnium rerum
ac moderatores
Deos, eaque quae gerantur, eorum geri judicio ac numine,
eosdemque optime de genere hominum mereri, quisque pietate
sit,
qualis
quid agat, quid in se admittat, qua mente, qua
colat
religiones,
habere rationem.
intueri,
piorumque
et
impiorum
His enim rebus imbutae mentes, haud
sane abhorrebunt ab
utili
ac vera sententia.
Quid
est
enim
quam nemincm esse oportere tarn stulte arrogantem, se rationem et mentem putet inesse, in coelo m undo quo
verius, ut in
et,
,
96
PREAMBLE, OR ADVISORY PART OF THE LAW.
non putet
sumraa ingenii ratione comprehendat, nulla ratione moveri putet ? Utiles esse autem ?
aut ut ea, quae vix
opiniones has, quis neget,
quum
mentur jurejurando, quantae
intelligat,
salutis sit
quam multa
fir-
foederum religiones,
quam multos Divini supplicii metus a scelere revocarit, quamque SANCTA SIT SOCIETAS civium inter ipsos, Diis immortalibus interpositis turn judicibus
Habes
legis
What
PROCEMIUM
a striking contrast
noble heathen, and those of
and boasting
constitutions,
turn testibus.
enim hoc appellat
sic
:
,
Plato.
between the sentiments of these
many modern bills
political theories,
of rights, from
which the
very names of God, religion, Christianity, or the least
any bond
sion to
by which the
religio ) (
allu-
visible state
is
connected with the invisible world, are as carefully excluded, as though they litical
On jjuov
were the deadliest
foes to the po-
happiness of mankind. this subject
we may compare
in the Timasus, or the
tempts
also the sublime npool *
Dialogue in which Plato
to set forth the universal code
at-
of laws which govern The preamble
both the physical and intelligible universe.
or TTpoolfUov there, is found in that remarkable passage, in
which he divides lev del
/l
things into
all
yevecnv de ovk s%ov
ov de ovdenoTE. to pev del
Kara Tavra ov
•
and
real
That which eternally that
which
never truly
is
IS
reason, always
;
ever
styles,
BEING
ON
per,
pETa Xoyov nepiXprcTov, ’
aloOrjoecog
aXoyov
dnoXXvpevov. ovTog de ovdenoTE
IS and hath never generation
BECOMING or being generated
the one
5/
to
riTNOMENON
ual to
vorjoec
to de do^rj peT
do^aorov, yiyvopevov, ov.
di)
*
what he
,
,
and
received by the intelligence with in the
same
relations, the other re-
ceived by opinion with irrational sense, ever becoming, perish ing,
and never
stantive being.
truly
,
and
in the highest sense, having a sub -
— Timwus, 27, P.
This he evidently intends
as a preamble to the system of physical and psychological legislation
contained in that wonderful dialogue; for after
:
SUBJECTIVE SENSE OF THE WORD dwelling upon the above distinction
at
97
aXrjOeVG).
some
length, pre-
paratory to the statement of the universal laws of mind and matter, Timaeus is thus addressed
by Socrates
IIPOOIMION
MON
:
to pev ovv
davpaoicog arced e^apeOd gov rov de 6?) NO“ Since in such a wonderful rjplv ecpe^g rcepatve, ,
way we have received from you the propound to us the law” Timaeus,
'preamble next in order ,
29, C.
III.
Word
Subjective Sense of the
Page
4,
Line
0 v/covv,
9.
dXrfevovrag Xeyetv to
be an easy matter
its
Does
it
not, then,
Gods
exist ?”
in
yet reference rather pression, to that
seem
’A XrjOevo), although
signification the utterance of truth,
many passages
are
“ ;
padcov eivai
to affirm, in all truthfulness, that there
are Gods, or that the
includes in
%eve, do/cel
cj
cog eioi tieoi
aXrjOevG).
which
it
it
and there
must be so rendered, has
to truth of feeling
which belongs
than
to truth of ex-
to the subjective state of
the soul or the moral diathesis, rather than to that
which
is
the result of scientific, or speculative, or casuistical argu-
ment
— what the Psalmist
Paul seems
to include
shown by the
ayarcr], “
being
So, also, Galatians, Oevcov vflv I
am
of this sense as he uses the
iv., 15 aXrjOevovreg ev ayarcr) not so “ speaking the truth,” as our translation has it, but
rather, as is
word
much
—
term, Ephesians,
much
styles, “ truth in the in ward parts ”
“ ;
truthful, or of
16
iv.,
Have
context, and especially
true (in heart) to
a true heart in love”
— chare exOpog vpdjv yeyova
become you
I
It
may
refer, in this last if that is
posed to be included, the subjective sense of the predominant.
rag in the passage ,
Hence we may at
aXrj-
subject to your hatred while
ample, to the declaration of truth, but even
still
by the
ex
sup-
word
is
best render aXrjdevov-
the head of these remarks, adverbialI
— SUBJECTIVE SENSE OF THE WORD
98
ly, thus
“ In
:
all sincerity, in all
dXrjOeVG).
truthfulness, in consistency
The
with the truest and purest sentiments of our nature.” other rendering, which would refer
merely
it
to the declara-
would be comparatively tame, besides producing a pleonasm in A eyeiv. Our translation is also in perfect keeping with the character of the honest and truthful Clinias, as he is, with great dramatic skill, represented to us throughout this whole argument. He uses the lantion of truth,
guage of a
This
man who never had
a favourite
is
word with
a doubt on the subject.
felt
Plato,
and frequently
For a very
found in his writings in this subjective sense. excellent example, see the Theaetetus, 202, B.
ovv dvev Xoyov
rr]v dXr\d7j
0ETEIN
pev avrov
The
sentiment
ov.
tt\v is,
do^av rivog
'i/jvx'rjv
:
orav pev
Xa6rj,
’AAH-
avro yiyv&otteiv
rrepl
that the soul
ng
be
to
6’
,
may be
harmony with the truth, so as cordially
to
subjectively in
embrace
it
in its
creed before scientific knowledge, or an objective presentation of
before
may have
the
it
to the speculative reason.
it
possesses a clear apprehension of the doctrine
This may
be,
but those
who would, on
and often undoubtedly
It
is,
life
the case in religion
this account,
.
;
undervalue logical
and doctrinal statements, or what they rather disdainfully style systematic theology, are in danger either of a mysti-
cism, in
which
all
clear perceptions of truth are utterly lost,
or of taking opinions upon the
on the
reason, or any true
We
mere testimony of
others, or
credit of a blind tradition, without either light in the
warmth
in the affections
illustration of this truthful state of mind in which Clinias pursues in the next reply the course npiorov pev yr\ nal rjXiog, &c. He enters upon the argument with all
have an
the confidence of an easy victory.
to the
He
appeals at once
most obvious phenomena, not so much as
scientific
proofs of the Divine existence, but rather as visible representations of a manifest Divine power. clare (to all
whose
“
The Heavens
souls are prepared for
it)
de-
the glory of
THE ORPHIC POETRY. But as though
God.”
this
had
much
too
99 the appearance
of speculative reasoning, he retreats again to his stronghold, the feelings of his
common and
own
nature, and appeals to the
who were
We
are taught in the
its
for those
Holy
Scriptures, that not only a true
unbelief in respect to the Divine existence,
seat primarily in the affections rather than in the
“
The fool hath The Hebrew word
intellect.
God.”
deems enough
true-hearted (akrjdevovreg) concerning the Gods.
belief, but also
has
This, with
universal sentiments of mankind.
the bare aspect of the heavens, he
understanding
;
still,
cognates, such as
said in his heart
here
is
sometimes used
Greek
like the
there
,
(frpoveo), (frpovrjocg,
erally refers to the intellect, not so
with
(ppeveg,
or scientific aspect, but rather as modified
no
for the all
typovrjpa, &c.,
much
is
it
its
gen-
in a speculative
by the
state ol
the affections or moral powers.
IV.
The Orphic Poetry.
Page
5,
usrpcov.
Line “
I
12.
Some
0/ pev ev not perpoig,
in poetry
ol ds nal
and some in prose.”
uncertain what prose writings are here referred in poetry
to.
avev very
Those
must have been the works of Homer, Hesiod, and
perhaps of Orpheus.
would seem
The term n aXaioraroi
(
most ancient)
some productions older than the These might be styled n aXaia, comparison with the period of Grecian literature in which
Iliad
in
It is
to refer to
and the Theogonia.
Plato lived, which, although time,
many
centuries posterior in
was not separated from them by any
epoch prior
to the
Persian wars.
They
distinct literary
could not, how-
ever, be well entitled to the epithet iraXaiorara which, as ,
it is
introduced, and as the context shows,
is
meant
to des-
ignate the most remote of two distinct periods, in reference
0
THE ORPHIC POETRY.
100 to
which
so style
intimated, there
it is
was
from the cosmological
it,
The
thological.
to the
They were more
if
we may
theogonic or my*
or most ancient class,
first,
former description.
a progression,
were of the
philosophical than
more taken up with the origin of things, that allabsorbing question which so engrossed the early mind yeyovev rj IlPftTH <1>Y2I2 ovpavov rcov re aXXcdv. They were pantheistic rather than polytheistic, manifesting a dethe latter,
:
parture, but
gion than
page of
a less departure from the primitive reli-
still
denoted by the
is
All these
5.)
some
styled Orphic, under
few fragments, whether spurious or our
own
9,
not,
which name a
have survived
to
Although these are generally regarded as
day.
productions of a
ence made
(See Note
marks correspond well with the nature
hymns
of the
latter stage.
much later
age, yet, from the frequent refer-
Orpheus by the Greek
to
almost certain that a collection of
poets,
it
would seem
hymns under
this
name
existed in the most ancient times, forming that copious
fund or storehouse of rich poetical appellations, from which
Homer, and subsequently Aeschylus, were being the source of whatever in the
Grecian tragedies.
is
The
supplied, besides
pantheistical or mystical
existence of forgeries
is
evidence that there must have been originals in imitation of which they were composed, and an ancient philosophy
and theology, which had once exerted great influence on the
human mind,
to
serve as their plausible and probable
foundation.
In connexion with the passage before us, compare iv.,
716, A.:
dpx'fjv
This
re
is
teal
f
O pev
dr)
lib.
deog tjonep nal 6 nahaiog Xoyog, ,
reXevrrjv nal p,eoa rtiv ovtgtv andvrejv ex^v.
almost the very language of one of the so-styled
Orphic fragments
now
extant,
and
directly referred to
is
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
eov pev rov dr}Orpheus by the scholiast on the place rov OP<I>IKON, puovpyov ocKptig, naXcuov de Xoyov Xeyei :
bg
eanv
ovroq,
THE ORPHIC POETRY.
Z evg peaoa, A tog
Z evg
apxrj,
Z evg
7tv0[jLtjv
en iravra rervurar
ovpavov aarepoevrog
yairjg re aal
Should any one say that
dâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;
101
much
resembles very
this
.
the
language of Thales, or some of the philosophers of that
and
period,
who had
been imposed upon by one
and given a poetical dress
we would
reply,
this peculiar
why
and
had
that, therefore, the ignorant old scholiast
may
mode
this
affixed a fabulous
some of
to
their
dogmas,
name
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;why,
not Thales and others have derived
of expression from a
disposition
still
earlier source,
charge the scholiasts and
to
Christian fathers with combining to produce such useless
and yet elaborate forgeries as some connecting with their names
We
?
critics are constantly
say useless, because a
philosophy and theology, such as appears in these hymns,
beyond
did,
all
question, exist at a very early period, and
the poetical dress, had
it
not been real, would have added
nothing to the argument they sought to derive from them.
For places
made
to
in the ancient writings, in
Plato, Ion, vol.
Legibus, i,
8
;
vi.,
iii.,
230
;
p. 134, Leip.
Cratylus,
Euripides, Rhesus, 947
Nat. Deor., hortat.
which reference
Orpheus and his poems, the reader
i.,
38
ad Graecos,
;
p.
ii.,
;
;
Convivium,
263
;
Aristotle,
iv.,
25
;
;
is
referred to
219 De De Anim.,
vii.,
Hippolytus, 967
Diod. Sic.,
17
;
is
;
Cicero,
Just. Mart.,
De Co-
Athenagoras, Legat. pro Christ.,
xv., 64, 65.
12
— plato’s regard for the ancient myths.
102
V.
Regard for Antiquity and the Ancient Mythology His Use of the Word Qeoi.
Plato's
Page “
G,
hard
It is
1.
Ov padcov emrtpav n aXaiolg
to find fault
We
things.” Plato’s
Line
ovclv,
with them, seeing they are ancient
and similar expressions,
discover, in this
conservative
.
spirit
and reverence
antiquity,
for
struggling with his conviction of the importance of having
the minds of the
young imbued with higher notions
of the
Divine Nature than could be obtained from the ancient
The same
poets.
feelings are manifested in that passage
in the Republic, in rest of the poets,
which he dismisses Homer, with the
from his imaginary City of the Soul,
though, at the same time, he sends him
away with
al-
a garland
of honour on his head.
“ Should such a one (he says)
come
to exhibit his
to our city,
indeed, reverence
wishing
him
still
such man could abide with us
eptCi)
state,
,
pvpov Kara
ore^avreg, and
we
would,
as something sacred, and wonderful,
and delightfully pleasant, yet dXXrjv ttoXlv
poems,
:
would we say
rr\g /csdtaXijg
we would
that
no
aTTonepnoLfiev re av elg
Karajfavreg
send him away
to
real
another
having poured myrrh upon his head and crowned him
with a wreath.”
Republic, 398, A.
We
however,
find,
everywhere, in his works, a strong attachment
to the an-
wherever they contained nothing gross or ofhis views of morality a number of which, and
cient myths,
fensive to
;
those, too, distinguished for the feeling of
awe and
sublimity
with which they inspire the reader, he has himself present*
ed in some of the most important and philosophical of his dialogues. It is
exceedingly interesting to contemplate the peculiar
condition of this philosopher, endeavouring to reform what
he
felt
he had no power or commission
no Divine warrant, like the
Hebrew
to abolish.
Having
prophets or the apostles
plato’s regard for the ancient mytiis. ot Christ,
he did not dare
crusade against
upon an exterminating opinions, and traditions held
to enter
the rites,
ail
sacred in the Athenian worship.
The Grecian
was too well acquainted with human nature not another of a
still
reformer
to fear lest,
monster Superstition, he should
in destroying the
103
more horrid aspect
— Atheism.
call
He
up did
not wish utterly to pull down existing institutions, while he had no new revelation, whose authority might replace, with
increased vigour, the departed reverence for those ancient
myths, the probable remains of truths once communicated
from Heaven, yet mysteriously abandoned ruptions and distortions of the
to all the cor-
He
human mind.
probably
thought that out of some of the better parts of the Grecian
mythology there might be constructed a system, which, while
it
recognised the
One
an immense distance from
Eternal Supreme, placed at
by him or emasame time, admit of inferior powers, retaining the individual names at least, (if not the characters), which had been consecrated by the popular That he did believe in such an Eternal and superstition. Ineffable Supreme (6 yevvrjoag a'idioq rcarrjp Timseus, 38, all
things created
nating from him, might, at the
A.,
—
avrov
,
6
KoXkioroq
pop(j)rj ,
teal
dptoroq pevcjv del dnXtig ev ry
Rep., 381, C.,
— 6 Trdvrcjv rjiaora
rrjq
eavrov
Ideaq ka&aivwv, 380, D.), every reader of his works must admit.
He
undoubtedly erred in supposing that the pure
worship of such a glorious Being could be consistent with
any kind of
we
religious
homage paid
to inferior
powers
;
yet
should remember that the same error has been com-
mitted by the largest portion of the professedly Christian
Church, and that
under the
we
are to judge Plato, not as a Christian
light of revelation, but as a
heathen philosopher
which we have no just conception. These remarks are deemed necessary in reply to the charge often made against Plato, of struggling with difficulties, of the magnitude of
countenancing the polytheism of his countrymen, and which
104
platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s use of the
may
be found set forth in
its
word
w
$eol.
strongest light in a tract by
Jacob Zimmerman, contained in the ninth volume of the Amcenitates Literaria.
A
misconception in regard to the Platonic theology has
arisen from his use of the
word
deoi.
The Greek
writers,
whether poets or orators, generally meant by it nothing more than supernatural beings of a higher order than men. The word, in itself, had attached to it none of those more metaphysical conceptions which belong to our term Divine, as significant of the uncreated and eternal. therefore, to those
who,
no philological inconsistency in
beings
in his
whom
scheme,
There was,
its
being applied
Plato elsewhere calls datfioveg, and
may be
regarded in the same light with
the angels or sons of God, mentioned in the Holy Scriptures. In respect to the objection
use of the plural,
it
may
which might be made
to his
be remarked, that throughout this
whole argument with the
atheist, tiedg
may be
for tieoi, without at all affecting its validity,
substituted
and we should
by so doing come nearer to the philosopherâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s true meaning, than by retaining the common term, with the misconception arising from our modern notions that is, we should better ;
translate his spirit
the letter.
Qeoi
is
by adopting a
slight mistranslation of
often to be taken collectively for the
whole of the superhuman Genus, however inferior and dependent some parts of it may be in respect to another, and is equivalent, in the discussions which follow, to to tielov Another suggestion, which it may be or to d(U[i6mov.
make here, is, that by the phrase tieot Kara voiiovg, writer means not directly the Theogony and worship
proper to the
established by law at Athens (although even this he would
touch with the hand of a wise reformer, and not of a reckless destructionist), but rather the cultus of the
and
inferior Divinities, as
it
should be set forth by the law-
giver in that pure system of polity in the present treatise.
Supreme
which he contemplates
PHILOSOPHY OF ANAXAGORAS.
105
VI. Philosophy and Character of Anaxagoras.
Page
6,
Line
wits, or wise all to
whom
veoov
6.
men
that
oo(p(hv. is,
to
have had
Of our modern
comparatively modern, although
he refers did not
seems chiefly
“
live in Plato’s
in
own
He
time.
mind Anaxagoras, who,
not-
withstanding his speculative theism and his boasted doc-
N ovg,
was yet regarded by Plato as giving an atheistical tendency to the age in which he lived. In regard to his theology, Anaxagoras is best known by the position, in which he so much gloried, “ that mind was the cause of all things,” and in physics, by the unpopular dogma, “ that the sun was nothing but a mass of ignited stone, instead of an animated being,” as was commonly beThe lieved, and as Plato seems to teach in this book. trine of the
character of this philosopher
may be
understood from the
boasting he himself made, and which his friends
him, in regard this respect,
to the first of
he had
in
these doctrines
;
made
for
as though, in
any way advanced beyond the more
modest Thales, or had discovered a
truth
which had been
concealed from the beginning of the world to his Socrates seems to have had a right view of
own
him
day.
in the
Phsedon, where he charges him with setting out with the doctrine that
N ovg
speculative tenet,
was the cause of all things, as a mere and then making no use of it in subse-
quent parts of his philosophy
;
that
is,
never ascending
above second causes, or rising from the physical to the
moral (to f3eXri(JTOV ), but ever assigning, as the chief motive
fires
powers, aepag ts ual alOepag nai v6ara y gases and ,
,
and fluids, as the words may be rendered
in
accom-
to the same spirit in modern physical philosophy. Having once (says he) heard one reading a book of Anaxagoras, and saying, that Nous was the disposer and the efficient cause of all things, I was highly delighted with the
modation “
106
PHILOSOPHY OF ANAXAGORAS. and
declaration, I
thought* that
it
seemed
Novg
if
be admirably said
to rne to
Mind) thus arranged
(or
things,
all
everything must be placed in that position in which best for
it
to
be
;
and
;
it
was
so that no other study remained for man, in
regard to both himself and other things but the investigation ,
of that
which was (morally) most
excellent
other words, moral causes), and that this
science of things.
But in
this
and
was
best (or. in
the only true
wonderful hope (of discover-
ing the universal science, or science of sciences) greatly disappointed
;
as
for
read on
I
I
I
find the
was
man
making no farther use of his boasted N ovg, nor assigning any other cause in the disposal and arrangement of the world, than airs, and aethers, and waters, and other similar things
many and
precisely as
if
And he seemed
strange.
any one saying,
to
me
to act
that Socrates doeth whatso-
ever he doeth by mindâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;or reason should then, in attempt,
my
ing to assign the causes of sit
actions, assert that I
now
my
com-
here for these reasons namely, that ,
posed of bones and nerves,
have
joints,
and that
fore that the
that
my nerves
my
bones being raised up
limbs, and that for this reason
I
is
bones are solid and
contract and relax
;
where-
in their joinings, the
nerves, by reason of tension and relaxation,
my
body
now
make me
sit
here
:
to
bend
and
so,
also, in respect to our conversing, should assign other similar
causes of the phenomena of speech, such as voices, and aerial vibrations,
and sounds
((pcovag
re nal aepag nal anoag ),
and ten thousand other such agencies,
all
the while neglect-
ing to assign the true reason (of reasons), that because
it
seemed good (j3 eXriov) to the Athenians to condemn me, it seemed better to me to sit here, and more just Since, as I to submit to the sentence they had imposed. verily believe, had it not been for the last-mentioned reasons, these nerves and bones would long before this have had me away to Megara or among the Boeotians, being set in mo-
therefore
tion
by an opinion of the best ( rov PeXriarov),
if I
had not
â&#x20AC;˘
PHILOSOPHY OF ANAXAGORAS. thought
more just and
it
We
Phaedon, 97, 98.
remain than
better to
recommend
know
Anaxagoras,
as
to
to
fly.â&#x20AC;?
the close study of this
whole passage, and the admirable sketch theists
107
it
presents of such
every student
who wishes
to
the essential difference, on this most vital point, be-
tween the Socratic and other ancient systems of philosophy.
How
remind us of many modern books of which the name of God may, perhaps, a preface or some introductory note, while all the
strongly does
it
physical science, in
appear
in
merely
rest is not
silent, but directly
adapted
to
produce an
by suffering the mind to dwell on than aepag re ual alQepag nal vdara gases,
atheistic turn of thought,
nothing else
and
fluids,
,
and
fires,
The
or imponderable agents.
which Plato entertained of
this
philosopher
is
opinion
also signifi-
cantly expressed, although he does not mention his name, in the
eleventh book of the Laws, 967, A. B. C., a passage
which
is
istic
more freely examined
doctrine of (pvoig,
The
rvx7]* and
Note
XIII.,
on the athe-
xvr
]
Noi)^ of Anaxagoras can hardly be regarded as a
personal being, or as a world, of
The
in
which
atheist
vnepnoagitiy distinct from the
might be considered the informing law.
it
may
'ipvx^j
admit the dogma without changing his
La Grange undoubtedly
creed.
believed that there
was
N ovg, or reason, in the
Heavens, even a science so profound, powers of his highest mathematical analysis could barely follow the laws of motion in which it was displayed and yet La Grange was an atheist. The Heavens
that all the
;
had no diagram
interest for
him except
as they formed a splendid
for the illustration of his calculus,
the moral element
was wanting
it
made no
and as long as
difference what
name was inscribed upon it, whether Noi;^ or (ftvoig, or a God possessed of mere intelligence, to whom we were nothing, and who was nothing to us, except as affording subjects for the exercise of the speculative intellect.
Anaxagoras had no respect
to
moral as
This Noi)c of
final causes,
which
PHILOSOPHY OF ANAXAGORAS.
108
as Socrates shows,
ophy.
was only another name
It
things, in
were studiously excluded from his
which the
for the physical truth of
atheist contends there
any other.
his hypothesis, as well as on
philos-
may be It
science on
was an
abstract
intelligence, displayed wholly in physical adaptations, with-
out either a general or special providence.
It
might be
regarded as the instinct of the universe working in the great whole, as some of its emanations in minute portions, ,
blindly, unconsciously, without personality,
everything but
itself.
and knowing
However incomprehensible
this
may
be, it is still the highest reach of that philosophy which makes no account of any moral attributes in the Deity, but regards him as a mere impassible intelligence. We have
no hesitation in preferring pantheism
if it
embrace, although
inconsistently, that moral element, without
be no true personality, either
to
Novg
which there can
or 'ibvxf
Plato evidently regarded this philosophy as no better
than practical atheism, notwithstanding
pomdogma aforemodern advocates, it
sets out so
pously, and apparently so religiously, with the said.
He seems
here to condemn
its
the veot cofiol, as he styles them, equally with that ancient
which they so much derided. Anaxagoras was of a spirit the very opposite of that which pervades all the teachings of Socrates. He was inclined rather to insult and shock the popular superstitions than gently to remove superstition
them, or turn to good account whatever of truth they might possess, and that, too, not in the spirit of enthusiastic
reli-
which we cannot help respecting even when we are compelled to condemn, but in the mere conceit of a
gious zeal,
little
fancied
modern
progress
Galileo,
in
physical
whose name
is
science.
Like the
so frequently in the mouths
of the scientific enemies of religion, he evidently rejoiced
more in the thought, that this very small advance raised him somewhat above the religious notions of his countrymen, than in any honest wish or desire to elevate those
PHILOSOPHY OF ANAXAGORAS.
109
popular views which placed him, as he supposed, in such
He seems
contrast.
egotistical
to
have been a regular
and poet hater, and there is, therefore, no cause for surprise that he should have called forth the enmity and
priest
prejudices of those
whom
he had, from no higher motive
than vanity, attacked.
This
was manifested
spirit
below referred
to,
that
in the declaration, a
masses of earth and stones, and
For
melted ore.
this
its
belief of
place, or
lines
that the
sun was a ball of
he was charged by the Athenians for he who assails the com-
with atheism, and justly too
mon
few
heavenly bodies were only
the
;
any people, without putting anything better
who
in
attempts to destroy false notions of the
Deity, without teaching, as Socrates and Plato did, the doctrine of the
one eternal and ineffable, yet personal Supreme,
the head of a moral government, and directing
with
reference to moral ends,
final
is
in heart
all
things
no better
than an atheist, whatever refined speculative notions he
may have
N ovg
in the abstract about
the cause of
all
tion of Socrates
or intelligence being
It is
probable that the condemna-
was mainly
effected in consequence of
things.
his views having
been misunderstood by the unthinking
Athenian mob, and confounded with those of Anaxagoras. Plato did undoubtedly hold that the Heavenly bodies were animated personal beings but when here and in subsequent passages he styles them deoi, it is only in the sense The simple doctrine, thereof beings superior to men. fore, for it goes no farther, that the Heavenly bodies were animated beings, was no greut heresy either in philosophy (See Note XXXIV., where this subject is or religion. more fully discussed.) It was far better than the specula;
tive
semi-atheism of Anaxagoras, or even of some modern
naturalists,
who have
only substituted for the abstract Novg
of the Grecian philosopher the symbols and equations of the differential and integral calculus.
K
One
religious
com
HUMAN LAW.
DIVINE JUSTICE GROUND OF
110
God
ception of Plato
which regarded him, and which may
as a moral governor, the light in
and Socrates chiefly
connexion with the most absurd notions of the
exist in
physical universe, does yet belong to a philosophy almost infinitely
men
removed above the mere
as Anaxagoras, Galileo or
scientific
La
theism of such
Place.
VII.
The Divine Justice
Page
all
Ground of Human Law
the
.
1. Ex^ddv yap tovto rjpiv virep anavrcov K&XhiOTOV TE Kal dpLOTOV TipOOLpLOV CiV £L7)«
Line
9,
TO)V VOflOJV
“ For this
,
the fairest and most excellent 'preamble to
is just
laws, or to every system of law,” namely,
fteoi r’
eld nal dyaOot dhcrjv rtpcovreg diacpepovrcog dvdp&irov. “ That the Gods not only are but that they are also good, ,
,
and
that,
moreover, they have an esteem for justice beyond
anything that
among men.”
is felt
remarked before,
is
deol here, as
used as a collective term
we have whole
for the
of the Divine Nature, being equivalent to to 'Selov or to ,
daipoviov, and should be rendered in the singular,
would do
full
sentiment
is this
justice to the thought. It is
:
not
enough simply Neither
this the notion of infinite
thing more than the
than mere
N ovg
intelligence.
is it
we
The
the dynamic
enough
knowledge.
to
God
connect is
of Anaxagoras, something
The law
if
to believe in the
God is something more than
Divine existence.
principle of the universe.
with
See Note V.
some-
more
should present him to
us in the far sublimer idea of a Being clothed with the
moral attributes of justice, and of a special, providence.
is
It
scientific theism,
true
system of
please of
or, rather,
moral
this, and not a merely speculative or
which must
legislation.
The Supreme
lie at
We
the foundation of every
may
Intelligence, or
talk as loftily as
The
we
First Cause, or
UNIVERSALITY OF THE BELIEF IN A GOD.
The Great
Idea,
this there is
practical atheism, until along with
is still
it
recognised
Ill
The Lawgiver, The Judge, and The
Moral Governor, the constant and interested Witness of our every
act, the
ground and sanction of the solemn appeal of
the oath.
â&#x20AC;&#x153; That such views (says Cicero) are useful and
necessary,
who will
deny,
when he reflects how many things how much safety there is in
must be confirmed by an oath,
those religious rites that pertain to the solemnization of contracts,
how many
the fear of the Divine punishment keeps
how sacred and holy a thing Society becomes when the Immortal Gods are constantly presented (in the Law) both as judges and witnesses.â&#x20AC;? Cic., De Leg., ii., vii. We would even venture to assert, that back from crime
in short,
;
a gross anthropopathy or anthropomorphism,
such views of the moral
Law,
is
every
way
to
Deity as a
attributes of the
be preferred
which reject them, them the most prominent place.
God
of
most metaphysical
to the
or philosophical notions of the Divine Nature and passibility,
retain
if it
its
im-
or do not even assign to
Mill Universality of the Belief in a God.
Page
Line
10,
10.
f
E/l Xrjvcov re teal (3ap6dpo)v ndvrcov
Compare with
ev ovpzpopalg Tzavroiatg. says, page
4*,
14
line
:
nal oti irdvreg
meant
what Clinias
E XXrjver
re
By Greeks and
f3ap6apot vopi^ovoiv elvcu deovg. barians, the former always
this f/
all
izal
Bar-
mankind, and, there-
God is here declared to be coextensive any man might rely on his own unaided
fore, the belief in a
with the race. reason,
been
who
If
will venture to say that Plato
justified in thus trusting
himself
to
it ?
would not have
And yet,
pro-
found as he was in the investigation of truth beyond the most,
if
not
all,
of his fellow-men, he never hesitates to ap-
UNIVERSALITY OF THE BELIEF IN A GOb.
112
peal to the
common
sentiments, the noival Ivvoiai of man-
kind, and to throw himself upon
which he yielded
to
them
often with a confidence
no speculative argument.
Hence
his
fondness for those ancient myths, under which were concealed, in various forms, the opinions universally held re-
specting the moral government of future retribution.
This was
God and
not, as
the doctrine of
Warburton supposed,
a mere accommodation of himself to those vulgar dogmas, which he did not wish to destroy, because he deemed them useful.
All that has been said
by writers of
and by the ancient authorities on rely, respecting the exoteric
spirit
by any
No man was
we
some of
him
to
it is
this,
misunderstand the philosopher
when he
sion of a traditionary myth,
be-
farther from his true
his most serious discussions.
deeply earnest,
to
parts of the genuine
than Warburton, and, without an appreciation of
his learning only led in
they pretend
and esoteric teaching,
lieve to be wholly unsupported
dialogues of Plato.
whom
that school,
If ever Plato is
gets engaged in the discus-
which he can regard
in
some
measure as standing in the place of primitive revelation, or can find relief from the uncertainties of his
own
specula-
what he could trace as the universal voice of huWe need no stronger proof of this, than is found in the manner in which he closes the long discussion in the Gorgias (in some respects the most perfect and rigidly contions, in
manity.
ducted argument to be found in his works), with the mythical representation of the final this tion,
judgment
;
as though, without
appeal to the authority of ancient and universal tradi-
human reason
prove that a
was not
life
could never freely and satisfactorily
of sensual pleasure, or of worldly ambition,
better than one spent in acts of virtue
vation of philosophy.
He was
the last
man
and the to
culti-
spurn such
aid, in order to gratify that pride of intellect, that would
adopt no conclusions to which
it
had not arrived through
the independent exercise of private judgment.
He knew
:
113
UNIVERSALITY OF THE BEFIEF IN A GOD. too well the direct tendency of
such a
spirit to
darken the
understanding, and to lead to error instead of truth.
We
would
affectation
not,
however, confound
which has sought
thority of our philosopher.
in mind,
this
with a modern
by the au-
to support itself
Plato,
had no Bible, and he did
it
should be ever borne
and ex-
well, therefore,
ercised his highest reason in seeking for a Divine revelation
and nations,
in those universal sentiments of all people
which were as ancient in time as they were extended in space, and which could most truly be said to be, semper, This object of his reverence was ubique, et ah omnibus. something far different from the vox populi of the demagogue,
who
artificial
tion, against
of mankind. its
is
most successful when he can array the
often
and transient feeling of one generation, or one na-
what he would It
was
style the antiquated prejudices
by
rather that vox humanitatis, which,
universality at all
times and in
all
regions, gave evi-
dence of having been once the voice of God remains of a primitive inspiration, however darkened it may have been ,
by human depravity
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; opinions which had not been the prod-
uct of the speculative reason, but which, under the con-
serving influence of a higher principle, had maintained their
ground in spite of the opposition of human depravity, and
human
the consequently superinduced darkness of the
derstanding.
seems <
It
was
this
un-
vox humanitatis to which Hesiod
to allude
prjyr]
d ov rig 7rd[j,nav diroXXvrai, â&#x20AC;&#x2122;
Xaol (prjfi^ovoL
*
fteog
vv rtg eg tl
rjv
nva
iroXXol
teal avrrj.
Works and Days 709. ,
Compare,
also, Cicero,
De
Nat. Deorum,
i.,
43
:
Solus
videt, primum esse Deos, quod in omnium animis eorum notionem impressisset ipsa natura. Quae est enim gens, aut quod genus hominum, quod non habeat sine doc -
enim
trina
anticipationem
quamdam Deorum?
K
2
quae
rpohppig
114
ANTIQUITY OF ATHEISM..
appellatur,
aut lege
Quum enim
&c.
non
opinio constituta, rnaneatque ad
sit
more
instituto aliquo aut
unum omnium
firma consensio, intelligi necesse est esse Deos, quoniam
eorum vel potius innatas cogitationes habemus. De quo autem omnium riatura consentit, id verum esse necesse insitas
And
est.
again,
lib. ii.,
omnium Omnibus enim innatum est et
12: Itaque inter omnes
gentium sententia constat. in
animo quasi insculptum esse Deos. Still
we
more
same
to the
effect,
Tusc. Disp.,
find the best definition of the
Law
Ut porro firmissimum hoc
ever been given.
i.,
30,
where
of Nature that has afferri videtur,
cur Deos esse credamus, quod nulla gens tarn fera,
nemo
omnium
tarn sit immanis, cujus mentem non imbuerit Deorum opinio. Multi de Diis prava sentiunt (id enim vitioso more effici solet), omnes tamen esse vim et nature m Divinam arbitrantur. Nec vero id collocutio hominmn aut consensus efficit non institutis opinio est confirmata, non legibus. Omnis autem in re consensio omnium gentium :
LEX NATURiE
putanda
est.
IX. Antiquity of Atheism.
Page
11,
Line 12. Tiyvovrai 6s del nXecovg
ravT7]v rrjv vooov exovreq.
more or
less
who have had
rj
eXarrovg
â&#x20AC;&#x153; There have always been
this disease of atheism.â&#x20AC;?
been maintained that there were no philosophical
It
has
atheists,
professedly so, before Democritus and Leucippus.
Plato,
however, asserts that some such have existed from a very early period, and in this he tells
is
borne out by Aristotle,
who
us that most of the earliest philosophers, especially
those of the Ionic school, assigned only material causes of the
universe
rag ev vXpg
rdv
:
eldei
irpcorcov (piXoaocftrjadvTOJv oi
uXeloroi
uovov (brjOpoav apxdg elvac iravrov.
j
ANTIQUITY OF ATHEISM Metaph.,
Aristotle,
A
3.
i.,
be made between those
distinction,
who were
however, should
professed atheists, such
who were
as Democritus and Diagoras, and those to
115
inclined
an atheistical mode of philosophizing, while they yet pro-
fessed to be theists, although of an impure and inconsistent
In this latter class the world has always abound-
species. ed.
On
the other hand,
Cudworth,
that,
cient, the first
it is
most conclusively shown by
although this materializing school was an-
philosophy was spiritual and that the sub,
sequent atheism arose from a perversion of the atomical theory, which,
who
of those
favourable
to,
when
truly held,
originated
and according
before Democritus,
it
to the
views
was not only
but one of the firmest supports of a pure theism.
though
Plato, in this passage, styles atheism a disease , as
it
were something unnatural, a corruption, diacpOopa (see page 4, line 18), a departure
from those innate sentiments orirpo-
of the race of
which he and Cicero speak so em-
Arjxpetg,
phatically.
So, also, the apostle treats
from a primitive better
state,
Rom.,
i.,
it
as a degeneracy
He
28.
speaks of
tendency as a darkness of the spirit nai eonorioOrj rj dovverog napdia avr&v, Rom., i., 21 as a reprobate mind this
,
:
adoiapov vovv 28, to which men “ had been given up, because they did not like to retain God in their or reason
,
,
We
knowledge.”
cannot read these Scriptures without
mind a similar sentiment expressed of the old poet Empedocles calling to
in a fragment
:
A eiXog d’ gj GKoroeooa Ah wretch whose soul !
If
tt epi
dark thoughts of
the light that is in thee be
darkness
!
6o^a peprjAev.
God
invade.
darkness how great ,
is that
116
PRINCIPLE OF AUTHORITY.
X. Principle of Authority,
Page
12,
Line
epoi
civ
6.
n elOtj,
nepipEVElg avao/tonQv
ovrog Eire aXXcog e^el, nwOavopEVog napa te rtiv aX “ If Xcjv, teal 6rj icai pdXiora nai napa tov vopoOerov. elre
you will take my advice, you will patiently wait, repeated ly examining whether it is thus or otherwise, learning from others, and therefore, and in a most especial manner, from Notwithstanding the earnest recommendathe Lawgiver.” tion to
most diligent study and inquiry, and
sistency with
in perfect con.
Plato holds that the acceptance of establish-
it,
ed opinions must go before and guide the exercise of vate judgment
pri-
not to supersede or dispense with the ne-
;
cessity of the latter in
its
proper time and place, but be-
cause the state of mind which submits
to
lawful authority
affords the surest guarantee of subsequent mental independ-
ence, instead of that counterfeit
more than a slavish
which
fear of a creed,
is
often nothing
and which loses
true independence, in its premature efforts to avoid
the best and wisest of
all
what
mankind have long regarded
as
established.
The
next sentence contains a thought of the highest
practical importance
iv de
M
rovrcp rep XP° V(? ToXpr}cyjg nepl 'deovg p7]dev aaEdrjoai, “ but during this, period see
to
it
That
that is,
:
di)
you venture upon nothing impious or unholy.” obligation must be revered, and pious
religious
emotions cherished, before the young soul can reason about
them, and there a right to
is
no period, however
remain atheists
until
we
short, that
we have
are able to prove
by
in-
duction the existence of a God.
He who
reason by following
submission to authority
,
its first dictate,
which God himself has those
who have been
behind him in
all
thus honours
established, will doubtless leave
taught to pursue a different course, far
the severer and more abstruse depart.
DEGREES OF ATHEISM.
117
ments of philosophy and theology. Throughout this whole treatise, it should be borne in mind that vofXQOsrrjg means rather the ancient founder of a state or of a religion, than
a temporary or subordinate magistrate of the Lawgiver,’’ as one great
so that “ to learn
;
consult with deference and respect,
is to
means of forming
right opinions, the civil
religious constitution of the state in
which we may be
and
born.
XI.
Degrees of Atheism
.
—
Peculiarity of Plato's Style.
Page 12, Line 13. Tlavranaoi uiv ovv &c. The author now proceeds to the discussion of speculative and j
practical atheism in
stated 1st.
2d.
its
three degrees,
,
which may be thus
:
An absolute The opinion
denial of the existence of a Deity. that, if a
Deity
exists,
he does not con-
cern himself about us, or in other words, the denial of a Providence. 3d.
A
sentiment clearly allied to the second
Deity exists, and
if
;
that if a
he even exercises a physical care or
providence over the world regarded as a physical produc-
he
tion, still
is
in a great measure, if not wholly, indifferent
to
moral conduct, and
it
be ever excited,
is
that, therefore, his displeasure,
nor by an atonement that
God himself has
should
by repentance,
easily appeased, not
provided, but by
self-imposed votive offerings and superstitious services
We ed
expect a direct argument on the
first
head, conduct-
manner by an appeal to evidences of design phenomena around us. This mode of proceeding is
in the usual
in the
adopted in the discourses recorded in the Memorabilia, and there
is,
treatise
also,
De
an admirable specimen of
Natura Deorum.
Such a
it
in Cicero’s
line of argument,
however, although quite a favourite with modern theolo-
118
DEGREES OF ATHEISM.
gians,
was
which would first suggest itself to the more abstruse speculation, and one which
not that
ancient mind, but a
had a more intimate first
relation to the great question about the
origin of things, the
whether
life
and motion
in matter,
be regarded as eternal, or as having had a dis-
to
tinct origination
from some older essence.
fully believe, is the itself to
first
way in which the
This, also,
subject
would present
such a mind as Socrates, notwithstanding
erally considered that the
plain
truth,
which he appears
gen-
more in accord-
is
than the metaphysical character in
in the Dialogues of Plato.
mode adopted here by
this is the
it is
and practical mode of
reasoning ascribed to him by Xenophon
ance with the
we
At
all
events,
who
the Athenian,
un-
doubtedly represents Socrates, and he also takes a very peculiar method of introducing of his reasoning on the
it.
In the
commencement
head, he takes his hearers by
first
by suddenly suggesting that they had unawares fallen upon the discussion of a most important principle, which deserved to be disposed of before going on with those more popular views which had just been mentioned. surprise,
It
has, at
the appearance of being accidental, but one
first,
familiarly acquainted with the Platonic
method
will rec-
ognise here the usual ironical resource the author employs
when he wishes usually subtle
to enter
of a question in relation to
dialogue
maintained.
is
upon a discussion more than
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; namely, the apparently undesigned it
from the one with
The
eliciting
whom
the
chief speaker seems, or af-
remember something essential to the argufects, suddenly ment, and which they were in danger of having entirely forgotten, although it is evident that it is the main thing to
which has been kept standing
its
amples of
in
view from the beginning, notwith-
seeming incidental introduction.
this
may
be found in the Protagoras, Republic,
and Theaetetus, especially the last. Platonic, that
it
may
Frequent ex-
It is,
in fact, so purely
be regarded as one of the best signs,
X
ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. as
far, at least,
as the style
is
concerned, by which
119
we may
distinguish a genuine from a spurious dialogue.
XII.
Ancient Doctrine of the Four Elements
Page is
13,
Line
Hvp
15.
feed
v6cop uai yr\v
.
teal
aspa
generally assumed that in the use of these terms
It
.
all
the
ancient philosophers meant four simple, indestructible, and
incomposite elements
;
being the primordia or apyal by the ,
union or composition of which
Hence many
stituted.
,
other things were con-
all
a superficial sneer
by popular
turers at the ignorance of the ancients in respect to
and the number of simple substances.
istry
the matter, however,
is far
lec-
chem-
This view of
from being correct.
Some,
it
is
maintained the above doctrine nearly in the terms
true,
which we have employed, and as it would be stated by a modern chemist. Among these, if we understand Aristotle aright, was Empedocles. ’EpnsdorcXrjg psv yap ra psv gcoparircd rsooapa rd 6s ndvra perd tw v klvovvtcov ef tov ,
,
aptdpov
Aristotle,
.
De Gen.
et Corrup.,
i.,
1.
moving powers here are intended his poetical tions of Love and Discord, ’'Epog and *E peg, would be styled
in the language of
By
the two
personificaor, as
modern science,
they
Attrac-
and Repulsion, which, together with the four elements,
tion
made
the
six.
Anaxagoras, Leucippus, and Democritus maintained
number
that the elements
Kptrog
pag
.
were
infinite,
not only in number, but in
’A va^ayopag 6s dnsipa, nal Asyrannog, ual Arjpo-
form.
<
of original principles or primordia to be
*
ravra 6s
The
arcstpa uai to
doctrine
which the
tt
rjOog sivat ual
first
ing the homoeomerice, or similar parts, totle
rag pop -
of these held respectis
well known.
Aris-
represents him, on this subject, as in every respect the
direct opposite of
Empedocles.
’E vavrloyg 6s fyaivoviai
120 ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. XeyovTeg
nepl kva^ayopav rolg nepl ^pnedonXea.
ol
'O
'
pev yap
§t\gl nvp nal vdcjp teal aepa teal yr\v OTOi%eia tegGapa nal dnXd elvat paXXov fj oapna teal ogtovv nal ra ,
roiavra tcjv opotopepebv
ravra pev anXa nal Groix^la,
6 de
•
nvp nal aepa Gvvdera De Gen., &c., i., 1. fire, and water, and air, and earth elements, and more simple than flesh and bone, and
yrjv de teal
.
“ For the latter says that are four
others of the liomceomerice while the former contends that ,
these are simple elements, but that earth, and
See
are compounds.’’
ruption,
lib. i.,
Aristotle,
where there
is
De
air,
and
fire
Generatione et Cor-
a long, but not very clear
account of some of the ancient opinions on this subject.
Compare,
also, lib.
3.
iii.,
we
In general, however,
when they used
are quite satisfied that, even
the term <7TO£%ehz, most of the ancient
had
writers on physics
in
view elemental
states of bodies,
without reference to their composition, rather than simple substances or elements in the sense in which modern chemistry
would define the term
— that
is,
as substances incapable
of being changed, or of passing one into the other from a
change of that
state.
It
was
Parmenides held
in this sense of elemental states
nvp and
to two,
yrjv, or the solid
and
the cetliereal regarding the fluid and the aerial as only mix,
ed modifications pevidrjg
nvp nal
:
ol de
yrjv ,
olov aepa nal vdcop.
evdvg dvo noiovvTeg,
ra pera^v plypara Arist.,
De
tjoirep Jlap-
tcolovgl tovtcjv
Gen., &c.,
ii.,
,
In like
3.
manner, Aristotle himself declares that they are not simple substances as actually found in nature, but ever compound-
ed of one another, although in their ultimate to regard
them as pure
enaoTOV tcov Lib.
At
ii.,
:
elprjpevcov,
ovn egti de to
rrvp,
state
he seems
nal 6
anXovv, dXXa pucTOV,
afjp, n.
r.
nal
X
3.
all events,
we have no
doubt, from several very de
cided passages, as to the manner in which these terms are
employed by
Plato,
whatever meaning
may
be attached to
— ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. them
in the sentence at the
121
head of these remarks, as the
He was
supposed language of the atheistical philosophers.
so far from regarding them as strictly elements {aroix^Za)
modern chemical, or even ancient Greek sense of the word, that he would not even rank them in that second See the stage of combination which he styles ovXXadrj. in the
Timaeus, 48, B.
T i)v
:
6e rrpd rrjg ovpavov yeveceog irvpog
vdarog re nai y r\g (pvacv $ eareov nal ra ,
rovrcdv
irpo
n ad?].
nvp 6 n ixore eon, real enaorov avrtiv, Xeyopev apx&g, avra TtOepevoi croixela rov navrog Trpoo-
Nvv yap
cjg eldooi
•
rjrcov
“We
avrolg ovd
’
sv
(hg
2TAAABH2
elded
must contemplate the nature of
earth, before the generation of the
though
we spoke
each one of the
to
those
rest,
as the elements
(
we
well
water,
Heavens
for
;
knew what
talk of principles,
all
now, as and
of
the
not to be likenIt
very clear
is
likewise, from other passages, that Plato views
elements, but as elementary states
and
fire is,
letters
,
when they ought
to the species of the syllable.”
air,
and regard them
aroix £ Za also used for the
alphabet) of the universe,
ed even
who
fire,
aTTetfcaadrjvac.
them not as
Karaordoeig ), in which (
bodies must exist, however varied in other respects
their compositions
;
namely, as
solid, fluid,
gas or that fourth ,
condition which the ancients generally denoted by the term fire
which modern chemistry would of imponderable agents. These are heat
(nvp), but
class
electric,
,
style the light,
the
the galvanic, and the magnetic influence, which, al-
though having
five different
names, are coming
to
be more
and more regarded by our most scientific men as only modifications of one and the same principle. In other words, earth (y^), as used by Plato and many others of the Greek
was simply their scientific term for solid (to which it is sometimes equivalent), whether the substance was earth, or wood, or precious stones, v6o)p for liquid or fluid &c., and nvp for all that modification more subtle than air, of which they had some tolerably clear
philosophers, arepeov, to
,
L
;
122
ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS.
views, as the seat of higher agencies than were usually cognizable by the senses, and of which they regarded the visible lire as the lowest representative form.
Whoever wishes
to
see the views of Plato on these sub-
more fully stated may consult that portion of the Timaeus, where he treats at great length of the primary
jects
constitution of bodies, details of its
and which, although erroneous in the
numerical ratios (as every a priori or theo-
retical attempt of the
kind must be), contains evidently the
germ of the modern chemical theory of definite 'proportions These four states or naraoraGSig with all other intervening compound modifications, were, in fact, regarded but as varied manifestations of one simple essence (vXrj), which .
,
receives (
,
forms, itself having no form, and is therefore
all
ayvodorov ) unknown and incapable of being
all
physical knowledge
is
known
:
since
possible only in respect to those
things which have
number and Xoyog, ratio or reason and therefore elements, which are strictly such, are in their very nature ak oya, or incapable of being objects of scientific
contemplation, except in their binary or trinary com-
binations.
As he
says in the Thesetetus, 202, B.,
ovro.) dr)
rd psv GTOix^ia aXoya teal ayvcoora elvai oXadryrd ds rag 6s GvXXabag yvoGrag rs nal prjrag nal dXrjOsl do^rj do%,
,
aGrdg. All modifications of this simple essence
phenomena
were ( (paivopsva )
or appearances, having nothing absolute except
in the idea manifested
by them, no
indestructible material
nature of their own, but continually passing into and out of
each other,
or, in
other words, ever becoming (yiyvopeva
not yev7]Gopeva), instead of absolutely being ( ovra ) in them-
Thus, in the
selves distinct and imperishable substances.
Timaeus, 49, C.
Uptirov psv o
:
dr)
vvv vdoop (bvopdnapsv ,
&g donovpsv, Xtdovg nal yrjv TirNOMENON optipsv rrjnopsvov d’ av teal dtanpivopsvov ravrov rovro rcvevpa nal aspa (ovynavOevra ds tov aspa nal tt vp) ava -
Tcrjyvvpevov, •
,
•
,
ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS.
’IAEAN
iraXcv de avynpiOev nal naraadeadev, eig
avOig depog nvp
*
peov vdojp
re ovtg) diadidovra eig dXXrjXa, “ For, in the
condensed,
*
cog tpaiverat , tt)v
what we
yeveaiv.
water ( fluid ), when behold becoming earth (or solid). Again, place,
first
we
The
call
we
behold this same thing becoming
air (gas),
heated or being burned together
dissolved and separated, air [or gas).
paXXov gvpmXovpenal XWovg avOig nvnXov
in 6i tovtov etl
•
i^vdarog de, yr\v
*
amov
nal naXiv aepa %vviovra nal nvnvovpevov,
vefpog nal opi'xXrjv vcov,
re
123
becomes nvp, and nvp more closely united and condensed again having its by cold (naraadeadev), departs back again into the idea of (if
ovynavOevra
be a right reading ),
particles
Again,
air.
we
see the
air,
when condensed, becoming cloud
or vapour, and from them, when
still
more compressed,
Finally, from water
converted into flowing water.
we
be-
hold again earth or solids, thus in a circle appearing successively to give birth or generation to each other.”
Of rr\v
the
unknown elementary
vXr]
he thus speaks
rov yeyovorog bparov nal navrog aiaOrjrov
:
did
MHTEPA
nal vnodo%f)v, prjre yrjv, prjre aepa, prjre nvp, prjre vdcop Xeycopev, prjre baa in rovrcov , urjre
it;
cbv
ravra yeyovev
•
j
aXX* aoparov eldog
vov de anopebrara
n nal
nr]
ap,opcpov,
navde^ig p^eraXapda^ .
rov vorjrov nal dvaaXcororarov avro
Xeyovreg, ov 'ipevaopeOa.
“ But as for the mother and re-
cipient of everything
which becomes an object ©f
sensation, let us call
it
fluid,
neither solid, nor
air,
sight and
nor
fire,
nor
nor anything which springs from these, nor anything
from which these are (directly or immediately) generated, but the invisible species, having no form of ble of receiving
which partakes ble,
and that
it
all.
in is
we
say that
some most obscure way most
should not mistake.” is
Should
difficult to
not confined to the sense of sight, but
which
is
it
is
yet capa-
something
of the intelligi-
we The term aoparog
be apprehended,
Timgeus, 51, A.
erally for all that region
itself,
is
employed gen-
beyond the sphere of
:
124 ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. sensation, or does not
of the senses.
Sometimes, in
for the intelligible ,
seem
not
to
come under
and
is
the cognizance of any
Platonic import,
its
it
is
used
equivalent to vorjrov but that does ,
There
be the case here.
is,
no doubt, an
allu-
sion in the above to Thales and Anaximenes, the former of
whom
held that water, and the
mental principle, or mother of
The Greek
latter that air,
was
this ele-
all things.
philosophers and poets generally regarded
nvp as a modification of matter more
subtle than air,
and
nearer to that simple elementary substance or vXr] which
was
the basis of
them
Modern chemistry has
all.
experi-
mentally developed this a priori idea of the ancient mind, in the discovery of that class of agents styled impondera-
Most abundant proof could be given, that by this term 7n)p was not meant merely the element, as commonly understood, which goes by that name (although this was inble.
cluded), any
more than by the term
y?/,
when thus
philosoph-
was intended only the earthy matter beneath our feet. Another name for this fourth modification was aWrjp. Some, indeed, made this a higher form than tti;p, ically used,
as the author of the treatise Aristotle
ev TTVpl
,
:
De Mundo once ascribed to vdan vdarog ev aepi aepog
Xeyoj de yr\g pev ev
7rvpdg
de ev aiOepc
general, however, all
who
,
,
,
Ch.
k. t. A.
iii.,
In
p. 143.
held to but four modifications
regarded the two last mentioned as one and the same.
The
was supposed to space above the atmosphere, although at the same
peculiar region of the aether or fourth state
be
all
of
time interpenetrating and diffused through
There seems
to
all
below
it.
be an allusion to this in iEsch., Prom.
Vine., 1090 d)
aWrjp kolvov
ndvrcov
(j)dog elXicocjv,
where the poet clearly regards it as the source of vision, and seems to have held respecting it something like the modern undulating theory of light. At least, we can make
ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS.
125
no other sense of elXcaaov, which, in connexion with
alOfjp
and
suggests at once to the
(j)dog ,
mind
that
waving
or en-
larging spiral motion that the air undergoes in the propagation of sound,
posed
and which,
theory referred
in the
sup-
whose vibrations phenomena of vision. In
to take place in that universal fluid
or undulations give rise to the
respect to the antiquity of this opinion, there
account of
its
length,
we
a remarka-
is
ble passage in Aristotle’s Meteorologica, lib.
“We
to, is
i.,
On
c. 3.
give only a very concise version.
have already (he says) spoken respecting the
how
element, what power
it
verse above us
of that substance
rog).
And
seems
to
is full
hath, and
this opinion is not
(
first
whole uni-
that the
euecvov rov ocbpa-
only entertained by us, but
have been a very ancient supposition, and
been held by the primitive men
have
to
which is called aether received of old the appellation which Anaxagoras seems to me to have regarded as the same with the fire. For he says that all the upper regions are filled with fire (rd avo nXrjprj irvpog elvai ), and yet he calls the same power, or the influence which pervaded that portion of And in this he was right for that subspace, the aether. stance which remains forever unchanged men very naturally suppose to be a God, and Divine in its nature (to yap ;
for that
;
’AEI c&pa
0EON
dpa re 0EION,
ac.
t. A.),
and they ac-
name
cordingly defined such a substance by the
(equivalent to del deog, or del decor), as though identity
say
,
with anything that pertains
that not once, or twice, or a
infinite repetitions, the
dvativnXelv )
((
etymology
few
to us.
among men
We
alOfjp
had no
Thus must we
times, hut with almost
same opinions come round .”
it
think
little
in a circle
of Aristotle’
of alOfjp in this passage, but if this doctrine of
the universal aether was, as he says, so ancient, and
was held
to
be the cause of light and vision,
it
is
if it
certainly
a remarkable confirmation of the closing sentiment, that
his same opinion should now be becoming everywhere a L 2
ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS.
126
with our most scientific men, especially
favourite
modem
wits had for so long a time
when
made themselves merry
with what they styled the ancient absurdities respecting a
plenum and a vacuum. There is no doubt that
Aristotle himself held light to be
an undulating motion in a
sensorium of
fluid affecting the
vision, as the undulations of the air affect that of the ear.
This
fluid
fects
it,
he
styles to diacjjaveg,
olov rov aepa as the air ,
bvrog, mvelrai to aloOrjrrjpiov
•
ArjpdfcpiTog, oiopevog , el yevoiTO
av aKptdu)g,
“ But
sensorium
affected
is
supposition, that
we
if all
by
for
;
vno tovtov
;
tie
af-
ovvexovg
ov yap icaXtig tovto /ley ei
nevov to peTa^v, opaodac
ev tgj ovpav (p ehj, tovto yap
el pvpprji;
teal
eoTiv advvaTOv.
and says that colour
this fluid being continuous the
Democritus
is
not right in the
the intervening space
were a vacuum,
might see so sharply as to discover an ant in the sky.
This, however,
dium,” &c.
is
impossible without an intervening me-
Aristot.,
De Anima,
ii.,
7.
In the Pantheistic Orphic hymn, quoted by the author
De Mundo, and by the scholiast on Plato, De 716, A., to which we have already referred, the
of the treatise Leg.,
iv.,
sether is represented as the seat of the
rather, as the
vovg de gj drj
oi
d^evdrjg paoiXrjiog atyOiTog
navTa nXvec aai
Whether
Divine
Divine or universal sensorium
this
intellect, or,
:
’AIOHP
(ppa^eTat.
fragment be spurious or not,
tionably of a very respectable antiquity.
We
it
is
unques-
have a simi-
lar sentiment, although, in a style less pantheistic, in that
common Homeric
line,
Zev avdiOTe, peyiOTe ,
KeXaivecfreg
and which, although immeasurably to call to
mind the
’AI0EPI NAIS2N,
inferior,
Scriptural declarations,
eth in light inaccessible
as with a garment.
— Thou
The
can hardly
Who
fail
alone dwell-
coverest thyself with light
sublimity of this
is
heightened
;
ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. by the thought that latory aether
The Greek
universal undu-
light, or, rather, the
which causes the
sensation,
127
is itself invisible.
conception has a tinge of pantheism, and of the
The Hebrew, besides its represents God as separated from
mundi
doctrine of the anima
inexpressible sublimity,
.
the universe and veiled in thick darkness tion of that
very substance, which
knowledge
to
by the
interven-
the cause of light and
is
every portion of the worlds he has created.
The Orphic and Homeric
expressions,
it
is
not absurd to
suppose, arose from perversions of that purer idea which
we
find in the Bible.
met with of
its
Similar language
in the tragic poets,
is
frequently .to be
and sometimes a knowledge
Orphic application and origin
is
absolutely necessary
which would be otherwise most As when Sophocles, in one of the sublimest
in illustrating passages
obscure.
choral odes in the (Edipus Tyrannus, speaking of the antiquity of
Law, represents
it
as born of the heavenly tether,
ovpaviav
aldepa
renvoodevreg, or, in other
words, the offspring of that universal sensorium
or Divine Noi;^, which, according to the Orphic
hath
its
hymn,
From this became one of the names
peculiar dwelling-place in the aether.
manner of employing the term,
it
of Jove himself, being regarded as his peculiar province in the division of Saturn’s kingdom, as to Juno
was
allotted
the air or lower atmosphere, and to Neptune the water.
’A rjp and aiOrjp are sometimes confounded by the poets, although the distinction between them
is,
’A rjp
respiratory , and of the
lowest animal
higher of the
life
in the
life
;
Hence, as the one
is
from atOco (old root
same manner
as the
tol-
aldrjp of -the
of sensation, and even of the intellect
spirit.
breathe, the other is hot
is
on the whole,
regarded as the source of
erably well observed.
first
from
— the
aco,
ato)), to
life
arjpi,
burn
,
to
to be
expression of the idea
ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS.
128 of
life (£aco,
t$v)
was most
naturally associated with the
appearance of self-motion in fermentation or (See page 27, note 4, on the words
we
and
cannot help thinking that there
is
ebullition.
Hence
^eco.)
some connexion
be-
tween aWfjp, aiQo), and the verb atoOopcu aloOdvopai. On this matter, some of the old poets and materializing philoso,
may have
phers
now
indulged in views similar to what are
held by not a few
modem
savans, respecting the influence
of an aethereal magnetic or galvanic fluid in the production
Hence
of motion, sensation, and even thought.
Aristoph-
anes, in the Clouds, 570, styles the aether fiioOpetipova 5
The
:
Aidspa ospvoraTov flioOpsppova ndvrcjv.
scholiast thinks that
it
is
here used for
The
arjp.
higher sense, however, best accords with the term oepvo-
rarov and other expressions of
to lay aside his buffoonery, is the
chooses of
all
the Grecian poets, although
terializing pantheism.
Orphic
who, when he
this writer,
most philosophical
much
inclined to a
ma-
In another place, in the style of the
hymn and Homer, he
calls
the dwelling-place of
it
Jove, "Ojuvvpi
TOtvvv aWep’ olnrjcnv Aiog.
Thesmoph ., 279.
A Wrjp
or nvp, on the one hand, and yrj on the other, be-
ing the two extremes, are frequently spoken of together as the cogenerating causes, or male and female parents of
material existences. T
£2
As
Prom. Vinct., 88
in .ZEsch.,
all
:
dlog cdOrjp
—
TTapprjTop re yrj. \ fTOr A p -4
v* Oif \ So, also, in a fragment of Euripides, from the drama of v
j?
\fj-
pjy
*>:'*>*
T)
ft,
*
?
*
\
'v
'
[
;
*
>
’
*/•
Chrysippus,
yala peyiorrj nal
On
A Log
like grounds, in the dissolution
objects,
this
semi-materializing
alfffjp.
and death of animate
philosophy
and poetry
taught that the more refined or spiritual parts returned to
:
:
:
ANCIENT DOCTRINE OF THE FOUR ELEMENTS. which they derived
the higher element from
their origin,
The
while the denser returned to the earth (spiritus)
ascended
to
its
kindred
129
aidrjp. the
Trvsvpa
fluids
and
bosom of their mother yala, Euripides which so strongly calls to mind
grosser matter sank into the as in the line of
Ecclesiastes,
xii.,
7
’E dear’
oOev
rjdrj y%j naXvcjiOrjvai VEKpovg, 6’ ercaorov slg to dcbinsro
kvravO* aTTEXOelv
to otipa 6
’
slg
•
TINETMA
pev
’AI0EPA
Trpog
THN. Supplices , 533.
Compare
Orestes, 1085, and Helena, 1023: 6 vovg
TG)V KdTOaVOVTCJV
pEV OV yVGjpTJV ,
aOdvcLTOV Eig aOavaTOV
Compare,
also, the line of the
from Stobseus, 108, in which the English
Church
d’
E%El
AI0EP’ EpnEouv. fragment of the Hypsipyle
we have
burial service
;
the very language of
earth to earth
—dust
to
dust
axOovTai (3pOToi elg yrjv (j)ipovTEg yv\v.
In the case of the more gross and animal,
it
was supposed
nvsvpa being borne down by the attraction and weight of the earthy and sensual, and being unable to extricate itself from it, sank into still lower forms, until purified and set free by the penetrating and cleansing fires of that the
Hades.
We
,
See the Phsedon, 81, D.
cannot conclude this long and yet, as
we
trust,
not
altogether irrelevant excursus, without giving an extract
from a fragment of Euripides, in which there tifully
is
most beau-
expressed this departure of the elements to their
native homes, and
which we cannot help thinking
genuine, notwithstanding
Valckenaer
it
is
to
strongly controverted
be
by
’
130 ATHEISTICAL DOCTRINE OF 6
Xciipei
pvvr
’
yalav Ta
£$•
(
rd
0776(76),
5
(pVGig^
yatag
/i£T eu d’ a7r’
,
~VXV> AND T ^X V7\'
aiOepiov
fiXaoTOvra yovrjg elg ovpaviov iroXov fjXOe iraXiv
•
tgjv ycyvopevcov
diaKpcvopevov d
dAAo j
•
ovdev
i9 vtjgicec d’
aXkov
irpog
uopfpfjv Idlav airsdsi^ev.
Valckenaer Dlairib. in Eurip
Frag.
,
XIII. Atheistical Doctrine of (f>vGLg,rv^ 9
Page
Line
13,
16.
are is,
by nature and chance these
first
navra
<I>i;(7£6
rex v XI de ovdev tovtcjv. ,
four states,
re^v?].
elvat teal
They say
44
and
rvxv
(paGt*
that all these things
none of them by art ” That namely, 7ri;p, a??p, &c., were the
production of rvx 7] and <pvGig, whatever meaning they might
have attached
to these
terms
:
the second stage,
compounded bodies
sulted in the larger
which
re-
(arising from the
composition of these four elements, or from their mixed combinations, existence),
TvxV
when
considered as states or conditions of
was regarded
as chiefly the
work
of rvx'd-
d£ (pepopeva r y ryg dvvapecog EnaGra ercaGrcov, y
%vpiT£7TT(OKEV
apporrovra
Zypa irpog vypd,
it.
t. X.
ol/tELOjg
reference
is
olitELug 7T6)g;
its
influence
which belonged
made
in
that
is,
deppa
'ipvxpolg ,
fj
tvx 7] was the was modified by
In this department
presiding power, although those adaptations
iroog,
which the above expression, apporrovra although the original impulses and to (pvGtg ,
and
to
motions were the result of chance, a (pvGtg or natural necessity directed
after at
by
everything to
its
most
fitting place, so that,
a plenum vacuum warm was neutralized
long wanderings in this wide domain of
length found cold,
its
rest in a
convex adapted
itself to
,
concave, hard things found
ATHEISTICAL DOCTRINE OF
(ftvOLg^ TV%7),
AND
131
their repose in soft, influences constantly tending to
an equality,
shape and universe
at last
(pvoeutg
avrov
fittings ,
after
:
oitcetoxg
all
sides
bodies to a spherical
motion, until finally in this
to a circular
was formed
many
brought
on
way
uoopog apporrcov rag dvvapeig
nog
a
rr\g
these various adaptations or
;
they had once happened
to take place, be-
coming more and more stable by nature (cbvotg), and a certain habit (e%tg), which everything had a tendency to main-
when once assumed.
tain
After this
immense region
of cjxvotg and
small province of re^yr], or art which ,
to
grow out of
first
[(pveoQai )
(
according
;
art or
rex vr]
is
and
a
of progress in
God
all its
itself
the
supposed
two
to the
dogma, that mind, of which
to the atheistic is
the last production of the
generative power of the universe. trine
rvx7! came
be long posterior
to
the offspring,
was
Here we have the
consistency; and
why
doc-
might not
be the last result or consummation of this ascending
scale, instead of being the beginning, as
he
is
in that a
which commences with the idea of the perfect, to the lower and the imperfect ? see not how, even on this scheme most ingenious as
priori view,
and from thence descends
We it is,
the atheist can expect to find relief from his torment-
ing theophobia, or escape that object of his greatest dread,
a superhuman being, whether he styles him a
God
or a
Daemon. If nature, (jxvotg
and
rvx'f],
have thus,
lower productions on our earth, of
man
whatever else they
(or
ter in us
which
wills,
finally
may
after
ages spent in
worked out the
soul
style that peculiar mat-
and thinks, and
feels),
why may
not
these agencies, during the long cycles of eternity, and in the infinitude of space, have given birth to a being excelling
much as we surpass the lowest And what security have they as to
us in power as vegetation
?
character, or
what grounds
for
possess any moral character at
orders of his moral
supposing that he would
all.
The same
progressive
132 ATHEISTICAL DOCTRINE OF
(jiVOC^TV^tjy
AND
influences which, on our narrow scale, have called into being
mammoth
ichthyosauri and megatheria and ,
,
as sometimes
have given
now
birth,
affright us
by
their
on the immense
exposed
God
or
relics,
may
field of the universe, to
Gorgons, Hydras, and Chimaeras to a
monsters, such
dire,
Gods of a more horrid nature than ever crossed
the imagination of the Gnostic, or than ever figured in the
wildest legends of Thibet or Hindostan.
Indeed,
we have
every reason to believe that this monstrous Hindoo system, which should be styled a theogony rather than a theology, sprang in this very manner from an ancient atheism, which had been the offspring of a still earlier pantheism. It seems evidently
recognise
to
atheists talked about,
such an older (pvaig as Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
and the history of
its
Gods
is
only a
history of successive generations from this primeval nature,
each of a more horrid species than
We
he takes shelter in that a necting with
it
from that its
man
last
unless
God which comes
minds, inseparably con-
But, then, this
is
a very different being
production of nature, which can never rise
parent, or possess
Should they
being,
own
this,
the notion of goodness, and of infinite perfec-
tion of every kind.
butes.
predecessor.
priori idea of
from the necessities of our
above
its
say the atheist has no security against
any other than physical
startle at the idea of
attri-
such a superhu-
whose malevolence might be commensurate
with his power, and assert that ble, the declaration
ing to those ideas
it is
improbable or impossi-
proceeds only from an instinctive revert-
which belong
to a directly opposite sys-
commencing with the moral instead of the natural, and making the necessary idea of God the ground of all truth.
tem,
We
are confined to so minute a portion of the universe,
that
no a posteriori induction, aside from any such neces-
sary a priori idea, or some special revelation, can ever
produce a firm conviction or a confiding benevolence.
trust in the
Divine
)
ATHEISTICAL DOCTRINE OF
TU%?7,
AND
tÂŁ%V7].
133
Neither has the atheist any security against a Hades or
unseen world, it
is
a fact,
filled
with the most ghastly apparitions
many
self a skeptic, that
of this
unhappy
;
who was
as has been remarked by Bayle,
him-
have had
class
most horrid fears of ghosts and hobgoblins.
and
Their great
champion Hobbes furnishes a noted example of this. Some might regard it as an inconsistency, and yet their system can allege nothing against the position that such appearances are not the mere fictions of a diseased imagination, but have a real existence in rerum natura.
Who
can as-
sign any bounds to the working of (pvag and
rvx7
The own
even be sure that he
atheist cannot
Eternity
hypothesis, live again. in reference to
cept what
is
it,
is
may
very long, and viewed
everything ceases to be improbable, ex-
inconsistent with the attributes of an a priori
God.
But remove
posing
that, in the
atoms which
this idea,
may
combinations,
having the same
and what hinders us from sup-
endless changes of matter, the same
now form
the atheistâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s body, and give rise to
the energies of his soul,
may
again
come
recreate a brain with the
figure, site,
an existence, in
all
into the
same
same
particles,
and order, and, of course, pro-
ducing the same thoughts and sensations,
new
] ?
on his
not,
respects identical,
or, in short, re-
which may
misery of the
same awful
anticipations for the hopeless
past,
rec-
and can only indulge the
ollect all the
and godless
future.
Plato seems to have already had in mind a class of semi-
we have been
theists or semi-atheists,
such as
who might
kind of Deity younger than Nature,
believe in a
considering,
and yet possessed of vast power and intelligence. alluding to the atheists,
the
common
opinion that astronomers must be
because they are so
phenomena
of the
After
in the habit of resolving all
Heavens
into necessities
(
avayuaig
and natural laws, he mentions a class who acknowledged the existence of
mind
in the motions of the celestial bodies
M
V
.
134 ATHEISTICAL DOCTRINE OF
who
but
(^VOtg^ F^XVi
AND
TE^VTj
strangely regarded this mind as itself the result,
and not the author of Nature
Aeyovol nveg cog vovg elr\ 6 ndvd boa hut' ovpavov ol 6s avrol ird?uv apapravovreg 'i/jvx^g (pvoecjg, on npeodvrepov elrj oupdruv, diaK£KOG[i7]KG)g
:
’
•
StavorjOevreg de cbg vecjrepov airavO
’
,
rpe'ipav irdhcv,
say that
But, then, these
nature of soul, in that
and supposing upset
einslv eirog avek. t. A.
Nous, or Mind, that orders
it is
Heavens.
b)g
kavrovg 6e noXv paXXov9
it
all things,
things appear to
is
it
all
same persons,
older than bodies (or matter),
and especially themselves.
them
to
be
Some
things in the
erring as to the
be younger, they again, as
to
“
full
merely of
we may For
earth,
all
say,
these
and stones,
and other inanimate bodies, dividing among themselves
(or
which they assign) the causes of the universe. This is what has produced so many atheistic impieties, and so many difficulties in the treatment of these matters. Hence, also, have come those abusive charges which the poets to
have made against philosophers, comparing their declara-
and dogmas
tions
Legibus,
xii.,
confused yelping of dogs.”
to the
967, A.
There
is
be drawn from this passage. that
eternal
fore
to
Plato evidently maintains
no one can be a consistent theist who does not hold
that spirit is older than matter. is
De
one important inference
would be
The
position that matter
in direct opposition to this,
and there-
he could not himself have maintained that doctrine,
whatever appearance of
it
there
may
be in some obscure
See this more fully examined, Note L., on the ancient dogma, De nihilo nihil Jit. On this subject of tvx an ^ cf>votg compare Aristotle, Physic. Ausc.,
passages in the Timseus.
,
lib. ii.
,
ch. 4.
RELIGION AND LAW, NOT BY NATURE, BUT BY ART. 135
XIV. Atheistical Doctrine that
Law and
Religion were not by
Na-
ture, but by Art.
Page ov
14,
Line
10.
Ovtu This
(pvoei, tsxvxi 6s.
6s is
vopodsotav ndoav
teal rrjv
,
simply mentioned as one of
the inferences from their doctrine, namely, “ that legislation or law
was
not by nature, but by art.”
It
was, however, just
deemed of the most dangerous conwhich he directs all the strength of
the inference that Plato
sequence, and against
his reasoning, both here
Compare
logues.
and
many other
in
parts of his dia-
the Gorgias, and especially that long
argument of Callicles (482, C.), in which he advances this same doctrine, namely, that law, and right (to 6Uaiov ), and are
which
equivalent to
is
human
not by nature, but by
religion
what the
appointment,
atheist here is
supposed
to
mean by ts^vt]^ as something junior and posterior to nature d)£ rd noXXa de ravra svavrla dXXfXoig sgtlv tj ts (f>vcug :
,
teal 6 vdfiog, k. t.
a doctrine
It is
Gorgias, 483, A.
X.
which in
ages has had
all
its
advocates,
and in modern times has been specially revived by Hobbes and his followers. all
interest.
its
this inference that gives
It is
As a
atheism
speculative tenet for the intellect
would have no charms even
mind.
merely,
it
If this
creed be true, then not only religion, but also
for the darkest
morality, and all right views of law, are without tion either in
all
any founda-
God, or in any nature of things proceeding all implying a moral sanction
from him, or in any nature at
and which necessarily suggests the idea of something and higher, and stronger than case, the offspring of
only a
human
origin
;
T s^vt], Mind
;
or, in
Plato ascribes to the atheist, vorspav sk
That
are is,
all,
in that
they have
since, in this creed, Art is the result
of the junior production,
0NHTHN
They
itself.
or Art.
older,
ONHTS2N.
They
the language
etc
tovtwv
which
yevofisvrjv
can, therefore, have only
:
136 RELIGION AND LAW, NOT BY NATURE, BUT BY ART.
human
sanctions, and
depraved
it
is this
atheism
soul, gives
all its
were concerned,
tellect alone
conclusion which, to the
it
value, while, if the in-
would shrink from
from the very “ blackness of darkness”
The
ancient atheists
saw
itself.
that there could be
of Plato, the
pev
As in the moral and Deity was the beginning,
6?)
rr)v Kal
peoa ru)v ovrtov andvruv
as he says in another place, 6
av
paXiara, 717
Etrj
;
resents those against
so,
philosophy
political
it.
deog (cjonep 6 iraXaiog Xoyog)
no true nat-
God, and they did
ural morality without the belief in a
not pretend
as
it
middle, and end apx'fjv
re
£%6)T, lib.
real
iv.,
:
6
te\ev-
715, or,
ndvruv perpov
dr) -dedg rjplv
on the other hand, he justly rep-
whom
he
is
here contending, as hold-
ing to no conscience, no law, no right and wrong, as well
They
as no religion and no God. their
reasoned, however,- like
modern followers of the school of Hobbes,
From an
circle.
atheistic assumption, they
in a vicious
proved that law
was
not by nature, but by
tion,
taken as established, they argued that Divine worship,
art,
and then from
being enjoined by law, was also by fieovg eivai irpCdrov (paoiv ovtoi
vopoig.
We
Page
art,
and*not by nature
rex^V °v
(pvoet,
aXXa
tlol
14, line 20.
see the absurdity of the thing in the
their positions
this latter posi-
and their
irpcbrov 'ipevdog
;
way
Plato states
yet,
by conceal-
mode of reasoning, such writers Hobbes have seemed to make out a most formidable
ing this vicious and circular as
argument.
This
atheistical
dogma, that religion
is
the
creation of law and the civil magistrate, is most strikingly set forth in the following
fragment attributed by Sextus
Empiricus (Advers. Matliem.,
lib.
ix.,
sec. 54) to Critias,
one of the thirty tyrants of Athens, and by Plutarch (De Placit. Philosoph.,
i.,
6 and 7) to Euripides, who, he says, Sisyphus instead
utters these sentiments in the character of
of his own, through fear of the Areopagus.
verses in
full,
We
give these
because of their intrinsic interest as one of
RELIGION AND LAW, NOT BY NATURE, BUT BY ART. 137 the
most remarkable remains of antiquity, because they
forth in all its strength the substance of all that
been said on
head from
this
down
that time
set
has ever
to the present,
and because they furnish a specimen of most finished poetry, of a higher stamp than atheism could have been supposed to
employ
in the utterance of its dark oracles ’TL>
xpovoc
OT* 7]V LLTCLKTOQ avdptOTCCOV /3£og
vnypETyg,
YLal ftypLudyg, ioxvog
"Or’ ovdev aeQlov ovre ToZg egOTioZglv yv
O vf
:
,
av noTiaapa ToZg kclkolq kylvero.
KanELTa poL doKovaiv dvdpcjnoL vopovg Qeodcu KohaoTag, Iva diny Tvpavvog y Tsvovg Pporelov Tyv vfipiv 6ov\yv EXVi ,
’E £rj[LLOVTO 6\
*E KELT
EL TLQ
E^apapTUVOL.
Tup^aVT] [1EV 0L VOpOL
ETCELdrj
’AnsZpyov avTovg epya py npdoGELv (3ia, 6’ snpaGGOV, rrjvLKavrd pot 6 okel
AaOpa
$ vv<u Ely
yvupyv dvyp
nvfcvog rig nal oo(j)bg
Tv&vcu
tl dsZpa rolg na/coZoL ,
nav TiaOpa
IIpdoocoGLv, y T^Eyctoiv, y fypov&GL
TO OEION
’E vtevQev ovv *Jlg £.otl
N06> m
r’
Aalpuv,
UKOVCOV
IT pooExuv ts
Udv
atyfrlnp
,
onog
ETZog fivyrolaiv k^EvpZbv,
c$’
tl.
Eloyyymrro
’daXkuv
,
j3Z(p
KCLt (37lE 7CG)V (j)povtiv t’ del,
ravra
cal (pvGiv tislav <poptiv,
t
pev to XexOev ev flporoig lmovgetcu ,
’Ef dpupEvov 6 e nav ISeZv dvvyGSTac.
’Eav 6e gvv Gtyy
tl (3ov?i£vyg nanov,
To£r’ ovxl ^t/gel Tovg fisovg "
Ev
egtl
'&e'lg)v.
A LdaypaTuv
tovgSs TLg
*
to yap (f>povovv
oyovg Pisyov
ytiiGTOv eloyyyGaTo ,
'Tevcki Kakvtyag Tyv dlyOsLav Xoycj.
N ateiv
6’ E(j)aoK£
M dTiLGTu y "OOev
n Ep
y
Tovg iJsovg svTavO’, Iva
EKnTiy^sLsv dvOpunovg,
K.al Tag ovyoEig tc5 TaTiaLnupu ’E/c
ayuv
Eyvcj Tovg (j>66ovg elvaL ppoToZg (3Z(p ,
Tyg vnspde nspityopag, Iv* aoTpanyg
KaTsZd’ kvavGEig Selvcl
6’
,
B povTyg,
to
t’
Xpovov Kahbv
av nTvnypaTa
uoTspunov ovpavov denagr noiniTipa, TEKTOvog GO(j>ov.
M2
138 RELIGION AND LAW, NOT BY NATURE, BUT BY ART. *
OQev re Xa/urpog darepag onepx^i pvdpog,
O
#’ vypog tig yrjv opdpog EttTtopL&Tai.
Toiovode
7r epLEGrrjGEv
avdpcoTroig tyodov
'Zrotxovg, tcaTi&g re tcj Xoycp kcltguclgc
T ov
A
Aalpov’ oyn&v, kv 7rpenovTL x^pi V-
most masterly refutation of
cially as
may
it
this atheistic
dogma, espe-
was, in more modern times, advanced by Hobbes,
be found in Cudworth’s Intellectual System of the
Universe, in
which there
is
a most thorough and conclusive
examination of the general doctrine, that morality and
reli-
gion are not by nature, or from the Divine mind, but are strictly conventional, that is,
by human law.
Plato also
touches upon this subject in the Theaetetus, 172, B., where
he
sets forth the unavoidable conclusions of that flowing
philosophy, which, rejecting ideas and making man, ,
other words, sensations the measure of rravrojv), utterly
law, in short,
kind
all
alo%pa, Sinaia nal dSina nal ,
baa
(
perpov
rcoXzg
ravra
real
rfi
naXd pev nal ola av enaorr]
(cpaa),
nal
ozrjOezoa (t-vp^epovra elvai)
elvai
things
sweeps away all morality, all religion, all foundations whether of a civil or religious
Ovnovv nal nepl TzoXinnCbv
:
all
or, in
p?],
# r\rai
akrfleia enaarxj
vopipa
eavrirj,
nal ev rovrozg pev
*
ovSev ooepebrepov ovre ISabrrjv ISubrov, ovre rroXtv noXecog elvai . nal ev rolg Scnaiozg nal dSznozg, nal ooiozg nal avoGiOig
,
ovSev
edeXovozv loxvpi^eoOai,
aXXd to
’0Y2IAN eavrov
yiveraz aXrjdeg rore, orav So^.
They
naXov) than to that of
nozvyj So^av,
,
(that
is,
was
partly
Ka£ 6?) nal erepa ra Se Srj *
Page
14, line
23.
by nature and partly
conventional agreement or custom), but the
Just (or Right) had no foundation at other words,
rovro
the right .
,
“ The beautiful they said,
avrebv
to the idea of the
pev aXXa elvai vopep de
(pvoei
(pvoez
Theaetetus, 172, B., C.
dinaza odd’ elvai rorrapdirav (pvoez.
by law
eon
assigned a rather higher rank
beautiful (to
rd naXa,
ovn
d>g
was
all in
nature,” or, in
the creation alone of arbitrary enactment.
,
:
THE FIGURE APOSIOPESIS.
The
139
doctrines of an immutable standard of morals and of
an immutable standard of taste must go together.
Both are
necessarily and consistently rejected by the atheist, and
both should be strenuously maintained by
although not the same, can
be traced to one
all
All are harmonies
foundation.
and
consistent
all
Physical, moral, intellectual, and religious beauty,
theists.
;
all
common
spring from one root,
unmeaning notions, unless connected with that idea of God in which the Beautiful, the Righteous, and the Good (to fcaXdv to ayadov to diuacov) are all embraced all
are alike
,
,
and regarded, not only as older than human vrj),
but also than (pvvig, or Nature
art ( $vr)T7 )
tex -
Compare
itself.
argument of the atheist Callicles, in the Gorgias, 485 (pvOEL [lev
ova eotl naXa vdfuo
the :
a
ds, k. t. X.
XV. The Figure Aposiopesis.
Page # is
15,
wanting,
Line
Ei
8.
The
prj (frrjoovoiv.
apodosis here
interrupted in a manner, which, al-
or, rather,
though frequent in Greek, would not be admissible English.
This
more powerful
silent
omission has sometimes a
in the
much
than any expression of the apodosis,
effect
especially in the case of threatening and admonitions.
The
answer, in such examples, seems
con-
science, as though
response.
it
to
be
left entirely to
could not possibly mistake the proper
There are very powerful and numerous
stances of this in the
Hebrew
of the Old Testament, and
from thence in the Hebraistic Greek of the the most striking TTOLrjorj
42 62.
;
rcapnov
xxi /., 42
There
;
is
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
may eI
be found, Luke,
6e prjye.
Acts, xxiii., 9;
in-
New.
xiii.,
9
:
One
of
nav pev
Compare, also, Luke, xix., Romans, ix., 22 John, vi.,
a very fine example, Iliad,
;
i.,
135
;
140
THE FIGURE APOSIOPESIS. akA? 6e
el
el [j,ev tie
pi)
d&oovoi yepag leyaOvuoc ’AxaioX— 6g)g)olv f.
.
.
.
See, also, the ninth book of the Laws, 854, C., aal eav uev ooi dptivTL ravra
Aco</>a
j
We
have also an example very similar
the Protagoras, 325, D., I
n to vooppa
teal
•
to
eav pev e^ioy
—
el
6e
the present in Tcetdrjrai
&c., where, in the same manner, the answer
ui),
&c.
pr),
—
el
6e
is left to
the inward voice, and the writer hurries on to the second
See, also, the Republic,
condition as the principal clause. ix.,
&c.
pi),
6e
575,
Thucydides,
&c.
pi],
ovuovv eav pev enovreg
I).,
;
iii.,
3, teal fjv
vneirccjOLV
pev £vpdirj
Symposion, 220, D.,
Plato,
el
,
rj
— eav 6e —
rceipa
•
el
6e fiovXeode, n.
7. A.
This has been most appropriately and beautifully
styled
by grammarians
aposiopesis, or
an omission arising
from an excitement of the feelings, in which a gesture or a look
supposed
is
to
supply the place of the voice.
though these and similar cases-
may by some be
as defects or irregularities in the
scholar
who has any
gard them as our
own
regarded
Greek language, every
claim to taste or philosophy must re-
highest beauties.
its
Al-
tongue had not more of this
It is
a great pity that
flexibility,
and did not
admit more licenses of a similar kind, instead of being so confined in that strait jacket which has been put
stiffly
upon
it
in the rules imposed, for the
most
part,
by pedantic,
unphilosophical, and unclassical writers on English Gram-
mar
;
for such,
with some few exceptions, have been the
mass of those who have taken upon themselves to lay down the laws of this science, and to sit in judgment on Lowth and Murray. To return, however, to the sentence great
before us
:
desired to avoid the aposiopesis, this
if it is
be done by taking
all
from nal nepl
to ypacjxov inclusive,
as a parenthesis, and then bringing in
what follows as a
repetition with an apodosis to el pi) (prjoovoiv.
thing in the
which,
way
of this
however, may
is
may
The only
the particle de, the insertion of
be regarded as occasioned by the
ARGUMENT FROM MOTION.
141
prodosis having been, in a measure, lost sight of in conse-
quence of the length of the intervening parenthesis.
XVI. Argument for
Page
.
Line 22. ’A rjdsGrepcov Xoyuv. “ Unusual or common track” Reference is had to those subtle
18,
out of the
,
which are soon
disquisitions respecting motion
They
God from Motion
Existence of a
the
to follow.
common
are so called, because differing from the
and more obvious arguments generally made use
such
of,
more which Clinias
as those arising from evidence of design, and the
phenomena of
striking
had so readily alluded Plato thinks
sion.
it
he elsewhere styles 7ir\yr\v
motion
the visible world, to in the
conceded
is
se, all is
the fountain-head of the error If the least
also
rr\v
or property of
is
concerned.
at least as far
The whole cause
If this is granted, or
would not be hard
to
is
not de-
admit that matter
may
have an adaptive as well as a moving property, a
tendency in
:
to matter, or to the least particle of
surrendered to the enemy. it
power
given up to the atheist,
as the physical world
nied, then
of the discus-
best to begin at the beginning, or, as
it,
avoiyrov dogrjg.
matter per
commencement
which
an accommodation of
to
is
it
itself to
the circumstances
placed, or, according to the doctrine just
taught, a disposition to fit itself to those conditions in the
may be thrown by its own selfmoving power, acting only under the direction of rv^r], or
universe into which
chance
it
£vpnenrojfcev navra apfiorrovra olue'nog
:
paXaua npog
Here we are and we can as well
GfcXrjpa, u. r. X.
‘region of occult qualities,
the one property as of the other. the
mind
to
In fact,
rrcog,
in the dark
conceive of
it is
easier for
admit this doctrine of an adaptive power, after
conceding that of motion, than
to receive the latter first as
ARGUMENT FROM MOTION.
142
In this view, then,
an independent starting-point.
guments from
shown
tion is
fitness fall
If
we
eternity is very long
charge of
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;he
oineiog ncog), and
its
mo-
only give the atheist time enough
theory, everything will at last
^vpirlnreL
all ar-
first
be the offspring of rexvr], and not of tvx^i
to
or even of (pvcug.
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; and
to the ground, unless the
may
fall
fancy
into
commence
on his
that,
proper place
its
the natural dis-
only and long-sought appropriate office stand on the
Plato, therefore, takes his
position,
first
namely, that the mere motion of matter implies the existence of Spirit as an older and higher essence, or, in other words, that Spirit alone is self-moving, because
which resolves
that duality ject
and
object
itself at the
it
alone possesses
same time
into sub-
The term avroidvrjGLg is not to be conmay refer to any change in the
.
fined to local motion, but
state or condition of a thing.
may, therefore, be pred-
It
icated of mind, or pure spirit, independent of space. this
sense volition
though
it
may
is
avTontv7]Gtg or self-motion, even ,
this, in either
acceptation of the term,
affirmation rendered necessary It
is
involved in the term
which the term
is
it
is
an
itself,
or rather in the idea of
the real, and not merely arbitrary rep-
Although the argument teriori form,
is
by the very laws of mind.
and may therefore be called a
resentative,
al-
That matter
never be exhibited outwardly.
cannot possess
In
logical necessity.
may have something
of the a pos-
nevertheless strictly a priori.
clusion not derived from experience
;
It is
a con-
for in truth, aside
from
the essential idea
of our minds compel us
to create, all
which the laws our mere experience
of matter
posed
As
to
it.
in motion,
and
presented to our senses, this
phenomenon
it
is directly
seems
exhibits itself
to
op-
be evei
more con
more closely and minutely it is examined so' were to be consulted, or, to use the language of some of our Baconians, if nature alone were to
stantly the
;
that if experience alone
be interrogated, motion would appear
to
be the law, and rest
ARGUMENT FROM MOTION. '
v
if
were ever
absolute rest
Notwithstanding
to
the
all this,
143
be discovered) the exception.
mind cannot
divest itself of
which
that idea (whether innate, or acquired, or suggested) it
hath of body, as distinguished from space
;
and whenever
this idea is clearly called out, the soul doth affirm of neces-
and
sity,
phenomena of experience to the move itself. The same ne-
in spite of all the
contrary, that matter cannot
cessity compels
by
tinue motion
than
it
it,
also, to declare that matter
virtue of
can commence
any inherent power, any more
and
it,
this, too,
notwithstanding the
opposing dogma so confidently laid down in of natural philosophy.
We
of ten thousand motions,
cannot con-
all
our books
have the constant observation
commenced and continued
with-
out the visible intervention of any spiritual agent, and ap-
parently the result of innate properties, and yet,
when
the
mind remains sound and true to itself, all this does not at all weaken the innate conviction, that every KLvrjOLg implies the existence of an originating will or spirit somewhere, however many the impulsive forces that may seem to have intervened between that will and its ultimate object. When the
mind
affirm,
a healthy state,
>3 in
and does affirm
this,
we
say
it
compelled
is
to
with the same confidence as
the proposition that the three angles of every triangle are
equal to two right angles, or that two bodies cannot occupy the
same space.
Even
this,
notwithstanding
it
lies at the
foundation of mechanical and dynamical physics,
mately
to
be resolved into a logical necessity that ,
cessary affirmation into which the mind
laws of
its
is,
a ne-
driven by those
own, that form not only our highest, but our only
idea of truth.
der which that
is
is ulti-
it
Hence, having the is
idea, or that notion un-
forced to think of matter, the soul affirms
two bodies occupying the same space are one
because the
bod)r
last differentia , or erepotOTriq, is destroyed.
SOUL OLDER THAN BODY.
(44
XVII. Soul Older than Body.
Page
19,
Line
2 a) par cov epnpooOsv
16.
Tcavrcjv yevo -
Compare with this Timaeus, 34, B. T rjv 6s 6?) ibvx?] v ov% 6)g vvv vorspav smx^povpsv Xsysiv ovrcog eprjxdvrjaaro uai o dsog vscorspav. ov yap av apx^Oai
fievrj.
:
,
rcpsadvrspov vito vecorspov ovvsp^ag etaosv. vsesi uai apery nporspav uai npeodvrepav fog
6sgtt6tlv
b 6s real ys-
ocoparog,
'ipvx'rjv
we now
did not create soul, as
speak of
our argument), posterior and junior
;
for
it
(in the
order of
he would not have
Where-
suffered an elder thing to be ruled by a younger. fore
he constituted
prior to
both by virtue and by birth,
soul,
God
“
dp^ovoav ap^opsvov ovveoryoaro.
teal
to
be
and older than body, as the mistress and ruler
The term
thereof.”
ijn’XV is
used here in a less sense
than in the tenth of the Laws, where immaterial, and
employed
is
as distinguished from (pvoig
it
includes
in a peculiar It,
.
all
manner
that is
for
God
however, means much
more, in this passage of the Timaeus, than the soul of man.
The
philosopher
is
speaking of soul collectively, the animus
mundi or Soul of the Universe, as distinct from, inferior ,
and dependent upon, the Deity who had constituted
it
to,
(ovv-
eoTrjGaro ep7]x av V aaT0 )’ and yet as the source, and fountain ,
from which
all
other
souls
whether of men or of the that verse of Pindar, n
Ev
emanate or are generated,
inferior Divinities, according to
Nem., Carm.
vi., 2., a.,
ay6pfov, sv ftefov ysvog
•
1,
2
:
eu
ptdg 6s rcvsopsv
parpog apfporepoL. If soul is older
than body or matter, then the properties
or innate powers (cvyyevr]) of the former must be also before those of the latter. 661-a 6rj real
Wherefore, as he says below,
smpsXeia ual vovg ual rsxv?] ual vopog ( rd
SOUL OLDER THAN BODY.
145
ovyyevrj ipvxVG)* TTporspa av etrj anXrjpcbv nal uaXantiv nal /3ap£G)v nal novcpcov (rtiv TTpoarjnovTUv Gupan). “ Thought, j
and providence, and reason, and art and law must have ,
been before hard, and
evident that the term otipa here substances, but
matter
is
light.”
not taken for organized
in all respects equivalent to our
is
It is
word
he mentions only those elementary properties
for
;
,
and heavy, and
soft,
which belong
to
or
it,
were supposed
belong
to
to
it
as
So word against the inference we
matter, such as hardness or resistance, weight, &c. that there is nothing in this
have drawn respecting Plato’s opinion on the eternity of the material world, whether regarded as organized or unor-
ganized.
It
seems
to
us perfectly clear that in every sense
modern philosophy, he held
of the word, as used by the
matter to be junior to soul.
The is
order of the argument,
what
the direct opposite of
In the
posteriori.
ness in matter
can oppose an older
latter,
we
to the contrary,
is
commonly
styled the a
proceed from evidences of
to a soul or art ,
tyvoig, of
should be observed here,
it
which,
for all that this
may have been
whose adaptations
its
fit-
method
the offspring of
designs
may be
only an imperfect imitation, whether regarded as proceeding from the soul of man, or of
some superhuman being.
In the other, the older existence of spirit ed,
and then
it is
tion, that there
art
inferred,
must
be
is first establish-
even before experimental induc-
such evidences of design, because
and law, which are properties of
soul,
must be older
than the material structures in which they are exhibited.
On
scheme of the atheist, or the naturalist (the worshipper of (pvotg ), only some of the smaller and latest productions were the work of tex vt] making its appearance in the latter cycles of the universe. In the other view, which the author here presents, ra peyaXa nal npebra epya nal npa %eig rexvrjg av yiyvoiro, ovra ev irptiroLr, ra 6e (\>vaei nal iiVGiq varepa nal apxopsva av en rexvrjg ecrj nal vov the
N
COMPARISON OF THE DANGEROUS FLOOD.
146 “
The
great and
first
works would be the works of
arlt
while the things of nature, and even nature herself, would be posterior
There
is
to,
and ruled by
likewise another view which
full interpretation it
and mind.”
art
essential to the
is
was
of the passage, namely, that not only
phenomena
impossible that these
of matter should exist
objectively , without the previous existence of soul as
which they
cient cause of that substance of
are
an
effi-
phenomena,
but also that they could not exist subjectively without a soul of
which they
also, is
and
constitute the sensations.
true that spirit
it
visible ,
must be older than hard and ,
Compare the passage
&c.
In this sense,
in the
soft
,
Phsedon, in
which he refutes the doctrine that the soul is only a harmony, by showing that its pre-existence is essential to harmony itself, and that, where the former is not present, the latter is nothing more than dead strings, and chords, and tensions,
as
and relaxations, and vibrations of the
harmony no
reasoning
real or true being.
may be
carried
It is
down through
air,
but has
clear that the all
same
the elementary
properties of matter.
XVIII.
Remarkable Comparison of
Page
21, Line 3.
the
Dangerous Flood.
hrconelre ovv
,
uaddnep
el
norayov
rjyag edei rpelg Hvrag diabatveiv peovra otyodpa , k. t. A. have ventured The common reading is el tcaddnep.
We
the change from the exigency of the place, and on the authority of Stephanus. “ Consider, then, as if we three
to
make
had
to cross a violently
flowing river,” &c.
The Athenian
here most graphically compares himself and his two companions, just entering upon this most profound and difficult
argument respecting motion, into a
deep and rapid
to
torrent,
men who
are about to plunge
and who, therefore, need the
COMPARISON OF THE DANGEROUS FLOOD. utmost caution in the examination of every step,
147
lest, if at
any point they should lose a firm foothold, they might be
overwhelmed
in floods of darkness,
and carried down the
The
stream of doubt, without any chance of recovery.
comparison to
is
admirably sustained,
and even when
it
seems
be dropped, does nevertheless continue to affect the dis-
course, and tinge the style with a metaphorical
many teal
sentences
abarog
;
— napacpepopevog, page
22, and exopevoc cog
,
we cannot
of imitating Plato, and
comparison in respect
to himself,
tamquam
circumspectans
when
placed in like
Cicero, Tusc. Disp.,
i.,
cir-
Itaque du -
multa adversa reverens,
,
mari immenso
in rate in
-
to institute a similar
cumstances in reference to another great truth. hcesitans ,
n
help thinking that he had
passage in his eye, and meant
bitans ,
for
Cicero was very fond
vog aocpaXovg neioparog page 23.
this
hue
as in the expressions, A oyog otpodporepog
,
nostra vehitur oratio.
30.
So, also, in the Phaedon, after exhausting the direct arguments for the immortality of the soul, Socrates “ trusts
himself to the best of human reasons (that
is, to
the old and
unbroken tradition respecting the doctrine) as the safest vessel to
which the
soul could be committed, and on
alone, although in continual danger of shipwreck,
be expected it
the storms of doubt
to outride
;
it
which could
unless perhaps , ,
might hereafter find a surer vehicle in some Divine reve-
Xoyog
lation , or
tielog,
which Heaven might yet condescend
to
We do not know which to admire make known to men most, the sound philosophy, the unaffected humility, or the which the whole passage abounds. A elv yap nepl avra ev ye n tovtcjv bcanpa^aodcu, iq paOelv onrj iq evpelv fj, el ravra advvarov rbv yovv QeXriOTOV rtiv avOpconivcov Xoyo)v Xadovra enl tovtov
striking imagery, with
,
dxovpevov, toonep enl ox^dcag, luvdvvevovra dianhevoai
rbv
j3iov
•
el prj rig
dvvatro aacpaXearepov
pov, £nl fiedaiorepov bxppcLrog
rj
ttal
cuavdvvore
AOrOT 0EIOT
rtvog
$
.
INVOCATION OF DIVINE
148
X oyog,
We
Phaedon, 85, E.
dtanopevOrivat,.
AID.
take
avOpumvo
in this passage, not in the sense of reason or argu-
used in the Gorgias, 523, A., at the introduction of the mythical representation of the judgment ment, but rather as
after
Oov
death
:
atcove
it is
paXa uaXov Xoyov, ov av pev
6e Xoyov.
,
seems
In the
have had an eye
fjyrjO'Q
pv-
word ox^biag above, Plato
Homer’s account of the shipwreck of Ulysses, in his voyage on such a vessel from the island of Calypso, and thus to intimate that this /3eX rtorog to
tcjv avOpG)nivG)v
to
Xoyov could be regarded
as at best only
a temporary support, until the coming of that
more sure
word of Revelation. Can we doubt that the would have rejoiced in the announcement that there was even then in the world a “ sure word of prophecy, like a light shining in a dark place” and that he would have surrendered all his speculative reason'fiebaLorspog )
(
soul of our philosopher
ing for the security and comfort of such an assurance
?
XIX. Invocation of the Divine
Aid
in the
Argument.
Striking
Examples of this from other Dialogues
Page rjplv, to
22, Line 11. *Aye
vvv
call
sotg)
6rj,
Oeov elnoTe rcapauXriTeov
tovto ovrco yevopsvov.
upon God
,
let
it
Christian writers, both
he done
now”
“ If ever we ought
Many
professed
metaphysicians and theologians,
might here take a lesson from the heathen philosopher.
What more
sublimely appropriate than this petition for Di-
vine aid in an argument against those
existence
?
The
who
denied the Divine
dark, violent, and almost impassable tor-
upon which they are about to embark is yet kept in mind, and in view of this the soul is led to seek for some There is, we think, an allusion to some aid out of itself. of those prayers which Homer puts into the mouths of his
rent
,
INVOCATION OF DIVINE heroes, as they are about to engage in perilous contest
may
it
;
149
AID.
some arduous and
be to the prayer of Ajax for light
645) in which Jove covers the whole held of conflict with thick darkness or, perhaps, in that desperate
battle (lib. xvii.,
;
in still greater
consistency with the metaphorical imagery
here employed, to the prayer of Achilles, in the twenty-flrst
book of the
Iliad (273),
whelmed by the Scamander
when
danger of being over-
in
and turbulent
rising floods of the angry
:
Zev rrdrep etc
ovrtg pe ftecov eXeecvov vneor?],
dog
TTorapolo oaoooai.
Whether which
,
this be so or not,
the purest Christianity
it
in this case a prayer
is
need not blush
There are several
edge and admire.
to
acknowl-
interesting examples
of similar invocations in others of the Platonic dialogues,
mouth of Socrates
or of
evidently represented.
We
either put into the
by
whom
he
is
some speaker have but
little
doubt, too, that in these remarkable peculiarities of character,
Plato accurately represents the model he so closely ob-
served, and with
whom
his
own
intellectual existence
almost be regarded as identified. others, the invocation in the fourth
We may
note,
may
among
book of the Laws,
at the
commencement of his system of positive legislation for the state a work which certainly, of all others, should never ;
be attempted without a deep feeling of the necessity of
Qedv
Divine assistance. tcevrjv
emuaXcopeOa
*
6rj
7Tpdg rr\v rr}g noXecog
uarao-
6 de auovaeie re, ttai vnatcovcrag IXe-
cog
evpevrjg re rjplv eXOol, ovvduncooprjGcov rrjv re ttoXlv
teal
rovg vopovg 712, B.
the construction
of our
â&#x20AC;&#x153; Let us invoke the aid of God in
May
state.
he hear us, and
when he
may he kindly and propitiously come to our assistance, that he may jointly with us arrange in order the state and the lawsâ&#x20AC;? How much higher a light than this is boasted of by those modern law-makers who has listened
to
our requests
,
N
2
INVOCATION OF DIVINE
150
have endeavoured, as
far as
they could,
of prayer from our legislative halls
B
Philebus, 25,
Beog uev ovv
:
AID. to
banish the voice
Compare,
!
also, the
av
(rjplv cppacrei)
7r ep
ye
j
Here,
epalg ev%aig knrjfcoog ycyv^rai.
which the Divine
the discussion of
too, the subject, in
aid is invoked, is of the
very highest importance, being no less than a most profound analysis of the radical difference between physical or sensual,
and
spiritual pleasure
when
holy, that,
;
a theme, in his estimation, so
again alluding to
it
book of the
in the sixth
which was
Republic, he utters the same word
(evcprjpei,)
employed
whether of speech
in driving all profanation,
from the
action,
or
sacrificial altar, Rep., vi., 509, B.
Perhaps, however, the most striking example of an invo-
may be
cation of this kind
found in connexion with that
sublime prooemium of the Timseus, to which
That
ready alluded. treatise
on law,
too,
or, in
it
we have
should be borne in mind,
alis
a.
other words, the legislation of the
physical and intellectual universe, embracing equally the
laws of mind and matter nal nara
:
'AXXa, rovro ye
OGXppoovvrjg psrexovoiv,
Ppaxv opuepov nal peyaXov irpayparog rjpdg 6e rovg irepl navrog Xoyovg el
yeyovev
rj
,
dij
eirl
navreg oool
ndo^
tieov del irov
TcoieloOaC
dppfj nal
naXovav
mj peXXovrag,
nal dyeveg ectlv avaynr} fteovg emnaXovpe,
vovg evxeoOai ndvrag Kara vovv enelvotg pev paXiora “
eiropevcjg 6e rjplv elnelv, 27, C.
but
little
more, then,
when
we
to
be, first of
God by
invoke
all,
always
it
is
affair,
call
,
who have wheth-
upon God.
generated or eternal
prayer, that
,
what we say may
according to his mind, and then consistent
with ourselves.”
#
•
Page
those
about to engage in a discussion re-
specting the universe, whether
ought
Even
of sobriety, in the undertaking of any
er of small or great consequence,
Much
•
23, Line
1
.
Irrovd^j irdaq TTapanenXrjoOGiv.
prayer on the present occasion has simplicity that characterize
all
all
The
the conciseness and
the recorded petitions of
INVOCATION OF DIVINE
Compare the
Socrates.
last
151
AID.
he ever uttered,
an easy
for
death, just before taking the cup of poison in the prison,
Phaedon, 117, re nal vegQcll
xpf •
a
B
’AA/C evx^Oal ye ttov rolg
:
evOevSe
rrjv pETo'utr\oiv rrjv
dr) teal
eyd>
longest specimen
evxopai
re,
eicelge
evtvx ?} ye -
The
nal jevolto ravr^j.
remarkable prayer
is that
tieolg eijeorL
end of
at the
the Phaedrus, or the dialogue on Spiritual Beauty,
which
T
we cannot resist the temptation of quoting in full £2 $IAE IIAN re nal aXkoi deoL, doirjrs pot naXip yEVEoOat rdvdo:
6ev ra^coOev 6e ooa
rolg Evrog elva'i
,
giov 6e vop'foipi rov coepov (lot <
ogov
pot,
(ptXia
*
ttXov-
to 6e xP V(J ov nXfjOog (pEpEcv prjre dyeiv dvvairo aXXog rj 6
fjirjTE
“
ppo)v , 279, B.
Oh
*
thou beloved Universal
elrj
erw-
Numen and ,
ye
I may become beautiful within and that whatever of externals I may possess may be all in harmony icith my inward ( spiritual ) being. May I regard the wise alone as rich ; and may I have just so much of gold as no other would, take from me but the virtuous man” The last sentence is somewhat obscure, but the whole petition approaches the spirit of the Gospel, although lacking some of other Divinities grant that
,
,
the essential requisites of a Christian supplication. justify us in
hoping that
its
author,
It
may
had he received the rev-
which he longed, would not have remained “ far from the kingdom of Heaven but it furnishes no grounds elation for
for the extravagant
language of one
siastic admiration of the
pro nobis.
He
is
who
said, in his enthu-
heathen sage, sancte Socrates ora
represented here, however, as receiving
a strengthening of his confidence, and some degree of as-
surance from his supplication for he says immediately, u holding fast to this ( that is, the hope of Divine aid) as by some sure cable let us embark ,” <fcc. still keeping up the ;
,
metaphor of the dangerous Hood.
;
152 THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW?
XX. The Great Question of flow
fyc.
?
the
Ancient Schools
,
and
Page eorrjfce
23,
;
who belonged
to the
the Physical School of Elea.
to
Line
4.
pev navra,
vavrlov
Things
all
with a Sketch of some of the principal Mate-
;
rializing or Atheistical Philosophers
Ionic
Do
,
Kara
fctvelrat,
6e, d> %eve,
6e ovdev
;
onorav
the
all
apa
nav tov-
tovtg)
fj
For the common reading nara
by the concurrence of
(pq rig,
6e, established
manuscripts, Ast would
Kara rads, connecting it with (paiverai in the preceding sentence and in this he follows Eusebius and substitute
;
the version of Ficinus. correct,
We
common
think the
reading
and that Ast and Ficinus have mistaken the
The Athenian,
of the passage.
gerous flood, to fore calling
try, as
he says,
is
spirit
entering alone in this danits
upon his companions
depth and strength, be-
assumes
to follow,
time the parts both of interrogator and respondent.
for a
He
con-
sequently supposes an objector from the atheistic or Ionic school, adopting
some
of the peculiar phraseology or cant
terms of that sect, and taking him up in the midst of his
some such way as this, “ And so then (teal elra de), answer me, if you please, one of these three questions Do all things stand, and does nothing move ? or is the opposite of this the case, namely, that all things move and nothing stands ? or do some things move and some things stand ? Give me, I say, an answer to these old queries, which have so long perplexed our schools of philosophy.” To which supposed objector the Athenian replies by taking
positions in
,
:
the third hypothesis as his starting position in this argu-
ment.
There
is
much
vivacity in this
‘he discussion about motion,
very particle by which
it is
mode
and Kara
best effected
of introducing
( nal ;
it
elra)
is
the
being used to
introduce a sudden inference, and implying a previous ar-
THE ANCIENT dUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? 153 gument, in the midst of which the objection be made. allowed,
On
If
we
any
supposed
is
to
alteration of the established text is to be
think
it
should consist in changing de into
6t].
the particle elra , see note, page 40.
Whatever else may be intended, there can be no doubt that there is here tions
an allusion,
which are so
at least, to the
same quesand
fully discussed in the Thesetetus,
See, especially, Theaetetus, 180, D.
same language. These were the fa-
mous problems which so
the Ionic
stated there several times in nearly this
and
schools,
schools
divided,
afterward the
of Elea
;
first
embracing,
which Plato, in There is an allu-
to
the present argument, confines himself.
them
Italian
however, a much wider
range than the merely dynamical points
sion to
and
and metaphysical
physical
in the Memorabilia,
lib. i., c. i.,
14
:
teal
rolg
navra rolg 6e ovdev av rrore mvrjOfjvai In this language was stated the great debate between those who referred all things to sensation, making it the measure of all reality, or what Plato styles tt)v (pepofievrjv ovoiav
liev del fuveloOat,
.
,
(Theaetetus, 179, C.), and those
immutable world of ideas able essence ), the real
(
who
held to a higher and
tt)v ditlvrjrov
ovoiav the immove,
and only dXrjOtig ovrcjg ovra while ,
they regarded the objects of sense as continually moving, changing, never for a
moment remaining
the same, and
having nothing about them (aside from the idea, or Xoyog
which, by
its
connexion alone, imparted
reality) that could
,
them a temporal
to
constitute real being
(
ovoiav ) in the
They
highest and truest senses of the word.
formed, as
we have elsewhere observed,* the grand line of separation between two ever opposing systems of philosophy, and right *views, in almost every
department of knowledge, are
more or less connected with these subtle inquiries when viewed in their widest relations. Their odd phraseology
may
be more
fully interpreted thus
* Discourse on the
:
True Idea of The
What State,
constitutes real
Andover, 1843.
—
;
154 THE ANCIENT GlUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW ity
Are
?
all
things in a perpetual flux
universe but phenomenal facts
in the
?
Is there
of,
the perceived and apparent
nothing
and sensations, or
there a world of truth and being separate from,
pendent
?
is
and inde-
— not merely as gen-
more stable than more permanent than the old rolling heavens ideas fixed, immoveable ( dtdvrjra ), eternal, which were nevthe del Kara ravrd nai er born, and which can never die daavrcog e^ovra, the dig aXpOdg ovrcog ovra, from which all individual things derive reality, and by partaking alone of which they become the true objects of science, or emoreralizations of the mind, but as realities,
the earth,
—
ijgai instead of do^ai.
There is quite a full account of the systems of philosophy, of which these questions were the symbols, to be found in the dialogue Theaetetus. Plato there makes Homer (wheth er sportively or not, it is difficult to determine) the head and founder of that Ionic school which held that all tilings flowed and this because the poet represents Oceanus and Tethys as the original and mother of Gods and men. We greatly doubt whether in this
Homer had any
or mythical sense at
however, anything of the kind
was
an allusion that water
verse, i.,
all.
If,
intended, there would to the doctrine
was
to
be nothing more than
afterward advanced by Thales,
the apx^Jy or originating element of the uni-
and so the matter
3.
seem
philosophical
is
viewed by
This doctrine of Thales was,
Aristotle,
Metaph .,
in all probability, deri-
ved from a corrupt and perverted tradition of the Mosaic account of the creation, where of God
it
is
said that “
ivas brooding over the waters ,”
The
hypotheses of Anaximander and Anaximenes, one of held that air and the other that ,
principle of the universe,
what seemed
to
Spirit
and the succeeding
infinite space
were only attempts
was
whom
the
to refine
first
upon
them the grosser element of Thales.
In the later writers, however,
who may be regarded
as
being in the line of this school, these speculations, and the
THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALE THINGS FLOW? 155 phraseology employed in reference
and were applied
ferent aspect,
well as the physical world.
them, assumed a
to
moral and mental, as
to the
In the Thesetetus, Socrates
represented as thus setting forth their doctrine
pev avro v 7]OEG)q
tcaO’
teal
avro ovdev eortv
•
etc
be
:
(hg
Trpooayopevovreg
ovte opOcbg
riPNETAI
ovbenor ovdev del de ’
,
tei-
bfj (pa-
’E2TI pev yap
*
teal rcepl
•
is
apa ev
(popag re teal
Srj
tepdoeevg irpoq aXXrjXa y iyverai navra a
EINAI
pev
dif-
rovrov
ixav-
reg e%rjq ol oo(pol, rcXrjv Uappevidov , %vp(pepeodov, IT poraf
yopag re
teal
llpdieXetrog teal EpnedotcXrjg ’
Tcbv ol atepot rrjg Ttoir\oe<vq etearepag
Xappog rpaycobtag be
r/
,
Op7jpog
’titceavov re Oetiv 7r
“
dvra
elpr]ieev
etcyova
rtiv
tccvpcpbiaq
TTOtrj-
pev ’E7U-
eIttgov,
yeveotv porjg
•
teal
prjrepa TtjOvv,
teal
re
teal
That there was nothing absolute,
or
Kcvrjaecog ,
which
153, A.
existed per se
but that from impetus, and motion, and mutual mixture arise things of
all
which we predicate the verb
TO
BE,
not cor-
rectly predicating, because, in truth (to use terms aright),
nothing really IS, but
And
in this all our
all
things are ever
BECOMING.
wise men successively agree except
Parmenides, namely, Protagoras, and Heraclitus, and pedocles
;
Em-
and of the poets, the chief in each kind, namely,
Epicharmus in comedy, and Homer in tragedy, when he says that Oceanus is the origin of the Gods, &c., by which he means that all things are the offspring of flowing and motion.”
The
distinction here is clearly stated.
This school very
consistently refused to apply to things the higher term of
being, eort, but preferred the
word ytyverai
they said, really and truly IS, but ing
;
and
this
was
all
.
Nothing,
things are ever becom-
correct, if there existed nothing else ex-
cept matter, sensation; and their joint phenomena.
In an-
other place, Thesetetus, 1G0, D., Plato gives us more par iicularly their individual opinions, or, rather, the favourite
;
156
ANCIENT QUESTION DO ALL THINGS FLOW?
TIIE
and peculiar terms in which each expressed the common In the language of
doctrine of their flowing philosophy.
Homer, Heraclitus, and
all
that Ionic tribe, rcav to tolov -
rov cpvXov, as Plato styles them, oiov pevpara mveloQai ra
uavra,
all things
sentative,
that
,
he sportively makes Theaetetus the reprewere fond of saying, aloOrjoiv eruorrjprjv yiyveoknowledge and sense were the same or only differ,
names
ent
Others of
like water.
whom
them, of
6ai
were ever flowing
for the
same
The
thing.
favourite expression
of Protagoras was, Travrcov xprjpdrcov avOpcoirov perpov
man was
vac, that
meant
the
el -
measure of all things by which he ,
to refer all things to sensation, or to the
present feel-
ings and opinions, or present remembrances, of the individ-
On
ual man.
Logic.,
he
i.,
the
other hand, Sextus Empiricus (Adv.
8) tells us that Heraclitus
was noted
for taking
collected reason of the race (as the representative of
the universal and Divine reason) for the criterion of truth
but this gives,
is
utterly inconsistent with the account Plato here
and the manner he associates him with those sensu-
alists of the
flowing school
who allowed
of nothing fixed or
eternal. If the
correct,
account of Heraclitus, given in the Theaetetus, be
he was well
entitled to the appellation
not for his profundity, as
f
O
some would represent
Z/coreivog, it,
but be-
cause he maintained the darkest system of sensual philoso-
phy
that ever
shed night over the human
intellect.
Well
might he weep, as Lucian represents him, over his everflowing universe of perishing phenomena, where nothing stood
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; ovdev epnedov, aXX
ovrai, uai
eon
tcovto
1
otzcog
eg nvicecova iravra avveiXe-
repifrcg drep'iplrj ,
yvcboiq ayvcoalrj,
ueya pcnpov avco narco irepixopevovra, nal apecdopeva ,
TXj
rov alcovog
naidcrf, â&#x20AC;&#x153;
ei
nothing was fixed, but, as in a mix-
ture, all things were confounded where pleasure and pain, knowledge and ignorance, great and small, were the same where all things up and down were circling round in a ;
;
THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? 157 choial dance, and ever changing places as in the sport of
There was some-
Lucian Vi/arum Audio 303.
eternity.”
,
,
thing in the hard atoms and dry mechanical theory of the
laughing Democritus which
left
room
although he himself was an atheist sentimental, and, as it,
for a spiritual world,
but the
;
transcendental sensualism of Heraclitus
grossly misrepresented),
And
flowing,
soft,
some modern cant would absurdly
was atheism
he
not
is
in its darkest form.
yet there are other accounts which
very piously about the Supreme
(if
style
Numen and
make him
talk
the immortality
of the soul.
Parmenides was a man of a very all
the others mentioned
Melissus, seems to
different
by Socrates.
have gone much too
stamp from
He, however, with far in the opposite
In his famous doctrine of the one and all
direction.
,
if
Plato rightly represents him, he maintained that all things In other words, not content with saying that the
stood.
world of immutable or ideal truth was a tended that
it
was
reality,
he con-
the only reality, and that sense, instead
was wholly delusion thus verging round to that point where some species of sensualism and a hyperspiritualism apparently meet of which, in modern of being knowledge,
;
;
we have had a remarkable example in Hume and Berkeley. A uoxvpl^ero og ev re rcdvra earl nal eorpnev
times,
c
avro ev avrd),
Thecetetus, 180,
D.
’A tdiov fiev yap to
nav
nai dfCLvrjrov dftotyaiveraL Happevidrjg, Kal rag aioOrjoeig
enddXXei
etc
Euseb., Prcep.
rrjg aXrjOecag.
Evang
.,
i.,
8.
“For Parmemdss
represents the whole as immoveable, and he senses from the realm of truth.” He was a man who seems to have made a very deep impression upon the mind of Socrates when young, and to have exerted a strong influence over his opinions. At least, utterly banishes;
we may tetus,
so judge from the following passage in the
which has every appearance of
real incident in the life of Socrates,
O
The®,
truth, as presenting a
and a real expression
:
158 THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? of admiration towards one
highly esteemed
to avdpi navv veog
apa
he seems
ds poi
II appevidrjg
:
'O firjpov* aioolog re poi 6rj
whom
dtivog re.
7:dvv 'npeodvr'q,
(f>
to have*
acverai
most
to tov
,
Gvpnpoasp^a yap teat
poi e<pdvrj f3a-
n
ex eiV ^dvrairaoi ysvvalov. “ Parmenides, to apply him the language of Homer, seems to me at once revered
Qog to
and awful
for
:
1
enjoyed his company once
when
very young and he was very old, and he appeared to all
things to possess a noble depth of soul.”
184, A.
w as me in
I
T
Thecetelus,
This biographical incident alone seems to us suf-
more correctly sets forth the philosmaster than Xenophon, notwithstanding the
ficient proof that Plato
ophy of
his
way
general opinion the other
and that the most meta-
;
physical dialogues of the former give a truer representation of the
mind and manner of Socrates, than the more
and practical Memorabilia. that there could not
We
;
much
to believe, that
on the ground
infer this
have been so warm, so unaffected, and
so long- cherished an admiration,
congeniality of soul
plain
had there not been
a great
and we have, therefore, every reason of
what formed the peculiar
features
mind of Socrates may perhaps be traced to the deep impression made upon him by the idealistic and metaphysCompare, also, the Sophista, 237, A., ical Parmenides. where he styles him Uappevidrjg 6 peyag, The Great Par-
of the
menides.
In a similar manner, in the beginning of the Ce-
betis Tabula,
he
is
ranked with Pythagortis, and his name
used as descriptive of the profoundest wisdom epcppojv ical deivog nepl oocj)iav Xoycp re nal epy(*> UvOayopSLOv nva
is
:
nal II appevideiov efyXoyittig the Thesetetus
some have
(3lov.
From
this
inferred that Plato
passage in
was
guilty of
an anachronism in the circumstances mentioned in the beA careful examinaginning of the dialogue Parmenides. * Iliad,
iii.,
172
Mdolog t£ pot
kooi,
<j>LXe
knvpe, deivog re.
THE ANCIENT aUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? 159 lion,
we
however, will show, as
ence
is
We
think, that
judgment on
really,
infer-
would remark generally respecting some of the phi-
we cannot
losophers of the Ionic school, that in
such an
without any real foundation.
and
not, unless
their doctrines, or decide
accurately
sit
whether they were
in the grossest sense, atheistic materialists or
we
term iravra,
can determine what they included in their
when they
said that all things flowed.
they
If
merely meant thereby that the material world was ever flowing, this might have been consistent with a pure the-
drawn arguments from
ism, and they might have even
view of things
higher attention to the
in favour of a
this
spirit-
ual and supernatural.
Such may possibly have been
case with Heraclitus.
The
the
we have
sophist Protagoras,
reason to believe on other grounds, was an unqualified athe-
Of Empedocles, who
ist.
better things, judging from
is
already referred
They have their followers,
pages 77, 115.
doubtless suffered in the extravagances of
some of whom
One
most ridiculous extent. Aristotle
to,
we hope
list,
the fragments of his po-
and especially that line which
etry that have been preserved,
we have
also in Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
many of
Metaph ., (
carried their doctrines to a of them, as
5), heraclitized
iii.,
we
are told by
'jipafcXeiTi&Lv ) to (
such an extent, that he denied that any one could leap twice, or even once, over the to
same stream,
or that
it
was
possible
speak the truth in any case whatever, because the terms
of every proposition
were changing and becoming false in Hence he finally conclu-
the very process of articulation.
ded not
to
open his
lips, but, to
other reply than simply to
ovdev
g')ÂŁto
6etv Xeyetv,
every question, made no
move his finger og to reXevralov aXXd rov daurvXov e/rivet govov. :
Some, on the other hand, carried the propositions
that sense
was knowledge, and that man was
all
to
such an extreme, as
the measure of
to affirm that everything
and that there could be nothing
false
;
things,
was
true,
the seeming oppo-
160 THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? site of the former, but, in reality,
in another shape. its
own
the proposition
with
all
This
last
antidote along with
only the same absurdity
extravagance, however, brought it
which denied
;
for, if all
this
dogma was
were
true,
equally true
the rest, and so, like the famous syllogism respect-
ing Epimenides the Cretan, the result circle of alternate contradictions. iii.
things
Cicero
(iv.), 5.
,
was an
See
Aristot.,
Academ Posieriorum .
This school of sophists, as Socrates
everlasting
,
tells
i.,
Metaph .,
12.
us in the Theae-
were likewise famous for a quibbling and eristic logic, yet had a great aversion to that sober and truth-evincing tetus,
system of dialectics which was carried on by question and
A
somewhat ludicrous account of this may be found page 180, A., B., &c. Their logic was like their answer.
philosophy, ever flowing, and incapable of being reduced to
any firm and fixed conclusions. “ You can do nothing with them (says Socrates), nor can they among themselves arrive at anything certain
and
satisfactory, but take special
care that, neither in their language nor in their philosophy,
be anything which has firmness or
shall there (
oraoifiov )
;
but against this they are continually warring,
and, as far as they can, would banish verse.
stability
all
rest from the uni-
This, although not the same, has some resem-
blance to the modern doctrine of eternal progress, which, of course,
is
eternal imperfection, and
which allows of no-
any more than the ancient tenet This phithat all things flowed and that nothing stood. losophy, too, like some of the sophisms of our own day, had thing fixed or established, ,
“ a wonderful
alacrity at sinking”
down
into the vulgar
mind, and of inspiring the masses with the most exalted opinion of the doctrine and its teachers “ so that the very ;
coblers (ot ouvrordfioi), when they had imbibed or become inspired with this profound system of fluxions, abandoned
once that foolish old notion, that some things stand (enavoavro 7]Xidi(oq olopsvoL ra pev karavai ra 6s mvsloOai
at
THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? 161 and when they were told that all things were moving they greatly honoured those who taught them this,” See as being a most comforting and democratic doctrine. tg)V ovtgjv), ,
Thesetetus, 180, A., B., &c.
In the Cratylus, which, although, in the main, a sportive
jeu
d'esprit,
does yet abound in very
and serious views, Plato dwells
which may
ories of language
at
many most
important
some length on two
the-
be derived from these two
systems of philosophy, in one of which the idea of motion,
and
in the other that of rest, are
made
respectively the ba-
sis of an inquiry into the primitive etymological structure
of words.
After most ridiculously deriving ovolav
(<
tboiav ),
or essence, from to (bOovv ( pushing or impulse ), because, on this hypothesis of Heraclitus, rd ovra ievai re rcavra
were ever movingon, or pushing ahead, and nothing stood still” (401, C.), he comes to speak of Kronus and Rhea (pea), when Socrates, nal pevetv ovdev, “
real existences
all
in his old ironical method, suddenly affects that in this
name
there
ophy.
suggested to him this whole flowing philos-
is
“ Oh,
my
good
(he exclaims),
sir
I
have just
dis-
covered a whole hive of curious lore, oprjvog tl oocpiag
A eyei vet,
f
yap nov
HpanXeirog on
nal norapov
somehow says
rravra %u>pel aal ovdev pe-
porf dnetfca^cov
rov avrov irorapov
ovtc
av
—
ra ovra Xeyec,
epdalrjg, k. r. A.”
(bg dig eg
“ Heraclitus
that all things are moving, &c,, and, in his
comparison of existences
to the course of a stream,
he even
says that one could not twice enter into the same river.*
Do you to
suppose, then, that he
Rhea and Kronus,
*
He would seem Since
all
to
this of Heraclitus
?
mean something more here than
being
the expression, that
originally gave
we
signify, that neither our
names
the progenitors of the other Gods, had
any other philosophy than
tration.
who
is
compared
to
you
mere
illus-
a
one ever-moving stream,
cannot twice enter the same
own
or do
river,
would
personal identity, nor the identity of
the universe, can remain for two consecutive moments.
O
2
162 THE ANCIENT aUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW? think that through mere accident he gave these flowing
names
both?
to
Homer makes Oceanus and Te-
Just as
thys the original and mother of the Gods, and siod also.
But Orpheus surely says,
’12
Keavdg np&TLora tcaXippoog
og pa fca(uyvr}T7)v dfiopirjTopa
See how
all
I
fjpge ya\ioio
T rjOvv
think He-
•
onviev.
these things accord with one another, and
they tend to these doctrines of Heraclitus.”
how
Cratylus 402, ,
A., B.
At the conclusion of the first part of this etymological excursus, in which he sportively finds the origin of so many words in this ancient flowing theory, he assigns as the cause of it all the want of stability in their own brains (to adopt a modern phrase), which they mistook for the everlasting
change of things and truths themselves.
(says Socrates, with grave irony) that
surmise,
men
(
ol
just like
I
“
I
think
indulged in no bad
now supposed that the very ancient when I navv naXaiot), who gave names to everything, many of our modern wits (rtiv vvv ootfitiv), in just
consequence of their getting frequently turned round
in their
search into the real nature of things, became dizzy, and then things themselves appeared to be whirling around, and to
be borne in every direction.
Wherefore they blame not
own
souls as the real cause, but
the internal state of their
say that
this is the
very nature of things that there should ,
be nothing firm or stable, but that pelv),
and are
full
of motion,
And
Cratylus, 411, C., D.
acterizes the
old authors of language
thought (namely, that ity, it is
not so.
:
all
and would wish
to
he thus char-
ironical allusion to the
They seem
to
me
to
have thus
things are in motion), but, in real-
For the
utterly confounded, like
pool,
change, and generation.”
again, 439, C.,
whole school under an “
things flow (n avra
all
fact is, that
they themselves are
men who have
fallen into a whirl
drag us in after them.
For con
:
THE ANCIENT QUESTION, DO ALL THINGS FLOW?
163
am
often
such
real-
O
sider this,
most excellent Cratylus, of which
we
dreaming,* can
as the Beautiful, the Good,” &c.
ities
ovecpojTTG),
’AFAOON
norepov
I
in truth affirm that there are
(jiojpev tc
avro
elvat
noAhaiug
3 eyd)
?
TO KAAON
uat
ual ev ercaorov tcjv ovtgjv ovrcog
In this philosophy, too, he shows that there could be no
moral or
true
political science,
cial or civil rights,
no law, no real
State,
no
so-
See
with their corresponding obligations.
the Theaetetus, 172, B., and the remarks thereupon, page
There could be no science, he
138. for
affirms, of
any kind,
must necessarily be grounded on the eternal and im-
it
A coOrjocg
mutable.
would take the place of emoTrjprj, and ’A/lAd prjv ovd’ civ yvooapa yap av emovrog rov yvco-
nothing could be really known 0si7]
ye
vtt ’
ovdevdg ovdev
oouevov aXXo
teal
•
aXXolov ycyvocro
•
nai
etc
rovrov rov
Xoyov ovre to yvooopevov ovre to yv(oo0r]o6pevov av
Hence he draws
laws of our being compel us
to affirm the real,
and not mere-
ly relative existence of these ideas, therefore there is
thing which
eerj.
the sublime conclusion, that, since the very
some-
eternal and immutable, or, in the language
is
of the ancient schools, all things do not flow, but some things
EZ de eon pev dec to ytyvCbouov, eon 6e to del
stand.
eon de to KAAON, eon de to ATAOON, TO AIKAION, ov poc (pacverac ravra op.ota ovra
ycyvcoouopevov,
eon
de
po^\
ovdev ovde
eternally
cj)opa.
“
But
if there is something which
knows and something which ,
there is
THE BEAUTIFUL,
JUST,
then things do not all seem to
tion or a flowing stream .”
and
is eternally
known
—
if
THE GOOD, and THE me
to
be similar to mo-
Cratylus 440, B. ,
No word could better express that peculiar state of which Socrates (or Plato) often contemplated his favourite Sometimes he seems to be perfectly assured of doctrine of ideas. * bveipuTTo.
mind
in
the real existence of the nakov, &c., the Fair, the Just, and the
Good.
seems
Again, he appears perplexed with doubt, and, at other times, to
have but a glimpse, as in a dream, of some such bright rem-
iniscences of a better state.
MATHEMATICAL USE OF THE WORD Xoyog
164
XXI.
Word
Mathematical Use of the
Page
avdXoyov
It
is
would signify here This
ralione.
The common reading
.
the other, however,
;
preferred.
dam
ava Xoyov
24, Line 6.
Xoyog (especially
is
Xoyog. is
unquestionably to be
qua -
'proportionally , certa
called in Latin ratio ,
and
in all mathematical writings),
Greek
in
because a
simple quantity or magnitude, irrespective of the relation
it
bears to another as a multiple or a divisor, cannot be an object of science, or be contemplated
only an
dXoyov
by the mind.
It
remains
object of sense, aloOrj-rov , being, to the intellect,
See the Theaetetus,
and therefore ayvcoorov.
,
202, B.
It is this
relation or ratio
which becomes the
true
votjtov or real object of the mind, while the sensible figure ,
serves
only as
Hence
it
which
is
is
the
diagram by which
it
styled the Xoyog, ratio, or reason
predicated of
its
or word as well as reason ,
subject, ;
and hence
because,
exhibited.
is
It is
.
Xoyog,
is its
when viewed
as sim-
ple quantity or magnitude, nothing can be said about truth affirmed respecting
that
it,
no
it.
This Xoyog, or reason ever implies a third thing or mid,
dle term, namely, the
common measure
or divisor to
both quantities must be referred, and by which
we
which
are ena-
bled to predicate the one as a part, or multiple, or any certain ratio of the other.
and immutable
The Xoyot
or ratios are absolute
must
verities of science, as all voTjra
be,
while the alaOrjrd by which they are suggested are mutable, flowing,
solute.
and without anything which can be styled ab-
They
likewise
among themselves, and ratios,
ad
infinitum.
In
of being
compared
thus give rise to others
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;ratios of
are
capable
modern works
meaning of the term is lost sight Latin ratio without any reference
of,
the simple radical
because
to its
we
use the
primary sense, as
MATHEMATICAL USE OF THE WORD
165
Xoyog.
same with the Greek koyog, and hence the great vagueness which prevails in most minds respecting this plain mathematical idea. In some of our older mathematical works, such as the English editions of Euclidâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Elements by Dee and Barrow respectively, our own word reason is everywhere properly employed instead of ratio. By this the
means the metaphysical notion of ratio is kept before the mind as the intelligible, by which what would otherwise be merely, as magnitude, an object of sense, becomes known See Proclus, Comto the intellect as an object of science. mentary on Euclidâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Elements, lib. i. All mathematical truths, and especially the geometrical, are ultimately to be resolved into a comparison of ratios.
For even parallelism, and other properties which would seem to have no connexion with it, do, after all, depend upon certain
they derive their Xoyoq, notion, or definition.
mathematical science
which
or correspondences, from
equalities
is finally
down
brought
So
that all
to those in-
nate ideas of the to loov &c., which are discussed in the ,
Phsedon, and of which visible magnitude
Even
simplest ratio. it
is
It
is that
which
lies evenly, equally, or, as
;
that
is,
to
its
extreme
having nothing capable of being predicated
of the one side and not of the other.
Playfair and others
have entirely misunderstood the expression, and
have greatly bungled ting a far
in their efforts to
more complex idea
tion of Euclid.
own
only suggestive.
expressed by Euclid, e^toov, between
points
seem
is
a straight line involves this idea of the to loov, or
amend, by
for this old
Any one who
is
to
substitu-
and perfect
defini-
capable of consulting his
consciousness, must acknowledge that the language of
Euclid best expresses that innate idea of straightness, which
we
ever apply, as the perfect ideal exemplar, to the deter-
mination of visible figure.
From
this
use of the word Xoyog
tudes and numbers
whose
ratio
it is,
that those
magni-
cannot be expressed by
166
PARADOX OF CIRCULAR MOTION.
—
that is, which have no common divisor by which one may be predicated as any arithmetical part or multiple of another are called aXoya, and in modern
other numbers
—
Two
works, irrational.
may be
magnitudes, however,
arithmetically incommensurable or irrational, like the side
and diagonal of the square, the circumference and diameter
among numbers
of the circle, or what are styled surds
may be, and which renders them
yet, in all these cases, there
often
rical representation
rational,
be styled the expression of the
is,
and
;
a geomet-
and may
Xoyog, or reason, just
ratio,
as well as though they were embraced
by some common
numerical divisor.
Much on this subject of quantities, styled dXoya or irrational, may be found in Euclid’s Laws of the Musical Can,
on, as contained in Meibomius.
All concords, let
it
be
marked, are founded on rational numbers, while the tional ever first
produce discords under
all
have a Xoyog or reason, and the
suggest
it,
perceives this reason in
circumstances.
soul, its
when
re-
irra-
The
the sounds
supersensual being,
although unconscious of the intellectual process on which
and hence a delight which mere sense could never furnish. Where this process is made objective, and It would thus presented to the mind, it is called science. it
depends
;
net be difficult to refer to the ratio all the
same ideas of
equality and
fundamental elements of the beauty of figure
and motion.
XXII.
Paradox of Circular Motion.
Page yeyovev.
24, Line 8
This
is
.
A/A
6i)
rcov 'davfiaoTGjv andvrcov
Trrjyrj
stated as a sort of strange paradox, that
one motion should be
at
the
same time greater and
less, or
should give rise to different velocities, according as the rev-
the words
(pOloig, yevEOig^
naOog and (pOopa ,
167
.
was nearer to, or more remote from, the centre, while there was but one impulse distributing itself proportionally, ava Xoyov, to every part. The paradox, however, elution
arises from confounding circular, or angular, with rectilineal
The
motion.
compound
idea of the latter arises from a
comparison of two elements, namely, the space passed over, and the time employed in the passage. Hence, there being
no absolute measure of space, there can be nothing absolute The other must be always referabout rectilineal motion. red to the centre of motion, and the time occupied in one revolution
;
other words, one must be referred to
or, in
space and time, the other also be said to is
to
The
time only.
have something absolute about
an absolute standard of angular space.
tions of the inner concentric circles of the cle,
moving on one
circle, are all the
rying infinitely
may
latter
since there
it,
Hence the mosame great cir-
centre, identical with the centre of the
same when thus measured, although
when
The
referred to other points.
va-
veloci-
ty of the hour hand of a watch, that revolves once in twen-
same with that of the earth on its axis. If the same hour hand could be conceived of as extending to the moon, the tangential velocity of its extremity would be greater than the orbit motion of that body exceeding ty-four hours, is the
many thousand city,
miles a minute
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; and yet
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
its
absolute velo-
taken as a whole, would be that same slow and almost
imperceptible motion which apoears in our timepieces.
XXIII.
The Words cpdtmg, yeveoig
Page word
25, Line 5. cpOivei
.
.
,
tt ddog,
(pOopa.
apicpoTepa diroXXvrai.
(pOivei (<pQioig) is applied to a diminution of the
ber of parts or particles of which a body out a
and
is
This
num-
composed, with-
change of the essential idea, law, or nature.
It
is
.
the words
168
(ftOcoig,
yeveoig TraOog, ,
man and
a fat
taken away.
It is
which
the opposite of
express the difference between
a lean one, the other between a living
and a dead body.
<J>0mo
is
man
generally intransitive, but
sometimes used in a transitive sense, as in the
407
used
is
nature, or idea of a thing (that is
The one would
ytyverat.
(j>0opd
’AnohXvraL
the opposite of avt-dvercu, av^rjocg.
where the very law, makes it what it is)
and
;
is
Iliad, vi.,
:
A aijjiovie
(pdioeL
a e to gov pevog.
$6lvg) and (f>0tpevog are applied by the poets to the dead,
more
but
a metaphorical than a strictly philosophical
in
When
sense.
thus poetically used, they
still
some-
retain
thing of their primary meaning, and suggest the conception of the wasted the emaciated the weak ,
,
(
apevrjvd tcap7]va), as
though the ghostly state were but a diminution of their
mer
for-
same manner the poets use /tapovTeg the The Hebrews seem to have had something of the same metaphorical conception in their word CD'KSn T In the
life.
wearied
,
the deceased.
,
•
l
Mere increment
or diminution is said to take place as
long as the naOeGTrjKvla
ei-tg ,
remains
the constituting state ,
But
(diapevy, continues through , or survives the change ).
may be
destroyed both ways ('dp&orepa ), that
or av^rjotg,
when
becomes
affected.
not take
away
it is,
is,
by
it
(pOiotg ,
carried so far that the law of the body
No
increment or decrement which does
that £§tg^ or state,
can ever amount
which makes a thing what change denoted by cj)6opd,
to that great
and the verb dnoXXvpt.
Until this takes place, the real or
phenomenal idenwhich depends on the numer-
essential identity remains, although that tity
may have been
ical
sum
particle still, if
ed, if,
affected,
So that we may say, that, if every of matter has been removed and replaced by others, or aggregate.
during the process the KaOeoTTjuvla e^tg
it is
the same body, although not the
is
preserv-
same matter
on the other hand, no single material particle be
lost,
and yet
)
the words if,
in
any way,
(pdioig , yeveoig,
,
has been destroyed,
e%ig
tliis
naOog and
169
(pOopa.
no longer
it is
tKe same, but there has taken place the yeveoig of some-
thing else, having a different name, a different law, and a
few
different identity, or, as is said a
lines below, perada-
Xdv elg dXXrjv e%iv diecpOaprai navreXkg, â&#x20AC;&#x153; passing into another state, fore was,
it
is utterly
no longer
See Note XXV.,
is,
destroyed
whatever
may have
on the difference
which be-
the thing
taken
its
place.
between yeveoig and
aXXoiuoig.
The next is
question
What
is,
yeveoig, or generation
is
It
?
rather abruptly put by the supposed interlocutor, yet
still
enough suggested by what precedes Tiyverai to which the suc6rj navriov yeveoig tjvik dv r'l naOog onorav is given A kg ap%r\ XaOovoa answer ceeding fXov is
naturally
:
1
;
:
av^rjv, k. t. A., â&#x20AC;&#x153; It is evident (that generation takes place ,
or that the peculiar
naOog under which it takes place
ever a principle principium, or law of
is)
when-
here put for the originating idea the ,
life
anything
to
(that is, being developed in the
receiving growth,
outward or material ) passes
into the second change, and from
this into the next,
and so
coming as far as to three, it arrives at such a state become an object of sensation.â&#x20AC;? This is certainly
on, until,
as to
rather obscure, but perhaps as well expressed as
life to its
seem
material organic development.
to refer to the three
breadth, and thickness,
possess in some degree definite less,
pos-
attempt to set forth the transition from the law
sible, in the
of
was
Tpikv would
mathematical dimensions, length,
which every object of sense must ;
or
it
may
be intended as an
in-
number, representing the stages, be they more or
through which the thing generated must pass, until
become an
object of sensation, visible, tangible, &c.
P
it
;
PHILOSOPHY OF THE VERB
170
to be.
XXIV. Philosophy of the Verb
TO BE.
Platonic Use of dpi and
ylyvopai.
MeradaXXov pev ovv ovro aai perauvovpevov ylyverai ndv. eon de bvrcog ov onorav pev^j perabaXov de elq aXXrjv egtv dtecpdaprai navreXtiq. The
Page
25,
Line 11
.
*
here are emphatic, and must have their precise meaning. â&#x20AC;&#x153; While thus changing and moving, it is in the
tenses
act of being generated.
and stands (that to
is,
but after
It
perabdXXei, and for
its
is utterly
it
becomes
destroyed.â&#x20AC;?
fixed
state,
M evyf
it
is
philosophical sense, as opposed to
eorr}iie, in
the language of the schools,
as opposed to tavelrai or to that ,
or motion.
when
is,
has passed into another
it
the former thing)
be taken here in
really
which
is
in a constant flux
This, however, can only strictly be applied to
the law or idea, and in this sense
it
includes what Plato so
by the phrase del tiara ravra, &c., as that which remains unaffected amid the material mutations to which it is constantly subject.
often expresses
It
may be, however,
that ovrcoq ov is not to be taken here
in the highest philosophical sense, as
vov but more ,
according to the vulgar
opposed
to yiyvope-
usage of the substan-
tive verb, as signifying the real being, not
simply of the
law or idea, but of the generated material object ring that period in state.
It is
flux, like
which
it
suffers
no
ndOog,
itself,
du-
or change of
because they are always suffering change or
a river ever passing away, and never for two suc-
moments preserving the same numerical or aggre* gate identity, that even some of the ancient philosophers who were theists denied that generated material things were at all entitled to the epithet ovrcoq ovra. Plato, howcessive
ever, clearly regards their identity as not
number and the aggregate mass
;
depending upon
but as long as they suffer
TLATONIC USE OF no naOog by which does not hesitate
to
rj
elflL
AND J lyVOgai.
171
taken away, he
fcaOeoTrjitvia e%ig is
apply to them this higher substantive
verb, although entitled to
only by partaking for a time of
it
which it truly and in itself belongs. Modern scientfic men seem to be making rapid advance to this position of some of the ancients, that, in the material world, that idea, to
things are ever flowing, and nothing stands.
all
that
we
could say, that they
ras, Plato,
and Parmenides,
held as firmly as Pythago-
all
higher and far more real
to a
universe of truth, in which
was
all
Would
immutable, and
stable,
eternal as the throne of God.
There h[ii
is
a most important distinction between the verbs
and ylyvopai on which ,
length, although
here dwell
at
some
every page in Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s dialogues
almost
might have given occasion
many
we would
for
such an excursus.
In fact,
portions of this writer are not fully comprehensible,
in their highest intended
distinctions
mind.
when
meaning, unless the philosophical
between these words are kept constantly
They
in
are often emphatic, and used antithetically,
the careless reader
little
suspects
it
and thus sen-
;
tences most pregnant in meaning seem frequently to contain
mere truisms, or propositions of a most unmeaning
character.
we
In defining the Platonic sense of these words,
rely directly on the authority of the philosopher him-
self,
in the Timaeus, 27, P., 28, A.
alone,
had there been no
other,
we
From
this
passage
are justified in saying,
that elpi, in its highest sense, expresses essential, eternaJ-
necessary, self-existent, independent, uncaused being or essence, having no dependence on time
ytyvofiai, expresses
and
space.
phenomenal, temporal
,
The
other,
contingent , de-
pendent being, generated in time and space.
This philosophical distinction in
any other Greek
ed led him
to
writer,
is
more
clear in Plato than
because the subjects he discuss-
be more precise in the application of those
primary meanings of the terms in question, which grew not
172
PHILOSOPHY OF THE VERB
be
to
.
out of philosophy, but must have been coeval with the
most
roots of this
Whatever
spiritual language.
themes may be, whether
inal
his
first
nom-
ethical, sesthetical, physical,
or metaphysical, they are, in his treatment, almost always
made
ultimately to turn, in a greater or less degree, on the
distinctions in the
modes
proceeds
far before
we
two
of being expressed by these
However he may commence,
verbs.
the argument seldom
are engaged in the consideration of
many
the eternal, the immutable, the one in the
(to ev ev
noXXolg), the del ovra in contrast with the temporal, the ,
The
changeable, the individual, and the generated.
differ-
ence between the classes of ideas expressed by these two verbs must be kept in mind everywhere in reading his more serious dialogues
;
and in many parts
may be
it
said to
some of his most valuable thoughts. The key passage, in which they are placed in most remarkable contrast, is one which we have already partly quoted for another purpose (page 96), but whose importance will jusform the key
tify its
the
to
In the Timaeus he defines
being presented again.
two grand departments
into
which
all
being or substance
is divided, namely, on the one hand, the sensible world , with
phenomena and, on the
its
,
other, the intellectual world in,
cluding soul as the oldest essence, and also those eternal truths, ideas, or principles,
garded fact,
ing
of entities
even more real than matter
itself,
de ovk exov *
to pev
,
TITNOMENON
ml
tl to
drj
vorjaeL
have
re-
although their dwell-
not in the world of time and space
was
to
— as existences, in
npCdrov dtaipereov Tade- tl to ’'ON pev
drj
Te
which Plato seems
name
as entitled to the
per,
:
del, v
"E otlv ovv
TENE2IN
ON
de ovdeno-
peTd Xoyov nepL^rjnTbv, del
v
mra
>
TavTa ON. nav de av to yvyvopevov vtt clItlov Tivoq e% dvdynpg y lyveodat. navTl yap ddvvaTOV x^pl? clItlov yeveav oxelv. And again, in continuation of the same distinction
:
yevecrecjg
haenTeov ovv
drj
uepl rravTog,
dpx^ v ex^v ovdeplav
fj
re OTepov
PETONEN
T
HN
del
an’ apx^g
platonic use of
and yiyvopai,
elfiL
In another part of
Timceus, 28, A., C.
tlvoc ap^dfievog.
173
passage he contrasts ovoid (or essence) with ye-
same knowledge with opinion, 29, C. It must not be expected always to find these two verbs used with this philosophical precision even in Plato. In mere narration, conthis
veotg, as
fined simply to the assertion of facts, without reference to
the nature of the objects, fjv
and eyevero are often conIn such cases the
founded, and used one for the other.
substantive verbs simply perform the office of an asserting copula, without
any respect
here, however,
we
to the
The
difference in their application. rodotus,
whenever tie
of being.
plain
his subject requires
trast strongly, as in lib.
rcbv decor, errs
mode
iii.,
53
:
it,
presents the con-
evOev 6e eyevero etcaorog
In the dialogues of Plato,
del rjoav.
however, the distinction, whenever important, fully
preserved
;
Even
marked historian He-
often find in careful writers a
and we
may
is
ever care-
say, generally, from a review
of the Platonic writings, that in
all
cases which require
is the appropriate word to exwhich IS necessarily, such as the existence and
care in the use of terms, eori press that
attributes of the Deity, the
poreal substance, the
Thus, imply
for far
independent existence of incor-
eternal truth of a moral distinctions.
example, the sentence
eon ro ayaOov, would
more than simply the assertion of a
expression,
when used with
fact.
In this
philosophical strictness, eori
performs the office of a predicate as well as of a copula, and
mode as well as the There is expressed by it, without the aid fact of being. of any other words, a general and most important proposithat predicate, moreover, includes the
tion,
namely, that the idea of goodness
is
not merely rela-
tive or accidental, or the result of the mindâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s generalization
from outward
acts, but
an absolute, eternal verity; that
it
has an absolute existence in the Divine mind, and that there
is
a fixed foundation for the absolute, and not merely
relative nature of
moral distinctions.
P
2
In the sciences, this
PHILOSOPHY OF THE VERB
174
term would be peculiarly appropriate
to the enunciation of
the truths of geometry and numbers. ositions the ideas of cause is
no ysvEOiq.
other, or,
One
and
effect
to be.
In mathematical prop-
have no place. There
truth is essentially connected with an-
rather, seen in
it
The
as eternally abiding.
ap-
pearance of sequence arises from the necessities and imperfections of our in time
;
and yet
own it
is
minds, compelling us strictly true, that
them
to state
every property of
every mathematical figure, and every corresponding mode of generating, contains in itself every other property, and that, as far as theory, irrespective of
convenience,
cerned, any one of them might, with equal truth, be the fundamental Xoyog, or definition from
should
be
evolved.
which
con-
is
made
all
the rest
Mathematical propositions,
strictly
speaking, have no relation to time, being eternally true,
without past, succession, or future.
We
may, without con-
tradiction or absurdity, conceive of a period
when
may
it
cease to be true, that bodies attract in the inverse ratio of the squares of their distances, but never
when
it
shall be
longer a truth, that the square of the hypotenuse to the*
sum
of the squares of the two sides.
is
no
equal
To make
use
of the verb ylyvojicu, therefore, in the enunciation of a
mathematical theorem, would be introducing a foreign and altogether heterogeneous idea.
would be most appropriate to
the ever- moving
the
to
law of cause and
latter substantive
effect, as
of nature regarded as under
having a beginning and an
dno^v^eva
;
although even these
may be stated as absolute truths, and, generally, are stated when the mind conceives of them as involving mately something that reason of some such d
is
necessary and eternal.
'priori
verb
physics or natural philosophy,
phenomena
end, as yiyvofieva nal
This
conception, whether
rect or not, that the primary laws of physics
come
thus ulti-
It is it
to
by
be corbe ex-
pressed in the same language with the axioms of the pure
mathematics.
:
platonic use of
and yiyvopai.
elpl
175
the etymological origin of these two verbs may,
Even
without any extravagance of fancy, be supposed to betoken
The primary elements
between them.
the vast difference
of the one (ew e el) are found in the most aethereal of the
vowels.
The
guttural
mutes
other (yaw y) has for its ultimate radical the hardest, and, we might almost say, the most earthly of the
and, of
(y//),
;
for
the origin of the term for earth
is
it
most easily associated with the
all letters, is
conceptions of the sensible or tactual.
Plato, although a
very poor philologist, seems to recognise the connexion
y r\ yap pog
*
D.
r
yevvrjTEipa av
opOtig KEuXrjpEvrj, tog (prjOLv "O \ir\-
eirj
to yap yeydaoc yeyevvTjoOai Xeysi.
Cralylus
dvvapcg.
These with the ever, as
use
;
distinctions clearly exist,
rov
and are probably coeval
elements of the language.
we have
their full
rj
427, B.
Ib.,
first
410,
,
Trjg yXo)TT7jg 6e dXioOavovorjg avriXapbaverat
They do
not,
how-
remarked, appear so obvious in ordinary
power being evinced only
in the discussion
of those truths, in which are involved the very ideas that are radical in the words themselves. are so distinctly
Greek tent,
in
literature,
and
is
this
many passages is
language.
who may be
in Plato.
probably to be found,
May we
account they
The
diffused throughout the
and under various forms of expression,
known God,
marked
of the difference, however,
spirit
On
to
some ex-
in almost
every
not believe that, in this way,
regarded as the author of language as
well as of everything else, has provided an antidote against
which our depraved nature is so continis surely no small protection against this,
that materialism to
ually tending.
It
that there are to be found (and perhaps in every tongue)
may have been their at w ar with the sensual
terms which, whatever ever be irreconcilably
T
origin,
must
or atheistic
hypothesis.
The
great truth of the real existence of incorporeal sub -
stance , as something independent of, and not posterior
to,
or
176
PHILOSOPHY OP THE VERB
to be.
a result of matter, lies at the foundation of
We
religion.
verily believe, too, that
all faith
whosoever
latent doubt of this lies at the bottom of all its
various forms.
ism, a system into
It is all to
all
will care-
examine his own consciousness must admit,
fully
and
that a
skepticism, in
all
be resolved into material-
which such a verb as
eotl, in its purest
The
philosophical sense, could not consistently enter.
ex-
istence of an Eternal Spirit, independent of the organization
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; the real
of the world by which he manifests himself istence of our
own
ex-
souls as something in the order of na-
ture, if not of time, prior to,
zation of our bodies
mortality of the soul
and independent
of,
the organi-
the consequent immateriality and im-
;
;
the eternal existence of
styled necessary truths
;
all
which are
the eternity of moral distinctions
;
the existence of moral attributes as the highest part of the
Divine character, and the solemn verities of the Christian
and the Christian redemption, as flowing necessarily
faith
from the above truths in their relation in every thinking
to
man
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
all
these are,
and well-balanced mind that has receiv-
ed a religious or Christian education, parts of one system
;
are inseparably connected together, so that a doubt of
all
one
is
with
it
a doubt of
all,
and a firm conviction of one brings
a satisfactory belief in
ment which
all
the rest.
The prime
ele-
runs throughout, is a firm faith in the reality of
incorporeal substance or that there ,
is
verse besides the sensible world and
something in the uniits
phenomena, some
God or soul than that pantheistic power which is only another name for their combined manifestation in short,
other
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
some eyrcoofiia
vnepKoofila, as the origin and cause of the ipvxi] ,
as well as of the material world in
ergies are displayed.
Yet
it
must be confessed,
downward tendency in our fallen race to do not like to retain God in our knowledge.
is
a
tendency (unless checked, as interpositions at special
which
it
its
en-
that there
atheism.
We
We
find this
ever has been, by Divine
times of grace) gradually infecting
PLATONIC USE OF
AND ylyVOgai.
Elfll
177
individuals and nations, giving an atheistic tinge to Ian-
guage, and corrupting and finally destroying religious belief.
There
is, at
the beginning of this, the opposite of the con-
viction before mentioned
— a secret and almost unconscious
skepticism, a suspicion, a fear, and in some, perhaps, a
hope, that all
is
nature that ,
the mere succession of
all is
generation (yeveaig), or
phenomena
;
that there is nothing
naO' eavTijv, absolute, necessary, eternal, self-existent, or, in other words,
Now we
d)$*
ovdsv
earrjiie , that
nothing stands
.
cannot help indulging the thought, however ex-
may appear to some, that the Divine Author of who careth for us,” and who arranges all things about his own eternal decrees, does exert a provi-
travagant
it
our race, “ to bring
dential control over so important an instrument as speech,
and that ed
in these
in their
and
their
two substantive verbs, so
distinctly
mark-
primary sense, their philosophical applications,
numerous derivative and kindred terms, he has
stamped upon the noblest language of earth, an indelible impression of the eternal distinction between the classes of
substances denoted by them, and of the real existence of those great truths so fundamental to all others, the chief of which is, u that IS and that he is the rewarder of those
HE
,
him” Especially would this seem to be a sober conclusion, when we consider how, in the providence of God, this same language was intended to be the medium of a Divine revelation, and the teaching of a widespread Christian theology. The modern tongue which comes the nearest to it in this respect is the German. And
who
diligently seek
may we
not regard this, too, as intended, by
its
ual character, to resist effectually the neology
ism which have been attempted
May we
not hope, that, after
German mind, fluences tive
which
to
all
high
spirit-
and natural-
be conveyed through
it ?
the extravagances of the
the conservative, religious, and spiritual inin this
and other respects exist
in their na-
Teutonic, will yet hold them firm to those great truths
178
f HILOSOPHY
which
OF THE VERB
are the foundation of
Materialism can a
all faith.
best only babble in other languages
to be.
cannot speak
it
:
at all
German, without the use of words which must continually remind it of its absurdities and contradictions.
Greek
in
The
or
English, and most of the modern languages of Eu-
ope, are very deficient in the expression of the distinction
conveyed by these verbs. Words,
it is
true,
may
be found,
which may be forced into a sort of awkward correspondence but they want that unction, that naturalness, that di;
and easy contrast with the opposing terms, which
rect
would show that they are in harmony with the genius and spirit
Hence
of the language.
the almost impossibility of
a faithful and yet lively translation of Plato into the French
and English.
we needed proof how poorly the Latin is purpose, it may be found in the version of
If
aapted to this
by Ficinus, and even in the translation of the same dialogue by Cicero, of which a large fragment yet the Timeeus
remains.*
We may trace even where
Among
the distinction between
we may
not suppose
it
to
elfit
and
ytyvofjtat,
have been directly
in
modern authors, there is no one in whose writings seem more wanted than in those of the English He often seems to labour with the stiff Plato, Ralph Cudworth. Latin, and the still more clumsy English, when the Greek sljui and ytyvoyai would have helped him at once out of all difficulty. As, *
all
these Greek words
for
example, when speaking of the eternity of truth, and of
inde-
its
pendence even of the creating or generating power of the Divine he means just what will, he says, that â&#x20AC;&#x153;it cannot be made, but is Flato'would have expressed by the words, ovderzors kyevero
alX
dec
Eng.
ed.
eon.
And
System of
Intellectual
again, vol.
iii.,
p.
405,
the
Universe
may
exist in
our imperfect language, and for the ble author,
we cannot
help thinking
Aristotle to express the ovd^Trore kyevero.
vol.
where he wishes
English, that â&#x20AC;&#x153; the perfect triangle, &c., really yet existed, and never
,
is,
how
same thought by
376,
it
As we
never
feel for
of our most admira-
easily the
the
p.
to tell us in
although
rerum natural difficulties
dM/deca,
i]
iii.,
Greek enables
same words,
del kart,
:
PLATONIC USE OF the
mind of
conveyed.
its
Thus,
adaptedness to the truth intended
example, in the
for
Gospel of John, the one
We
first
which derived
be
to
verses of the
applied to the Eternal
is
other to the sensible world,
him.
179
have arisen (perhaps uncon-
the writer, but to
sciously) from
AND J lyvopai.
elflL
its
A oyog,
the
yeveoig from
might, in defence of this position, say at once,
were specially suggested by the Holy Spirit, the *eal author of the passage, without supposing John himself to have had any acquaintance with the Platonic wriBut tings, or to have intended any philosophical contrast. distinction as growing recognise the without this, we can
that the terms
directly out of the genius of the language, although, in the
expression of truths in which
did not enter, either verb,
it
or both, might have been used, without anything special to attract
But John was treating of a subject
observation.
which, of
all
others, called for the contrast
whether Xoyog
is
preme Reason,
or for the Eternal
Person
used here
in the Trinity.
extravagance
in*
;
and
that, too,
for a personification of the
There
is,
Su-
Son of God, the second
then, no absurdity and no
supposing that the words are here used,
not in their ordinary narrative sense, but with special re-
gard to their primary differences, osophical strictness.
them- than of the other.
may
This r
lower class of existences
Hv
when employed
or kart
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; and
it
in phil-
be more clear of one of
may
is this
be applied
that has rendered
necessary the qualifying adverb, ovrojg, which frequently in the Platonic phrase, ovrcog ov
cannot well be used for the higher.
One
to the
we
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; but
find so
eyevero
the least familiar
with the genius of the Greek language must feel the impropriety of the expression, ev
had
apxy eyevero
6 Qeog
;
unless
it
been actually intended to teach the fabulous generations
of such gods as Hesiod treats of in his Theogonia,
came from an
older
<\>voig ,
who
all
and were generated out of Chaos
and the broad-bosomed Earth
— PHILOSOPHY OF THE VERB
180
to be.
Xaog TENET’, avrap eneira
’TI tol [lev Tcpcortara
YaV evpvorepvog
I
Travroiv edog aocbaXeg alec.
,
Hesiod, Theog ., 117.
A much tures
may
more clear and
be found John,
most remarkable
example from the
striking viii.,
Here we have
58.
and here
antithesis,
we
been expressed
NE20AI
received his yeveotg
WAS,
and ever
.
AM,
,
eternally
SHALL BE
brew rynx, Exodus,
To
Aeyw vplv
and
into being
essentially
or
,
AM,
dpi, here, like the He-
for
:
seems
14,
iii.,
in-
TE-
rrplv ’A dpaap
— Before Abraham came I
was
the designed idea could not Jiave
’Aprjv dprjv
:
EIMI
eyed
it,
the
feel confident in
saying, not only that the philosophical distinction
tended, but that, without
Scrip-
to include all tenses.
be convinced that this juxtaposition of words was not
accidental, or used merely for the sake of variety, let us
compare the other modes namely,
irplv
9
A 6paap
veoOat eyd) eyevoprjv perceived, but
that
dvai ;
might seem
eyco d\u, or
and the difference
be equivalent,
is
ye-
not only to be
In consequence of our using the soli-
felt.
tary verb to be for both
modes
and y iyvopai, the English
elpt
to
npiv ’Abpaap
setting forth the truth in all
its
of existence expressed by fails,
and ever must
fulness.
It is
in
fail,
not extrava-
gant to suppose that our Saviour here intended, and the
—
Jews understood, a direct reference to Exodus, iii., 14 that I AM where the Septuagint employs the participle of elpi as a name or personal appellation of the Deity,
—
AM
corresponding to the "I2N hath sent
me
Hebrew rrnx,
or
DUV, namely, O f
There seems, also, good reathis term, O "QN, may, in some
unto you.
son for the opinion that
f
other passages, have the force of a descriptive appellation (as
one of the Divine names), instead of being a mere par-
As
ticipial copula.
T2N, ent ndvrcov
whom, according Tehovah
,
God
in the noted passage,
tiedg,
evXoyyrog
to the flesh
over
all,
(
Kara
Rom.,
ix.,
5
elg roi)g aitivag.
oaptca),
blessed forever .
was
f
O
— Of
Christ,
The
The Hebraism,
PLATONIC USE OF
(wsn
Kara capita
AND ylyVOgUi.
ELflL
181
the only form of expression in
1
'D ?), is
corresponds to the Greek Kara which ysveciv and, by keeping this in mind, we find that there is the same contrast, Rom., ix., 5, as in John, i., 1, 2, 14 that language,
at all
;
:
Kal o Xoyog cap% eyevero
Transfer the Hebraistic idiom
.
more philosophical Greek, and this contrast would be Kara ye thus set forth Kar ovciav ev apxxj fjv 6 Xoyog to
veav cap £ o cbv Kal o
,
Compare,
Eyevero.
,
i]v.
—
’
:
We
are
who
also, Rev.,i., 8, ’E ytb Eipu
aware of the objections
and have no expectation that those
will
it
to
Exodus,
mind of one who
naturally left on the
to all this,
have much force with
entertain different views in theology
such impression of a reference
-
iii.,
;
some
but
very
14, is
believes,
on other
grounds, in the Divinity and eternal self-existence of the
being here styled
The Logos.
This impression receives
strength, also, from the supposition that the language of the
Septuagint version of Exodus,
passed into a descriptive
among
the Old Testament
Should
14 (6 cbv ), had already
and been ranked
appellation,
names
be thought that
it
iii.,
of the Deity.
we
are too
much
inclined to
represent Paul and John as Platonizing, or as indulging in the use of philosophical language, in the
case of the former, to Acts,
£ g) gev, Kal
KivovgeOa
move, and are
The
itat
eogev.
we would xvii.,
—
28
“ In
:
simply
refer,
’Ev avrcp yap
him we
live ,
and
allusion here, as well as in other
Greek schools is too plain to be mistaken and it does not seem extravagant to suppose, that the Apostle had in mind the Greek and Hebrew names respectively of their Supreme Deity The etymology of Jehovah is suggested at once by Exodus, parts of that chapter, to the language of the ;
iii.,
14.
It
he styles
it
may
be called the proper name of God,
himself, his memorial
Essentially Existent one (6 ojv) himself, and else.
who
is
;
to all
generations
the Being
who has
or,
as
— The life
in
the source of existence to el^rything
In spiritual substances, life and being are the same.
Q
PHILOSOPHY OF THE VERB
182
The two
Hebrew
roots in
to be.
expressive of these two ideas,
namely, rrn and rrn, are so nearly alike, that they
may
be
regarded as from one source, and, in some cases, as nearly
Hence
synonymous.
Old Testament, The Living God ended merely dead
to distinguish the
idols of the
common
the appellation so
To
.
God
in the
say that this
of the
is in-
Jews from
the
Heathen, or from their deified dead men,
None
Heathen nations, any more than the Romanists of modern times, were ever so besotted as to worship their idols without reis
not to give
it
half
meaning.
its
of the
garding them, in some measure, as the representatives of
The
living and immortal beings.
have had a higher significance, and seems to refer
name Jehovah necessarily
caused to
—
— The Being
—who has
life
priori, as the
to this
that not only exists, but exists
and un-
in himself, unoriginated
that Divine existence
admit a
must
epithet, therefore,
which the mind
ground of the belief in
is
compelled
all
other ex-
istences, or as a necessary truth, the contrary of which,
when
fairly presented,
cannot be admitted without bringing
darkness over every other
truth.
en found in the Old Testament, is
used
to
61
Hence
the appeal so
As I live
,
Gese-
denote the highest ground of certainty.
nius and other
German
critics,
oft-
saith the Lord,”
indulging their propensity
ever to undervalue the testimony of the Scriptures, and to lessen our reverence for their antiquity and sacred authority,
assign an Egyptian origin to this name, and deduce
from an inscription upon the temple Plutarch
am
that
:
at Sais, as
’Eyc5 el[U to yeyovbg teal ov
which has been,
is,
teal
and shall be.”
it
given by
eodyevov
.
—“ 1
This inscrip-
tion, although, perhaps, itself comparatively modern, may have contained an old Egyptian sentiment; and yet such
an admission would not militate
brew
origin of the
name, and
its
at all against the
pure He-
derivation from ideas ex-
isting in the patriarchal ages, or in that
common
early the-
ology which was transmitted pure to the Jew, while
it
w^as
v
;
PLATONIC USE OF
EL[H
AND
-
To
183
yiyV0\iai.
same early source must we look for the notion on which was grounded the etymology of the Greek Z evg, and which presents so strong corrupted by every other nation.
the
a contrast with the corruptions of the subsequent mythology.
Although
may
it
idea of the
itive
approach
to
have done,
not be precisely the
Hebrew There
it.
same with
the prim-
term, there certainly seems is
no need of
travelling, as
some
some
to the Sanscrit for the origin of this term.
seems as purely Greek as Qeog and
A aipojv, and
It
nothing
can be more simple, or less liable to the charge of being forced, than the
He
tylus.
lonv
rjplv teal rolg
tov
0
rj
and
us,
etymology which Plato gives us in the Cra-
derives Zevg , Zrjva, from
apx^ v ts
events,
all
it
was
ical
etymology
:
Ov yap
no one
is sufficient for
who
.
to
more prop-
is
and king of
— “ For
all
things.”
our present argument, that
the received and probably well-known philosophin Paul’s time,
therefore, to suppose that
and we have every reason,
he alludes
passage of his sermon at Athens. eopev,
live
to
fiaoiXevg tCjv navreov
to all other beings, there is
this
,
aXXoig Traotv bong eorlv alnog paXXov
erly the cause of life than the ruler
At
t'q
we
to
it
in this
famous
In the words ^bjpev and
have the radical Greek and Hebrew ideas com-
bined in one description, composed of terms severally significant of motion said,
he
is
,
life ,
and essence
our Zevg and our Jehovah:
“For
and are as some of your own poets have ,
had
as though Paul in
him we
said,”
<fcc.
live
We
by this view, to suppose that the Aposexercise any false liberality towards the cor-
are no more required, tle
meant
to
rupt polytheism or idolatry of Athens, than that his
evident allusion to the language of their schools
signed as any sanction to the
some
parts of their philosophy
most
was de-
follies and monstrosities of and poetry.
For some of the more striking of the many passages in Plato’s dialogues, in which there is this marked antithesis between
elpt
and yiyvopai
,
see the Thesetetus, 153, E.,
184
ANCIENT DIVISIONS OF MOTION.
155, A., 157, D. vac,
:
keys tolvvv
akkd ycyveoOac
525, C.
(j)ckooo(j)(t)
:
rENE2E£2 ’0NT02
ayaOov
del
nrNOMENOT,
ro
be, bed
efavabvvn
yvcboeg
el ooe
uakov, &c.
prj tl el-
Republic,
;
’OTHIA2 anreov
rrjg
elvac,
526, P., 527, A., 527, B., T?jg del
:
eon p
teal
apeouee to
rov
yecopeTpeurj, ak)l’ ov
508, E., P.
tt ore
re
Parmenides, 138, E., 141,
;
C., 154, C., D., 161, 162, A., B.
;
Philebus, 53, C.,
where
he defines physical pleasure, or the pleasure of sense, as ever yeveoeg, but never ovo'ea be ovk
eon Tonapanav
Hippias, Maj., 294, B. C. 37, C., D., E. too
numerous
;
(bg del
:
rjbovrjg
;
yeveoeg earev ovoea ,
Phaedrus, 247, C., D., E.;
Timaeus, 28, A., B., &c., 29,
;
together with passages from the Sophista,
and the Phsedon, everywhere
for citation,
XXV. Ancient Divisions of Motion. ing
to Aristotle.
According
Plato.
to
Distinction between Yeveoeg
and ’A kko'e-
The Atomic Theory more favourable
cjocg .
Accord-
to
Theism
than the Doctrine of Occult Qualities.
Page
Line 22. "E oro) tolvvv tj pev erepa bvvapevrj abvvarovoa del pea Tig. He speaks now of the two orders of motion, taking the word uevrjocg in its most extensive sense, as including all the spe25,
ucveZv KLVTjoeg, eavrrjv be
cies before alluded to,
namely, circular
separation, concretion , augment
corruption
;
,
,
rectilineal or tot: mi),
diminution generation , and
or, generally, all that is
,
expressed by the word
peTadokrj, or change internal or external, according to that ,
definition of Aristotle, rraoa uevrjoeg
peTabokrj, ual yeveoeg
teal
ei;
dkkov
elg
akko eorl
cpdopa (boavTCjg, Arist., Metaph.,
how much more The extensive it is than the corresponding English term. two kinds of motion here spoken of are not so much to be
x. (xi.), 12.
From
this
it
may be
seen
regarded as species distinct from the others, but rather as
)
ANCIENT DIVISIONS OF MOTION. embracing
ideas, each
two general
all
;
:
.
185
the specific varieties
Plato here, however, must be regarded as un-
mentioned.
usually careless in his specifications, since, according to the fair import of the language, these two must be consid-
ered as species reckoned with the
was
dent that this
Page
26,
Line
rest,
and yet
2. evdr?]v.
It is
not obvious, at
to the
Tlepicpopu.
2
'ZvyKpiGLg.
4.
A L&KpLGig.
5.
kv^rjaig.
6
.
4}6tGig.
7.
Teveaig.
8
.
9.
Kivrjcnc srepov kivovgcl kcll
.
i)(p’
The
.
10.
Totukt) peTu6aGL£.
$0opd.
KlV 7)GLC
Srepov KLvovpevrj.
last two,
ly species
and
however, as
but genera
,
what
so, in
;
2. (pvGiKr)
KCLL
we have
remarked, are not
strict-
including, respectively, all the rest
,
follows, the writer proceeds to regard them.
merates but six species
3. av^rjGtg
kdVTTJV KlVOVGd
erepa.
Sextus Empiricus, Pyrrii ., Hypotyp
iius)
why
following enumeration, taking opposites together
3.
1
first,
mentioned
would, however, be the ninth according
It
it.
is evi-
from being his intention.
far
this is called the ninth, since there are but six
just before
it
ronucrj peradaoig
1.
:
iii.,
8, § 64,
enu-
trans-
( localis
peradoXrj (naturalis mulatto ), or dXXotooig
{augmentum)
veoig
generatio (
totle,
Phys. Auscult .,
;
4. peiooLg
decrementum ) (
;
vii.,
2,
;
Compare
6. (pOopa (corruplio)
;
5. ye-
Aris-
where he enumerates three
genera, which he afterward divides into a great variety of species,
many
of
than their names tottov, aai
which have hardly any other :
’Erat
Kara ro
ra Kivovpeva rpia. Kara ro
ttolov ,
Kai (pOioig.
tie
rpelg eioi KLvrjoeu
ttolov , Kal f
H
Kara ro ttogov
,
differences r\
re Kara
avayfcrj Kal
pev ovv Kara tottov (popa
aXXolocug
,
•
•
r]
6e
6e Kara rb ttogov , av^rjocg
rj
“ Since, then, there are three causes of motion,
namely, in respect
to
space, in respect to quality, and in re-
spect to quantity, there must be three corresponding motions or
movements.
The
first
Q
2
of these
is
called (popa the ,
186 distinction between yeveotg and aWoiuGtg. second, aXXoi(OGig (or change), the third, increment and diminution.”
‘The scholiast on the passage of Plato before
much
us has a
better division
and
into corporeal
first,
;
psychical and then into the subdivisions of space, quality, ,
quantity,
and essence, on the one hand, and
into the last
two enumerated by Plato, and here called the ninth and
on the other
tenth,
Kara
tottov,
:
T?jg nivr\GE(og
TtotOTrjTa, /card TroooTrjra
,
nar ovolav *
aXXo nivovoa im' dXXov 6e nLvovpevrj te mvovoa nal srepa dvvapevr]. Compare, also, ipvXifcrj,
rj
,
Phys. Auscult .,
v., 3, viii.,
7 Be
General,
;
Kara
lev ocoparinrj,
rj
r]
6e
eavrrjv
7/
Aristotle,
Corrup .,
et
•
1, 4.
i.,
In this last-cited treatise Aristotle endeavours to present the distinction between yeveoig and aXXoicooig. eral statement is clear
enough
’ :
AXXotcoGtg
His genegtlv orav
[lev
,
vnopevovrog rov vnonetpevov, aloOrjrov ovrog, psTadaXX^ kv rolg avrov TtaOeoiv
•
olov to Gcbpa vyiaivei nal
napvet, vnopsvov ye ravro
6e
ycovioEidfjg, 0
•
nal o %aXnog GrpoyyvXog ore ,
avrog ye &v orav 6s oXov p.ETabdXXrj, .
vnopevovrog aioO^rov rivog
vXP
olov e% vdarog
aijp,
d>g
,
aspog vdcjp, rov pev
el;
rj
,
place
ample, the body the same body
;
is
is
,
ye -
peradoXrj
“ Alloiosis
takes
a change in
its
As, for ex-
passions.
healthy, and again
is sick,
yet remains
or the brass is at one time round, and at
another angular, yet
still
the same.
entire change, the subject it
7]Sr)
the subject (some object of sense) remains the
same, while there
but
rj
,
e% dvatoQrjrov elg aloOrjrov.
when
pr)
vnonetpevov rov avrov
VEGig to toiovtov rov 6e cpdopa paXtara 6e dv
yivErai
1raXiv
But when there
is
an
no longer remaining the same,
being as though from water
snould arise, such a change
air,
or from air water
in respect to the
is,
one thing,
a generation, and, in respect to the other, a (pdopa or cor,
ruption,”
&c.
In applying this, however,
matter of degrees, unless totality, or
it
is
it
will be found to be only a
determined what constitutes
an entire change, as also what
is
meant by
not-
DISTINCTION orrfg, properly,
ence
to
BETWEEN
AND dXXoLUGLg.
yeVEGig
This must be viewed
or quality.
187
in refer-
two theories, one of which, or the atomic, considers
all iroiOTTjT ag,
or qualities of bodies, as arising from the site,
figure, motion,
and order of the atoms of which they are
composed
AryxoupiTog
(d)g
Aevtannog
real
Tagei tovt(Âť)v eg d)v slot, Arist.,
De
the affections they produce in us
change of quality
is
Gen.
<paoi , deaei uai
et Cor.,
according
;
to
i.,
1),
and
which,
all
ultimately to be resolved into topical
motion, producing a change in the situation, order, and nu-
merical combination of the particles istry
new substance
arises from the difference in their
arrangement and proportion
once was
The
such as modern chem-
shows when, the constituent atoms remaining the same
in kind, a
totle
;
common
so that, for example,
;
atmospheric
air
becomes
what
nitric acid,
&c.
was the theory of occult qualities, in which Ariswas a believer. This maintained that the figure, site,
other
motions, and order of parts or particles remaining the same, or being identically the
might
same
two respective bodies, they
in
differ greatly in their properties
;
and there being no-
thing in the matter in respect to locality, number, proportion,
magnitude, motion, or any sensible phenomena, to
which
this difference could
cult.
Hence,
that
in
be assigned,
it
was
styled oc-
one place, Aristotle endeavours
two bodies might both be absolutely
full,
to
show
or a plenum,
and yet one might have a property of heaviness or weight, the other of lightness
;
one might have a property of hard-
ness and the other of softness, and that the one might even
be compressible while the other was incompressible the T7jg)
phenomena of thinness (yavorpg)
or density
(
;
since
tcvicvo -
were no proof of a vacuum, or the contrary.
In this view, dXXoLUOig and yeveoig can only be regarded
Kara to ttogov, unless yeveoig is tathe change uard to itoiov, or a change of the oc-
as differing in degree,
ken
for
cult quality itself,
disposition
which was
entirely independent of the
and motions of the parts of the matter.
On
the
188
ATOMIC THEORY.
other theory, there
is
a marked distinction between them,
would
as the one (d/LAotcua^) ticles as
would only
refer to
such a change of parsum, the other (ye-
affect the aggregate
veacg) to such a change in site, order, motion, and combi-
would destroy the former
nation, as
new
one, constituting a
new law
eÂŁi$,
and give
rise to a
â&#x20AC;&#x2122;A XXoiooig
or nature.
would be a change in the aloOrjrd addressing itself solely ,
to the
sense
yeveotg, a change in the vor\r6v or idea, ad,
;
dressing itself to the intelligence, and constituting the object of science.
The ical,
atomic theory has been charged with being atheist-
because atheists have held
very conclusively shows that
it
Cudworth, however,
it.
is,
on the contrary, most
favourable to theism, because, allowing to matter nothing but atoms, figure,
compelled
to bring in
tion, and, since
ing, all
it
site,
it
&c., the mind that thinks rigidly
something
discards
all
to set these
atoms in mo-
unmean-
occult qualities as
is obliged to resort to Spirit as the direct author of
those original impulses of matter
styled properties.
On
38-45. first
is
See The
which
are generally
Intellectual System , chapter
i.,
the other hand, this other doctrine, which, at
view, seems more spiritual, as apparently maintaining
the existence of a secret something besides the matter, and, therefore, as
more favourable
of atoms,
in reality, the great hot-bed of atheism, ever
is,
to religion
than the dry theory
dispensing with the presence of the Deity, as long as these blind occult qualities can be brought in to justify fain
seem
a jealous reverence for the Divine honour.
Nec Deus
intersit, nisi
This doctrine seems Aristotle
what would
and others,
to
dignus vindice nodus.
have given
rise, in the
minds of
between romrcrj
to this distinction
TaboXrj, local change or change in space and usradob) ,
ttolov
,
or
change of
,
quality, as the
j
two great and
distinct
orders embraced under the term KLVrjoig, or motion in largest sense
;
whereas,
if
[is-
Kara
the other view be correc
t,
its
the
189
DOCTRINE OF OCCULT QUALITIES. second
as
is
local motion as the
jnuch
motion internally, although there the circumscribing space in tained
so that
;
may
that is, local
first,
be no departure from
which the whole body
con-
is
change would be motion in the modern
all
sense of the word, and there would remain only the two
genera which Plato numbers as the ninth and tenth, and
which the
scholiast has styled owfiarutr}
the rest being
mere differences arising from
gree, separation, or concretion.
somewhat less
and
affected
by
dependent upon
'ibvxLfcrj
;
all
direction, de-
Plato’s division, although
this doctrine of occult qualities, is far
it
than the others
we have
and what he says of the naOeorrjKvla
e^tg
savours
most strongly of the other theory.
grounds,
we
are persuaded that Plato’s
mentioned,
and
its
change
On
other
view was more
accordance with the atomic doctrine, which resolved
in all
into the motions, figures, sites, &c., of ultimate
7TOLorrjTag
This seems
particles.
agree best with the
to
spirit
of the
some parts of that dialogue which are unintelligible on any other supposition. Cudworth maintains that Plato, as well as Aristotle, was a believer in the occult theory and that he was led to adopt it because he saw that the other had been held by atheists. Timaeus
;
and, indeed, there are
;
We
are satisfied, however, from a very careful examination,
which cannot be here presented, that this is a mistaken view of his philosophy. It is sufficient to say, that nothing would be so fatal to his main argument in this very treatise, as the admission of any occult quality, which is neither to be resolved into the combination and disposition of the particles,
nor into the higher power of spirit ultimately moving
upon them.
The
atheist
would ask
to resist successfully all that
for
no better
auxiliary,
might be advanced about the
necessity of that older and self-moving essence, soul
me
a place to stand,” said Archimedes, “ and
world.”
“ and
I
“ Give
me
I
will
.
“ Give
move the
occult qualities,” the atheist might say,
ask the aid of no
God
in constructing a universe.”
190
SELF-MOTION OF SOUL.
^
#
XXVI.
A vronivrjOLg, longs
or Self-motion of Soul
to the
Energy
.
Essence of the Deity.
God must have
or Action be-
Whether on
Worlds from Eternity.
this Vieio
created
Aristotle's
His own Doc-
Misrepresentations of Plato on this Point. trine.
Page
Line
26,
Haotiv EppcopeveoTaTrjv
9.
Such strong expressions
urjv dtacpepovrcog.
'irpanri-
/cat
as these gave
occasion to Aristotle to assert, that Plato taught the doc-
cause was an eternal energy or activity
trine that the first
ever employed, that
He
ptg.
is,
evepyeia in distinction from dvva,
even most unjustly seeks
Eternal Spiritual
Mover with
confound Plato’s
to
the everlasting agitation of
the self-moving atoms of Democritus and Leucippus evioc noiovoiv del evepyeiav , olov
yap elvai
del
yovoev.
“
(f>aot KtvrjGiv
Some make
pus and Plato. tion, but
it
dAAd
•
“ the first essence
nvd
ova lav,
true sense,
with him.
(xii.), c. 6.
we
us.”
tell
This disparagement of atheists,
Leucippus and
own dogma,
off his
that
;
shall see that Plato
an eternal
pij evepyrjoei , ovre
rdv?]Oig , its
most
fully
agreed
•
ij
gize, there will
•
prj
dvai.
:
E£
ert ovd el evepyrjoei, ’
ov yap eorai nivrjoig atdiog
Several yap to dvvapei ov, fjg
very essence must be
from power ( dvvapig )
eorai tdvrjoig
ovGta avrrjg dvvapig
roiavrrjv,
mo-
on dvdyftrj elvai atwas immoveable dfdv7]rov in which proposition, taken in
activity (evepyeia), in distinction
i]
,
Leucip-
activity, as
In another part of this same chapter, he infers,
that if there be
6'
ITA arcov.
riva ov Ae-
by reason of what, and what, they do not
by associating him with the Democritus, is merely done to set
yap
teal
teat
that there is an eternal
Plato,
its
Sea tl,
an everlasting
For they say
Aristot ., Metaph., xi.
diov
Aev/annog
Aid
:
A el apa
•
ev -
elvai dpxrjv
ovoia evepyeia— u For
if it
should not ener-
be no motion
if it
should energize,
;
neither
t
;
ARISTOTLE MISREPRESENTS TLATO. while yet
19l
essence was only (dvvapcg) power or poten-
its
tiality.
Even
for that
which
in that case, there will be
no eternal motion admits of
exists, tv dvvapec, in potentiality,
Therefore there must he some such principle,
not-being.
whose very essence
energy .”
is
In stating the objections to the doctrine, he misrepresents
Plato in his usual manner,
by drawing the unsound
infer-
ence, that the Phrst Cause must have been ever engaged,
from
its
very nature, in the work of creation, and
fore, the universe
must have been eternal
dnecpov xpovov %ao£ ?]
i)
vv%,
:
dXXa ra avra
that, there-
(hare ova dec,
rj
av
fjv
rrepcodcp,
dXXcvg, ehrep nporepov tvepyeca dvvapecog, el de to avro
del Trepcodcp, dec re dec peveev tvepyovv
—“ So
that there
could have been no chaos or night for an infinite (or indef-
same things must have been ever taking place, either in a circuit or in some other manner, if activity tvepyeca ) is older than dvvapcg. But if the same eter( inite)
time
;
but the
nally took place in a circuit, then there
must have ever been
something continually energizing, or putting forth active power.”
Metaph.,
xi. (xii.), c. 6.
was never careful to do Plato justice although it would be easy to show the modern declamation to the that their philosophy was subcontrary notwithstanding stantially the same the main difference arising from the Stagyrite’s studious care to adopt, in many cases, a different Aristotle
;
— —
;
phraseology, for the purpose of creating the appearance of a wider disagreement than really existed, and from his con-
and misstate Plato's real meanHis misrepresentation here, whether wilful or not,
tinual disposition to pervert ing.
arises from his utterly confounding the
which our philosopher defines as eavrrjv re teevovoa did he hold too,
it
to
it
teal
his tenth species of teevrjoeg,
erepa dvvapevrj.
be eternal and essential.
however much
regards
—
two aspects under
it
may
In the
first
only
In this respect,
be above our comprehension, he
as purely spiritual, or, as the scholiast defines
it f
192
THE VERY ESSENCE
IN GOD,
IS
ENERGY.
psychical, in distinction from topical motion
ever energizing within
itself,
in the generation,
What
and changes of the topical universe.
meant was
this, that
than dvvapig
;
the First Cause
activity constituting its
means
it
by an exercise of
necessitating will,
it
Plato
was something more
an eternal
sence, yet by no until,
as something
and only presenting the sec-
ond aspect when exercised, tiara ronov, creation,
;
very es-
to act out of itself,
should give rise to an out-
ward universe, which, although actuated by, remains
clear-
ly distinct from, this everlasting energy.
We
have likewise an example of the gross manner in
which
Aristotle misstates Plato, in another assertion of this
same
chapter, wherein he charges
in respect to his first
UX arcovi
ovde
Mover
him with inconsistency ’AAAd firjv
or Eternal Soul
ye olov re Xeyeiv
olerai apxrjv elvat evi-
fjv
ote to avro kavro ntvovv. vorepov yap 7)
ipvrxrj,
tell
to
(j>rj(u
—“ But,
what he means by
us
be the
soul,
cog
first
he says
principle,
teal
apa
rep ovpavcp
surely, neither is Plato able to
which he sometimes thinks namely, his self- moving power for that
;
(in a certain place), is
would convey the inference,
cotemporary with the Aristotle undoubtedly
heavens, or the material universe.”
that this is inconsistent with
the doctrine of the Eternal Spiritual the tenth book of
:
The Laws. The
Mover
position
as laid
down
which he
in
cites
is
from the Timaeus, but the careful reader can hardly
to
see that there, by ^vx^j, Plato means the anima mundi
which he expressly represents as the the Eternal Father,
of which
it
was
to
who formed
it
fail ,
direct production of
together with the body
be the plastic power
;
whereas through-
out this book, and especially the present argument respect-
ing motion, he employs the term soul for the immaterial principle
matter self
which was
— in
— and
known
fact, as
this
to one.
prior to all creation
another
name
for the
and generation of Eternal Deity him-
wide difference could hardly have been un-
who must have been
familiar with the dia-
Aristotle’s immoveable essence.
193
logues of Plato, especially such important portions of them as the Timseus and this argument* against the atheists.
One cause of Aristotle’s misconception may have been his own unsound definition of motion, which necessarily excluded this tenth species, which Plato makes the ground of
the rest
all
Metaph., x.
peradoXrj.
he seems
ever, to
yap
ixaaa
:
to
mean
ntvrjatg £%
(xi.), c. 12.
the
akXov
slg
aWo
In other places,
same with our
author,
sorl
how-
and even
go beyond him in the sublimity of some of his ideas re-
specting the
first
Compare,
Mover.
for this purpose, the
chapter of the last book of Physics, and the seventh
last
chapter of the eleventh book of the Metaphysics.
Cause he
First
styles a/cLvrjrov, not, as
we
The
think, in the
sense of inactivity or quiescence, but as incapable of being
moved, or of deriving antecedent.
its
motion from anything external or
This, instead of being 6vvapig alone, he him-
self describes as essentially
eon to Ktvovpsvov vov
seems
He
to intend the
,
first
mover,
mean an
apx'fj,
namely, the moral and
or principle of a
We
6s
.,
.
still
final
he does not rather higher nature even
if
cause of the heaven-
allude especially to that most remark-
* There cannot be a doubt, that, in the passages Aristotle has reference to this tenth book of The else does Plato talk in the
same
style
we have
Laws
quoted,
nowhere about motion and the first mo;
for
be in some of the subsequent books of this very treaIn the Timaeus, the argument is conducted in a manner alto-
ver, unless tise.
errel
energy of vovg as something higher
than
ly motions.
,
:
o ov Kivovpe-
Metaph sometimes even transcends Plato, and
than a merely psychicalf
this,
n
ovoia nai sv spy eta ovoa
Kivsly aidiov , nal
xi. (xii.), c. 7.
an Eternal Energy
tavovv peoov eotl
teal
it
gether different. Aristotle
makes
This, then, together with other references which to the
Laws, as a production of Plato well known
ought to be conclusive evidence of their genuineness. Plato, however, in this argument, evidently uses 'tpvxv for all that
in his day, t is
incorporeal, including intellect (vov-c) as well as
power.
R
life
and motive
194 MORAL REASONS, THE FIRST OF MOVING CAUSES. “ that
where he says
able passage,
Cause, moves the heavens, as being loved
By
pievoi’ ,” c. 7.
—
Cudworth supposes
this,
dpx%
this
or First
tuvel 6e
that
epd>-
he meant
to
represent a second moving power, or soul of the world,
which, “ enamoured with did, as
were, in imitation of
it
heavens.”
We
this
supreme, immoveable Mind, it,
System
Intellectual
,
continually turn round the vol.
ii.,
p.
313, Eng. ed.
cannot, however, discover any solid grounds for this
would rather regard this as a mode of expression, by which the Stagyrite would give the first place in the series of moving causes to moral reasons what he opinion, and
—
himself so tersely styles, to ev nal tzaX&g, or the well and fit ,
and what Socrates was fond of denominating to PeXtio-
tov the best.
It
,
was
this principle
which produced
motion of the Highest Heavens or sphere, on which ferior
motions depend
ovpavog nal
rj
(pvoig.
Toiavrr\g
etc
:
apa apx^g
In this language
be discovered some allusion
to
we
that
all in-
TjpTTjrat,
6
think there can
Homer’s golden chain
;
and,
indeed, the whole style and sentiment of the passage seems
more
far
in accordance with the semi-poetical philosophy
No-
of Plato than with that of the dry and rigid Aristotle.
thing could be
more Platonic than
this
conception of the
universe eternally moving on through love of/rhe First
Fair and
The
First Good, attracted rather than impelled,
and ever tending it
were
to the object of its admiration, as
striving to develop, in the
harmony
of
though varied
its
physical influences, that all-perfect idea with which
it
was
enraptured.
We may
compare with
all this
a splendid passage from
the Phaedrus, of which Cicero has given a version in the “All first book of the Tusculan Disputations, sect, xxiii. soul is immortal, for that which ever moves must be eternal while that which moves another, and yet is moved by :
;
something
else, since
cessation of
life.
But
it
hath cessation of motion,
that alone
which moves
may have
itself,
seeing
;
the words hoyog, that
but
never leaves
it
itself,
also the fountain
is
195
Idea.
not only never ceases energizing,
and beginning of motion
This can never either be
things.
and
eldog,
bom
to all other
or perish, or
the
all
heaven and earth collapsing must stand still, and never For, again find a renewed source and origin of motion. since
it
which
is
self-moving
not fear to say that this
is
the very essence and
evident that that
is
we need
reason (Xoyog) of soul,
or, in
other words,
very nature,”
its
We
Phcedrus 245, D.
ravrrjg ovor]g (pvoeog ipvxVS*
cjg
is eternal,
,
need not remind the reader that in this passage, as well as The Laws, the term sow/ is taken collective-
in the tenth of
ly for the oldest soul, as the source of all animation, and in-
cluding
all
other souls as in
some way proceeding from
it.
XXVII. The Words Xoyog,
Page
28, Line 9.
rov Xoyov
•
j
eldog,
uev, rrjv
ev 6e ovoya.
“
and
idea.
ovaiav ev
One
6e, rrjg
ovoiag
thing the essence, one
X oyog, reason, definition, or notion of the essence, and one the name.” A oyog, when rendered reason is not to be taken for the faculty of the mind to which we give that apIt more properly signifies the reason of a thing pellation. the
,
the reason as existing in a thing, perceived, or, rather, un-
derstood by the mind, or the rationale.
why the thing
term, but, rather, the constituting cause
to tl
fjv
It is
exists, or the final cause, as
elvat , that
,
not the reason
we
what
often use the
Aristotle calls
which makes anything what
it
particular modification of the general idea of existence.
;
a,
The
which is the object of the mind’s intellection which binds together (primary sense of Xeyco)
X oyog
is that
( notio )
;
that
is
or gathers into a unity for the soul’s contemplation
which alone the ovoga
,
or
—
that to
name, belongs, and without which
the thing itself is only an object of sensation.
196
BETWEEN Xoyog AND
DISTINCTION
In reading Plato,
between X oyog,
we have
sometimes
and
eldog,
difficult to distinguish
The
I6e a.
conclusion to which
which we would
arrived, but
gree of hesitation,
is
it
as follows
is
state
A oyog
:
OVOpa.
is
with some dethe notion or
reason of a thing viewed in relation to the mind contemplating
mind
;
it,
yet having an existence separate from such a
— as
eldog the notion in reference to the thing itself ,
the ev ev noXXolg, or one in many, residing in
it
Msa, the
;
same, regarded as self-subsisting, apart from mind, and also
from the individual things through which
The
absolute existence of the last
is
it is
philosophy.
In respect to the second term,
one Aristotle
is
most fond of using, there
agreement between him and Plato. hypothesis, there is
con, and that
which
common to now styled
is
If
which
is
we
the
is
no real
dis-
reject the third
a wide difference between
still
philosophy which was
manifested.
the great question in
Aristotle, Plato,
that,
and Ba-
the system of Locke.
XXVIII. Distinction between
Page
30,
Line
3.
Xoyog and ovopa.
To eavro
Kivelv cpqg
*lvtt)v ovoiav , rjVTcep rovvopa, o
The
yopevopev.
would seem
to
6?]
Xoyov exeiv'rrjv
iravreg , ipvxrjv irpooa -
order of this rather complicated sentence
be this
rrjv avrrjv
:
ovoiav
(/caff) rjvnep
ovopa TTpooayopevopev o drj iravreg (jrpooayopevovoi) to eavro Kivelv. “ You say, then, xpvx'rj'Vy Xoyov exew rd
,
—
that that very essence, of
which
all
men
which we predicate
predicate, namely,
Xoyog self-motion, or explanations accompanying the
name
vxrj , or soul hath for
avroKivrjoig .”
its
that ,
See the notes and
text.
may, perhaps, be objected, that Plato is resting these important positions on mere words, to which he assigns his own arbitrary definitions or notions. But what is meant by It
;
distinction
between Xoyog AND ovoya
which is such a famodern declaimers ? What
the sneering expression, mere words vourite with a certain class of
words
are
197
,
—we speak not now of sounds or
articulate enun-
ciations,
dvopara or pryiara, but of the higher term Xoyoi
— what
are words, in this sense, but outward expressions
-
of the inward logical necessities of our
own minds ?
And
what can be higher proof for us than those affirmations, which the immutable laws of our own souls compel us to make, in respect to what is included or not included in a certain idea ? Whatever belongs to the idea is necessary so,
on the other hand, whatever
is
necessary pertains to
an idea, and the exclusion of any part involves, for our minds, a logical contradiction.
The naming
of them, therefore, cannot be arbitrary, ex-
cept so far as the mere outward sound
is
There
concerned.
which are not dependent on language, as some of the nominalists of the school of Locke would hold, but language on them. So far, human speech may be reare certain ideas
garded as something supernatural, although dress or vocal forms
may have been
tional or accidental usage, instead of
We may
ness of sound to sense. tion,
We
any ovopa we please. animus anima
nn»
,
,
any natural adapted-
give to the
may
outward
its
the result of conven-
call
©etj!, or soul
it
A oyog,
'ipvxrj ,
we may
;
or no-
nvevfia,
etymolo-
gically associate this
ovopa with any such sensible phe-
we may
fancy comes the nearest to the con-
nomenon
as
ception, such as air, breaLli, fire, (Ether,
way
the ovopa
may
not conventional. periods,
it
all
— and we
in every tongue
;
calls for the
name
;
and in
this
but the Xoyog
is
languages, even from the earliest
— as
much
so as
expect, as a matter of course, to find
we may
investigate.
The
idea which
God as one of the fixed The metaphysical notion of soul is self-energy avrordvyaiq. Of this notion we is
implanted by
parts of our being. self-motion,
&c.
has had a distinct vocal sign
that of body it
In
continually change
,
R
2
108
BETWEEN Xoyog AND
DISTINCTION
Hence,
cannot divest ourselves.
QVOfld.
even from
after proving,
physical premises, that there must be somewhere self-mo -
mind attaches
tion , the
this
Xoyog
to its ovo[ia,
and affirms
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;being the whatever be the name â&#x20AC;&#x201D; and
that this self-motion is soul,
Šetjl:,
'ipvx'rji
&c.
same unchanging notion, that this name, although affixed to the flowing and varying sensible phenomenon from which it may have been etymologically derived, ultimately represents the
of
which *
To
that sensible*
phenomenon
is
immutable Xbyog
the symbol.
dwell on this distinction between ovopa (or pfjpa) and loyog
at greater length,
we may
say, that the former simply represents a
sensible perception or action calls eldolov
;
(
aloOrjTov ), or
the latter, a thought, an idea
tellcctum, or votjtov
,
what Plato sometimes
(idea),
the
intelligibile, in-
being no part of the sensible image or action,
it. All words, being a communicafrom mind to mind, through matter must array the thought, du-
but suggested or symbolized by tion
ring
must
,
its
passage, in the garments of the flesh,
something sensible.
originally represent
reality,
other words,
or, in
The
ovopa, then, in
goes no farther than this sensible image or action, which
it
There are but two stages in the process. The Xoyoc, on the other hand, goes beyond this, and represents the intelligibile, or votjtov, of which that image, action, or aiodrjTov, is but the symbol. Here, then, are, in fact, three stages, and the eiduXov, or action, which the word, as ovopa presents, does itself re-present something still behind it. The life of language is gone, when, with respect to abstract terms, the primary sensible images have faded away and become unknown, or, in other words, when this second stage in the process has been left out, and the word stands for the thought, in the same way that x and y represent quantities in algebra. The same term may be regarded both as ovopa and Aoyof. For primarily presents.
,
example, the word
circle,
as a name, merely presents that round,
sensible image, which, as far as the elduhov to the vision of an animal as of a
cardinal idea, involving
ent to the itself the
all
Newton
concerned,
as Tioyog,
it
mind of the mathematician, and of which word or representative.
be regarded as genuine 7r avTrj,
AOrOS
:
kv/c^oc, to
av
is
the
elrj
same
suggests that
the properties of the figure, which
is
pres-
this eldulov is
This cannot be better expressed
than in the language of Plato himself,
arrexov
;
is
if
km
the Epistles can in any
way
to pkoov ek tuv eox^tov lgov
ekelvov tyrrep GTpoyyvhov Kal
tt Ept^epki
BETWEEN Xoyoq AND
DISTINCTION It is
We
not a vain support to rely upon language.
say, in
the words which Plato puts tlvcl
tylus, OlfJLCU fiev
rrjv 'depevrjv
438, C.
As
into the
dvvapiv elvat
shown
may
mouth of Crar\ dvOpomeiav
,
rd npdjra dvopara rolg irpaypaoiv. is
199
OVOJia.
in this last-cited dialogue,
Cratylus, it
follows,
correctness.* in its origin
and progress, an inward necessity, and must,
therefore, possess It is
inward truth and necessary
a striking proof of
its
Divine origin (we
mean
*
in the
bounding, defining, classifying, and combining of ideas, and not in the outward vocal sounds affixed to them), that the it as it is, but must change meaning of its terms to suit non-existent notions, to which it never has been and never can be adapted, without introducing confusion extending far beyond the particular cases of amendment. He must have an entire new dialect, and that, too, one which will ever destroy itself by the con-
atheist or materialist cannot use
the
tradictions, discords,
exist
between
its
trine of death in
no
efforts It
and jarring inconsistencies which must*
parts, in
every attempt to express the doc-
words necessitated
to
glow with a life which
can wholly quench.
has been well observed, that there
is
no language un-
der heaven in which the atheist, the pantheist, or the
who
man
denies the reality of moral distinctions, can talk five
minutes without a logical contradiction,
or, in
other words,
a war of ideas. Should they form a new one, and take the utmost pains to adapt it to their philosophy of darkness, it will be found to be built on a disarrangement of the neces-
sary and logical elements of speech, and must soon perish
by reason of its own innate formed in opposition “
to the
The word
contradictions.
No
such Babel,
high decree of Heaven, can ever
ovoya
kcll kvkTioq.
ity in
every direction, from extremities to a central point,
circle,
representing the idea of equalis
the lo-
yog of that to which roundness, and periphery, and circle, are the
names.”
Plat.,
Epist .,
vii.,
342, B.
Compare,
also, the Theceteius ,
201, 202; Sophista, 221, A.
* See Schleiermacher’s Introduction to the Cratylus.
:
200
DISTINCTION
The
stand. ities,
BETWEEN Xoyog AND .OVOpa.
ideas of incorporeal substance, of eternal ves
of moral distinctions, cannot be separated from lan
guage.
The
indelibly as
proof of soul and of God it is
is
stamped upon
written on the firmament of heaven
it
as
itself.
Some of the views we have been endeavouring to set may be found admirably stated in Varroâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s account of
forth
the Platonic or Socratic philosophy, especially in respect to the importance
it
attached to innate notions and words as
representatives of them, in Cicero, Acad. Poster .,
viii.
Tertia deinde philosophise pars, quse erat in ratione et in disserendo sic tractabatur
;
quanquam
tamen non esset judicium veritatis (vovg) volebant rerum esse judicem
neam
oriretur a sensibus,
solam censebant ido-
cui crederetur, quia sola cerneret id, quod
set, ( ra del
ovra ), simplex
Kal d)oavTG)g)
et tale
et
unius modi
quale esset.
Mentem
in sensibus. :
Hanc
(
del
illi
semper
es-
Kara ravra
ideam appella-
jam a Platone ita nominatam nos recte speciem (elSensus autem omnes hebetes et dog) possumus dicere. tardos esse arbitrabantur, nec percipere ullo modo eas res
bant,
:
quae subjectae sensibus viderentur, quse essent ita mobiles
(psovTa) et concitatse, ut nihil
unquam unum esse
ne idem quidem, quia continenter laberentur nia.
Itaque hanc
tov) appellabant.
omnem
constans,
et Jluerent
partem rerum opinabilem
om-
(do^acr-
Scientiam autem nusquam esse cense-
bant nisi in animi notionibus atque rationibus (Aoyoi), qua
de causa dejinitiones rerum probabant, quibus disceptabatur, adhibebant.
et
has ad omnia, de
Yerborum
explicatio pro-
quam Arguments et quasi rerum notis ducibus utebantur ad probandum et ad concludendum id quod
babatur, qua de causa quceque essent ita nominata
,
etymologiam appellabant.
explanari volebant, in qua tradebatur omnis dialectics dis ciplina, id est, orationis ratione conclusae.
;
IMPASSABLE CHASM BETWEEN SPIRIT AND MATTER
201
XXIX. Distance between Self-motion and Motion by Impulse.
Infinite
The Word
Impassable Chasm between Spirit and Matter. Principle of Euphonic Attraction.
ttoXXogttj.
Page
Line
Xogttjv, k.
sentence, with
meaning
is t£
dering
:
T
Ap’ ovv oi>x erepov .... 7roAr. A. This is a very complicated and awkward
30,
13.
anomalies, although the
several
The
quite clear.
following
not that motion,
Is
is
general
a very free ren-
which takes place in one
which never effects that itself, by itself is not such a
thing by reason of another, but
anything shall have motion in principle of motion,
we
,
the most remote in degree of great, as
—
say, justly styled second and even
any one might choose
such numbers, however
all
to
use in the computation
being, in truth, that kind of motion or change culiar to a soulless body.”
we
which, however,
The
6tt6gg)v rig
sense
is,
although
:
?
pe-
is
order of the latter part (in
are compelled to use ttoXXogtt] for
TToXXoGrrjv, in consequence of the
be as follows
which
change of position) would
devrepa re nal noXXoGrrj togovtcov apiOytiv
dv fiovXoiro avr'fv dpiSpslv. The general by impulse, or the motion of matter,
that motion it
may
be next in order ( devrepa ),
is
yet almost
removed from self-motion, or the motion of soul by a distance greater than any limit assignable in
infinitely
that
is,
numbers. It is
another
mode
of saying that there
chasm between them, by which they
is
are forever parted and
assigned to two distinct worlds of being. naturalists
have ever been striving
an impassable
to
Materializing
up or bridge
fill
this
chasm, either by a direct connexion through some most subtle
matter, or imponderable agent, or occult quality, or
some
tertium quid
which might
sence these two motions,
or,
identify in
rather
— the
one common
great object
by es-
£>f all
202 IDEAS OF CHANGE, CAUSE, AND
INSEPARABLE*
SPIRIT,
their strivings
— to
These
however, from the days of Plato
efforts,
make
the higher a result of the lower
The
ent,
have been
ural
and the supernatural, or between the
all
in vain.
to the pres-
distance between the natspiritual
and ma-
must ever remain impassable by any uniting essence. The most aethereal motions of matter, even of that class of terial,
substances which the ancients included under the general
names
rrvp
and
alOrjp ,
and which the moderns have styled
imponderable agents, make no approach
However
or avroKLvrjOLg of Spirit.
they
may
and
be, yet, as matter,
to the self-motion
and attenuated
subtile
falling
under that one idea
which we have before alluded (page 142), the laws of our minds (from which we cannot escape, and aside from which there is, to us, no such thing as truth) compel us to regard them as destitute of all motion and all property of matter to
of motion in themselves
— in
ponderous mass of lead or
fact, as
iron.
much
Plato
so as the most
was deeply
sensible
of the importance of this fundamental position, and therefore
he labours so earnestly, even
at the
thought tedious and prolix, to maintain the remark before, and yet
ness
to
motion
We
importance and
our present subject will justly warrant
This point being conceded
itself,
its
it.
hazard of being
may
in
to the atheist,
some way be an
have made its
adapted-
its repetition.
namely, that
self-
occult property of matter in
or that the least and most aethereal atom in the uni-
verse could ever get in motion without the aid of that older
and higher something
Xoyog and the ovopa
;
to
which he has here assigned the
or that there
is
the distance of a hair’s
breadth between the ultimate ideas of change cause and ,
the action of spirit atheist, all is lost.
war wkh the
— this, If this
we
,
say, being conceded to the
can be conceived
of,
or
is
idea, or Adyo^, of matter, as given u§
laws of our own minds, then
may
it
not
at
by the
also be conceived of as
having an occult adaptive property, and the conclusion cannot be resisted,
which would
alike establish materialism in
•
203
EUPHONIC ATTRACTION. respect to man, and pantheism (which doctrine) in respect
UoaXogttjv, as culiar word.
nominator
is
same
in fact, the
is,
to the universe.
appears in this sentence,
it
is
a very pe-
of many, a fraction whose dea very large number, and hence its name an signifies one
It
—
infinitesimal part.
Compare the Philebus, 44, P. ra 7ioAwhere it is put in direct contrast with :
Xogtcl mc?i7]p6rrjTL
;
otckrjpoTara, as an infinitesimal fraction opposed to a superlative.
There
the sentence, fers to is,
to the order of its construction in
should be tcoXXogt?/, since
it
devrepa and must be taken ,
in
regularly re-
it
connexion with
however, made accusative, in consequence of
and by the
after the infinitive, apcOpelv ,
This ists
differs
anomaly
also a peculiar grammatical
According
word.
in this
is
it.
It
position
its
attraction of avrrjv.
from the ordinary case of attraction which ex-
between the
sake of euphony,
and antecedent.
relative
euphonic, because
it
seems
or, rather,
to affect
may be
It
words solely
styled for the
homceophony, and on the mere
ground of contiguity in location, although very remotely lated in all other respects
so
;
much
so, that, in this
re-
way,
great violence is sometimes done to the true grammatical construction.
There
no need of resorting
is
any various
to
We
reading, or to any conjectural emendation.
have no
doubt, from the location of the word, that Plato wrote ttoX-
however harsh the construction may appear to us. togovtov also seems very awkward, and yet (although we cannot well keep it in that place when XoGrrjv,
The
we
position of
adopt the order for a
that,
by standing where
phasis than though clause “
;
as though
However great
still
by so
it
we
literal translation)
it
does,
it
has a
had occurred
much
in the
should thus paraphrase ,
it
in
English
as high as you please
ple of local or euphonic attraction, although interferes with
stronger em-
beginning of the
number carry it much (togovtov) is it remote ,” &c. the
easy to see
it is
grammatical smoothness,
is
:
,
This princiit
sometimes
undoubtedly in
ATHEISTIC ARGUMENT AGAINST DESIGN.
204
accordance with the genius of the language scholar can endure the attempts to divest
it
of this peculiarity by
;
and no
true
which are sometimes made means of pretended emen-
dations.
-
XXX. Argument of Ancient Atheists
that Apparent Evidences of Design were only Evidences of Subsequent Accommodation. Things {they said) older than Knowledge of Things and ,
,
therefore older than Soul.
Page
31,
Line
8.
Tporcot, 6rj nai ijOrj nai (3ovXrjaecg teal
XoyLopoi Tcporepa aoparov,
ti.
The
r. X.
we keep was directed. The
unnot be appreciated unless
which it soul was the
against that
quently younger.
in
full
force of this
mind the objection
ancient atheists said
offspring or result of matter, and conse-
Hence what
theists
would
call evidences
of design or of mindâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s preceding matter, they would regard as merely subsequent accommodations to an accidental ex,
isting state of things, in like
which, had
manner, have drawn
commodations
to
which
it
after
been any other, would,
it it
the only uses and ac-
could be adapted
;
and which, in
would have carried w ith them like appearances of previous design, or, as Lucretius has most concisely exT
that case,
pressed
it,
Nil adeo natum est in corpore, ut uti Possemus, sed quod natum est, id procreat usum.
Lucretius
Thus,
for
,
iv.,
832.
example, they would say, in accordance with
their theory, that teeth
were not made of a
certain shape
with the previous design that the animal should eat herbs, but that, because they happened to be of a certain form (and there
was no reason
in themselves
why
they should be of
one form rather than another), therefore nature applied
them
ATHEISTIC ARGUMENT AGAINST DESIGN.
205
9
use, and the only use, adapted to their accidental
to the
Again,
structure.
if
certain bodies had, in the course of
ages, received from tv%7] elongated projections from the
main
trunk, or an attenuated
ed form, in
and
flexible shape, or a round-
these cases, they would have said, and did
all
say, that that animation residing in
but a junior
found tion,
itself
art,
them (which was
when
the production of an older tyvocg ),
thus circumstanced
made
,
by accommodating the one
to
the best of
itself
its
it
condi-
a walking, the other to
a crawling, and the other to a rolling locomotion.
So, also,
had they been acquainted with some of the arguments of our modern natural theology, they would have denied that the revolution of the earth on
its
axis
was adjusted
to
twen-
any design that such a period should
ty-four hours, with
correspond to designed circumstances in the alternating â&#x20AC;˘
changes which occur in the economy of the animal and vegetable tribes.
tended
that, in
On
the contrary, they would have con-
the eternal and fortuitous dance of tv%7], the
earth having received such an accidental impulse as just
produced the aforesaid period, nature, in time, accommodated to
man
it
the intervals for the exercise and relaxation of hu-
bodies, together with â&#x20AC;&#x17E;all the periodical vicissitudes
which seem to have relation to such a revolution and that, had this accidental period been of any other length, the same adapting (pvcug and rv^r] would, long before this, have ;
brought
all
the earthly
economy into
This argument, of which outline,
that
it is
we
perfect
harmony with it.
have given an imperfect
they carried to great length, and
easy
is
it
to
see
capable of a most extensive and subtle application.
It is difficult, if
not impossible, for any one
who
admits the
doctrine of occult properties to any extent in matter, to give
a direct answer to the objections drawn from
it
;
and yet
believe that not a vestige of any skeptical doubt
may produce can remain upon leyâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
it
the mind, after reading Pa-
most valuable work on natural theology.
S
we
which
As a specu-
206 THINGS OLDER THAN KNOWLEDGE OF THINGS. argument, this doctrine of subsequent accommodation,
lative
as opposed to a previous designed use,
dable appearance, but
it
may have
a formi-
vanishes on a close observation of
nature, because the soul, in such observation, instead of re-
on a
ally relying
'posteriori facts,
cannot divest
itself of that
a priori view which believes in design, and looks for design,
and carries along the preconception of design as
volved in those ideas of
upon the
God and truth
with which
we have
seen, overcomes the difficulty by be-
ginning with motion instead of evidences of design
thence,
;
more remote point of view, proving the higher an-
this
tiquity of soul, then of the acts or exercises of soul,
which
enters
investigation.
Plato, as
from
it
in-
purpose or design
is /3ov?i7](7Lg ,
,
Another subtle objection from
this
one of
.
same school was,
that
knowledge, being the knowledge of things must, therefore,, have been posterior to things hence that mind was young,
;
er than matter. trine of
mind
In this they, of course, rejected the doc-
any other knowledge than
or intellect contained, in
intelligibles {yoryra)
way
making
any sense, it
to
be
all
its
own
be said that the objection
it
in respect to ideal or eternal truth,
may
ideas or
from without by
of impression from the external world.*
* Should
way
;
that of things, or that the
If this
be stated in the same
and that there must have
been vo7]T& before vovg or truth before knowledge, the only reply ,
that
God is
intclligens
at the
and
same
be
is,
time, and from eternity, both vovq and votjtov ,
inlelligibile ,
or intellectual.
It is
some such view which suggested
the absolute neces-
most profound minds of antiquity the idea of a plurality in the Divine nature, a distinction of two hypostases, at least, with a third, ipvxv, to which they were related, and in which they were united. Instead of being contrary to reason, it was the highest result to which she arrived sity of
(if
the truth
tion), as
w as r
not rather obtained from
to the
some
primitive revela-
her only refuge against the cheerless and incomprehensible
conception of an eternal, solitary monadity, or the equally
difficult
conception of a necessary, eternal, outward universe, towards which the Divine love and the Divine intelligence might be directed.
:
207
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE. atheism, as
it
most assuredly is, when held in relation to what shall we think of the corresponding
the Divine Mind,
doctrine
when
applied to the
human
soul
If
?
we
the conclusions to which such inquiries lead us,
start it
from
should
be borne in mind, that the only possible defence against
them must be found in that ideal philosophy which supposes knowledge belonging to mind, as mind whether it be Divine or human, entirely independent of things or of any outa
,
,
ward world. The above atheistic objection is also expressed by Lucretius, with far more of poetry than piety Exemplum porro gignundis rebus, et ipsa hominum Divis unde insita primum,
Notities
Quid vellent facere, ut
animoque
scirent,
viderent'?
Quove modo est unquam vis cognita principiorum, Quidnam inter sese permutato ordine possent, Si non ipsa dedit specimen natura creandi
1
Lucretius,
lib. v.,
132.
XXXI. Platonic Doctrine of the Evil Principle.
Of AvdjK ? ’
/,
or
Necessity.
Page
32,
Line
2.
A volv yev ye
irov
eXarrov yrjdev nOti-
yev, Trjy re evepyendog real rrjg ravavrla dvvayevjjg e^ep.
ya&oOai
—“ Nothing
less than two, at least, the
does us good, and the one that
We
is
one that
able to do the contrary.”
have here presented, in the most unequivocal terms,
that grand defect in Plato’s theology,
mars, by
its
which occasionally
presence, almost every part of his otherwise
noble system.
It is
most
in his dialogues, that
clear,
from
this
and other passages
he held the doctrine of two uncreated
principles or souls, one good (or the benefactor, as he styles
him), the other evil. ter,
Neither Plato, however, nor Zoroas-
can be charged with the absurdity of believing in two
Supremes.
They avoided
this
by running
into the incon-
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.
208
sistency of supposing that the evil principle, although uncreated,
was under
controlled,
the dominion of the good, constantly
and ultimately
be completely conquered by
to
it.
This doctrine, likewise, made harsh discord with almost every other part of his philosophy, especially his views of the origin of the universe, as set forth in the Timaeus,
made
is
we examine
the matter closely,
could have come
when how he
of a distinct evil soul and yet,
no mention
;
is difficult to
it
any other conclusion.
to
where
see
Plato had no
other guide than reason, aided, perhaps, by a dim and cor-
rupted tradition of primitive truth in it
no other
way
upon God as
and reason can account
;
for the existence of evil, its
immediate author.
without charging
It is
evident, from
manner in which he ever speaks on this subject, that he had a deep conviction of the essential goodness of the
the
Deity, and that he
felt
himself sorely pressed by the
saw everywhere
existing in the world.
compare what he says
in the
On
diffi-
which he
culty of reconciling with this goodness the evil
this point,
second book of the Republic
,
ovuovv ayaOog 6 ye tieog rep ovti re teat Xektsov ovro) “ Wherefore is not God really good, and must we not thus ever affirm?” "0 6e ye p?]dev nanov iroiel, 379, B., C.
:
—
ovd'
,
av rivog eh] nanov ’AJTION. ovk apa uavrcov ye
acri-
ov to ayaOov, aXXa rcbv pev ev exovrcov alriov tcov be ,
nancov avatnov. ovd apa 6 deog ’
cog oi
noXXol Xeyovoiv
alriog , iroXXcbv 6e
uancov rjplv
—
nanbv here
“
•
all
elrj
’AJTI02,
dAA’ oXiycov pev rolg avOpamocg
avalnog
•
noXi)
yap eXdrrco rayaQa
But he doeth nothing
tgjv
evil (evidently taking
in the sense of physical evil), nor could
the cause of anything evil.
author of
IIANTI2N av
The Good
he be
cannot, then, be the
things, but only of those that are good, while
God cannot, therefore, many say, but only of few things is he the cause to men, &c .,for our good things He does are much fewer in number than our evil things .” he
is
never the author of the bad.
be the author of all things, as the
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE. speak of the
not, in this place of the Republic, directly
principle, but leaves
aXXa arra
n6)V
Of
to
be plainly inferred
for his
myth
,
we seek some
of the two casks
which
lie in
evil
6e na'deov
—
other cause, and
After this, he proceeds to censure
with good and the other with
filled
Tow
:
rd atria dXX' ov rov
del tyrelv
the evils, then, must
not the Deify.”
one
it
20G
Homer
the court of Jove,
evil,
from which he
dispenses to mortals severally as he will.*
When we
the impressive application of this great truth
which Achilles
makes
to the
the poet as far
case of Priam,
so,
cannot help recognising
more orthodox than the philosopher, and as
coming much nearer
was
we
read
to the true
He
teaching of revelation.
however, because, instead of yielding his mind
the perplexing
and insurmountable
difficulties
to
which attend
every merely speculative view of the matter, he simply gives utterance to one of those universal and unvarying sen-
timents of the
human
soul,
which could have come from no
other source than a tradition of the primeval
woes consequent upon
fall
and the
it.
Revelation removes this difficulty respecting the origin
by solving the mystery, and bringing it down to of our understandings, but by imposing silence
of evil, not the level
upon reason, in her attempt
to investigate a subject alto-
The Bible does not shrink from the solemn declaration, I form the light and I create the darkness ; I make peace and I create evil ; I the Lord gether beyond her powers.
do
ALL
these things
A oiol yap
and
re ttlOoi KaraKeiarai hv
dopov, ola dtdoGi, nantiv, erepog
d
A log
time,
it
sternly
ovdei,
de, eucov.
[lev k ’ apfii^ag 6oltj Zevg, k. t. X.
t Isaiah xlv., 7. ,
same
yet, at the
—
Iliad , xxiv., 527.
There can be no doubt, from the mention here
of the light and the darkness and from the connexion of this remark,
able declaration with the prophecy respecting Cyrus, that there
must
have been intended a special reference to the Zoroastrian or Persian doctrine.
S 2
210
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.
forbids the impious thought, that the Divine
Essence can
sin. Thou art of purer eyes Evil shall not dwell with thee. The
hold any communication with than to behold iniquity. caviller
may
say that this
Gordian knot
;
and
is cutting,
according to
that,
es the apparent contradiction, that is
instead of untying the this, revelation
God
teach-
creates evil, and yet
not the author of sin, without which there could be no
evil.
It is
even
it
submit, or receive
all
ities,
and
total
There
so.
derstandings, but
is
is
a contradiction to our un-
a contradiction to which
we must
the contradictions, mysteries, absurd
darkness of atheism.
It
served, that this great difficulty lies, in
has been well ob-
some form,
very threshold of every system which has the least be styled religious, in order
to
must be received as matters of ing at war with reason,
is,
teach us
that,
at
the
title
to
some things
This, instead of be-
faith.
in fact, its highest dictate.
It
presents an incipient faith as the only condition on which
everything else are shut up to
reason
itself,
is to it
be understood, and declares that
we
by something higher and stronger than
even
the necessities of our
Let those who, in such a case as Bible as their only guide, devise,
if
moral being
this, will not
.
take the
they can, a better sys-
tem than the one which Plato and Zoroaster felt themselves compelled to adopt, although they must have been well aware of the difficulties, and war of ideas, or first princi-
which it involved them. They could not believe two Supremes on account of the logical contradiction,
ples, in
in
was inferior to, and capable of being controlled by, the Good (as they unquestionably did), the same old objection comes back with all The position to which our philosopher manifests its force. so strong a repugnance is only so changed as to make God and
yet, if they held that the evil soul
the permissive instead of the positive author of evil. ,
consolation in this
;
especially
when
Small
taken in connexion
with that melancholy declaration just quoted by us from the
TLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.
211
second book of the Republic, that “ our good things are
much fewer It
in
number than our
evil things.”
should be remarked, however, that Plato’s evil princi-
ple differed, in
some most important
made known
spirit
The
to us in the Bible.
though recognised by him as a
much
respects, from the evil
'ipvxv, or soul,
former,
was
a moral or spiritual, as a physical power.
al-
not so It
was
the dark, foolish, disorderly, intractable, chaotic, evil spirit of matter the
(if
we may
use so paradoxical a term), on which
Good God was ever exerting an
influence, in bringing
from chaos into harmony, although that influence was
it
ever resisted, and sometimes exercised with great difficulty. It is
to this
he alludes
in the Timaeus, although in this lat-
work we find no trace of that animation and personality which is assigned to the evil principle in the tenth of The Laws. In the Timaeus, too, although possessed of motion ter
and a
sort of blind activity,
rather than an
navra
enemy :
it
is
a hinderance, or an obstacle,
BovXrjOeig
yap
(f)Xavpov 6s pr]6sv elvat , ovro)
,
$ ebg ayaOa psv
6
6f]
rtdv ooov rjv opa-
rov napaXadcov oi>x rfOvx^ v ciyov aXXa tuvovpevov* rrXrjppsXtig teal ardteredg, Kara 6vva\av slg rd^tv avro rjyaysv ,
etc
ara^iag. Qsjug yap our’
rrjg
T£2I 6pav aXXo TrXrjv
ing that *
On
all
this
rjv
ovr son T12I ’APIU’
to KAAAI2T0N — “For God, wish-
things should be good, and that there should be
and some few similar expressions
been grounded the argument
for the
common
held to the eternity of matter, and that
it
in the
Timaeus has
position, that Plato
possessed a principle cf
own, independent of the creating and constantly energizing power of the Deity. Should it be admitted that our philosopher is justly
its
chargeable with inconsistency,
assumed
in the
Laws
in
still
we
contend that the positions
respect to the inertness of matter, and the
superior antiquity of soul, should have the greater weight, inasmuch as the extracts from the Timaeus are merely incidental declarations,
whereas the latter form the very heart and substance of one of his most studied and elaborately-prepared arguments. See farther, on this subject,
Note
L.,
On
the
Ancient Doctrine
,
Dc
Nihilo Nihil jit.
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.
212
nothing bad, thus taking in hand the visible (or material),
never
at rest, but ever
moving about
in a strange and disor-
derly manner, as far as he could reduced
For
to order.
from disorder
not permitted (ov tiefug,
is
it
it
it is
morally
impossible) for the Best Being to do anything else than the
bestâ&#x20AC;?
So, also, in that trinity about which
Timceus, 30, A.
much has been
so
and which but
said,
faintly appears in
any parts of his authentic dialogues, the or third hypostasis, seems to be rather a benign physical influence,
make any approach
than to
which
is
institute
to that renovating
revealed in the Scriptures.
we
If
any comparison, we would say
resemblance
to the
nn
of Genesis,
i.,
2,
moral power
should dare to
that
it
has more
and Psalms,
civ.,
30, than to the Ttvevfia of Paul and John.
The
truth
on
is, that,
this great
and
the existence and origin of evil, the
have wavered, and ent times.
to
have had
Here he very
it
subject of
mind of Plato seems
to
different opinions at differ-
briefly, yet
his belief in a 'personal evil soul
difficult
.
very distinctly, avows
In the Republic he leaves
as a matter of inference, contenting himself with the dec-
laration, that
God
while, at the
same
is
the author of good, and of good only,
time,
he asserts
nates, at least in the present state.
that the evil predomi-
In the Timaeus,
it is
a
lower order of being, the dark and chaotic principle of matter,
possessing something of a positive character, yet
without anything psychical or animate in
its
nature.
still
In the
some of its features, allied to this, yet capable of being resolved into what modern theologians would call a mere permission of evil, as a negative principle, deriving its power from occasional Politicus, or Statesman, there is a view, in
withdrawals of the Divine presence and superintendence.
This we gather from
that
most singular myth,
in
which he
represents the universe as subject to alternate revolutions of immense length, during one of which good and perfection
predominate, while, in the other, although the good,
for a
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.
213
long time, exerts an influence, through habit, even after the
withdrawal of the Divine Presence, yet
evil
and disorder,
being introduced by degrees, increase more and more,
until,
would Old Chaos comes God once more resume the long-abandoned again, and total destruction
finally,
ensue, did not
helm.
a portion of Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s works on which but
It is
been bestowed, and
attention has
always having seemed interest,
we
to
give the passage to our readers at
universe
this
Again, he abandons
it
its
us to possess a deep theological
and in a very free version guides
little
consequence of
yet, in
:
â&#x20AC;&#x153;
God
and turns
(fvyiTodrjyel), to itself,
when
tined times have received their full
some
length,
himself, at one time, it
the periods of
complement
;
round. its
des-
when, be-
wisdom implanted in it from the beginning, it commences of
ing animate, and having had
him who harmonized it at its own accord to move in a contrary tendency cessity of
to a retrograde
and
;
this
motion arises from an innate ne-
For
nature.
its
direction
to
be ever in the same relations
[nard ravra ), and uniform, and the same, pertains alone those things which are most divine ter
has no share in this dignity.
the heavens or the universe
taken of
generated
many it
;
this account,
but the nature of mat-
What we name,
ovpavov (
real
therefore,
nooyov), hath par-
blessed things or qualities from him
has communion with
still, it it
;
is
impossible that
to
it
who
matter, and, on
should be altogether
exempt from change, although, as far as it is capable, it moves on in one regular course, in the same and according It is in this way that it gets this to the same relations. property of unrolling, or rolling back, consisting, at the slightest conceivable change or parallax of
its
first,
in
previous
For anything always to turn itself is impossible, except for Him who is the supreme controller of all moving things but for this Being to act in a changeable manner,
motion.
;
or to turn things,
now
trary, is impossible
(
in this direction,
ov
fiefur, is
and now
in the con-
morally impossible ).
For
;
214 all
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.
we
these reasons must
itself forever,
nor that
trary circuits.
it
say, that the world neither turns
rd g
eavrov
del, prjr'
its
j
vovvre eavrotg evavria Grpecpeiv avrov), said (and which, in at
one time,
period
it
is
;
but, as
the only supposition
fact, is
guided by a Divine cause
;
and then, again, that
ed so long, that even
it
many
cupied in the revolution.”
goes by
it
del 6 lt-
tied) (f>po-
has been left), that,
during which
receives again the acquired power of
it
immortality not innate, but imparted to
gus
avrov orpe-
revolutions {prjp
av oXov imo deov orpecpeodai
evavrtag TrepLaycoyag, upp av 6vo rive
real
in con-
Neither must we suppose that two Gods * with
opposing purposes conduct (j)£tv
God
forever turned by
is
and an
life,
from the Demiur-
itself,
being abandon-
ten thousand years
may
Politicus, 269, P.
The myth then proceeds to The first, or that which riods.
describe the alternate peis
under the direct care of
the Deity, is represented as the golden age, during
time the earth produces
be oc-
all
which
things spontaneously, without
cultivation, and, in general, the order of all things is
death to * This
life.f
Good was
This was the reign of Saturn.
is in direct
opposition to the doctrine laid
from
down
in
The
Laws, where he maintains that there are at least two souls, one good and the other bad, occupied in the movements of the universe. Here, however, he seems to be very much averse to such an opinion, as inconsistent and unnatural. Some would say that this furnishes conclusive evidence that the one or the other, or both of If such an argument could be held would certainly be against the Politicus,
these dialogues, are spurious. legitimate, the conclusion
The Laws was followed by all the subsequent and regarded as an undoubted position of their master
since the doctrine of Platonists,
but, in truth, instead of invalidating either,
it
only show’s
how
a great
mind wavered on the deepest question f It might,
in philosophy and theology. however, seem, to some, to be rather a species of in-
verted death, as during this period the order of all things
commence a manhood returns to
is
so chan-
ged, that the old
process of return to the vigour of mid-
dle age,
youth, youth to boyhood, boyhood to
infancy, infancy to entire disappearance from the stage of
life.
In
215
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE. predominant, although there
is
no
little
confusion in the ac-
count which this splendid myth, in other respects so clear, gives of this period.
It at last,
however, comes
and when the complement of the times had been and the change must take place, then, Pilot letting go the helm retires
depvrjTpg
the
of
innate tendency are left to turn hack
and
,
the revolutions
filled up,
is said, the Divine
his secret place of obser-
to
,
,
vation and destiny
it
an end,
to
world
tots
:
tov rravTog 6
6i)
[isv
nv-
olov rrrjdakiGiv olanog acpepevog slg tt)v clvtov
,
aTTsoT?)
TT spLCJTTrjv
•
tov 6s
dij
uoopov rtdXtv dvsoTpscj)SV
At the same
Kipappsv7] ts uai ^vpcpVTog smOvp'ia 272, E. ,
time, the other
A aipovsg,
whom,
to
as presiding divinities,
had been alSupreme Ruler, hear the sigrespective provinces. Then com-
or angels,* -the various parts of the universe lotted in subordination to the
and
nal,
retire
from their
mences the predominance of works, gives signs of wo. motion
(
osiopbg TTohvg)
doned world.
Nature, through
evil.
First, a strange
is
all
her
tremour or com-
every part of the aban-
felt in
After a while, however, to employ Plato’s
imagery, the vessel ceases from the tumultuous surging
which
at first ensues,
new
into the
and enjoying a calm, gets
course in which
The world goes on
for a
is
it
season with some degree of regu-
consequence of influences being yet exerted by
larity, in
those laws and principles to which in that previous state continuation of the
come
to
earth
:
when
it
was
slg
ek,
had been accustomed
directly under the Divine
same wild and strange
fancy, the dead are said
rtiv TETETievTrjtiOTov av, kel/j,£v(*)v 6e ev
Tavavrca
We
rf/g ysvicrEog.
ry
rpoTrrj
yy
—
}
tt a?uv
ekel %vvig-
ovvavanvK?iOVfj,Evrjg
can hardly help thinking that
in this
myth may be traced the rudiments of an ancient doctrine
of a resurrection.
enough, and yet so
sometimes *
it
out of their graves, and thus to be born again from the
rafjLEVovg Kal avafiiooicopEVOvg, ETTEodaL
singular
at length
destined to proceed.
The general idea intended by much confusion rests upon the
is difficult to
Plato
is
clear
details, that
it
decide to which period they in fact belong.
See Note XXXIV., on
the Platonic Doctrine of the
Animation of
,
;
216
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE EVIL PRINCIPLE.
care. #
By
slow degrees the former motion, with the order
and harmony by which until,
it
was accompanied, is diminished, it makes a transi-
having passed the minimum point,
tion to the contrary direction with a constantly accelerated
momentum. then that the greatest deteriorations and corruptions
It is
take place
;
of the
first,
world, and, finally, of the
animal
vegetable, next, of the
human
race, until here and there
The
a small and wretched remnant alone survive.
old har-
mony, the remembrance of which had not before been entirely quenched, of nature are
now
is
The former laws when on the very
utterly extinct.
reversed, until, finally,
all
verge of utter ruin
—tot’
avrov ev dno-
o Beog, naOopCov
TjSrj
imo rapa)(f\g btaXvOelg elg rov rrjg avopotorprog auetpov ovra rorrov dv'qj ttclXlv eepedpog avrov rcbv nrjdaXiojv ytyvopevog ra voorj-
otatg bvra, KTjdopevog Iva p?) ^Bipaodelg
,
oavra teal XvOevra orpBifjag Koopel re varov avrov nal ayrjpG) anspya^eraL
—
,
“
God, beholding
and being concerned,
in great extremity,
whelmed
enavopOtiv, aOa-
teal
in disorder
lest,
and utterly dissolved,
it
being over-
should plunge
it
again into the limitless, formless region of dissimilitude and chaos, once more seats himself at the helm
had before returned
avrov
rrepiOJTcrjv),
ed parts rectifies
to his secret
and thus renders
the
Heavenly Bodies
tlic
Demons
it
,
its
weak and it
again in order,
immortal,” 273, D.
and Note LXVII., on
the Platonic Doctrine of
* Or, in the expressive language of the original,
dg dvvapiv
bering the teaching of
its
Phaeton striving
tions given
dissolv-
or Genii.
daxrjv anopvrjfiovEvuv
fable of
from which he
place of observation elg ri)v
and having arrested
in their course to ruin, arranges it,
(
him by
—“
Still,
ttjv
as well as
it
tov narpog could,
61-
remem-
The allusion seems to be to the remembe^and follow the direcwhen he so rashly undertook to drive
father.”
in vain to
his father,
the chariot of the Sun. t Lest it should
plunge again into
the limitless place of dissimilitude.
That is, back again to old chaos. The language strongly mind the JiriDl 2 n °f Genesis, i
.
ceJJ? fo
of avdynTj
We
,
or necessity.
217
find occasionally in Plato, especially in the Timaeus,
mention made of dvdynr] or necessity as some strong and apparently opposing power, on which the Divine energy ,
,
constantly exercised, not so
was
ing, as in controlling
much
and directing Thus,
of the Divine purposes.
it
to
in directly
overcom-
the accomplishment
in the Timaeus, 48, A.,
he
speaks of the generation of the world having proceeded
from the combined operation of vovg and avdynr] mind and To the former, however, he ascribes a species necessity. ,
of authority, yet of a persuasive rather than of a violent nature
:
6s avdyrcrjg dp^ovrog, rep rtdduv avrrjv rtiv
Nov
9
yeyvopevov ra nXelora enl to /3sXtigtov ayetv ravr'q 6i avdyurjg rjTTCjpevrjg vito iruOovg epeppovog, ovro) %vvioraro ,
rode to nav
— “ But, since
Mind
rules Necessity,
by per-
suading her to bring to the best results the most of things as they are generated
overcome by
;
thus, in this
way, through necessity
rational persuasion, this universe received
its
construction.”
By
dvdyfcrj, here, Plato
does not
mean
his evil soul , nei-
he generally intend any physical necessity
ther does
ari-
sing from motion as a property of matter (although he and the
Greek poets* do sometimes apply the term
style the
laws of nature, and
it
to
what we
has something of this aspect
in the present passage from the Timaeus), but rather a met-
aphysical or logical necessity, a necessity existing in the idea of a thing, in it
what
it
is
—
its
in its
of the mind, by
constituting cause , or that
Xoyog or notion
which
,
it
is
— in
compelled
which makes
short, a necessity to include certain
principia in the very definition of any existing or conceiv-
able thing; and hence
he employs
in respect to
it
such
terms as rcdOecv, and iretOovg epeppovog, words which would
have
little
or no
meaning as applied
to a purely physical
necessity. * As, for example, Euripides, Troades, 893 y
:
Zfik, elr avayurj tyvoeoQ elre vovq pporuv. ,
T
218
of
For example,
on necessity.
avdyicrj,
in the idea of matter, or rather body, im-
Hence,
penetrability necessarily enters.
impos-
also, the
two bodies should ever occupy the same space ; which we have shown (page 143) to be more of a logical sibility that
God cannot make
than a physical necessity. out this. that
no more irreverent thus
It is
God cannot make
any case go contrary
have
it
remain the same.
than to say
is
not body,
and yet
to the idea of anything,
Motion
is
not a necessary prop-
we
say this, we mean that there no law of our minds, as in the above cases, which com-
erty of matter is
to speak,
matter or body, which
or in
matter with-
and when
;
pels us to predicate
necessity (that
it
of matter.
a necessity in
is,
Other species of logical
of things ) are the Hence, the laws of motion, being
mathematical avdyuai.
the ideas
partly mathematical and partly physical, are necessary, so far as
they partake of the former character.
not ne-
It is
cessary that bodies should attract each other in the inverse ratio of the squares of their distances
dinance of God, cubes. tion as
it
would have been
When, however, a fact,
it
bers involved
had
it
been the
or-
in the ratio of their
moof num-
the Deity establishes such a
must conform
in,
:
to all the necessities
and which grow out
formula or statement of the law.
of,
the
first
simple
So, also, in morals, the
idea of good may, perhaps, necessarily include the contin-
gency of
evil
with misery.
;
sin
may
be necessarily associated, in idea,
In all such cases, Plato would speak of the
Deity not as violently overcoming necessity, but as ruling, directing, controlling
moral government,
it,
to bring about the
or, in
purposes of his
other words, using towards
kind of rational persuasion.â&#x20AC;?
it
â&#x20AC;&#x153;a
MOTION OF VOVg COMPARED TO THAT OF A SPHERE. 219
XXXII. Platonic Analogy between the Motion that
Page
Line
34,
ofNovg and ^v%7] ana
of a Sphere, or of the Heavens. 5.
E
nal (popa vov Kivrjoei
l
pev
real
t-vpnaoa ovpavov bdog apa
rj
nepiepopa Kai Xoyiopolg opoiav
—
ex et Kai %vyyevtig epxsrai, k. t. A. “ If the whole and course of the heavens hath a nature similar to the
(pvotv
way
course, and period, and reasonings of mind, and proceeds in a kindred
soul
manner,
may compare piodog
Tdf
'ipvx'ijg,
with
this
which
aOavdrov
rr\g
we must
is
same
the
We
the expressions, nepiodog vov —
7T£-
occur so frequently in the Timaeus
ipv%$jg nepiodovg evedovv elg
nal anoppyrov owpa. there
certainly affirm that the best
evepyenda) takes care of the universe.”
[rrjv (
Timceus, 43, A.
So, also,
allusion in the expression,
rj
:
emppvrov 39, where
rijg
ptag nal
(ppompojrdrrjg KVK^rjoecog nepiodog.
After the description of the visible animal (£g3op oparov), or material universe in
world was
to reside,
which the new-created soul of the KivrjOiv yap anevetpev
he thus says
:
avTtp rrjv rov odparog pa’kiora oiKeiav, rcov ejira rr\v nepi
vovv nai
(ppovrjoiv
rep avrep
paXiora ovoav.
K ivelodai orpeepopevov tion of its
did drj
Kara ravra, ev
Kai ev avrep rtepiayayebv avro, enotrjoe kvkXco
own,
—
“
For he gave to it a peculiar moone of the seven which has
namely, that
mind and wisdom. Wherefore, guiding it so as to move always in the same relations, in the same place, and within itself, he made it Timceus 33, P. We have the same revolve in a circle.” idea a little farther on in this tenth book of The Laws, page 35, line 15 To Kara ravra diyrtov Kai ehoavreog Kai ev tgj avrep, Kai nepi ra avrd, Kai npog ra avrd Kai eva Xoyov
the nearest relation (or analogy) to
,
:
,
Kai ra%iv piav apepeo Kivelodai Xeyovreg, vovv, rrjv re ev kvi (pepopev7]v KivrjOiv, oepatpag evropvov aneiKaopeva <po -
— 220 MOTION OF vovg COMPARED TO THAT OF A SPHERE. palg, ovtt
dv nore,
mind and motion
n. r. X.
—“
in one, &c.,
If
we
say
this,
namely, that
being both of them capable
of being likened to the revolutions of a sphere, do both of
them ever move Kara ravrd preserving the same ,
relations,
and
in a uniform manner, in the same, around the same,
according to one analogy and one order, stitute
we
should not
in-
an inferior or imperfect comparison.”
This was one of the favourite speculations of Plato, and is
kept prominently in view in the Timaeus
that,
without attending to
many passages
in that
cult dialogue.
He
it, it
;
so
much
so,
impossible to understand
is
most profound, yet strange and
diffi-
there describes the soul of the world as
being constituted of two essences
nard ravrd exovG^g ovoiag nal yiyvo\ievT]g pepiGrr\g
rrjg apep'iGrov
av
rr\g
rrepl
nal del
rd G&para
— the one conversant with eternal, un
changeable, and necessary truth, vorjGei pera Xoyov nepiXiyrrov styles
;
the other, with facts or phenomena, or, as he here
them
The Laws,
in
the second-working motions of
matter, physical laws, or second causes. these,
Corresponding
to
he frequently speaks of two periods, which, in very
strange phraseology, he describes as
nal rrjg rov erepov. circular motion
The
(<£ epopevrjv
first
rfjg
rj
he likens
ravrov
(f>vGeojg
to spherical or
ev evi), and finds
its
symbolical
expression in the steady, unvarying, and eternal revolution of the sphere of the fixed stars or highest heavens (wheth-
phenomenal or not makes, in this respect, no The other, which he elsewhere styles a bas-
er regarded as
difference).
tard reason (vodog XoytGpog ), is conceived as represented
by the
irregular, variant,
and sometimes retrograde motions
of the lower bodies, and especially of the terrestrial phe-
nomena.
Matter and the external world being in a con-
he regarded sensation, and that exercise of reason which takes sensation and phenomenal facts for its
tinual flux,
necessary hypotheses as partaking of ,
its
to
ever-flowing foundation. 43, B.
all
the instability of
See the Tim<zus,from 28,
A.,
MOTION OP vovg COMPARED TO THAT OF A SPHERE. 221 There
many
are
parison to such a
Above
son.
mind as
some things
beauty,
its
to justify
it
satisfies the
itself,
oi perfection, unity,
form delights the eye, while
find the analogy
its
In the contemplation of
mind. still
more
striking.
If
and
;
soundest rea-
to the
may
be
immutability,
Complete both in sensible and
eternity.
com-
this
combining so much of
Plato’s,
other figures, the sphere, in
all
regarded as the symbol
and
which would suggest
and poetical with the philosophical
the imaginative
there are also
things
intellectual
idea perfectly
motion
its
we
regarded as repre-
senting the psychical self-energy of soul, or of God, sents a perfect resemblance in the fact, that
pre-
motion
it is
energy, without any change of the place which
it
it
oi
occupies
as a whole, or, in other words, combining simultaneously
and harmoniously the opposite phenomena of motion and rest
—
rest relative throughout, or
absolute in the centre, while yet
motion
is
describes
Auscult .,
By
taken as a whole, and rest it is
the source from
which
diffused outward through every part; as Aristotle it,
did Kcvelrac aal rjpepel ttgjc
crcpalpa.
rj
Physic
.
viii., 9.
more perfect analogy,
a higher and
may be
it
regard-
ed as representing the intellectual energy of vovg or reason, ,
when engaged in the Both may be perfectly of Plato
contemplation of immutable truth. described by those favourite terms
which occur so
often in the Phrndon, and that, too,
without being regarded as tropical in the one case more
The
than in the other.
everlasting,
unchanging motion of
the “ old rolling heavens,” like the perfection, uniformity,
and immutability of the eternal ideas, may also be said
to
del Kara ravra — (baavrcog — ev avrep — ra avra — npdg ra avra — eva Xoyov piav rd^iv e%ovoa. The be,
rep
Trepi
teal
argument here so
many
is,
points
that that motion of the heavens, whicl} in
is
analogous
the best soul, must have been
and the object of
its
to the intellectual its
direct
continual care.
T
2
and
first
When
energy of production,
stripped of
its
222 MOTION OF vovg COMPARED to that of a sphere. sublime imagery
(if
we may
so regard
it),
the sentiment
equivalent to that of the Timseus, already quoted
yap
ovpavog) naXXiorog rwv yeyovorov
(tcoopog
(deog) dptorog
rwv airlwv. Qepcg
apiorep dpav aXko
same
dialogue,
creation spiritual
by and
tion of the
pavov
f
:
ttXtjv
de odt’
rjv
to naXXiorov.
o
de
ovr eotl
rep
,
3
So, also, in the
he represents the soul of the world,
the “ Everlasting Father,” as
is
O pev
after its
commencing
its
rational life (eptypovog {3lov ) with the revoluf
heavens
:
H
de en peoov npog rov eop^arov ov-
TTavTT] dtaixXaneloa^ icvtcXcp re
avrov
e£coOev
irepma-
hv'ipaoa, avTTj re ev avrx\ orpecpopevri, delay ap%7]v rjp^aro
anavorov nal After this
rbv fvpnavra xpovov. follows that most sublime passage which sets ttpog
epcj)povog /3lov
forth the delight of the Eternal Generating Parent at be-
holding this glorious work of his hands, the e^wov oparov or visible universe, with
its
,
informing soul, living and mo-
ving on in the most perfect harmony, and the celestial revolutions taking place
with
all
the order and exactness of a
creation fresh from the hands of
its
Maker
at sight
;
of
which he is said to have admired, even with astonishment, this image of the eternal powers, and to have rejoiced in it 'Qg de tavrjOev re avro nal as exceedingly fair and good £(x)V evevorjoe rwv aidiwv dewv yeyovog ayaXpa O PEN:
r
NH2A2
PTATHP,
TjydoOrj re nal evcppavOeig ert 6?) pa)l-
Xov opocov npog ro napadecypa enevoTjoev direpydoaoQai.
On
reading this passage, one can hardly help feeling that
some
of the Christian fathers
Plato, in his travels,
so strongly does
31 it
:
And God
it
had had access
call to
this
may we
mind the
right in supposing that to the
books of Moses
declaration, Genesis,
Perhaps in
;
i.,
made and behold some such view as.
looked upon all which he had
was good very good. ,
were
,
,
take that remarkable expression of Aristotle,
wg epwpevov, on which we have remarked, page 194. If there were any proof that he held to Plato’s soul of the world, we might, with Cudworth, suppose him to Kivel de
.
MOTION OF VOVg COMPARED TO THAT OF A SPHERE. 223 have meant that ens, not
by a
The
Eternal Novg turned round the heav-
upon them, but by
direct action
some by which
virtue of
sympathizing attraction of a pervading plastic soul
were regulated. we may compare what is said by Proclus commentary on the Timssus 6 xpovog did tt)v npog
their motions
On
this subject
in his
:
rov alcbva
piprjaiv nvnXeloQai feyerai, (bg teal o ovpavbg
did rrjv irpbg rbv
reason of
its
N ovv
fiiprjoiv cr<paip(boOai
move
imitation of eternity, is said to
heaven, on account of
cle, as the
—“ Time, by in a cir-
imitation of mind,
its
is
moves in a sphere.”* In this he is commenting on the same analogy presented by Plato, Timceus 37, P., where he tells us that as the visible rolling heavens correspond to that soul of the world of which it is the outward ehccbv, or image, so is time an image of eternity. As spherical, or
,
the revolving mirror seems to set in motion the heavens, the earth, the trees,
and
all
the objects of the really
immove-
able landscape, so time is a revolving image or reflection of
the fixed eternal state, and so also the visible
moving heav-
ens are the sensible and temporal representative of the Eternal 7]oai ,
Mind
:
E luova
d’
emvoel
riva altivog
tavrjrrjv
rroi«‘
nai diatcoayibv d\ia ovpavov , noiel, pievovrog ahbvog 9
ev evt, (car apiOpov iovoav aiibviov einbva tovtov ov
Xpovov (bvopatcapev —
,
“
He
thought
to
make
6i]
a moving image
of th q fixed eternity; and as he arranged the heavens, eternity itself remaining forever in unity (that
is,
without suc-
he made an image of eternity to proceed by numsame which we call time.” In the same way, while the Eternal Mind or Reason remains in everlasting O
cession), ber, the
unity
(
ev kvi ), the visible rolling universe, proceeding by
number,
may
be regarded as
its
temporal and moving im-
* This comparison of mind to a sphere
cient Egyptian notion
God
sitting
like the
upon the
;
as Iamblichus
lote-tree,
motion of intellect
because
seems
tells its
to
have been an an-
us that they pictured
leaves and fruit are round
224 age
MOTIONS OF THE EVIL SOUL IRREGULAR. :
rov aloviov nal ev evi pe-
elucbv xpovLnrj uai mvr\Tr\
vovrog
N ov.
From some such
idea as this
came probably
the Latin scholastic term iini-versum, involving the ideas
of totality and unity, of motion in every part, and yet rest
and as a whole.
in the centre
So, in another place, speaky
ing of the motion of the stars, Plato says, boa dt ovpavov
opoiorarov
nopevopeva, tva rodâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;
NOHTI2I
TTpdg r fjv
(jcbcp
rep reXecorarcp,
rj
nal
diauoviag piprjoiv (bvoecjg
rrjg
Timceus 39, E. ,
XXXIII. The Motions of the Evil Soul Irregular and Disorderly. The nearer an Approach to the Pure Reason the more of FixAtheistic Objection from the Unedness and Uniformity. varying Regularity of the Heavens ; from whence was in,
ferred
Absence of Will and Reason
the
Page
0 vuovv av
36, Line 4.
.
ye pTjdenore (boavrug,
rj
Kara rd avrd, prjde ev ravrep pife ev tlvi Xoycp As uniform, reg/dvrjoig, avolag av andorjg etrj %vyyevrjg urjde
.
.
,
.
.
ular,
immutable, spherical motion,
and wisdom, so the opposite of short distance back,
rat)
is
it
all
pavuccbg uai ardurcog ep%e-
is said,
allied to that error, folly,
Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s view, evil soul.
were the chief
How
akin to mind, truth,
is
these (that of which, a
and disorder, which,
in
characteristics of the dark and
admirably does he, in the Phaedon, teach
same doctrine in respect to the human spirit, although somewhat different language, and with different imagery.
this
in
How
strikingly does
ing like a drunken
he describe
it
as reeling and stagger-
man (fXavopevr]
uai raparropevrj
/cat
lAtyyicboa tbonep peOvovoa) while occupied solely with the
animal
life
of the visible world
;
until
it
withdraws from the
turbulence of sense, and becomes assimilated (rep deico,
dOavarcp
,
teal
vorjrcp , uai povoetdei teal
teal
ddiaXvrcp) to the
HEAVEN, A STATE OF ETERNAL REST.
225
Divine, the immortal, the intelligible, the moniform, the indissoluble, the del d)oavru)g nal or, in
Kara ravra iftovn eavrco
;
other words, that state of everlasting energy yet ever,
lasting rest , of ever-active contemplation, yet eternal quiet-
ism,
In
which
reserved for the just in the spiritual world.
Plato most certainly agrees with the Scriptures.
this,
He
is
differs,
however, from no small portion of the modern
Christian Church, with
whom
it
a favourite theory, that
is
the future condition of the saved soul will present a scene
of activity in almost every respect similar to the present,
and who would transfer all
to the
the action, and even
lower world.
One
all
heavenly
state all the bustle,
the physical science of this
of our most popular religious writers
indulges, at great length, in a consideration of the superior
advantages which the celestial world will present for the study of the sciences of astronomy and trigonometry
though the healed
spirit
could find
its
those pursuits that even here had failed to yield
and permanent satisfaction. carry
all
state of
as
it
any
solid
This modern doctrine would
the mutations of sense into ihdX fixed and eternal
which time
however, find
The
;
everlasting rest in
ideas
it
is
any more than
in the Scriptures
which
We
but the moving image.
cannot,
in Plato.
revelation most prominently presents of
the heavenly world, and which,
we
also think,
must be most
precious to the truly pious soul, are those of repose from the agitations of the present scene of probation
;
of assu-
rance, of light, of absolute certainty or freedom from doubt, of eternal rest
;
and yet
all this in
all
perfect consistency
with the most intense moral emotion and the most energetic contemplation of fixed and everlasting truth.
We
may
be-
lieve in a progress of the soul, but in a very different sense
from that in which the doctrine
which holds out an tion
of outward
is
commonly
ever-restless, never-satisfied
knowledge, as the
throughout eternity
taught, and
;
a progress
spiritâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
which seems
accumula-
employment to necessitate
226
CONSTANCY
and eternal imperfection, and
eternal doubt all,
THE CELESTIAL MOTIONS,
IN
no real advance
is
in
which,
after
ever made, because the position of
the soul in regard to the highest truths remains as unchan-
ged as
We
present flowing world.
in the
find but
little, if
any, trace of this doctrine of progress in the Scriptures.
Revelation seems rather to intimate that, instead of this
moving on
eternal
in the acquisitions of science, the per-
fection of the soul will rather consist in the beatific vis-
ion of those fixed, established truths, in the
scheme
which are fundamental
of our redemption, and in the swelling moral
emotions of the heavenly ayamj
mere yvchaig holds only the
— that
relation
which all of a means which is to charity to
vanish away, and to be regarded as naught
end
when
great
its
Nothing seems more clearly
shall be accomplished.
taught in the Bible than that one of the essential elements of the eeonian state
is
fixedness and certainty.
“
Now we
see through a glass darkly, but then face to face.” In the Divine Soul these two apparently opposite ideas of repose and energy meet in their highest perfection
whatever to’s
may
;
and
be thought of the philosophical truth of Pla-
comparison,
it
must certainly be admitted that there
is
a sublime, and even an almost divine beauty in thus taking
Mind
as the symbol of the Eternal
the steady revolution of
the “ old rolling heavens,” ever presenting to us the images of power, of calm yet resistless motion, of an ever-wakeful, ever- energizing Providence,
and of everlasting
Plato, in the Epinomis, or
Laws, adverts
draw an the
to
a very
common
atheistic objection
celestial
courses.
“
Appendix
to his
prejudice,
rest.
dialogue on
which would
from the unvarying regularity of
It
should be proof to men,” he
says, “ that the revolutions of the heavenly bodies are un-
der the direction of reason, because they ever do the same,
even those things which had been planned and counselled ages beyond our conception. Yet the many think differently,
and
infer,
from the fixedness and uniformity of their mo-
NO PROOF OF THE ABSENCE OF WILL AND REASON. 227 tions, that
they have not soul
that the
human
serve in
it
is
and so they come
;
because
we
because
it
is
And
believe that there
is
ob~
to
be
destitute of reason,
ever abides in the same fixed courses
fievov kv ralg avralg (popalg.
should
seem
variant and irregular motions (which
the result of will), but that the divine it
to think
and animated, because they
rational
:
citppov dig
yet on this very account
a rational nature in the stars,
ever doeth the same, and in the same manner,
and preserving the same relations to icarti ravra ual Epinomis 982, D., E. (baavTG)g ual ra avrd tt parrel del. In this passage, of which we have given a very free ver:
1
'
,
sion,
he seems
to
be aiming to show that the stars them-
selves are animated, yet
still
the argument
of that particular hypothesis.
is
independent
equally valid, whether
It is
they are regarded as under the control of the Supreme or subordinate intelligences
;
and the remarks apply with
we have
their force to the position
in hand,
all
namely, that
soul and reason must be steady, uniform, and immutable, in
proportion as they are above the turbulence and irregularities of the sensible
world
;
and that
hostile to the doctrine of a minute is
absolutely essential to
beautiful
its
instead of being-
this,
and special providence, This sublime and
perfection.
view of the everlasting constancy of the heavenly
motions, as representative of the calmness, immutability,
and absolute certainty in the operations of that Divine Will which
is
ever one with the Divine
Reason
,
thus admirably
is
presented by Balbus the Stoic, in Ciceroâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s second book
Natura Deorum, sec. 22
:
Nulla igitur in
caelo
nec temeritas nec erratio nec varietas inest nis
;
contraque
ORDO, VERITAS, RATIO, CONSTANTLY
que his vacant ementita terras, infra
et falsa
plenaque
lunam, quae omnium ultima
erroris, est,
De
nec fortuna
om
Quae-
ea circum
in terrisque
versantur.
In the Timaeus, Plato gives us a most vivid picture of the converse of this truth, namely, the turbulence and rest-
;
228
STRANGE COMPARISON FROM THE TIMiEUS.
lessness of the soul under the overpowering influence of
We
the world of sense and matter.
or sons of God,
refer to that remark-
which he represents the
able passage in
inferior divinities,
introducing into the ever-flowing mate-
first
human
rial
universe those newly-formed
just
been generated from the anima mundi
which had rather, some
spirits if,
parts of the description do not better apply to the infant soul
of the world itself
K al
:
6
psv
drj
(6 atdcog
TrdvTa dtara^ag epevev ev rep eavrov rcaideg T7jv
tov narpdg
varov dpxr\v dvrjrov
nar^p) ravra
pivovrog
7]Qei.
6e, oi
add
rdigiv vorjoavreg , teal Xafiovreg
£d)ov,
.
.
.
rag
rrjg
aOavarov 'ipvxw
nepcodovg evedovv elg enLppvrov otipa nai dTroppvrov “
And he
(the Eternal Father)
things, abode in his
having arranged
accustomed place
-
(or
mode
all
—
these
of being),
hut the sons, having observed the method of the Father,
and having taken the immortal principle of the mortal
ani-
mal, bound the periods of the immortal spirit into the inflowing and outflowing body.”
This world
Timeeus 42, P. ,
of sense he compares to an ever-moving river,
or, rather, to
a wild and stormy torrent {naratiXv^ov nai anoppeov nvpa),
ever ebbing and rising, agitated by tempestuous winds
(flaXrj
nvEvparcJV vrf aspog (pepopevcov), constantly surging, and bearing about with
commence upon
all
violence the young spirit
ever-restless billows the
its
doomed
to
morning of an
eternal existence.
In this condition, while the infant soul
is
the almost pass-
ive subject of impressions, which, through this sea of matter,
invade
it
from without,
it
is
tossed about
— tots
pev
evavriag (popag tote nkayiag, tote vnriag aXoycog, dran,
T(og — “ sometimes liquely,
now
erect,
ing upon his head Xr\v
pEV eul r r)g
seeing
all
the
,
in
an adverse direction, sometimes ob-
now (
supine, and, again, like one stand-
olov orav rig imriog EpEioag rrjv nE(pa-
yrjg ,
rovg 6e nodag irpoc^aXdv
phenomena
dvo)),
and
of nature strangely inverted, with-
out reason and without order
;
until (as is the case with
—
X
ANIMATION OF
HEAVENLY
TIIE
229
BODIES.
some), through, the exercise of the rational principle constantly gaining the victory,
and aided by right instruction
eav pev emXapbdvrjTai Tig
dpOfj rpocj>77 naidevcrsog .
quires calmness, abstraction, and stability
escaped from
this
most
fearful disorder,
;
—
it
ac-
and having thus
comes
at
length un-
der the abiding influence of immutable truth as exhibited in
which matter presents only the flowing
the eternal ideas of
The whole passage
and varying diagrams. insertion continuously,
We
is
and some parts are quite
would, however, earnestly recommend
the student, not only for
difficult.
perusal to
its
most sublime imagery, but also
its
human
for the profound philosophy of
tained beneath
too long for
nature which
is
See the Timceus, from page 42,
it.
con-
P., to
page 44, D.
XXXIV. Platonic Doctrine of the Animation of the Heaveiily Bodies .
Ancient Belief that each Nation had
its
own
'peculiar
Guardian Daemon or Genius.
Page rpa.
38,
The
Line
H/l tov
real oeXrjvrjv teal
ra
aWa
do-
next question, after deciding the nature of the
governing soul, ordinate (plav is
r/
6.
is, rj
tt
whether etovg),
it
is
one supreme, or many sub-
engaged
in these offices.
Here
another point in Plato’s theology which has given offence
some of his warmest admirers. It has also been the subby Warburton and others, who have been as far as possible removed from the Platonic spirit. They would charge our philosopher here with an absurd polytheism, in making each one of the heavenly to
ject of peculiar animadversion
bodies either a divinity in trol
itself, or, at least,
of a separate divinity.
nott believe in one
and creator of
all
Supreme
If
by
this is
Ineffable
under the con-
meant
that
he did
Power, the generator
other existences, whether divine (in the
U
ANIMATION OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES.
230
Greek sense of deoi, as we have explained it, page 104) or human, the answer is found in places of his dialogues too numerous to mention and especially might we refer to the ;
remarkable passage
in the
TimaBus (41, A.), in which the
Eternal Parent thus addresses the inferior divinities to
whom
he had given being
Trarrjp
re epyo)v, k
.
t. X.
:
Oeot
fteCdv cjv eyd) drjptovpyog
His great object here
in opposition to the atheist, that soul, or tvxtj, guides the motions of the
is to
show,
instead of
heavenly bodies.
Indeed,
throughout the whole argument, he evidently regards the
being of a God, and of soul generally, distinct from, and not a result
of,
bodily organization, as facts which involve each
and which are shown by similar and equivalent
other,
He
proofs.
appears to have considered even a belief in
the real entity of the
human
soul as inseparable from an
acknowledgment of the Divine existence was, as
it
so that the one
were, the ground and guarantee of the other.
this respect, the liveth ,
;
and as
language of the Hebrew oath, â&#x20AC;&#x153; as
In consequence, therefore, of his constant-
ly using these terms for each other,
when he speaks
we
cannot be certain,
of soul or souls as guiding the motions of
means that agency of the Supreme Soul,
the heavenly bodies, whether he direct
was delegated
In
Lord
thy soul liveth ,â&#x20AC;? expressed the true spirit of
his philosophy.
by the
the
to inferior spirits
;
this
or
was done
whether
it
and whether these dele-
gated conducting powers resided severally in the bodies as All these life, or were separate from them. which do not affect his main argument. Without making a division into those distinct hypostases which appear in the Timaeus, he here uses ipvxrj as a general col-
an animating are points
lective term for all that is immaterial, or, at least, as a
name
superhuman powers derived from, and dependent upon, him. This was enough for for the Deity,
and
all celestial
his argument, without
when
any
farther precision or explanation,
dealing with the atheist,
man, be they one or many.
or
who
denied
all
powers above
ANIMATION OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES.
We
may
even go
still
231
and main-
farther in our apology,
he did hold that the heavenly bodies were ani-
tain, that if
mated, or that they were severally under the care of district spirits, there
rious error, even
The
self.
was, in the
latter
when viewed
opinion at least, no se-
in the light of revelation
it-
Bible not obscurely teaches that the personal
destinies of individual
men
are, in a
measure, under the
di-
Churches
rection and guardianship of supernatural beings.
are said to have their guardian angels, according to Reve-
which we prefer to take in this literal sense, rather than to adopt any other interpretation which has been
lations,
ii.,
1,
forced upon
in the
it
government.
controversy respecting ecclesiastical
The same
doctrine
is
pretty clearly intimated
in respect to nations, Daniel, x., 20, 21,
where Greece and
Persia are said each to have their invisible
whether of a good or of an
evil nature.
remarkable passage, Deuteronomy, xxxii.,
champion,
There 8,
also a
is
which,
if
taken
according to the Septuagint version, would directly estab-
same doctrine
lish the
nations
,
:
When
when he separated
the
the sons
Most High divided of Adam,
the
he appointed
hounds of the people according to the number of the children of Israel nsprp ?, as it is in the Hebrew, but, the
1
,
according
to the
dyyeX G)v deov
We
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
number of the angels of God uara aptOpov as it stands in the Greek of the Septuagint.
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
it certainly seems Greek version was more consonant with the context which follows, and which asserts that Israel is the
cannot account for the difference, but
as though the
Lord's peculiar inheritance in distinction from the other na,
tions,
who seem
to
have been
of other directing powers.
be remarked, to
is
left to
the subordinate care
This very passage,
too,
prove that Plato obtained his doctrine of the
from Moses.
vii.,
should xi.,
26,
A acpoveg
That such an idea prevailed among the
heathen nations, especially the Persians, Herodotus,
it
quoted by Eusebius, Frcep. Evang.,
53
:
rot Hepolda
is
evident from
ypv XeXoyxaoi.
;
232
:
ANIMATION OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES.
The
Bible teaches us also that even the ordinary courses
of physical events are under the controlling agency of an-
He
gelic beings.
flaming fire renders
it.
maketh his angels winds his ministers a ,
as the author of the Epistle to the
Science, with
modern
all its
firm nothing in opposition to this.
It is
Hebrews
boasting, can af-
a view
which
in-
terferes not at all with the regularity
and the apparent laws
we
have seen, the Bible
of physical phenomena, and, as quite plainly reveals
Nay, more, may there not be
it.
found some countenance there to this very doctrine of Plato
and churches, and nations, and every
If individuals,
?
department in nature, have their presiding invisible powers,
why
not the heavenly bodies
sun, of the
writers
powers,
when they spoke
mean only
most sublime
it
of the hosts of heaven, and used
agencies
to refer
but
;
it is
this is not
it
to physical rather than
a serious question, whether
or
when we
earth, the stars of the
Was was said, He
contained in the Hebrew.
simply a sublime personification,
when
number ; he
bringetli out their host by
name
Did the ancient
m'NDV Hi ri], Jehovah Tsehhaoth, or The Septuagint, by rendering it nvpioq
Lord of Hosts ? have seemed
much more than
?
physical instead of psychical
epithet,
6vvd[ie(ov,
to spiritual
not an angel of the
moon, and of each planet
Hebrew that
Why
?
it
calletli
them all by
are told that, at the creation of our
morning sang
of God shouted for joy
?\
ring this, extravagant as
We it
together,
and
all the sons
have no hesitation
may
in prefer-
appear, to that modern ex-
treme, which would leave such an immense, unanimated solitude
between man and the Deity, instead of
filling it up,
as the old Patristic theology did, with datgovec, angels, thrones, dominions, principalities, and
powers
With helmed Cherubim,
And sworded Seraphim, and
all that
array of invisible beings,
* Isaiah,
xl.,
26
.
t
whose existence the
dob, xxxviii.,
7.
ANIMATION OF THE HEAVENLY Bible does
seem
to take for granted,
mer times, may have carried it to Surely we may still maintain any the
believe in
although some, in
the precious Protestant
least species of religious adoration,
many an
for-
an extravagant extent.
Supreme Lord of Hosts
doctrine, that no one but the titled to
233
liODIES.
en-
is
and yet
order of being, which, although of far
higher rank, yet constitute, with man, an immense brother-
hood of created intelligences,
all
intended for the manifest-
Him, by whom, and for whom, all things were created, whether visible or invisible, whether There is some reason to in the earth or in the heavens. ation of the glory of
fear that Protestants,
have gone too
under the guise of a hyperspirituality,
what
far in the opposite direction, to
ly a materializing
cover a disposition to banish in our minds spiritual agencies, and,
is real-
When we
and physical hypothesis.
all
dis-
intermediate
by magnifying natural causes,
to
place the Deity at the most remote distance possible,
does really seem as though,
if
we
could or durst,
it
we would
dispense with his presence also in the regulation of the universe.
In
all
ages, a tendency to that sadduceeism
which barely saves the doctrine of the anothe'r state, has
soulâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s existence in
been held, and justly held,
kin to infidelity, if not to downright atheism. believe too
much on
this subject
than too
cannot agree, with Plato, that there superintendence assigned
to
each
is
be near of
to
Far better even
little,
if
to
we
a presiding spiritual
celestial body.
XXXV. Three Hypotheses in respect
to the
Animation of the Heavenly
Bodies.
Page r G),
39,
Line
n. r. A.
We
7.
'Qg
rj
kvovoa evrog
tgj Tcepu^spel rov-
have here three hypotheses.
would make the sun
itself
an animated being
U
2
;
The
first
the second
ANIMATION OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES.
234
would regard or
it
as under the direction of an external angel,
A ai[iG)v, having
making use of a represent
motion
the third would
;
as under the care of a pure, unimbodied spirit
it
or intellect
a material yet highly arthereal body, and
sort of impulsive
ocj^arog ovoa ), either the Universal Nu-
('ipiXrj
men, or some delegated power specially assigned
by the
to that
meant only a particular exercise of the energy of the Universal Soul (which view is perfectly If
office.
last is
consistent with his present argument against the atheist,
although
it
does not fully agree with some things he says
elsewhere), there would be no need of any defence of Plato
which we have
against the charges to
ond, however, as
we
may
have seen,
The
liever in the Christian revelation.
mandi applied
doctrine of the anima the universe. it,
It
may
sec-
first
is
only the
to particular parts of
be maintained, as Plato did maintain
in perfect consistency with a pure theism, or a recogni-
tion of
an Eternal
Spirit, not
but regarded, also, as is
The
referred.
be held by a firm be-
most abundant
we have
its
only above the anima mandi ,
There
creator and constant guide.
proof of this in the Timaeus, and, indeed,
every reason
to believe that Plato
meant no more
by his soul of the world, whether in respect to the universe or to particular parts, than Cudworth intends by his famous Plastic Nature, to which, in to ascribe a species of
some
places,
he seems inclined
obscure animate existence.*
In fact,
some such hypothesis must be adopted by those who would
make
nature a distinct thing from the Deity, or a subordi-
nate cause under the Divine reason and
wisdom
as
all
must do who are averse to the doctrine that God does things by his own immediate agency, or the systematic
all
tervention of angelic or spiritual beings.
from one or the other of these cult qualities,
apology
for
which
is
is in
The
;
in-
only escape
that philosophy of oc-
a mere play upon words, a mere
ignorance, and which,
Cudworth's Intellectual System vol. ,
when i.,
carried to
its
page 346, Engl. ed.
le-
f
ypg &X rHJLa gitimate results,
hypotheses
all
The is
is,
;
;
or yehiculum mundi.
>
235
as vve have seen, the most favourable of
atheism.
to
independent, unoriginated essence ( avroOeog ), which
above nature and above the soul of the world
is called, in
,
the Timaeus, ’AtStog Harrjp and represented as the genera,
and even of No£f.
tor of
Elsewhere, and especially
him To AyaOov ’
in the Republic, Plato is fond of styling
,
The Good.
XXXYI.
1%
”C)xrj[ia, or
Vehiculum Mundi.
Examination of a Re -
markable Passage from Euripides.
Page
39,
Line
17. ev
dppaocv e%ovoa
This
rjplv r\kiov.
cannot be rendered, having the sun in a chariot or vehicle
sense evidently requires that the sun
for the
garded as the vehiculum of the indwelling is equivalent to in loco
— ev appaoiv —
cog
itself
be re-
’Ev here
spirit.
dppara
By a similar phraseology, o^/m, vehiculum as in the
— in
loco
currus—for a vehicle*
the body
elsewhere styled
Timaeus,
is
41, C.
:
eptibaGag
cog elg oxrjpa.
In that place, however,
Plato has reference, not to the animating souls of the heav-
enly bodies, but to
sown
human
souls, placed, or, as
there previous to their
he says,
more intimate connexion with
matter in their earthly existence, that they might learn those universal truths
which were
to
be recalled to recollection
in their subsequent stage of being.
In the Troades of Euripides the a
manner
same term
is
applied, in
directly the opposite of this, to signify, not the
corporeal vehiculum but the animating,
moving power.
account of
we
,
in full,
deep, intrinsic interest,
and dwell upon
* So, also, t
its
it
at
some length
Laws xi., 913, C. kv Compare Origen contra Celsum, :
,
On
give the passage
:
ovcrta nenTfjoOaL. ii.,
60.
From
this
came those
doctrines which Origen held respecting the pre-existence of souls.
— 236
0R vehiculum mundi.
yrjg bx^j(ia, T
oxqiia,
£2 yrjg
"OoTig nor’
el
team
yfjg
ex^v edpav
cv dvaroTraGTog eldevcu
,
Zn;f, elf avdynr) (pvaeog, tire vovg (Sportiv^ UpOG7]v^dp,7]v Ge
B aevov
•
ndvra yap
di
tajjotyov
tceTievdov , rcara Alktjv to, fivijr* uyeig.
0 Thou who guid’st the rolling of the earth, And o’er it hast thy throne, whoe’er thou art, Most difficult to know the far-famed Jove,
—
Or nature’s law, 1
or reason, such as man’s
thee adore, that, in a noiseless path,
Thy
steady hand with justice
all
things rules.
Euripides
We
know which
do not
to
,
Troades, 890.
admire most, the philosophy
The
or the poetical beauty of these remarkable lines.
pression,
from
what Plato
styles
though pervading, tinct
here
from is
relieves them, in our view,
These words,
'ipvx'^l
is also, at
vnspicoofifa
the
a soul which, al-
;
same time, above and diswhich it moves for yrj ,
the world or universe
,
;
evidently to be taken in this large sense.
line, also,
far
exuv edpav,
the charge of pantheism.
connexion in which they appear, are only applicable
in the to
kccttl yr\g
all liability to
ex-
can only be referred
to a
The
last
moral power, not only
above pantheism, but also that view which delights
contemplating a
God
of
mere
intelligence.
It
special moral providence, looking to ends and varied events, yet at the
same time
general, administered
broken and harmonious laws, pervading
all
in
indicates a
by
by un-
nature, silent in
their operation, traversing a noiseless path (dp d'lpocjyov (3al-
moving power of earth ( mun influencing and controlling all things, and di veliiculum ) yet in its secret springs unsearchable ( dvaronaorog etdevcov ueXevQov)
;
the universal
;
vat)
;
ruling in the earthquake, the
fire,
and the tempest,
yet, in itself, not the earthquake, nor the storm, but the still
small voice of mind, specially and for special ends controlling matter.
So Plutarch, writing of the Divine Logos, or Reason,
in
237
SECOND TART, DOCTRINE OF PROVIDENCE.
the government of the world, uses almost the very woids of
he did not rather intend a quotation (ptvvrjg yap O 0EIO2 AOrOS dnpooderjg eon nal dd axjjo^ov f3alEuripides,
if
:
f
rd
vg)v keXevOov
We
Iside et Osiri.
Seneca, Nat. Q.,
Plutarch
dyEi rcara 61ktjv.
i9 vrprd
may compare with Deum ilium maximum 14 this a
lib. ii.,
,
De
passage from
:
poten-
tissimumque, qui ipse vehit omnia (rnundi vehiculum ), qui ubique et omnibus prsesto
est.
Compare,
also, a
of one of the lost tragedies of Euripides, as
Eusebius, Proep.
Evang
.,
xiii.,
page 681
it is
passage
quoted by
:
tov avro^vfj, tov kv aWeptcp
P v/j,6(p
ndvrcov Qvolv e/mheZavOâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;
.
Thou self-sprung Being that dost all And in thine arms heavenâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s whirling
The
infold
,
fabric hold.
which we commenting, may have been more ancient
idea expressed by such phrases as those on
have been just
than Plato or Euripides, and
may have
given rise to the
mythological representation of the chariot and horses of the sun.
It is
sentation
We
more
may
have also
ison,
likely,
however, that the poetical repre-
have^suggested the language here employed. in the Phsedrus (246, A.) this
by which man,
in his
compound
same compar-
being, is likened to a
chariot and horses, with their charioteer, representing re-
spectively his animal and his rational nature.
XXXVII. Second Grand Division of Special Providence.
Page I
ur)
42,
Line
(ppovrl^Eiv
tie,
the
Argument.
Doctrine of a
Mistake of Cudworth.
Tov 6e rjyovpEvov p.ev deovg Eivai r. X. We come now to the second
10. k.
,
grand division of the subject, and one, the treatment of
which
will probably
be more satisfactory
to the reader, pre
— 238
SECOND PART, DOCTRINE OF PROVIDENCE.
senting, as
it
does, less of subtle physico-metaphysical dis-
more
cussion, and
The
Scriptures.
harmony with
that is in strictest
author
the
Holy
now to prove the doctrine of a those who speculatively admitted
is
special providence against
the existence of a Deity, and yet could not believe that he
concerned himself with the ordinary especially,
human
what seemed
Cud worth
sins.
to
afFairs of
them of so
little
human
life
;
consequence
asserts that “ Plato, in his tenth
book of Laws, professedly opposing the
and under-
atheists,
taking to prove the existence of a Deity, does, notwithstand-
ascend no higher than
ing,
Mundane
Soul, as the self-moving principle, and the
or proper cause of all the motion
diate
And
world.
This very learned
ly overlooked the
now
immein the
It is
but he
we
book, upon which
he could not have made so incorrect
which his previous arguyet has been the existence of such a
true, that all
ment has required as ;
is
God he there underman must have strange-
latter part of this
entering, or
an assertion.
Psyche
which
this (he says) is all the
takes to prove.”
are
Psyche, or Universal
to the
now advances
not only above self-motion,
or psychical power, to the second hypostasis of intelligence, or
Noi^
(as
it
may
be regarded
when viewed according
to
the statements and divisions of the Timaeus), but also to that
higher degree which
still
is
above mind or intelligence,
and which he elsewhere styles To ’A yaOov the idea,
all
moral attributes
—
justice
;
including, in
and severity, as well
as benevolence and compassion. It
is
of this higher degree, or hypostasis, as
may be
styled, that Plato, or
some
later
we
think
Platonist, thus
speaks, in that remarkable passage, contained in what styled the second epistle to Dionysius, 312, E.
paoiXea ixdvr
Trdvrcjv
>
sari, nai efcetvov evetca
enelvo clltlov diravrcvv rcov
devrepa nal rpirov ,
the
King of
all,
Trepl
KaX&v
ra rptra
:
is
Uept rov
navra
*
/cai
devrepov 6e nepl rd
—“ All things
and on his account are
it
all
things,
relate to
and he
is
;
GREEK WORDS FOR BLESSEDNESS, HAPPINESS, ETC. 239 the cause of all things beautiful
;
but the second honours
pertain to the second, and the third to the third.â&#x20AC;?
words,
He
and the iravra )
is
the final or moral as ,
for
r
or psychical cause of
efficient ;
,
w ell
the manifestation of
In othei
as the designings
things
all
evena ov
(
whose moral glory
all
things are created, moved, and constantly governed.
Every reader must admit that the admirable arguments which follow in the remainder of the book are generally in strict accordance with the Holy Scriptures, and that Plato even reasons on this part of his subject in a more religious manner than many nominally Christian writers much of whose theology and science might fairly be ranked with the very atheism with which he is here contending. ;
XXXVIII. The Greek Words for Blessedness Happiness Fortune ,
Page
42,
Line
14.
akrfiua psv
de evdcupovi^opevcu, u. t. A.
povca do not refer simply ,
enjoyment
;
to a state of
evdacpcov, evdcu-
present pleasure or
and others were and the philosopher could not deny, that
etymological import, has a
sense derived to
it
E vdacpcov,
in its primitive,
much higher sense than this a when A aipcov remained un;
at that time,
significance as one of the Divine names,
and had not yet been corrupted Fortune which
fyc.
evdatpovegs do^atg
The words
wicked men are often happy.
its
ovtz
,
in that sense, the poets
for,
right in asserting,
impaired in
,
it
into that atheistic sense of
subsequently acquired in the natural de-
man and of language. From ev and A aipo)v, it would etymologically signify one who had the favour of Heaven and its purest meaning would be best expressed by our good old Saxon word blessed. It refers not simply generacy of
to a
manâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s present
whole of
his being
state of feeling or
and his relation
enjoyment, but
to the
whole
;
to the
so that
:
240 GREEK WORDS FOR BLESSEDNESS, HAPPINESS, ETC. one in the midst of the most acute pain, the flames, might be evdacficdv
ent enjoyment of
like the martyrs in
while another, in the pres-
;
the pleasures of sense, might be aQXc-
all
as Socrates, in the Gorgias, describes the
og
sensualist as bsivog
one would dare
alaxpog
teal
greatest abundance
—
“ even
if
also the
is
may
Gor-
desire.”
meaning of Solon
in that
most celebrated account which Herodotus gives of his terview with Croesus
any
they have in the
if
that their souls
all
This
E.
aOXiog, and asks
such Evdaiptovag, or blessed, eav
to call
d(pd6v cjg e%u(5LV cjv beovreu
gias, 494,
feat
of the
life
in-
although he sometimes uses oXdtog
;
instead of Ev6atp,G)v, out of accommodation to the language
of the sensual Phrygian. Plato himself clearly gives this as the radical idea of the
word, and seems evidently
eotlv
etymology when
to allude to its
"ANEY TE 0E£2N
he says, ov yap
prjnore rig evdatpedv
—“ Without the Gods no man can be called evdaifiuv,
blessed or ,
happy”
So, also, in the Timceus 90, D. ,
T
ET
:
AeZ
uaXa KEKoaprjpi’EYAAIMONA Etvai “ He must be blessed beyond all others who cultivates the divine, and who has ever in harmony within him the indwelling God.” The juxtaposition of terms here leaves no doubt that there was intended an allusion to the There is the radical sense and etymology of the word. same allusion in the Orestes of Euripides
61 depanevovra ro 'delov , exovra rs
vov rov
AA1MONA %vvouzov ev avrep
—
j
6ia(j)Ep6vTG)g
:
"O rav
6’
6
AAIMS2N
dpnel yap avrog *0
When God
A
T
EY
dtdti
GEOS,
t'l
del Q'iTujv
;
btyeXeZv ftelcdv.
his blessing grants,
what need of Euripides
These
lines are quoted
by
Nicomaclu,
ix., 9.
Even
us that happiness
(
,
Orestes 660. ,
Aristotle in the discussion of the
question, norEpov evdaipejv dErjaErat
tells
friends'?
friend above supplies the soul’s desire.
this cold
Evdaipovia )
(j)tXo)v
fj
prj
;
Ethic.
and passionless writer is
a divine thing ( delov
.
GREEK WORDS FOR BLESSEDNESS, HAPPINESS,
241
BV<1,
t i), and without the favour of Heaven cannot grow on the
E
soil of earth:
pev ovv nai dXXo
l
tl detiv eotl dupTjpa
avOpdonoig, evXoyov nai T7\v evdacpoviav {tedodorov elvac
—
“
If,
therefore, there is
of the Gods,
Heaven’s
own
peculiar boon.”
lib.
i.,
8
cially to lib. x., 8,
Ethic.
;
Nicomach
Ethic.
For similar passages, the reader Eudern .,
the
is
gift
reasonable to suppose that happiness
is
it
any other thing which
lib. i., 9.
.,
referred to his Ethic.
is
Nicomach
is
12
lib. i.,
.,
;
and espe-
where, treating of evdaipovia in
other
its
aspect, as an active exercise of the soul, instead of simply
a state of well-being, he defines
energy — deop^nni)
evepyeia
— such
be a contemplative
to
it
as
we have
supposed
(page 225) to form the chief element in the bliss of the
heavenly world.
which, in his view, constitutes
It is this
the happiness of the Deity, and of that is
In proof of
nearest to the divine.
human
which
state
he asserts that no
it,
one of the inferior animals can ever be styled evdaipojv, because the term implies a state possible only in relation to a religious
and rational being, or one who could be sensible
of the blessedness of the Divine favour 7rag
6 /3log evdaipcov
*
rolg
d’
rt rrjg Totavrrjg evepyetag
ovdev evdaipovel
,
eireidi)
aaXkov VTxapXEL to as he says in
what
dvOpunoig
vTrapx^
*
T<5 pev
:
eft
rwr
yap
ooov opoccopa aXkiov feuam
<5’
ovdapov aocvcovel fteupLag
'deojpelv,
'deep
nai evdatpovelv
*
nai
gj
Wherefore,
follows, every such a one is fteoftXeo-
rarog, or most beloved of Heaven. visibly, in all these extracts,
mological idea of the term, as primitive Greek, and
how
It will
be seen
how
can be traced the radical, etyit
was
exhibited in the most
very similar
it
is to
the corre-
sponding one presented in the Bible, although the former
may er
not be taken in so elevated a sense, and perhaps nev-
comes up
fairly
to the full
be supposed
to
etymological import which
be contained in
The Scriptures speak of it as who enjoys the Divine favour
X
its
component
may
parts.
the blessedness of that rnan :
Blessed
is the
man
(or peo -
;
;
:
242 GREEK WORDS FOR BLESSEDNESS, HAPPINESS, ETC. whose God
Lord
who dwell in thy house ; who remain in the secret place of the Most High who abide under the shadow of the Almighty. Thy favour is life, and thy loving kindness is better than life
pie)
is the
blessed are they
;
.
Ava6ai[io)v and dvodaifiovia as clearly express the oppo-
view, namely, not merely present misery, but the state
site
of one visited by the displeasure of Heaven.
It is
thus re-
peatedly used by CEdipus, in the Phcenissae of Euripides,
when lamenting
his wretched condition as one
pursued
from his earliest years by the wrath of the Gods, on account of his
own
the oracle
and his
sins
impious disobedience to
father’s
:
’APA2
napaTiabkv Aatov nal natal dovg.
ov yap
.
uvev etev
,
.
.
ftetiv rov, •
ravr’
kfiTJxavTjad/Ltrjv.
Tt dpdao) drjO 6 ’
AY2AAIMS2N
ky6. Phoenissce , 1626
In
its later
much
applications, evdaiiiovia loses
religious sense,
and degenerates
etymological
its
reference to the favour of an overruling divinity.
For a most
may
between
refer to Euripides,
Qvijtu)V
oUov
(5’
kmhpvivTog,
it
and evrvxrjg,
evdalficov
<pvoet'
’EYTYXE2TEP02
*
’EYAAIM&N
6’ civ
ov.
nature none of mortal race are blessed
When Than
The
In this
part, dal-
Medea, 1225
yap ovdelg karlv ’EYAAIM12N
aXkov yevotT av aXXog,
By
component
principal
striking illustration, however, of the rad-
ical primitive difference
Ave
its
of its old
synonyme of svrv-
into a
%ia, or good fortune, losing almost entirely
shares the corruption of
.
wealth flows
in,
one
man may
be more happy
others of his race, but none are blessed.
contrast
one by which very striking.
between it is
this beautiful
Greek word and the
generally rendered in our
The Saxon
luck, fortune, or chance
own
tongue
is
happiness is from hap, signifying
a sense to which the Greek, as
we
ARGUMENT FROM THE PROSPERITY OF THE WICKED. 243
The
have seen, subsequently degenerated.
true etymolo-
by Web-
gical meaning, therefore, of happy, is that given ster,
namely, u receiving good from something that comes
or by chance , that is, fortunate, or lucky” lexicographer says afterward, that “ he only can
us unexpectedly
The same
to
,
who
be called happy
enjoys the favour of
God
but this is
an idea which was subsequently ingrafted on the pagan root
The
by the Christian theology.
Saxon word
original
had nothing of the to delov or divine about
it.
XXXIX. Argument against Providence drawn from
Atheistic perity that
of
of
Page
the
Wicked.
Plato's
r
43, Line 3.
men growing
the very end of
H
teal
life,
old,
Language compared with
npog reXog toog avoalovg av-
who
culty set forth in the
you
continue unholy even to
— then are you disturbed
In what striking language
&c.
— “ When
leaving children and children’s chil-
dren in the highest honours sight,”
Pros-
the Scriptures.
Opbonovg optiv eXOovrag yrjpaiovg, k. t. A.
behold
the
Holy
is this
same
at the diffi-
Scriptures, not only as perplex-
ing the mass of mankind, but also as occasioning, at times,
even
acknowledged people of God. Compare the complaint of Asaph in the Ixxiii. Psalm But as for me, my feet were almost gone, my steps had wellnigh slipped. For I was envious at the foolish, when I saw painful doubts
to the
:
the prosperity
*
We
of the wicked.
Wherefore
prefer this rendering for the
to turn lack, as well as to turn
to,
his people backslide ;*
Hebrew 3^1, T
or return
the most usual sense in this conjugation.
;
as
;
oarry, as
in
which sense
it
may
would well correspond
used here by Plato.
may mean
although the latter
It
is
mean, they some wondrous
also
turn themselves with astonishment and perplexity, as to spectacle
it
to the
Greek ra -
:
:
244 ARGUMENT FROM THE PROSPERITY OF THE WICKED. and
they say
in the
Doth God know
,
Most High
And
?
is there
So, also, Job, with
?
blance to the passage before us
still
become old yea are mighty in power
The
sentiment
tiquity.
ous
,
It
when
may be
more resem-
Wherefore do
:
live ,
,
a providence
Job
?
wicked
the ,
xxi., 7.
frequently met with in classic an-
has formed the constant complaint of the
virtu-
desponding, and the standing objection of the
skeptic. As in Cicero, De Natura Deorum lib. iii., 33-36, where the doubting Cotta goes into a long enumeration of the virtuous men who had been neglected of Heaven, and of the impious who had been blessed, apparently, with the ,
highest prosperity.
Speaking of the tyrant Dionysius
(sec.
35), he says, Hunc igitur nec Olympius Jupiter fulmine percussit, nec iEsculapius misero diuturnoque morbo tabe-
scentem interemit. illatus
est
Atque
in suo lectulo mortuus, in rogo
eamque potestatem quam
;
ipse per scelus erat
nactus, quasi justam et legitimam, hereditatis loco, didit.
In the
same
32
strain, sec.
Dies
:
deficiat, si
numerare quibus bonis male evenerit, nec minus
morem
And
quibus improbis optime.
filio tra-
si
velim
comme-
then he proceeds
to
relate the cases of Marius, Cinna, Dionysius, together with
the saying of the snarling Diogenes respecting Harpalus
Diogenes quidem cynicus dicere temporibus
illis
prsedo in
solebat,
Pamphylia
Harpalum, qui
felix habebatur, contra
Deos testimonium dicere quod in ilia fortuna tam diu Cic ., De Nat. Deor ., iii., 34. ret. ,
Some
vive -
minds, otherwise serious and thoughtful, have been
almost driven to atheism by
it;
as is represented in those
desponding lines with which Claudian commences one of his
poems Saepe mihi dubiam traxit sententia mentem,
Curarent Superi terras, an nullus inesset Rector, et incerto fluerent mortalia casu.
Nam cum
dispositi quaesissem fcedera
mundi,
Praescriptosque mari fines, annisque meatus,
Et
lucis noctisque vires
:
tunc omnia rebar
—
—
the word
245
aTtodionofmeoficu.
Consilio firmata Dei
Sed cum
res
hominum tanta
caligine volvi
Aspicerem, laetosque diu florere nocentes, Vexarique pios rursus labefacta cadebat ,
Claudian. in Rufinum
lleligio.
But, while
moods,
it
it
,
i.,
12.
has disturbed the pious in their desponding
has formed the standing jest of the scoffer
the story of the atheist Diagoras, Cicero
37
ille
qui dicitur, atque ei
humana pictis, quam tas
tumque
quam
as in
Nat. Deor .,
At Diagoras quum Samothraciam venisset, Atheos
iii.,
:
De
,
;
quidam amicus, “ Tu, qui Deos pu-
nonne animadvertis, ex tot multi votis vim tempestatis effugerint
tabulis
negligere,
salvi pervenerint ?”
.Ita
fit,
inquit.
picti sunt qui naufragia fecerunt, in
in por-
enim nun-
Illi
marique perierunt.
So, also, that malignant buffoon Aristophanes puts a similar
profane jest in the mouth of the travestied Socrates Kal
rctig c5
pupe ov Kai Kpovtuv
ehrep fdaXhei rovg kmopnovg
ovds
K ?^euvvpov,
uXha tov avrov
,
o£cjv Kal (3£KKeoe?i7]V£,
n tig
ovde Qeupov
;
:
hvenpr\aev
ovxi
;
do' kniopKoi.
kciltol o<j)6dpa y’
ye veuv (daHei, Kal 'Zovviov aKpov ’A dqveov,
Kal rag dpvg rag peydTiag
*
tl
paOuv
;
ov yap
dpvg kvuopKel.
Nubes, 398.
Xenophon or Plato are entitled to the least credit, nothing could be more directly opposed to his real and most If either
cherished sentiments.
XL. The Singular Word
’ATTodcGTcofineofiai,
and
the
Remarkable
Use made of it by Plato.
Page Oat.
44, Line 9. ’AAA’ eav
This
is
Plato, in the
iuog
olov dTTodLOTrofinrjoaa-
a very peculiar and significant word, used by
few cases
in
which
it
occurs, to express the
strongest abhorrence, and generally employed in reference to
some wickedness of peculiar enormity.
X
2
It
signifies, ta
;
;
the word dnodionofmeo^ai.
246
avert the Divine wrath by expiatory sacrifices or religious
of the most solemn kind
rites
solemn religious procession
guage of a
later age,
it
.
from and, Aiog, and
Trop,nrj,
might be rendered,
to
since
exorcise
term also comes from another part of a similar cere-
this
mony, performed
for a similar purpose,
send away evil
We
,
.
may compare
namely,
with
noun, dirodioirogn^oeig, as used, Laws,
That passage
to avert , or
this the derivative
854, B., C.
lib. ix.,
deserving of attention, as being, in some
is
respects, one of the most deeply impressive, for
its
moral
The
bearings, of any to be found in the Platonic dialogues. subject
is
sacrilege,
and during the discussion the
introduces a law against or preamble
man, by
:
with, and exhorting the
evil desire, enticing
was tempting
by day and exciting
commission of
to the
— O,
sir, it is
this horrid
no
human, nor any temptation sent from Heaven,
you on
to this sin, but a certain innate
men from
in
old
legislator
with this most solemn Trpoolpiov,
One conversing
“
whom some
night,
it
crime of sacrilege, might thus say ly
a
In accommodation to the lan-
and unexpiated
evil
mere-
that urges
phrensy which grows
sins ( olorpog rig ep,(pvopevog
ek na?Miojv aai dtcaOdprcov rolg avOpuTroig ddiiirjpdTcov), ever restless (nepupepopevog d?UT7]pid)6rjg), and calling for
vengeance on itself ” of
men who would
over
— almost,
if
He seems
to
have had
in
view a class
be styled, in modern phraseology, given
not wholly, past their day of grace, or the
reach of any reforming means
—men
in
whom
sin
had be-
come an
olorpog, a raging disease,* or phrensy, urging
on by a
sort of
them
maddening impulse, without the ordinary
inducements of gain or sensual pleasure
—men
under the
goadings of a keenly-sensible, yet utterly-depraved conscience,
which could only
greater and
still
find ease in the
commission of
greater enormities drowning the recollec-
* Such as, in the Gorgias, he styles
vrc ovhog,
namely, apparently
healed upon the surface, but ulcerating in the bones below
and neglected sore.
— an
old
—
.
the word
of the lesser, as though driven to
tioii
pidxdrjg)
To eixl
:
0 rav
most earnest and solemn ad-
n
tgjv tolovtojv Soypdrcov, 16 1
gol rrpOGncTTrxj
em
naicov lepd luerrjg, 16 1
rag be rojv
ilag ,
“
this
rag ’AXIOAIOnOMIIHIlEII],
<
When
wander about (aXirp-
an ever-restless internal Erinnys.
such a one he gives f/
vice
by
247
diroStoTiopneopaL.
anorpo -
IOl ern rtiv
rag r&v avdpcov dyadtiv %vvovdperaGrpenrl,
Karctiv cjyevye
it.
r. X.
—
even such a thought should invade your mind, be-
take yourself at once, to the most solemn tion (d7ToScoiTO[i7TrjGeig)
;
go as a suppliant
modes of expia-
to the shrines of
the wrath-averting divinities; resort, without- delay, to the
assemblies of the good back, from
;
and
fly,
without turning or looking
the associations of the bad
all
thy wretched disease
may
;
if,
peradventure,
be rendered lighter.”
One
is
strongly reminded of the angel’s urgent and alarming ex-
when he bids them fly from Sodom Up ! get thee out of this
hortation to Lot and his family,
doom
the impending place
escape for thy
;
all the plain
We
;
of life
:
;
look not behind thee
haste to escape
may compare,
lest
,
in respect to this
tarry not in
;
thou be swept
away
.
most impressive
word, another passage in the ninth book, 878, A., where the legislator
speaking of a house that has been defiled
is
with murder, and of the restoration of a family that has, in consequence, been rendered childless Ka6r]paoQai
ml
uard vopov.
:
rovrov
dTro6conopnr)Gao6ai rov olnov
See, also, the Cratylus 396, E. ,
irpdjrov
pev
XP e & v EGrto avpiov be
:
diTobtorcopTcrjGopedd re avrrjv feat rca6apovpeda , e^evpovreg ,
oGrtg rd)V iepecjv rd rocavra beivbg Ka6atpeiv. plied
by Plutarch
wish
to
to
an obnoxious person
send away
to
avrov
elg
:
is
they would
represented as using in ref-
YLarovog pev ov uapovrog
K vnpov
ap-
exorcise as a troublesome spirit .
This strong language Csesar erence to Cato
whom
It is
a^ebieTTopTTrjGavro.
•
entrrjdeg
yap
Plutarch Cws., 2 ,
1
The verb dironopTreo) has the same meaning, and from this we have a similar word, with the same solemn reli-
THE WORD
248
gious import, which
Hebrew
the
victim piation
and
;
used by the Septuagint
is
or scapegoat.
to
ATronopnalog signifies a
ter
so, also, in the tenth
;
rov e^tXdoaoOat
:
rfjv
teal
d7T07rop,nrjv.
utter
nXrjpov eva tgj
same chap-
:
£7r’
em
povrj
rq
dioTcopirrjoet rtiv Katctiv,
850.*
vii.,
represents
See
Greek.
verse of the
Plato could not have selected a stronger his
as an ex-
avrov ware dirooreiXat avrov eig Clemens Alexandrinus uses it in the
same peculiar sense Strom.,
in classic
nXrjpov eva r <p Kvpco)
:
,
anoTropiraLG)
,
aXe^inanog and anorponaiog,
which are the more common terms Leviticus xvi., 8
to translate
religious rites
,
very similar
is
’
away with solemn
be sent
to
a7T0Sl07T0p,TT£0pat.
By such
abhorrence of atheism. it
word
as that abominable spirit of
to
express
language, he
all evil (if
we may
use the word spirit in so strange a connexion), which he
had been endeavouring souls of the
to averrnneate, or exorcise,
young persons
whom
derly, yet solemnly, addressing.
used
in this passage,
Some
come up
to the Scripture doc-
demoniacal possession or Satanic influence upon
the soul.
The word
follows, preserves the
oaodat, and
Trpooiov,
It
violently invading ,
which almost immediately
metaphor contained
is in admirable
whole passage.
It is :
Xpupzvoq
spirit of
suggests here the idea of sudden
the
evil,
and which can only be prevented by the
would, most absurdly, substitute
phrases
in dnodioiropn?/«
keeping with the
most speedy and efficacious remedies.
*
of the expressions
and in the parallel place quoted from
the ninth book, would almost trine of
from the
he fancies himself so ten-
ttpoibv
Viger and Ast
for irpooiov,
thereby
thus defined by Timaeus in his Lexicon of peculiar Platonic dnoTzipnecdai nai diodeicdai ra dpapTr/para, cvpTvpdKTopi t£)
A it.
general sense of
The
compound may have the more probably has reference to nopnij
latter part of the
izepiru,
but
as significant of a solemn religious procession, or ceremony, by
which evil was supposed to be averted, and which is paganism and a corrupted species of Christianity.
to
alike
common
PLATO DEFICIENT IN THE DOCTRINE OF EXPIATION. 249 utterly spoiling the metaphor,
the whole declaration. er reading here
may
One
and weakening the force of
proof that irpocubv
is
the prop,
be derived from the parallel passage
where we have the same image conveyed by a very similar word orav ooi TTpooTTLirry r c rtiv tolovtcov 6oyparo)v “ when any such thought shall invade in the ninth book,
:
—
you,” Sic
XU. Defect of Plato's Theology in regard to the Doctrine of Atonement and the Necessity of Expiation.
Page
51, Line 3. TrapatrrjTovg.
The
true sense of Plato
word
here, and in the subsequent argument, wherever this is
used,
though thor,
is it
we
best given
by rendering
easily propitiated , as
it
had been evnapaLrrjTOvg. In translating an aumust take into view not only the peculiar circum-
was surrounded, and
stances by which he
the peculiar phi-
losophy and theology by which his mind was influenced, but
we
are
bound
to consider, likewise,
how
far
modem
philosophy and theology have affected certain terms in our
own
tongue,
which otherwise would have been
sentatives of his meaning, instead of conveying
such circumstances, they will be very likely
to
was never intended. A due regard sometimes require what may, perhaps, seem
idea which
namely, a slight mistranslation of the justice to the spirit
;
or, in
true repre-
—
under
as,
convey
— an
to this will
a paradox,
letter in order to
other words, to depart a
do
little
from the etymological sense in order to preserve the substance of the writer’s thought.
we
shall certainly
Thus, here,
do Plato injustice,
tian theology along to TrapaLTTjTOvg that
if
we
example,
for
carry our Chris-
with us in the interpretation, and give sense which, standing alone,
suggest to a Christian mind.
The
philosopher
it
would
knew no
250
r la To
!)
[â&#x20AC;˘:
THE IX.CTRJNE OF EXPIATION.
r c unt i
i
thing of that groat atonement which forms the basis of the
Christian
His argument
scheme.
who
against those
therefore
is
directed
held that the Divine displeasure, even
be averted by sacrifices,
for the greatest offences, could
processions, vows, and the mere ritual performances of re-
without repentance, or (which
ligion,
of
is
still
greater
mo-
ment) without any sense of that need of expiation which
was
by the
signified
sacrifices they blindly offered.
feeling of the need of expiation
expressed in
all
was
some obscure way
in
the religions of antiquity.
perfect mode forms that peculiar doctrine
which distinguishes
from
it
all
This
The
true
and
of Christianity
and the belief of
others,
which, either in the substance or the type, has been, in ages, the essential element of the righteousness which
is
all
hy
faith.
Could
we
trace anything of this in the lives or writings
of Plato and Socrates, their salvation
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; truly been
from
it
we
should indulge more hope of
than from any of those moral lessons
and sublime as they are
beautiful
us in their immortal dialogues.
left to
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; which We
have
are told,
both by Plato and by Xenophon, that Socrates advised his friends to be diligent in offering their sacrifices upon the al-
For
tars of their country's religion.
erally
condemned
(at least
a sanction to idolatry
by Christian
but
;
this
he has been gen-
writers), as giving
we have no
hesitation in ex-
pressing the opinion, that in no part of his philosophy did
he come nearer that
to Christianity
on no other grounds could
his salvation this advice,
;
provided
we
and
we
central truth, and
entertain such hopes of
can only believe
he had even the most
and saving doctrine which
its
that, in giving
faint allusion to the great
all sacrifice
was
primitively in-
tended to represent.
We
find,
however, but
little
reference to this need of ex-
piation in the writings of Plato, except,
it
might be, in the
case of such great and almost incurable sinners as are men*
PLATO DEFICIENT IN THE DOCTRINE OF EXPIATION. 251 tioned in the passage lately quoted (page 247) from the ninth book of the Laws.
A
life
was
of ascetic virtue
remedy which he would in general propose
the
although, in
;
was but little aware how utterly defective is any thing which bears the name of human virtue, when laid by the side of that Holy Law which the pride of philosophy, he
44
pierces even to the
spirit,
and
a discerner of
is
To
the heart.â&#x20AC;?
di viding all
the second great fault in Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s theology.
is
The
his doctrine of
is
the thoughts and intents of
a Christian mind this silence in regard to
an atonement other
asunder of the soul and the
an original independent
evil
This being closely connected with the dogma
principle.
of the innate evil of matter, through which the soul tainted, led
him
naturally to teach an ascetic
fication to the exclusion of
He
rious atonement.
any external,
preached
mode
forensic,
much and most
was
of puri-
and vica-
eloquently
against the lusts of the flesh as the cause and essence of
depravity
;
all
but his philosophy contains but slight recogni-
which the much-denounced body has no share, and which may be supposed to belong
tion of those sins of the spirit in
to a purely spiritual
being as well as to one
in the grossest robes of matter.
Hence
who
it
is
is
enclosed
easy
to see
how these two errors, although apparently so remote, have a common origin and a common seat in depraved and blinded human nature and how all, whether out of the Church or in the Church, who have endeavoured to rectify it in a ;
manner
different
from that pointed out in the Bible, have
ever stumbled on this same point, namely, the teaching of
an ascetic mode of purification, through the penances and mortification of the flesh, not as auxiliary
and disciplinary,
but as remedial and savina*. In respect to the doctrine of an atonement, the
Greek
poets are more often in accordance with the Bible, and
which had come down from a remote anthan our philosopher. Even in the very practices
those traditions tiquity,
—
—— 252 PLATO DEFICIENT whose
IN
THE DOCTRINE OF EXPIATION.
superstitious observances
he condemns, and
condemns, there may be manifested
need of expiation
which has been
justly
deep sense of the
that
ages
felt in all
—which
has formed a part of all false religions, and of all corruptions of the true
— and which only
intelligent
view of the doctrine of the
however,
finds repose in a believing
and
His argument,
cross.
sound, as directed against some of the practices
is
which prevailed
in the
Greek
and which operated
religion,
equally with atheism in encouraging the most abominable licentiousness
take
away
;
for their great design
sin, or
was
not so
much
to
the consciousness of sin, as to avert
its
consequences.* It is
that •"
the glory of the Gospel that
he can be propitiated
ilich
human ophy.
virtue,
and
TrapcurrjTog
is
in the dust all the pride of
the lofty aspirations of
all
—
while the awful sacrifice by
accomplished levels
it is
It
;
God
human
philos-
relieves the penitent and believing spirit from
which has ever weighed so heavily on the dark heathen mind
that
gloomy sentiment of the Grecian
poet,
Aiog yap SvGTrapaLrrjTOL (ppeveg t
while yet
gives no countenance to that false, presumptu-
it
ous belief in the Divine placability, against which Plato
here contending, and on which some in our
much
is
own day would
With such, whether ancient or modern, it is not the Divine mercy which they would exalt for that has no meaning separate from the Divine justice
lay so
stress.
but, rather, that idol attribute
which
is
of their
own
so well expressed, in this very argument, by the
Greek word paOvpUa
;
that sluggish indolence, indifference,
or good-nature, to use a stitutes the
prime
common
attribute of the
icurean and the modern
expression,
which con-
Deity of the ancient Ep-
sentimentalist.
* See remarks on this distinction, note f
imaginations,
^schylus, Prom. Vinct.,
34.
1,
page
4.
HIGHEST PROOF OF THE DIVINE GOODNESS.
253
XLII. Highest Proof of the Divine Goodness the a
'priori
,
Page peal
is
13. â&#x20AC;&#x2122;A yaOovg re nai aptorovg.
Line
51,
here directly
Conviction
Moral Sense.
of the
*
moral sense.
to the
The
The
ap-
intelligence
and power of the Deity may be matters of inductive reasoning, although
may be
there
even
for these,
and especially the former,
as good a ground of belief in the a priori con-
which every man possesses.
viction
say that no one really ever resorts
own
his
may sometimes be made
;
We
has in
standing
itself
all
we
are compelled
to assert that
mere inductive experience of an
all
Just as by
mat-
no inherent property of motion, notwith-
ever-moving world
that
God
the subject of speculative argu-
cannot bear the contrary opinion.
the laws of our minds
viction
safely
induction for
although on other grounds, and from other motives,
good
it
ter
we may
private individual satisfaction in the belief that
is
ment.
But
to external
is in
ever-restless,
opposition to such an a priori con-
we compelled to believe and feel however much inductive argument from
so, likewise, are
;
God
is
good,
the facts around us, in this world of disorder, might go
towards maintaining the contrary dogma. assert
Even
those
who
most strenuously that the Divine benevolence
is
proved from the observation of external nature carry along with them this a priori conviction, without, perhaps, being
aware of the
fact, that
from
it
is
derived, to their
own minds
and the minds of others, the main force of every argument
by which they would sustain
their
preconceived hypothesis.
Let this innate conviction be utterly banished from the soul,
and we might then see,
if
it
were possible
in that condition,
what
weakness of the a
posteriori proof.
mass of
facts
which
fall
is
to
put ourselves
the real strength, or, rather, real
Should even the great
within the sphere of our observa-
Y
^54 tion
we
HIGHEST PROOF OF TIIE DIVINE GOODNESS. be favourable
have
to
such a position, yet what right would
extend this
to
immense* scale of the uniby the unconscious working of
to the
verse, unless impelled to
it
law of our moral nature
this innate
how
with happiness to overflowing,
filled
an induction dare to step beyond
with
position,
infinite
space
all
its
us,
ble eternities, before and behind us, that
T
could so narrow
limits
around
w ere
world
If this
?
What
1
and two
we
any inferences from a mere induction offacts as
our
is
illimita-
should draw
moral
to the
attributes of the Deity, unless in the soul itself there is
some sure foundation
for faith in their existence
ever, on the other hand,
we
?
If,
how-
are actually compelled to re-
verse the picture, and to assert that misery, in our w~orld at least,
Bible
forms the rule, and happiness the exception tells
that our
things all
man
us that
is
born
sorrow
to
good things are muck fewer
— and
if
in
—
if
—
if
the
Plato declares
number than our
evil
the true voice of humanity has responded in
ages to these assertions both of profane and Holy Writ
—on what ground can we yet
cling to the belief in the Di-
vine benevolence, except by relying on the deep conviction of that moral sense,
which
tells us,
on worlds should exhibit facts tell us, that
If
God
is
strip us of the belief as
There
is
would
still
good.
no induction can prove
self.
and, even though worlds
to the contrary,
it,
neither can any induction
long as the soul remains true
to her-
within us something higher than the spec-
which exclaims, as the spontaneous sentiment of the soul, which she can neither
ulative
or the inductive
reason,
demonstrate nor reject, If there be a God he must be good , ,
and must must do
delight in goodness.
right.
The Judge of all
the
Earth
In proof of this, Plato does not hesitate to
appeal here to the consciences even of his supposed oppo-
—
he says, nevre ovreg all five of us, namely, the three parties to the dialogue, and the two ima-
nents, and therefore
ginary disputants
who
speculatively
deny a providence
;
as
;
STYLE OF THE BIBLE ABOVE THAT OF PHILOSOPHY. 255
much
Here we
as to say,
of argument
we
;
admit
all
agree
all
no need
is
God, he must
that, if there is a
much we may
be good, however
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; here there
which
differ as to that in
his goodness consists.
XLIII. Sublime
Mode
which the Bible represents the Divine Prov-
in
idence and Omniscience as contrasted with
all
mere Philos-
Word
Analysis of the Greek
ophizing on these Attributes.
Avdpela as denoting one of the Cardinal Virtues of Soul
\
,
Page
52,
Line
A eiXlag yap
2.
necting this with what
e/cyovog,
we
avdpelav elvai deiXlav 6e naulag, ,
,
ment, which
good
apyla
may
avdpela
:
is
be thus stated
the offspring
apyta and paOvpla
of detXta
that the
He had
before proved that
power.
This
is
conclusive.
admirably stated, and in a
manner how
We
:
a part of virtue
is
is
and omniscience.
Gods it
;
admit the Gods
deiXta it
is
cannot be through
neglect the affairs of men.
As a matter of reasoning,
from
all this
down from heaven.
the ivays
of the children
and our rising up.
He
,
He
all
The Lord sitting
,
the
Lord
about his people from henceforth and for evermore.
is
down
understandeih our thought afar
off.
As
never slumbereth nor sleepeih that keepeth Israel.
This
these
his eyelids try
knoweth our
mountains are round about Jerusalem so
of the Lord
yet
Divine providence
His eyes behold and
He
is
parade of argument
sublimely do they assume
of men.
it
And
unanswerable.
positions, without reasoning at all about them.
looks
to he
opposite
its
could not be from want of
this subject of the
How
con-
10, aperijg pev
get the whole argu-
therefore
in itself
different
do the Scriptures treat
:
By
r. X.
tc.
page 46, line
is said,
.
is
the
round
The eyes
are in every place, beholding the evil and. the good.
the style worthy of a Divine revelation
poor aoes our cold philosophizing, even in
;
its best,
and how
and
loft-
;
;
256 the word
dvdpeia, as applied
and most religious
iest,
Who
to the deity.
appear in the comparison.
efforts,
can turn from the Grecian poets and philosophers,
with
all
acknowledged excellences
their
— to
the almost divine Plato himself
—yea, even from Holy
the
Scriptures,
without feeling, for the time, a conviction amounting to the
assurance of absolute certainty, that the latter
full
from Heaven
The
— the voice of God, and not of man
term dvdpeia, here used, would seem,
indeed
is
?
etymologi-
if
cally considered, to be improperly applied to the Deity.
This objection, however,
The word
is
entitled to but little weight.
is
applicable to spiritual energy of any kind, as
well as to that which
is
properly human.
It
denotes, strict-
not merely in the energy of sou! or strength of will sense of physical power, outwardly to execute its volitions,
ly,
,
which one There may be
but rather as a pure, internal spiritual force, by ,
man
a good will,
ed to
may yet weak
or one being
;
differ
but
from another.
when
moral strength
is
add-
manly character
is
said
this
to the other cardinal virtues, the
be complete, and hence the name.
tle tues,
means by the word
dperrj (the
uaprepta
says,
Add
rrjg ^vxijg.
Elsewhere, connecting
the virtues, he describes the truly brave
fears nothing which ought not
to
man
it
it
vir-
your it
as
with
all
as one
be feared, while at the ,
who same
thus view-
time , he fears everything which ought to be feared
ing
to
In the Laches, 192, D., Plato defines
.
ng
what the Apos-
same with the Latin
when he
from a similar etymology),
faith virtue
It is
as in unison with the highest wisdom, and as utterly
opposed
to that blind, counterfeit foolhardiness
no relation
to the rational soul, but
beast as to a
human
truly brave, since
being.
belongs as
much
Hence he shows
he must know what
is
which has to the
that “ the
truly good, must
necessarily partake of righteousness, temperance, and holi-
ness
;
because
virtue, to to fear
to
him alone
have a true fear
what ought
to
it
in regard to
be feared,
by reason of this God and man, so as
pertains,
arid to
be ever bold
when
,
THE WORD engaged
in right
,
avdpELCb AS
APPLIED TO THE DEITY. 25
and duty” (vide the Laches 199, D.) the support and
making dvdpda
life
of
all
ing, all are to
that,
;
in a greater or less degree
and
;
/
thus
;
the other virtues,
according to a favourite theory, that they are uine, essentially connected
1
all,
when
gen-
where one exists, all exist that, where one is want-
be suspected of spuriousness.
In this sense of energy of will*
it is
properly applied to
the Deity, notwithstanding the apparent etymological inconsistency.
It
strikingly suggests that definition of the Divine
nature which Aristotle ascribes to Plato, namely, “ that
whose very essence tiv
;
that
is
energy ”
which must
act
—
rj
apxr)
r\q
ovcia Evepyetd eg -
with an intensity of energy pro-
portioned to an infinite nature, ever in harmony with
itself,
and ever in the most vehement and burning opposition
See remarks on
that is unlike.
this
to all
passage of Aristotle,
page 190.
A Etkla is
is
In
the opposite of avtipsla.
some respects
it
nearly synonymous with paOvgia easiness, fickleness, or ,
weakness of will
No
.
Tpvcftr],
effeminacy, the result of sensuality
.
terms, certainly, could be more remote from any right
conception of a spiritual God.
To such
as those with
Plato supposes himself contending, and to special providence (although they
may
all
whom
who deny
consequences as the philosopher has analyzed them), be applied the language of the Bible
:
Ye thought
And
altogether such a one as yourselves.
a
not see the logical
yet
that
men
may
I was
of this
description often assume to be under the teaching of a higher philosophy than those
weak and
gine that their smallest sins
and
simple ones,
who
ima-
their lightest cares are the
objects of God’s special regard.
Philosophical theism often seems to talk very piously, * its
We would ever use the term will, in such
a connexion as this, in
highest import, as distinguished from animal wilfulness or mere
volition,
,
and as ever conjoined with reason
Voluntas est quae quid cum rations desiderat.
Y
2
;
or,
as Cicero defines
it,
THE PIETY OF EPICUREANISM.
258 and
being very religious, because
to claim the merit of
.i
graciously admits the Divine existence and intelligence*
while yet
it
make
denies everything which could
that ex-
istence an object of love, or fear, or of any interest of any
kind beyond what might be
felt in
The
mathematical theorem.
the contemplation of a
Epicureans some-
ancient
times affected this kind of sentimental religionism, # some
specimens of which
we
find admirably set forth, in all their
De Nalura Deorum lib. i., Ac etiam de sanctitate, de pielaie scripsit Epicurus. At quo modo in his loquitur ? Ut Coruncianum aut Scaevolam pontifices maximos te audire dicas non eum, qui sus
hollowness, in Cicero’s treatise
41
s.
,
:
:
Quid est enim, cur tulerit omneni funditus religionem ? Deos ab hominibus colendos dicas, quum Dii non modo homines non colant, sed omnino nihil curent, nihil agant? Sec. 42 Horum enim sententise omnium non modo super, sed stitionem tollunt, in qua inest timor inanis Deorum :
;
etiam religionem, quae
43
Deorum
cultu pio continetur.
'
Sec.
Epicurus vero ex animis hominum extraxit radicibus
:
religionem tulit.
,
quum
Quum
enim optimam
dicat esse, negat
How
gratiam sus-
et praestantissimam
naturam Dei
idem esse
maxime proprium
opem
et
Diis immortalibus et
in
Deo
gratiam.
Tollit id
quod
est optimee praestantissimaeque naturae.
well, also, might
what follows apply
to those sen-
timental followers of Spinoza, who, rapt in philosophical
adoration of “ the holiness of nature and of the infinite,” ity,
do yet, in
so vehemently
curus. At
enim
homine non
their* high
condemn
of the
spiritual-
the sensual philosophy of Epi-
quam ad
Quce enim potest esse sanctitas * This
and transcendental
liber est Epicurei de sanctitate.
tarn faceto,
awe
,
si
Ludimur ab
scribendi licentiam libero.
Dii humana non curant
word cannot probably be found
in
?
any English dictionary, we wished to
And yet nothing seemed so well adapted to the idea
express, namely, that species of scientific piety which abounds so
much ens,
in
and
such modern books as Nichols’s Architecture of the Heavin the lectures of l)r.
Dionysius Lardner.
— rRUE DIGNITY OF MAN
RELIGIOUS NATURE. 259
IIIS
XLIV. The True Dignity of Man of
Page rrj g
Line
2.
Nature.
E voedeia,
Ovtcovv
6rj
A nalysis
fyc.
rdye avOpumva npayptara
re epx/jvxov perex^t (pvoe cog apta, ual 'deoGedeararov,
This
t. X.
of
53,
his Religious
Words
the
man
;
is
said by
although, even
way of magnifying the importance when regarded as one of the least
parts of the universe, he
would
has been shown, be
not, as
beneath the care of a special providence.
He
said to enhance his dignity. nature,
and he
of
is
all
u.
Two
things are
partakes of an animated
animals the most religious.
pare the Protagoras, 522, A.
:
''Etrretdrj
Com-
6e 6 avOpconog 'deiag
rov $ eov £vyyevetav pidvov deovg evopaoe uai emxcipst fluptovg re Idpveo-
pierexet ptotpag, irptirov plev did rrjv %d)G)v
—“ And
,
,
Oai uai aydXpiara 'detiv divine,
he alone, of
all
since
man
shares in the
animals, through his relationship to
the Deity, believes in the existence of Gods, and undertakes
honour.”
to establish altars in their
Metamorpli
lib.
i.,
70
Compare,
also, Ovid,
:
Sanctius his animal mentisque capacius
altee
Deerat adhuc
Pronaque quum spectant animalia caetera terram, Os homini sublime dedit, ccelumque tueri Jussit, et erectos
'A vOpumva Tcpaypiara
ad sidera tollere vultus. is
equivalent here to ol avOpconot
;
words being probably affected by the neuter reason we have avro instead of avrog same the %Cjov. For which we should have expected. It is by the attraction of the form of the
£c5 ov,
See remarks on this Greek language, page 203. It is, how-
understood or implied in
peculiarity of the ever, to be
used here as
if
connected with avQpcjnog
same as though we should say man itself is the most religious, &c.
is
the
;
and
in English, the animat
260 TRUE DIGNITY OF MAN
The words $ eoaebeorarov
HIS RELIGIOUS NATURE. '&sooe6sta, are etymologically
,
formed on the same idea with the Hebrew phrase, narv
HUT, term
fear of the Lord, which
the
same
the Old Testament
Asiaidaipovia contains etymolo.
for religion or piety.
gically the
is
radical conception, but
by Paul, Acts, its
xvii.,
22.
component, dacpcov
name
It
example,
and as that became only another
;
down
into superstition, or
and worship of Fortune, Destiny, and other ima-
that fear
ginary personifications, which
AeiOidaipovia
is
seldom,
reverential fear of its
God
if
is
closely allied to atheism.
ever, taken for the pure and
while, on the other hand, 'Seoos-
;
equivalent, svoedeia, is
the other virtues, and the
Thus
as, for
partakes of the degeneracy of
for Fortune, so this sinks
6eia , or
almost always
is
used in a lower and somewhat bad sense,
Plato speaks of
it
first in
in the
the author of that dialogue
:
made
the parent of
the estimation of Heaven.
Epinomis, or whoever was
psl^ov yap popiov aperrjg
6slg rjpdg rears nelOy rrjg evosdeiag tgj 'dvrjTcp ysvsi
To
nomis 989, B. ,
the
same
Epi-
effect Sophocles, in the Phi-
E vgeSsIte (jg
TTpog
&eovq
*
ruXiJ unavra devrepâ&#x20AC;&#x2122; r/yelrai JlaTrjp
ZEvg. ov yap ijvoiSeia GvvdvfjGKEL pporolg
nav &gl, kuv -duvoGiv, ovk anollvTcu
*
;
other words, all virtues arising out of mere earthly re-
lations are temporary
the
.
pr\-
1442:
loctetes,
or, in
all
grave
.
,
arid
The primary
tonishment, awe,
is
must perish.
Piety alone survives
root, oedag, signifying
sometimes used
Divinity himself, examples of
for the
wonder as-
very
,
Numen
which are frequently
found in Pindar and iEschylus.
The
verb
is
to
or
be
sometimes
apparently employed for repav, to signify reverence towards
human
magistrates.
This, however,
sense, and the primary
still
holds
its
is
only a secondary
place in the ancient
idea that magistrates represented the Divine authority, and that judges stood to us in the place of the Elohim.
The
MEN COMPARED TO SHEEP OF THE DIVINE PASTURE. 2G1 ultimate radical
may
Hebrew
be the
perhaps remotely connected
juravit,
,
meaning with
in
and
this
y2U/, the sa-
cred number seven.
XLV.
Men
compared
of Plato on
Page r.
X.
53,
Sheep of
to
Line
6.
Thus Socrates says ye
\ioi dotcel
Xovpevovg, tieolg elvai
Gods
Harmony
this Subject in
Oetiv ye
This comparison
is
in the
firjv
with the Scriptures.
urTyiard tyapev elvai,
k.
quite a favourite with Plato.
Phsedon, 62, B.
ev XeyeoOai to fteovg
teal
Language
the Divine Pasture.
elvai,
:
’A XXa rode
ryi&v rovg enipe-
ryiag rovg avOpdirovg ev tcov UTrjpdrcov rolg
— “This
seems
to
me to be well said, that the we are among their flocks
are our keepers, and that
or possessions
from which he deduces an admirable
gument against the lawfulness of
suicide.
It is
worthy of
note, too, that this is evidently referred to as a saying
had come down from the olden time
;
and in
ar-
which
this light
it
furnishes a pleasing evidence of the piety and sound reli-
gious philosophy of the primitive or patriarchal ages.
The
same comparison may be found in Plato’s romance of Atlantis, where he speaks of the care which the Gods took of the inhabitants of that blessed isle, and in which he represents them as forming a perfect theocracy ual fcaroudoavreg olov vopelg KTryiara ual rcolpvia ual Dpeppara eavrcov Critias 109, C. Compare the present trearjpdg erpeepov. tise, page 69, line 2 tjvppaxoi 6e i]flv tieot re dpa ual :
,
:
daipoveg
*
rjpelg d’
Gods and Genii
av KTrjpara
tietiv real
are our helpers, for
we
daipovov
—“ The
are the flocks or
possessions of the Gods and guardian divinities.”
Whatever may have been the of the expression,
it is,
origin of the sentiment and
with the exception of the use of the
plural tietiv, not only purely Scriptural in its conception,
— 262 PECULIARITY OF NEGATIVE FORMS OF GREEK VERBS* For proof of this, compare For we are his people and the sheep of his pasHe hath made us, and his are we ; as the Hebrew,
but also in the very language.
Psalm ture.
3
c.,
:
in
\
He will feed
accordance with the Keri, should be translated. a shepherd.
his flock like
this ancient idea of the
Isaiah, xl., 11.
From
resemblance which the Divine as
well as kingly authority bore to the pastoral relation, came the noun
noifJLrjv,
in that frequent
Homeric meaning of rulei
or shepherd of the people
noipeva Xativ
’AyapefJLVOva,
as also the verb
Rev.,
;
ii.,
27
;
vii.,
17
which we Matthew, ii.,
in that sense of ruling
7r oipaivo),
find in the Septuagint version of
6
—
xii.,
;
Psalm 5
;
ii.,
9
;
xix., 15.
XL VI. Peculiarity of certain Negative
Page
Forms of Greek Verbs
55, Lines 1,2. ’ETupekovpevG)
.
.
apekovvTi.
.
.
Why
does the positive, in this word, take the middle or deponent,
may be and of many other
and the negative or privative the active voice difficult to
explain the philosophy of this
we would simply
matters in the Greek, yet fact, that this is
and even
to
the case with a very large
such an extent as
to entitle
It
?
advert to the
number of verbs it
to
;
be justly re-
garded as one of the peculiarities, or well- settled idioms of the language. strictly
Indeed,
we
seldom,
if
ever, find
negative or privative of the middle form.
a word
The
ac-
sometimes slightly va-
tive
form of the privative,
ries
from what would be the analogical active of the middle
it is
true,
not to such a degree
or deponent positive in use
;
as to affect the principle to
which we have adverted. The
former
may
is
generally in
be in opai
;
co
yet
still,
pure, while the middle or deponent
and sometimes the
latter is
compounded
with a preposition, while the former has only the simple
;
PECULIARITY OF NEGATIVE FORMS OF GREEK VERBS. 263
Sometimes the positive is strictly deponent, while other cases it has an active voice in use but even then
radical.
in
;
the privative form in
but of the middle
the privative, not of the active,
is
o)
as, for
;
rreldopai , to obey or trust
example,
whole, rceidopaL
;
we may
disobedient
displeasure
pdopat,
; ;
fcrjdopac,
;
dOvpso),
,
uoopEopai
.
,
,
arjdeo),
comely manner
,
;
hopes
hope
to
deXirco, or
,
peXopai, or pEXeopai, knipeXeopai, cerned for, dpeXe a), to
plan
loss
,
to
,
,
or discour-
dupdeo), to
,
not.
of the active,
;
eXttg), to raise
deXirreo), to despair
take care of or be con-
neglect; pr\x av dopai, or p7]xav £°[mi >
to
to
,
;
— although
,
this
,
word has
oftener, perhaps, the sense
of inconsiderateness or want of refection as though ,
the privative of (3ovXevg)
—rpopiopat,
or drpepeG), to be undisturbed
piOTEG)
—
,
may
,
to
it
were
tremble arpopio), ,
(pEtdopat, to spare , acpEidEG), also,
ipEvdopat, d'lpEvdEO, d'lpEvorec*)
— oedopac, daedso),
It
;
Compare,
be lavish or prodigal.
teg)
be at a
(dovXopat, to be willing ddovXeo), to be unwilling or
refuse
to
regu-
to
or to act in a
invent dprjxavEC°, to & e without plans ,
to
,
be without order , or
to
a licentious or disorderly manner
eXnopai,
,
order
the negative,
drcocjyeo),
but of the middle or passive, namely, to act in
,
or under
put in order
tcoopECO, to
be
,
angry
be without spirit
to
to
feel disgust or
to
be
to
to iceep one's self in
,
dneldopac),
(not
be concerned about anything
to
be careless or unconcerned late
glad
be
to
ftypeopai EvOvpeopac,
mental excitement
aged
dnecdeo)
,
mention, as
by no means the
cases, although
obey
to
,
'persuade
to
dneideo). to be disobedient.
In illustration of this peculiarity,
some of the most usual
ttelOg),
x api^°liai
— dvvapai,
i
ddvva
&c.
be observed, that in most of these cases the form
with a privative
is
middle
tive or the
;
not the direct negative either of the acthat
is, is
not simply the denial of a re-
flex action but expresses rather a negative state of mind. ,
As, for example, arcEiOEiv
from
pi] tteIOelv, is
,
besides being wholly different
not even equivalent to prj nEiOeoOat to ,
264 GREAT THINGS CANNOT EXIST WITHOUT SMALL, which
it
seems
to
have the nearest
alliance, but expresses
rather that positive condition of the soul from of disobedience do proceed.
which
acts
all
So, also, in the passage from
same
the text, apEXelv is not the
as
emiieXelodat but
urj
,
j
rather expresses that sluggish, indifferent, careless disposi-
which
tion,
so utterly opposed to
is
Mr) empeXeZoOaL
Divine nature. criminality, as
may be seen
used page 50, lines
8, 10.
all right
may
views of the
may
or
from the manner in which
It
may
result from
ways
implies fault, and
vourable sense.
may
is
always
to
’ApeXeZv
be taken
So, also, pi) ttzlOegOcu, or
be consistent with freedom from
all
in
pi)
al-
an unfa-
tuotevelv
,
blame, according
the presence or absence of other circumstances
to
it is
want of pow-
or a variety of other justifying reasons.
er,
not involve
but.
;
must always be associated with condemnation, as
cliteiOeIv
implying an unbelieving and guilty condition of the soul.
This
36
iii.,
word
the force of the
is
6 6s clttelOCjv
:
shall never see life
,
as used
by our Saviour, John,
ovx oxpErat farjv
but the wrath
— The
unbelieving
of God abideth on him fell into an .
For these reasons, perhaps, these verbs
in-
transitive sense, leaving the denial of the action of the positive
form
And
be expressed by the negative particles.
to
perhaps, «also, because they differ somewhat from the mere
negation of the reflex action of the middle, they retain, for distinction’s sake, the active
form
;
first
view,
others, the
most
although, at
such privative words would seem, of
all
foreign to the ordinary use of that voice.
XL VII. Great Things cannot Exist without Small. the
Maxim
cation
Page rrjyolg
,
and 55,
to the
Application of
Doctrine of a Special Providence Edu,
to Politics.
Line
5.
Ov
pi)v ovde Kvdepvrjratg, ovde orpa-
9
ovd av noXtritcoZg
X^P
1
^
optHptiv pevaXa. ov6e
;
GREAT THINGS CANNOT EXIST WITHOUT SMALL. 265 yap avev
ojurcptiv
ev fceloOac political
rovg p,eydXovg (paoiv
— “ Neither
to pilots,
men, can great things
ol
XiOoXoyoi XiOovg
nor to commanders, nor to exist without small things
for, as the stone-masons say, neither do large stones lie
well together in a structure without the small.”
im
is
capable of the widest range.
It is
This max-
not only applica-
ble to stone-masons, and politicians, and to the sublime ar-
gument of Plato here
in favour of a special providence, but
also of the highest importance in respect to education,
is
and well worthy the attention of
all
For
teachers of youth.
want of a patient and laborious care in respect to what may seem the more minute elements of science, a structure is often erected without cohesion or symmetry, and destined, through the looseness of
parts, to fall to pieces almost
its
as soon as completed.
As Plato
applies the
maxim here
Aristotle, in his Politico, lib.
ii.,
to politicians, so, also,
2, institutes
parison in respect to government, and sential to the very constitution of a
that
its
shows
that
it is
sound and healthy
es-
state
individual elements should be small things mingled
with great, in such a pathy
a similar com-
to the
whole.
condemns those
way
as to give coherence and
In pursuance of this
theorists
same
sym-
idea,
he
who, even in his day, advocated
the impracticable doctrine of perfect equality, and charges
them with being the greatest enemies to that very idea of unity which they would be thought so zealously to maintain. The levelling dogma, he admits, is plausible, and apparently most philanthropic
av
elvai So^etev
—
—evirpoaconog
ical (pcXavOpcjirog
but, in the end, instead of
being produc-
tive of the greatest happiness of the greatest number,
fraught with the seeds of the state.
As
all evil
it
is
both to individuals and to
unity implies plurality
and variety,
clares, there can be no true unity in sameness.
so,
he de-
There can
be no binding sympathy except in a community of higher
and lower, lesser and greater
interests.
Z
As well might one
:
,
266 GREAT THINGS CANNOT EXIST WITHOUT SMALL. attempt to construct a wall with round, smooth pebbles,
all
and fashion, or produce harmony from same length and tension which, as he justly remarks, might furnish an insipid homophony, but never a true symphony coanep nav el ng rrjv ovpupGiviav
same
of the
size
strings all of the
;
:
TroLrjoeiev dfjiO(po)vcav, ii.,
rj
rov pvOpov (3aoiv plav,
Politica ,
2.
There is a singular passage in the Ajax of Sophocles, in which we think there is had in view this same comparison of great and little stones, although the word is not expressly mentioned in the Greek. He also applies it, in the same manner,
wild and disorganizing doctriftes of gov-
to those
ernment, which would destroy support,
all
confidence and
all
mutual
by exciting an unholy jealousy between the rich
The passage is interesting, if for no other show how precisely the same, in temper and in
and the poor. purpose, to
argument, have been the demagogues of
ages
all
:
IIpo^ yap rov exovO’ 6 (j)6ovoc £pnet.
peyahuv x^P^ nvpyov pvpa nehovTai.
Kalroi cpuipoi C(j>a?iep6v
pera yap peyd^cjv
/3aidg
9
apicr dv ,
nal psyag opOoW’ vtzo pLKporipov.
’A/U/ ov dvvarov rovg avorjTovg tovtcov yv6pag TTpodidaoKELv.
Which we would ment on
—Ajax
thus attempt to render, by
Potter’s version, in
which,
we
way of improve-
think,
looked the implied simile, and thus failed
151.
he has over-
to bring out its
principal beauty
Thus envy
And
secretly assails the rich.
yet small stones, unmingled with the great,
Build up a dangerous tower
The
Which one,
frail
defence*
high and low in mutual sympathy
Sustain each other
No
—a
we
fools
;
yet this truth
is
one
can never learn.
think, can fail to admire the
yet most just application which Plato
still
makes
higher and
of this striking
— GENTLENESS OF PLATO comparison
to the
S
;
MODE OF ARGUMENT. 267
government of the Divine Architect, and
to the doctrine of a special providence.
XL VIII. Mode of Argument and
Gentleness of Plato's
,
Adaptation
Page
The
57,
Line
to the
word
will best
of the spirit of the whole passage. train of thought as this
son,
as
it
:
Peculiat
ye pca^eadat rolg Xoyoig,
2. Tgj
propriety of this
its
Minds of the Young. k. t. A.
appear in a paraphrase
suggests some such have now addressed his rea-
“We
It
and by a summary yet conclusive syllogism, forcibly, were, compelled him to admit the incorrectness of his
positions.
although his reason
Still,
ings or imagination
may
silenced, his feel-
yet refuse to surrender, and
revolt at the idea that the Deity is
concerned in
all
may
the ap-
and minute operations of the universe.
parently trivial
There seems,
is
therefore, in addition, to be
soothing charms (eTTudtiv),
some
overcome those prejudices or
need of some
gentle persuasions, to
distastes
which
will not
yield to reason.”
’E nadetv (encod?]), with
word with
Plato.
in the Phsedon,
What
its
derivatives,
is
a favourite
a sublime beauty does
where Socrates,
after
it
possess
having gone through
the strongest and most recondite arguments that reason
could array for a future fidence, the cheering
the
soul,
life,
makes, as his ground of con-
hope which the belief produces
in
and those sweet persuasions of a moral kind,
which surpass “ for noble
is
in
power
all
the deductions of the intellect
the prize (he says), and great the hope”
rca-
Adv yap to aOXov uai rj eXnlg peydkrj. And then, after having gone through the mythical representations of the unseen world, he tells us that the soul must ever chant these to itself as
some soothing
incantation
(
roiavra %pr\
;
268 PHYSICAL EVENTS CONTROLLED BY SPIRITUAL AGENTS. coonep enadeiv eavrd), Phced ., 114, D.), and like the dying
swan,
which, in another part of this dialogue, he com-
to
pares himself, sing this song of immortality more sweetly
and more clearly the nearer is to test
it
approaches that period which
the great question forever.
Nothing can be more admirable than the tender care which, throughout this discussion, the Athenian
is
made
exercise towards his supposed youthful disputant.
philosopher
knew
ment, however excellent
it
silenced,
it
disputant to a
He
therefore,
dialectical argu-
might be as preparatory
application of other remedies. it
The
that very often little direct influence of
was produced by means of
a moral kind
to
He knew
that,
to the
even where
not unfrequently hardened the vanquished more tenacious hold upon former prejudices. in what succeeds, endeavours to make him
feel that this is
no matter of mere speculation,
like
any mere
theorem, but that he has a deep personal interest
scientific
in the great
arrangements of Providence, and
to
impress
him with the fact, that as a part (although a very small one) of an immense whole, the importance and dignity of his own by this See remarks, notes 1 1 and 12, page 1 1 explanation of the word dvoxepaiveiv, note 3, page 8.
position, instead of being diminished, is magnified
very circumstance. also,
XLIX. The Machinery of Physical Events controlled by Invisible The Doctrine of Plato and of the Spiritual Agencies .
Bible . V
Apxovreg ttpoorer aypevoi. The the ap%ovreg will not permit us and gender word of form Page
57,
Line
12.
any inanimate influences. It can only mean beings of a higher order than man, to whom the lower parts of the universal administration were thought
to
regard
it
as referring to
;
;
;
,
PHYSICAL EVENTS CONTROLLED BY SPIRITUAL AGENTS. 269 This doctrine, somewhat modified, we
be committed.
to
Holy Scriptures, without suppoJewish writers, any more than Plato, did not
believe to be taught in the
sing that the
hrmly hold
to that regular
we
and phenomena which
and orderly succession of events
They
laws of nature.
style the
manifestly believed in a connexion of cause and effect, ex-
tending in a chain from the throne of
God
to the minutest
and yet
operations of the visible world
all
golden chain of celestial influences, and
this
tions throughout
its
immense
along
down
in all its vibra-
extent, they constantly recog-
nised the control and guidance of supernatural or angelic beings.
Besides revealing the doctrine, the Scriptures sometimes,
draw aside the
as matters of historical fact, invisible world, ral
*
agency
idea in Hosea,
come
dered
:
I will
hear the heavens
it
to
us this constant supernatu-
who descended
as in the account of the angel
;
We find this And
and lay open
shall
ii.,
23,
pass in that
to
from the
veil
which is commonly thus renday I will hear saith the Lord ,
,
;
and
the heavens shall hear the earth,
earth shall hear the corn,
and
the wine,
Jezreel.
sing.
the oil
and they
;
and
the
shall hear
The word HJjP, here used, means, in its primary sense, to Hence, secondly, to pronounce with a measured and solemn
thirdly, to respond
voice
and
fourthly, to hear
erence to the auricular sensation, which
word.
It
having, however, no refis
expressed by another
resembles the Greek pehno, pehnopaL,
or, rather, apetGo-
and conveys the idea of responsive or choral singing. Hence the passage would be more literally, and at the same time more ex-
pai,
And
pressively, rendered thus
:
will sing , saith the Lord,
I will sing
shall
sing (or respond)
it
to the earth
;
shall
come
to the
and
to
pass in that day, 1
heavens
and
;
the heavens
the earth shall respond to the
and the wine, and the oil ; and they shall respond to Jezreel. There seems here a reference to that doctrine of the choral harmony of nature, with which the ancient mind was so filled as though the
corn,
;
touching a chord
in
heaven,
when
the great Coryphaeus or leader of
the universal orchestra gives the starting tone, sounds and vibrates
down through cadence
all
in the
the
compass of the notes,
end designed
to
until
be accomplished.
Z
2
it
makes
its
closing
;
270 PHYSICAL EVENTS CONTROLLED BY SPIRITUAL AGENTS. into the pool of Bethesda, or of the destroying angel that
appeared with a drawn sword standing over the devoted
2d Samuel,
city of Jerusalem,
In this latter
xxiv., 16, 17.
instance, there is no intimation that
it
differed in
any
way
from the ordinary method by which God sends pestilence
upon the
earth, except that here the curtain is
withdrawn
and the supernatural machinery disclosed. No doubt, second causes were here also at work, and the philosopher of that day,
had there been any such
to investigate the ante-
cedents and consequents connected with the event, might
have bid the Jew Take heart and banish yet
still, all
this
fear
would not change the
vealed, that behind
them
all,
however
extended beyond the utmost bounds of
fact,
far
so clearly re
they
may have
scientific research,
power of God, and his delegated directing them, without any violation of their vis-
there stood the spiritual minister,
Let
the production of the decreed result.
ible order, to
We
science cease her babble. rant as well as the
all
know, the most igno-
most learned, that second causes are
employed in these visitations. The writers of the Bible were no more ignorant of this, as a general principle, than our most scientific savans, although they may have known less of the steps of the process in its minute details.
here
we
Even
surpass them only in having traced a few more
links in a chain, in
differences of the
unknown sinks all insignificance. These links,
which what
known
into
is
in the series of natural sequences,
extent short of the
room enough with them.
infinite,
yet
may
reach back
to
any
and yet leave on the other shore
for the supernatural , in perfect consistency
We
have, therefore, no reason at
all for infer-
ring that the Scriptures meant to represent this as a mirac-
ulous intervention.
In every case of pestilence, they would
have us believe that the destroying angel air, but. in this
is
abroad in the
one, for special reasons, the eye of
man was
PHYSICAL EVENTS CONTROLLED BY SPIRITUAL AGENTS. 271
He
permitted to behold him.*
maketh his angels winds
,
his
ministers a fiery flame, as the inspired Apostle renders it, Heb., i., 17 all not, as it would be explained by the ra;
tionalizing interpreter, he maketh the winds his messengers ,
The angels of the Lord flaming fire his servants. are ever encamped round about the righteous, although we
and
the
have but one example in the Bible of the glorious vision being revealed to mortal eyes.
The
great objection to this
See 2 Kings, vi., 17. view, as it would present
some minds, would spring from the prejudice to which Plato alludes in the Epinomis, 982, D., E., and on which we have remarked, pages 226, 227. Men are so
itself to
much
inclined to associate undeviating regularity and con-
stancy in physical motions with a nature implying the ab-
sence of a special will and reason
as though an animated
;
personal agency must necessarily be sometimes freaky and capricious in
its
operations as evidences of the exercise of
One answer
a personal volition.
such an objection
to
is
furnished at once by maintaining that spiritual
all such intermediate powers are under the constant control of the Su-
preme Will and Reason, producing the regularity of natural sequence, not as though it needed such sequences at all as indispensable helps to
of them, as signs,
we
itself,
but for our sakes , that
might be able
by means
to exercise faith in the
general constancy of the Divine operations, and regulate our
own
conduct in accordance with
feeling
becomes
When, however,
it.
practical atheism, prevailing to
this
any great
among mankind, we have reason to believe that God* come forth, as Plato says in the Politicus, from his re-
extent will
tired place of observation, *
There are also
break up the long repose of nal-
in the Bible intimations that evil supernatural
agents, under the dominion of the Prince of the
Powers of the
Air,
are sometimes permitted to exercise a physical influence in the affairs
of our globe, and thus to
and body.
See Luke,
xiii.,
16
afflict ;
Job,
men with i.,
12
;
ii.,
disease both of 6, 7.
mind
— 272
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIH1L0
—
NIHIL.
ural laws, and again astonish the world, as in the early
by displays of super natural power.
times,
-
Nemesius,
in his treatise
on the Nature of Man, alluding
to Plato’s doctrine of providence, describes
sing three divisions.
The
first
province
assigned directly,
is
he
or without media, to the Deity himself, or, as
the
God.
first
This has respect
to the
as recogni-
it
styles him,
world of ideas, and
nporjyovpEVcog
the general care of the universe as a whole
pev t(ov Idetiv eireira 6e %ypnavrog rov uaOoXov uoapov.
The second department is
given in charge of the second or
and has
inferior divinities,
relation to those things
which
are said to be under the law of generation and corruption 7rdvTG)v tgjv £V yEvioci ual (pOopa
dinary physical events. of
and
life,
good and
know
to the distribution of
evil.
what he
Nemesius Be Nat. Horn ,
for this precise division, as
though
for the
the passage
styles organic
.,
We
345.
p.
Nemesius
second some warrant
may be
states
it,
al-
discovered in
which has furnished the ground of
this excur-
For farther information on the ancient views in re-
spect to a special providence, Leg.,
other words, or-
or, in
third relates to the conduct
not in what part of Plato’s dialogues authority can be
found
sus.
The
—
ii.,
Evang
.,
7
;
Plutarch.,
Be
we may
Fato, 572, E.
consult Cicero , ;
Be
Eusebius, Prczp
630.
L.
The Ancient Maxim, Be Nihilo Nihil.
Page
Line rrdaa onog, k. r. X
2. (bg
58,
.
ysveoig evena ekeivov ylyvErai
— “ That
all
generation, or every gener-
ation, takes place for this purpose,
and
in
such a way,”
&c. This argument would be better accommodated ern ideas, and, at the same time, lose none of
intended meaning in this place, by rendering
its
to
mod-
force or
y EVEOig
ere
— THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO
273
NIHIL.
#
According
ation.
page 187,
we have
view
to the
taken of this word,
would always signify the bringing
it
into being
of what did not exist before, so far as the law or idea
concerned
when from a different disposition new substance is produced
as
;
same matter an
entirely
Here there
is
the creation of a
any new matter. regard
of the
—
it,
ation out
in this
It
would
new
,
is
fair to
way, as synonymous with our phrase,
The word
of nothing.
out of something pre-existent
yevsoig,
;
air.
being although not of
however, be quite
not,
and yet
this
cre-
does
is true,
it
generally imply, in Greek writers, a production in
way
nitric
example, from what before was atmospheric
acid, for
was
some
something
not necessarily, or e vi terminorum to be regarded as pre,
Many
existent matter.
which they styled
held to a metaphysical phantom
hyle (yXrj),
and which the more
spiritual
may have adopted to save their favourite maxFrom some such idea as this the Sep-
philosophers
im, de nihilo nihil. tuagint gave the
name Teveoig
to that
book which
the generations of the heavens and the earth
;
treats of
and in
this
Hebrew word m'lbinthey render the Hebrew substan-
they had some countenance from the Gen.,
ii.
,
tive verb
Thus,
4.
VP, in the account of the origin of light (Gen.,
3), not eoTG)
Psalm case,
(j)d)g,
xc., 2
it is
also,
but yevrjOrjTG) tyug.
npo rov
oprj yev7\0r\vai
no more than a
nb\ a word
In the
faithful
i.,
same way,
— although, in
rendering of the
this
Hebrew
of precisely similar import, implying successive
generation from something pre-existent
—
— nV
tDVH
^binm before the mountains were generated and was born or brought forth. In this way do the Scriptures, both Greek and Hebrew, speak of the formation of the present earth or of what may be styled the Mosaic bnni
,
the earth
,
creation.
In regard, however, to that originating act
place in the beginning, mentioned Gen.,
language
is
employed
in
many
i.,
1,
which took a different
parts of the Bible.
It
is
— 274
—
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE
NIIllLO NIHIL. +
represented as proceeding from a word or
something from a
fiat
—a
calling of
state of non-existence both in respect to
— as
Romans, iv., 17 uaXovvrog ra pi) where there seems to be a reference to Isaiah, xlviii., 14.— HIT npjP My hand hath 'JK *np founded the earth and my right hand hath spanned the heavens ; when I called to them they stood up. So, also, Isaiah, xli., 4 nrnn *Op who called the generations from matter and form
ovra
cog
ovra
:
;
,
—
the beginning .
To
such passages
language of Philo, elg
to elvai.
De
we may
Create 728
ra
:
trace the similar
pi)
ovra enaXeaev
Notwithstanding the clear declarations of the
Greek ideas of origination, connected with the words yeveoig and eyevero maintained their ground for some time, and continued to affect the expressions, if not
Bible, the
,
the intended meaning, of
some of the
the Jewdsh Philo, at times, uses language
imply the eternity of matter,
As when he gives us
if
B.
:
philosophy,
knew
that
it
De Mundi
Opificio
attained the highest
was most
rov ) that in existing things
on the one hand, the
to
account of what he styles the
this
“Moses, who had
which seems
not of the organized world.
philosophy of Moses, in his treatise 2,
Even
earliest fathers.
summit of
necessary {avaytzaibra-
[kv rotg ovoi) there (
efficient
universal mind, most pure and
(
page
,
should be,
dpaorrjpiov ), namely, the
unmixed with anything
else,
and, on the other hand, something inert, passive, or passible, destitute of soul
and motion (a'tpvxov
when moved, endowed
real
Although
which
with form, and animated by the mind
aforesaid, should be converted into this
the world.”
dnivrprov ),
in this
most perfect work,
very argument he
is
dispu-
seems to regard the ultimate element of matter as one of the two necessary existences, almost as much so as mind itself and his language greatly resembles that in which Cicero de-
ting against the eternity of the world, yet he
;
scribes the doctrine of one of the ancient schools
ura autem
ita dicebant, ut
:
De
earn dividerent in res duas
nat:
ut
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO altera esset -effipiens, altera
eaque efliceretur aliquid. censebant
dam
:
:
in eo autem,
in utroque
autem quasi huic se praebens, In eo,
quod
quod
si
vim esse materiam quam-
efficeret,
efliceretur,
tamen utrumque.
ipsam cohaerere potuisse,
275
NIHIL.
Neque enim materiam
nulla vi contineretur, neque
VIM SINE AL1QUA MATERIA.
Cic.,
Acad. Post .,
6.
In other places, however, he contends clearly and strongly that
even the hyle or unformed principle of matter ,
been created
arising from the systems of philosophy in first
some wavering which they had
instructed, assert pretty clearly an absolute cre-
which there was no
ation from a state in ter
had
beginning by the direct act of God.
in the
In general, the Christian fathers, with
been
itself,
(which we prefer
to the
pre-existent mat-
expression, out of nothing)
;
al-
though, in stating the Scriptural doctrine, they often use lan-
guage which was more congenial with the opposite system.
The words
yeveaig and yevr]r6v were employed for cre-
ation,
and dyevTjrov was used as synonymous with anna-
tov.
In consequence, however, of discussions growing out
of the Nicene controversy, and the doctrine of the eternal
generation of
The
Son, they
made
a distinction between
yevrjrog and yevvyrog, and dyevryTog and dyevvrjrog is far
tristic
,
which
from being so evident in classical Greek as in the Pawritings.
yevrjrog
;
or, in
was yevvrjrog but not words, he was ayevrjrog and annorog
Christ, they said,
other
but not dyevvrjrog.
,
,
So, also, the
first
progenitor of any or-
ganized species was dyevvrjrog although nothing was dye,
vrjrog
which was beneath the Divine hypostases.
Cyril.
Alexand ., Be Sancta
The Greek
Trinit., 8,
Vide
page 37.
philosophers have been, almost
all
of them,-
charged with teaching the eternity of matter, and of having
been universally agreed
in the tenet, that
created or generated out of nothing,
nothing could be
or, as it is
by Lucretius,
De
nihilo nihil, in nihilum nil posse reverti.
expressed
;
276
No
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO
NIHIL.
was the doctrine of many, if not%iost of them, modern acceptation of the terms that is, they
doubt this
even
in the
;
believed in no creation or generation except from pre-existent matter with
the properties of matter as
it
now
whatever changes or modifications
it
might
exists
was
other words, the visible material universe
or, in
nal,
all
eter-
in the lapse
was thus held by the Ionic school in all its branches, by some of the Italian, and by all who were atheistically inclined. It was also maintained, however inconsistently, by some who were undoubted theists, as by Plutarch, and a few others who have been of ages have undergone.
It
styled Platonists.
We
cannot, however, charge any of
them with these
consequences simply from the language of the maxim, as x.iay
be taken in different senses; in some of which
it
it
is
not only consistent with the purest theism, but absolutely essential to
its
proper explanation and defence.
means
clear that the eternity of matter
Plato
and, although
that
;
way when
some things
in the
It is
by no
was ever held by Timaeus
may
look
only partially considered, yet are they
all
capable of a consistent interpretation on a different hypoth-
His doctrine of the inherent
esis.
evil of matter
does not
It was not by any necessity, involve connected with any necessary existence of matter, but with certain necessary properties which it must possess if crewithout which it could not be matter, and without ated which God could not cause it to exist. Vide remarks on
at all,
its
eternity.
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
the Platonic doctrine of avdyrcrj, pages 217, 218.
Laws, as w e have seen, T
are defending him.
The
his evil principle is spiritual, and
has, therefore, nothing to do with the
we
In
Even
if
dogma
against
he had held
it,
it
which would
not have been a heresy fatal to his claim to be regarded as
a pure theist, although an inconsistent one
;
and the
cir-
cumstances in which he was placed would have presented the
same
palliation as
we have
offered for his doctrine of
—
;
,
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO
we know
But, indeed,
evil.
of no system of philosophy to
the tenet in question, in this gross form,
which been more
To have allowed any
foreign.
would have
necessary self-
would have been directly
existence to matter
277
NIHIL.
in the face of
of his most favourite notions, and especially opposed
some
grand division in the Timreus, in which, under the
to that
name to oparov,
general
expressly excluded from the
it is
class of the tgjv ovrcog ovtgjv
,
and assigned
to that of the
ovSettote ovrwg ovtcov.
Vide page 172, and the remarks on the distinction between the verbs dpi
yiyvoyevcov
icat
and ytyvopac.
Nothing can be more express than the dec-
laration that matter
—not as organized, but
treme or lowest state in which
can be matter,
it
most exor, as
he
in the most general terms, the tangible, the visi-
defines
it
ble, the
extended
— belongs
to the class of generated, in dis-
tinction from eternal existences
yiyvopevog
otipa
when we connect passage
in the
rrav 6e
this
teal
oparog yap dirrog re
:
ysvrjrog ecpdvrj.
Tim., 28.
teal
And
with another proposition in the same
av to yiyvopevov in
9
alriov
nvog
el;
yiyvopevov avdyterjg yiyveoQai — “ that everything which must have been produced by some cause” — seems imposis
it
sible
any if
any longer
to
maintain that Plato regarded matter in
state as belonging to the world of necessary entities
not necessary then not eternal in
its
nature
;
for
uses the two terms as mutually implying one another.
would
which runs through
would warrant us compendious
title,
all
SOUL
his writings,
them
in giving to
“ The
,
It
and even hyper-
also be in opposition to that high
spirituality
and
he ever
and which
collectively, as their
its eternal
nite value ; its superior antiquity to matter
;
nature
the
;
its infi-
immense pre-
eminence of incorporeal when compared with corporeal substances,
verse in
and
itself,
wants of the It
is
the utter worthlessness
of the whole material uni or when not viewed as subservient to the higher
spirit .”
true that, in conformity with this ancient
A
A
maxim,
;;
278
De
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO
nihilo nihil
veodcu
NIHIL.
— cue ov
— which, as
it
attempt to transfer
dvvarai ovdsv en rov pif ovrog ye stands in the Greek, unmarred by any to a
it
more imperfect language,
of the clearest axioms of reason
—he held
is
one
an elementary
to
more ancient than matter, even in its lowest organized state, and which he and others styled hyle (yXrj). Although he sometimes seems to use this term in principle, or apxv,
the sense of material or source, yet he could not have mean*
by
it
matter itself as something solid, extended, or resisting,
since he expressly denies to
it
any of these
properties, or,
indeed, any connexion in itself with the sensible world
regarding
it,
in fact, as belonging to the vorjrd rather than, ,
any sense, to the aloOrjrd. No sublimation or refinement of the conception of resisting substance, even when carried to its most aethereal limits not even the nebular
in
—
star dust* or
rudimentary
modern writers
tion of planetary for
it
was
not a
fluid of the universe,
systems
—made
which some
an aid in the construc-
find so convenient
the least approach to
it
mere difference of degree, but a metaphys-
ical entity altogether distinct.
It is
very
difficult to
under-
stand precisely what idea Plato and other Greek philoso-
phers attached *
This
is
to this
elementary hyle without form, exten,
a favourite term with those scientific
men who
are ever
talking about the progression of the universe from the lower to the higher, from the imperfect to the
more
zed to the organized, and, as they ought
perfect,
from the unorganiwould consist-
to say if they
ently follow out their theory, from matter to mind, and, finally, to a
God.
But, on another hypothesis of occasional retrogradations
(which no one
who
considers the vast extent of the universe can
deny to be possible, probable, and in perfect consistency with some unfathomable designs of its Eternal Author), the peculiar celestial appearances indicated by this phrase
may
remains of worlds going out, and in the
last stages of their
to inanity.
We
are too
much
be, in fact, the floating
in the condition
of the
amids, to determine with any satisfaction, unless
sons drawn from revelation, which theory
is
fly
we
approach
on the Pyr-
resort to rea-
correct, or
are physically nearer our descending or ascending node.
whether
we
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO
Some ap%h
sion, parts, or divisibility.
have been
to
was
in his
not matter
;
mind as the
279
NIHIL.
seems which
or principle
origin of matter,
and yet something separate from the Deity,
and existing with him before the formation of the outward
We
material universe.*
are confident, for the reasons as-
signed, that he did not hold to
its
necessary eternity, but
it
it as an emmore modern
not easy to determine whether he regarded
is
anation, a generation, or a creation, in the
sense of the word. as an apx?h or
first
Whether
was merely space regarded
it
principle, like the aneipov or infinite of ,
Anaximander or something similar to the unextended points in the modern theory of Boscovitch whether it was the manifestation of the Divine power in space, so that visible outward matter would be only those impressions upon ;
;
which are the
soul, of resistance, figure, &c.,
action of the Divine immaterial principle
result of the
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; a theory which,
although ridiculed as Berkleian and absurd, gives us
which
results or properties of matter,
substantial purposes, while yet
all
it
is
spirit, in reality,
,
we may
suppose,
is
it
idea, that
is,
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
whatever
or
certain that Plato did not teach
the necessary self-existence
common
the
matter enough for
leaves
the only ovoid or essence in the universe else
all
of matter according to the
composed of
as a substance
solid, ex-
tended parts or particles, whether regarded as existing in an organized or a chaotic
The axiom De
state.
nihilo nihil or others similar to ,
found in his writings and those of Aristotle.
regarded
it
as a self-evident truth
book of his Physics, *
c. 4,
asserts that
In the passage of the Timaeus
from which matter was formed, yet
He
as though
it
also styles
it
it
it
still
first
was the common 123, he
as the matter or material
without any of
its
sensible
there the mother of the sensible world,
were the passive or negative
principle, while
the father, or positive power, which produced
time and space.
the
latter, in
which we have cited page
uses language which seems to describe properties.
and the
;
may be They both it,
its
God was
manifestations
in
280
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO
the ancient naturalists, that nothing could come
opinion of
all
tnto being
from
which was not
that
rirNOMENOY
utiv, chq
ov
This
capable,
is
NIHIL.
ovdevdq
uolvt)
6o^a rchv ,7
rov
etc
grj
cj)Vot-
0NT02.
of being taken in the atheistic
is true,
it
—
by those who lay no emphasis on between the two substantive verbs, or who re-
or materializing sense
the contrast
gard the
latter, in this
terial, or of
mind the
expression, as significant of the ma-
the terminus a quo
radical distinction
between
explained page 171, and which Plato in
is
tence divested it
once of
at
really
is,
all
however, elgc
we keep
and yly voficu, as
we
shall find this sen-
objectionable features, and
as one of the clearest dictates of
This language may be, and has been, used by the
reason. ;
but
it
is
capable of being employed with far more
power against him.
Aristotle gives us the
er sense in another place,
where he
key
high
to this
says, with his usual
conciseness, chore eorai nplv yeveodcu
— that essential
necessary being must be before generation
;
Vide
Ausc ., i., 9. The position, thus understood, which forms the very sold of Plato’s philosophy,
Arista Phys that
or
other
or, in
words, that there must be a being before a becoming.
is
in
generally maintained by
important propositions,
all
presented, as
atheist
If,
.
.
namely, the superior rank and antiquity of incorporeal substance in respect to the very position
all
derived or generated things.
which he so strongly maintains
tenth book of The Laws,
It is
in this
to wit, “ that soul (in its largest
sense, and including the Divine Soul, as the source from
whence be said
all
which they may
other spirits proceed, and in
have existed
eter-
necessarily older than matter.”
In-
to pre-exist) must, of necessity,
nally, or that
mind
is
stead of being favourable to atheism, the grand conservative principle rect opposition to
it.
the axiom, in this sense, from the elfii
when
thus held,
which ever stands
The English
actly corresponding to
it is,
fails
in di-
properly to express
want of two words ex-
and yiyvopai
;
and when care-
,
,
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO lessly rendered
The
matter.
seems
it
281
NIHIL.
to favour the eternal existence of
Latin has the same defect
and hence the
;
by Lucretius to a purpose so different intended by Plato and the Grecian theists. This
atheistic perversion
from that
aiises from referring the term ovrog as well as yiyvopevov, to
when used
generated and phenomenal being, to which,
and especially
in this higher sense,
direct antithesis,
it
when
has no application
;
placed in such
we
and
are thus led
into the mistake that all the ancient philosophers taught
proceed from pre-existent matter.
that matter could only
The
idea conveyed by the proposition, ovdev
ovrog yeveoOai etc
or, if
,
the positive form
rov ovrog yeveoOac,
that of the Apostle,
may
be shown
were made by the
that the worlds
pr)
be very similar
By faith we Word of God
Hebrews, xi., 3
rov
preferred, 7ravra
is
to
etc
:
to
understand
,
so that the
made ( yeyovevat ) from things ichich do appear etc (paivopevov. There is another reading given by Griesbach, namely, etc prj paivopevw on what authority, however, we know not. This would change the things that are seen were not ,
<
sentence
to the positive form,
Greek maxim when taken
;
and bring
it
nearer
in the higher sense to
have alluded, but would not essentially vary It
would then be rendered,
By faith
its
to
the
which we meaning.
we understand
that the
worlds were formed so that the things which are seen were ,
made from
things which are not seen
;
or, in
other words, that
phenomenal was made from the invisible A slight attention will show a resemblance to the Greek maxim
the visible or
.
which does not the Apostle
at
first,
sight appear,
and that the language of
in several respects similar to the Platonic.
is
Besides the distinctions so frequently conveyed by ovra
and yiyvopeva the same ideas are variously expressed in ,
Plato by the terms opara or (patvopeva (the visible, or phenomenal), used in place of yiyvopeva
and aopara, aetdrj, synonymous with rd ovra. By these and kindred terms he ever opposes the visible to the or pi) (patvopeva used as
A
a 2
;
:
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO
282
invisible, the
phenomenal
NIHIL.
to the essential, the ever- chan-
ging objects of sense (t« aloOrjra) to the vorjra, or those necessary, eternal things which are the objects of the intellect alone.
not supposed that Paul had any direct
It is
reference to Plato or to Platonic language
;
but
we
cannot
doubt that he uses these words in a similar philosophical sense, especially
when we compare
of expression, and
remember
the
many
coincidences
although originally deri-
that,
ved from Plato, these terms, in the Apostle’s time, had be-
come a part of the current scholastic phraseology, with which he must have been familiar. So, also, the words rd pi) fiXsnopEva ( the unseen things ), which we find Hebrews, xi., 1, and which are equivalent to pi) f^aivopEva in the third verse, are elsewhere used by the Apostle to express the same class of substances which are so frequently styled by Plato, rd ovra ra opara ra aetdrj rd del Kara ravrd nai cooavroyg Exovra. Compare 2d Coruithians iv., urj OKonovvrcov rjptiv rd pXEnopEva aXXa rd pi) /3Ae18 rd yap fiXenopEva upoonaipa rd ds pi) PXettotTogeva ,
,
,
,
:
i
*
,
psva alcbvta
—while
ice
aim not
hut at the things which are unseen
seen are temporal (belong
The
seen are eternal .
to
j
at the things
time )
; ;
for
which are seen
the things
the things
,
which are
which are un-
striking resemblance
which
this
some passages in the Phaedon cannot be mistaken Q&pev ovv 6i) 6vo Eidrj, rd pen oparov rb be aEideg nai to pev deibeg del Kara rd avrd exov rb 6e oparov u 7 6 e nors Kara ravrd “ Let us lay down two classes of being,
bears to
:
*
,
—
the seen
tions
;
and
unseen
)
the unseen, eternal in their rela-
the seen, never the same, but ever changing.”
don, 79, A.
mous.
the
,
The
terms are nearly,
IT pooKatpa is that
or, rather,
temporary
which
if
Phw-
not quite, synony.
exists in time, temporal,
— liable to change —the opposite of del
Kara rd avrd exovra. On the other hand, alcjvia is that which is eternal, not simply in duration, but in its very nature, as not
belonging to time
—
fixed,
unchangeable, and ne-
—
,
,
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO
283
NIHIL.
nard ravrd exovra. In these passages, neither Paul nor Plato mean by the unseen things a mere negation of sense, namely, that which is simply concealed cessary
del
from view as a present
fact, or
not seen because belonging
a future untried state of existence
to
but rather those
;
things that are in their very nature invisible that
w orld r
belong not to the sensible
one
come
to
objects of sense.
rov
— either the present or any
and reason as distinguished from the
See, also, Rom.,
20.
i.,
apocryphal book
find the doctrine of the hyle in the
entitled
The Wisdom
of Solomon, ch.
d[iop(j)OV
fcoofiov
18
xi.,
the Septuagint. version of Genesis,
The
rog nal duaraonevaorog.
i.,
2
rj
:
to the
which represented the hyle not only as incapable of being seen
may be more
if it
6e
y r\
Greek
also,
aopa-
doctrine,
invisible, but as
we
we
among
ever ought, in
philosophers, to render vXrj by
can conceive of it as an essence
abstracted from qualities, figure, and extension.
may have
fjv
could not be ranked
doubted whether
strict
our term matter, unless
earth out
Compare,
in fact, as not belonging at all to
;
the sensible world, even It
ual urtoaoa
word aoparog here could
only have been used in reference
translating the
:
vXrjg — “ having built the
of the unformed, or, rather, formless hyle.”
the vorjrd.
which
— the vorjrd as distinguished from the aioQrjrd
or the objects of faith
We
is,
created such an essence
That God
we have no
right to
deny, merely because our minds can form no conception of it
;
and
if it
may exist
as the originally created ground of
subsequently generated or created material things
all
when
manifested in time and space and clothed with qualities by that Eternal Spirit,
which,
we are told in Genesis, hovered may the doctrine of Plato and
over the chaotic deep, then of the
more
spiritual writers of the ancient
world be in ac-
cordance with the philosophy of Paul, Hebrews,
Our only
xi., 3.
safety here is in clinging to the Bible, and to
the fair interpretation of Genesis,
i.,
1.
Human
reason
left
284
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO tremendous
to itself, finds
when
difficulties in
NIHIL.
both views
and
;
she rejects the aid of revelation, must shrink from
The
taking a decided position on either.
belief that mat-
any form, as an independent principle, is eternal, or anything is such apart from God, carries us to atheism,
ter in
that
although
it
ent theist.
may be On the
maintained by an honest yet inconsist-
existed alone , or that there
seems
draw
to
after
it
all ,
was a time
to
be all or ,
and that therefore creation ;
other words,
or, in
,
the strange consequences that he
never could have ceased being
God once when God was all
other hand, the doctrine that
we
have become
less
but an extension of his
is
are in danger of a pantheism
seemingly more philosophical, yet less favourable than the inconsistent theism which
Reason
reels
than
to piety
we have condemned.
and staggers here like a drunken man, and
if
she will walk alone, finds a dark abyss on each side of her
narrow path, stumbling.
into
which she
is
perpetually in danger of
There may possibly be a way between these
two conclusions, but her eyes are too dim
The
to discover
Scriptures most solemnly declare that
into being things that
,
quence which reason,
lation,
ready
if
she will trust herself alone, can
We
it.
on the doctrine of
at
evil,
must, therefore, on
keep close
in collision with
interpretation
to reve-
a momentâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s warning, and without a mur-
mur, to give up our most darling philosophy, all
did call
were not and yet denies the conse-
hardly avoid deducing from this subject, as
God
it.
would
any
truth
if
comes
at
which a sound and unforced
Neither should
elicit.
for our Protestantism, even
if it
we
which differs from Church by which we ever mean
interpretation ;
we
be afraid
are reluctant to adopt any that long received
by the
that line of the good,
pious, and learned in the Scriptures, in all
ages,
and
which no
spiritually-minded reader of ecclesiastical history can ever fail to trace.
that the
In such a case as this, too,
most pious interpretation
is
we
most likely
should feel to
be true.
THE ANCIENT MAXIM, DE NIHILO even
we
if it
285
NIHIL.
should not seem to be the most philosophical.
If
cannot comprehend a positive enunciation of the great
truth,
we must
be content with a negative one, better adapt-
ed, perhaps, to the present state of our faculties,
and
believe
made of things which do
by faith that the worlds were not appear.
There
which Plato speaks act of God, and that, too,
a passage in the Sophista in
is
by the direct which before were not.
plainly of a creation
from things
is
It
very
much
the style of the Scriptures, and no better refutation of
of the charges against
him could be given than
declaration from this undoubted dialogue dvrjra nai <pvra boa r’ erd yrjg
'
,
rj
onepparejv nai pi^ebv
—
tieov brjpiovpyovvrog tyrjoopev
Trporepov ovk,
and
Travra
boa a'lpvxa cv yy £vviorarat ptiv aXXov nvorepov TirNESGAI
(pvsrat, nai
vog
etc
’GNTA
—“ In
regard to
all
mortal animals
whatever things grow from roots and seeds,
plants,
whatever inanimate organizations exist in the earth
we
some
this clear
Zcioa dij
:
in
— can
say that from any other cause than the creating
they come into being which
before icere not ?”
God
Sophista,
265, B.
Page
58,
Line
3. orreog
oa evdaipov ovoia is
rj
taking place in such a
manner
pertains to the universal life (or
This
blessed.”
is
obscure passage. obtmgat status. pression, life
rj
rov iravroq fUcp vndpxov-
rep
—“All generation, life
of the whole)
the best rendering
Ast translates
It is
not clear
ovoia vnapxovoa
of the universe taken
or every generation,
that the essence
it,
we
which
may be
can give of
this
ut universes vitcefelix
what Plato means by the exnavrdg /3icp whether the
rep
;
collectively as the
sum
of
all
—
which exists in which case it would seem that (3iog rov navrog would have been sufficient or whether he intends
—
by ovoia something higher than from which the
life
words, the Universal
this,
namely, that essence
of the universe proceeds, or, in other
Numen
or Deity himself.
If the last
286
DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE.
view be the true one, Plato approaches a higher doctrine than has ever been supposed to be taught in his pages.
LI.
Doctrine that the Parts are
made
Whole as set forth by Plato and as viewed by Modern Rationalists and The Converse Doctrine that the Whole is Semi-inf dels only for the
,
,
.
,
Parts examined with reference
also for the
to the
,
Mutual
Harmony of both. Page
Line
58,
4.
ova eveica gov yiyvo\ievr\ ov 6e ,
euecvov.
The
whole
unquestionably true, especially
is
reference to physical ends alone.
made for the when viewed in
It is,
however, only a
portion of the truth, and when, as in Popeâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s
and
evstca,
doctrine that the parts are
in the writings of
many
Essay on Man,
scientific religionists,
it
is
un-
by any other views of the system of the universe, Init may be very far from any true religious tendency. it minds, might easily coalesce some with atheism deed, in and although its advocates may sometimes seem to talk dequalified
;
voutly,
it
has
much more
than of piety about
it.
of the appearance of philosophy
It is
a speculative tenet, not
much
dwelt upon in the Scriptures, and, instead of being directly
expressed there,
which, as
is
we have
rather implied in a higher truth, to
intimated, Plato might have
aiming in the language referred
been darkly
to in the close of the pre-
ceding dissertation, namely, the doctrine that the whole self with all
parts severally and collectively
its
for itself, but for a manifestation of the
blessedness
;
,
is
it-
made, not
Divine glory and
a doctrine, the object of most bitter dislike to
which contains an inexpressible mind that will have no philosophy
the frigid rationalist, but
moral sublimity
which is not Volume.
in
to the
accordance with the teachings of the Sacred
DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE.
287
Irrespective, however, of this higher truth, the proposi
which
tion here set forth has a converse true,
namely, that
the whole is
made for
we have
styled
converse.
its
it,
“
be maintained even on physical grounds. product,” says Kant, “ is that in
and means” that
tually ends
those below
them
is this
is
which
is,
all
An
It
might
organized
the parts are
mu-
not merely in respect to
in the scale, but each severally and re-
ciprocally in respect to
sense
This
the 'parts.
in that case they could not
not the opposite of the other, for
both be true, but, as
also equally
is
all
In a
the rest.
much
higher
true of that organized product so appropriately
by the scholastic name The Universe. Even on may we say, that the whole is as much necessary to make each part what it is, and without which it could not have been what it is, as the parts are styled
physical grounds, then,
for the
completion and harmony of the whole.
It is
chiefly,
however, in a moral point of view that
this
converse doctrine assumes a most glorious and thrilling
in-
There are some seemingly most inconsiderable portions of the creation for which we are assured that all terest.
things are working together for good
Qsdv
IIANTA
So, also,
—ALL
1
:
Corinthians,
iii.,
things are yours
;
IIANTA
21, 22:
whether
rolg ayairtioL rov
Romans,
ovvepyel elg ayaOov.
viii.,
28.
vptiv eoriv
THE WORLD,* or life, ALL are yours — nav-
or death, or the present, or the future,
ra vpcov eonv. There are again, on tj^e other hand, other parts, of no higher rank, for which all things are working together for evil. writers of
“ If nothing else,” says one of the ablest
modern times, “if nothing
give us consequence.”
else, our sins shall
Although the other doctrine
may be
speculatively correct, yet these latter are the views
have the greatest prominence given
The Author of the
to
them
Bible does not intend that
which
in revelation.
man
shall hide
himself in an affectation of insignificance, or cover up his *
Here Koayog must certainly be taken
in its largest sense.
DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE.
288
individualism in what the sentimental humility of his phi-
losophy might style his subserviency to the interests of the universal
we
life.
The
proposition, against the abuse of
are contending, might seem, at
first
which
view, to be ground-
ed on more enlarged and comprehensive notions of existence.
It
has so
much
to
say of the
great'
whole, and of a
kind of Strauss-ian immortality, which belongs rather than to the individual parts. true in a physical aspect
;
It is,
and when
it
to the
race
however, mainly
occupies the mind
alone, or the moral importance of the individual is not held
up as a corrective, ism
it
becomes a cold and speculative
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; a physical fatalism
,
fatal-
in the worst sense of the term,
which would bind both matter and spirit, not by the decrees * of a moral governor, founded on moral reasons, but in the adamantine chain of law viewed as something apart from God.
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
self,
a fatalism
should
in the
it
which would regard even the Deity him-
graciously admit his existence, as included
machinery of the universe.
sesses but
little, if
Such a
doctrine pos-
any, superiority over the creed of the
atheist.
Akin to this is that profession of abstract benevolence which loses sight of individuality in the contemplation of masses or of the great whole, and happiness only as contributing the universe.
This, although
to the it
speculative intellec^, or to those
philosophy,
is
and religious
affects to regard individual
general happiness of
may
be agreeable
whose theology
nevertheless most chilling to affections.
Its
all
at the
but a
the moral
concrete selfishness
hardened and rendered darker, while,
to the
is
same
is
only
time,
it
more and more concealed from the conscience, by the Its false warmth and glow of an abstract benevolence. is
love to
God
is
only a pantheistic rapture, instead of a feel-
ing of gratitude to a personal Redeemer,
man *
is
not that love to oneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s neighbour
Its
affection to
which the Bible en-
This unquestionably was the primitive sense of the word fatum.
DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE. joins,
commencing with the domestic and
from whence, as from a centre,
social relations,
on every
radiates
it
289
side,
ever filling, but never attempting to overflow the limits of its
Those
practical capabilities for good.
of
whom we
are
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; and these declaimers on the greatest good of the numerous â&#x20AC;&#x201D;have really greatest number are becoming speaking
quite
The word
no neighbour, no vicinus no vicinage. ,
gether too narrow in
The
views.
its
individual
meaning
man who
to suit their
fell
among
thieves would
Have been too small and too contiguous an object as can only
aim
promoting some great scheme
at
developments of the race.
them
to
in
for
such
higher
Children, family, home, coun-
which
pant so earnestly and so incessantly for the
Such a philosophical
welfare of being in the abstract.
ology
for
are but fetters to that reforming zeal
try, friends, all
leads
is alto-
expanded
may make
some fancied
the-
a selfish mystic or pantheist, luxuriating vision of universal
good
;
it
may make,
under certain circumstances, a raving fanatic, furious in denunciation in proportion to the self-righteousness of his abstract philanthropy
will produce,
;
but
it
never has produced, and never
an humble, devoted, and warm-hearted Chris-
tian.
Plato does, indeed, teach this doctrine of the parts for the
whole, and qualified
by
we have its
admitted
converse.
it
to
be true
when
rightly
Other writings, however, of our
philosopher, furnish most abundant evidence that he did
hold this converse proposition as equally sound with the
now
which was called forth by the peculiar nature of the objection against which he is here one he
is
contending.
presenting, and
He
tells
the profane scoffer that this Special
Providence will not overlook him, because, though small,
he
is
yet important as a part of the great whole.
When
presenting, however, in other places, the moral aspect of the doctrine, he adopts a very different line of argument.
Poverty, sickness, health,
life,
B
B
death,
ALL THINGS,
he
290
DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE.
tells us,
are for the righteous
man
beloved of Heaven.
language possesses a striking resemblance T<5 de
the Scriptures
:
TA
(bg
ylyveoOai
0EO4>IAEI ov%
olov re dpcora
to
some
Hia
parts of
bpLoXoyrjoopLev
ITAN
Qvrcog dpa vno^Tjnreov
;
Kept tov dmaiov dvdpog edv re ev nevta yiyvrpTai lav rs
ev voootg
ravra
elg
rj
tlvl aAAo) rtiv donovvrcov natitiv
n
dyaOov
reXeyrrioei ££jvtl
fj
teal
tovtgj
•
dnodavovrt.
ovrcovv Tzepi rov adltcov ravavrla rovrcov del dtavoelodac.
Physically , he would teach us,
Republic 613, A., B. ,
is
man
but an atom, subserving the interests of the great whole
morally
,
even a universe of mind and matter,
all things,
working together
;
is
for his individual exaltation or degrada-
Instead of dwindling into the insignificance of an in-
tion.
finitesimal,
he rises in proportion
universe of which he
comes of the
is
to the
magnitude of that
a member, or, in other words, be-
greatest individual importance as a rational
part of the greatest whole.
These apparently opposite yet
strictly consistent
are likewise equally true in science.
The whole
be fully understood without the parts, and
some a
less important, that
a whole, that
sum,
is
is,
priori
it
is
views cannot
an axiom no
knowledge of a whole as
as a unity, and not merely an arithmetical
necessary
to
an understanding of the
parts.
It is
and introaction of such a by the mutual mental synthesis and analysis, that any true progress is action, reaction,
made
in science.
When
either is neglected, or the balance
destroyed, science becomes, on the one hand, an ep,nei-
h aXoyog* an irrational empiricism or evaporates, on the other, into empty a priori speculation. Page 58, Line 5, Ila^ yap larpog nal nag evre^vog drjpuovpyog. The comparison adopted shows that Plato views the doctrine which the present state of his argument re,
quires
him
to
advance, namely, that the parts are
the whole, rather in
its
physical than
* Gorgias, 464,
D
r
its
made
moral aspect.
for It
E
;
DOCTRINE OF PARTS FOR THE WHOLE. is
291
not the KvdEpvrjTrjg the orparrjyog the commander, the ,
,
governor, the pilot
— comparisons so often employed by him and
in illustration of moral
political relations
— but the phy-
whose efforts are directed to the physical perfection of the work in which they are engaged, or that physical harmony which consists in the subserviensician, the artist, all of
to the
cy of the parts
'This
siderations.
of those arts
oXov.
It
is
whole irrespective of any moral conthe order of physical production, and
and sciences that copy from
it
— pipog evena
forms the parts for the whole, and not the whole,
in any sense , for the parts.
Line
6.
npdg to
fcoivq fvvrelvov
(3 eXtlotov.
Stephanus would both read ^vvte'lvcov in refer
it
The common
to the artist.
though the
literal
on the whole, erly has for
to
its
It
may
this place,
and
reading, however, al-
version in English
very harsh, seems,
is
be deserving of preference.
subject the work than the
the example a few lines back
Ast and
It
more prop-
workman
as in
;
— popiov eig to rcdv %vvtelvei.
here be taken with (3eXtlotov
would be freely translated, doeth
9
and the sentence
all things for the
whole in ,
common good that the physical good the good of the machine
respect to that best end which aims at the is,
in this case,
,
or structure as a structure, moral reasons, strictly such, not
The
being here brought into view. carried no farther,
you
;
would be
this
argument, then,
God
:
when
will not overlook
his special providence is ever directed towards you,
because, however insignificant you yourself,
you are wanted
cancy in the great well adapted.
to
structure,
You may
may
be, physically, in
up some place or some vafor which nothing else is so
fill
therefore seem to be laid aside,
—
you are not forgotten his eye is upon you. Line 8. dyvocov onrj to tt pl oe aptOTOV tco ttovtI %vpIt is somewhat uncertain whether apLOTOV baivEi Kal oot.
but
here
is to
i-vudaivei.
be taken with to
izEpl
^vpbalvei however, 9
oe or with tco ttovtI or ,
may
,
be rendered,
to
con
;
292 OBJECTION FROM THE EXTENT OF THE UNIVERSE. good of anything, or to the accomplishment of any purpose without any such qualifying word as apiorov. tribute to the ,
It
makes but
view
we
take of
ing version to
:
or, if
we
and, on the whole,
it,
You
yourself which
own good
difference, in the general sense,
little
are vexed not knowing ,
is best for the
how
good both of
hazard, then, of a
little
that , in relation
whole contributes also
to
your
it
may
to ’thee best
con-
,
we connect dptorov with
^vpbalvec,
be read, not knowing how that which relates tributes to the
what
prefer the follow-
and of thee. At the we would give the fol-
the whole
repetition,
lowing free paraphrase of the substance of the whole passage
the latter part, however, or converse doctrine, being
;
rather implied than expressed, although
it
may
found ia other parts of the Platonic dialogues
:
be clearly Physically,
thou art but an insignificant pebble in the great rcrlopa, or building of the universe (see the comparison of the XlOol
and XtdoAoyoi page ,
55), yet forming a necessary part in
the joinings and compactness of the whole, even absolutely essential to the
whole as a whole, and which the builder
and keeper cannot neglect without risking the ruin of the
whole thee,
:
morally, the great universe
and reciprocally
intended, with
for
each of
its
is
also all
made
rational parts
;
for
was
it
other parts, to have a bearing upon thy
all its
blessedness or misery, according as thou violatest or re-
mainest in concord with
harmony thou
its
moral harmony
shalt ever subserve,
;
whatever
its
physical
may
be thy
condition or thy course.
LII.
drawn from
Atheistic Objection
Page .
59,
Line 6
r .
the
Extent of the Universe.
Hin£p av e^oi Xoyov paor&vr] deoTg
^)v ndvrcdv, TavTy) pot 6okg) (frpa&tv
explaining in what
way
—“
I
think that
I
am
ease in the administration of tho
—
!
OBJECTION FROM THE EXTENT OF THE UNIVERSE. 293 Divine providence
is, may be shown The Epicureans and have been much concerned les‘„
may have
reason, that
be in accordance with reason.”
to
semi-atheists, in all ages,
government of the universe should
the physical and moral
be burdensome
how
it
was unable
Lucretius
to the Deity.
to
He
could consist with the happiness of the Gods.
therefore most reverently relieves
them
see
of all share in so
troublesome a business, and, with pious concern for their ease and quiet, commits the world into the hands of Nature Quae bene cognita
si
:
teneas, Natura videtur
Libera continuo, dominis privata superbis
,
Ipsa sua per se sponte omnia Diis agere expers.
Nam,
pro saneta
Deum
tranquilla pectora pace
Quae placidum degunt aevom, multumque serenum
Quis regere immensi
Indu
manu
summam,
quis habere profundi
validas potis est moderanter habenas?
Quis pariter ccelos omneis convortere, et omneis Ignibus aetheriis terras subfire feraceis
Omnibus inve
omni tempore
locis esse
Nubibus ut tenebras
faciat, ccelique
;
praesto,
serena
Concutiat sonitul turn fulmina mittat, et aedeis Ipse suas disturbet Saeviat,
;
et in deserta
exercens telum
Praeterit,
recedens
quod saepe nocenteis
;
exanimatque indignos, inque merenteis Lucretius
,
1
1089.
lib. ii.,
Horace entertained the same very elevated notions
in re-
gard to -natural laws and the abstraction of the Deity from all
a
the concerns of this world, until he
little
was frightened
unphilosophical piety by happening to hear
der on a clear day.
See Ode xxxiv. of the
first
it
into
thun-
book, com-
mencing Parcus Deorum cultor Insanientis
dum
et infrequens,
sapientiae
Consultus erro
He seems religious
clude?
is
to
fit,
have been brought by his
fright into quite a
and the sentiment with which the ode con-
not only a devout acknowledgment of a special
B
b 2
:
294
EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE.
providence, but
is
expressed in language bearing a striking
some of those many passages in the Bible which speak of depressing the proud and elevating the
resemblance
to
lowly Valet ima summis Mutare et insignem attenuat Deus, Obscura promens bine apicem rapax Fortuna cum stridore acuto :
Sustulit
;
hie posuisse gaudet.
His use, however, of the word Fortuna shows that he could not altogether divest himself of his old atheistic habit, even
when he
Some
attempts to talk religiously.
scientifico-religious
of our
modern
works occasionally exhibit a similar
mixture of the Jew’s language with the dialect of Ashdod.
LIII.
Explanation of a
Difficult
which resolve Morality
and regard
Penal
all
Passage. into
Remarks on
an Obedience
those
Views
Physical Laws,
to
Punishment as Consequential instead of
.
Page
59,
Line
7.
Ei
pev yap
repoq
to oXov
This obscure passage may be thus paraphrased
any Power, having constantly regard only
,
k.
:
“
to the
t. A.
For
whole,
should ever fashion his work by suddenly transforming things
from
—
as, for
example, by forming
—and
should not* proceed by (analyzing)
fire
if
all
once frozen water
at
many
things out of one, or (compounding) one thing out of many,
so that they might thus partake of a
even a third generation
of each displaced arrangement blit
now
* Ast,
a second, and
first,
— in that case, the would be
transformations
infinite in
number
;
(that is, in the actual established course of things)
by taking,
in this place,
tj
for the
common
reading, yy, has
completely changed and perverted the whole meaning of the passage*
;
EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE. there
is
295
a wonderful ease in the administration of the Uni-
versal Guardian.”
We
will proceed to give
what seems
to us the general
sense of the passage, and of what follows tance, before going into
and phrases.
It
seems
some
for
dis-
any particular comment on words be
to
this
that the Divine administration,
most minute
it
the speaker
:
showing
is
even when extended
to the
conducted with ease, in conse-
particular, is
quence of being a special superintendence carried on by
may
general laws or media, whatever they ternal operation of powers
themselves
;
so that there
which he is
lias
be, or
by the
in-
implanted in things
no necessity
for
supposing any
great or general change, or sudden transformation in the state of things
(what would be called,
in
modern phraseol-
ogy, a miraculous interposition), for the rectification of natural or the if it
punishment of moral
evil
— a transposition which,
took place in every case, would call for an infinite
number of changes,
and as mi-
differing in every instance,
raculous as the immediate production of cold water* or ice
we have given vdop e/i'ipvxov. The common readand those who maintain it would render vdop e/iipv-
* In the text,
ing Xov,
is epipvxov,
aquam animatam
to
make any sense
of which they refer us to
the doctrine of Thales and Heraclitus, that water ciple of all things,
and
who
also said
was
something about
into water, being the universal semen.
What
the changes and transformations of matter has,
is told it is
is
and obscure
only verbal.
The
first prin-
fire,
changed
us here about
true,
resemblance to the flowing philosophy of Heraclitus.
semblance
the
some
Still,
little
this re-
would be too far-fetched which the Athenian is la-
illustration
to suit the present place, in
bouring to give his hearers as clear an idea as possible of this
diffi-
would also be giving a sanction to Heraclitus which Plato could never have intended and besides all this, it is very difficult to perceive how it would present any illustration at all of the We therefore altogether prefer the other subject he has in hand. reading, which only requires the change of an accent, and which has some authority of manuscripts in its favour. ’Eju’ipvxov would be a cult position.
It
;
participle of the verb epijjvx «, to cool to freeze, ,
and
may
be taken as
;
296 PUNISHMENT OF from
fire,
HOW FAR CONSEQUENTIAL.
SIN
without any of the intervening generations
thus
;
giving to rational beings no grounds for physical science,
knowledge of the Divine operations, and making every act of Providence, instead of moving in harmony with, tc jar and displace every preceding and temporary arrangeor a
ment.
Instead of
this, as
we
are told in
what
he
follows,
has so constituted things, not by any innate necessities of
own
physical laws, but by his evil will find in
absolute
fiat,
that
good and
themselves, both in this world and in the
pre-arrangements of Hades, their appropriate reward, and will each seek and find
vice will diverge, at
its
proper place and level
first slightly,
namely,
;
from the level plane, and
thence descending with constantly-accelerated velocity /
3dGog ), will find
its
ultimate place in the terrors of
'elg
(
Hades
while virtue, mingling with the Divine nature, will ascend purer region, and through different degrees of blessed-
to a
ness will
at last arrive at a perfectly
holy or separate
state,
totcov ayiov oXov.
This doctrine of it,
is
to the for
Plato,
indeed sublime.
we
one
and the mode
Still, it
in
which he
states
needs a qualification similar
applied to a previous view
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; a qualification
which there may be found abundant support in other where he maintains the strictly
portions of his writings
penal nature of punishment, as in the close of the Gorgias
and the Republic. presented
The
doctrine
which seems
the truth, but not the whole truth.
is
be here
to
Standing
thus alone, and without the corrective influence of any higher views,
it
is
semi-infidels,
a favourite
scheme with many of our modern
who would
resolve
equivalent to the adjective frigidus. thing
more by
it
all
morality into an obe-
We doubt
if
Plato meant any-
than a strong example derived from substances ap-
parently so remote, although capable of passing into each othei
through a succession of physical media and generations. The othei
and more common reading probably arose from some ignorant scriber,
who
did not understand the passage, and to
animatam, appeared more philosophical.
whom
tran-
ÂŁ/u'ipvxov
l
PUNISHMENT OF dience
or a co-operation with, physical laws, and
to,
the partiality with which
at
They
feel that
it
has no terror
away
utterly takes
it
is
the moral
all
are pleased with
it
it
cording
De
some of the
was the
With
,
and
that
power which belongs to At the same time, they
they have merely revived a
fact,
who
old heathen philosophers,
man
great duty and chief end of
nature
to
Finibus
do not wonder
as a wonderful discovery of the nine-
teenth century, when, in
that
all
entertained by such.
for a sinning soul,
the ideas of penalty and retribution.
doctrine of
We
into natural consequence.
punishment
it
HOW FAR CONSEQUENTIAL. 297
SIN
— Vivere secundum naluram.
held
to live ac-
Vide Cicero
,
v., 9.
writers of this stamp
it
is
the whole.
ployed by Plato and Bishop Butler,
em-
only held in sub-
is
it
When
serviency to higher qualifying views of the Divine govern-
ment, with which
we ram
it
would confine the maxim,
allude
ence
to the
;
whom
whereas, in obedi-
law of a higher nature, man
contend with the external world.
to
secundum natu -
vivere
entirely to the nature without us
,
Those
entirely consistent.
is
is
The
often called to
perfection of his
moral being requires that he should often contemn the law of gravitation, and sometimes even submit that most exquisite
handiwork, his body, with
all
ural laws, to be disfigured, ruined,
the flames of martyrdom.
and
rality of nature, it
most wonderful
nat-
there
is
a truth in this
in
mo-
only by refusing to associate with
it is
any higher principle
Still,
its
and utterly broken up
that
such writers convert
it
into a
most pernicious falsehood. So, also,
may we
ishment of sin
is
the physical consequence of sin
found in the Bible. reap.”
“
corruption
He :
admit, that the doctrine, that the pun-
“
What a man
soweth that shall he also ,
that soweth to the flesh , shall
he that soweth
reap everlasting
life.”
also teaches with
itself, is
of the flesh reap
to the Spirit , shall
Revelation declares
of
the Spirit
all this,
but
much more frequency and with more
it
sol-
298 PUNISHMENT OF
emn emphasis,
HOW FAR
SIN
that the
CONSEQUENTIAL.
punishment of sin
in the strictest
is,
â&#x20AC;&#x153;
sense, a penalty pronounced by a sovereign judge.
wicked shall go away into everlasting fire, the devil
and
when they
his
angelsâ&#x20AC;?
The
PREP ARED for
Physical consequences, even
are strictly such,
may be
regarded as but pre-
appointed executioners, deriving their powers, and their
connexion with the
sin,
from no inward necessities, but
God
from the sovereign pre-arrangements of
law of which they may thus form the penalty both in the order of nature and of time, to the natural world.
when
it
The
while the
;
all
is anterior,
the laws of
great absurdity of this scheme,
thus stands alone, consists in this, that
it
the
is
penalty which creates the sin.
because
men
it
will be followed
It is wrong to eat too much, by a pain in the stomach and ;
are punished with a pain in the stomach, because they
have been guilty of a breach of the pain, and
you remove the
self to feel that to a
its
Remove
physical law.
Can any one bring him-
sin.
anything like this would be true in regard
breach of the law of charity, or that malevolence would
change
its
moral character, though
an eternity of pleasure
?
it
could be followed by
If the violation of a physical law
proceeds from a disposition to contemn a
known
ment of God, whatever may have been the arrangement,
it
arrange-
object of that
belongs to another department, and must be
transferred to a tribunal higher than the natural. It is
by overlooking the nature of punishment as
retributive, notwithstanding the
mode
of
its infliction,
this doctrine of consequential suffering strips the
law of infidels
all its
that
Divine
majesty, and becomes such a favourite with
and neologists. There
employed, as
strictly
it
qualifications to
sometimes
is
is
no terror in
even in the
it
pulpit,
which we have adverted,
its
;
and when
without the
immediate
ef-
and stupefaction of the conscience, rather than any alarm or true conviction of sin. There is, however, no inconsistency in the belief of both views. The punishment
fect is ease
PUNISHMENT OF SIN IIOW FAR CONSEQUENTIAL. 299 inflicted
by human government would be no
utive penalty of positive law, although
less the retrib-
preordained
its
ar-
rangements were such, that the path of every transgressor
was
literally
beset with snares, or that
it
finally brought
him, without arrest or the aid of the executioner, directly to the prison or the gallows.
Page
59,
Line
npog to oXov del pXenuv
7.
There
continually to the whole.” tive assertion.
is
— “ Looking
implied here a nega-
equivalent to saying, “ and having no-
It is
The meaning seems
thing else in view.”
to be, that the
process here mentioned might perhaps be adopted,
gard was had tion to the
to the parts, as parts, or
whole.
if
no
re-
except in their rela-
In that case, the Divine administration
might perhaps proceed by these sudden transformations.
each act of Providence avast number of purposes,
But as
in
direct
and
collateral, are to
be kept in view, and no one
be effected by disturbing or displacing another, there
to is
need of an arrangement that shall be carried on by media, so that one move on the great chess-board (see note 6, p. 59)
may accomplish many
ends, instead of requiring separ-
ate transpositions in every case.
The
philosopher evidently perceives a great difficulty
tending any explanation that can be given.
We
at-
can never,
perhaps, fully understand the harmonious connexion be-
tween a providence carried on by general laws, operating, in the main, with uninterrupted regularity, and a minute attention to those individual cases which may be made the subjects of special prayer and special judgments. It be-
same
class of mysterious truths, and presents
same apparent
contradictions, as the doctrine of the Di-
longs to that the
vine foreknowledge or foreordination,
nexion with the freedom of the goodness,
ence of
when
evil.
human
when viewed
in con-
will, or of the
Divine
attempted to be reconciled with the exist-
Why
should
rights of reason in religion,
men
be so clamorous for the
when,
in so
many
cases, she
,
300 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN dvd)Xe0pOg AND herself declares her
own
aubviog.
insufficiency as the highest lesson
she can teach us, and delivers us over, either
skep-
to total
by which we receive truths apparently opposed, or whose point of connexion is beyond our radius of mental vision because, without this, we must give up other truths which our moral nature can only yield ticism, or to that faith
;
at the price of total
to
darkness on
most concerns us
all that
know.
LIV. The
Word
’A vtiXedpog as distinguished from Aluviog.
Re-
markable Passage in the Timceus.
Page
60, Line 3. avddXeOpov de ov yevopevov aXX’ ovu
There
aicjviov.
is
intended here an important distinction
between alibvtov and av&XeQpov.
which
is in its
The
former means that
very nature eternal, not subject, in any
to generation or
decay, and, in
fact,
sensfe,
having no reference
to
%povog, or time regarded as proceeding by succession.
of time as given in the Timceus, 37, E., and remarks upon it, page 223.) ? A v&XeQpov, on the other (
See
the definition
hand, suggests, from
its
composite, although,
when used without
be applied
to that
etymology, the idea of something
which
It signifies indestructible,
is
precision,
it
may
possessed of a higher nature.
not in
itself,
but because the thing
of which it is predicated is upheld and maintained in being by the Supreme Power, and thus rendered capable of en-
during through an endless succession, although never ly ald)VLov or eternal in Ast, has respect
He would tuation
:
to
essence.
Kara vopov $eoi,
aluviov alone, and not
to
says
av&XeOpov.
read according to the following order and punc-
i/jvftTjv teal
Kadtinep ol
its
strict-
ocbpa, avibXedpov yevopevov,
ov,
Kara vopov ovreg deoi, aiibvtov — indestructible
yet not eternal as the
,
Gods
are.
This contrast between
•:
REMARKABLE PASSAGE FROM THE TIM^IUS.
301
Gods and men seems plausible, and yet we are satisfied wrong. Our opinion is founded upon that passage of the Timaeus, in which the Eternal Father thus ad-
that Ast is
whom
dresses the inferior deities to
0 eol
he had given being
drjpcovpyog, narrjp re epycov,
tietiv, G)v eyd)
a
yevopeva dXvra epov ye deXovrog. to pev ovv ,
,
uav Xvtov. to ye
prjv tcaXtig
,
eOeXeiv, Hanoi). 6l
pev ovn
9
a
yeyevifoOe
oeoOe ye, ovde rev^eode Zavarov poipag
BOYAHDE£22
pei^ovog
reg, erceivov olg ore
Gods, of
whom
ite)
their existence
will
I
,
which
is
(or
:
dfj
XvOrj -
TH2 ’EMHS
,
tevpiorepov Xa^ov-
—
“
Ye Gods
of
the Father, as of
from me, are indis(or
compos-
nevertheless, to choose to
well harmonized, and works well,
is
For which reasons, and since
the part of an evil being.
ye were made
deOev
’A0ANATOI
Everything bound
it.
capable of dissolution
is
dissolve that
teal
Maker and
the
works which, deriving soluble as long as
deopov
eyiyveode cvvedeloOe
am
I
en
dr)
epov
dppooOev aal e%ov ev Xvetv
teal eneiirep
ovd’ aXvroi to Tzapirav. ovrt pev
£(7T£,
6l ’
had a beginning of your existence), ye
are not immortal (in yourselves), nor in every respect indissoluble.
Still,
ye
doom
experience the
shall not be dissolved, nor shall
of death, partaking,
IN
MY
ye
WILL,
more powerful than those things by which ye were bound (or of which ye were comof a bond of
posed)
That
life
when ye
is,
stronger and
received your being.”
the permanence of
all
Timceus, 41, A.
created things, from the
highest to the lowest, rests on the moral attributes of the Deity. all
In his goodness they have a stronger bond than in
the laws or necessities of nature and of things.
On this
depends the continued existence not only of man, but of Gods,
or, in
the
more sublime language of Scripture, of
Thrones, Dominions, Principalities, and Powers.
Kara vopov (
ovreg Qeoc
fatum ) on which
:
According
their existence
depended.
the similar expression, page 61, line 7
C
c
to the
:
decree or fate
Compare, also
tiara ttjv rrjg eipap
;
;
:
302 GREEK WORDS FOR ETERNITY, pevyg
AND
ald)VLOg
This confirms the view
t&I-lv nal vojjlov.
.
we have
They were dependent on
taken above in respect to $eof. this iaw,
ai(OV
and not on any innate immortality.
has about the same meaning with
[iolpa,
No^o^* here
which, according
more ancient creed of the Greeks, meant simply
to the
we
This,
Divine decree.
are prepared to show, is
the
its sig-
Homer, and not a physical fate, as many connal ocbpa are to be taken colThe wor^s
nification in
tend.
lectively for all animated beings
The
thus constituted.
continued existence of soul and body, severally or united,
whether
any one
in the present state or in
pendent on the Eternal Father,
who
to
come,
de-
thus represented as
is
speaking in this sublime passage from the Timaeus
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;who
aluviog in the highest sense of that epithet,
alone
is strictly
or, as
the Apostle declares,
aQavaotav
is
1
Timothy
,
vi.,
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;who alone hath immortality
16, 6 pbovog
.
LV. The Greek Words for Eternity Ald)V
is
compounded of 9
lib. i., c. ix., 10).
A el,
A ld)v
,
and
A Icbvcog.
del cov (see Aristotle
ever, is
from
aco, deco,
,
De
Coelo,
or drjpt , sig-
nifying, primarily, to blow, to breathe, secondly, to live, to v
pass or spend time. life, to
A(o seems also related to
Homer
in the general sense of existence. in the
verb
is
uses
ao
or aeo)
second of the above meanings, as in the Odyssey,
151, and
iii.,
dlo), to feel
from whence some would derive alcbv
be conscious
490:
v
EvOa
6s vvnr
9
aeoav.
Because
this
thus used, in several places in the Odyssey, in con-
nexion with vv%, some lexicographers absurdly render it to It is, however, only thus employed, because by sleep .
becomes a matter of distinct observation and consciousness more than by day. Hence, as the context shows, it is generally used of wake-
night the flow or succession of time
ful
and anxious nights
GREEK WORDS FOR ETERNITY, aiuv AND
N v/cra
pev deaauev, xaherr a cppsalv oppatvovreg. Odyssey
â&#x20AC;&#x2122;Ael,
from
303
al&VLOg.
this derivation,
151.
iii.,
,
would present the idea of
contin-
uous being, of a going on, or succession ; and as a particle of time, is ever used of that which is boundless or undefined
;
not so
much
that
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
which cannot be bounded as that which which is not attempted to be defined, but
is
not bounded
is
always considered as going on, on, on.
would not express the
alone,
true idea of eternity but only ,
This flowing word must be
of endless or unbounded time.
connected with, and, as
more
stability
;
it
were, anchored upon another of
since stability and fixedness enter into the
This other word
essential idea of eternity.
ple of that verb of existence
sophical sense, the highest
compound, then, chains
it
to
â&#x20AC;&#x2122;A et, therefore,
is
mode
in its philo-
One
of being.
boundless and unconfined
an eternal present,
part of the
the other
;
since dov
or, rather,
tenses, altogether excludes the idea of time.
the
the partici-
is
which expresses,
It is
of
is
all
thus that
Greek term approaches as near the true notion of it is in the power of language to bring us.
eter-
nity as
Although the human mind idea it
which
may
alcdv
aims
may
to express, still
exist, sufficient, at least, to
take in
to
fail
all that
an apprehension of
convince us that
con-
it
tains nothing unreal, but has a solid foundation in the truth
of things.
We may
approach
it
by negatives.
Aidov
is
not
bounded or endless. It is not the opposite of time, but that of which xpo vo Si or time, in our present state, is the moving image. page 223, ( See remarks
time long or short,
,
and ly
the comparison there referred to.)
be said
be the opposite of
to
It
may more
tcaipog, or
upoonatpog
ing thus used by the Apostle, 2 Corinthians
such a
way
as to exclude
in that place.
It is
all cavil
as to
proper-
its
,
iv.,
18,
;
be-
and in
extent, at least
there the direct antithesis of temporal
or temporary.
However
difficult
it
may
be for beings
who can only
304 GREEK WORDS FOR ETERNITY,
aUxOV
AND
ClloVLOg.
think in a series, to form a conception of that which necessarily excludes succession of thought,
driven,
by the clearest decisions of
we
are nevertheless
which
that reason
often
goes where the conceptive faculty cannot follow, to affirm that this is the state in
the Divine mind.
have
which
If to this
we
We
perfect definition.
its
things must be present to
all
apply the term
may
although utterly unable to comprehend
ity,
of time
alcov,
be certain of it.
we
its real-
The
idea
connected with an imperfection necessarily be-
is
longing to our present state, namely, an inability to enter-
mind more than one thought at once. This gives rise to what is called the succession of ideas, constituting the measure of time and this succession we apply
tain in the
;
even
to those truths
have no relation fect.
which, as reason plainly assures us,
to time or the
sequences of cause and
ef-
Nothing, on these abstruse points, could be more sat-
and definition, to which which may be found Timceus
isfactory than Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s comparison
we have
before referred, and
,
37, E.
Almost
all
our difficulties on the subject of endless being,
and especially endless future punishment,
arise from con-
sidering eternity, or alcov, as time infinitely prolonged, as end-
This addresses
less succession or duration.
itself to the
imagination or conceptive power rather than to the reason,
and hence
this
weak
under the attempt
faculty of the soul faints
to realize
and staggers
what, as a conception of the
But the whol-e subject pre-
sense, never can be realized.
sents itself under quite a different aspect
when we
regard
the future state not as the beginning of a prolonged period,
having nity its
its
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; as
own
past and future, but as a transition into eter-
a condition differing not merely in degree, but in
When
the
which now represents
all
very nature, from the present world of time.
revolving mirror
of Chronos,
things in motion, has ceased
spect to the whole or each
its
man
revolutions, either in re-
individually, the landscape
GREEK WORDS FOR ETERNITY, of eternity, with as
AND
ald)VLOg.
becomes
all its fearful states,
ever had been
it
ald)V
in experience,
and motionless
in reality, fixed
305
—
cuzlvt]-
ra dperdozara, del Kara ravrd e^ovra. There will be no endless succession of years and periods, which, in ev,
ery
mind to grasp them, only present, over and the same difficulties of comprehension, and, in-
effort of the
over again,
stead of a true idea give rise only to a painful* and imper,
“ For days, and nights, and
fect conception of the sense.
months, and years, and Plato, “
all
other successions of time,” says
were not before the heaven
The
existed.
present, and the future are but temporal forms,
past, the
which we
ignorantly and incorrectly attribute to the eternal ovaca or ,
For
essence. (
eon )
we
say was, and
and
is,
will be,
be belong to that flowing yeveoig, or generation, in time. is,
which
exists
For they are motions ( mvijaecg ), but the eternal
in respect to these,
older,
when IS
alone pertains to aeonian being, while was and will
immoveable
having no past and no future”
never younger, never
;
—to 6
e del
Kara ravra
e\ov aiavrjrog, ovre npeodvrepov, ovre ve&repov ylyveodai ttote
,
irpoarjUSL
ovds yeyovevat, ovd’ eloavdcg eoeoOai
Timceus, 38, A.
Change and succession may be
said to form the predom-
inating characteristics of the present flowing
world.
In eternity,
all is
just the reverse.
language derived from the old Ionic problem,
There,
to
use
all things will
which are seen are temporal, probationpreparatory ( Ttpoonaipa ). The things which are un-
stand. ary,
The
phenomenal
things
seen are eternal (alwwa), sion.
The word ahov
* In nothing
is this
is
more
fixed,
immutable, without succes-
undoubtedly used in the Greek than in the efforts some-
fully realized
times made by preachers and others to convey what they call an idea of eternity; as, for example, from an ocean of drops, or the
space of the solar system
filled with grains of sand, and those mulby myriads and millions of centuries. By such immensities of numbers the mind is wearied and exhausted, but never brought a
tiplied
hair’s breadth nearer the object at
C
which
c 2
it
aims.
— 306 GREEK WORDS FOR ETERNITY, poetry in the indefinite sense of
being
;
where
ald)V ^
is
aid)ViOg.
existence, or state of
life,
and there are also some passages it
ND
in the Scriptures
taken figuratively in a lower signification of age
or dispensation, although even these are grounded on the
higher and radical import
but this
;
we
affirm with confi-
dence, that the restorationist can derive no aid from these
specimens of Platonic usage, and, in
more
opposed
utterly
to all his
fact,
views of change, reforma-
We
the eternal state.
tion, or restoration in
nothing could be
conclude with
a definition of alcov, derived from the high authority of Aristotle.
It
contains more reference to succession than that
of Plato, but yet limit the
directly in the
is
meaning of
this illimitable
way
of
all
He
word.
attempts to
speaking
is
of the super-celestial, or extra-mundane state, and what-
ever
we may
think of
its
can be no doubt
reality, there
about the force of the Greek terms by which he attempts to “ Time,” he says, “ is the number of motion, set it forth. but above the heaven
There, there
exist.
change, but
is
it
has been shown that time cannot
no growing
immutable,
all is
the best and most satisfying
TapKeGTdrrjv ), continues for
va )
;
and
name
this its
life
impassible, and having
(fa)fjv
apioTrjv nal tt)v av-
all eternity
is divinely
cients ('detcog EtyOeynraL
napa
(tov aixavra aiti-
declared
to
us from the an-
For
rtiv apxatcov).
which contains the period of each existence alcjv
(
,
or definition
tcard
is
end
that
called
its
same reason tov avrov Xoyov nal to tov navrog
cevum age or being). ,
any
old, neither is there
all is
According
to the
,
ovpavov reXog, nal to tov navTCOV aneipov xpovov nal
tt)v
ansiplav irepisxov TeXog, ’AIS2N egtiv, duo tov ’AEI ’EI-
NAI
eiXr)(j)d)g
which
tt\v
err covvpiav,
aOavaTog nal delog
constitutes the enclosing limit of the
or universe, that
which embraces
—
— that
whole heaven
the infinite period ,
and
the
of all things that is alcov ETERNITY, taking its name from EVER BEING, immortal and divine.” Arist.,
infinity
De
Coelo, lib.
i.,
c. ix., 10.
,
Compare,
also,
The Laics
,
iv.,
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FREEDOM OF THE WILL. 307 715, P., where Plato speaks of the Eternal Justice, which
always follows as an avenger of crimes committed against the Divine
law
(
rov &eiov vopov npopog), and in com-
menting on which the scholiast thus defines the word n epi7TopEvop,evog
namely, to aiovlcog
,
Kara ra avra
*
rj
yap
irepi(j)Opd
— to
’A el (boavrog
ttai
rovro
LYI. Plato’s Doctrine of the
nexion with the
Freedom of the Willy viewed in Conof Cause and Effect in Nature
Law
.
M eprjxdvrjrat
Page
60,
Line 11
“
He
devises this in reference to the whole, namely,
r. A.
—
.
nav rovro
Trpog
6rj
,
k.
what kind of a situation everything which becomes of a certain quality must receive and inhabit.” That is, the itoiorr\g or quality
which,
in the course of generation,
assumes, must determine the quality of
The
anything
habitation.
its final
establishment and enforcement of this law
God has
reserved to himself as his peculiar prerogative, while, as
own
are told in the following sentence, he has left to our wills,
rag alriag
rr\g
yeveoeug rov
of becoming such or such.
ttolov rivog
we
—the causes
(See note 10 page 60 .) ,
In
other words, he has so ordered the course of nature, by a sort of pre-established this law,
sentiment
is
is left to
much
cannot find
and the doctrine
free,
tian
constantly enforces
and in
because
the freedom of our
binding nature fast in
Left free the
fallen,
it
is
fault
human
its
wills.
:
fate,
will.
with this in the heathen Plato,
undoubtedly true of
that primitive state it
own
about the same with that of Pope
And
We
that
while the power of becoming the subjects of
rewards or penalties
The
harmony,
was one with the
when
man viewed his will
will of God.
theology, however, does require us
to
as un-
was
The
truly
Chris-
modify the prop-
;
308 PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FREEDOM OF THE WILL. osition as regards our present condition,
some way, man by the
in
although
that, therefore,
which
choices of objects before
above
tion, rise
it
may
man may
be free in
to
can never, by any escape
its
effect, until a stronger
shall interpose for its deliverance
sick
be said
still it
it,
and
all
words on
voli-
adaman-
and perfect freedom.
turn from side to side upon his
its
than nature
The
weary couch,
but he cannot rise, take up his bed, and walk.
exercise
nature
to
has a wide prison-house within
this state of nature, or
tine chain of cause
to believe that,
subjected his will
fall
it
and where
to rove,
and
We
kinds of choices (a term which in the
may
strife
of
many have confounded with will) which we have fallen, be holy, to love God with all our souls,
this subject so
within the limits of the sphere into but
and
we
cannot will to
If the Scriptures
to live to his glory.
on the
subject,
ence that
it is
we may
were not clear
so plainly a matter of personal experi-
well wonder how, in the light of an awa-
kened conscience or consciousness, there could be any room for cavil about
There
is
it.
no doubt, however, that Plato was rather Pe-
lagian on this great question
which show that there were very great
his
cited
x.,
although places could be
mind was
difficulties
We may
could take of the matter. that is here
;
advanced more
unsettled,
and that
attending any view he find this
same doctrine
fully set forth in the Republic,
617, P., where, after a long argument, in which he in-
troduces that wild mythical legend respecting the Destinies,
Lachesis, Clotho, and Atrope, he concludes in the following most concise and remarkable manner pcjv Xr\^erai dA/l’ vfieig daiptova atprjoeoOe 7totov
•
atria eAoptevov
from control
:
*
deog
selves imply blame),
God
is
•
Ov% vpag
:
dai-
aperr) 6e ddecr-
avairtog — “ Virtue
the fault is in the chooser
less,” or, rather (since avairtog
:
God
is
is
free
blame-
and atria do not in them-
not concerned in the causation
of sin or the production of virtue.
Notwithstanding
this.
7
:
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FREEDOM OF THE WILL. 309 there
are several striking passages in
in the present state of
its
attainment
hopeless with-
is
As, for example, in the Meno, 99, P.
out the Divine aid.
’Aperi) ovv dv
man,
which he asserts,, gift, and that,
Divine
without qualification, that virtue is a
ovre (pvoet ovre dcdatcrov dXXd deia
elrj
— “ Wherefore ,
poipa Trapaycyvopevrj olg dv TrapayiyvrjTcu virtue
would be neither by nature nor by science or teachby a Divine gift, bestowed upon those by whom it
ing, but is
So, also, a few sentences below, to the
possessed.”
same
Nothing can be clearer
(Meno, 100, B.)
effect.
than this declaration, and yet,
same
other parts of that
when we
dialogue,
it is
take into view
extremely
difficult to
determine what he really thought about the cause and
Whether it was by nature, by ence, or directly from God, were questions to which mind often reverts, and which he seems never to have
source of true virtue.
The
isfactorily solved.
student
may
great length in the Protagoras. (lib. vi.),
where he
is led to
picture of human depravity,
the acquisition of virtue sistance. ist”
“
Do you
— by which he
moral philosophy
— “ do
is
find
his sat-
discussed
it
at
In the Republic, again
draw as strong as possible
he declares most expressly
a
that
impossible without the Divine as-
think,” says Socrates, “ that
means one of the ancient
who
sci-
undertook
any soph-
lecturers on
teach virtue for pay
to
you think that any sophist, or any instructions of
private persons, can control or even withstand such an in-
fluence for evil
No
?
one
only be evidence of folly.”
;
yea, even to attempt
most solemn and impressive manner ovre yeyovev ovre ovv ttjv rrapa rijv
prj yevrycai
:
would
it
And then he concludes
in this
Ovre yap yiyverat
aXkolov
tovtcov 'natdelav. avOpcbneiov
rjOog ,
cb
,
npog ape-
eralpe
*
del-
ev yap XP?1 eldevai o ri nep dv ooO^j re ual yevryrai olov del ev roiavr \ naraoraoei Qeov polpav avro oCdo at Xeycov ov aanCdg epelg “ For it neither is the
ov e^aipcb Xoyov
.
,
—
case, nor has been, nor ever can be, that
,
any character
(or
310 PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FREEDOM OF THE WILL state of soul) should
undergo a change
to virtue in opposi-
At least
tion to the corrupt training of these influences.
my
nothing human,
the Divine
;
For we may be well assured
count.
who
truly
friend
asserts that
ces, is saved,
if
lay out of the ac-
I
that
he speaks most
anything, under such circumstan-
and becomes such as
dispensation alone hath saved
ought
it
to be, a
Republic
it.”
vi.,
,
Divine 493, A.
same passage he pronounces the case absolutety desperate eav firj rig avry /3orjdrjoag detiv tvxV “ unless some God should come to the aid of the In another part of this
—
—
Repub.,
soul.”
Surely,
492, A.
vi.,
human
be a true picture of
if this
nature,* Plato
may
be justly charged with inconsistency, yet no greater
than
many have
manifested on this subject
the higher light of revelation.
how can
correct,
How
virtue be
If
who
possessed
these representations be
said to be without restraint
?
many impediments, to no accountability when these
can that be free which has so
say the least?
If there is
impediments are supposed utterly of the will,
why
not this
is
when they
pro rata
same
surmount the strength
to
accountability diminished
exist in a less degree, although falling ? and how, then, can we avoid more vicious the disposition, and,
short of an absolute inability
the conclusion, that the *
There
most remarkable declaration of Thucydides on the depravity, which is the more worthy of attention, because it comes from one who, without any philosophical or religious theory, was as cool and keen an observer of human nature as subject of
is
a
human
ever lived.
“
the nature of
It is
man
to sin (says this sagacious his-
and private. No law can restrain him from All modes of punishment have been exhausted in the attempt.”
torian) both in public it.
Lib.
iil,
45.
And
again, in the
Kal nokkfjg svijOetag,
npoOvpwg deivtp
tl npa^ai,
— “To speak
simplicity for
bang
same
section
anoTponrjv riva e^etr,
plainly, it’is impossible
any one
to
suppose
that,
rj
an k&g
;
vopiov
and
it is
when human
eagerly to the attainment of any gratification, either by force of
:
re,
advvarov
,
olerat , Trig avdpaneiag tyvaeog oppcdpivrjg
law or any penalty, however
it
rj
ok k(p
T(p
a proof of great
nature rushes
can be turned aside
fearful.”
PLATONIC DOCTRINE OF THE FREEDOM OF THE WILL. 311 consequently, the more
the practice of virtue, the
difficult
and the nearer an approach
less the degree of guilt,
to a
state of perfect innocence.
Jacob Zimmerman, in his
tract
Be
Proestantia Religionis
Christiana collata cum Philosophia Socratis, finds fault with
a Bivine gift and thinks
this doctrine that virtue is
that, in
,
the contest of Socrates with the sophist Protagoras, on the
question whether virtue could be taught, the latter has great-
He
ly the advantage.
with leading
also charges the views of Socrates
while he seems
to licentiousness,
to
regard
his most corrupt antagonists as the friends of the public
morals qui
Et hac ratione Socrates vel
:
jam
vitiis
invitus efiecit, ut
Nihil enim libentius ejusmodi homines audiunt,
summam
quae
sunt tate
ita
;
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
gift
of
God
is
inferri
posse putant in sua potes-
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; should be it
;
charged with licentiousness
has thus been characterized in
men themselves
cian sophists with
death
but
it
Vide Amcenitates Lit -
substantially the declaration that virtue is the
surprising, since
even by
ea,
That the doctrine of Bivine grace
erarice , vol. xi., p. 187.
such
quam
difficultatem in virtuti colenda probare pos-
enim necessario
situm haud esse virtutem sequi.
for
illi
immersi sunt aliquod presidium inde caperent.
all
not
is
ages,
as utterly corrupt as those Gre-
whom
Socrates contended even unto
certainly is a matter of exceeding wonder,
that a professed Christian writer should censure that very sentiment in
which, of
the nearest to the Bible.
all
others,
him
for
he approaches
See some of these questions most
acutely argued in Ciceroâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s treatise
worthy of an attentive perusal,
De
if for
Fato,
s. v., vi.
no other reason,
It is
to
see
how very
similar, in all ages, have been the discussions which have arisen on these most ancient queries respect-
ing fatalism, causality, co-causes, conditions, moral agency,
and the freedom of the
will.
Jonathan Edwards himself
does not distinguish with more keenness than Cicero and the persons referred
to.
whose opinions he has introduced
in the tract
:
312
EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE.
Page
61, L. 6. ev eavrolg ne/crrjpeva tt)v rr\g per aboXrjg
airiav — “Possessing
That still
is,
in
themselves the cause of change.”
without, or to the exclusion of external causes, yet
not, as those
maintain
ning power of the
will,
who
contend for the self-determi-
without being under the law of cause
and effect existing within
them
;
the cause being the inter-
nal result of their present state at any one time, or the com-
bined sum and product of
all
the influences, from within
and from without, then existing in ual,
their physical, intellect-
and moral constitution, and the
one
effect being the
which the laws of our minds compel must result from it. So Cicero, De Fato, s.
single following state
us to affirm xi.
:
Sic
quum
sine causa
animum moveri
dicimus, sine ex-
terna causa moveri, non omnino sine causa dicimus. ,
LVIT. Explanation of a Difficult Passage.
Page 61, Line 8. There is a good deal
opiKporepa, pev rtiv
i]d gjv,
k.
t. a.
of difficulty about this sentence, and
we think a very good sense may be made of the common reading, without resorting to those conjectural emenda-
yet
which some commentators would propose. The ver^ sions of Ficinus and Cornarius both proceed upon the idea that the main contrast is between opucporepa pev and nXeio de, which view, it must be confessed, seems to have appearances strongly in its favour. Neither translator, howYiger ever, adheres to the Greek text as it now stands. proposes amendments grounded upon the same view of the He would read eXarro) pev nai ducatorepa that passage. it might be more directly opposed to ttXelg) teal adiK&repa, just below. Ast thinks there is no need of any other change than to expunge eXarro, and would render as follows tions
,
Quae minus depravata sunt, ea per untur, quae vero in
terrae
planitiem ingredi-
majorem depravationem inciderunt
in
;
EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE. profundum, &c., detruduntur.
seems
It
to
313
however,
us,
removed by regarding the main contrast as intended between opuiporepa pev and pel^oov 6 e five or six lines below, and a subordinate contrast between that almost all difficulty is
eXarro) and
ttXsig)
We
tie.
eXarr 6), and regard
a..
would place a comma
after
pev as implied in connexion with
it
the omission being nothing strange, seeing that the particle
mark the main antithesis. In this pera6dXXovra is to be taken with eXar-
had just been used
view of the matter, to),
to
and there will also be a contrast of degree between
participle
and peraTreadvra
the former, from
;
its
this
being in
the present tense, implying a slight beginning of a change, either for
good or
descent.
~Elg is to
evil
the latter, a more sudden and rapid
;
be taken with peranopeveraL understood
as though repeated, and not with perarcEGovra
In this
.
view, eXarrcOj instead of being required to be expunged,
becomes an important word, and the only real defect in the sentence is a mere want of verbal symmetry in having nothing to correspond to aduuhrepa, together with the harsh,
ness which tcl.
On
is felt in
connecting this word with peraixeGov-
the other view,
uporepa tg)v
i]Q(x)v
it is
can be made
depraved as the phrase
is
,
and Ast. is
we
to
was most
mean
those
who are
less
to their version is, that there
can contrast pel^cov
the whole following context
antithesis
opc-
regarded by Ficinus, Cornarius,
Another objection
nothing with which
when
how
not easily explained
shows
certainly intended.
can only be effected by regarding
it
below,
'ipvxv
that a very strong
This,
we
think,
as in opposition to opi-
Kporepa, tgjv rjOojv, a phrase equivalent to opiKporepa or ol exovreg opiKpoTEpa,
rfO?],
and which
we would
synonymous with what Plato elsewhere (pvoLg, the small nature the less marked or er as
,
styles
rfO?],
consid-
opwpa
inferior char-
acter or habit of soul, in distinction from the psi^cov ipyx^i
;
neither expression in itself implying depravity, but, on the
other hand, each including the good as well as the bad.
D
D
314
EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE.
With these preliminaries, we proceed to state the order of the whole passage, according to the view above taken, enclosing in brackets the implied words which are essential to a full interpretation
eXarrco
\jpsv~\
6 s perarcsGovra
ttXslo)
paOog [peTaTTOpeveTCu] rd re Kairiag
there
may
rj
deemed
opiKporepa pev tojv
7] 0 d)v,
psrabdXXovra^ peranopeverat Kara to
X<-opag entnedov ,
'ipvX'h
:
teal
itaro), n. r. X.
onorav psraXdb 37,
dpsrr]g
be given the following free
rrjg
d6tKd)repa, sig
—
psc^cov 6s
6rj
Of which “ The translation k. t. X.
:
smaller natures, to wit, those possessed of none of the greater traits of soul, whether for good or evil, undergoing less change, or as long as they undergo less change, pro-
ceed with a
slight deviation
(change being implied in psra)
along the apparently level plain of cline
more
rapidly,
but
;
when they
de-
and with greater degrees of wickedness
metaphor being carelessly
(the
life
lost sight of in
aduuorepa),
they change their course (slg fiaOog) into a steep descent,
commonly spoken of as being below, which, under the name of Hades, men fear and dream about, &c. but as for the greater soul, whenever it parand
to those regions
;
takes of vice or virtue, by the exercise of
by association, &c.
— such
we
a soul,
mingling with the Divine excellence,
markable degree
similar,
makes a
its
own
will or
say, whenever, it
becomes
by
in a re-
transition, also, into a
surpassingly holy place, being continually carried into another
still
better region
ferring the seat of
contrary abode.”
its
;
when
but
contrariwise, then trans-
life in a contrary direction
From ooa
to
ouparuv
and
inclusive,
to a
may be
regarded as a parenthetical clause, explanatory of ra narco tojv roucov.
In the second
member
of the principal antith-
had there been preserved a perfect correspondence, we should have had psc^G) 6 s rtiv rjOtiv from some idea esis,
;
mind of a transcriber probably arose the rj, other reading preferred by Ast, namely, pst^co 6s 6rj i/> &c. In this way, sXdrrco (/i£F) and tcXsig) 6s indicate two
of wdiich in the
— 315
EXPLANATION OF A DIFFICULT PASSAGE. different stages in the course of those
repa
7] 0 r]
the
:
denoted by opiKpo-
a gentle deviation, almost level, and
first,
second, a rapid descent.
the
therefore
called ettctte6ov
There
also a great propriety in the use of the present
is
pera6d?i?iOVTa
,
;
which Ast would change
while or as long as they undergo less change.
aorist
,
,
In the words entnedov and j3a6og there
may
An
and which he so frequently employs. be compared
is first
to the three
grows
be one of
evil
course
dimensions of magnitude.
It
a mere point, then extends itself into a line, then
spreads out into superficial space into the
length, breadth, table
may
which Plato was so very
those geometrical allusions of fond,
second
into the
solid
(
Eninedov ), and,
dimensions of iniquity
and depth
;
that
was not
it
—a
in the
finally,
all
theii
and immu-
in the fixed
is,
condition of the sinful nature
Plato would admit that
in
from which power of the will
state
to return.
There
are, in a critical point of view, several defects
about both
members
contrasts.
It
of this antithesis and the subordinate
however,
is,
better to admit that Plato
far
sometimes writes carelessly than jectural emendations.
gests a similar thought from the Republic rrjv dpLOrrjv
diraXX&TTEiv
many
hazard so
to
The whole passage :
con-
strongly suge^el
6fj
Xoyov ,
(pvav kv aXXorpLCOTEpa ovoav Tpocpy, Kamov r?jg
(pavXyg
— Kal
rag
'ijjvxag
rag EV(pvEOT&-
rag KaKijg Traidayoytag rvxoverag diacpEpovroig KaKag yiyvEoOat — “
,
,
It is
reasonable to suppose that the best nature,
being in a condition adverse to
worse than the meaner
turns out
its ;
proper development,
and that the most high-
ly-gifted souls, partaking of evil instruction,
ingly wicked.” is
Republic,
vi.,
equivalent to opiKporepa
^avXrj
491, D.
rjdrj
become
in the
surpass-
'ipvx'f]
here
passage before us.
where the
simi-
larity of the expression tends greatly to confirm the
view
Compare,
we have
also, the Republic, vi., 495, B.,
here taken
:
OfUKpa de
(j>voig
ovdeva ovte 16 l(x)tt]v ovte ttoXiv dpa.
ovdsv psya ovdenors
GREEK WORD HADES,
316 After
all,
however,
little difficulty
it
must be confessed that there
Had
about the passage.
the
first
is
no
member
of
the principal antithesis been double, like the second, or had it
two
specified
distinct courses in opposite directions,
we
should have had no doubt about the correctness of the ver-
we have
sion
plied,
and thus opacporepa
vice both, as well as
ing at
however,
a view,
may
rjdrj
may
second member
meaner
in respect to the
;
nature, be-
so slight as not to call for the distinction
first
be im-
be taken of virtue and
in the
j
way,
the change either
in the
Such
given.
and,
;
second stage, the acceleration of velocity being more
naturally associated with the ideas of descent and sin than
which seems to have led the writer astray from the symmetry and consistency of the thought he intended to express. Hence, with that of virtue
too,
we may
so that
;
the metaphor
it is
perhaps account
for the introduction of adt/cd)-
repa which seems otherwise
mar
to
,
the
harmony of the
Yiger proposes as an emendation eXarrco pev
passage.
/cal
This di/caiorepa as opposed to 7rXeto) tie Kdl adirccbrepa. would favour the idea contained in our version more than his own. A better course, however, would be to regard the words /ca/clag rj dperrjg, &c., as implied after opucporepa ,
t(ov rjOcbv, in the pel^cov ds
first
in the second.
dr) 'ipvx'ij ,
great difficulties to
member, as they are expressed
all
The passage has
after
given
commentators.
LVIII.
The Greek
Word "A idrjg, and
the
Hebrew
and rP3
oSty.
Page is
by
Line 11
Plato, although
matters It
61,
most clearly from
may
:
ev
.
he
adov â&#x20AC;&#x201D; to
therefore
mean
This word
"Aidrjv enovopa^ovreg.
deidrjg , invisible. is
Thus
it is
explained
no great authority in etymological
aeideg
dr)
Xeycov, Gorgias 493, B.
the invisible
,
world that ,
is,
unseen in ,
— AND HEBREW SHEOL AND BETH OLAM. the sense of concealed from present vision , or
it
31 ?
may
nected with the more philosophical import of
used by Plato in the Phaedon, namely, the ideal
be con-
aeidijq, as
the intelli-
,
gible world in distinction from the visible world of sense ,
matter.
The
first,
acceptation of the
however,
unseen
,
which the grave hides from our view, not follow the departed.
cannot help being
the
strongly suggests the old ety-
It
Hebrew
mologies given for the
we
common unknown region and whither we can-
doubtless the most
is
word — the
partial,
to
ask
,
to
demand by the
guage of Job
“
Man
They make
ages
to penetrate the
and wasteth away
dieth,
Job
is lie?”
it
from
dark mys-
sponds, both in form and
;
he giveth
xiv., 10.
,
poetical expression, olnoq
as used Ecclesiastes,
which
veil of death, as in the wailing lan-
up the ghost, and where
The common
to
inquire; as though intimating the
to
in all
tery concealed :
,
and
'lisp (sheol),
notwithstanding they are so
contemptuously rejected by Gesenius.
deep anxiety of men
and
AiSov
*.
,
corre-
Hebrew
sense, to the
IV5>
Man
goeth to the house of his eternity or to his eternal house instead of our very dexii.,
5
:
,
,
fective translation, his long for the body, rather
home which suggests the grave ,
than that abode of departed
spirits
which is undoubtedly meant by the Hebrew as well as the Greek phrase. Compare Xenophon’s Life of Agesilaus, near the close
:
“
And
thus this
man
spent his
life in
the
was ’AIAION "OIKH-
service of his country, and, having at length died, transferred to his eternal home ”
2IN
uarrjydyeTO.
elq tt)v
So, also, Diodorus Siculus, in his ac-
count of the Egyptians, says, “
They
call the habitations
of the living, lodging-places (fcaraXvoetq), or inns, because
we
dwell in them but for a short time
but the abodes of
;
the departed they style eternal houses because they con,
tinue in
Hades during
the boundless eternity ”
Kovq TzpoaayopevovGiv,
•AJIEIPON ’AIS2NA.
ev
f/
A idov
Diod. Sic .,
D
d 2
lib.
— aldiovq
ol-
diareXovvriov tov i.,
51.
— 318
SIMILAR FEARS OF HELL IN ALL AGES.
The Hebrew oSty corresponds more Greek
''Aidrjg
than SiKBh
signifies
It
hidden, unknoivn
The
boundless in time, and undefined in space. of the phrase
oixog
r/
is
same
the
closely to the
in both languages
,
composition rrs
:
—the house of Olam—the house of Hades — the
Aidov-
invisible state, the
abode of unseen
These terms
spirits.
suggest conceptions of vastness, of dread sublimity, while the inquiring
presents
it
to
word sheol calls up the unknown world, and the mind as
That undiscovered country, from whose bourn
No
The in the
traveller returns.
common
expression olnog "Acdov must have been
most ancient Greek.
ellipsis, elg
r
Its antiquity is
proved by the
which afterward came into such freHence we conclude that it must
'A idov,
quent use by the poets.
have been an early Orientalism, derived from phrase with which so very
common
we have compared
in classical
doubtless have pronounced
it
Had
it.
Greek, some
this it
very
not been
critics
would
a Hebraism.
LIX. Similar Views of a Future State, and Similar Fears of Hell in all
Ages.
Page 61, Line 11 ooa A tdrjv rs teal rd tovtojv e^dfieva twv ovoparcov enovofad^ovreg ofiodpa (bodovvrac ual ovetpomXovoi ty7)vreg diaXvOevreg re twv owparwv “ which, under the name of Hades and similar titles, men greatly fear ( valde horrent) and dream about, both when living and when separated from the body.” This may be compared r/
.
—
with a similar passage from the Republic
:
Fv yap
loOi, cb
EuKpareg, otl eneidav rig eyyvg % rov oleoOai reXevTr}oetv, elaep^eraL avrd3 deog ual (f)povrlg. olre yap Xey opevoi uvOol
TCEpt
t(ov ev "A idov, &>g
rov evOade dduerjoavra
6ei
SIMILAR FEARS OF HELL IN ALL AGES, ekeI didovcu evpLGico)v
dlfcrjv,
vo)v, cjouep oi
tt aldeg,
pera nanfjg eXiridog that is
when any one
going
6
pkv ovv
etc
tg>v im-
orpetyovoc rrjv i/jv%7]v
kavTOv kv rw
(3ccp
iroXXd aSL/crjpara,
dapa
—“For
is
319
eyeipopevog, deipaivei ual ,
be well assured,
O
£rj
Socrates,
near that time in which he thinks he
to die, there enter into
then the old stories about hell,
him
how
and anxiety.
fear
For
man who has
that the
here been guilty of wrong must there suffer punishment,
Wherefore he who,
torture his soul.
his
life,
from
finds
many
crimes, like frightened children starting
their sleep, is terrified,
Republic 330, E. ,
and
lives in evil forebodings.”
Nothing could give us a surer glimpse
into the ancient conscience than
We
in the retrospect of
such a passage as
this.
are very apt to think that the fears of the future world
are almost wholly derived from the Bible, and that the ancient mythology respecting
Hades was
the poet, without possessing the
common mind.
aged Cephalus,
is
/
mere picture of
This declaration, however, of the
undoubtedly meant by the writer
and age
characteristic of the class
belonged.
the
any very strong hold upon
to
In this most dramatic of
to
be
which the speaker
all
the dialogues of
Plato, nothing of the kind would have been put in the mouth of such a character, had it not truly expressed a sentiment deeply grounded in the popular creed and feeling. It testifies more strongly to the ancient universal belief in a retributive hell and a coming judgment, than all the ab stract reasonings of our philosopher,
and
all
the mytholo-
gical allusions of the poets.
The
we have
doctrine of a hell for the wicked, as
one of the oldest
where observed,*
is
gious creed of
ages and nations.
all
articles in the reli-
Such
incidental pas-
* See the Biblical Repository, No. xix., Art. 3d,
kindred topics are dwelt livered at Burlington,
upon
at
else-
some length
;
where
this
and
also a discourse de-
Vermont, 1839, entitled Natural Religion, the
Remains of Primitive Revelation.
:
320
;
:
;
SIMILAR FEARS OF HELL IN ALL AGES.
sages as these refute
the reasonings of Warburton, in
all
his attempt to prove that the doctrine of future punishment
exerted but
influence in the ancient systems of legis-
little
The
and religion.
lation
ridicule the vulgar fears,
the unseen Hades,
whatever
human
very
and
Even
make
Epicureans
their origin,
the style in
them betrays a secret
truths,
had penetrated the
which Lucretius speaks
trepidation,
to
light of the terrors of
show how deeply these awful
may have been
soul.
to
efforts of the
of
and instead of philosophic
indifference, manifests that bitter hatred which, as in the
case of most modern infidels, proceeds from a mind once
deeply troubled, anxious, and yet unable fears
which
its
bition of a soul
at ease,
which he thus
pect, with
shake
and of an interested is
sets forth that
whose gloomy frown
off those
This exhi-
philosophy affects to despise. ill
the very idea of future retribution, lines in
to
hostility to
apparent in those
monster of horrid as-
was
the timid Epicurean
ever haunted In terris, obpressa
quom vita jaceret gram sub Religione
Quae caput a
regionibus obtendebat,
Humana
ante oculos
cceli
Horribili super adspectu mortalibus instans.
The same
thing
is
manifested
parison), like a child terror,
he seems
when
(to
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;Lib
i.,
.
63.
use Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s com-
who has awaked from some dream
to exult in the timid
of
hope of deliverance
from the fears of a future hell Et metus
Funditus
ille
foras praeceps Acheruntis agundus,
humanam qui
vitam turbat ab imo
,
Omnia subfuscans mortis nigrorc neque ullam Esse voluptatem liquidam, puramque, relinquit. Lib.
iii.,
37.
Such strong language most clearly shows, that the doctrine and fears against which it was directed were no light or laughing matter, either to the poet or to those
for
whom
he
wrote
We have
every reason, therefore,
for believing that
much
*
:
*
SIMILAR FEARS OF HELL IN ALL AGES.
same views of
the
mankind ed
;
same apprehensions of
death, and the
now
future retribution as
prevail,
321
have ever existed among
coming not from reason or philosophy, but hand-
down by
tradition
ancient time.
In
from some revelation made in the most
all
ages, too, and in
creeds, the rep-
all
resentations of the nature of this future punishment have
been of the most
kind, as though the imagination,
terrific
for this purpose,
had been taxed
to its
and chains, and
utter darkness,
and similitudes of ever-un-
gratified desire
and of ever-raging passion, have always
utmost powers.
The
formed a part of the dread machinery of Hades. gious poet Pindar describes
as that from
it
Fire,
reli-
which the eye
of the soul turns away, as from scenes too full of horror to
contemplate
for
a
rol d’
moment anpoGoparov oh^ovtl novov
and, in reference to
a
it,
still
more
—
religious poet, even the
inspired prophet and leader of Israel, asks with dread so-
lemnity,! “ it
Who
knoweth the power of thine anger has been most admirably paraphrased,
Thy dreadful wrath exceeds our And burns beyond our fear.
V
Or, as
thought,
Leaving out of the account the solemn confirmation of the
which may be derived from the fearful imagery employed by our Saviour, and taking into view only the heathen world, we may well ask the question, Whence came all this ? The great problem is for them to solve who asdoctrine
sert that the doctrine of future
Scriptures, the
the
reason,
then,
came
Men
are not fond of what
in the face of
it,
punishment
*
came
this rptyepcov
Find
Olymp. Carm
t JEschylus
,
Choeph
Whence,
these opposing influences
is irrational for its
own
pvdog^ these
ii.,
312.
contrary to
and the feelings. all
they certainly do not love their then,
is
J.,
d.
own
misery. fears of f
Psalm
?
sake, and
Whence, Hades, of xc., 11.
the word
322
ayioq.
Tartarus, of Gehenna, and those other
men have
Plato says in the passage before us,
Why,
names which,
applied to
be
? all false, and without foundaany view of the moral government of God, have the
this state
tion in
human race
Why have
thus
if this
ever .tortured themselves for naught
they indulged in these
cy, handing
down, from age
terrific
to age,
all,
how
is
it,
be such a
if sin
?
inventions of fan-
and from generation
generation, a useless, yet most tormenting anxiety
above
as
trifle,
to
And
?
men, by
that
these inventions, have ever persevered in passing a sen-
tence so unjustly severe on their the Gorgias , 525, C.
own
depravity
Phcedon, 114, A.
;
;
?
Compare
Republic 616, A. ,
LX. The Word "Ay tog. to's
Views.
Many
accommodated
to
Exceeding Spirituality of some of Plaof his Thoughts capable of being fairly
a Spiritual Sense higher than the Author
himself had intended
to
convey
.
Difference in this respect
between his Writings and those of all other Philosophers
Ancient or Modern
Page
61,
Line
,
.
17. uai
perebaXe tottov ayiov oXov
transferred, or passes into a place all holy.â&#x20AC;?
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; â&#x20AC;&#x153;Is
Purity
,
or
generally given as the primary sense of the
holiness , is
Greek aytog and of the Hebrew
or tyYp.
This, how-
ever, besides being incapable of accounting for the other
meanings, some of which are almost directly opposite, does of itself require
some
ultimate, and, at the
may
simple conception into which
it
more simple and primary idea
is that
*
This
will
same
time,
be resolved.
more This
of separation * or of
account for those other senses of the root which seem
may
almost the opposite of holy since
it
purely wicked or separated from
good.
,
,
signify an abominable crime.
all
also refer to that
Hence
So, also, uytog
ayo<;,
which
or ayof,
may sometimes
is
may
denote
;
the word ayiog In proof of this
leing set apart.
of the word
323
.
we may compare
the use
throughout the Pentateuch, in its application to
places, sacrifices, and to the whole nation of Israel, as sep-
arated from the rest of mankind, to be a holy , that
In the
arate people.
New
terized, in the
same manner
a sep-
is,
are Christians charac-
Testament, as ayioi separate peculiar ,
,
Thus God
although in the world, yet not of the world.
is
styled ayiog, in the highest sense, to distinguish him, on the one hand, from the earthly and impure conceptions of polytheistic idolatry, and, on the other, from the apparently
more philosophical, but no
He
theist.
less degrading
views of the pan-
holy, separate from the universe
is
ed into being, and, although filling
he has
call-
all things , yet, in his es-
sence, inhabiting the high and holy place.
As here used by
Plato, ayiog roirog
means a place
apart from everything that is sinful and vile
course of purification, during tinual
ayiaopog that ,
is,
from the impure, leaving
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; the end of a
which there has been a con-
a continual separation of the pure at last
nothing that defileth or ren-
Compare
ders unfit for this exceedingly separate region. the description of this holy place in the Phsedon
thus the soul that
which
is
is
Deuteronomy,
word
sacer
occupied,
it
accursed execrable. ,
may mean
away
goes
On
one devoted to the
xxiii., 18.
may
set
the
same
most
:
â&#x20AC;&#x153;
When
to the pure, to the principle, the
Hebrew
beastly wickedness, as in
In a similar manner, the kindred Latin
signify blessed or cursed
.
The Hebrew
^3
has the
it from a different source. Some would which occurs in the tragedians ( ayiog being found mostly in later Greek), from aÂŁcj, ufoyai, to revere, to stand in awe of. Even here, however, the mind is led to the same original or ultimate sense of separation, as the ground of the feeling express-
same make
ed by
peculiarity, but derives ayiog, or dyvog,
it,
whether that feeling be one of admiration and awo of the
pure and holy, or of fearful astonishment at enormous crime.
same primary
The
idea undoubtedly exists in the Latin purus, from the
Greek nvp,
fire,
in all ages,
been regarded as the means and emblem of purification.
the penetrating and separating element which has,
See the Timseus, 56, A.
— 324
PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.
ever-being, to the immortal, the unchangeable, and, being of a kindred nature with
ceases from
vov
— and
is
its
restless
always would abide there, and ual uenavrai rov i:Xa-
ever engaged in the contemplation of the eter-
Phcedon, 79, D.
nal.
it,
wandering
Elsewhere he
tells us, in
almost
becomes those who would whether by the term he means a lo-
Scriptural language, that holiness
enter this holy place cality in space, or
soul
:
E Ig
;
an exceedingly separate
6e delov yevog
tiefug acpuiveloOcu
—
“
To
\jlt\
tt
state
avreXwg KaOapcp
of the
amovn
ov
enter into the family of the Di-
become a partaker of the Divine nature, “ can only be for him who departs wholly pure.” Ibid 82, B. Without irreverence may we comdycaopov ov pare this with Hebrews, xii., 14 ovHoliness without which no one Idg o'lpETcu rov K vpiov vine,’’ or, in
other words, to
.,
:
—
,
shall see the Lord.
We
are very far from saying, or even imagining, that
Plato attached to these expressions the
which they
same high sense
are used by Paul, and yet there are
passages which, without any violation of the
in
many such
spirit of his
language, are capable of a comparison, to say the least, with
some of the most precious truths of revealed religion. He was evidently directing his vision to a region of reality, far beyond the aim of any of the heathen philosophers who May he not preceded, or were cotemporary with him. those higher truths which glimpses of faint some had have his words, without any violence in their interpretation, frequently suggest to one who reads him by the light of the Christian revelation
?
Almost everything depends upon the
mind with which his writings are studied. To the materialist and the skeptic he will often appear visionary and unmeaning. Jefferson, in a manner most characterisstate of
tic,
pronounced him a foggy
intellect.
Many
of the Chris-
and a succession of the most learned and pious in the Church throughout its whole history, have ever re*
tian fathers,
PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.
325
garded him with enthusiastic fondness, and esteemed his dialogues as ranking next to the Scriptures, although at a
which forbade any comparison with the latter as an inspired message from Heaven. We w^ould not be so distance
extravagant as to assert that Plato has a spiritual or esotersense, as these terms are used by the allegorist or the
ic
No
mystic.
violence need be done to the
letter, or to
the
ordinary laws of interpretation, and yet, by a species of ac-
commodation most easy, and, ral,
a higher elevation, and a
may
be imparted
many
to
same
at the
new and
time, most natu-
almost divine beauty,
passages, causing them to glow
with a radiance that seems derived from the same source
Whatever may
with the inspiration of the Sacred Volume.
be the cause, whether
it
be that lower truths are ever types
which shine through them when examined by
of higher,
a
peculiar light and in a peculiar state of the soul, so that there
may be
lower and a higher sense equally well
truly a
conveyed by the same ly prevails to
some extent
in
what the soundest expositors
regard as the double sense of Scripture) is
a spiritual
power
if
not in
forms, as an
its
in
;
or whether there
language considered in
Reason, so that
at times,
may
its
so manifest
which undoubted-
letter (a principle
own
its
essence,
emanation from the Universal
and when happily employed,
it
inherent light as to transcend the
mind and intended meaning of the writer himself, while the reader, under more favoured circumstances, is admitted to a higher region of thought, and to a deeper participation of that Spirit
which dwelleth
be the explanation of the language of Plato ality of
is
in the fact,
words
â&#x20AC;&#x201D;
or
whatever may
most certain
it
is,
that the
often thus easily adapted to a spiritu-
meaning, in the Christian sense of the term, beyond
any uninspired writings, ancient or modern, and to an extent which, we may suppose, would transcend anv con
that of
ception of the philosopher himself.
Any one may understand what
E
E
is
meant by
this,
by keep
— 326
PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.
ing these thoughts in mind while reading some of the more
which reference is made. In those where the true philosopher is represented as daily dying to the world and sense (tuvdvvevovoL boot ivy^dvovoiv opOcbg anropEvot tyiXooostriking passages to
parts of the Phaedon, for example,
(pcag keXrjOEvai fj
rovg aXXovg,
on
ovdev avrol emrrjdevovoLv
anoOvrjo/ceiv te /cal TEdvavai ), let the reader think of the
Christian instead of the philosopher, and what a close finity
does the style
What language
pressions of the apostle. set forth that hidden
in
which he
is
aim
could more truly
in the life of the follower of Christ,
unknown
so
The world knoweth him
af-
once assume with some of the ex-
at
to the great
“
not.
The
mass around him.
rest of
Socrates, “ understand not that he lives
to
mankind/’ says a saying
die
which Cicero, although he but imperfectly comprehended even
its
Platonic sense, has imitated in the declaration,
Tota philosophorum vita commentatio mortis
Tusc. Disp .,
est.
Again, in the same dialogue, take the description of wisdom for which everything else must be exchanged, and without which all other apparent virtues are but splendid o/uaypacptac cheats mere shadows of a shade, consisting i.,
74.
that
—
only in a wretched barter of one passion for another (rjdovag
npog rjdovag /cal pEc^oj
,
/cat
Xvnag npog Xvnag,
/cal (j)66ov
npog
(j)66ov ,
npog EXarrco, coonep vopiopara /caraWaTTEaQai),
“ the exchanging of pleasure for pleasure
grief for grief fear for fear, and greater for less, like the coin of traffic let any one, we say, in reading this, and its most instructive context, think of the Scriptural
Platonic
(ppovrjcng
,
and
how
Wisdom
,
in place of the
vividly arise
to
mind our
Saviour’s parable of the pearl of great price, and the sub-
lime personifications of wisdom in the books of Job and Proverbs. that
Plato
fear of
the
may not have
Lord which
derstanding, but he
was
exactly meant by (ppovrjoig
is the
beginning of all right un-
certainly aiming far above
any
who
docs
philosopher of his day, or any modern moralist
— 327
PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.
Ex-
not draw directly from the fountain of inspiration.
amples of a similar kind may be taken from a great variety of passages everywhere meeting us in his most important In the
dialogues.
first
public, for philosophy,
half of the sixth book of the Re-
and the philosopher, keep
Christianity and the Christian, and
sense, so sublime before, spiritual light
the language retains
its
;
and
how
mount up
new
a
to
no violence
yet, in all this,
in
mind
sublimely does the region of
done
is
to
every argument, every epithet, every metaphor
;
native force and
mind can hardly
harmony, while the
relative
its
resist the impression, that this
glowing
description of the true philosophy and the true philosopher
was intended
The
face.
its
or be
it
for a
higher meaning than,
incongeniality of this
spirit,
be
which we
sense, the contempt poured upon'
live it
—
it
its
struggles with
by the world,
pendence upon that Divine aid which Plato, in so expressly acknowledges,
else
is
which
it
bestows where
all
changing and flowing, the exceeding joy with which,
at times,
it
inspires that small
have tasted and experienced gift
de-
its
this passage,
continual aspirations after
its
the fixed and eternal, the rest
philosophy
and corrupting
religion, .with the selfish, debasing,
influences in the midst of
appears upon
at first,
number who,
how sweet and
of Heaven, while they contemplate the
rules the multitude rjdv nal
(laviav*
ol
in
every age,
blessed
is this
madness which
oXtyot yEvopEVoi nal yevodfievoi
panaptov to nrrjpa nal rcbv noXXtiv Idovreg rrjv
—the
,
elevation of soul
which
is
produced by a
re-
ligious contemplation of the whole of our being leading, not ,
to a
contempt of our present human
mate of
it
istence,
and of the boundless
life,
but to a just esti-
as an exceeding small portion of our entire ex-
around us, as vtt&pxel avTTj
when he i\
says,
field
of being
which
lies
advvarov ry 6/avota
pEyaXonpETCEia nal 'dECopia iravrog
* Republic, vi., 496, C.
,
(]
ilev j
328
PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.
Xpovov TraGrjg 6s ovotag peya tl 6ouslv elvac rov avOptim* vov piov* all these, as they are presented in this warm and ,
,
eloquent description of philosophy and the philosophic rise at
once
how
time,
to a
more elevated meaning, while,
word accommodate
higher sense, as though
itself to this
with that mild pathos
much
life,
same
admirably does every sentence, thought, and
had formed the main and only design of the so
at the
effect,
he
tells
w hich he sometimes T
what
us
it
When,
writer.
uses with
difficulties the 'philosophic
nature has to encounter in maintaining
ground against
its
the unfriendly influences of a foreign, uncongenial clime (cjoirsp %svikov
onsppa sv
yxf
aXX'q onsLpopevov e^irrjXov
uparovpevov Isvai elg to smx&piov),]
(ptXel
ly help thinking that
we
we can
hard-
hear the spiritual and plaintive
Leighton declaring, that â&#x20AC;&#x153; the grace of God in the heart of
man
is like
where affinity it
a tender plant
its fruit
sown
in a strange, unkindly soil,â&#x20AC;?
would inevitably wither and degenerate
into
with some base native weed, unless he that planted
should exercise that constant care, without which
it
must
perish.
In the hands of no other writer, ancient or modern, does
philosophy ever assume this heavenly aspect. be supposed that this
is all
with a similar purpose, read the moderns ascertain
if
who
Aristotle, or
treat of the
Let any one,
Bacon, or any of
philosophy of the soul, and
he can, without violence, extract from
them any
such higher sense, or any such easy accommodation elevated Christian spirituality. peculiar Platonic unction
it
the effect of a partial imagina-
experiment be tried with others.
tion, let the
Should
may
A
faint
to
resemblance of
an
this
be traced in some of the
philosophical tracts of Cicero, especially those that were written during the latter years of his
dued
spirit of his
* Republic,
vi.,
adverse fortunes
486, A.
;
life,
and
in the sub-
but even with Cicero,
f Ibid., 497, B.
329
PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.
they are mere imitations of the style and manner of one
whom
he professedly takes as his model, and
whom
he so
affectionately styles “his master Plato.’’
Let these thoughts be carried with us in reading, in the seventh book of the Republic, the description of the dark
who
cave, and of the poor prisoners
with their backs to the
light,
are there confined,
and their intent gaze ever
fix-
ed upon those shadowy appearances which so strangely flit
across the walls of their chamber of imagery.
mind can
thoughtful
What
recur to the higher truths of
fail to
the Christian revelation, or avoid being struck with the
most perfect parallelism,
as, in Plato’s
al-
most truthful picture,
he contemplates the fondness of those miserable bonds-
men
for their
gloomy abode,
their first aversion to the daz-
zling splendour of the world of reality, and the strong grasp
with which they cling
to their prison
kind hand attempts to draw them
and steep ascent (rpaxeiag the light of
life.
How
forth,
house,
when some
through the rough
avavrovg avadatJscog),
real
science and philosophy of that narrow world aoeplag).
How
into
graphic, too, the description of the (rrjg
steel
admirably does he depict the interest with
which these subterranean savans are occupied in the study of what they style nature, in tracing the law of cause and effect, antecedents and consequents, as the dim shadows pass across their contracted scene of observation pride with sive
name
which they dignify
this pursuit
—the
petty
with the exclu-
of science, their stinging jealousy of others
who
are ambitiously aiming at the distinctions and honours of
same most intellectual life, the laborious earnestness with which they are engaged in thus building up from these inductions a science of shadows which might astonish their more vulgar companions, by its seeming vaticinations of the periods and returns of those (jiaLvopeva, with which their the
,
minds are daily occupied,
to the
exclusion of any study of
themselves or of their true position
E
e 2
— while
all this
time the
330
PLATONIC SPIRITUAL SENSE.
which shines the real sun where may be seen the real heavens and where alone exists the real science are as much and as utterly unknown as are the high hopes of the Christian, and the sublime truths which real world in ,
,
,
,
occupy his
soul, to the
T cpal
ling.
dXkfkuv
6s
snaivoi el Ttvsg avrolg rjoav tots reap’
teal
yspa
teal
most grovelling and sensual world-
tco ot-vTaTa tcaOapcbvTL
Ta napiovra
avrjpovevovTC paXiora oca ts nporspa avTcbv
vcTspa siuOsi
teal
apa nopsvscOac
teal ste
,
TGdTaTa anopavTevopsvG) to psXXov (tov npog to
cpcog
tovtojv
teal 6?)
teal
oca
6vva-
dv avTov
fj^stv, 6otcsig
sXOovTa ) smdvprjTiucbg avTibv s%siv
teal
f7\kovv Tovg nap steslvoig Ttpcjpsvovg Republic, vii., 516, D. The resemblance between this and the spirit and tenor ’
;
of the Scriptural representations need not be pointed out.
One might
almost fancy
it
an expansion of the striking, yet
concise description of the Psalmist
Man
walketh in a shadow
0^3“^,
#'*r:]bniy
:
a land of images,
,
A VAIN
SHOW. Wish
this philosopher
even
assumes a divine and
politics
religicms aspect, and, in all his speculations, the political
closely connects itself with the theological. natural
would
it
be, in pursuance of the
How
easy and
same method,
to
adapt what he says of the heavenly paradigm in the close of the ninth book of the Republic, and his seventh
the Politicus, to the Christian
npcoTov ts
teal
Church
apiCTOV /3lo)tsov
,
:
dXXcov noXuTSiCdV.
in
sv r %f npd)TX) 6s noAv f
nXrjv Tr\g
naoojv yap skslvtjv ys snnpiTSOv, oiov 'Ssov sre t(a)v
kingdom
EBA0MH2.
s£
dvOpunoiv,
Politicus or Statesman, 303, A. ,
From such an accommodation of Plato’s rich and wondrous fancy, how many most valuable thoughts, or rather illustrations,
might be suggested, which would not be un-
worthy even of the pulpit claimed the closest brought
to
power of
— thoughts
affinity
which, while they
with the Scriptures, might be
bear upon the soul and conscience with
illustration
drawn from the language
all
the
of the divin-
MYTHICAL SENSE OF THE WORD Mvarog. 1
est of philosophers.
in this
We
know
way, might be so useful
and no one
whom we
331
of no profane writer who,
preacher as Plato,
to the
would so earnestly recommend
to all
young men who are aiming at the Christian ministry. Let them not read Plato to understand the Bible although,
—
even with ance
—but
they would receive no small assistthem read the Bible in close connexion with
this in view, let
our philosopher, and they will understand Plato better than
he ever understood himself.
LXI. Mythical Sense of the
Page
62,
Line
Word
4. ev re %G)yj nal kv
Qavarog.
naoc ftavaroig.
This
evidently refers to the deaths of one individual, and not of
many. But why, then, the plural mind here his doctrine of the
its {jL£T£fj,\ljvx(oo£i,g,
We
?
in
think Plato keeps
transition of the soul, or
an ascend-
into various states, either in
ing or a descending series
;
the passage from one to the
See the Phse-
other of which he styles a death and a birth. don, 114, B., also 70, C.
:
uaXaiog
jt
ovv korl
i£v
ng
6 Ao-
yog, (hg elalv £v6iv6£ d(bino\i£vai Znti , nal tt&Xlv ye d£vpo u It is an acpuivovvTCU nal ylyvovrac kn rCdv t£0v£O)tc»)v
—
,
ancient tradition that souls go there from hence, and again return hither and arise from the dead.”
what
is
Compare,
said respecting the purgations and
ses of the soul, in the remarkable
Republic.
Thus,
of the present
preceding
life
state,
it
myth
also, in the Gorgias,
as though,
at
also,
metempsychothe end of the
493, A., he speaks
when compared with some
might in reality be a death,
to
which, for
some former relations, we may have been doomed. “ As you say,” continues Socrates, “ life is an awful thing (duvog 6 (3log ), and I should not wonder if Euripides spoke the truth when he said, reasons arising out of
MYTHICAL SENSE OF THE WORD
332
6'
Tig
,
^
to rcarOavelv 6e
Who knows we
haps
the soul
The
but
are
body
that the
v pev
oldev el to
life is
now our
is
v
eon
tiavaTOg.
rcarOavelv
death, and death is
And
life ?
per-
dead, as I have heard of the wise, and
monument
(
which
orjpa ) or sepulchre in
buried.”
is
context of this strange declaration in the Gorgias
affords strong reasons for believing, that
may have been
it
spoken mystically and mythically of that
which
,
;
death
spiritual
so prominent a subject of the Scriptures.
is
In this
most exquisite analysis of the nature of physical pleasure, and
its utter
want of
all
claim to be considered
The Good,
the sensualist is regarded as “ dead while he lives.”
soul
is
said to be rotten and leaky, like a perforated cask
His pleasure
rdOog rerpr^evog).
(d)£
His
is
described as a a “ bro-
continual inflowing to supply a constant outflowing
;
ken
filling, in
cistern,” requiring a constant
distinction from that spring
ever
full,
and laborious
which Socrates represents as
and which so strongly suggests our Saviour’s
“ well of living water, bubbling up to everlasting life.” this description, physical pleasure is
tracted dying, because
it
In
regarded as a pro-
can only exist as the gratifying of
an ever-craving want, the removal of an ever-tormenting pain, the vain attempt to to ist
fill
an ever-empty void.
himself
:
tov emppelv is
quench an ever-burning
In the language of the sensual-
ev rovrcp earl to
—
real dt'ip'ijv
ye
thirst, or
ev rep
<bg nXelcr-
real dL'iptivra rriveiv
“ In this
rjdecog
—
pleasure, namely, to have the greatest inflowing (as into
a vacuum), to drink while ever thirsting, and ever to thirst
while drinking.” 495, A.
davarog
i
See the whole passage, from 492,
D., to
In the declaration in our text, Plato probably uses in the first of these interpretations.
quolibet mortis genere.
Ast renders
it
OMNIPRESENCE OF THE DIVINE JUSTICE.
333
LXII. Omnipresence of
Language
blance of Plato's
Bible
Remarkable Resem -
Divine Justice .
the
to
some Passages from
the
.
Page
63,
Line
ov yap dpeXpOrja^
1.
A tier],
In this passage avrr\q refers to
Law, which
tt ore
’
avrijg.
the Divine Justice or
by the Grecian
so frequently personified
is
vn
poets as ever sitting on the right hand of Jove and sharing
There
his throne.
is
a very strong resemblance between
these declarations and Psalm cxxxix.,
be neglected by
You
it.
7.
“
You
into the depths of the earth, nor, being raised fly
up
into
Heaven, but
whether remaining
that
you
pay the
shall
in this world, or
The
wild than these.”
never
on high, so
fitting
penalty,
having passed through
Hades, or having been borne
life into
shall
cannot, being small, so descend
to a region still
more
expressions of the Psalmist are
strikingly similar, although not directly applied to the trans-
Whither shall I go from thy
gressor.
I flee from
shall
.
and dwell thy
and whither
If I ascend up into Heaven, If I make my bed in Hades, behold,
thy presence ?
behold, thou art there
.
If I should
thou art there.
Spirit,
take the wings of the morning,
in the uttermost parts of the sea, even there shall
hand lead me, and
thy right
hand shall hold me.
More
in accordance with the spirit, although with less similarity
of expression, are upon the
There
is
is
thew passage, Job, xxxiv.,
ways of man, and
all his steps
21: His eyes he beholdeth.
no darkness, no land of the shades of the dead
(yio
or terra umbrarum), where the workers of iniquity * Is there not
some reason
to believe that this word,
generally rendered shadow of death may, ,
properly,
which
mean
is
the
the land of the shades as though it had been plural feminine of obtf* instead of having the punctuation
spiritual t
more
itself,
,
VV
;
which
world
it
has received from the Masorites 1
— DOCTRINE OF A FINAL JUDGMENT.
334
may dig
Compare,
hide themselves.
down
also,
Amos
,
ix.,
2
Sheol (or Hades), from thence shall
into
If they my hand :
Heaven from thence will I bring them down. If they be hidden in the top of Carmel from thence will I discover and take them. If they would If they ascend up
take them .
into
,
,
conceal themselves
from
thence will
from mine I command
eye in the bottom of the sea ,
and
the serpent ,
it
shall bite
them.
How
an ever wakeful,
vividly, too, is this doctrine of
retributive justice presented
by Sophocles
:
yytlode de fihsTceiv [ilv
avrovg 7vpog tov evgeOt)
phe-KELv ds npbg rove 6 vgg sbsig
•
fiportiv, )yrjv
uvoglov ftportiv
prjntj -yevEoOat (jxjrbg
—
6 e 7tov
Bethink you, then
Heaven hath
its
Its
eye upon the sinner.
No
hiding-place to
Can
;
eye upon the pious man,
e’er escape.
Flight there’s none,
which the unholy wretch CEdip. Col, 278.
LXIII. Doctrine of a Final Judgment
Word hvvre-
Use of the
.
X eia.
Page noTs
rep Tzavrl
eorum their
64, Line
collatio
1
.
ovu
elddbg avrCbv rfjv
^vptaXXerac.
Ast translates
quomodo, universo conducat,
contribution,” &c.
owreXeiav
He
66
onrj
this, nesciens
not
knowing
takes avvreXeta in what
is
perhaps the more usual signification in classic Greek, namea contribution by members of a society a share or assessThe other ment, and which agrees well with ^vp6dXXerat.
ly,
sense.,
,
however, of termination consummation &c.,
better with the context of this
passage.
,
,
It
resemblance
recommends to the
suits far
most important and solemn
itself, too, to
us by
its
striking
use of the word in certain declarations
DOCTRINE OF A FINAL JUDGMENT. of in
335
Both the ideas, however, may be united or final settlement of an account word reckoning our Scriptures.
tlie
,
We prefer this,
which has been long deferred.
because the
whole passage has reference to a judgment or final disposition of the wicked, and would, therefore, render it, â&#x20AC;&#x153; not
knowing
their
end or consummation, in what way
tributes to the whole,â&#x20AC;? that
is,
in
suspension of punishment, and their
con-
what way the present doom, sustain the
final
Probably both senses were present
universal government. to the
it
mind of the writer, and both seem necessary harmony of the conception.
to
com-
plete the
Viger, in his Latin version of Eusebius, Praep. Evang.,
page 635, D., prefers
this
second sense, which, although
comes the nearest to the meaning of the compound. He
the least used, logical
sage, ignorans
FINIS God
translates the pas-
tandem aut qua parte istorum
EXITTJS cum universi rationibus
may
reader of
et
videlicet qui
and etymo-
radical
cohcereret.
deeply interesting subject of the delay
find this
punishment of the wicked treated
in the
The
at great
length by Plutarch in his treatise, TLepl tcov vtto tov Qelov
Ppadecoq Ti[iG)povg,evG)v
;
a very excellent edition of
which
has been lately edited by Professor Hackett of the Newton
Seminary.
Theological
The work
accompanied by
is
notes, chiefly of a theological character, exhibiting real
much
and useful learning, with no display of that philologi-
cal pedantry
which deforms so many modern
editions of
on the whole, forming one of the most
ancient writers, and,
valuable additions to our theological and classical literature.
HwreXeta,
in the sense of completion
,
summing
,
or wind-
ing up and in a connexion impressively similar to the pas,
sage in our
text, is
found in the explanation of the parable
of the tares and the wheat, in
be permitted as
is
final
to
grow
for the
here intimated by Plato,
which the former
sake of the all
latter,
are said to
and where,
things are referred to
period of decision and development
r :
O
some
6e dspiopoq
,
— -:
.
336
DOCTRINE OF A FINAL JUDGMENT.
— The
avvreXeia rov aitivog ear tv
harvest is the end
( the
day of reckoning) of the world. So shall it he in the end of the world (the winding up the conclusion the final account , ,
,
drama of life) ; they shall gather out all things that ojfend and all that do iniquity. Matthew xiii., 39, 41. The same remarkable word is found, Hebrews, ix., 26 airai; enl awreXeia t£)v alcjvuv of the great
the catastrophe
irpa^ig, or
:
— once in the winding up of the ages. 2 vvreXeta
signifies not only
an end like reXog, but an ,
ending together a con-clusion an accomplishment of great ,
,
purposes brought about by a long series of means, which, although, at times, ever so apparently divergent finally,
On
this doctrine of the
of sin,
compare Job,
all,
xxi.,
Divine delay in the punishment
29
The wicked is reserved (Heb. doom: unto the day of wrath
:
No
shall they he brought forth. is
have
hack) unto the day of
!jt£TT,
as
,
converged to one grand result.
shown by the
text in the
context, points
Old Testament,
more clearly
Very
judgment of a general and concluding kind. language
is
to a future
similar
held respecting the fallen angels, Jude, 6
3: All things (to nav to oXov) hath the ,
Lord made for himself yea which is almost equivalent
,
ovvreXeia avrtiv the Psalmist,
Re-
Compare,
served in chains to the judgment of the great day. also, Prov., xvi.,
:
tg5
tt
avri
the ivicked
for the day of evil;
to the declaration in our text i;
vp6aXXerat
when he ceased
to
In like manner,
look upon appearances,
in the language of our author (page 63, line 10), d)^ ev
TOTrrpoig rag rrpa^eig rchv avOpconcov nadopav
or,
na
— when he
“ entered into the sanctuary,” into the study and contemplation of the higher counsels of the Divine
“ then saw he their end”
dream when one awakctli
— ,
rrjv
so,
O
government
awreXecav
avrtiv.
Lord, when
they *
As
a
awake, or
Thus, we are satisfied, should the Hebrew lxxiii., 20. be rendered, as applying to the sinner, and not to God or it may, perhaps, be translated, “ When their image {shade, umbra manes. *
Psalm
;
,
;
DOCTRINE OF A FINAL JUDGMENT. in the
awaking
( that
337
in the resurrection morning, at the
is,
great day of account ), wilt thou despise their image (cddS^),
umbra (LXX., to elSgjXov avr&v). We would not engage in the superfluous work of endeavouring to prop, by the supports of human reason and human their ghost or
any
feelings,
There
is,
truth clearly revealed in the
however, no one which,
might be more safely trusted
if it
such a defence than
to
steady voice of humanity
when
may be
this
Here the long and
doctrine of a general final judgment.
the time
Holy Scriptures. were necessary,
safely appealed
From
to.
the smoking blood of Abel invoked the Di-
human
vine justice, there has ever been something in the
which has declared the necessity of a judgment, of when there shall be a GvvreXeia, or winding when it will be found that the Judge of all the Earth
breast
a fixed time,
up
;
has done
right,
and must do
right
when every wrong which
;
has been seemingly neglected s^ali be made right when “ all that is crooked shall be made straight / and every;
5
thing that
is
dark and mysterious shall be made clear.
alarmed conscience, even while cannot read a poor work of painful feeling
when
it
dreads,
fiction
demands
The
We
it.
without experiencing a
the termination of the story crosses
common parGvvreXeca when
these instinctive sentiments of the soul, or, in lance, does not end well, has no proper virtue (even the poor, miserable,
in repute by the world)
receive
its fitting
feels that a
is
low
virtue
which
is
held
not rewarded, and vice does not
The
punishment.
reader, in such cases,
—
wrong has been done to his moral sense that which even bad men pos-
the universal instinct of justice, sess,
has been violated.
or ghost) arises thou wilt reject ,
How, it.”
then, can the thought be
We would
also suggest, although
may not
be a similar idea in the
with much diffidence, whether there
as applied to a different character, Hebrew word Psalm xvii., 15 “ When thine image awakes ,” that is, the new spirSee, also, Job, iv., 6. itual form which thou wilt bestow. parallel
:
F
F
PLATONIC USE OF THE WORD
338
endured, that there will be no set time ig,
TVTCOg.
when
the great 7rpaf.
or drama, of this world shall be brought to a fitting close
and every act receive
its
just
recompense of reward
wicked shall not stand in the judgment.
The
?
Instead, however,
of bringing forward such Old Testament texts in proof of the doctrine as a revealed truth,
them a taking
for
we would
rather see in
granted of what the universal voice of hu-
manity has ever proclaimed as the voice of God, uttered in the conscience as well as declared in his
Word.
LXIV. Platonic Use of the
Page
Line k. r. A
Word
rvnog.
dv tvttov
4. fjv rig prj ytyvdtGuojv ovd’
64,
“
Which, unless one knoweth, he can never know the type (the dorm) of life.” That is, without this doctrine of the end of the wicked, and of the manner in which the present suspension and the final infliction of their Idol ttots,
doom
.
contribute to the universal harmony, life
would have
would be Tohu and Bohu (Genesis, i., 2), a moral chaos, on which no intelligible form had been imno meaning.
pressed
;
It
or, to
take a comparison from Job, xxxviii., 14,
it
would be like a confused mass of clay, which had received Tvnog also, in a *>e stamp (rimog) of no significant seal. ccondary or metaphorical sense, means a summary descrip ,
.o/i,
or, in
philosophy, a general idea , an outline or model ,
,
requiring a correspondence or general conformity in the filling
Hence
up of the more minute parts which are not specified. the
common
phrase, ev tvttg) Xeyecv,
to
say in gen-
eral terms.
This use of the word may be found in the Republic, 379, B., and the following pages, where
what he first
Plato lays
ii.,
down
styles tvtcol nepl '&EoXoyiag, types in theology , or
principles respecting the Divine Nature,
which
are
,
EVIL IN THE PRESENT STATE EXCEEDS THE GOOD. 339 ever to be kept in mind in forming a right estimate of God’s character and government.
have rvnog Romans, ,
oars
etc
In a similar application,
17
vi.,
6s
:
tw
nap6lag slg ov napedodrjTS tvttov didaxrjg
thanks be
to
God
,
— But
ye have obeyed, from the heart that ,
of doctrine in which ye were instructed. rivative vnoTimojoig , 2
Timothy,
13
i.,
form
So, also, the de-
—vttotvttgwlv s%s
vyiaivovrcov Aoyuv, Holdfast the form of sound words doctrines)
— doubtless
referring to
we
$£<p, vtt7)kov-
some symbol,
( or
creed, or
catechism which Timothy had received from Paul, or had
heard recited by him, containing an outline of the Christian faith,
and which he was
and love
use as a preacher and instructer
This Paul enjoins upon him
in the Gospel. faith
to
(or,
as he says in the passage in
sk napdiag ), instead of regarding
it
as a
hold in
to
Romans,
mere speculative
scheme, into which, without care, such a rvnog or vnorvncdocg might degenerate.
Without understanding
this type of life,
we
are told in
the text, there could be no right judgment formed respect-
ing happiness or blessedness, and their opposites.
It is
an
edge of what constitutes the blessed
A complete knowlman depends, not only
upon the end of his individual
but also upon his rela-
expansion of the sentiment of Solon.
life,
tion to the great end, or ovvrsXsia, of the
tion of
which he forms a
on the Greek
part.
world or dispensa-
See Dissertation
xxxviii.,
Words for Happiness and Blessedness
.
LXV. Explanation of a
Difficult
Passage, in which Plato seems
to
assert that our Evils, in the Present State, exceed our
Good
Page
.
68,
Line
11. nXstovcvv 6s tgjv prj.
to determine the true
meaning here,
It is
not easy
or to decide with abso-
,
340 EVIL
THE PRESENT STATE EXCEEDS THE• GOOD.
IN
lute certainty,
whether the speaker intends
ponderance
good or
to
to give the prey
evil in the present state
which
there can be no doubt to
;
although
party, in this severe con-
he would assign the final triumph. Ast renders it, pluribus vero quee non sint bona pugna dicimus, immortalis flict,
,
est ,
&c.
arj.
;
In the Latin version
mat., v., 593,
which
it
,
which, he must supply dyadcov
to authorize
to
is translated,
Clemens Alexandinus,
uncertain whether ejusmodi
Stro -
pluribus qui non sunt ejusmodi
as ambiguous as the Greek, and leaves
is
after
is
meant
to refer to
it
utterly
dyadcov or
evavricov.
Viger, in his Latin version of Eusebius, Prcep.
Evang.,
549, gives an entirely different rendering, by
xi.,
reading nvcov for rcov
lum misceatur
—quibuscum
— a sense
convey any meaning
at
tarnen
genus aliud nul-
which even his emendation, if it It might be, all, would not yield.
on the contrary (and the supposition has much intrinsic plausibility, if we lay aside all considerations drawn from other passages), that the writer meant, by rcbv neither good nor bad, or
what some would
prj,
things
style adiafyopa.
Ficinus renders concisely, et quidem plurium, meaning
thereby the evils
;
which
construction,
he derived from supplying
after prj the
it
may
word
be supposed,
evavricov, and
regarding irXeiovcov as governing rcov, instead of agreeing
with
it
—as though the whole expression had been equiva-
lent to evavria rrXeiova eivai rcov prj evavricov.
The
great
awkwardness of the conupon negatives. II Xeiovcov would most naturally be referred to what just
objection to this
is
the exceeding
struction arising from thus piling negatives
precedes
it,
namely, evavricov.
It
posed that Plato wrote carelessly, connect
it
might, however, be sup.
and actually meant
with dyadcov, farther above.
would correspond
In this case
to it
clumsy English sentence, “ full of contrary but of more than what is not;”
to the
good, and full of the
which, notwithstanding
,
its
harshness, would leave
doubt as to the meaning, although
it
little
would require us
to
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; EVIL IN THE PRESENT STATE EXCEEDS THE GOOD. 341 regard TrXecovcov as governing rtiv instead of agreeing with
This view, namely, that rcov fir] agrees with dyadtiv understood, and is governed by nXecovcov, or which would
it.
regard the sentence as assigning a preponderance to the good, might likewise be strengthened by an inference very
drawn from his having so expressly given the superiority in the moving and control of the heavens to the beneficent soul as where Clinias is made to say (page 38, naturally
;
line 1), ovft oolqv dXXcog Xeyeiv 'ifwxfjv
nepiayeiv avrd.
fj
Traaav aperfjv exovoav
Especially might
be deduced
it
from that subtle and beautiful disquisition on the resemblance of the heavenly motions to the motion of vovg or intellect, ,
or of the best soul in distinction from that evil one
which
ever moves, pavitctig re nal ardnrog, in madness and disorder.
But, as
terpretation,
we
conceive,
and compelled
to
we
are estopped from this in-
acquiesce in the contrary, by
the fact, that Plato, in the Republic, most expressly asserts that our evils
dXX
exceed our good
â&#x20AC;&#x2122;
oXiyoyv (6 deog)
yap eXarro) ray add rcov itantiv. We cannot, help thinking that he suffered a morbid feeling
alriog, t:oXv
therefore,
of the immediate evils of the world directly around him,
and which were magnified by contiguity, forget the legitimate inferences from his
gument, and
imply
may
that,
to
make
to
cause him to
own
beautiful ar-
a declaration which would seem to
on the whole, there
is
more
also indulge the supposition, that
evil
than good.
We
he refers merely
to
the present time, and believed that the great battle of the universe or the fia^T] aOdvarog of ,
,
which he soon speaks,
would eventually bring out an opposite preponderance of good, and a final triumph of the beneficent over the evil and disorderly soul.
F
f 2
*
342
,
Maxrj aOdvarog or battle of the universe. ,
LXVI. Max?]
’
AOdvarog
or Battle of the
,
Bowers of Good and Evil £er,
because
which God
Page rj
68,
roiavjT],
would
we
it
is
Sin therefore
.
between the
,
7io
,
Light
Mat -
Treason against the Cause of Good, for contending with the Evil Soul. is
Line
11.
MAXH
(paper,
drj,
’A0ANATO2
nal (pvXafcrjg tiavpaarrig deopevrj.
say, is
an immortal
wonderful care or vigilance.”
menced
Universe
conflict,
The
and needing most
simile
in 7joXepog, several lines back, is
which
egtlv
“ Such,
which was comhere preserved
would be no extravagance to call sublime. All things are most vividly represented as engaged in an everlasting conflict between the powers of Good and Evil. This is the great aycov which, and brought out
in a style
as he elsewhere says,
it
avrl Travrov ayd)VG)v, in the place
is
or before, all other conflicts.
In the description of this
battle of the universe, the author
seems inspired with a more The images in
of,
than Homeric grandeur of imagination. the cite
Theomachia
of the Iliad
may have more tendency to
and arouse the passions, but they are
ex-
far inferior in the
power of producing that swelling, yet calm feeling of moral sublimity with which the soul is filled in reading this noble passage. Not Gods alone descending swell the
but
all
parties
nature and to
this
all
worlds rise into deeply interested
universal
struggling with disorder. ness, truth with error,
science of medicine
fight,
Order
strife.
Light
is
everywhere
contending with dark-
knowledge with ignorance.
is fighting
of every kind with the rude and savage
kvrap hnel
The
with disease, agriculture
with the hostile stubbornness of the earth,
* Iliad, xx., 47.
is
ueO’ opikov
,
art
life.
0?.vpmoL
and science
On
a higher
rjTivdov avdptiv
Max?] aOavarog or battle of the universe.
343
,
scale, the virtues are personified as in
with our
conflict
Righteousness is engaged in a strife which knows sins. no compromise with unrighteousness. Temperance maintains an unintermitting struggle with her most powerful and unyielding antagonist.
To crown
all,
God
himself and the
powers are represented as everywhere contending with the forces of the Evil Soul, and with the dark, mind-
celestial
ess,*
disorderly Spirit of Matter.
All this, too, in a strife of
seems
to
be for our sakes, and for our aid,
which we are so little able to appreciate the The Gods and daipoveg are our allies.
immortal issues.
They
fight for us as their
We
flocks.
nrryiara
;
as shepherds for their
do not wonder, then, that
this
passage sug-
gested to some of the Fathers that strikingly similar declaration of the Apostle, Ephesians
n dXrj npog
,
vi.,
12
— Ova
eonv
rjp.lv
rj
oapua aX Ad npog rag apxdg npog rag e^ovolag, npog rovg uoopouparopag rov cuorovg rov alcoyog ai[ia ical
,
,
rovrov npog rd nvevparmd
—“ Our wrestling ,
vioig
rrjg novrjplag
is not until
flesh
ev rolg enovpa -
and blood only
but
,
with principalities with powers, with the rulers of darkness ,
of this world, with the spiritual powers of evil in the Heavens Compare Clemens Alex., Stromat., 593, B., and Eusebius Prcep.
Evang .,
xi.,
2G, p. 559.
Both of them
,
institute a
comparison between this passage and Ephesians,
12,
vi.,
and both regard Plato as having derived his doctrine of evil
powers
in conflict
with the good from the Old Testa-
ment, especially from such passages as Job,
i.
and
6, 7,
,
Deut., xxxii., 8. Invisible beings are contending for»us It is
to
something like
this,
and not
(although such a warfare, too,
is
to a
and against
physical
strife
us.
only
included), that the philoso
pher alludes, when he says, ^vfipaxoi 6s rpiiv $soi re ual datpoveg, 7]pslg 6’ av urryiara Decoy real datfiovcov. Such, too, is the
constant style of the
New
Testament.
a ndXrj, an aycov, a struggle, a battle, a race, in
Life
is
which we
— — .
3x4
M ax?)
aOavarog or battle of the universe. ,
are earnestly called upon “
to
press forward
to the
mark of
the prize of the upward calling ,” rrjq avco tcXrjoecoq ;* as though God from above was uttering aloud the neXevopa^
or cheering battle-cry, to the contending host, and saying to
each
I
faithful
code, “
combatant, avabrjOi
will give thee the
crown of
come up hither
life ;Ӥ or,
as
it is
and
admirably
paraphrased in that noblest of hymns, ’Tis God’s
That ’Tis his
To
A
all
animating voice
calls thee
from on high
own hand
;
presents the prize
thine uplifted eye.
cloud of witnesses around,
Hold thee
in full
survey
;
Forget the steps already trod,
And upward urge
K aXov
yap to ddXov nal the prize, and the hope is
We may
Phaedon.||
existence
is
rj
thy way.
eXmq
peyaXrj
— “ For noble
is
great,” as Socrates tells us in the
learn even from Plato that our present
no vain thing, no fleeting
For man’s
show
illusion given
according to the mawkish sentimentalism of a modern poet, but a most solemn and dread reality, connected with the
whole scheme of the universe, and in which not only man, but angels and devils, powers visible and invisible, are intent
and deeply interested
Socrates, in the Republic, “
“Life, in
actors.
may be
itself,”
says
insignificant, but think
you,” he continues, “that an immortal thing ought to be
concerned, and in earnest for so short a part alone, and not for the
whole of
its
existence”
old ovv dOavarcp rcpaypart
vnep xpouou ovrcoq oXtyov povov dslv eonovdaKsvai, aX/1’ ovx vnep TOT IIANT02. Lib x., 608, E.
Page
69,
Line 23.
* Philippians,
iii.,
(f)vXatcrjq
tiavpaorrig deopevrj, “ Re-
14.
t Revelations, xi., 12.
t
$ Ibid.,
ii.,
Thessalonians, 10.
I!
iv., 16.
Phaed., 114, C.
;
—
;
M dx'r]
.
aOdvarog or battle of the universe
quiring a wonderful watch or vigilance.”
mean,
first,
guard
of watching
the act
first
impression would be that
A
referred to the soul of man.
it
compels us
is to
careful consideration,
whole argument, and-especially of what
line 11,
may
,
Here, perhaps, the
page 72,
QvXclict]
secondly, a watch or
or,
a slate of mind watchfulness, or vigilance
or, thirdly,
ever, of the
34 1
,
to refer the
term
be
how-
is said,
to the Deity,
as intimating the intense interest and watchful care with
which God regards the progress of tween Good and Evil.
The
this great battle be-
precise point of the argument, as a whole,
vious without considerable attention tion is bestowed,
when
consequence of not having been obtruded upon
The
substance of
it
seems
speak and think of sin as of that
God
asked
to
is
the Divinities
who have
notice.
who
moment, and who imagine
by
their poor offerings, are
mere earthly
class of
force, in
its
us to be this: those
little
easily propitiated
what
afterward
to
not ob-
that atten
mind with more
strikes the
it
but
;
is
rulers they
The
charge of us.
shown (although somewhat
would liken absurdity
out of
its
is
regular
place in the argument), of supposing that even these lower
guardians could be influenced to do acts injurious to their respective charges, by gifts filched from the very treasury of those to
whom
they are presented
should be seduced to
let
;
as though dogs
wolves ravage the
flock,
by the
offering of a small share of the spoils of the robbery, or the
governor of a vessel, tempted, by presents of wine and in-
cense from the
How much ties
sailors, to destroy
should
less, then,
it
both the ship and them.
be thought that the Divini-
could be induced to be placable to offenders, because
they make offerings crimes
to
them of the very
dv avrolg rtiv
aSucrjiidrcov
These considerations being borne subsequently introduced, and
we
in
of their
own
a\impd dnoveuoiev.
mind, although in part
feel the force of this sub-
lime allusion to the ud%y ddavarog j
fruit
— the
great strife to
— M axq
346
which we
aOdvarog or battle of the universe. ,
immense
are parties, the
theatre on
are actors, and the almost infinite relations
we
which we bear
universe of rational and immortal beings.
Our
therefore, are not unimportant, nor are they,
when
be atoned test,
by any
for
light sacrifice.
should be remembered,
it
Good and
God
Evil.
the battle, and
is
himself
is
Moreover,
to the
actions, evil, to
this con-
between the powers of
leading on the one host to
is
There
personally striving for the victory.
can, therefore, be no neutrality allowed in this warfare,
much for
any actual taking
less
whose
part with the
sake, mainly, the contest
is
enemy by
On
waged.
those
this ac-
by a species of anthropopathy, is represented as exercising the utmost vigilance and circumspection count, the Deity,
in behalf of a charge so
and exposed the
commander
watching
immense, engaged
of a mighty army,
who
is
for the slightest irruption of the
Ov
Xaoi t emrerpa^araL
roooa
/cat
in a conflict
compared
is
to
awake and enemy ever
%prj TTavvv^iov evdeiv PovXrj^opov 9
G)
He
tremendous.
to perils so
avdpa
fiepbrj/
,
lev*
In an infinitely higher sense do. both the Scriptures
and
Plato assert the ever-sleepless vigilance of the physical and
moral Guardian of the universe slumber eth that keepeth in all the
eart-li ,
gle of life
Israel .”
is to
be allowed
Resistance
be secured
to the foe,
moral agents,
:
beholding the evil and the good."
and death.
for
at
is to
a strug-
It is
be made
at
kingdom of darkness.
point to the advance of the
triumph
“ He never sleejpeth or “ The eyes of the Lord are
every
cost.
No
quarter
every Final is to
and especially when any of those
whom
the battle
is
fought, are guilty of
forming an unnatural alliance with the enemy.
This con-
stitutes the intrinsic
odiousness and wickedness, the ex-
ceeding sinfulness of
sin.
sal
Cause of Good.
It is
It is
treason against the univer-
direct opposition to the very na-
* Iliad,
ii.,
24.
plato’s doctrine of the datfioveg ture of
God, and a base and treacherous aiding of his ma-
When
lignant foe.
we
or genii. 347
,
these considerations are kept in mind,
are prepared to feel the force of the concluding decla-
God
ration, that
unholy men, and
by
will never be propitiated to
offerings from
sympathize with Clinias in his passion-
O vdaptig'
of indignation at the. very thought:
ate burst
ovre ave/crog 6 Xoyog — “ By no declaration
is
never
to
means
cannot be
it
;
the
;
be tolerated.”
LXVII. Plato's Doctrine of the Aaifioveg, or Genii.
Page
69,
Line
2.
Qeoi
There are clearly
teal datfioveg.
three distinct grades of superhuman beings presented to us,
not only in the theology of Plato, but also in the Grecian
mythology as
set forth
These
by the poets.
Z evg,
are
Qeoi
and Aatpoveg. Qeoi, however, includes both the others,
we should
rather,
when the common in
say,
in that invocation so
first
pressions
aiS
;
or,
two are mentioned, as
the poets, T2 Zev
the term fteot contains daifioveg
,
teal
Qeoi,
and, again, in such ex-
the above from our text,
it
includes
Z evg. See
the Timceus, 41, A.
We
have several times alluded
Aaifioveg, or Genii,
more
at length.
to Plato’s doctrine of the
and would dwell upon
The passage
in
which we
express and the clearest mention of them mis, or Appendix to teal
imo rovrotg
The Laws,
e^rjg,
984, D.
AAIM0NA2,
and under these, the Genii
(as
because of the bad sense that the tached *
to the
word demons), an
find the
most
in the Epino-
uera de rovrovg
j
:
we
New
— “ Next
to
prefer to render
it,
tc.
r. X.
Testament has
at-
aerial* race, having the
According to a division which he makes of
Supreme
is
in this place
deptov be yevog e^ov
edpav rpirrjv ev^atg rtfiav fiaXa %peoov, these,
it
all
beings below the
Deity, and corresponding to the four states or elements.
:
348 plato’s doctrine of the third seat,
must
we honour by
They
The
prayers,”
which
ferred to the entire passage,
here.
dalpoveg, or genii.
reader
is re-
too long for insertion
is
are spoken of as possessing wonderful intelli-
human
gence, as feeling a deep sympathy in
affairs,
as lov-
ing the good, hating the bad, and, in consequence of their
middle position in the
air,
acting as interpreters and medi-
To
between God and man.
ators
the
same
speaks of them in the Symposion, 202, E. /Xaipoviov pera^v
eon Oeov
olg rti reap dvdpcdreojv, nal ’
rovrov
i]
Oeog de
nv
7}
.^iid
nal
—
“
rj
rti
reapd
rti)v
did
lepecov re^vr)
,
evv
to
retiv
'detiv.
ov piyvvrai aXXa did rovrov
opu Ala deolg
Oevdovoi
nal yap
:
re nal dvTjrov , epp7]vevov de-
avQpumoiq
pavniCTj retioa
avOpti) nep
effect Socrates
•
retied eo-
avOpcdreoig nal eyprjyopooi nal na-
For the whole demonial race
is
between God
mortals, acting as interpreters or messengers to both.
Through ical art
;
passes
this for
all divination,
God mingles
but through these media
and the whole prophet-
not directly with the is
human
race,
ever carried on the intercourse
between Heaven and men, both when awake and wdien Hos See, also, Apuleius, De Deo Socratis 674 asleep.” :
,
nomine A aipovag nuncupant, inter terricolas caelicolasque vectores, hinc precum inde donorumJ* Compare with the above, Hesiod, Works and Days, 233 Graeci
:
iyyvg yap kv dvdp&veoLGLV eovreg
dOdvaroi ?i£vggovglv. For, close at hand,
Immortal eyes behold us evermore.
So, also, a few lines below,
where he represents the number
of these invisible beings as amounting to thirty thousand
Tpig
yap pvpcoi
elalv knl xOovl Trov^vdorelpy
dOdvaroi Zrjvog
<£YAAKE2
rjipa kcGapevoi,
7r dvrrj
'd'vrjr&v
dvOpdiruv,
(poiTtivrsg kn’ alav.
For thrice ten thousand wait upon our earth Jove’s everlasting guards for mortal men,
Who
roam the world
in
;
robes of air concealed.
^
:
Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s doctrine op the dafioveg, or genii. 349 Milton must certainly have had in mind this passage from
Hesiod, and perhaps, also, 2 Kings,
vi.,
17
Millions of spiritual creatures walk the earth,
Unseen, both when
we
when we wake.
sleep and
In one of Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s strange myths,
which may be found
in
the fourth book of The
Laws, 713, C., the Aafioveg, or Genii, are represented as having been anciently (in the reign of Saturn) the political governors of mankind, ruling them as
man
rules the inferior animals.
to indicate
It
w as
intended, probably,
r
the Divine origin of law and government, in op-
position to the absurd paradox that they derive, not only their forms
and practical administration, but also their
in-
herent authority, solely from the consent of the governed. It is,
however, a paradox which
difficult to refute
it is
by
arguments capable of being appreciated by the mass of
mankind, and therefore Plato, as
is
usual with him in such
cases, does not surrender the truth, or leave
scheme
of legislation, but
cient myth.
The
the Greek.
On
account, however, of
its
mode
ideas, a version is given in full
â&#x20AC;&#x153;
:
dition of the blessed life of the
abundantly and spontaneously
it
related,
self-control
violence
how
of human
it
have received a
And
all things. :
tra-
how
of those days,
this
Saturn, knowing, as
human nature
that
,
in the absolute
,
and unrighteousness appointed as rulers and magis,
men, but beings of a Divine and no-
bler race, namely, the Genii.
wards the flocks and
we
had
intrinsic value, as
of presenting certain
affairs can never avoid being filled with
trates to our cities, not
stitute
We
men
said to have been the cause of
we have
out of his
length of the passage compels us to omit
exhibiting the origin and ancient
is
it
throws himself back upon an an-
all
we now in that we
Just as
tame herds,
conduct
do not con-
oxen as rulers over oxen, nor goats over
ourselves retain the dominion, the
Deity, because he
was a
lover of men.
goats, but
same thing
He
did the
appointed over
us a better race than ourselves, namely, the Aafioveg
G
G
to-
;
who,
—
;
350 plato’s doctrine of the
much
taking the oversight with
and
us,
and giving
dalpoveg, or genii. ease, both to themselves
us peace, and reverence, and true
to
freedom, and an abundant supply of right and justice, ren-
dered the families of
men most
all
This myth (he proceeds), when ac-
tumult and sedition.
commodated
blessed, and free from
to the truth (dXrjOsia xpcjpevog), or truly inter-
preted, really means, that in whatever states, not God, but
some mere
earthly power, has the ultimate sovereignty, there
there can be no escape from evils possible, to imitate that
time of Saturn
;
and
we
that
we
ought, as far as
which existed in the giving earnest heed to whatever
that,
principle of immortality tions,
mode
;
may
of
life
human
yet remain in
institu-
should, in public and private, administer both our
families and our states in accordance with
it
;
naming Law
(yoyov) the dispensation (Nov Aiavoprjv), or government of
Mind
The specimen
or Reason.”
hibited in this last sentence is poor
ment corresponds precisely as Nov£* avev dpegecog, or
of Plato’s philology ex-
enough
;
but the senti-
to Aristotle’s definition of
Mind
Law,
without passion.
We find the same mythical statement in the Politicus, 271, P. 272, A. to
which
It
there
may
also be connected with the doctrine
was an
allusion (page 231) as having
some
support in the Sacred Volume, namely, of guardian or super-
intending angels having the care of particular nations.
we have Evang.,
already said, this xi.,
regarded by Eusebius, Prcep
.
26, as maintained in the Septuagint version of
Deuteronomy, d)g
is
As
xxxii., 8
ore dcegspL^ev
f
O Tipiorog r/
eOvrj,
SieoneLpev vlovg ’A Sag, eorrjoev opia eQv&v Kara apiOpov
’ATrEAQN 0EOT
—“When
Most High divided the nations, when he dispersed the sons of Adam, he established the boundaries of the nations according to the number of the angels of God. But Jacob was the Lord’s portion Israel
was
the
the line of his inheritance.”
THE FOUR CARDINAL VIRTUES.
351
LXVIII. Beauty and Accuracy of the Ancient and Platonic Division Deep Moral Significance of of the Four Cardinal Virtues .
Four Greek Words AuoXaola ’A uparela^ 'VyupareLa, and 26)(f>poovvrj, as indicating the Four Moral Degrees. ’
the
,
Page I
uera
69, Line 4.
(ppovrjcrecjg
briety,
:
,
oco&l 6e dutaioovvrj
ical
oocbpoavvr]
“ Righteousness and temperance, or so-
There was something very
with wisdom, save us.”
admirable in the ancient classification of the virtues under the four cardinal heads, ducaioovvrj, oco(ppoovvrj avdpeta
and
oo(j)ia
—
,
righteousness
which we use
for
want of a
philosophical analysis of
Republic,
lib.
iv.,
them
term
and wisdom.
A
most
may
all
They may it
is
be found in the
and continued
P.,
be briefly defined thus
immediate reference
our fellow beings, although public, in a
(a
,
commencing 427,
through several pages. /Xiuaioavvrj has
better),
,
fortitude
temperance
,
to the duties
:
w e owe T
used by Plato, in the Re-
more extensive sense,
for the state of soul
from
whence all right actions proceed, and in the composition of which all the other virtues do more or less enter. 26)</>poovvT more properly, relates to duties we owe ourselves, or, ],
according
to Plato’s favourite allegorical
comparison of the
soul to a state, diuaioovvr] would have regard to relations, OGXftpoovvrj to its internal police.
strength of soul or will tivity
and
xliii., p.
practical
which gives
its
foreign
’A vdpela
is that
to all the virtues ac-
See remarks on avdpeia, Dissertation 2o0/a, when ranked among the virtues, is
efficacy.
257.
wisdom
,
as distinguished from the scientific or
speculative moral insight of the mere casuist.
Plato elsewhere frequently styles
grounded on
(frpovrjoig
It is
what
—a wisdom—
scientific calculations of utility
not
deduced from
antecedents and consequents, but rather an innate perception of right, the result of a
pure heart clearing the under-
THE FOUR MORAL DEGREES.
352 standing
In
being, in fact, a sense or taste rather than science ,
;
would be an innate discernment of God and the universe, and the same with
highest import,
its
our relations to
it
the Scripture ho(j)La.
Cicero has attempted the same distinctions of the four cardinal virtues, without the names, in his Offices,
He most
Sed omne, quod
clearly imitates Plato.
estum, id quatuor partium oritur ex aliqua. perspicientia veri sollertiaque versatur societate tuenda, tribuendoque
tractarum fide
suum
;
5.
est hon-
Aut'enim in
aut in
hominum
cuique, et rerum con-
aut in
;
omnium
quae fiunt, quaeque dicuntur,
ordine et modo, in quo inest modestia et temperantia. quatuor,
i.,
aut in animi excelsi atque invicti magni-
;
tudine et robore
lib.
quamquam
Quas
inter se colligata atque implicata sunt,
tamen ex singulis certa officiorum genera nascuntur.
The etymology
of this beautiful word ccdcppoavvrj
before us in this very passage from our text
212ZEI. (f)pov
;
It
060
clearly from
is
put
OGXppoovvr]
:
and
ooog, ou)ÂŁg),
,
is
(pprjv ,
and would, accordingly, signify the setting or healing
virtue of the soul soundness of the spirit or spiritual health , ,
in distinction
war which
is
from that dissipation corruption or internal ,
,
the result of the opposite.
The division into what are styled the four cardinal virtues may be regarded as made icara TTOiorrjra in respect ,
to quality.
There
term of Aristotle,
is
is
another arrangement, which, to use a
made Kara
irooorrpa, in respect to quan-
This expresses what may be styled
tity.
grees ascending, by
way
or total privation of
all virtue, to
,
the
moral de-
of climax, from the lowest stage,
perfect health of the soul.
the highest condition, or
They
are represented
by
four
Greek terms, namely, anoXaoca, duparda eyupareia and ,
,
co)(j)poovvr}.
The
words contains,
more
etymological analysis alone of these
in itself,
volumes of morality of a purer and
practical kind than is to be found in
treatise of
modern
casuistry.
The
first
many
a frigid
of two them, as
)
;
THE FOUR MORAL DEGREES. Aristotle tells us, Ethic.
domain of to
vice, the last
353
Nicomach ., vii., 1, belong to the two to that of virtue. According
another classification, the two extremes denote respect-
ively the perfection of moral excellence and of moral depravity, the complete separation* of all heterogeneous ele-
ments from both,
or, in
mixed
those quality
other words, the purely wicked and
;
while the two means would represent
states
wherein the one or the other moral
the purely virtuous
may have
a temporary superiority, yet neither can be
said to be triumphant
.
’A noXaaia ( from a, privative and uoXaotg, restraint would denote uncontrolled licentiousness the N ovg (to use ,
—
Plato’s anthropological division) in utter darkness, the -&vp,og in complete subjection to the emOvptia
;
or, in
other words,
the will not simply overpowered, but the consenting slave
Compare
of appetite and lust.
dpyoKparucbg
Plato’s description of the
man whose
avrjp, or the
soul is a perfect
democracy of ungoverned propensities, Republic 559, 560.
mode
Such a character
is
free
to sin
,
lib. viii.,
or, to
adopt a
of speech directly opposite, yet equally correct, he
so strenuously contend as
a will which
is its
own
is
which some the highest prerogative of man,
hound in the iron chain of that free willf tyrant, cursed
for
with
its
own
self-
determining power, and utterly unrestrained by any fear of
man, or any grace of God. ’
The
AKpareiais want of moral power.
and has some sense of
its
bondage.
It
soul
is
awaking,
feels the chain
which
* See Remarks on the two senses of the word dyioq, p. 322, 323, and note. t All the seeming paradoxes and contradictions connected with this expression arise
the subject 7jTe rfjg
is
from the different points of view from whence
contemplated.
were the
tjte rrj
servants of sin ye
being freed from
sin,
See Romans,
vi.,
20, ore yap dovlou
“ For when yo were free from righteousness, but now, and having become subject to God,” &c. GG2
dyapriag ehsvdepoi
dwaLoovvTp
k. t. X.
(
THE FOUR MORAL DEGREES.
354 the is
first
The
character mistakes for freedom.
overpowered, but unreconciled
struggling feebly against
rational will
to its degradation,
and
it.
’E yrcpdreia, temperance
,
or inward power
,
would denote
the rational will a conqueror, yet holding the sceptre over
a turbulent and rebellious foe ever seeking to regain the
supremacy, and requiring constant watchfulness and restraint.
Zoxfipoovvrj is the spiritual Hygeia,
not only superior, but triumphant
—
and
signifies the will
in perfect
harmony with
the reason, and presiding, with ever-unresisted sway, over appetites and propensities in cheerful submission to
and rational authority. the spirit healed
In
its
its
highest Platonic sense
— in harmony with
and only
itself,
true it is
falling
short of the Scriptural idea of harmony with Heaven.
Such
are the thoughts suggested
faint outline of
Nicomach ., all
by the very terms, a
which may be found
in
Aristotle, Ethic.
Almost,
if
not quite,
the words derived from (bprjv (0pov), such as
(frpovrjoig,
lib. vii., c. i., 5, 6, c. ix.
(ppovipog, go) j)p(ov, otocppoGvvT], (ppovio), although generally
rendered wise
,
wisdom prudent ia, &c., partake more of a ,
moral than of an intellectual quality, to
express a combination of both.
or, rather,
They
may be
refer to
said
what may
be styled practical wisdom in distinction from speculative ,
knowledge even of the science of morals.
dom formed of Socrates.
a peculiar
trait
both in the
life
This moral wisand philosophy
Xenophon has most admirably
said of him,
% 0 (pLav nal G(xKpp0Gvv7jV ov dicopL^sV) Memorabilia ,
iii.,
9
;
PECULIAR USE OF THE INDICATIVE MODE.
355
LXIX. Mode
Peculiar Use of the Indicative
in certain Cases
New
parison of Passages from the
Page
Line
70,
persuade by
We
flatteries.”
text, in this place, requires
justify us in thus
than what
— what
;
This
Testament,
as, for
yeyewTifiEvog horn of
God
Etc
probably the case, to
is
and there
is
by the context when
The usage
ployed.
disposition, tendency, or na-
thus seeming to occupy the
extent, in all languages,
culty in determining
is
,
ought to do, or would do, rather
it
place of the subjunctive.
some
and because other examples
sometimes taking the indicative mode sub-
actually does
it
— “ Would
thus render, because the con-
it,
jectively, as expressing desire
ture of a thing
Xoywv
ttelOovol 'dconEiatg
2.
Com-
.
Testament.
no great it is
thus em-
occurs a number of times in the
example, John,
1st Epist.,
iii.,
rov Qeov dpaprlav ov notEt
commitleth not sin
tendency, or disposition
that
is, it
— he would not
diffi-
9
New nag 6
:
— Whosoever
is not his nature,
A much
sin.
clearer
example, and one about which there can be no question, although very similar to the preceding,
mans,
ii.,
4
dv os dyEi thee to
what
:
ayvocov
—
not
Such
is its
goodness of God leadetli tendency or nature, that is,
most striking proof that the actual
—
It
Compare,
would have been
men
also,
Mark,
better for
him
them not
to
,
does not always
21
<5rc.
—
have known &c. ,
often furnish the
effect
xiv.,
icpEcrrov rjv avrolg pij EnsyvwKEvai better for
\ietclvoi -
that the
would do, although wicked
take place.
be found, Ro-
to xp^otov tov Qeov Elg
knowing
repentance.
it
on
may
It
;
:
uaXov
fjv
2 Peter,
avrd)
ii.,
21
:
would have been
356 ARITHMETICAL AND GEOMETRICAL EQUALITY.
LXX. Word
Use of the
UXsovegta. Aristotle's Distinction between
Arithmetical and Geometrical Equality
Page
71, Line 4. nXeove^cav.
This
.
a very general
is
term, and, although usually rendered covetousness wherever
occurs in the
it
New
may
Testament,
be applied
to
case in which one seeks to Lave more than others, be
any it
in
respect to wealth, worldly honours, or sensual enjoyment.
would place them
Plato, as well as the Scriptures,
the
be
same low its
and regard the passion, whatever may
scale,
immediate object, as in
harmony of the universe
the
all in
cases alike opposed to
all
that
;
is, to
the good of the
whole, the good of the parts, the good of the individual
who
exercises the feeling, besides being intrinsically, or irrespective of consequences, an evil, and a disease in the spirIt
it.
comprehends
bition , and,
when
all that is
included under our term
am -
directed to personal distinction, is pre-em-
inently â&#x20AC;&#x153; a lust of the
propensities
mindf in distinction from those bodily which some moralists would regard as the only
sources of sin. Plato here compares
one member
what belongs
to
it
to a plethora, or a
absorb into
to the
itself
whole body
more than
:
that arithmetical equality
being, be
it
angels,
We
law of equality
;
in
share of
rfjv TrXeove^tav ev
oapidvoLg ocoyaot vooiyia naXovyevov. generally, a violation of the
tendency its
may
yev
call
it,
not simply of
which would reduce
men, or the lower animals,
all
ranks of
to the
same
undistinguishing level, but of that geometrical equality without
which harmony could not
exist, or
a dead and monotonous unison. ity
to
A
would become only
violation of this equal-
would consist in the desire or tendency of any member grow out of its natural proportions. Those who have it
may
call
it
a lofty ambition
;
the Scriptures, however, and
FOLLY OF ATTEMPTING TO BRIBE HEAVEN. true philosophy, represent
it
as a
low and
selfish passion,
which, while
utterly blind to that infinitely nobler sentiment it
357
causes the soul to acquiesce, and even rejoice in ranks
and
scheme,
distinctions, as necessary parts of the Divine
yet enables after “ that
it
to lose sight of
them
all in its
aspirations
honour which cometh from God only.”
For the
between arithmetical and
distinction alluded to
geometrical equality, or laoTTjg (from which,
we can
hardly
help thinking, comes the Latin jus, justus, justitia), see ArEthic. Nicomacli.,
istotle,
lib. v.,
The Laws, 757, A., yao Iootvtolv ovaatv.
sixth book of cing, dvolv
c.
and
;
also, the
the passage
commen-
iii.
at
iv.
LXXI. Impiety and Folly of Attempting
Page vsp'q.
71,
Line
11
.
to
Bribe Heaven.
av avrolg rtiv aducryidruv
There cannot
rendered, of the fruit of their wrong doings.
be a baser conception than the world, and under
all
ance, since, in
its
it
;
religions,
weak enough and wicked enough they can disguise
God
this, that
by a share of the product of iniquity
and
could be bribed
yet, in all
ages of
men have been
to entertain
it
;
that
both is, if
under some delusive name and appear-
gross,
the most brutish soul.
naked form,
it
would
revolt even
Instead of making clean hands and
a clean breast by giving up the gains of iniquity, find
nq anomay be
’AducrjpaTGiv is an elliptical expression, and
men, even in Christian lands, endeavouring
we
often
to
make
atonement, and to purchase ease of conscience, by devoting a part of their ill-gotten wealth to religious uses. dignantly, in the fourth book of
The Laws,
How
in-
does Plato re-
pudiate the very thought that God, or even a good man, can receive
gifts
from the wicked
:
napa
tie
piapov dcopa ovr 1
avdo* ayaOov ovre Oeov earl ttote roye opOov dexeodai.
:
358
FOLLY OF ATTEMPTING TO BRIBE HEAVEN.
pdrrjv ovv nspl deovg 6
Compare
717, A.
dubitare qua
De
Cicero,
ab improbo se donare
Jovem
,
Legibus,
lib. ii.,
41
:
Donis
Deos Platonem audiant, qui vemente futurus Deus, quum nemo bonus
sit
Atque hoc
eoti novog rolg avooloic
ijoXvg
impii ne placare audeant tat
,
:
Also, Plautus,
velit.
Rudens
animum inducunt suum,
scelesti in
se placare posse donis, hostiis
;
Sed operam et sumptum perdunt, quia Nihil Ei acceptum est a perjuris supplicii.
To
refer to all the passages in the Scriptures
same sentiment
strongly expressed
is
would be
I
small portion of the Sacred Volume.
where the to quote
will not receive
bullock from thine house , nor goats from thy fold
wood are mine
beasts of the
Psalm
1.,
more absurd than value his fice.
to
own most
Isaiah
suppose
Old and
of the
It is
; for upon a thousand
Bring no more vain oblations
9.
an abomination unto me.
God both
,
the cattle
i.,
,
;
in
a
all the hills.
your incense
is
Nothing could be
13.
by such declarations, the Testament meant to under-
that,
New
solemnly. appointed institution of sacri-
most clear that he intended, rather,
by denouncing,
no
to
guard
it,
most indignant terms, that gross abuse
which would pervert the ritual avowal of the need of expiation, and the ritual acknowledgment of the Great Atonement through
its
type, into the miserable conception of a bribe to
the Almighty
And
â&#x20AC;&#x201D; an
yet this
is
offering of flesh
the only view
and fat as
to a
hungry Baal.
which some, who would be
styled theologians, can take of this institution, so ancient
regards the heathen nations,
and so universal, not only as
it
but even in respect to those
who were
expressly taught of
God.
The Plautus
sentiment which is
we have quoted
froaa Cicero
most admirably expressed by Shakspeare.
and
No-
thing can be finer than the contrast he presents between
Divine Justice and the imperfections of human courts. is also
It
rendered peculiarly striking by being put into the
mouth of the
guilty
King of Denmark
:
—
!
359
DIFFERENT SPECIES OF ATHEISTS.
me my foul murder since I am still possessed
Forgive
That cannot be
Of those
My
which
own
crown, mine
May one In
;
effects for
I
did the murder.
ambition, and
my
queen.
be pardoned, and retain the offence
the corrupted currents of this
world
Offence's gilded
hand may shove by justice
And
,
oft
’
tis
1
,
;
seen the wicked prize itself
Buys out the law. But tis not so above. There is no shuffling there the action lies In its true nature and we ourselves compelled, Even to the teeth and forehead of our faults, To give in evidence. Hamlet Act III. ’
;
;
,
LXXII. Morality
Different Species of Atheists.
of Atheist
nos
Founded on Principle. First Species styled 6'ucaioq by Plato and invested by him with too good a Character. ,
,
Second Species
,
the
Magician or Juggler.
The Atheist Hobbes.
often in Secret the Victim of Superstition.
The
Species of Atheist , a character peculiar to the
Ironical
Elymas
Ancient World.
the
Simon Magus.
Sorcerer .
Apollonius of Tyanea.
Page the
78, Line 4.
6
pev yap Aoyw,
and most harmless kind of
first
r. X.
tc.
atheist, the
This
is
one who,
although honest and just in his private relations, does not hesitate boldly to ligion with
its
ridicules those
may have
avow
his atheism in speaking against re-
same time, he Such a one Plato thinks
oaths and rites, while, at the
who
respect them.
a dislike for
77, line 7), that
is,
wrong doing (rw dvoxepaivEtv, page
a dislike founded on habit, prejudice,
or an early bias of the mind, remaining in spite of his
atheism
;
for the diaaiov rjOoq
he
is
there represented as
possessing could not be the result of anything like principle,
seeing he rejects the principium of
law
in
denying the existence of a Deity.
all
morals and
That such
all
indi*
360
DIFFERENT SPECIES OF ATHEISTS.
may
viduals
be found here and there in the midst of a so-
ciety holding to a different belief,
Their
ted.
virtue,
How
pressure.
however,
is
may, perhaps, be admit-
only the effect of outward
long anything like morality would remain
in a nation of atheists is a question of far
more
mag-
fearful
Although the experiment has never yet been fully
nitude.
tried, there
can be but
doubt as to what would be the
little
horrid result.
We
can hardly help thinking that Plato, in what
said
is
page 77, line 5, has given altogether too good a character to this man. Such persons may be found putting on a show
making
of morality, and
their lives a lie for the sake of
giving support to the falsehood of their creed, yet
exceedingly of
all
who
however,
difficult for
them
was probably
less
apparent in
many
Plato’s
a malignant
This, time.
trait in
the
character, which, although deep seated in the heart,
never made
its
appearance in the dusky twilight of the Notwithstanding the laboured
heathen systems of religion. chapters of Gibbon, he of the
still, it is
deep hatred
are righteous from religious principle.
Christianity has brought out
human
to disguise their
New
who
reads
Testament will have
human nature
in the light
little difficulty
in under-
standing why, Christianity kindled such a flame of persecu-
entrance into the world, or in realizing the truth of Christ’s declaration, that he “ came, not to send
tion
on
its first
peace upon the earth, but a sword.”
Page n. r. A.
He
78, Line 8. 6 6e
This
is
do%a&v
j
uev
evcpvrjg de,
has no ambition to be thought above vulgar prejudices.
His grand object his
drj
a very different character from the other.
is to
turn to the best account, in promoting
own interests, the prejudices and the superstitions of other
men.
Hence he
carefully conceals his atheism, while he
makes the most abominable abuse of the religious fears of mankind. Having none of that fear of the invisible which would deter ordinary men, he resolves upon playing a bold
361
DIFFERENT SPEOtES OF ATHEISTS.
game
in the
assumed character of
jurer, fortune-teller,
fanatic, magician, con-
oracle-monger (a character, as
common among the or whatever may best
we
learn
from Aristophanes, quite
Athenians),
Sophist, public lecturer,
suit his un-
holy purposes.
It is
on this account he
man of great
acriori ingenio prcedilus, a
nature well adapted to any
however, the character
styled evtyvrjg,' ,
scheme of impiety.
may
is
The absence
nected with superstition.
Sometimes, Gross as
not be all affected.
the apparent inconsistency, atheism
is
is
resources having a
often found con-
of the fear of
God
may sometimes give rise to most alarming fears of a devil. The religious instinct, to which atheism has done violence, but has not been wholly able to destroy, may yet live in the most painful terrors of a superstitious and darkened
The
imagination. its
soul of
supernatural world
It
man must
have, in
some way,
cannot long endure the desolating
void of atheism, and would even find relief in the most horrid imaginings of malevolent
superhuman powers.
must believe in something stronger and higher than
Hence,
if
a
God
is
denied, the moral
vacuum must be
It
itself.
filled
with some personification of Fate, Fortune, or Destiny, or
peopled with the Gorgons and Chimmras of a diseased and
See page 133, where we have shown that even on his own theory, has no security against
troubled fancy. the atheist,
an unknown world of horrible superhuman beings.
No man
ever furnished a stronger proof of the truth of
However seemingly
these positions than Hobbes.
may have been
in his writings,
we
are told on the best au-
thority* that during a large portion of his life
* Vide Bayle’s Dictionary, vol.
iii.,
bold he
471, N.
he was
in
Bayle loved some-
times to expose the skeptic as well as to sneer at the believer, and he says, most justly, that “ the principles of philosophy (meaning materialism) are not sufficient to rid a for, to
man
of the fear of apparitions
reason consequentially, there are no philosophers
less right to reject
magic and sorcery than the
H
H
atheists.’’
;
who have
: ;
362
DIFFERENT SPECIBS OF ATHEISTS.
constant terror of ghosts and hobgoblins, and that he could
never sleep without a light burning in his chamber
not
;
daring to trust himself to that darkness which presented so
own depraved and gloomy mind. Page 78, Line 15. to uev elpumtcov. The first impression would be that this refers to the first character, who is true a picture of his
•
j
described as ridiculing (tcarayeXtiv, line 6) and making a mock of sacred things. It is clear, however, that a more serious and develish kind of irony is intended.
the
It is
irony of the laughing and juggling fiend, secretly triumph-
ing in the ruin which he
is
weak and
accomplishing in
wicked human nature. The second character is undoubtedly meant 6 doXov Kcd evedpag tt Xrjprjg “ the man full
—
—
of guile and stratagem.
5
Nothing could more perfectly
'
correspond to some parts of Plato’s representation, than the
tioned, Acts,
xiii.,
Sorcerer, and
some of
similar, in T
7jXr]p7]g
£2
6,
whom
tt
10,
who
menunder the name of Elymas the
description of that magician and false prophet
is
Paul addresses in a style remarkably its
which
terms, to that
avrog dohov nai
tt darjg
is
here used
padiovpyiag vie Aca,
66Xov, exOpe Trdorjg duiatoovvrjg.
We
can hardly appreciate,
scription of this
at the present day, the de-
character, as given
by Paul and Plato
but there can be no doubt that heathenism furnished
many
an example, exhibiting a hideousness of depravity of
which
it
is
ter
est (if
now
difficult to
which combined,
form a conception. in their
It
we may
all
the devilism
use such a term) that existed in some of the rites of the
heathen religions.
drawn specimens of these reign of Satan entitled
a charac-
most revolting forms, the bold-
and most Heaven-daring atheism with
most horrid
was
The
may be
Most
faithfully
last productions of the expiring
found in two tracts of Lucian
History of Alexander, and the other,
Death of Peregrinus.
The
first
was a
mous Apollonius Tyanseus, who has
;
one
The
follower of the
fa-
often been blasphe*
THE NIGHTLY CONFERENCE, OR AREOPAGUS, OF PLATO. 36S mously compared by
infidels to our Saviour,
most remarkable degree,
self exhibited, in a
and who him-
this
abominable
combination of transcendental sophistry, mystic pantheism
Whether
or disguised atheism, and Satanic magic. last
was wholly pretended,
been
real,
it is
very
or to
what extent
now
to
difficult
it
this
may have
determine.
LXXIII. The Nightly Conference or Areopagus of Plato's Athenian Areopagus ,
,
The
State.
.
Page
wurepivov gvXhoyov
79, Line 7. oi rov
koivgj*
As far as we can recollect, no description of this body, styled The Nightly Conference, is given in any of the preceding books of this dialogue. The reader, howvovvreg.
ever, will find
its
composition and offices subsequently set
forth in the twelfth to
book of The Laws, 961,
A., B.
It
was
be formed by a careful selection from the body of the
magistrates, and of those
who had
travelled abroad for the
purpose of learning the morals and legislation of foreign lands, together with
who might our.
was
This to
some of the more choice young men
be thought worthy of so distinguishing an honcourt,
which he
styles the anchor of the state,
assemble very early, either
daybreak
;
at,
or just preceding,
a season which, besides presenting the most
leisure from other necessary
employments, was also most
favourable to clear thought, and calm, impartial deliberation.
In a subsequent part of the twelfth book (968, B.)
again spoken of under the same
mentioned,
we
title.
It is
think, in the Epinomis, or
members
mode
is
not expressly
Appendix
to the
Laws, and yet the whole of that obscure book seems intended to point out a peculiar
it
to
be
of education for the
of this conference, and a certain higher philoso-
phy, into which, as into sacred mysteries, they were to ba
364
COMMON LAW AGAINST PRIVATE
initiated before they could enter
Perhaps
trust.
upon
hoped
in this Plato
dreams of the Republic, namely,
RELIGIONS.
this
most responsible
to realize
one of the
that union of the characters
of the statesman and the philosopher, in the combination of
which he found the perfection of the political structure. This body was intended to uniter civil with religious and It was to be the high ecclesiastical spiritual functions.
The members were
court of equity and conscience.
not
only to perform the duties of judicial magistrates, but also of public censors.
They
had, besides, the
still
more
sa-
cred and spiritual office of counsellors and instructers to those
who were undergoing
nisterion but ,
curable
;
the discipline of the Sophro-
had not yet been sent
to the
prison of the in-
thus acting, in short, not only as judges, but also
as chaplains and ghostly advisers of the wretched criminals,
especially of such despisers of
God and blasphemers
Providence as the characters treated of in this book. addition to all this, they
were
of In
intrusted with the censorship
of the laws themselves. In this court or conference, Plato
seems
to
have had in
mind the Athenian Areopagus, which, in like manner, was the guardian of the laws and public morals. It was also of a religious nature, and was regarded with so much religious awe that, as iEschines informs us, it was not allowed for any one to laugh within its precincts. his
LXXIV. Common Law
against all Private Religions.
Examination
of Platoâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Doctrine in respect to Changes in the Public Worship and Religion of the State .
Page t. X.
81, Line 5. noivov
The law
dâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;
em
rovroig iraoi vopov,
k.
here set forth was intended not only for
the three kinds of offenders which have been mentioned#
— COMMON LAW AGAINST PRIVATE
365
RELIGIONS.
•
but for
the people of the state.
all
'prevention , intended to
was
It
that private superstition
which
rites
namely,
evil,
weak men and women
led
(yvvahtag nai rovg aoOevovvrag irdvrag) chapels and
be a law of
to
reach the origin of the
have private
to
of their own, while they neglected the
and
administrations of the public temples
This
altars.
seems, in Plato’s time, to have been carried to a great extent,
and
to
have produced, and been produced by, the very
class of atheists against
whom he
has been legislating
who
pecially those of the third division,
easily propitiated
men were
by peculiar
held that
and
rites
offerings.
also interpreters of dreams, expounders of omens,
became more extensive and more it
which
iniquitous in proportion
shunned the notice of the legal guardians of the public
religion.
To
prevent this
with
evil,
moralizing consequences, this law
common weal lepd prjde The same law is given by
the
gibus,
nemo
es-
God was These
and, in short, the priesthood of a private superstition,
as
;
lib. ii., 8,
habessit
its
was
irreligious
to
;
for
elg ev Idiaig ohiiaig eurpodco.
Cicero in his treatise
as cited from the twelve tables
Deos
and de-
be established
De Le-
Separatim
:
neve novos, sed ne advenas,
nisi pub-
Clemens Alexandrinus refers with approbation to this law of Plato,* although there can be no doubt that the similar statute in Rome was the
lice adscitos, privatim colunto.
proximate,
if
not the remote, exciting cause of the cruel per-
secution Christianity had to undergo as, at
first,
and, in a great measure, a private religion.
a foreign,
There was,
however, one most beautiful species of family religion,
which Plato not only allowed in his scheme of legislation, We but even encouraged by the warmest commendation. allude to the sacred domestic altar, which he would have dedicated to the paternal and
filial
affections,
and
to the
worship of the aged living parent or grandparent, as the * Stromata,
H
lib. v.,
h 2
584, D.
-
COMMON LAW AGAINST PRIVATE RELIGIONS.
366
•
See remarks on
best representation of the invisible God.
the passages referred
Page
Line
81,
I., pages 88, 89. deovg ov padiov iSpveoOai,
Dissertation
to,
15, iepa teal
peyaXrjg 6 e diavolag rivdg dpOCjg 6pav to tolovtov
no easy thing, or
no small matter,
is
it
may be
ovg
ligious rites
“
It is
to establish (or con-
Such a work requires no
secrate) chapels and Divinities.
The phrase
ordinary intelligence.”
—
ISpveoOai lepa
/cal
$£-
new reThe pri-
taken generally for the introduction of
and the adoration of new Divinities.
mary reference
is to
likewise, to
changes attempted in the public worship,
all
private innovation, but
has respect,
it
by private individuals or by magistrates. We may compare with this a passage from the fifth book of The Laws, 738, D. rcepl ftetiv re teal ieptiv drra re ev rrj 7toeither
:
Xei e/cdoroig ISpvoOai del, ovdelg emx^p'fioei tcivelv vovv exojv,
boa
etc
veg erzeioav
A eheptiv,
n aXaiol
voiag XexOeiorjg
rj
Awdcovrjg,
to
’
V
A/upcjvog,
Xoyoi, (paoparcjv yevopevcov,
tietiv
—“ In respect
things and places, &c., no one
tempt
reap
rj
to the
who has
rj
rj
n
emn-
Gods and sacred
reason should
at-
change or unsettle anything which has come from
Delphos, or Dodona, or
Ammon,
have recommended
us on the authority of supernatural
to
or
which ancient
traditions
appearances, or of a Divine afflatus or inspiration.” other place (Laws,
772, D.) he condemns
vi.,
tion in religion, or in
all
the magistrates
he means,
secondly, of
;
all
at least, a large majority)
oracles of the
Gods
:
iravra 6e rov 6r\pov
,
innova-
any of the fundamental laws of the
state, unless there shall be the threefold consent, all
In an-
;
of
which
and, thirdly, of
all
izdoag pev rag apxdg /cal
first,
the people (by
the
XPV %vp6ovXovg,
redoag tietiv pavrelag eneXOovrag
eav ovpcpoJVGjoi navreg, ovtgj
tcivelv ,
aXXug
*
6e prjdenoTe
prjdaptig.
When we tion
regard Plato as without any special revela-
from Heaven, or any Divine commission
the religion of his country,
we cannot
severely
to
change
condemn
his
COMMON LAW AGAINST PRIVATE
He may have wished
solicitude in this matter. all
367
RELIGIONS.
preserve
to
the forms of religion, and yet have been influenced by a
sincere and earnest desire to introduce a thorough reformation into its spirit.
He had
sand years, such as
is
now
not the experience of a thou-
spread before us in the history
of the Christian Church, to convince
We, however, with such
was impossible. tion in our hands,
rise to
that this thing
a special revela-
cannot approve the doctrine or the law
much we may
here laid down, however
which gave
him
it
respect the motive
The
in his peculiar circumstances.*
Oxford theologians would hail Plato as inculcating here their favourite
dogma
of authority and tradition.
Sewal, of that University, has made every language
to
Professor
effort to turn his
such a use, sometimes with a tolerable degree
of fairness, and sometimes
which he never dreamed
by giving
although
;
to Plato a
we do
sense of
not think that the
professor has ever referred to the passage before us.
Every
attempt, however, to bring to their aid the divine philoso-
pher of Greece must
him
to
that
tradition
when
fail
was
when
them,
it*
all the revelation
this tradition
became
is
remembered
that
he possessed, and
corrupted, he had no higher
we possess) by which he might correct Plow much he would have prized such a special written
standard (such as it.
revelation,
him any
and how joyfully he would have put away from
inferior guide,
may
be learned from his famous
declaration in the second Alcibiades patiently until
some one,
either a
:
eyes ” ii.,
— and rwv
150, D.
A
That
we must
wait
God, or some inspired
man, teach us our moral and religious in Plomer, did to
“
duties, and, as Pallas,
Diomed, remove the darkness from our
a%Xvv acfreXelv. Alcibiades inference may be drawn from that most
6(j)0aXfi(x)v rr\v
like
,
remarkable passage in the Republic, where he indulges the
* x.,
See a more extended discussion of 116, and Note 13, page 6.
this subject, Diss. v., p. 102,
— COMMON LAW AGAINST PRIVATE RELIGIONS.
368
hope that the true heavenly philosophy voiag aXrjdivrj a
(j)iXooo(j)ta ),
(etc
and a people
rtvog Jelag emir
in possession of
it
as
from above, either had existed in the immense past time, or might now exist in some obscure 'part of the Bargift
barian or Oriental land 7T0V OVTL T7]g
— ev nvt
pperepag
(3ap6apuc(p tottg)
(
EndxJjecog), or
period be revealed to the rest of the
Can we suppose
499, B.
might
human
at
some
race.
tt oppcj
future
Lib.
vi.,
he would have preferred had he known assuredly that
that
his
myths and his
just
such a people, with just such a Heaven -inspired philoso-
traditions,
phy, then existed in the mountains of the barbarian Judea,
and that that “
A
had been most solemnly declared, even then, Law should go forth from Zion and the Word of the it
,
Lord from Jerusalem.”*
Without fearing
at all for
our Protestantism,
deed admit, as Plato says, that to establish
new
it is
we may
a most important matter
religious rites, or to attempt a
religious doctrines or
in-
change
in
modes of worship which have long
when most erroneous, can seldom be suddenly and violently taken away without danger, to say the least, of tearing up something which may be vital to the soul. The sentiment of Plato may have some truth, prevailed, and which, even
even in reference
to times
and countries possessing a per-
manent revelation from God, and to which resort may be had in bringing men back from those deviations from it
human depravity. Admitsuch seasons when doctrine and worship and when private men under the general,
which are the natural ting that there are
must be reformed, if
ed
results of
not special, revelation to
engage in
this
say, with Plato, that telligence.
order
may
be regarded as lawfully
most responsible work, it
still
call-
may we
does, indeed, require no ordinary in-
Such occasions
call for souls of the highest
rrjg pLEytorpg dtavo'iag
* Isaiah,
— and no vulgar instrument, ii.,
3.
BELIEF IN GHOSTS, ETC., THE SAME IN ALL AGES. SOU no brawling, fanatical reformer should be regarded as
Heaven’s agent
men
in so
When
solemn an undertaking.
as Luther and Calvin arise,
it
is
such’
not easy to mistake
the evidences of their peculiar mission, or their fitness for the great
work
to
which they are
called,
LXXV. Belief in Apparitions, Ghosts, Spectres,
Spc.,
the
ev re (paopaocv eyprjyoporag did
<po-
same
Page
82,
Line
2.
nal ev oveipotg — “
6ovg
Dreams
,
Ages.
in all
Startled,
when awake, by
appari-
Nothing would present a
tions,
and in sleep by dreams.”
more
interesting subject of investigation than the nature
extent of the ancient belief in ghosts it
prevailed extensively, that
that
it
yond
it
was most deeply
had existed from the most remote
all
If ever there
doubt.
could be said that this is one.
it
was held
and
and apparitions. That
was a
rooted,
and
antiquity, is be-
doctrine of which
it
semper, ubique, et ab omnibus
There can be no greater mistake than
pose that this is a consequence of Christianity,
to sup-
and that
its
revelations of the spiritual world have quickened the imagination to impressions and terrors times. is
The
unknown
to the ancient
and supernatural appearances a hell, or in any existence after
belief in ghosts
as old as the belief in
them may be traced back to a period where It was the creed alike of fails us. Jew and Gentile, of the East and the West, of Greek, Chaldean, and Idumean. The account of Saul and the death, and
all
of
profane history wholly
Witch of Endor incidentally discloses the extent and depth of the common Jewish belief in the ghostly world, and that,
much more
would have been done by any Whatever may be thought of the silence of the Old Testament in other parts, the fact of a nu*
too,
strongly than
express declarations.
370 BELIEF
THE SAME
IN GHOSTS, ETC.,
IN
ALL AGES.
merous and well-known class of persons, whose profession it
was
maintain intercourse with the dead, whether such
to
was deceptive
intercourse
or not, does prove,
all
were no Sadducees, and
cavil, that the ancient Israelites that, if
beyond
they did not get their belief in a spiritual world from
Moses, they must have derived it from some cient source common to all mankind.
still
more an-
existed as a part of the patriarchal religion,
we
have direct evidence from the vision of Eliphaz, Job,
iv.,
That 13 in
:
A
it
spirit (a (pdoya) stood before
which the appearance of
The manner
my face.
this ghost is described, bears a
striking resemblance to all representations of the kind in
The
ancient or in modern times.
pearance under which the mind
(j)dGfia,
is
plate the departed yet restless soul
or
shadowy
always led
contem-
to
— the changing and
ting motion, so admirably expressed
ap-
by the Hebrew
flit-
rjblV’
the formless form, the silence, and the voice, present the
same marked
features that are to be found in almost
ghostly narrations. until
not spoken of as a
phenomenon
then unknown, but as something in the possibility of
which swer
It is
all
all
to
his hearers are supposed to believe.
say
it
was
How
a dream.
came
It is
no an-
the nightly world
of the imagination to be peopled with representations from
an unseen
a belief did not universally prevail
state, if
which brought such representations before the soul ? As an example far less sublime than this, but with many of the same points of resemblance, we may cite the apparition of the shade of Patroclus to Achilles, as described in the twenty-third
book of the
100
Iliad, v. ijjvxy ds
Kara x6°vd£, )vre Kanvog,
&X eT0 TETptyvla. TCKpcov
?
6’
X^pai re GVfnrTuiTaytjcrev, 7
£2 ttottoc,
ipvxy
We
rj /3
d
:
avopovcrev ’A^tAAevf,
ettoc 6’ dXofivdvov eeittev
*
rig Eotl ical elv ’Atdao doyoiGiv
teal eldto'Aov
may sometimes
•
ardp
typkvEC ovk evl rrdfmav.
find ancient accounts of this kind
BELIEF IN GHOSTS, ETC., THE SAME IN ALL AGES. 371 that
may compare
Ages.
Take,
with any of the narratives of the Middle
example, Plato’s myth
for
at the
His wild and
tenth book of the Republic.
end of the
fiery beings
[aypioi nai diaTrvpoi), that torment the wicked, one might
almost suppose had been copied from some saint’s legend.
When
Socrates
tells us, in the
Phaedon, of the ghosts that
— auoeidfj (pavraopara ecduXa, ano — impure departed we might
haunt the tombs and monuments ola TTdpexovTcu -oiavTCU 'ipvxal
XvOsloat
—
most fancy
the shades it
meeting
al-
some German ballad. The which so solemnly summoned Brutus
at Philippi presents
A
stance of the same kind.
another striking in-
more remarkable case
still
recorded by the younger Pliny ( Epistolce frightful spectre
ens.
The
which appeared
terialist as
we
,
lib. vii.,
in a certain
details are given with
sobriety, that
-
the language of
story of the apparition to his last
the
of
at pi] icaQaptig
such an
is
27), of a
house
Ath-
at
air of truth
and
cannot help thinking that the writer, ma-
he was, did really believe
seriously affected by the account.
it,
It is,
was
or, at least,
however, mainly
by reason of its presenting features so very much resembling some of those that are to be found in the ghost stories of modern times. The old, spacious, desertinteresting,
ed,
and suspected house
ly heard at a distance,
;
the clanking of chains,
first faint-
and becoming louder and louder as
the spectre approaches at the dread hour of midnight silent
and fixed position
pointing with the finger tread with
;
;
the waving of the hand
the motion to follow
;
;
;
the
the
the solemn
which the apparition leads the spectator through
the lonely passages of the building until in the courtyard,
and the
result,
it
finally disappears
which the reader of mod-
ern legends can almost anticipate, namely, the finding the
bones of a murdered man, as they are dug up in the very
as
—
where it had vanished all these are of such a nature to make us feel for a moment as though, instead of read
spot
ing Pliny and a story of the ancient Athens,
-
we had
actu-
;
372 BELIEF ally
IN GHOSTS, ETC.,
THE SAME
ALL AGES.
IN
been occupied with some of the wild creations of
Shakspeareâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s fancy in Hamlet or King Richard the Third. Whatever may be thought of its truth, it is of value as showing that the imagination, in all ages of the world, has been filled with the same images, and that there must be some deep ground of reality to which all such incidents, however deceptive in outward appearances, are to be referred.
How much fected
even the Epicurean age of Horace was
by these preternatural
terrors,
may
af-
be learned from
names he presents in two lines which he would describe a mind
the great variety of frightful
of one of his Epistles, in
raised above the superstitious imaginings of the multitude
although, from state to
some evidences he has
left us, it
which he himself could lay claim
was
;
not a
:
Caret mortis formidine et iral
Somnia, terrores magicos, miracula, sagas,
Nocturnos lemures, portentaque Thessala, Hor., Epist.y
rides'?
206.
lib. ii., 2,
synonymous with (pavraopa. The latter term is the one employed in the New Testament, Matthew, xiv., 20 Mark, vi., 49. In another passage, to express the same idea, the word rcvevpa is used as where Christ says, A spirit hath notjlesli and hones as ye Although he asserts that he himself appears see me have in his risen body, yet, at the same time, he seems clearly <&dopa, is nearly, if not quite,
;
,
.
to sanction the belief in the existence of ghosts or spirits,
and
to treat
it
as a
well-known
this passage, the doctrine of
think for a so strongly
very point.
fact.
We
cannot bear, in
accommodation.
Let any one
moment of those solemn circumstances which demanded the utmost sincerity and truth on this Would Christ have used such language to his
anxiously-inquiring disciples, after having himself just re-
turned from the world of
spirits, if their belief
had been a
mere popular delusion?
Would he thus have
trifled
with
BELIEF IN GHOSTS, ETC., THE SAME IN ALL AGES. 373 them, while their minds were intent upon the solemn realities
of the spiritual state, and occupied with those thoughts
which were suggested by If,
his
own
death and resurrection
?
under these circumstances, he spoke the language of
accommodation
to a false belief,
where we may expect the
we know
literal truth.
Ii
T
not
when and
INDEX OF PASSAGES QUOTED AND EXPLAINED FROM THE OTHER WRITINGS OF PLATO.
Page
367 Alcibiades II Cratylus 1, 101, 161, 162, 163, 175, 183, 199 261 Critias 76 Crito Epinomis 226, 227, 260, 271, 363 Epistles .198, 199, 238 .
.
Gorgias
.
.
42, 62, 77, 135, 139, 147, 240, 246, 290, 316, 322, 331, 332 7, 17, 22, 28,
Hippias Mai Ion
184
Laches
256
Laws
101
75, 88, 92, 100, 101, 107, 126, 134, 136, 140, 149,
219, 235, 246, 247, 306, 347, 349, 357, 358, 363, 365, 366
Meno
....
Parmenides Phaedon 17,
184,
309 246
107, 129, 147, 151, 165, 224, 261, 268, 282, 322, 324, 326, 331, 344, 371
Page
Phaedrus Philebns
151, 184, 195 47, 150, 184, 203 Politicos 214, 215, 216, 330, 350 Protagoras 66, 140, 259, 309 Republic 6, 42, 43, 51, 72, 102, 103, 140, 150, 184, 208, 290, 308, 309, 310, 315, 318, 319, 322, 327, 328, 329, 330, 338, 341, 351, 353, 368, 371 Sophista 158, 199, 285 Symposion . 101, 140 Theaetetus 22, 62, 98, 122, 138, 153, 154, 155, 157, 158, 160, 161, 163, 164, 183, 184, 199 Timaeus 35, 96, 102, 121, 122, 123, 144, 150, 171, 172, 173, 184, 211, 212, 217, 219, 220, 222, 223, 224, 228, 229, 230, 234, 235, 240, 277, 279, 300, 301, >
.
.
.
.
.
.... .
.
.
.
.
304, 305, 323, 347
INDEX OF CITATIONS FROM OTHER ANCIENT AUTHORS.
Page
TEschines
Page
364 Aristotle “ De Anim. :
iEsciiYLus “ Choeph 321 “ Prom. Vine. 68, 88, 128, 252 Apuleius 348
“ “
Aristophanes “ Acharn
“ “
:
•
“ “ “ “
Aves Nubes Thesm.
.
•
.
.
.
41, 101, 302, 41, 120, 186, .
.
126
3G6 124 187
’128
193, 194, 222
80 47, 128, 245
.
.
7
22, 41
Plutus
.
Ethic. Eud 241 Ethic. Nic. 47, 70, 91, 240, 241, 353, 354, 357 Metaph. 115, 154, 159, 160, 184, 190, 191, 192,
:
...
“
.
De Ccelo De Mundo De Gen. 119,
“
376
INDEX.
Aristotle “ 4
“
Pase
Meteorol
125
Homer 44
Physic. 134, 185, 186, 193, 221, 279, 280 Politic.
47, 265, 266, 349
.
Athenagoras
101
44
Pa<re
:
Iliad
15, 70, 72, 80, 139,
.
149, 158, 168, 208, 209, 342, 346, 370 Odyssey 147, 302, 303 .
Horace
.
:
44 Cicero Ars Poet 44 44 Acad. Post. 160, 200, 275 Epist 44 44 De Fato Odae 311,312 293, 44 De Fin 297 Iamblichus 44 De Leg. 95,111,272,358 Justin Mart 44 DeNat. Deor. 101,113,227, Lucian 157, 244, 245, 258 Lucretius 204, 207, 275, 293, 44 Offic 352 Nemesius “ Tusc. Disp. 114, 147, 194, Origen, Contra Celsum 326 Ovid Claudian' 244 Philo Clemens Alex. 248, 340, 343, 365 Pindar 89, 144, Cyril Alex. 275 Plautus, Rudens Diodorus Siculus 101, 317 Pliny, Epist Empedocles 77, 115, 159 Plutarch, Caes 44 Euripides De Fato 44 44 Helena 129 De Isid. et Osir. 182, :
.
.
....
.
.
.
.... ....
... .
.
.
:
....
“
Hippolytus
.
44
Medea
.
.
.
44
Orestes
44
Phcenissae
44
Rhesus
44
Supplices
44
.
.
Troades Fragments
13
Eusebius 44
16, 62, 242 129, 240 242
.
.... .... ....
.
44
90, 101
.
.
i,
101 129
217, 235 93, 128, 129, 137, 237, 332 .
.
.
157, 231,
272, 340, 3^3, 350 .65, 173, -231 .
:
44
Works and Days Theog
48, 83, 113, 348
.
180
Placit. Philos. .
.
.
.
.
7,
101
362 320 272 235 259 274 321
358 371 247 272 236 136 165
237
Sext. Empir.
24, 136, 156, 185
Sophocles 44 Ajax 44 Antigone
.
:
44 44
44
Evang.
De
Seneca
:
Prasp.
Herodotus Hesiod 44
44
Proclus, Com. Euc.
18S 372 294 223
44
(Ed. Col (Ed. Tyr Philoc.
266 .
.
...
.
80, 89
334 127 42, 260 64, 65 41, 77
.Trach
Thales Tim^eus, Lex Virgil, Georg
Xenophon
248 93
:
44
Agesil
44
Mem.
...
38, 153,
317 354
INDEX OF PASSAGES CITED FROM* TIIE OLD AND Page
Genesis. Pape i.,
1
212, 273 216, 283, 338 .
.
2 i., 3 1., 31 11., 4 i.,
.... .... .
.
.
273 222 273
,
Exodus. 180
....
xix., 2
.
.
248
.93
.
v.,
26 30
vi.,
2
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18
xxiii.,
92 92 92 323
^xxxii.,8, 231,343,,350
17
.
.
.
.
7.
6 iv., 13 xiv., 10 xxi., 7 xxi.,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
29
.
24
xxviii.,
.
.
xxxiv., 21
.
xxxviii., 7 xxxviii., 14
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
343 337 370 317 244 336 67 333 232 338
9
xiv.,
.
1
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
11
3
c.,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4
cxxxix.,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
358 243 336 70 89 273 321 262 126 212 346 333
Proverbs. xii., 1
.
.
.
.
xvi., 3 xvii., 6
.
.
.
27
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
70 336 89 73 70
Pago
Wisdom
5
...
.
13 3
6
ii.,
26
... ... 14
xlvii.,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
317 358 368 232 209 274
21
.
.
231
Hosea.
...
23
ii.,
.
269
Amos. ix.,
...
2
.
.
.
15
I
.
372 355
.
.
.
.
Luke. 9
xiii.,
.
42 xxii., 42 xix.,
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
139 139 139
John. 1
i.,
.
.
58
viii.,
.
.
179 181 180
.
...
13
iii.,
10 28 22
xiii., 6,
xxiii., 9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
362 181
260 139
Romans. i.,
21,
i.,
20
28
4
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
vi.,
17 17 20
... ... ...
ix.,
5
.
vi.,
28
viii.,
ix.,
5
22
.
334
ix.,
.
210
iii. ,
1
....
.
.
...
49
xiv., 21
Malachi. iii.,
.
.
262 336 372 293
Mark.
.
vi.,
Habakkuk. 13
.
26
xxv., 46
iv., .
.
xiv.,
ii-,
Daniel. x., 20,
.
.
39, 41
xvii.,
.
.
.
.
.
xiii.,
xvii.,
.
.
.
.
283
Matthew.
Acts.
Isaiah.
ii.,
of Solomon.
....
18
xi.,
Ecclesiastes
262 51
.
.
...
2 30
civ.,
“
.
.
...
xc., 2
i.,
Psalms. ii.,
70
.
xiv., 7
.
.
.
.
i.,
271, 348
...
.
.
.
xl.,
iv.,
.
.
2, 3, 10,
,
270
Job. i„ 6,
.
337 330
“ 22
xii.,
2 Kings. vi.,
.
“ 20
82
2 Samuel. xxiv., 16, 17
.
.
.
xxx., 2
...
25
9
xxi.,
Joshua. vii.,
1.,
lxxiii.
cxxi.,
Deuteronomy. iv.,
xlix., 11
“
Leviticus. xvi., 8
15 xxxix., 7 xvii.,
lxxviii., 61
...
14
111.,
NEW TESTAMENTS.
.
.
.
.
.
115 283 355 271 339 353
180, 181 .
... ...
.
.
.
287 180 139
Corinthians. 21,
22
.
.
287
2 Corinthians.
43
iv. ,
18
.
.
282, 303
378
INDEX Galatians.
16 8
iv., vi.,
2 Timothy.
.... ....
97 297
.... .... Philippians. 4 .... 15 12
vi.,
111.,
Page 1.,
13
1.,
7
iv.,
16 1
1.,
.
97 343
xi.,
26 3
xi.
6
344
xii. ,
ix.,
,
16
344
.
.
93 126, 302
.
.
.
.
339
.
9
iii.,
232 ... 336 281, 283 65
....
Pags
355
.
.
.
.
23
336
Revelations.
324 i.,
James. i.,
Jude. 6
....
14
.
.
.
.
64
8.
.
ii.,
10
.
ii.,
27
.
17 xi., 12 xii., 5 xix., 15 vii.,
2 Peter.
Timotiiv.
....
9
vi.,
...
.
.
Hebrews.
Thessalonians.
1
Epistle John.
1
Page
Ephesians. iv.,
/
i.,
4
iu 21
.... .... THE KKD.
.
61
355
.
... ... ... ... ... ... .
.
181
344 262 262 344 263 263
A.
/